summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
Diffstat
-rw-r--r--.gitattributes3
-rw-r--r--32492-8.txt9987
-rw-r--r--32492-8.zipbin0 -> 161231 bytes
-rw-r--r--32492-h.zipbin0 -> 2357592 bytes
-rw-r--r--32492-h/32492-h.htm11235
-rw-r--r--32492-h/images/i_001.jpgbin0 -> 91597 bytes
-rw-r--r--32492-h/images/i_002.jpgbin0 -> 137260 bytes
-rw-r--r--32492-h/images/i_003.jpgbin0 -> 78011 bytes
-rw-r--r--32492-h/images/i_004.jpgbin0 -> 91390 bytes
-rw-r--r--32492-h/images/i_005.jpgbin0 -> 76202 bytes
-rw-r--r--32492-h/images/i_006.jpgbin0 -> 84285 bytes
-rw-r--r--32492-h/images/i_007.jpgbin0 -> 72938 bytes
-rw-r--r--32492-h/images/i_008.jpgbin0 -> 50181 bytes
-rw-r--r--32492-h/images/i_009.jpgbin0 -> 70187 bytes
-rw-r--r--32492-h/images/i_010.jpgbin0 -> 62035 bytes
-rw-r--r--32492-h/images/i_011_a.jpgbin0 -> 44614 bytes
-rw-r--r--32492-h/images/i_011_b.jpgbin0 -> 44557 bytes
-rw-r--r--32492-h/images/i_012.jpgbin0 -> 109440 bytes
-rw-r--r--32492-h/images/i_013.jpgbin0 -> 101052 bytes
-rw-r--r--32492-h/images/i_014.jpgbin0 -> 53569 bytes
-rw-r--r--32492-h/images/i_015_a.jpgbin0 -> 90883 bytes
-rw-r--r--32492-h/images/i_015_b.jpgbin0 -> 81449 bytes
-rw-r--r--32492-h/images/i_016.jpgbin0 -> 157809 bytes
-rw-r--r--32492-h/images/i_017.jpgbin0 -> 114200 bytes
-rw-r--r--32492-h/images/i_018.jpgbin0 -> 91228 bytes
-rw-r--r--32492-h/images/i_019.jpgbin0 -> 104549 bytes
-rw-r--r--32492-h/images/i_020.jpgbin0 -> 31746 bytes
-rw-r--r--32492-h/images/i_021.jpgbin0 -> 56039 bytes
-rw-r--r--32492-h/images/i_022.jpgbin0 -> 81013 bytes
-rw-r--r--32492-h/images/i_023.jpgbin0 -> 36692 bytes
-rw-r--r--32492-h/images/i_024.jpgbin0 -> 61293 bytes
-rw-r--r--32492-h/images/i_025.jpgbin0 -> 92990 bytes
-rw-r--r--32492-h/images/i_026.jpgbin0 -> 74128 bytes
-rw-r--r--32492-h/images/i_164.pngbin0 -> 13747 bytes
-rw-r--r--32492.txt9987
-rw-r--r--32492.zipbin0 -> 161189 bytes
-rw-r--r--LICENSE.txt11
-rw-r--r--README.md2
38 files changed, 31225 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6833f05
--- /dev/null
+++ b/.gitattributes
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+* text=auto
+*.txt text
+*.md text
diff --git a/32492-8.txt b/32492-8.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..240047f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/32492-8.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,9987 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of Endless Amusement, by Unknown
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: Endless Amusement
+ A Collection of Nearly 400 Entertaining Experiments
+
+Author: Unknown
+
+Release Date: May 23, 2010 [EBook #32492]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK ENDLESS AMUSEMENT ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Chris Curnow and the Online Distributed
+Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This file was
+produced from images generously made available by The
+Internet Archive)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ ENDLESS AMUSEMENT:
+
+ A COLLECTION OF
+ NEARLY 400 ENTERTAINING EXPERIMENTS
+
+ IN VARIOUS BRANCHES OF SCIENCE;
+
+ INCLUDING
+
+ ACOUSTICS, ELECTRICITY, MAGNETISM,
+ ARITHMETIC, HYDRAULICS, MECHANICS,
+ CHEMISTRY, HYDROSTATICS, OPTICS;
+
+ WONDERS OF THE AIR-PUMP;
+
+ ALL THE
+ POPULAR TRICKS AND CHANGES OF THE CARDS,
+ &c., &c.
+
+ TO WHICH IS ADDED,
+ A COMPLETE SYSTEM OF PYROTECHNY;
+
+ OR,
+ THE ART OF MAKING FIRE-WORKS.
+
+ THE WHOLE SO CLEARLY EXPLAINED AS TO BE WITHIN THE
+ REACH OF THE MOST LIMITED CAPACITY.
+
+ With Illustrations.
+
+ FROM THE SEVENTH LONDON EDITION.
+
+ PHILADELPHIA:
+ LEA AND BLANCHARD.
+ 1847.
+
+
+
+
+CONTENTS.
+
+
+ Page
+ Aces, the convertible 117
+ Æolipiles 60
+ Aigrettes 185
+ Air-pump 77
+ bottles broken by 77
+ glass broken by 77
+ hand fixed by 77
+ water boiled by 78
+ bubbles, vegetable 78
+ electrified 98
+ Alarum 147
+ Alphabet, changes of, in square Yards 59
+ Apparition, armed 126
+ Atmosphere, to show the Pressure of 137
+ Aurora Borealis, electric 91
+
+ Bacchus, animated 81
+ Ball, electrified 97
+ electric 99
+ Balloon, artificial 81
+ electric 96
+ Cases in Fire-works 184
+ Balloons, Paper, to construct 42
+ in Fire-works, to load with Stars, Serpents, &c. 184
+ Balls, dancing 93
+ Barley, the Awn of, an Hydrometer 157
+ Bell, magic 79
+ Bladder, exploded 80
+ cemented 81
+ Blue, to change to White 35
+ Bodies, two inodorous, become pungent by Mixture 145
+ Body, combustible, to ignite by reflection 57
+ Bottle, magic 48
+ enchanted 59
+ Bronzing, the Art of 133
+ Bubble, exploding 13
+ Bubbles, aërial 78
+ Burning-glasses, account of two 32
+ Busts, talking 61
+ Butterflies, to take Impressions of on Paper 134
+
+ Cameleon Spirit 23
+ Camera Obscura, to construct 16
+ Camphor, electrified 100
+ Candle lighted by electricity 84
+ Bombs 84
+ Card, divining 107
+ numerical 108
+ hit upon by guess 109
+ found by the Point of a Sword 109
+ changed by Word of Command 109
+ in the Ring 112
+ in the Mirror 113
+ in the Opera-glass 113
+ discovered by the throw of a Die 115
+ under the Handkerchief 117
+ to tell that a person has touched 117
+ in the Pocket-book 118
+ in the Egg 118
+ discovered by the Touch or Smell 119
+ Cards, magnetic 71
+ Amusements with 101
+ Points on three, to name, &c. 101
+ to tell how many taken from a Pack 102
+ to name several fixed on 104
+ to name the Rank of, drawn from a Piquet Pack 104
+ to tell the Numbers of any two 105
+ three 106
+ four confederate 108
+ to separate the two Colours of a Pack of, at one Cut 114
+ metamorphosed 114
+ Number of, told by their Weight 116
+ to change, that several persons have drawn from the
+ Pack 116
+ inverted 119
+ transmutable 119
+ convertible 120
+ Cascade, magical 50
+ musical 148
+ of fire, to represent 151
+ Cement, never-yielding 37
+ Changes on twelve Bells 58
+ Charcoal for Fire-works 164
+ Chase, magic 88
+ Coins, to take impressions of 44
+ Compositions for Fire-works, method of mixing 168
+ Concerto, solar 62
+ Cork heavier than Lead 81
+ Correspondence, secret 18, 25
+ by music 20
+ Coruscations, artificial 136
+ Cotton electrified 92
+ Crackers, to make 169
+ Cylinder, illuminated 91
+
+ Dance, magic 86
+ Dancer, hydraulic 49
+ Detonating works 190
+ Girdle 190
+ Balls 191
+ Tape 191
+ Cards 191
+ Dial, magnetic 71
+ Dodecahedron in Fire-works 187
+ Duplicates, ten 102
+
+ Earthquake, artificial 22, 86, 187
+ Eclipse of the Sun, to observe 129
+ Egg, to form Figures on, in Relief 35
+ Eggs, white of, contains an Alkali 144
+ Electric effects of a Russian climate 30
+ Electricity, experiments in 83
+ Resin lighted by 95
+ Spirits ignited by 95
+ Eolian Harp, to make 137
+ Exhalations, subaqueous 137
+ Explosion, brilliant, under Water 54
+ Explosion, magical 86
+ electric 98
+
+ Feather, animated 83
+ Feathers heavier than Lead 79
+ Figures, two, one blows out, and the other re-lights a Candle 39
+ Fire produced by the mixture of two cold Liquids 13
+ from Cane 136
+ Fire-pumps in Fire-works 186
+ Fire-works in miniature 27
+ imitative 149
+ Art of making 163
+ aquatic 192
+ Flash of Lightning, to resemble on entering a Room 37
+ Flower, to produce the Appearance of, from its Ashes 149
+ Flowers, restored 26
+ to diversify the Colours of 141
+ Fountain, fiery 44
+ globular 48
+ illuminated 51
+ which acts by the Heat of the Sun 52
+ magic 80
+ electrical 87
+ Fountains, Chinese, in Fire-works 187
+ Fruit, withered, restored 78
+ Fulminating Powders 33
+ more powerful 34
+ Gold 40
+ Mercury 54
+
+ Gas Bubbles, exploding 160
+ Ghastly Appearance, to give to Persons in a Room 35
+ Glass, so to fill with Water that it cannot be removed without
+ spilling the whole 38
+ Gold Chain, old, to make look like new 43
+ to give Silver the Colour of 43
+ Guinea, penetrative 132
+ Gunpowder 165
+ exploded by reflection 125
+ Brimstone and Charcoal, to meal for Fire-works 165
+
+ Halo, artificial 80
+ Horn, to make Moulds of 134
+ to soften 134
+ Hour of the Day or Night told by a suspended Shilling 152
+ Hydrogen Gas, to procure 159
+ to fill a Bladder with 159
+
+ Illuminations, artificial 22
+ chemical 36
+ Illusion, alternate 146
+ Incendiary, unconscious 88
+ Indromacus 103
+ Ink, invisible 23
+ Gold, Silver, Yellow, Red, Green, Violet,
+ and Grey 24, 25
+ secret Correspondence by Means of 25
+ golden 41
+ white 42
+ Iron, transformed into Copper 36
+ Silver 36
+ melted in a Moment and run into Drops 37
+ or Steel, to soften 135
+ Ivory, to cast Figures in Imitation of 134
+
+ Kings, the four inseparable 116
+ Kite, electric 87
+
+ Lamp to burn twelve Months without replenishing 29
+ Chronometer 46
+ Landscape, artificial 66
+ to draw correctly 67
+ Lead, metallic, produced from the Powder 141
+ Leech, a Prognosticator of Weather 157
+ Leyden Phial 94
+ Light, rays of 143
+ refraction of 144
+ travelling of 145
+ Lightning, artificial 14
+ its wonderful Nature 144
+ to guard against 153
+ Liquor that shines in the Dark 40
+ luminous 41
+ Luminaries, miraculous 89
+
+ Magic Lantern, Experiment with the 62
+ Glasses to paint 63
+ solar 60
+ Magnetism, Experiments in 70
+ Memory, artificial 158
+ Microscope, Experiment for the 145
+ Mirror, Magician's 124
+ perspective 124
+ distorting 126
+ oracular 152
+ Mirrors, magical 53
+ deforming 123
+ igniting 125
+ Money augmented by optical Illusion 15
+ melted in a Walnut-shell 40
+ Mortars, in Fire-works 184
+
+ Neptune in his Chariot 198
+ Number, to tell any, privately fixed on 45
+ without asking questions 45
+ divisible by 9, &c. 55
+ Numbers, to find the difference of two, &c. 56
+
+ Objects, three, discernible only with both Eyes 15
+ Oil upon Water, and Water upon Oil, curious Effects of 161
+ and Water, Experiments with 161
+ Opaque Bodies, seemingly transparent 121
+ Box made transparent 130
+ Opera-glass, diagonal 129
+ Oracle, inanimate 61
+ Orrery, magnetic 72
+ electrical 92, 99
+
+ Palace, enchanted 120
+ Parties, three magical 110
+ Paradox, dioptrical 127
+ Pass, how to make the 107
+ Perspective-glass, divining 111
+ Phantom 126
+ Phial of the four Elements 48
+ Philosophical Candle 37
+ Phosphorus Match Bottles 34
+ inflammable 53
+ Phosphorus, illuminated 97
+ Picture, magic 13
+ Pictures of Birds, to make, with their natural Feathers 132
+ Pieces, transposable 131
+ Plants, remarkable Properties in 138
+ Plaster of Paris cast, to take from a Person's Face 135
+ Pomatum, to make, with Wax and Water 36
+ Portrait, miraculous 85
+ Powder, which catches Fire when exposed to the Air 39
+ Prints, to remove Stains from 38
+ Prospect, boundless 57
+ Prospects, illuminated 68
+ Pyrotechny, a complete system of 163
+
+ Rain and Hail, artificial 28
+ Gauge, to make 142
+ Rainbow, artificial 60
+ Reflector, magnifying 16
+ Ring, to suspend by a Thread after the Thread has been burnt 35
+ on the Finger, to name, &c. 49
+ Roman Candles, in Fire-works 186
+ Rocket Stars 173
+ to fix one on the Top of another 174
+ Rockets 170
+ Method of rolling 170
+ Composition for 171
+ to drive 171
+ Decorations for 172
+ Caduceous 175
+ Honorary 175
+ which form an arch in rising 176
+ to make several rise together 176
+ to fix several on the same Stick 177
+ to fire without Sticks 178
+ Scrolls for 179
+ Stands for 179
+ Table 179
+ Water 192
+ Rose, changeable 41
+ Resin lighted by Electricity 95
+
+ Salt, exploding 127
+ Saltpetre for Fire-works 164
+ Saltpetre, to pulverize for Fire-works 164
+ Sealing-wax spun into Threads by Electricity 100
+ Sea-fight, &c. in Aquatic Fire-works 196
+ Serpents, for Fire-works, to make 169
+ Shillings, a Person having an even number of in one Hand, and
+ an odd Number in the other, to tell in which Hand the
+ odd or even Number is 17
+ Shock, inconceivable 88
+ Shower, mercurial 80
+ fiery 90
+ Silver-plate, to give a Lustre to 44
+ extracted from a gilded Ring 135
+ Sky-rockets 170
+ to fire under Water 198
+ Sound, travelling of 141, 142
+ Sparks, electric 93
+ in choked Cases 167
+ Sparrows, Experiments with 82
+ Spectre on the Table 64
+ Spider, artificial 84
+ Spirit, Cameleon 23
+ Spots in the Sun's Disk, to show 128
+ Spur-fire 166
+ Square Yards, to contain the Changes of the Alphabet 59
+ Squares, Magic 55
+ Squibs, to make 169
+ Stars, with Points, in Fire-works 188
+ Steam, Power of 31
+ Steel or Iron, to soften 135
+ Stone, floating 78
+ Storm at Sea, to represent by the Magic Lantern 63
+ Sulphur for Fire-works 163
+ Sun, fixed, with a transparent Face 189
+ Sun's Rays, Effects of, on different coloured Cloths 146
+ Swans and Ducks in Aquatic Fire-works 199
+
+ Tantalus, Cup of 85
+ Thunder, artificial 14, 15
+ Touch-paper, to make 167
+ Transcolorations, curious 29, 30
+ Transmutations, magical 35
+ Travelling of Sound 141, 142
+ Light 145
+ Tree, Silver 27
+ Tree, Lead 27
+ Iron 55
+ sublimated 139
+ Tube, Magic 123
+ Tulip, Experiment with 140
+
+ Vacuum, illuminated 90
+ Vase, Magic 110
+ Vessel, Magic 21
+ that lets Water out of the Bottom as soon as the
+ Mouth is uncorked 39
+ Verse, Magic 74
+ Viper, Experiment with 82
+ Visual Nerves, singular Impression on, by a luminous Object 160
+ by looking through
+ differently-coloured Glasses 161
+ Volcano, artificial 22
+
+ Wand, magnetic 70
+ mercurial 79
+ Watch Dial, to tell by one the Hour when a Person intends
+ to rise 17
+ mysterious 70
+ Lamp 140
+ Water gilding on Silver 43
+ which gives Silver a Gold Colour 43
+ to give any Metal a Gold Colour 43, 44
+ Sun 50
+ illuminated 96
+ colder than Ice 127
+ Experiment with a Glass of 135
+ beautifully transparent 142
+ Power of 143
+ in Steam 158
+ Pressure of 143
+ Mass of, contained in the Sea 145
+ Rockets 192
+ Wheels, horizontal 193
+ Pipes in Fire-works 193
+ Mines 194
+ Fire Globes 194
+ Balloons, odoriferous 195
+ Fire Fountains 200
+ Weather, to foretel 140
+ Table 162
+ Wheels, self-moving 79, 94
+ in Fire-works 180
+ single vertical 180
+ horizontal 181
+ plural 182
+ spiral 182
+ Balloon 183
+ double spiral 183
+ illuminated spiral 183
+ Winter, changed to Spring 26
+ Writing, mysterious 26
+ illuminated 28
+ burnt, restored 129
+ in the Dark, to make luminous 139
+ on Glass by the Rays of the Sun 148
+
+
+
+
+ENDLESS
+AMUSEMENT.
+
+
+_To produce Fire by the Mixture of two cold Liquids._
+
+Take half a pound of pure dry nitrate, in powder; put it into a retort
+that is quite dry; add an equal quantity of highly rectified oil of
+vitriol, and, distilling the mixture in a moderate sand heat, it will
+produce a liquor like a yellowish fume; this, when caught in a dry
+receiver, is _Glauber's Spirits of Nitre_; probably the preparation,
+under that name, may be obtained of the chemists, which will of course
+save much time and trouble.
+
+You then put a drachm of distilled oil of cloves, turpentine, or
+carraways, in a glass vessel; and if you add an equal quantity, or
+rather more, of the above spirit, though both are in themselves
+perfectly cold, yet, on mixing them together, a great flame will arise
+and destroy them both, leaving only a little resinous matter at the
+bottom.
+
+
+_The Exploding Bubble._
+
+If you take up a small quantity of melted glass with a tube, (the bowl
+of a common tobacco-pipe will do,) and let a drop fall into a vessel
+of water, it will chill and condense with a fine spiral tail, which
+being broken, the whole substance will burst with a loud explosion,
+without injury either to the party that holds it, or him that breaks
+it; but if the _thick_ end be struck, even with a hammer, it will not
+break.
+
+
+_The Magic Picture._
+
+Take two level pieces of glass, (plate glass is the best,) about three
+inches long and four wide, exactly of the same size; lay one on the
+other, and leave a space between them by pasting a piece of card, or
+two or three small pieces of thick paper, at each corner.
+
+Join these glasses together at the edges by a composition of lime
+slaked by exposure to the air, and white of an egg. Cover all the
+edges of these glasses with parchment or bladder, except at one end,
+which is to be left open to admit the following composition.
+
+Dissolve, by a slow fire, six ounces of hogs'-lard, with half an ounce
+of white wax; to which you may add an ounce of clear linseed oil.
+
+This must be poured in a liquid state, and before a fire, between the
+glasses, by the space left in the sides, and which you are then to
+close up. Wipe the glasses clean, and hold them before the fire, to
+see that the composition will not run out at any part.
+
+Then fasten with gum a picture or print, painted on very thin paper,
+with its face to one of the glasses, and, if you like, you may fix the
+whole in a frame.
+
+While the mixture between the glasses is cold, the picture will be
+quite concealed, but become transparent when held to the fire; and, as
+the composition cools, it will gradually disappear.
+
+
+_Artificial Lightning._
+
+Provide a tin tube that is larger at one end than it is at the other,
+and in which there are several holes. Fill this tube with powdered
+resin; and when it is shook over the flame of a torch, the reflection
+will produce the exact appearance of lightning.
+
+
+_Artificial Thunder._
+
+Mix two drachms of the filings of iron, with one ounce of concentrated
+spirit of vitriol, in a strong bottle that holds about a quarter of a
+pint; stop it close, and in a few minutes shake the bottle; then
+taking out the cork, put a lighted candle near its mouth, which should
+be a little inclined, and you will soon observe an inflammation arise
+from the bottle, attended with a loud explosion.
+
+To guard against the danger of the bottle bursting, the best way would
+be to bury it in the ground, and apply the light to the mouth by means
+of a taper fastened to the end of a long stick.
+
+
+_Another way._
+
+Mix three ounces of saltpetre, two ounces of salt of tartar, and two
+ounces of sulphur; roll the mixture up into a ball, of which take a
+quantity, about the size of a hazel-nut, and, placing it in a ladle or
+shovel over the fire, the explosion will resemble a loud clap of
+thunder.
+
+You will produce a much more violent commotion if you double or treble
+the quantity of the last experiment; suppose you put two or three
+ounces of the mixture into the shovel. For fear of accidents, it
+should not be done in the house, but by placing the shovel over a
+chafing-dish of very hot coals, in the open air, standing a great
+distance off.
+
+Common prudence will dictate the necessity of using great care in the
+above experiments, as an accident will soon happen if a person does
+not get out of the way before the composition explodes.
+
+
+_Money augmented by an Optical Illusion._
+
+In a large drinking-glass of a conical shape, (small at the bottom and
+wide at the top,) put a shilling, and let the glass be half full of
+water; then place a plate on the top of it, and turn it quickly over,
+that the water may not escape. You will see on the plate a piece of
+coin of the size of half-a-crown; and a little higher up another the
+size of a shilling.
+
+It will add to the amusement this experiment affords, by giving the
+glass to any one in company, (but who, of course, has not witnessed
+your operations,) and, desiring him to throw away the water, but save
+the pieces, he will not be a little surprised at finding only one.
+
+
+_Three objects discernible only with both Eyes._
+
+If you fix three pieces of paper against the wall of a room at equal
+distances, at the height of your eye, placing yourself directly before
+them, at a few yards' distance, and close your right eye, and look at
+them with your left, you will see only two of them, suppose the first
+and second; alter the position of your eye, and you will see the first
+and third: alter your position a second time, you will see the second
+and third, but never the whole three together; by which it appears,
+that a person who has only one eye can never see three objects placed
+in this position, nor all the parts of one object of the same extent,
+without altering his situation.
+
+
+_To construct the Camera Obscura._
+
+Make a circular hole in the shutter of a window, from whence there is
+a prospect of some distance; in this hole place a magnifying glass,
+either double or single, whose focus is at the distance of five or six
+feet; no light must enter the room but through this glass. At a
+distance from it, equal to its focus, place a very white pasteboard,
+(what is called a Bristol board, if you can procure one large enough,
+will answer extremely well;) this board must be two feet and a half
+long, and eighteen or twenty inches high, with a black border round
+it: bend the length of it inward to the form of part of a circle,
+whose diameter is equal to double the focal distance of the glass. Fix
+it on a frame of the same figure, and put it on a moveable foot, that
+it may be easily placed at that distance from the glass, where the
+objects appear to the greatest perfection. When it is thus placed, all
+the objects in front of the window will be painted on the paper in an
+inverted position, with the greatest regularity, and in the most
+natural colours. If you place a swing looking-glass outside the
+window, by turning it more or less, you will have on the paper all the
+objects on each side the window.
+
+If, instead of placing the looking-glass outside the window, you place
+it in the room above the hole, (which must then be made near the top
+of the shutter,) you may have the representation on a paper placed
+horizontally on a table, and draw at your leisure all the objects
+reflected.
+
+Observe, the best situation is directly north; and the best time of
+the day is noon.
+
+
+_The Magnifying Reflector._
+
+Let the rays of light that pass through the magnifying glass in the
+shutter be thrown on a large concave mirror, properly fixed in a
+frame. Then take a third strip of glass, and stick any small object on
+it; hold it in the intervening rays at a little more than the focal
+distance from the mirror, and you will see on the opposite wall,
+amidst the reflected rays, the image of that object, very large, and
+beautifully clear and bright.
+
+
+_To tell by a Watch Dial the Hour when a Person intends to rise._
+
+The person is told to set the hand of his watch at any hour he
+pleases, which hour he tells you; and you add in your mind 12 to it.
+You then desire him to count privately the number of that addition on
+the dial, commencing at the next hour to that at which he intends to
+rise, and including the hour at which he has placed the hand, which
+will give the answer: for example.
+
+A intends to rise at 6, (this he conceals to himself;) he places the
+hand at 8, which he tells B, who, in his own mind, adds 12 to 8, which
+makes twenty. B then tells A to count twenty on the dial, beginning at
+the next hour to that at which he proposes to rise, which will be 5,
+and counting backwards, reckoning each hour as one, and including in
+his addition the number of the hour the hand is placed at, the
+addition will end at 6, which is the hour proposed; thus,
+
+ The hour the hand is placed at is 8
+ The next hour to that which A intends to rise at is 5, which
+ counts for 1
+ Count back the hours from 5, and reckon them at 1 each, there
+ will be 11 hours, viz., 4, 3, 2, 1, 12, 11, 10, 9, 8, 7, 6 11
+ ----
+ Making 20
+
+
+_A person having an even Number of Shillings in one Hand, and an odd
+Number in the other, to tell in which hand the odd or even Number is._
+
+You desire the person to multiply the number in his right hand by an
+odd figure, and the number in his left by an even one; and tell you if
+the products, added together, be odd or even. If even, the even number
+is in the right hand; if odd, the even number is in the left. For
+instance,
+
+ I. Number in the right In the left hand _odd_ 7
+ hand is _even_ 18 Multiply by 2
+ Multiply by 3 ----
+ ---- Product 14
+ Product 54 ----
+ Add the Product of
+ the left hand 14
+ ----
+ Which produces a
+ total of 68
+
+
+ II. Number in the right In the left hand _even_ 18
+ hand is _odd_ 7 Multiply by 2
+ Multiply by 3 ----
+ ---- Product 36
+ Product 21
+ Add the Product of
+ the left hand 36
+ ----
+ Which produces a
+ total of 57
+
+
+_Secret Correspondence._
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 1.]
+
+To carry on a correspondence without the possibility of the meaning of
+the letter being detected, in case it should be opened by any other
+person, has employed the ingenuity of many. No method will be found
+more effectual for this purpose, or more easy, than the following.
+
+Provide a piece of square card or pasteboard, and draw a circle on it,
+which circle is to be divided into 27 equal parts, in each of which
+parts must be written _one_ of the capital letters of the alphabet,
+and the &, as in the figure. Let the centre of this circle be blank.
+Then draw another circle, also divided into 27 equal parts, in each of
+which write one of the small letters of the alphabet, and the &. This
+circle must be cut round, and made exactly to fit the blank space in
+the centre of the large circle, and must run round a pivot or pin. The
+person with whom you correspond must have a similar dial, and at the
+beginning of your letter you must put the capital letter, and at the
+end the small letter, which answer to each other when you have fixed
+your dial.
+
+Suppose what you wish to communicate is as follows:
+
+ _I am so watched I cannot see you as I promised; but I will
+ meet you to-morrow in the park, with the letters, &c._
+
+You begin with the letter _T_, and end with the letter _m_, which
+shows how you have fixed the dial, and how your correspondent must fix
+his, that he may decipher your letter.
+
+Then, for _I am_, you write _b uf_, and so of the rest, as follows.
+
+ _T b uf lh pumrvayx b rvugghm lyy rhn ul b ikhfblyx vnm b
+ pbee fyym rhn mh-fhkkhp bg may iukd pbma may eymmykl, tw.
+ m._
+
+
+_Another Way._
+
+Take two pieces of card, pasteboard, or stiff paper, through which
+you cut long squares at different distances. One of these you keep
+yourself, and the other you give to your correspondent. You lay the
+pasteboard on a paper, and, in the spaces cut out, write what you
+would have understood by him only; then fill the intermediate spaces
+with any words that will connect the whole together, and make a
+different sense. When he receives it, he lays his pasteboard over
+the whole, and those words which are between crotchets [ ] form the
+intelligence you wish to communicate. For example: suppose you want
+to express these word,
+
+ "_Don't trust Robert: I have found him a villain._"
+
+"[Don't] fail to send my books. I [trust] they will be ready when
+[Robert] calls on you. [I have] heard that you have [found] your dog.
+I call [him a villain] who stole him." You may place a pasteboard of
+this kind three other ways--the bottom at top--the top at bottom, or
+by turning it over; but in this case you must previously apprize your
+correspondent, or he may not be able to decipher your meaning.
+
+
+_Secret Correspondence by Music._
+
+Form a circle like Fig. 2, divided into twenty-six parts, with a
+letter of the alphabet written in each. The interior of the circle is
+moveable, like that in Fig. 1, and the circumference is to be ruled
+like music-paper. Place in each division a note different in figure or
+position.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 2.]
+
+[Illustration: Music Piece]
+
+Within the musical lines place the three keys, and on the outer circle
+the figures to denote time. Then get a ruled paper, and place one of
+the keys (suppose _ge-re-sol_) against the time 2-4ths, at the
+beginning of the paper, which will inform your correspondent how to
+place his circle. You then copy the notes that answer to the letters
+of the words you intend to write, in the manner expressed above.
+
+
+_The Magic Vessel._
+
+On the bottom of a vessel, lay three pieces of money, the first at A,
+the second at B, and the third at C, Fig. 3. Then place a person at D,
+where he can see no farther into the vessel than E. You tell him, that
+by pouring water in the vessel you will make him see three different
+pieces of money; and bid him observe, that you do not convey any money
+in with the water. But be careful that you pour the water in very
+gently, or the pieces will move out of their places, and thereby
+destroy the experiment.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 3.]
+
+When the water rises up to F, the piece at A will be visible; when it
+reaches G, both A and B will be visible; and when it comes up to H,
+all three pieces will be visible.
+
+
+_Artificial Earthquake and Volcano._
+
+Grind an equal quantity of fresh iron filings with pure sulphur, till
+the whole be reduced to a fine powder. Be careful not to let any wet
+come near it. Then bury about thirty pounds of it a foot deep in the
+earth, and in about six or eight hours the ground will heave and
+swell, and shortly after send forth smoke and flames like a burning
+mountain. If the earth is raised in a conical shape, it will be no bad
+miniature resemblance of one of the burning mountains.
+
+
+_Artificial Illuminations._
+
+A very pleasing exhibition may be made with very little trouble or
+expense, in the following manner: Provide a box, which you fit up with
+architectural designs cut out on pasteboard; prick small holes in
+those parts of the building where you wish the illuminations to
+appear, observing, that in proportion to the perspective, the holes
+are to be made smaller; and on the near objects the holes are to be
+made larger. Behind these designs thus perforated, you fix a lamp or
+candle, but in such a manner that the reflection of the light shall
+only shine through the holes; then placing a light of just sufficient
+brilliance to show the design of the buildings before it, and making a
+hole for the sight at the front end of the box, you will have a very
+tolerable representation of illuminated buildings.
+
+The best way of throwing the light in front, is to place an oiled
+paper before it, which will cast a mellow gleam over the scenery, and
+not diminish the effect of the illumination. This can be very easily
+planned, both not to obstruct the sight, nor be seen to disadvantage.
+The lights behind the picture should be very strong; and if a
+magnifying glass were placed in the sight hole, it would tend greatly
+to increase the effect. The box must be covered in, leaving an
+aperture for the smoke of the lights to pass through.
+
+The above exhibition can only be shown at candle-light; but there is
+another way, by fixing small pieces of gold on the building, instead
+of drilling the holes; which gives something like the appearance of
+illumination, but by no means equal to the foregoing experiment.
+
+N.B. It would be an improvement, if paper of various colours, rendered
+transparent by oil, were placed between the lights behind and the
+aperture in the buildings, as they would then resemble lamps of
+different colours.
+
+
+_The Cameleon Spirit._
+
+Put into a decanter volatile spirit, in which you have dissolved
+copper filings, and it will produce a fine blue. If the bottle be
+stopped, the colour will disappear; but when unstopped, it will
+return. This experiment may be often repeated.
+
+
+_Invisible Ink._
+
+Put litharge of lead into very strong vinegar, and let it stand
+twenty-four hours. Strain it off, and let it remain till quite
+settled; then put the liquor in a bottle.
+
+You next dissolve orpiment in quick lime water, by setting the water
+in the sun for two or three days, turning it five or six times a-day.
+Keep the bottle containing this liquor well corked, as the vapour is
+highly pernicious if received into the mouth.
+
+Write what you wish with a pen dipped in the first liquor; and, to
+make it visible, expose it to the vapour of the second liquor. If you
+wish them to disappear again, draw a sponge or pencil, dipped in aqua
+fortis, or spirit of nitre, over the paper; and if you wish them to
+re-appear, let the paper be quite dry, and then pass the solution of
+orpiment over it.
+
+
+_Another._
+
+Dissolve bismuth in nitrous acid. When the writing with this fluid is
+exposed to the vapour of liver of sulphur, it will become quite black.
+
+
+_Another._
+
+Dissolve green vitriol and a little nitrous acid in common water.
+Write your characters with a new pen.
+
+Next infuse small Aleppo galls, slightly bruised in water. In two or
+three days, pour the liquor off.
+
+By drawing a pencil dipped in this second solution over the characters
+written with the first, they will appear a beautiful black.
+
+
+_Invisible Gold Ink._
+
+Put as much gold in as small a quantity of aqua regia as will dissolve
+it, and dilute it with two or three times the quantity of distilled
+water.
+
+Next dissolve, in a separate vessel, fine pewter in aqua regia, and
+when it is well impregnated, add an equal quantity of distilled water.
+
+Write your characters with the first solution: let it dry in the
+shade. To make them visible, draw a pencil or sponge, dipped in the
+second solution, over the paper, and the characters will appear of a
+purple colour.
+
+
+_Invisible Silver Ink._
+
+Dissolve fine silver in aqua fortis; and after the dissolution, add
+some distilled water in the same manner as in the gold ink.
+
+What is written with the above ink will remain invisible for three or
+four months, if kept from the air; but may be easily read in an hour,
+if exposed to the fire, air, or sun.
+
+
+_Invisible Yellow Ink._
+
+Steep marigold flowers seven or eight days in clear distilled vinegar.
+Press the flowers and strain the liquor, which is to be kept in a
+bottle well corked. If you would have it still more clear, add, when
+you use it, some pure water.
+
+To make the characters visible, which you write with this ink, pass a
+sponge over the paper, dipped in the following solution:
+
+Take a quantity of flowers of pansy, or the common violet, bruise them
+in a mortar with water, strain the liquor in a cloth, and keep it in a
+bottle.
+
+
+_Invisible Red Ink._
+
+To the pure spirit of vitriol or nitre, add eight times as much water.
+
+Use the above solution of violets to make visible the characters
+written with this ink.
+
+
+_Invisible Green Ink._
+
+Dissolve salt of tartar, clean and dry, in a sufficient quantity of
+river water. Use the violet solution to render it visible.
+
+
+_Another Invisible Green Ink._
+
+Dissolve zaffre, in powder, in aqua regia, for twenty-four hours. Pour
+the liquor off, and the same quantity of common water, and keep it in
+a bottle well corked.
+
+This ink will not be visible till exposed to the fire or the sun; and
+will again be invisible when it becomes cold.
+
+
+_Invisible Violet Ink._
+
+Express the juice of lemons, and keep it in a bottle well corked. Use
+the violet infusion to make the writing visible.
+
+
+_Invisible Grey Ink._
+
+Mix alum with lemon-juice. The letters written with this ink will be
+invisible till dipped in water.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+We now present our readers with a variety of amusing experiments,
+which may be performed by the foregoing inks; and they will, probably,
+suggest others equally amusing and useful.
+
+
+_A Secret Correspondence by means of Invisible Ink._
+
+A person wishing to carry on a correspondence with another, and who is
+fearful of having his letter opened, or intercepted, can adopt the
+following plan:
+
+Write any unimportant matter with common ink, and let the lines be
+very wide apart: then between these lines write the communication you
+wish to make, with any of the above invisible inks you can most
+readily procure.
+
+Your correspondent is to be previously apprized of the method of
+making the characters visible: and writing in common ink will serve to
+lull the suspicions of those who might intercept the letter, and who,
+not finding any thing important in it, will either forward or keep it.
+In either case there can be no danger, as the writing will not be
+visible without the proper application.
+
+
+_The Mysterious Writing._
+
+Write on a piece of paper with common ink any question; then
+underneath it write the answer either in invisible silver ink, or the
+invisible green ink, made with zaffre and aqua regia, described in
+pages 24 and 25.
+
+You give this paper to your friend, and tell him to place it against
+the wall, or on his dressing-table, keeping the door locked, that he
+may be sure no person has entered his room: he will next day find the
+answer written on it.
+
+
+_The Restored Flowers._
+
+Make a bouquet of artificial flowers; the leaves should be formed of
+parchment. Dip the roses in the red invisible ink, the jonquilles in
+the yellow, the pinks in the violet, and the leaves in the green ink.
+They will all appear white; and you show them to the company,
+observing, that you will restore them to their natural colours, and
+desiring any person to fix any private mark on them he pleases, that
+he may be sure there is no deception. You then, unperceived by the
+company, dip them in the revivifying liquor, used to make the yellow
+ink visible, described in page 24, and, drawing them gently out, that
+the liquor may drop, and the flowers have time to acquire their
+colours, you present them to the company, who will see, with surprise,
+that they each appear in their natural colours.
+
+
+_Winter changed to Spring._
+
+Take a print that represents winter, and colour those parts which
+should appear green, with the second green invisible ink, described in
+page 25; observing, of course, the usual rules of perspective, by
+making the near parts deeper in colour than the others. The other
+objects must be painted in their natural colours. Then put the print
+into a frame with a glass, and cover the back with a paper that is
+pasted only at its extremities.
+
+When this print is exposed to a moderate fire, or the warm sun, the
+foliage, which appeared covered with snow, will change to a pleasing
+green; and if a yellow tint be thrown on the lighter parts before the
+invisible ink is drawn over it, this green will be of different
+shades. When it is exposed to the cold, it will again resume its first
+appearance of winter.
+
+
+_The Silver Tree._
+
+Dissolve an ounce of fine silver in three ounces of strong aqua
+fortis, in a glass bottle. When the silver is dissolved; pour the aqua
+fortis into another glass vessel, (a decanter will be best,) with
+seven or eight ounces of mercury, to which add a quart of common
+water; to the whole add your dissolved silver, and let it remain
+untouched.
+
+In a few days the mercury will appear covered with a number of little
+branches of a silver colour. This appearance will increase for a month
+or two, and will remain after the mercury is entirely dissolved.
+
+
+_The Lead Tree._
+
+A more modern invention, and an easier method by far than the above,
+is the following:
+
+To a piece of zinc fasten a wire, crooked in the form of the worm of a
+still; let the other end of the worm be thrust through a cork. You
+then pour spring water into a phial or decanter, to which you add a
+small quantity of sugar of lead; thrust the zinc into the bottle, and
+with the cork at the end of the wire fasten it up. In a few days the
+tree will begin to grow, and produce a most beautiful effect.
+
+
+_To produce beautiful Fire-works in Miniature._
+
+Put half a drachm of solid phosphorus into a large pint Florence
+flask; holding it slanting, that the phosphorus may not break the
+glass. Pour upon it a gill and a half of water, and place the whole
+over a tea-kettle lamp, or any common tin lamp, filled with spirit of
+wine. Light the wick, which should be almost half an inch from the
+flask; and as soon as the water is heated, streams of fire will issue
+from the water by starts, resembling sky-rockets; some particles will
+adhere to the sides of the glass representing stars; and will
+frequently display brilliant rays. These appearances will continue at
+times till the water begins to simmer, when immediately a curious
+aurora borealis begins, and gradually ascends, till it collects to a
+pointed flame; when it has continued half a minute, blow out the flame
+of the lamp, and the point that was formed will rush down, forming
+beautiful illuminated clouds of fire, rolling over each other for some
+time, which disappearing, a splendid hemisphere of stars presents
+itself: after waiting a minute or two, light the lamp again, and
+nearly the same phenomenon will be displayed as from the beginning.
+Let the repetition of lighting and blowing out the lamp be made for
+three or four times at least, that the stars may be increased. After
+the third or fourth time of blowing out the lamp, in a few minutes
+after the internal surface of the flask is dry, many of the stars will
+shoot with great splendour, from side to side, and some of them will
+fire off with brilliant rays; these appearances will continue several
+minutes. What remains in the flask will serve for the same experiment
+several times, and without adding any more water. Care should be
+taken, after the operation is over, to lay the flask and water in a
+cool, secure place.
+
+
+_Artificial Rain and Hail._
+
+Make a hollow cylinder of wood; let it be very thin at the sides,
+about eight or ten inches wide, and two or three feet diameter. Divide
+its inside into five equal parts, by boards of five or six inches
+wide, and let there be between them and the wooden circle, a space of
+about one-sixth of an inch. You are to place these boards obliquely.
+In this cylinder put four or five pounds of shot that will easily pass
+through the opening. When turned upside down, the noise of the shot
+going through the various partitions will resemble rain; and if you
+put large shot, it will produce the sound of hail.
+
+
+_Illuminated Writing._
+
+It is well known that if any words are written on a wall with solid
+phosphorus, the writing will appear as if on fire; but it is
+necessary to give this caution, lest accidents should occur. In using
+it, let a cup of water be always near you; and do not keep it more
+than a minute and a half in your hand, for fear the warmth of your
+hand should set it on fire. When you have written a few words with it,
+put the phosphorus into the cup of water, and let it stay a little to
+cool; then take it out, and write with it again.
+
+
+_A Lamp that will burn Twelve Months without replenishing._
+
+Take a stick of phosphorus, and put it into a large dry phial, not
+corked, and it will afford a light sufficient to discern any object in
+a room when held near it. The phials should be kept in a cool place,
+where there is no great current of air, and it will continue its
+luminous appearance for more than twelve months.
+
+
+_Curious Transcolorations._
+
+Put half a table-spoonful of syrup of violets and three
+table-spoonfuls of water into a glass; stir them well together with a
+stick, and put half the mixture into another glass. If you add a few
+drops of acid of vitriol into one of the glasses and stir it, it will
+be changed into a crimson; put a few drops of fixed alkali dissolved
+into the other glass, and when you stir it, it will change to green.
+If you drop slowly into the green liquor, from the side of the glass,
+a few drops of acid of vitriol, you will perceive crimson at the
+bottom, purple in the middle, and green at the top; and by adding a
+little fixed alkali dissolved, to the other glass, the same colours
+will appear in different order.
+
+
+_Another._
+
+If you put a tea-spoonful of a liquor composed of copper infused in
+acid of vitriol, into a glass, and add two or three table-spoonfuls of
+water to it, there will be no sensible colour produced; but if you add
+a little volatile alkali to it, and stir it, you will perceive a very
+beautiful blue colour. Add a little acid of vitriol, the colour will
+instantly disappear upon stirring it; and by adding a little fixed
+alkali dissolved, it will return again.
+
+
+_Another._
+
+Put half a tea-spoonful of a liquor composed of iron infused in acid
+of vitriol, into half a glass of water; and add a few drops of
+phlogisticated alkali, and a beautiful Prussian blue will appear.
+
+
+_Curious Account of the Electric Effects of a Russian Climate._
+
+Mr. Æpinus in a letter to Dr. Guthrie, relates the following
+phenomena, which took place in Russia, when a severe frost had
+continued for several weeks.
+
+Mr. Æpinus was sent for to the palace to see an uncommon phenomenon.
+On going into the apartment of Prince Orloff, he found him at his
+toilet, and that every time his valet drew the comb through his hair,
+a strong crackling noise was heard; and on darkening the room, sparks
+were seen following the comb in great abundance, while the prince
+himself was so completely electrified, that strong sparks could be
+drawn from his hands and face; nay, he was even electrified when he
+was only powdered with a puff.
+
+A few days after, he was witness to a more striking effect of the
+electric state of a Russian atmosphere. The Grand Duke of Russia sent
+for him one evening in the twilight, and told him, that having briskly
+drawn a flannel cover off a green damask chair in his bed-chamber, he
+was astonished at the appearance of a strong bright flame that
+followed; but considering it as an electrical appearance, he had tried
+to produce a similar illumination on different pieces of furniture,
+and could then show him a beautiful and surprising experiment. His
+highness threw himself on his bed, which was covered with a damask
+quilt, laced with gold; and, rubbing it with his hands in all
+directions, the young prince, who had then reached his twelfth year,
+appeared swimming in fire, as at every stroke flames arose all around
+him, darted to the gold-laced border, ran along it, and up to that of
+the bed, and even to the very top.
+
+While he was showing this experiment, Prince Orloff came into the
+room, with a sable muff in his hand, and showed us, that by only
+whirling it five or six times round his head in the air, he could
+electrify himself so strongly, as to send out sparks from all the
+uncovered parts of his body.
+
+
+_Astonishing Power of Steam._
+
+If you put a small quantity of water into a tea-kettle, and place it
+on the fire, it will disappear in a short time, having escaped in the
+steam. But if its escape be prevented by stopping up the spout and
+crevices, it will force its way by bursting the vessel in which it was
+confined.
+
+If the steam of boiling water be at liberty, the water never attains
+more than a certain degree of heat; but if confined in a close vessel,
+the additional fire not escaping, the power of the steam is increased,
+it re-acts upon the water, and raises the heat so much higher, that it
+would keep lead in a melting state; and so penetrating, that it would
+soften the marrow-bone of an ox, in a few minutes.
+
+There is an instrument contrived for the foregoing purposes, called
+Papin's Digester, from the name of its inventor, and from its
+digestive powers on substances exposed to its action. It is a very
+strong vessel, made of copper, fitted with a thick close cover, and
+fastened down by several strong screws, so as to render it steam-tight
+in great degrees of heat. To render it safe, while being used, there
+is a valve on the cover, to let out the steam, when it is too violent;
+this valve is kept down by a steel-yard, with a weight moveable upon
+it, to regulate the degrees of the steam within.
+
+The following account of an accident with one of these instruments,
+will give some idea of the great force of steam.
+
+Mr. Papin (the inventor) having fixed all things right, and included
+about a pint of water, with two ounces of marrow-bone, he placed the
+vessel horizontally between the bars of the grate, about half-way into
+the fire. In three minutes he found it raised to a great heat, and
+perceiving the heat in a very short time become more raging, stepped
+to a side-table for an iron to take the digester out of the fire,
+when it suddenly burst with the explosion of a musket. It was heard at
+a considerable distance, and actually shook the house. The bottom of
+the vessel that was in the fire gave way; the blast of the expanded
+water blew all the coals out of the fire into the room, the remainder
+of the vessel flew across the room, and, hitting the leaf of an oak
+table, an inch thick, broke it all in pieces, and rebounded half the
+length of the room back again. He could not perceive the least sign of
+water, though he looked carefully for it; the fire was quite
+extinguished, and every coal black in an instant.
+
+The following accident was attended with more fatal consequences.
+
+A steam-engine was repairing at Chelsea, and, as the workmen were
+endeavouring to discover the defect, the boiler suddenly exploded, and
+a cloud of steam rushing out at the fracture, struck one of the men
+who was near it, like a blast of lightning, and killed him in a
+moment; when his companions endeavoured to take off his clothes, the
+flesh came off with them from the bones.
+
+
+_Account of the Wonderful Effects of two immense Burning-Glasses._
+
+Mr. de Tschirnhausen constructed a burning-glass, between three and
+four feet in diameter, and whose focus was rendered more powerful by a
+second one. This glass melted tiles, slates, pumice-stone, &c., in a
+moment; pitch, and all resins, were melted even under water; the ashes
+of vegetables, wood, and other matters, were converted into glass;
+indeed, it either melted, calcined, or dissipated into smoke, every
+thing applied to its focus.
+
+Mr. Parker, of Fleet-street, made a burning-glass, three feet in
+diameter; it was formed of flint glass, and when on its frame, exposed
+a surface of 2 feet 8-1/2 inches to the solar rays. It had a small
+glass fitted to it, to converge the rays, and heighten the effect. The
+experiments made by it were more powerful and accurate than those
+performed by any other glass. The following is a brief epitome of its
+astonishing power.
+
+ --------------------------------------+-------+-------+
+ Substances melted, with their weight; |Weight | Time |
+ and the Time in Seconds, which | in | in |
+ they took in melting. |Grains.|Seconds|
+ --------------------------------------+-------+-------+
+ Pure gold | 20 | 4 |
+ ---- silver | 20 | 3 |
+ ---- copper | 33 | 20 |
+ ---- platina | 10 | 3 |
+ Nickel | 16 | 3 |
+ A cube of bar-iron | 10 | 12 |
+ --------- cast-iron | 10 | 3 |
+ --------- steel | 10 | 12 |
+ Scoria of wrought-iron | 12 | 2 |
+ Kearsh | 10 | 3 |
+ Cauk, or terra ponderosa | 10 | 7 |
+ A topaz, or chrysolite | 3 | 45 |
+ An oriental emerald | 2 | 25 |
+ Crystal pebble | 7 | 6 |
+ White agate | 10 | 30 |
+ Oriental flint | 10 | 30 |
+ Rough cornelian | 10 | 75 |
+ Jasper | 10 | 25 |
+ Onyx | 10 | 20 |
+ Garnet | 10 | 17 |
+ White rhomboidal spar | 10 | 60 |
+ Zeolites | 10 | 23 |
+ Rotten-stone | 10 | 80 |
+ Common slate | 10 | 2 |
+ Asbestos | 10 | 10 |
+ Common lime-stone | 10 | 55 |
+ Pumice-stone | 10 | 24 |
+ Lava | 10 | 7 |
+ Volcanic clay | 10 | 60 |
+ Cornish moor-stone | 10 | 60 |
+ --------------------------------------+-------+-------+
+
+
+_Fulminating Powder._
+
+This powder is made by rubbing together, in a hot marble mortar, with
+a wooden pestle, three parts, by weight, of nitre, two of mild
+vegetable alkali, and one of flowers of sulphur, till the whole is
+accurately mixed. If a drachm of this powder be exposed to a gentle
+heat, in an iron ladle, till it melts, it will explode with a noise as
+loud as the report of a cannon.
+
+
+_A more powerful fulminating Powder._
+
+The most wonderful instance of chemical detonation is formed by the
+combination of volatile alkali with silver. Gunpowder, or fulminating
+gold, are not to be compared with this invention, and the great danger
+attending its manufacture prevents us from giving a methodical account
+of its preparation to our readers, particularly as it can be
+purchased, properly prepared, of the chemists.
+
+The slightest agitation or friction is sufficient to cause its
+explosion. When it is once obtained, it can no longer be touched with
+safety. The falling of a few atoms of it, from a small height,
+produces an explosion; a drop of water falling on it has the same
+effect. No attempt, therefore, can be made to enclose it in a bottle,
+but it must be let alone in the capsule, wherein, by evaporation, it
+obtains this terrible property. To make this experiment with safety,
+no greater quantity than a grain of silver should be used; the last
+process of drying should be made in a metallic vessel, and the face of
+the operator defended by a mask with strong glass eyes.
+
+
+_To make the Phosphorus Match Bottles._
+
+Nothing more is necessary for this purpose, than to drop small pieces
+of dry phosphorus into a common phial; gently heat it till it melts;
+and then turn the bottle round, that it may adhere to the sides. The
+phial should be closely corked; and when used, a common brimstone
+match is to be introduced, and rubbed against the sides of the phial:
+this inflames the match when it is brought out of the bottle. Though
+there is no danger in phosphorus, till friction, or fire, is applied,
+yet persons cannot be too cautious in the use of it, as instances have
+been known of one of these bottles catching fire in the pocket, and
+very much endangering the person who carried it; likewise, if
+carelessly used, small particles are apt to get under the nails, or on
+the hand; and if, by accident, they are held to the fire, or rubbed
+together, a flame will presently kindle.
+
+
+_To make a Ring suspend by a Thread, after the Thread has been
+burned._
+
+Soak a piece of thread in urine, or common salt and water. Tie it to a
+ring, not larger than a wedding-ring. When you apply the flame of a
+candle to it, it will burn to ashes, but yet sustain the ring.
+
+
+_To form Figures in relief on an Egg._
+
+Design on the shell any figure or ornament you please, with melted
+tallow, or any other fat oily substance; then immerse the egg into
+very strong vinegar, and let it remain till the acid has corroded that
+part of the shell which is not covered with the greasy matter: those
+parts will then appear in relief, exactly as you have drawn them.
+
+
+_To give a ghastly Appearance to Persons in a Room._
+
+Dissolve salt in an infusion of saffron and spirits of wine. Dip some
+tow in this solution, and, having set fire to it, extinguish all other
+lights in the room.
+
+
+_To change Blue to White._
+
+Dissolve copper filings in a phial of volatile alkali; when the phial
+is unstopped, the liquor will be blue; when stopped, it will be white.
+
+
+_Magical Transmutations._
+
+Infuse a few shavings of logwood in common water, and when the liquor
+is sufficiently red, pour it into a bottle. Then take three
+drinking-glasses, and rinse one of them with strong vinegar; throw
+into the second a small quantity of pounded alum, which will not be
+observed if the glass has been recently washed, and leave the third
+without any preparation. If the red liquor in the bottle be poured
+into the first glass, it will appear of a straw colour; if into the
+second, it will pass gradually from bluish-grey to black, when stirred
+with a key, or any piece of iron, which has been previously dipped in
+strong vinegar. In the third glass, the red liquor will assume a
+violet tint.
+
+
+_To make Pomatum with Water and Wax._
+
+Water and wax are two substances that do not naturally unite together;
+therefore, to those who witness the following process, without knowing
+the cause, it will have the appearance of marvellous. Put into a new
+glazed earthen pot, six ounces of river water and two ounces of white
+wax, in which, you must previously conceal a strong dose of salt of
+tartar. If the whole be then exposed to a considerable degree of heat,
+it will assume the consistence of pomatum, and may be used as such.
+
+
+_Iron transformed into Copper._
+
+Dissolve blue vitriol in water, till the water is well impregnated
+with it; and immerse into the solution small plates of iron, or coarse
+iron filings. These will be attacked and dissolved by the acid of the
+vitriol, while the copper naturally contained in the vitriol will be
+sunk and deposited in the place of the iron dissolved. If the piece of
+iron be too large for dissolving, it will be so completely covered
+with particles of copper, as to resemble that metal itself.
+
+
+_Iron transformed into Silver._
+
+Dissolve mercury in marine acid, and dip a piece of iron into it, or
+rub the solution over the iron, and it will assume a silver
+appearance.
+
+It is scarcely necessary to say, that these transmutations are only
+apparent, though to the credulous it would seem that they were
+actually transformed.
+
+
+_Chemical Illuminations._
+
+Put into a middling-sized bottle, with a short wide neck, three ounces
+of oil or spirit of vitriol, with twelve ounces of common water, and
+throw into it, at different times, an ounce or two of iron filings. A
+violent commotion will then take place, and white vapours will arise
+from the mixture. If a taper be held to the mouth of the bottle, these
+vapours will inflame and produce a violent explosion, which may be
+repeated as long as the vapours continue.
+
+
+_The Philosophical Candle._
+
+Provide a bladder, into the orifice of which is inserted a metal tube,
+some inches in length, that can be adapted to the neck of a bottle,
+containing the same mixture as in the last experiment. Having suffered
+the atmospheric air to be expelled from the bottle, by the elastic
+vapour produced by the solution, apply the orifice of the bladder to
+the mouth of the bottle, after carefully squeezing the common air out
+of it, (which you must not fail to do, or the bladder will violently
+explode.) The bladder will thus become filled with the inflammable
+air, which, when forced out against the flame of a candle, by pressing
+the sides of the bladder, will form a beautiful green flame.
+
+
+_To make the appearance of a Flash of Lightning, when any one enters a
+Room with a lighted Candle._
+
+Dissolve camphor in spirit of wine, and deposit the vessel containing
+the solution in a very close room, where the spirit of wine must be
+made to evaporate by strong and speedy boiling. If any one then enters
+the room with a lighted candle, the air will inflame, while the
+combustion will be so sudden, and of so short a duration, as to
+occasion no danger.
+
+
+_To melt Iron in a Moment and make it run into Drops._
+
+Bring a bar of iron to a white heat, and then apply to it a roll of
+sulphur. The iron will immediately melt and run into drops.
+
+This experiment should be performed over a basin of water, in which
+the drops that fall down will be quenched. These drops will be found
+reduced into a sort of cast-iron.
+
+
+_Never-yielding Cement._
+
+Calcine oyster-shells, pound them, sift them through a silk sieve, and
+grind them on porphyry till they are reduced to the finest powder.
+Then take the whites of several eggs, according to the quantity of the
+powder; and having mixed them with the powder, form the whole into a
+kind of paste. With this paste join the pieces of china, or glass, and
+press them together for seven or eight minutes. This cement will stand
+both heat and water, and will never give way, even if the article
+should, by accident, fall to the ground.
+
+
+_To remove Stains and Blemishes from Prints._
+
+Paste a piece of paper to a very smooth clear table, that the boiling
+water used in the operation may not require a colour which might
+lessen its success. Spread out the print you wish to clean upon the
+table, and sprinkle it with boiling water; taking care to moisten it
+throughout by very carefully applying a very fine sponge. After you
+have repeated this process five or six times, you will observe the
+stains or spots extend themselves; but this is only a proof that the
+dirt begins to be dissolved.
+
+After this preparation, lay the print smoothly and carefully into a
+copper or wooden vessel, larger than the size of the print. Then cover
+it with a boiling ley of potash, taking care to keep it hot as long as
+possible. After the whole is cooled, strain off the liquor, take out
+the print with care, spread it on a stretched cord, and when half dry,
+press it between leaves of white paper, to prevent wrinkles.
+
+By this process, spots and stains of any kind will be effectually
+removed.
+
+
+_To so fill a Glass with Water, that it cannot be removed without
+spilling the whole._
+
+This is a mere trick, but may afford some amusement. You offer to bet
+any person that you will so fill a glass with water that he shall not
+move it off the table without spilling the whole contents. You then
+fill the glass, and, laying a piece of paper or thin card over the
+top, you dexterously turn the glass upside down on the table, and then
+drawing away the paper, you leave the water in the glass, with its
+foot upwards. It will therefore be impossible to remove the glass from
+the table without spilling every drop.
+
+
+_Two Figures, one of which blows out and the other re-lights a
+Candle._
+
+Make two figures, of any shape or materials you please; insert in the
+mouth of one a small tube, at the end of which is a piece of
+phosphorus, and in the mouth of the other a tube containing at the end
+a few grains of gunpowder; taking care that each be retained in the
+tube by a piece of paper. If the second figure be applied to the flame
+of a taper, it will extinguish it; and the first will light it again.
+
+
+_A vessel that will let Water out at the Bottom, as soon as the Mouth
+is uncorked._
+
+Provide a tin vessel, two or three inches in diameter, and five or six
+inches in height, having a mouth about three inches in width; and in
+the bottom several small holes, just large enough to admit a small
+needle. Plunge it in water with its mouth open, and when full, while
+it remains in the water, stop it very closely. You can play a trick
+with a person, by desiring him to uncork it; if he places it on his
+knee for that purpose, the moment it is uncorked the water will run
+through at the bottom, and make him completely wet.
+
+
+_A Powder which catches Fire when exposed to the Air._
+
+Put three ounces of rock alum, and one ounce of honey or sugar, into a
+new earthen dish, glazed, and which is capable of standing a strong
+heat; keep the mixture over the fire, stirring it continually till it
+becomes very dry and hard; then remove it from the fire, and pound it
+to a coarse powder. Put this powder into a long-necked bottle, leaving
+a part of the vessel empty; and, having placed it in a crucible, fill
+up the crucible with fine sand, and surround it with burning coals.
+When the bottle has been kept at a red heat for about seven or eight
+minutes, and no more vapour issues from it, remove it from the fire,
+then stop it with a piece of cork; and, having suffered it to cool,
+preserve the mixture in small bottles well closed.
+
+If you unclose one of these bottles, and let fall a few grains of this
+powder on a bit of paper, or any other very dry substance, it will
+first become blue, then brown, and will at last burn the paper or
+other dry substance on which it has fallen.
+
+
+_Fulminating Gold._
+
+Put into a small long-necked bottle, resting on a little sand, one
+part of fine gold filings, and three parts of aqua regia,
+(nitro-muriatic acid.) When the gold is dissolved, pour the solution
+into a glass, and add five or six times the quantity of water. Then
+take spirit of sal ammoniac or oil of tartar, and pour it drop by drop
+into the solution, until the gold is entirely precipitated to the
+bottom of the glass. Decant the liquor that swims at the top, by
+inclining the glass; and, having washed it several times in warm
+water, dry it at a moderate heat, placing it on paper capable of
+absorbing all the moisture.
+
+If a grain of this powder, put into a spoon, (it should be an iron
+one,) be exposed to the flame of a candle, it will explode with a very
+loud report.
+
+
+_To melt a piece of Money in a Walnut-shell, without injuring the
+shell._
+
+Bend any thin coin, and put it into half a walnut-shell; place the
+shell on a little sand, to keep it steady. Then fill the shell with a
+mixture made of three parts of very dry pounded nitre, one part of
+flowers of sulphur, and a little saw-dust well sifted. If you then set
+light to the mixture, you will find, when it is melted, that the metal
+will also be melted at the bottom of the shell, in form of a button,
+which will become hard when the burning matter round it is consumed:
+the shell will have sustained very little injury.
+
+
+_A Liquid that Shines in the Dark._
+
+Take a bit of phosphorus, about the size of a pea; break it into small
+parts, which you are to put into a glass half full of very pure water,
+and boil it in a small earthen vessel, over a very moderate fire. Have
+in readiness a long narrow bottle, with a well-fitted glass stopper,
+and immerse it, with its mouth open, into boiling water. On taking it
+out, empty the water, and immediately pour in the mixture in a boiling
+state; then put in the stopper, and cover it with mastich, to prevent
+the entrance of the external air.
+
+This water will shine in the dark for several months, even without
+being touched; and, if it be shaken in dry warm weather, brilliant
+flashes will be seen to rise through the middle of the water.
+
+
+_Luminous Liquor._
+
+Put a little phosphorus, with essence of cloves, into a bottle, which
+must be kept closely stopped. Every time the bottle is unclosed, the
+liquor will appear luminous. This experiment must be performed in the
+dark.
+
+
+_The changeable Rose._
+
+Take a common full-blown rose, and, having thrown a little sulphur
+finely pounded into a chafing-dish with coals, expose the rose to the
+vapour. By this process the rose will become whitish; but if it be
+afterwards held some time in water, it will resume its former colour.
+
+
+_Golden Ink._
+
+Take some white gum arabic, reduce it to an impalpable powder, in a
+brass mortar; dissolve it in strong brandy, and add a little common
+water to render it more liquid. Provide some gold in a shell, which
+must be detached, in order to reduce it to a powder. When this is
+done, moisten it with the gummy solution, and stir the whole with a
+small hair-brush, or your finger; then leave it for a night, that the
+gold may be better dissolved. If the composition become dry during the
+night, dilute it with more gum water, in which a little saffron has
+been infused; but take care that the gold solution be sufficiently
+liquid to flow freely in a pen. When the writing is dry, polish it
+with a dry tooth.
+
+
+_Another way._
+
+Reduce gum ammoniac into powder, and dissolve it in gum arabic water,
+to which a little garlic juice has been added. This water will not
+dissolve the ammonia so as to form a transparent liquid; for the
+result will be a milky liquor. With the liquor form your letters or
+ornaments on paper or vellum, with a pen or fine camels'-hair brush;
+then let them dry, and afterwards breathe on them some time, till they
+become moist; then apply a few bits of leaf gold to the letters, which
+you press down gently with cotton wool. When the whole is dry, brush
+off the superfluous gold with a large camels'-hair brush, and, to make
+it more brilliant, burnish with a dog's tooth.
+
+
+_White Ink, for Writing on black Paper._
+
+Having carefully washed some egg-shells, remove the internal skin, and
+grind them on a piece of porphyry. Then put the powder into a small
+vessel of pure water, and when it has settled at the bottom, draw off
+the water, and dry the powder in the sun. This powder must be
+preserved in a bottle; when you want to use it, put a small quantity
+of gum ammoniac into distilled vinegar, and leave it to dissolve
+during the night. Next morning the solution will appear exceedingly
+white; and if you then strain it through a piece of linen cloth, and
+add to it the powder of egg-shells, in sufficient quantity, you will
+obtain a very white ink.
+
+
+_To construct Paper Balloons._
+
+Take several sheets of silk paper; cut them in the shape of a spindle;
+or, to speak more familiarly, like the coverings of the sections of an
+orange; join these pieces together, into one spherical or globular
+body, and border the aperture with a ribbon, leaving the ends, that
+you may suspend them from the following lamp.
+
+Construct a small basket of very fine wire, if the balloon is small,
+and suspend it from the aperture, so that the smoke from the flame of
+a few leaves of paper, wrapped together, and dipped in oil, may heat
+the inside of it. Before you light this paper, suspend the balloon in
+such a manner, that it may, in a great measure, be exhausted of air,
+and as soon as it has been dilated, let it go, together with the wire
+basket, which will serve as ballast.
+
+
+_Water-Gilding upon Silver._
+
+Take copper-flakes, on which pour strong vinegar; add alum and salt in
+equal quantities; set them on a fire, and when the vinegar is boiled,
+till it becomes one-fourth part of its original quantity, throw into
+it the metal you design to gild, and it will assume a copper colour.
+Continue boiling it, and it will change into a fine gold colour.
+
+
+_A Water which gives Silver a Gold Colour._
+
+Take sulphur and nitre, of each an equal quantity; grind them together
+very fine, and put them into an unglazed vessel; cover and lute it
+well; then set it over a slow fire for 24 hours; put what remains into
+a strong crucible, and let it dissolve; put it into a phial, and
+whatever silver you anoint with it will have a gold colour.
+
+
+_To make an old Gold Chain appear like new._
+
+Dissolve sal ammoniac in urine, boil the chain in it, and it will have
+a fine gold colour.
+
+
+_To give Silver the Colour of Gold._
+
+Dissolve in common aqua fortis as much silver as you please. To eight
+ounces of silver, take four ounces of hepatic aloes, six ounces of
+turmeric, and two ounces of prepared tutty, that has been several
+times quenched in urine. Put these to the solution of the silver; they
+will dissolve, but rise up in the glass like a sponge; this glass must
+therefore be large, to prevent running over. Then draw it off, and you
+will have ten ounces of silver as yellow as gold.
+
+
+_A Water to give any Metal a Gold Colour._
+
+Take fine sulphur and pulverize it; then boil some stale spring water;
+pour it hot upon the powder, and stir it well together; boil it again,
+and pour into it an ounce of dragon's blood. After it is well boiled,
+take it off, and filter it through a fine cloth; pour this water into
+a matrass, (a chemical vessel,) after you have put in what you design
+to colour; close it well, and boil it a third time, and the metal will
+be a fine gold colour.
+
+
+_Another way._
+
+Take hepatic aloes, nitre, and Roman vitriol, of each equal
+quantities; and distil them with water, in an alembic, till all the
+spirits are extracted; it will at last yield a yellowish water, which
+will tinge any sort of metal of a gold colour.
+
+
+_To give Silver-plate a Lustre._
+
+Dissolve alum in a strong ley, and scum it carefully; then mix it up
+with soap, and wash your silver utensils with it, using a linen rag.
+
+
+_The Fiery Fountain._
+
+If twenty grains of phosphorus, cut very small, and mixed with forty
+grains of powder of zinc, be put into four drachms of water, and two
+drachms of concentrated sulphuric acid be added thereto, bubbles of
+inflamed phosphoretted hydrogen gas will quickly cover the whole
+surface of the fluid in succession, forming a real fountain of fire.
+
+
+_To take Impressions of Coins, Medals, &c._
+
+Cut fish-glue, or isinglass, into small pieces, immerse it in clear
+water, and set it on a slow fire; when gradually dissolved, let it
+boil slowly, stirring it with a wooden spoon, and taking off the scum.
+The liquor being sufficiently adhesive, take it off the fire, let it
+cool a little, and then pour it on the medal or coin you wish to copy,
+having first rubbed the coin over with oil. Let the composition lay
+about the thickness of a crown-piece on the medal. Then set it in a
+moderate air, neither too hot nor too cold, and let it cool and dry.
+When it is dry, it will loosen itself; you will find the impression
+correct, and the finest strokes expressed with the greatest accuracy.
+
+You may give a most pleasing effect to the composition, by mixing any
+colour with it, red, yellow, blue, green, &c., and if you add a little
+parchment size to it, it will make it harder and better. This size is
+made by gently simmering the cuttings of clear white parchment in a
+pipkin, with a little water, till it becomes adhesive.
+
+
+_To tell a Person any Number he may privately fix on._
+
+When the person has fixed on a number, bid him double it and add four
+to that doubling; then multiply the whole by 5; to the product let him
+add 12, and multiply the amount by 10. From the total of all this, let
+him deduct 320, and tell you the remainder; from which, if you cut off
+the two last figures, the number that remains will be what he fixed
+upon. For instance,
+
+ Suppose the number chosen is 7
+ Which doubled 14
+ Add 4 to it, and it will make 18
+ Multiply 18 by 5, gives 90
+ To which add 12, is 102
+ Multiply that by 10, makes 1020
+ From which deducting 320, the remainder is 700
+ And by striking off the two ciphers, it becomes
+ the number thought on 7
+
+
+_To tell any Number a Person has fixed on, without asking him any
+Questions._
+
+You tell the person to choose any number from 1 to 15; he is to add 1
+to that number, and triple the amount. Then,
+
+ 1. He is to take the half of that triple, and triple that half.
+ 2. To take the half of the last triple, and triple that half.
+ 3. To take the half of the last triple.
+ 4. To take the half of that half.
+
+Thus, it will be seen, there are four cases where the half is to be
+taken; the three first are denoted by one of the eight following Latin
+words, each word being composed of three syllables; and those that
+contain the letter i refer to those cases where the half cannot be
+taken without a fraction; therefore, in those cases, the person who
+makes the deduction is to add 1 to the number divided. The fourth case
+shows which of the two numbers annexed to every word has been chosen;
+for if the fourth half can be taken without adding 1, the number
+chosen is in the first column; but if not, it is in the second.
+
+ _The words._ _The numbers they denote._
+
+ Mi-se-ris 8 0
+ Ob-tin-git 1 9
+ Ni-mi-um 2 19
+ No-ta-ri 3 11
+ In-fer-nos 4 12
+ Or-di-nes 13 5
+ Ti-mi-di 6 14
+ Te-ne-ant 15 7
+
+For example:
+
+ Suppose the number chosen is 9
+ To which is to be added 1
+ ----
+ 10
+ The triple of that number is 30
+ The half of which is 15
+ The triple of that half must be 45
+ And the half of that[A] 23
+ The triple half of that half 69
+ The half of that[A] 35
+ And the half of that half[A] 18
+
+ [A] At all these stages, 1 must be added, to take the half
+ without a fraction.
+
+While the person is performing the operation, you remark, that at the
+second and third stages he is obliged to add 1; and, consequently,
+that the word _ob-tin-git_, in the second and third syllables of which
+is an i, denotes that the number must be either 1 or 9; and, by
+observing that he cannot take the last half without adding 1, you know
+that it must be the number in the second column. If he makes no
+addition at any one of the four stages, the number he chose must be
+15, as that is the only number that has not a fraction at either of
+the divisions.
+
+
+_The Lamp Chronometer._
+
+Figure 4 represents a chamber lamp, A, consisting of a cylindrical
+vessel made of tin, in the shape of a candle, and is to be filled with
+oil. This vessel should be about three inches high and one inch
+diameter, placed in a stand, B. The whole apparatus, of lamp and
+stand, can be purchased, ready-made, at any tin-shop in London. To the
+stand, B, is fixed the handle C, which supports the frame D, about 12
+inches high, and four inches wide. This frame is to be covered with
+oiled paper, and divided into 12 equal parts by horizontal lines, at
+the end of which are written the numbers for the hours, from 1 to 12,
+and between the horizontal lines, and diagonals, divided into halves,
+quarters, &c. On the handle C, and close to the glass, is fixed the
+style or hand E.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 4.]
+
+Now, as the distance of the style from the flame of the lamp is only
+half an inch, then, if the distance of the frame from the style be six
+inches, while the float that contains the light descends by the
+decrease on the oil, one inch, the shadow of the style of the frame
+will ascend 12 inches, being its whole length, and show by its
+progression, the regular increase of the hours, with their several
+divisions.
+
+You must be careful always to burn the same oil, which must be the
+best; and the wick must never vary in size; if these precautions are
+not attended to, the dial never can be accurate.
+
+
+_The Phial of the Four Elements._
+
+Take a phial, six or seven inches long, and about three quarters of an
+inch in diameter. In this phial put, first, glass coarsely powdered;
+secondly, oil of tartar per deliquum; thirdly, tincture of salt of
+tartar; and lastly, distilled rock oil.
+
+The glass and the various liquors being of different densities, if you
+shake the phial, and then let it rest a few moments, the three liquors
+will entirely separate, and each assume its place; thus forming no
+indifferent resemblance of the four elements, earth, fire, water, and
+air: the powdered glass (which should be of some dark colour)
+representing the earth; the oil of tartar, water; the tincture, air;
+and the rock oil, fire.
+
+
+_The Magic Bottle._
+
+Take a small bottle, the neck of which is not more than the sixth of
+an inch in diameter. With a funnel, fill the bottle quite full of red
+wine, and place it in a glass vessel, similar to a show-glass, whose
+height exceeds that of the bottle about two inches; fill this vessel
+with water. The wine will shortly come out of the bottle, and rise in
+the form of a small column to the surface of the water; while at the
+same time, the water, entering the bottle, will supply the place of
+the wine. The reason of this is, that as water is specifically heavier
+than wine, it must hold the lower place, while the other rises to the
+top.
+
+An effect equally pleasing will be produced, if the bottle be filled
+with water, and the vessel with wine.
+
+
+_The Globular Fountain._
+
+Make a hollow globe, of copper or lead, and of a size adapted to the
+quantity of water that comes from a pipe (hereafter mentioned) to
+which it is to be fixed, and which may be fastened to any kind of
+pump, provided it be so constructed, that the water shall have no
+other means of escape than through the pipe. Pierce a number of small
+holes through the globe, that all tend towards its centre, and annex
+it to the pipe that communicates with the pump. The water that comes
+from the pump, rushing with violence into the globe, will be forced
+out at the holes, and form a very pleasing sphere of water.
+
+
+_The Hydraulic Dancer._
+
+Procure a little figure made of cork, which you may dress as your
+fancy dictates. In this figure place a small hollow cone made of thin
+leaf brass.
+
+When the figure is placed on a jet d'eau, that plays in a
+perpendicular direction, it will be suspended on the top of the water,
+and perform a great variety of amusing motions.
+
+If a hollow ball of very thin copper, of an inch diameter, be placed
+on a similar jet, it will remain suspended, turning round, and
+spreading the water all about it.
+
+
+_A Person having put a Ring an one of his Fingers, to name the Person,
+the Hand, the Finger, and the Joint on which it is placed._
+
+Let a third person double the number of the order in which he stands
+who has the ring, and add 5 to that number; then multiply that sum by
+5, and to the product add 10. Let him next add 1 to the last number,
+if the ring be on the right hand, and 2 if on the left, and multiply
+the whole by 10: to the product of this he must add the number of the
+finger, (counting the thumb as the first finger,) and multiply the
+whole again by 10. Let him then add the number of the joint, and,
+lastly, to the whole join 35.
+
+He is then to tell you the amount of the whole, from which you are to
+subtract 3535, and the remainder will consist of four figures; the
+first of which will express the rank in which the person stands, the
+second the hand, (number 1 signifying the right, and 2 the left,) the
+third number the finger, and the fourth the joint.--For example:
+
+Suppose the person who stands the third in order has put the ring upon
+the second joint of the thumb of his left hand; then,
+
+ The double of the rank of the third person is 6
+ To which add 5
+ ____
+ 11
+ Multiply the sum by 5
+ ____
+ 55
+ To which add 10
+ And the number of the left hand 2
+ ____
+ 67
+ Which being multiplied by 10
+ ____
+ 670
+ To which add the number of the thumb 1
+ ____
+ 671
+ And multiply again by 10
+ ____
+ 6710
+ Then add the number of the joint 2
+ And lastly the number 35
+ ____
+ 6747
+ From which deducting 3535
+ ____
+ The remainder is 3212
+ ____
+
+Of which, as we have said, the 3 denotes the third person, the 2 the
+left hand, the 1 the thumb, and the last 2 the second joint.
+
+
+_The Water Sun._
+
+Provide two portions of a hollow sphere, that are very shallow; join
+them together in such a manner that the hollow between them be very
+narrow. Fix them vertically to a pipe from whence a jet proceeds. Bore
+a number of small holes all around that part where the two pieces are
+joined together. The water rushing through the holes will form a very
+pleasing water sun, or star.
+
+
+_The Magical Cascade._
+
+Procure a tin vessel, shaped like Fig. 5, about five inches high and
+four in diameter, with a cover, C, closed at top. To the bottom of
+this vessel, let the pipe D E be soldered. This pipe is to be ten
+inches long, and half an inch in diameter, open at each end, and the
+upper end must be above the water in the vessel. To the bottom also
+fix five or six small tubes, F, about one-eighth of an inch in
+diameter. By these pipes, the water in the vessel is to run slowly
+out.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 5.]
+
+Place this machine in a tin basin, G H, with a hole in the middle,
+about a quarter of an inch in diameter. Fix to the tube D E, any sort
+of ornament that will keep the machine firm on the basin, observing,
+that these supports are sufficiently long to leave about a quarter of
+an inch between the end of the tube and the orifice in the basin; and
+let there be a vessel under the basin to catch the water that runs
+out.
+
+As the small pipes discharge more water into the basin than can run
+out of the central orifice, the water will rise in the basin above the
+lower end of the pipe, and prevent the air from getting into the
+vessel, by which the water will cease to flow from the small pipes.
+But as the water continues to flow from the basin, the air will have
+liberty again to enter the vessel by the tube, and the water will
+again flow from the small pipes, and alternately stop and flow, while
+any water remains in the vessel.
+
+As you can guess when the pipes will flow, and when they will stop,
+you may so manage it, that they will appear to act by word of command.
+
+
+_The illuminated Fountain, that plays when the Candles are lighted,
+and stops when they are extinguished._
+
+Provide two cylindrical vessels, A B and C D, as in Fig. 6. Connect
+them by four tubes open at each end, as H I, &c., so that the air may
+descend out of the higher into the lower vessel. To these tubes fix
+candlesticks, and to the hollow cover, E F, of the lower vessel, fit a
+tube, K, reaching almost to the bottom of the vessel. At G let there
+be an aperture with a screw, whereby water may be poured into C D,
+which, when filled, must be closed by the screw.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 6.]
+
+When the candles are lighted, the air in the upper cover and
+contiguous pipes will be thereby rarefied, and the jet from the small
+tube, K, will begin to play: as the air becomes more rarefied, the
+force of the jet will increase, and it will continue to play till the
+water in the lower vessel is exhausted. As the motion of the jet is
+caused by the heat of the candles, when they are extinguished the
+fountain will stop.
+
+
+_A Fountain which acts by the heat of the Sun._
+
+In the annexed engraving, Fig. 7, G N S is a thin hollow globe of
+copper, eighteen inches diameter, supported by a small inverted basin,
+placed on a stand with four legs, A B C D, which have between them, at
+the bottom, a basin of two feet diameter. Through the leg C passes a
+concealed pipe, which comes from G, the bottom of the inside of the
+globe. This pipe goes by H V, and joins the upright pipe _u_ I, to
+make a jet, as I. The short pipe, _u_ I, which goes to the bottom, has
+a valve at _u_, under the horizontal pipe H V, and another valve at T,
+above that Horizontal pipe, under the cock at K. The use of this cock
+is to keep the fountain from playing in the day, if you think proper.
+The north pole N of the globe has a screw that opens a hole, whereby
+water is poured into the globe.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 7.]
+
+The machine being thus prepared, and the globe half filled with water,
+put it in an open place, when the heat of the sun rarefying the air as
+it heats the copper, the air will press strongly against the water,
+which, coming down the pipe, will lift up the valve at V, and shut the
+valve at u. The cock being opened, the water will spout out at I, and
+continue to play a long while, if the sun shines.
+
+
+_Inflammable Phosphorus._
+
+Take the meal of flour of any vegetable, put it into an iron pan over
+a moderate fire, and keep it stirring with an iron spoon till it
+changes to a black powder; to one part of this add four parts of raw
+alum. Make the whole into a fine powder; put it again into the iron
+pan, and keep stirring it till it almost catches fire, to prevent its
+forming into lumps, as it is apt to do when the alum melts; in which
+case it must be broken again, stirred about, and accurately mixed with
+the flour, till it emits no more fumes, and the whole appears a fine
+black powder.
+
+Put this powder in a clean dry phial with a narrow neck, filling it to
+about one-third of the top. Then stop the mouth of the phial with
+loose paper, so as to let the air pass freely through it, and leave
+room for the fumes to come through the neck. Place the phial in a
+crucible, encompassed on all sides with sand, so that it may not touch
+any part of the crucible, but a considerable space everywhere left
+between. The phial must be covered up with sand, leaving only a small
+part bare, by which you can discern whether the powder is ignited. In
+this state, the crucible is to be surrounded with coals, kindled
+slowly till it is well heated on all sides, and then the fire is to be
+raised, till the crucible and every thing in it is red-hot; keep it in
+this state an hour; after this, the fire still burning as fiercely,
+close up the orifice of the phial with wax, to exclude the air. Leave
+it to cool, and you will find in it a black dusty coal formed of the
+flour and alum.
+
+Shake a small quantity of this out of the phial into the cool air, and
+it will immediately take fire, but will not burn any thing. Keep the
+bottle dry, as even the air will spoil it effectually.
+
+
+_The Magical Mirrors._
+
+Make two holes in the wainscot of a room, each a foot high and ten
+inches wide, and about a foot distant from each other. Let these
+apertures be about the height of a man's head, and in each of them
+place a transparent glass in a frame, like a common mirror.
+
+Behind the partition, and directly facing each aperture, place two
+mirrors enclosed in the wainscot, in an angle of forty-five
+degrees.[B] These mirrors are each to be eighteen inches square: and
+all the space between them must be enclosed with pasteboard painted
+black, and well closed, that no light can enter; let there be also two
+curtains to cover them, which you may draw aside at pleasure.
+
+When a person looks into one of these fictitious mirrors, instead of
+seeing his own face he will see the object that is in front of the
+other; thus, if two persons stand at the same time before these
+mirrors, instead of each seeing himself; they will reciprocally see
+each other.
+
+There should be a sconce with a lighted candle, placed on each side of
+the two glasses in the wainscot, to enlighten the faces of the persons
+who look in them, or the experiment will not have so remarkable an
+effect.
+
+ [B] That is, half-way between a line drawn perpendicularly to
+ the ground and its surface.
+
+
+_To cause a brilliant Explosion under Water._
+
+Drop a piece of phosphorus, the size of a pea, into a tumbler of hot
+water; and, from a bladder furnished with a stop-cock, force a stream
+of oxygen directly upon it. This will afford a most brilliant
+combustion under water.
+
+
+_Fulminating Mercury._
+
+Dissolve 100 grains of mercury by heat, in an ounce and a half of
+nitric acid. This solution being poured cold upon two measured ounces
+of alcohol previously introduced into any convenient glass vessel, a
+moderate heat is to be applied, till effervescence is excited. A white
+fume then begins to appear on the surface of the liquor, and the
+powder will be gradually precipitated when the action ceases. The
+precipitate is to be immediately collected on a filter, well washed
+with distilled water, and cautiously dried in a heat not exceeding
+that of a water-bath. Washing the powder immediately is material,
+because it is liable to the re-action of the nitric acid; and, while
+any of the acid adheres to it, it is very subject to the action of
+light. From 100 grains of mercury, about 130 of the powder are
+obtained.
+
+This powder, when struck on an anvil with a hammer, explodes with a
+sharp stunning noise, and with such force as to indent both hammer and
+anvil. Three or four grains are sufficient for one experiment.
+
+
+_The Iron Tree._
+
+Dissolve iron filings in aqua fortis, moderately concentrated, till
+the acid is saturated; then add to it gradually, a solution of fixed
+alkali, (commonly called oil of tartar per deliquum.) A strong
+effervescence will ensue, and the iron, instead of falling to the
+bottom of the vessel, will afterwards rise so as to cover the sides,
+forming a multitude of ramifications heaped one upon the other, which
+will sometimes pass over the edge of the vessel, and extend themselves
+on the outside, with all the appearance of a plant.
+
+
+_To make any Number divisible by Nine, by adding a Figure to it._
+
+If (for example) the number named be 72,857, you tell the person who
+names it to place the number 7 between any two figures of that sum,
+and it will be divisible by 9; for if any number be multiplied by 9,
+the sum of the figures of the product will be either 9, or a number
+divisible by 9.
+
+
+_Arithmetical Squares._
+
+An arithmetical magical square consists of numbers so disposed in
+parallel and equal lines, that the sum of each, taken any way of the
+square, amounts to the same.
+
+Any five of these sums taken in a right line make 65. You will observe
+that five numbers in the diagonals A to D, and B to C, of the magical
+square, answer to the ranks E to F, and G to H, in the natural square,
+and that 13 is the centre number of both squares.
+
+ _A Natural Square._ _A Magical Square._
+ A G B A B
+ +--+--+--+--+--+ +--+--+--+--+--+
+ | 1| 2| 3| 4| 5| |11|24| 7|20| 3|
+ +--+--+--+--+--+ +--+--+--+--+--+
+ | 6| 7| 8| 9|10| | 4|12|25| 8|16|
+ +--+--+--+--+--+ +--+--+--+--+--+
+ E |11|12|13|14|15| F |17| 5|13|21| 9|
+ +--+--+--+--+--+ +--+--+--+--+--+
+ |16|17|18|19|20| |10|18| 1|14|22|
+ +--+--+--+--+--+ +--+--+--+--+--+
+ |21|22|23|24|25| |23| 6|19| 2|15|
+ +--+--+--+--+--+ +--+--+--+--+--+
+ C H D C D
+
+To form a magical square, first transpose the two ranks in the natural
+square to the diagonals of the magical square; then place the number 1
+under the central number 13, and the number 2 in the next diagonal
+downward. The number 3 should be placed in the same diagonal line; but
+as there is no room in the square, you are to place it in that part it
+would occupy if another square were placed under this. For the same
+reason, the number 4, by following the diagonal direction, falling out
+of the square, it is to be put into the part it would hold in another
+square, placed by the side of this. You then proceed to numbers 5 and
+6, still descending; but as the place 6 should hold is already filled,
+you then go back to the diagonal, and consequently place the 6 in the
+second place under the 5, so that there may remain an empty space
+between the two numbers. The same rule is to observed, whenever you
+find a space already filled.
+
+You proceed in this manner to fill all the empty cases in the angle
+where the 15 is placed: and as there is no space for the 16 in the
+same diagonal, descending, you must place it in the part it would hold
+in another square, and continue the same plan till all the spaces are
+filled. This method will serve equally for all sorts of arithmetical
+progressions composed of odd numbers; even numbers being too
+complicated to afford any amusement.
+
+
+_To find the Difference between two Numbers, the greatest of which is
+unknown._
+
+Take as many nines as there are figures in the smallest number, and
+subtract that sum from the number of nines. Let another person add
+that difference to the largest number, and, taking away the first
+figure of the amount, add it to the last figure, and that sum will be
+the difference of the two numbers.
+
+For example: Robert, who is 22, tells George, who is older, that he
+can discover the difference of their ages; he therefore privately
+deducts 22 from 99, and the difference, which is 77, he tells George
+to add to his age, and to take away the first figure from the amount,
+and add it to the last figure, and that last sum will be the
+difference of their ages. Thus, the difference between
+
+ Robert's age and 99, is 77
+ To which George adding his age 35
+ ----
+ The sum will be 112
+ ----
+ 12
+ 1
+ ----
+ Then by taking away the first figure, 1, }
+ and adding it to the last figure, 2, } 13
+ the sum is }
+ Which added to Robert's age 22
+ ----
+ Gives George's age, which is 35
+
+
+_The Boundless Prospect._
+
+Take a square box, about six inches long and twelve high, or of any
+other proportionate dimensions. Cover the inside with four flat pieces
+of looking-glass placed perpendicular to the bottom of the box. Place
+at the bottom any objects you please, as a piece of fortification, a
+castle, tents, soldiers, &c. On the top, place a frame of glass shaped
+like the bottom of a pyramid, as in Fig. 8, and so formed as to fit on
+the box like a cover. The four sides of this cover are to be composed
+of ground glass, or covered inside with gauze, so that the light may
+enter, and yet the inside be invisible, except at the top, which must
+be covered with transparent glass: when you look through this glass,
+the inside will present a pleasing prospect of a boundless extent;
+and, if managed with care, will afford a deal of amusement.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 8.]
+
+
+_To set Fire to a combustible Body by Reflection._
+
+Place two concave mirrors at about twelve feet distance from each
+other, and let the axis of each be in the same line. In the focus of
+one of them place a live coal, and in the focus of the other some
+gunpowder. With a pair of strong bellows keep blowing the coal, and
+notwithstanding the distance between them, the powder will presently
+take fire.
+
+The mirror may be either made of glass, metal, or pasteboard gilt.
+
+
+_To find the Number of Changes that may be rung on Twelve Bells._
+
+Multiply the numbers from 1 to 12 continually into each other, as
+follow: and the last product will give the number required.
+
+ 1
+ 2
+ --
+ 2
+ 3
+ --
+ 6
+ 4
+ --
+ 24
+ 5
+ ----
+ 120
+ 6
+ ----
+ 720
+ 7
+ -----
+ 5,040
+ 8
+ ------
+ 40,320
+ 9
+ -------
+ 362,880
+ 10
+ ---------
+ 3,628,800
+ 11
+ ----------
+ 39,916,800
+ 12
+ -----------
+ 479,001,600
+
+
+_To find how many square Yards it would require to write all the
+Changes of the Twenty-four Letters of the Alphabet, written so small,
+that each Letter should not occupy more than the hundredth part of a
+square Inch._
+
+By adopting the plan of the preceding article, the changes of the
+twenty-four letters will be found to be
+
+ 62,044,840,173,323,943,936,000.
+
+Now, the inches in a square yard being 1,296, that number multiplied
+by 100 gives 129,600, which is the number of letters each square yard
+will contain; therefore, if we divide the above row of figures,
+(the number of changes,) by 129,600, the quotient, which is
+478,741,050,720,092,160, will be the number of yards required to
+contain the above mentioned number of changes. But as all the 24
+letters are contained in every permutation, it will require a space
+24 times as large, _viz._,
+
+ 11,849,785,210,282,211,840.
+
+Now, as the surface of the whole globe only contains
+617,197,435,008,000 square yards, it would require a surface 18,620
+times as large as the earth to contain them.
+
+
+_The Enchanted Bottle._
+
+Fill a glass bottle with water to the beginning of the neck; leave
+the neck empty, and cork it. Suspend this bottle opposite a concave
+mirror, and beyond its focus, that it may appear reversed. Place
+yourself still further distant from the bottle; and instead of the
+water appearing, as it really is, at the bottom of the bottle, the
+bottom will be empty, and the water seen at the top.
+
+If the bottle be suspended with the neck downwards, it will be
+reflected in its natural position, and the water at the bottom,
+although in reality it is inverted, and fills the neck; leaving the
+bottom vacant. While the bottle is in this position, uncork it, and
+let the water run gradually out: it will appear, that while the real
+bottle is emptying, the reflected one is filling. Care must be taken
+that the bottle is not more than half or three parts full, and that no
+other liquid is used but water, as in either of these cases the
+illusion ceases.
+
+
+_The Solar Magic Lantern._
+
+Make a box, a foot high, eighteen inches wide, and about three inches
+deep. Two of the opposite sides of this box must be quite open, and in
+each of the other sides let there be a groove wide enough to admit a
+stiff paper or pasteboard. You fasten the box against a window, on
+which the sun's rays fall direct. The rest of the window should be
+closed up, that no light may enter.
+
+Next provide several sheets of stiff paper, blacked on one side. On
+these papers cut out such figures as your fancy may dictate; place
+them alternately in the grooves of the box, with their blacked sides
+towards you, and look at them through a large and clear glass prism;
+and if the light be strong, they will appear painted with the most
+lively colours. If you cut on one of these papers the form of a
+rainbow, about three-quarters of an inch wide, you will have a very
+good representation of the natural one.
+
+For greater convenience, the prism may be placed on a stand on the
+table, made to turn round on an axis.
+
+
+_The Artificial Rainbow._
+
+Opposite a window into which the sun shines direct suspend a glass
+globe, filled with clean water, by means of a string that runs over a
+pulley, so that the sun's rays may fall on it. Then drawing the globe
+gradually up, you will observe, when it comes to a certain height, and
+by placing yourself in a proper situation, a purple colour in the
+glass; and by drawing it up gradually higher, the other prismatic
+colours, blue, green, yellow, and red, will successively appear; after
+which, the colours will disappear, till the globe is raised to about
+fifty degrees, when they will again appear, but in an inverted order,
+the red appearing first, and the blue or violet last; on raising the
+globe a little higher, they will totally vanish.
+
+
+_The Æolipiles._
+
+The æolipile is a small hollow globe of brass, or other metal, in
+which a slender neck or pipe is inserted. This ball, when made
+red-hot, is cast into a vessel of water, which will rush into its
+cavity, then almost void of air. The ball being then set on the fire,
+the water, by the rarefaction of the internal air, will be forced out
+in steam by fits, with great violence, and with strange noise.
+
+If to the necks of two or more of these balls, there be fitted those
+calls that are used by fowlers and hunters, and the balls placed on
+the fire, the steam rushing from them will make such a horrible noise,
+that it will astonish any person who is ignorant of the contrivance.
+
+
+_The Talking Busts._
+
+Procure two busts of plaster of Paris; place them on pedestals, on the
+opposite sides of the room. Let a thin tube, of an inch diameter, pass
+from the ear of one head through the pedestal, under the floor, and go
+up to the mouth of the other; taking care that the end of the tube
+that is next the ear of the one head, be considerably larger than that
+end which comes to the mouth of the other.
+
+Now, when a person speaks quite low into the ear of one bust, the
+sound is reverberated through the length of the tube, and will be
+distinctly heard by any one placing his ear to the mouth of the other.
+It is not necessary that the tube should come to the lips of the bust.
+If there be two tubes, one going to the ear, and the other to the
+mouth of each head, two persons may converse together, by whispers,
+without the knowledge of any person who may stand in the middle of the
+room.
+
+
+_The Inanimate Oracle._
+
+Place a bust on a pedestal in the corner of a room, and let there be
+two tubes, as in the preceding article, one to go from the mouth, and
+the other from the ear, through the pedestal and the floor to an under
+apartment; there may be also wires, that go from the under jaw and the
+eyes of the bust, by which they may be easily moved.
+
+A person being placed in the room underneath, and applying his ear to
+one of the tubes at a signal given, will hear any question asked, and
+can immediately reply, by applying his mouth to the tube which
+communicates below, at the same time moving the eyes by the wire, to
+accompany his speech.
+
+
+_The Solar Concerto._
+
+In a large case, similar to what is used for dials and spring clocks,
+the front of which, or at least the lower part, must be of glass,
+covered on the inside with gauze, place a barrel organ, which when
+wound up is prevented from playing by a catch that takes a toothed
+wheel at the end of the barrel. To one end of this catch join a wire,
+at the end of which is a flat circle of cork, of the same dimensions
+with the inside of a glass tube, in which it is to rise and fall. This
+tube must communicate with a reservoir that goes across the front part
+of the bottom of the case, which is to be filled with spirits, such as
+is used in thermometers.
+
+This case being placed in the sun, the spirits will be rarefied by the
+heat, and, rising in the tube, will lift up the catch or trigger, and
+set the organ in play; which will continue as long as it is kept in
+the sun; for the spirits cannot run out of the tube, that part of the
+catch to which the circle is fixed being prevented from rising beyond
+a certain point, by a check placed over it. Care must be taken to
+remove the machine out of the sun before the organ runs down, that its
+stopping may be evidently affected by the cold.
+
+In winter it will perform when placed before the fire.
+
+
+
+
+CURIOUS EXPERIMENTS WITH THE MAGIC LANTERN.
+
+
+The construction of this amusing optical machine is so well known,
+that to describe it would be superfluous; particularly as it can now
+be purchased at a very reasonable expense, at any of the opticians':
+but as many persons who have a taste for drawing might not be pleased
+with the designs to be had at the shops, or might wish to indulge
+their fancy in a variety of objects, which to purchase would become
+expensive, we here present our readers, in the first place, with the
+method of drawing them, which will be succeeded by a plain
+description of some very diverting experiments.
+
+
+_Of Painting the Glasses._
+
+You first draw on a paper, the size of the glass, the subject you mean
+to paint; fasten this at each end of the glass with paste, or any
+other cement, to prevent it from slipping. Then with some very black
+paint mixed with varnish, draw with a fine camels'-hair pencil, very
+lightly, the outlines sketched on the paper, which, of course, are
+reflected through the glass. Some persons affirm that those outlines
+can be more readily traced with japan writing ink, and a common pen
+with a fine nib; but this, even if it succeeds in making a delicate
+black outline, is sure to be effaced by damp or wet.
+
+It would improve the natural resemblance, if the outlines were drawn
+with a strong tint of each of the natural colours of the object; but
+in this respect you may please your own fancy. When the outlines are
+dry, colour and shade your figures; but observe, to temper your
+colours with strong white varnish. A pleasing effect will be produced,
+if you leave strong lights in some parts of the drapery, &c., without
+any colours. The best colours for this purpose are transparent ones;
+opaque or mineral colours will not do. The following are in most
+repute.
+
+ For Pink and crimson Lake or carmine.
+ Blue Prussian blue.
+ Green Calcined verdigris, or distilled ditto.
+ Yellow Gamboge.
+
+
+_To represent a Storm at Sea._
+
+Provide two strips of glass, whose frames are thin enough to admit
+both strips freely into the groove of the lantern. On one of these
+glasses paint the appearance of the sea from a smooth calm to a
+violent storm. Let these representations run gradually into each
+other, as in Fig. 9, and you will of course observe, that the more
+natural and picturesque the painting is, the more natural and pleasing
+will be the reflection.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 9.]
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 10.]
+
+On the other glass, Fig. 10, paint various vessels on the ocean,
+observing to let that end where the storm is, appear in a state of
+violent commotion, and the vessels as if raised on the waves in an
+unsettled position, with heavy clouds about them.
+
+You then pass the glasses slowly through the groove, and when you come
+to that part where the storm is supposed to begin, move them gently up
+and down, which will give the appearance of the sea and vessels being
+agitated; increase the motion till they come to the height of the
+storm. You will thus have a very natural representation of the sea and
+ships in a calm and storm; and as you gradually draw the glasses back,
+the tempest will subside, the sky appear clear, and the vessels glide
+gently over the waves.
+
+By the means of two or three glasses, you may also represent a battle
+on land, or a naval engagement, with a variety of other pleasing
+experiments.
+
+
+_To produce the appearance of a Spectre on a Pedestal in the middle of
+a Table._
+
+Enclose a small magic lantern in a box, Fig. 11, large enough to
+contain a small swing dressing-glass, which will reflect the light
+thrown on it by the lantern in such a way, that it will pass out at
+the aperture made at the top of the box; which aperture should be
+oval, and of a size adapted to the cone of light to pass through it.
+There should be a flap with hinges, to cover the opening, that the
+inside of the box may not be seen.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 11.]
+
+There must be holes in that part of the box which is over the lantern,
+to let the smoke out; and over this must be placed a chafing-dish of
+an oblong figure, large enough to hold several lighted coals. This
+chafing-dish, for the better carrying on the deception, may be
+enclosed in a painted tin box, about a foot high, with a hole at top,
+and should stand on four feet, to let the smoke from the lantern
+escape.
+
+There must also be a glass planned to rise up and down in the groove
+_a b_, and so managed by a cord and pulley, _c d e f_, that it may be
+raised up and let down by the cord coming through the outside of the
+box. On this glass, the spectre, (or any other figure you please,)
+must be painted in a contracted or equal form, as the figure will
+reflect a greater length than it is drawn.
+
+When you have lighted the lamp in the lantern, and placed the mirror
+in a proper direction, put the box on a table, and, setting the
+chafing-dish in it, throw some incense, in powder, on the coals. You
+then open the trap door and let down the glass in the groove slowly,
+and when you perceive the smoke diminish, draw up the glass, that the
+figure may disappear, and shut the trap door.
+
+This exhibition will afford a deal of wonder; but observe, that all
+the lights in the room must be extinguished; and the box should be
+placed on a high table, that the aperture through which the light
+comes out may not be seen.
+
+There are many other pleasing experiments which may be made with the
+magic lantern, but the limits of our work will not permit us to
+specify them, without excluding many other equally interesting
+subjects of a different nature.
+
+
+_The Artificial Landscape._
+
+Procure a box, as in Fig. 12, of about a foot long, eight inches wide,
+and six inches high, or any other dimensions you please, so they do
+not greatly vary from these proportions. At each of its opposite ends,
+on the inside of this box, place a piece of looking-glass that shall
+exactly fit: but at that end where the sight hole A is, scrape the
+quicksilver off the glass, through which the eye can view the objects.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 12.]
+
+Cover the box with gauze, over which place a piece of transparent
+glass, which is to be well fastened in. Let there be two grooves at
+each of the places C D E F, to receive two printed scenes, as follow:
+On two pieces of pasteboard, let there be skilfully painted, on both
+sides, any subject you think proper, as woods, bowers, gardens,
+houses, &c.; and on two other boards, the same subjects on one side
+only, and cut out all the white parts: observe also, that there ought
+to be in one of them some object relative to the subject, placed at A,
+that the mirror placed at B may not reflect the hole on the opposite
+side.
+
+The boards painted on both sides are to slide in the grooves C D E F,
+and those painted on one side are to be placed against the opposite
+mirrors A and B; then cover the box with its transparent top. This box
+should be placed in a strong light, to have a good effect.
+
+When it is viewed through the sight hole, it will present an unlimited
+prospect of rural scenery, gradually losing itself in obscurity; and
+be found well worth the pains bestowed on its construction.
+
+
+_To draw, easily and correctly, a Landscape, or any other Object,
+without being obliged to observe the Rules of Perspective, and without
+the Aid of the Camera Obscura._
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 13.]
+
+Procure a box of pasteboard, A B C D, Fig. 13, of about a foot and a
+half long, and made in the shape of a truncated pyramid, whose base, B
+D F G, is eight inches wide, and six inches high. Fix to the other end
+of it a tube of four or five inches long, and which you can draw out
+from the box more or less. Line the inside of the box with black
+paper, and place it on a leg or stand of wood, H, and on which it may
+be elevated or depressed by the hinge I.
+
+Take a small frame of wood, and divide it at every inch by lines of
+black silk drawn across it, forming forty-eight equal parts; divide
+these into still smaller equal parts, by lines of finer silk:[C] fix
+this frame at the end of B D, as the base of the pyramid.
+
+Provide a drawing-paper, divided into the same number of parts as in
+the frame, by lines, lightly drawn in pencil. It is not material of
+what size these divisions are; that will depend entirely on the size
+you propose to draw the objects by this instrument.
+
+Place this instrument opposite a landscape, or any other object that
+you want to draw, and fix the leg firmly on, or in the ground, that it
+may not shake; then turning it to the side you choose, raise or
+incline it, and put the tube further in or out, till you have gained
+an advantageous view of the object you intend to draw.
+
+Place your eye, E, by the instrument, which you have adjusted to the
+height of your eye, and, looking through the tube, carefully observe
+all that is contained in each division of the frame, and transpose it
+to the corresponding division in your paper; and if you have the least
+knowledge in painting or even drawing, you will make a very pleasing
+picture, and one in which all the objects will appear in the most
+exact proportion.
+
+By the same method you may draw all sorts of objects, as architecture,
+views, &c., and even human figures, if they remain some time in the
+same attitude, and are at a proper distance from the instrument.
+
+ [C] The different thicknesses of the silk serve to
+ distinguish more readily the corresponding divisions.
+
+
+_Illuminated Prospects._
+
+Provide yourself with some of those prints that are commonly used in
+optical machines, printed on very thin white paper; taking care to
+make choice of such as have the greatest effect from the manner in
+which the objects are placed in perspective. Place one of these on the
+borders of a frame, and paint it carefully with the most lively
+colours, making use of none that are terrestrial. Observe to retouch
+those parts several times where the engraving is strongest,[D] then
+cut off the upper part or sky, and fix that on another frame.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 14.]
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 15.]
+
+The prints being thus prepared, place them in a box, A B C D, Figs. 14
+and 15, the opening to which, E F G H, should be a little less than
+the print. Cover this opening with a glass, and paint all the space
+between that and the prints, which should be about two or three
+inches, black. The frame that contains the sky should be about an inch
+behind the other. In the back part of this box, which is behind the
+prints, and which may be about four inches deep, place four or five
+small candlesticks to hold wax lights, and cover that part entirely
+with tin, that it may be the more luminous.
+
+When the print is placed between the wax lights and the opening in the
+front of the box, and there is no other light in the room, the effect
+will be highly pleasing; especially if the lights are at a sufficient
+distance from each other, and not too strong, that they may not
+occasion any blots in the print. Those prints that represent the
+rising or setting of the sun will have a very picturesque appearance.
+Such as represent conflagrations have also a striking effect.
+
+There should be two grooves for the print next the glass, that you may
+insert a second subject before you draw away the first; and that the
+lights in the back of the box may not be discovered.
+
+You must not, thinking to make the print more transparent, cover it
+with varnish; for that will prevent the gradation of the colours from
+being visible. The frame should enter the side of the box by a groove,
+that a variety of subjects may be introduced.
+
+ [D] When you colour a print, place it before you, against a
+ piece of glass, in a position nearly erect, that it may be
+ enlightened by the sun. You may also colour both sides of the
+ print.
+
+
+
+
+EXPERIMENTS IN MAGNETISM.
+
+
+_The Magnetic Wand._
+
+Bore a hole three-tenths of an inch in diameter, through a round stick
+of wood; or get a hollow cane about eight inches long, and half an
+inch thick. Provide a small steel rod, and let it be very strongly
+impregnated with a good magnet: this rod is to be put in the hole you
+have bored through the wand, and closed at each end by two small ends
+of ivory that screw on, different in their shapes, that you may better
+distinguish the poles of the magnetic bar.
+
+When you present the north pole of this wand to the south[E] pole of a
+magnetic needle, suspended on a pivot, or to a light body swimming on
+the surface of the water, (in which you have placed a magnetic bar,)
+that body will approach the wand, and present that end which contains
+the south end of the bar: but if you present the north or south end of
+the wand to the north or south end of the needle, it will recede from
+it.
+
+ [E] For the more clearly explaining this, it is to be
+ observed, that the two ends of a magnet are called its poles.
+ When placed on a pivot, in just equilibrium, that end which
+ turns to the north is called the north pole, and the other
+ end the south pole.
+
+
+_The Mysterious Watch._
+
+You desire any person to lend you his watch, and ask him if it will go
+when laid on the table. He will, no doubt, say it will; in which case,
+you place it over the end of the magnet, and it will presently stop.
+You then mark the precise spot where you placed the watch, and, moving
+the point of the magnet, you give the watch to another person, and
+desire him to make the experiment; in which he not succeeding, you
+give it to a third (at the same time replacing the magnet) and he will
+immediately perform it.
+
+This experiment cannot be effected, unless you use a very strongly
+impregnated magnetic bar, (which may be purchased at the opticians',)
+and the balance of the watch must be of steel, which may be easily
+ascertained by previously opening it, and looking at the works.
+
+
+_The Magnetic Dial._
+
+Procure a circle of wood or ivory, about 5 or 6 inches diameter, which
+must turn quite free on a stand with a circular border; on the ivory
+or wood circle fix a pasteboard, on which you place, in proper
+divisions, the hours, as on a dial. There must be a small groove in
+the circular frame, to receive the pasteboard circle; and observe,
+that the dial must be made to turn so free, that it may go round
+without moving the circular border in which it is placed.
+
+Between the pasteboard circle and the bottom of the frame, place a
+small artificial magnet, that has a hole in its middle. On the outside
+of the frame, place a small pin, which serves to show when the
+magnetic needle is to stop. This needle must turn quite free on its
+pivot, and its two sides should be in exact equilibrium.
+
+Then provide a small bag, with five or six divisions, like a lady's
+work-bag, but smaller. In one of these divisions put small square
+pieces of pasteboard, on which are written the numbers from 1 to 12.
+In each of the other divisions put twelve or more similar pieces,
+observing that all the pieces in each division must be marked with the
+same number. The needle being placed upon its pivot, and turned
+quickly about, it will necessarily stop at that point where the north
+end of the magnetic bar is placed, and which you previously know, by
+the situation of the small pin in the circular border.
+
+You then present to any person that division of the bag which contains
+the several pieces on which is written the number opposite to the
+north end of the bar, and tell him to draw any one he pleases. Then
+placing the needle on the pivot, you turn it quickly about, and it
+must necessarily stop at that particular number.
+
+
+_The Magnetic Cards._
+
+Draw a pasteboard circle; you then provide yourself with two needles,
+similar to those used in the foregoing experiment, (which you must
+distinguish by some private mark,) with their opposite points touched
+with the magnet. When you place that needle whose pointed end is
+touched, on the pivot described in the centre of the circle, it will
+stop on one of the four pips, against which you have placed the pin
+in the frame; then take the needle off, and, placing the other, it
+will stop on the opposite point.
+
+Having matters thus arranged, desire a person to draw a card from a
+piquet pack, offering that card against which you have placed the pin
+of the dial, which you may easily do, by having a card a little longer
+than the rest. If he should not draw it the first time, as he probably
+may not, you must make some excuse for shuffling them again, such as
+letting the cards fall, as if by accident, or some other manoeuvre,
+until he fix on the card. You then tell him to keep it close, and not
+let it be seen. Then give him one of the two needles, and desire him
+to place it on the pivot, and turn it round, when it will stop at the
+colour of the card he chose; then taking that needle off, and
+exchanging it, unperceived, for the other, give it to a second person,
+telling him to do the same, and it will stop at the name of the
+identical card the first person chose.
+
+
+_The Magnetic Orrery._
+
+Construct a round box, Fig. 16, about eight inches diameter, and half
+an inch deep. On the bottom fix a circular pasteboard drawn like the
+figure. You are likewise to have another pasteboard, drawn exactly the
+same, which must turn freely in the box, by means of an axis placed on
+a pivot, one end of which is to be fixed in the centre of the circle.
+
+On each of the seven smaller circles on the pasteboard, which you have
+fixed at the bottom of the box, place a magnetic bar, two inches long,
+in the same direction with the diameters of those circles, and their
+poles, in the situations expressed in the figure.
+
+There must be an index like the hour hand of a dial, fixed on the axis
+of the central circle, by which the pasteboard circle in the box may
+be turned about; also a needle (forming in the figure the other hand)
+that will turn freely on the axis, without moving the circular
+pasteboard.
+
+In each of the places where the word _question_ is, write a different
+question; and in each of the seven circles where the planetary signs
+are, write two answers to each question; observing, that there must
+only be seven words in each question: for instance,
+
+In division No. 1, of the circle G, which stands opposite question
+No. 1, write the first word of the first answer. In the division No.
+2, of the next circle, write the second word; and so on to the last,
+which will be in the seventh division of the seventh circle.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 16.]
+
+In the eighth division of the first circle, write the first word of
+the second answer; in the ninth, the second word of the same answer;
+and so on to the fourteenth division of the seventh circle, which must
+contain the last word of that answer.
+
+The same must be done for all the seven questions, and to each of
+these must be assigned two answers, the words of which are to be
+dispersed through the seven circles.
+
+At the centre of each of these circles place a pivot, and have two
+sets of magnetic needles like the hands of a watch, the pointed end of
+one set being north, and the other south.
+
+Now, the index of the central circle being directed to any one of the
+questions, if you place one of the two magnetic needles on each of the
+seven lesser circles, they will fix themselves according to the
+directions of the bars on the corresponding circles at the bottom of
+the box, and consequently point to the seven words that compose the
+answer. If you place one of the other needles on each circle, it will
+point to the words that are diametrically opposite to those of the
+first answer, the north pole being in the place of the south pole of
+the other.
+
+You therefore present this orrery to any person, and desire him to
+choose one of the questions there written. You then set the index of
+the central circle to that question; and, putting one of the needles
+on each of the seven circles, you turn it about, and when they all
+settle, the seven words they point to compose the answer.
+
+The moveable needle, whose point in the figure stands at September, is
+to place against the names of the months; and when the party has fixed
+upon a question, you place that needle against the month in which he
+was born, which will make the ceremony appear a sort of magic
+divination. The planetary signs are merely intended to aid this
+deception, and give it the appearance of astrology.
+
+
+_The Magic Verse._
+
+The eight words which compose this Latin verse,
+
+ "_Tot sunt tibi dote, quot coeli sidera, virgo,_"[F]
+
+being privately placed in any one of the different combinations of
+which they are susceptible, and which are 40,320 in number, to tell
+the order in which they are placed.
+
+ [F] "Thy charms, O, Virgin! are as numerous as the stars of
+ heaven."
+
+Provide a box that shuts with hinges, and is eight inches long, three
+wide, and half an inch deep, Fig. 17. Have eight pieces of wood, about
+one-third of an inch thick, two inches long, and one and a half wide,
+which will therefore, when placed close together, exactly fill the
+box. In each of these pieces or tablets place a magnetic bar, with
+their poles, as is expressed in Fig. 18. The bars being covered over,
+write on each of the tablets, in the order they then stand, one of the
+words of the foregoing Latin verse.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 17.]
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 18.]
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 19.]
+
+On a very thin board of the same dimensions with the box, draw the
+eight circles, Fig. 19, A B C D E F G H, whose centres should be
+exactly over those of the eight tablets in the box, when the board is
+placed upon it. Divide each of those circles into eight parts, as in
+the figure, and in each of those divisions write one of the words of
+the Latin verse, and in the precise order expressed in the plate, so
+that when the board is placed over the box, the eight touched needles
+placed at the centre of the circles may be regulated by the poles of
+the bars in the box, and consequently the word that the needle points
+to in the circle will be the same with that inscribed on the tablet.
+Cover the board with a glass, to prevent the needles from rising off
+their pivots, as is done in the sea-compass.
+
+Over the board place four plates of glass, I L M N, Fig. 17, which
+will give the machine the figure of a truncated pyramid, of eight
+inches high. Cover it with a glass, or rather a board, in which are
+placed two lenses, O, of eight inches focus, and distant from each
+other about half an inch. Line the four plates of glass that compose
+the sides with very thin paper, that will admit the light, and at the
+same time prevent the company from seeing the circles on the board.
+
+These preparations being made, you give the box to any one, and tell
+him to place the tablets, on which the words are written privately, in
+what position he thinks proper, then to close the box, and, if he
+please, to wrap it up in paper, seal it, and give it to you. Then
+placing the board with the pyramid upon it, you immediately tell him
+the order in which the tablets are placed, by reading the words to
+which the needles on the circles point.
+
+
+
+
+INTERESTING EXPERIMENTS WITH THE AIR-PUMP.
+
+
+We shall not occupy the time of our readers by describing the form and
+nature of the air-pump; since those persons whose circumstances will
+enable them to have it, can purchase it properly made at an
+optician's, at less expense, and with far less trouble, than they can
+construct, or cause it to be constructed, themselves.
+
+
+_Bottles broken by Air._
+
+Take a square bottle of thin glass, and of any size. Apply it to the
+hole of the air-pump, and exhaust the air. The bottle will sustain the
+weight of the external air as long as it is able, but at length it
+will suddenly burst into very small particles, and with a loud
+explosion.
+
+An opposite effect will be produced, if the mouth of a bottle be
+sealed so close that no air can escape; then place it in the receiver,
+and exhaust the air from its surface. The air which is confined within
+the bottle, when the external air is drawn off, will act so powerfully
+as to break the bottle into pieces.
+
+
+_Glass broken by Air._
+
+Lay a square of glass on the top of an open receiver, and exhaust the
+air. The weight of the external air will press on the glass, and smash
+it to atoms.
+
+
+_The Hand fixed by Air._
+
+If a person hold his hand on an open receiver, and the air be
+exhausted, it will be fixed as if pressed by a weight of sixty pounds.
+
+
+
+_Water boiled by Air._
+
+Take water made so warm that you can just bear your hand in it, but
+that has not been boiled; put it under the receiver, and exhaust the
+air. Bubbles of air will soon be seen to rise, at first very small,
+but presently become larger, and will be at last so great, and rise
+with such rapidity, as to give the water the appearance of boiling.
+This will continue till the air is let into the receiver, when it will
+instantly cease.
+
+
+_Aërial Bubbles._
+
+Take a stone, or any heavy substance, and putting it in a large glass
+with water, place it in the receiver. The air being exhausted, the
+spring of that which is in the pores of the solid body, by expanding
+the particles, will make them rise on its surface in numberless
+globules, which resemble the pearly drops of dew on the tops of the
+grass. The effect ceases when the air is let into the receiver.
+
+
+_The floating Stone._
+
+To a piece of cork tie a small stone that will just sink it; and,
+putting it in a vessel of water, place it under the receiver. Then
+exhausting the receiver, the bubbles of air will expand from its
+pores, and, adhering to its surface, will render it, together with the
+stone, lighter than water, and consequently they will rise to the
+surface, and float.
+
+
+_Withered Fruit restored._
+
+Take a shrivelled apple, and, placing it under the receiver, exhaust
+the air. The apple will immediately be plumped up, and look as fresh
+as when first gathered: for this reason, that the pressure of the
+external air being taken off, the air in the apple extends it, so much
+indeed that it will sometimes burst. If the air be let into the
+receiver, the apple will be restored to its pristine shrivelled state.
+
+
+_Vegetable Air-Bubbles._
+
+Put a small branch of the tree with its leaves, or part of a small
+plant, in a vessel of water, and, placing the vessel in the receiver,
+exhaust the air.
+
+When the pressure of the external air is taken off, the spring of that
+contained in the air-vessels of the plant, by expanding the particles,
+will make them rise from the orifices of all the vessels for a long
+time together, and produce a most beautiful appearance.
+
+
+_The Mercurial Wand._
+
+Take a piece of stick, cut it even at each end with a penknife, and
+immerse it in a vessel of mercury. When the air is pumped out of the
+receiver, it will at the same time come out of the pores of the wood,
+through the mercury, as will be visible at each end of the stick. When
+the air is again let into the receiver, it falls on the surface of the
+mercury, and forces it into the pores of the wood, to possess the
+place of the air.
+
+When the rod is taken out, it will be found considerably heavier than
+before, and that it has changed its colour, being now all over of a
+bluish hue. If cut transversely, the quicksilver will be seen to
+glitter in every part of it.
+
+
+_The Magic Bell._
+
+Fix a small bell to the wire that goes through the top of the
+receiver. If you shake the wire, the bell will ring while the air is
+in the receiver; but when the air is drawn off, the sound will by
+degrees become faint, till at last not the least noise can be heard.
+As you let the air in again, the sound returns.
+
+
+_Feathers heavier than Lead._
+
+At one end of a fine balance, hang a piece of lead, and at the other
+as many feathers as will poise it; then place the balance in the
+receiver. As the air is exhausted, the feathers will appear to
+overweigh the lead, and when all the air is drawn off, the feathers
+will preponderate, and the lead ascend.
+
+
+_The self-moving Wheel._
+
+Take a circle of tin, about ten inches in diameter, or of any other
+size that will go into the receiver, and to its circumference fix a
+number of tin vanes, each about an inch square. Let this wheel be
+placed between two upright pieces on an axis, whose extremities are
+quite small, so that the wheel may turn in a vertical position with
+the least possible force. Place the wheel and axis in the receiver,
+and exhaust the air. Let there be a small pipe with a cock; one end of
+the pipe to be outside the top of the receiver, and the other to come
+directly over the vanes of the wheel.
+
+When the air is exhausted, turn the cock, and a current will rush
+against the vanes of the wheel, and set it in motion, which will
+increase, till the receiver is filled with air.
+
+
+_The Artificial Halo._
+
+Place a candle on one side of the receiver, and let the spectator
+place himself at a distance from the other side. Directly the air
+begins to be exhausted, the light of the candle will be refracted in
+circles of various colours.
+
+
+_The Mercurial Shower._
+
+Cement a piece of wood into the lower part of the neck of an open
+receiver, and pour mercury over it. After a few strokes of the pump,
+the pressure of the air on the mercury will force it through the pores
+of the wood in the form of a beautiful shower. If you take care that
+the receiver is clear and free from spots or dust, and it is dry
+weather, it will appear like a fiery shower, when exhibited in a dark
+room.
+
+
+_Magic Fountain._
+
+Take a tall glass tube, hermetically sealed both at top and bottom, by
+means of a brass cap screwed on to a stop-cock, and place it on the
+plate of the pump. When the air is exhausted, turn the cock, take the
+tube off the plate, and plunge it into a basin of mercury or water.
+Then the cock being again turned, the fluid, by the pressure of the
+air, will play upon the tube in the form of a beautiful fountain.
+
+
+_The Exploded Bladder._
+
+Take a glass pipe open at both ends, to one of which tie fast a wet
+bladder, and let it dry. Then place it on the plate of the pump. While
+the air presses the bladder equally on both sides, it will lie even
+and straight; but as soon as the air is exhausted, it will press
+inwards, and be quite concave on the upper side. In proportion as the
+air is exhausted, the bladder will become more stretched; it will soon
+yield to the incumbent pressure, and burst with a loud explosion. To
+make this experiment more easy, one part of the bladder should be
+scraped with a knife, and some of its external fibres taken off.
+
+
+_The Cemented Bladder._
+
+Tie the neck of the bladder to a stop-cock, which is to be screwed to
+the plate of the pump, and the air exhausted from the bladder; then
+turn the stop-cock, to prevent the re-entrance of the air, and unscrew
+the whole from the pump. The bladder will be transformed into two flat
+skins, so closely applied together, that the strongest man cannot
+raise them half an inch from each other; for an ordinary-sized
+bladder, of six inches across the widest part, will have one side
+pressed upon the other with a force equal to 396 pounds' weight.
+
+
+_Cork heavier than Lead._
+
+Let a large piece of cork be pendent from one end of a balance beam,
+and a small piece of lead from the other; the lead should rather
+preponderate. If this apparatus be placed under a receiver on the
+pump, you will find that when the air is exhausted, the lead, which
+seemed the heaviest body, will ascend, and the cork outweigh the lead.
+Restore the air, and the effect will cease. This phenomenon is only on
+account of the difference of the size in the two objects. The lead,
+which owes its heaviness to the operation of the air, yields to a
+lighter because a larger substance when deprived of its assistance.
+
+
+_The animated Bacchus._
+
+Construct a figure of Bacchus, seated on a cask; let his belly be
+formed by a bladder, and let a tube proceed from his mouth to the
+cask. Fill this tube with coloured water or wine, then place the whole
+under the receiver. Exhaust the air, and the liquor will be thrown up
+into his mouth. While he is drinking, his belly will expand.
+
+
+_The Artificial Balloon._
+
+Take a bladder containing only a small quantity of air, and a piece of
+lead to it, sufficient to sink it, if immersed in water. Put this
+apparatus into a jar of water, and place the whole under a receiver.
+Then exhaust the air, and the bladder will expand, become a balloon
+lighter than the fluid in which it floats, and ascend, carrying the
+weight with it.
+
+
+_Curious Experiments with a Viper._
+
+Many natural philosophers, in their eagerness to display the powers of
+science, have overlooked one of the first duties of life, humanity;
+and, with this view, have tortured and killed many harmless animals,
+to exemplify the amazing effects of the air-pump. We, however, will
+not stain the pages of this little work by recommending any such
+species of cruelty, which in many instances can merely gratify
+curiosity; but as our readers might like to read the effect on
+animals, we extract from the learned Boyle an account of his
+experiment with a viper.
+
+He took a newly-caught viper, and, shutting it up in a small receiver,
+extracted the air. At first, upon the air being drawn away, the viper
+began to swell; a short time after it gasped and opened its jaws; it
+then resumed its former lankness, and began to move up and down within
+the receiver, as if to seek for air. After a while, it foamed a
+little, leaving the foam sticking to the inside of the glass; soon
+after, the body and neck became prodigiously swelled, and a blister
+appeared on its back. Within an hour and a half from the time the
+receiver was exhausted, the distended viper moved, being yet alive,
+though its jaws remained quite stretched; its black tongue reached
+beyond the mouth, which had also become black in the inside: in this
+situation it continued for three hours; but on the air being
+re-admitted, the viper's mouth was presently closed, and soon after
+opened again; and these motions continued some time, as if there were
+still some remains of life.
+
+It is thus with animals of every kind; even minute microscopical
+insects cannot live without air.
+
+
+_Experiments with Sparrows._
+
+Count Morozzo placed successively several full-grown sparrows under a
+glass receiver, inverted over water. It was filled with atmospheric
+air, and afterwards with vital air. He found,
+
+ First.--That in _atmospheric_ air, HOURS MIN.
+ The first sparrow lived 3 0
+ The second sparrow lived 0 3
+ The third sparrow lived 0 1
+
+The water rose in the vessels eight lines during the life of the
+first; four during the life of the second; and the third produced no
+absorption.
+
+ Second.--In _vital_ air or _oxygen_, HOURS MIN.
+ The first sparrow lived 5 23
+ The second 2 10
+ The third 1 30
+ The fourth 1 10
+ The fifth 0 30
+ The sixth 0 47
+ The seventh 0 27
+ The eighth 0 30
+ The ninth 0 22
+ The tenth 0 21
+
+The above experiments elicit the following conclusions:--1. That an
+animal will live longer in vital than in atmospheric air.--2. That one
+animal can live in air, in which another has died.--3. That,
+independently of air, some respect must be had to the constitution of
+the animal; for the sixth lived 47 minutes, the fifth only thirty.--4.
+That there is either an absorption of air, or the production of a new
+kind of air, which is absorbed by the water as it rises.
+
+
+
+
+AMUSING EXPERIMENTS IN ELECTRICITY.
+
+
+_The Animated Feather._
+
+Electrify a smooth glass tube with a rubber, and hold a small feather
+at a short distance from it. The feather will instantly fly to the
+tube, and adhere to it for a short time; it will then fly off, and the
+tube can never be brought close to the feather till it has touched the
+side of the room, or some other body that communicates with the
+ground. If, therefore, you take care to keep the tube between the
+feather and the side of the room, you may drive it round to all parts
+of the room without touching it; and, what is very remarkable, the
+same side of the feather will be constantly opposite the tube.
+
+While the feather is flying before the smooth tube, it will be
+immediately attracted by an excited rough tube or a stick of wax, and
+fly continually from one tube to the other, till the electricity of
+both is discharged.
+
+
+_The Candle lighted by Electricity._
+
+Charge a small coated phial, whose knob is bent outwards so as to hang
+a little over the body of the phial; then wrap some loose cotton over
+the extremity of a long brass pin or wire, so as to stick moderately
+fast to its substance. Next roll this extremity of the pin, which is
+wrapped up in cotton, in some fine powdered resin; then apply the
+extremity of the pin or wire to the external coating of the charged
+phial, and bring, as quickly as possible, the other extremity, that is
+wrapped round with cotton, to the knob; the powdered resin takes fire,
+and communicates its flame to the cotton, and both together burn long
+enough to light a candle. Dipping the cotton in oil of turpentine will
+do as well, if you use a larger sized jar.
+
+
+_Candle Bombs._
+
+Procure some small glass bubbles, having a neck about an inch long,
+with very slender bores, by means of which a small quantity of water
+is to be introduced into them, and the orifice afterwards closed up.
+This stalk being put through the wick of a burning candle, the flame
+boils the water into a steam, and the glass is broken with a loud
+explosion.
+
+
+_The Artificial Spider._
+
+Cut a piece of burnt cork, about the size of a pea, into the shape of
+a spider; make its legs of linen thread, and put a grain or two of
+lead in it to give it more weight. Suspend it by a fine line of silk
+between an electrified arch and an excited stick of wax; and it will
+jump continually from one body to the other, moving its legs at the
+same time, as if animated, to the great surprise of the unconscious
+spectator.
+
+
+_The Miraculous Portrait._
+
+Get a large print (suppose of the king) with a frame and glass. Cut
+the print out at about two inches from the frame all round; then with
+thin paste fix the border that is left on the inside of the glass,
+pressing it smooth and close; fill up the vacancy, by covering the
+glass well with leaf-gold or thin tin-foil, so that it may lie close.
+Cover likewise the inner edge of the bottom part of the back of the
+frame with the same tin-foil, and make a communication between that
+and the tin-foil in the middle of the glass; then put in the board,
+and that side is finished. Next turn up the glass, and cover the
+fore-side with tin-foil, exactly over that on the back part; and when
+it is dry, paste over it the panel of the print that was cut out,
+observing to bring the corresponding parts of the border and panel
+together, so that the picture will appear as at first, only part of it
+behind the glass, and part before. Lastly, hold the print horizontally
+by the top, and place a little moveable gilt crown on the king's head.
+
+Now, if the tin-foil on both sides of the glass be moderately
+electrified, and another person take hold of the bottom of the frame
+with one hand, so that his fingers touch the tin-foil, and with the
+other hand attempt to take off the crown, he will receive a very smart
+blow, and fail in the attempt. The operator, who holds the frame by
+the upper end, where there is no tin-foil, feels nothing of the shock,
+and can touch the face of the king without danger, which he pretends
+is a test of his loyalty.
+
+
+_The Cup of Tantalus._
+
+You place a cup of any sort of metal on a stool of baked wood or a
+cake of wax. Fill it to the brim with any liquor; let it communicate
+with the branch by a small chain; and when it is moderately
+electrified, desire a person to taste the liquor, without touching the
+cup with his hands, and he will instantly receive a shock on his lips.
+The motion of the wheel being stopped, you taste the liquor yourself,
+and desire the rest of the company to do so; you then give your
+operator (who is concealed in an adjoining room) the signal, and he
+again charges the cup; you desire the same person to taste the liquor
+a second time, and he will receive a second shock.
+
+
+_Magical Explosion._
+
+Make up some gunpowder, in the form of a small cartridge, in each end
+of which put a blunt wire, so that the ends inside of the cartridge be
+about half an inch off each other; then join the chain that proceeds
+from one side of the electrifying battery, to the wire at the other
+end, the shock will instantly pass through the powder, and set it on
+fire.
+
+
+_Artificial Earthquake._
+
+In the middle of a large basin of water, lay a round wet board. On the
+board place any kind of building, made of pasteboard, of separate
+pieces, and not fastened together. Then, fixing a wire that
+communicates with the two chains of the electrifying battery, so that
+it may pass over the board and the surface of the water, upon making
+the explosion, the water will become agitated as in an earthquake, and
+the board, moving up and down, will overturn the structure, while the
+cause of the commotion is totally concealed.
+
+
+_The Magic Dance._
+
+From the middle of the brass arch suspend three small bells. The two
+outer bells hang by chains, and the middle one by a silk string, while
+a chain connects it with the floor. Two small knobs of brass, which
+serve as clappers, hang by silk strings, one between each two bells.
+Therefore, when the two outer bells communicating with the conductor
+are electrified, they will attract the clappers and be struck by them.
+The clappers being thus loaded with electricity, will be repelled, and
+fly to discharge themselves upon the middle bell, after which they
+will be again attracted by the outer bells; and thus, by striking the
+bells alternately, the ringing may be continued as long as the
+operator pleases.
+
+You next suspend a plate of metal from the same part of the arch to
+which the bells are connected; then, at the distance of a few inches
+from the arch, and exactly under it, place a metal stand _of the same
+size_. On the stand place several figures of men, animals, or what you
+please, cut in paper, and pretty sharply pointed at each extremity.
+When the plate that hangs from the arch is electrified, the figures
+will dance with astonishing rapidity, and the bells will keep ringing,
+to the no small entertainment of the spectators.
+
+
+_The Electrical Fountain._
+
+Suspend a vessel of water from the middle of the brass arch, and place
+in the vessel a small tube. The water will be one continued stream;
+and if the electrification be strong, a number of streams will issue,
+in form of a cone, the top of which will be at the extremity of the
+tube. This experiment may be stopped and renewed almost instantly, as
+if at the word of command.
+
+
+_The Electric Kite._
+
+Make a small cross of two light strips of cedar, the arms so long as
+to reach to the four corners of a large thin silk handkerchief, when
+extended; tie the corners of the handkerchief to the extremities of
+the cross; and you have the body of the kite, which being properly
+accommodated with a tail, loop, and string, will rise in the air like
+those made of paper; but this being silk, it is more adapted to bear
+the wet and wind of a thunder gust, without tearing. To the top of the
+upright stick of the cross is to be fixed a very sharp-pointed wire,
+rising a foot or more above the wood. To the end of the twine is to be
+tied a silk ribbon, and where the silk and twine join, a key may be
+fastened. This kite is to be raised when a thunder-storm appears to be
+coming on; and the person who holds the string must stand within a
+door or window, or under some cover, so that the silk ribbon may not
+be wet; and care must be taken that the twine do not touch the frame
+of the door or window. As soon as any of the thunder clouds come over
+the kite, the pointed wire will draw the electric fire from them, and
+the kite, with all the twine, will be electrified, while the loose
+filaments of the twine will stand out every way, and be attracted by
+an approaching finger. When the rain has wetted the kite and twine, so
+that it can conduct the electric fire freely, you will find it stream
+out plentifully from the key, on the approach of your knuckle. At this
+key an electric phial may be charged; and from electric fire thus
+obtained, spirits may be kindled, and all the other electric
+experiments performed which are usually done by the help of a rubbed
+glass or tube; and thereby the identity of the electric matter with
+that of lightning completely demonstrated.
+
+
+_The Magic Chase._
+
+On the top of a finely-pointed wire, rising perpendicularly from the
+conductor, let another wire, sharpened at each end, be made to move
+freely, as on a centre. If it be well balanced, and the points bent
+horizontally, in opposite directions, it will, when electrified, turn
+very swiftly round, by the re-action of the air against the current
+which flows from off the points. These points may be nearly concealed,
+and the figures of men and horses, with hounds, and a hare, stag, or
+fox, may be placed upon the wires, so as to turn round with them, when
+they appear as if in pursuit. The chase may be diversified, and a
+greater variety of figures upon them, by increasing the number of
+wires proceeding from the same centre.
+
+
+_The Unconscious Incendiary._
+
+Let a person stand upon a stool made of baked wood, or upon a cake of
+wax, and hold a chain which communicates with the branch. On turning
+the wheel he will become electrified; his whole body forming part of
+the prime conductor; and he will emit sparks whenever he is touched by
+a person standing on the floor.
+
+If the electrified person put his finger, or a rod of iron, into a
+dish containing warm spirits of wine, it will be immediately in a
+blaze; and if there be a wick or thread in the spirit, that
+communicates with a train of gunpowder, he may be made to blow up a
+magazine, or set a city on fire, with a piece of cold iron, and at the
+same time be ignorant of the mischief he is doing.
+
+
+_The Inconceivable Shock._
+
+Put in a person's hand a wire that is fixed on to the hook that comes
+from the chain, which communicates with one side of the battery, and
+in his other hand put a small wire with a hook at the end of it, which
+you direct him to fix on to a hook which comes from the other chain.
+On attempting to do this, he will instantly receive a shock from his
+body, without being able to guess the cause.
+
+Care should be taken that the shock be not too strong; and regard
+should be had to the constitution and disposition of the party, as a
+shock that would hardly affect one person, might be productive of
+very serious consequences to another.
+
+Much entertainment may be derived from concealing the chain that
+communicates with that which proceeds from the outside of the battery,
+under a carpet, and placing the wire that communicates with the chain
+from the inside, in such a manner that a person may put his hand on it
+without suspicion, at the same time that his feet are upon the other
+wire.
+
+The whole company may be made to partake of the shock, by joining
+hands, and forming a circle. The experiment may also be varied if they
+tread upon each other's toes, or lay their hands upon each other's
+heads. It might happen, by the latter method, that the whole company
+would be struck to the ground; but it will be productive of no danger,
+and very little inconvenience; on the contrary, it has happened that
+they have neither heard nor felt the shock.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+To exhibit the five following amusements in electricity, the room in
+which they are performed must be darkened.
+
+
+_The Miraculous Luminaries._
+
+You must previously prepare the following phosphorus: Calcine common
+oyster-shells, by burning them in the fire for half an hour; then
+reduce them to powder; of the clearest of which take three parts, and
+of flowers of sulphur one part; put the mixture into a crucible, about
+an inch and a half deep. Let it burn in a strong fire for rather
+better than an hour; and when it is cool, turn it out and break it in
+pieces; and, taking those pieces into a dark place, scrape off the
+parts that shine brightest, which, if good, will be a white powder.
+
+Then construct a circular board, of three or four feet diameter, on
+the centre of which draw in gum-water, or any adhesive liquid, a
+half-moon, of three or four inches diameter, and a number of stars
+round it, at different distances, and of various magnitudes. Strew the
+phosphorus over the figures, to the thickness of about a quarter of an
+inch, laying one coat over the other. Place this board behind a
+curtain; and when you draw the curtain up or back, discharge one
+electrifying jar or phial over each figure, at the distance of about
+an inch, and they will become illuminated, exhibiting a very striking
+resemblance of the moon and stars; and will continue to shine for
+about half an hour, their splendour becoming gradually more faint.
+
+
+_The Fiery Shower._
+
+On the plate put a number of any kind of seeds, grains of sand, or
+brass dust. The conductor being strongly electrified, those light
+particles will be attracted and repelled by the plate suspended from
+the conductor, with amazing rapidity, so as to exhibit a perfect fiery
+shower.
+
+Another way is by a sponge that has been soaked in water. When this
+sponge is first hung to the conductor, the water will drop from it
+very slowly; but when it is electrified, the drops will fall very
+fast, and appear like small globes of fire, illuminating the basin
+into which they fall.
+
+
+_The Illuminated Vacuum._
+
+Take a tall receiver that is very dry, and fix through the top of it,
+with cement, a blunt wire; then exhaust the receiver, and present the
+knob of the wire to the conductor, and every spark will pass through
+the vacuum in a broad stream of light, visible through the whole
+length of the receiver, let it be as tall as it will. This generally
+divides into a variety of beautiful rivulets, which are continually
+changing their course, uniting and dividing again in the most pleasing
+manner.
+
+If a jar be discharged through this vacuum, it presents the appearance
+of a very dense body of fire, darting directly through the centre of
+the vacuum, without touching the sides; whereas, when a single spark
+passes through, it generally goes more or less to the side, and a
+finger placed on the outside of the glass will draw it wherever a
+person pleases. If the vessel be grasped by both hands, every spark is
+felt like the pulsation of a large artery; and all the fire makes
+towards the hands. This pulsation is even felt at some distance from
+the receiver, and a light is seen between the hand and the glass.
+
+All this while, the pointed wire is supposed to be electrified
+positively; if it be electrified negatively, the appearance is
+astonishingly different; instead of streams of fire, nothing is seen
+but one uniform luminous appearance, like a white cloud, or the _milky
+way_ in a clear star-light night. It seldom reaches the whole length
+of the vessel, but generally appears only at the end of the wire, like
+a lucid ball.
+
+If a small phial be inserted in the neck of a small receiver, so that
+the external surface of the glass be exposed to the vacuum, it will
+produce a very beautiful appearance. The phial must be coated on the
+inside; and while it is charging, at every spark taken from the
+conductor into the inside, a flash of light is seen to dart at the
+same time from every part of the external surface of the phial, so as
+to quite fill the receiver. Upon making the discharge, the light is
+seen to run in a much closer body, the whole coming out at once.
+
+
+_The Illuminated Cylinder._
+
+Provide a glass cylinder, three feet long, and three inches diameter;
+near the bottom of it fix a brass plate, and have another brass plate,
+so contrived that you may let it down the cylinder, and bring it as
+near the first plate as you desire. Let this cylinder be exhausted and
+insulated, and when the upper part is electrified, the electric matter
+will pass from one plate to the other, when they are at the greatest
+distance from each other that the cylinder will admit. The brass plate
+at the bottom of the cylinder will also be as strongly electrified as
+if it were connected by a wire to the prime conductor.
+
+The electric matter, as it passes through this vacuum, presents a most
+brilliant spectacle, exhibiting sparkling flashes of fire the whole
+length of the tube, and of a bright silver hue, representing the most
+lively exhalations of the aurora borealis.
+
+
+_The Electric Aurora Borealis._
+
+Make a Torricellian vacuum[G] in a glass tube, about three feet long,
+and hermetically sealed.[H] Let one end of this tube be held in the
+hand, and the other applied to the conductor; and immediately the
+whole tube will be illuminated from one end; and when taken from the
+conductor will continue luminous, without interruption, for a
+considerable time, very often about a quarter of an hour. If, after
+this, it be drawn through the hand either way, the light will be
+uncommonly brilliant, and, without the least interruption, from one
+end to the other, even to its whole length. After this operation,
+which discharges it in a great measure, it will still flash at
+intervals, though it be held only at the extremity, and quite still;
+but if it be grasped by the other hand at the same time, in a
+different place, strong flashes of light will dart from one end to the
+other. This will continue for twenty-four hours, and often longer,
+without any fresh excitation. Small and long glass tubes, exhausted of
+air, and bent in many irregular crooks and angles, will, when properly
+electrified, exhibit a very beautiful representation of vivid flashes
+of lightning.
+
+ [G] A Torricellian vacuum is made by filling a tube with pure
+ mercury and then inverting it, in the same manner as in
+ making a barometer; for as the mercury runs out, all the
+ space above will be a true vacuum.
+
+ [H] A glass is hermetically sealed by holding the end of it
+ in the flame of a candle, till it begin to melt, and then
+ twisting it together with a pair of pincers.
+
+
+_The Electrical Orrery._
+
+By the motion of circulating points, we may in some measure imitate
+the revolutions of the heavenly bodies, forming what is called the
+_Electrical Orrery_. Let a single wire, with the extremities pointed
+and turned, be nicely balanced on a point; fix a small glass ball over
+its centre to represent the sun. At one extremity of the wire, let a
+small wire be soldered perpendicularly, and on this balance another
+small wire with its ends pointed and turned, and having a small pith
+ball in its centre, to represent the earth, and a smaller ball of the
+same kind at one of the angles, for the moon. Let the whole be
+supported upon a glass pillar, and be conducted by a chain proceeding
+from the prime conductor to the wire supporting the glass ball. Now,
+when the machine is put in motion, the wires will turn round, so that
+the ball representing the earth will move round the central ball, and
+the little ball at the angle of the smaller wire will at the same time
+revolve about the earth.
+
+
+_The Electrified Cotton._
+
+Take a small lock of cotton, extended in every direction as much as
+can conveniently be done, and by a linen thread about five or six
+inches long, or by a thread drawn out of the same cotton, tie it to
+the end of the prime conductor; then set the machine in motion, and
+the lock of cotton, on being electrified, will immediately swell, by
+repelling its filaments from one another, and will stretch itself
+towards the nearest conductor. In this situation let the cylinder be
+kept in motion, and present the end of your finger, or the knob of a
+wire, towards the lock of cotton, which will then immediately move
+towards the finger, and endeavour to touch it; but take with the
+other hand a pointed needle, and present its point towards the cotton,
+a little above the end of the finger, and the cotton will be observed
+immediately to shrink upwards, and move towards the prime conductor.
+Remove the needle, and the cotton will come again towards the finger.
+Present the needle, and the cotton will shrink again.
+
+
+_The Electric Sparks._
+
+When the prime conductor is situated in its proper place, and
+electrified by whirling the cylinder, if a metallic wire, with a ball
+at its extremity, or the knuckle or a finger be presented to the prime
+conductor, a spark will be seen to issue between them, which will be
+more vivid, and will be attended with a greater or less explosion,
+according as the ball is larger. The strongest and most vivid sparks
+are drawn from that end or side of the prime conductor which is
+farthest from the cylinder. The sparks have the same appearance
+whether they be taken from the positive or negative conductor; they
+sometimes appear like a long line of fire reaching from the prime
+conductor to the opposed body, and often (particularly when the spark
+is long, and different conducting substances in the line of its
+direction) it will have the appearance of being bent to sharp angles
+in different places, exactly resembling a flash of lightning.
+
+The figure of a spark varies with the superficial dimensions of the
+part from which it is taken. If it be drawn from a ball of two or
+three inches in diameter, it will have the appearance of a straight
+line; but if the ball from which it is drawn be much smaller, as half
+an inch in diameter, it will assume the zig-zag appearance above
+mentioned.
+
+
+_Dancing Balls._
+
+Take a common tumbler or glass jar, and having placed a brass ball in
+one of the holes of the prime conductor, set the machine in motion,
+and let the balls touch the inside of the tumbler; while the ball
+touches only one point, no more of the surface of the glass will be
+electrified, but by moving the tumblers about, so as to make the ball
+touch many points successively, all the points will be electrified, as
+will appear by turning down the tumbler over a number of pith or cork
+balls placed on a table. These balls will immediately begin to fly
+about.
+
+
+_The Leyden Phial._
+
+When a nail or piece of thick brass wire, &c., is put into a small
+apothecary's phial, and electrified, remarkable effects follow; but
+the phial must be very dry or warm. Rub it once beforehand with your
+finger, on which put some pounded chalk. If a little mercury, or a few
+drops of spirit of wine, be put into it, the experiment succeeds the
+better. As soon as this phial and nail are removed from the
+electrifying glass, or the prime conductor, to which it has been
+exposed, is taken away, it throws out a stream of flame so long, that
+with this burning-machine in your hand, you may take about sixty steps
+in walking about your room. When it is electrified strongly, you may
+take it into another room, and there fire spirits of wine with it. If,
+while it is electrifying, you put your finger, or a piece of gold
+which you hold in your hand, to the nail, you receive a shock which
+stuns your arms and shoulders.
+
+A tin tube, or a man placed upon electrics, is electrified much
+stronger by these means than in the common way. When you present this
+phial and nail it to a tin tube, fifteen feet long, nothing but
+experience can make a person believe how strongly it is electrified.
+Two thin glasses have been broken by the shock of it. It appears
+extraordinary, that when this phial and nail are in contact with their
+conducting or non-conducting matter, the strong shock does not follow.
+
+
+_The Self-moving Wheel._
+
+The self-moving wheel is made of a thin round plate of window-glass,
+seventeen inches in diameter, well gilt on both sides, to within two
+inches of the circumference. Two small hemispheres of wood are then
+fixed with cement, to the middle of the upper and under sides,
+centrally opposite, and in each of them a thick strong wire, eight or
+ten inches long, making together the axis of the wheel. It turns
+horizontally on a point at the lower end of its axis, which rests on a
+bit of brass, cemented within a glass salt-cellar. The upper end of
+its axis passes through a hole in a thin brass plate, cemented to a
+long and strong piece of glass, which keeps it six or eight inches
+distant from any non-electric, and has a small ball of wax or metal on
+its top.
+
+In a circle on the table which supports the wheel, are fixed twelve
+small pillars of glass, at about eleven inches distance, with a
+thimble on the top of each. On the edge of the wheel is a small
+leaden bullet, communicating by a wire with the upper surface of the
+wheel; and about six inches from it is another bullet, communicating,
+in like manner, with the under surface. When the wheel is to be
+charged by the upper surface, a communication must be made from the
+under surface with the table.
+
+When it is well charged it begins to move. The bullet nearest to a
+pillar moves towards the thimble on that pillar, and, passing by,
+electrifies it, and then pushes itself from it. The succeeding bullet,
+which communicates with the other surface of the glass, more strongly
+attracts that thimble, on account of its being electrified before by
+the other bullet; and thus the wheel increases its motion, till the
+resistance of the air regulates it. It will go half an hour, and make,
+one minute with another, twenty turns in a minute, which is six
+hundred turns in the whole, the bullet of the upper surface giving in
+each turn twelve sparks to the thimbles, which make seven thousand two
+hundred sparks, and the bullet of the under surface receiving as many
+from the thimble, these bullets moving in the time nearly two thousand
+five hundred feet. The thimbles should be well fixed, and in so exact
+a circle, that the bullets may pass within a very small distance of
+each of them.
+
+If instead of two bullets you put eight, four communicating with the
+upper surface, and four with the under surface, placed alternately,
+(which eight, at about six inches distance, complete the
+circumference,) the force and swiftness will be greatly increased, the
+wheel making fifty turns in a minute; but then it will not continue
+moving so long.
+
+
+_Resin ignited by Electricity._
+
+Wrap some cotton wool, containing as much powdered resin as it will
+hold, about one of the knobs of a discharging-rod. Then having charged
+a Leyden jar, apply the naked knob of the rod to the external coating,
+and the knob enveloped by the cotton to the ball of the wire. The act
+of discharging the jar will set fire to the resin.
+
+A piece of phosphorus or camphor wrapped in cotton wool, and used in
+the same way, will be much more easily inflamed.
+
+
+_Spirits ignited by Electricity._
+
+Hang a small ball with a stem to the prime conductor, so that the ball
+may project below the conductor. Then warm a little ardent spirit, by
+holding it a short time over a candle in a metallic spoon; hold the
+spoon about an inch below the ball, and set the machine in motion. A
+spark will soon issue from the ball and set fire to the spirits.
+
+This experiment may be varied different ways, and may be rendered very
+agreeable to a company of spectators. A person, for instance, standing
+upon an electric stool, and communicating with the prime conductor,
+may hold the spoon with the spirits in his hand, and another person,
+standing upon the floor, may set the spirits on fire, by bringing his
+finger within a small distance of it. Instead of his finger he may
+fire the spirits with a piece of ice, when the experiment will seem
+much more surprising. If the spoon be held by the person standing upon
+the floor, and the insulated person bring some conducting substance
+over the surface of the spirit, the experiment succeeds as well.
+
+
+_The Electric Balloon._
+
+Two balloons, made of the allantoides of a calf, are to be filled with
+hydrogen gas, of which each contains about two cubic feet. To each of
+these is to be suspended, by a silken thread about eight feet long,
+such a weight as is just sufficient to prevent it from rising higher
+in the air; they are connected, the one with the positive, the other
+with the negative conductor, by small wires about 30 feet in length;
+and being kept nearly 20 feet asunder, are placed as far from the
+machine as the length of the wires will admit. On being electrified,
+these balloons will rise up in the air as high as the wire will allow,
+attracting each other, and uniting as it were into one cloud, gently
+descending.
+
+
+_The Illuminated Water._
+
+Connect one end of a chain with the outside of a charged phial, and
+let the other end lie on the table. Place the end of another piece of
+chain at the distance of about a quarter of an inch from the former;
+and set a glass decanter of water on these separated ends. On making
+the discharge, the water will appear perfectly luminous.
+
+The electric spark may be rendered visible in water, in the following
+manner:--Take a glass tube of about half an inch in diameter, and six
+inches long; fill it with water, and to each extremity of the tube
+adapt a cork, which may confine the water; through each cork insert a
+blunt wire, so that the extremities of the wires within the tube may
+be very near one another; then, on connecting one of these wires with
+the coating of a small charged phial, and touching the other wire with
+the knob of it, the shock will pass through the wires, and cause a
+vivid spark to appear within their extremities within the tube. The
+charge in this experiment must be very weak, or there will be danger
+of bursting the tube.
+
+
+_The Electrified Ball._
+
+Place an ivory ball on the prime conductor of the machine, and take a
+strong spark, or send the charge of a Leyden phial through its centre,
+and the ball will appear perfectly luminous; but if the charge be not
+sent through the centre, it will pass over the surface of the ball and
+singe it. A spark made to pass through a ball of box-wood, not only
+illuminates the whole, but makes it appear of a beautiful crimson, or
+rather a fine scarlet colour.
+
+
+_Illuminated Phosphorus._
+
+Put some of Canton's phosphorus into a clear glass phial, and stop it
+with a glass stopper, or a cork and sealing-wax. If this wire be kept
+in a darkened room (which for this experiment must be very dark) it
+will give no light; but let two or three strong sparks be drawn from
+the prime conductor, when the phial is kept about two inches distant
+from the sparks, so that it may be exposed to that light, and this
+phial will receive the light and afterwards will appear illuminated
+for a considerable time.
+
+This powder may be stuck upon a board by means of the white of an egg,
+so as to represent figures of planets, letters, or any thing else, at
+the pleasure of the operator, and these figures may be illuminated in
+the dark, in the same manner as the above described phial.
+
+A beautiful method of expressing geometrical figures with the above
+powder, is to bend small glass tubes, of about the tenth part of an
+inch diameter, in the shape of the figure desired, and then to fill
+them with the phosphoric powder. These may be illuminated in the
+manner described; and they are not so subject to be spoiled, as the
+figures represented upon the board frequently are.
+
+
+_The Luminous Writing._
+
+Small pieces of tin-foil may be stuck on a flat piece of glass, so as
+to represent various fanciful figures. Upon the same principle is the
+word LIGHT produced, in luminous characters.
+
+It is formed by the small separations of the tin-foil pasted on a
+piece of glass fixed in a frame of baked wood. To use this, the frame
+must be held in the hand, and the ball presented to the conductor. The
+spark will then be exhibited in the intervals composing the word, from
+whence it passes to the hook, and thence to the ground by a chain. The
+brilliancy of this is equal to that of the spiral tubes.
+
+
+_The Electric Explosion._
+
+Take a card, a quire of paper, or the cover of a book; and keep it
+close to the outside coating of a charged jar: put one knob of the
+discharging-rod upon the card, quire of paper, &c., so that, between
+the knob and coating of the jar, the thickness of that card or quire
+of paper only is interposed; lastly, by bringing the other knob of the
+discharged rod near the knob of the jar, make the discharge, and the
+electric spark will pierce a hole (or perhaps several) quite through
+the card or quire of paper. This hole has a bur raised on each side,
+except the card, &c., be pressed hard between the discharging-rod and
+the jar. If this experiment be made with two cards instead of one,
+which, however, must be kept very little distant from one another,
+each of the cards, after the explosion, will be found pierced with one
+or more holes, and each hole will have burs on both surfaces of each
+card. The hole, or holes, are larger or smaller, according as the
+card, &c., is more damp or more dry. It is remarkable, that if the
+nostrils are presented to it, they will be affected with a sulphurous,
+or rather a phosphoric smell, just like that produced by an excited
+electric.
+
+If, instead of paper, a very thin plate of glass, resin, sealing-wax,
+or the like, be interposed between the knob of the discharging-rod and
+the outside coating of the jar, on making the discharge, this will be
+broken in several pieces.
+
+
+_Electrified Air._
+
+Fix two or three pointed needles into the prime conductor of an
+electrical machine, and set the glass in motion so as to keep the
+prime conductor electrified for several minutes. If now, an
+electometer be brought within the air that is contiguous to the prime
+conductor, it will exhibit signs of electricity, and this air will
+continue electrified for some time, even after the machine has been
+removed into another room. The air, in this case, is electrified
+positively; it maybe negatively electrified by fixing the needles in
+the negative conductor while insulated, and making a communication
+between the prime conductor and the table, by means of a chain or
+other conducting substance.
+
+The air of a room may be electrified in another way. Charge a large
+jar, and insulate it; then connect two or more sharp-pointed wires or
+needles, with the knob of the jar, and connect the outside coating of
+the jar with the table. If the jar be charged positively, the air of
+the room will soon become positively electrified likewise; but if the
+jar be charged negatively, the electricity communicated by it to the
+air will also become negative. A charged jar being held in one hand,
+and the flame of an insulated candle held in the other being brought
+near the knob of the jar, will also produce the same effect.
+
+
+_Another Electric Orrery._ (See page 92.)
+
+From the prime conductor of an electric machine suspend six concentric
+hoops of metal at different distances from each other, in such a
+manner as to represent in some measure the proportional distances of
+the planets. Under these, and at a distance of about half an inch,
+place a metallic plate, and upon this plate, within each of the hoops,
+a glass bubble blown very thin and light. On electrifying the hoops,
+the bubbles will be immediately attracted by them, and will continue
+to move round the hoops as long as the electrification continues. If
+the electricity be very strong, the bubbles will frequently be driven
+off, run hither and thither on the plate, making a variety of
+surprising motions round their axis; after which they will return to
+the hoop, and circulate as before; and if the room be darkened, they
+will all appear beautifully illuminated with electric light.
+
+
+_The Electric Ball._
+
+Provide a ball of cork about three-quarters of an inch in diameter,
+hollowed out in the internal part by cutting it in two hemispheres,
+scooping out the inside, and then joining them together with paste.
+Having attached this to a silk thread between three and four feet in
+length, suspend it in such a manner that it may just touch the knob of
+an electric jar, the outside of which communicates with the ground. On
+the first contact it will be repelled to a considerable distance, and
+after making several vibrations, will remain stationary; but if a
+candle be placed at some distance behind it, so that the ball may be
+between it and the bottle, the ball will instantly begin to move, and
+will turn round the knob of the jar, moving in a kind of ellipsis as
+long as there is any electricity in the bottle. This experiment is
+very striking, though the motions are far from being regular; but it
+is remarkable that they always affect the elliptical rather than the
+circular form.
+
+
+_To spin Sealing-wax into Threads by Electricity._
+
+Stick a small piece of sealing-wax on the end of a wire, and set fire
+to it. Then put an electrical machine in motion, and present the wax
+just blown out at the distance of some inches from the prime
+conductor. A number of extremely fine filaments will immediately dart
+from the sealing-wax to the conductor, on which they will be condensed
+into a kind of net-work resembling wool.
+
+If the wire with the sealing-wax be stuck into one of the holes of the
+conductor, and a piece of paper be presented at a moderate distance
+from the wax, just after it has been ignited, on setting the machine
+in motion, a net-work of wax will be formed on the paper. The same
+effect, but in a slighter degree, will be produced, if the paper be
+briskly rubbed with a piece of elastic gum, and the melting
+sealing-wax be held pretty near the paper immediately after rubbing.
+
+If the paper thus painted, as it were, with sealing-wax be gently
+warmed by holding the back of it to the fire, the wax will adhere to
+it, and the result of the experiment will thus be rendered permanent.
+
+
+_The Electrified Camphor._
+
+A beautiful experiment of the same nature is made with camphor. A
+spoon holding a piece of lighted camphor is made to communicate with
+an electrified body, as the prime conductor of a machine; while the
+conductor continues electrified by keeping the machine in motion, the
+camphor will throw out ramifications, and appear to shoot like a
+vegetable.
+
+
+
+
+AMUSEMENTS WITH CARDS.
+
+
+Many of the following recreations are performed by arithmetical
+calculations, and may therefore be considered as connected with
+science; but as it has been the aim of this work to unite amusement
+with instruction, some experiments on this subject are introduced, the
+performance of which depends on dexterity of hand. As this is only to
+be acquired by practice, and, after all, is merely a mechanical
+operation, the study of it will produce little useful knowledge,
+though it may afford much entertainment; but as it must be gratifying
+to know the method by which they are performed by those persons
+skilled in such manoeuvres, who publicly exhibit them to the
+astonishment of the spectator, they are presented to our readers, that
+when they recognize them at any of these exhibitions, their eyes may
+not be in danger of deceiving their judgment.
+
+
+_To tell the Number of Points on Three Cards, placed under Three
+different Parcels of Cards._
+
+You first premise that the ace counts for eleven; the court cards ten
+each; and the others according to the number of their pips. You then
+propose to any person in company to choose three cards, and to place
+over each as many as will make the number of the points of that card,
+fifteen; take the remaining cards, and, under the appearance of
+looking for a particular card, count how many there are, and by adding
+sixteen to that number, you will have the amount of the pips on the
+three cards. For example:
+
+Suppose a person choose a seven, a ten, and an ace; then over the
+seven he must place eight cards; over the ten, five cards; and over
+the ace, four cards. In this instance there will remain twelve cards;
+to which if you add sixteen it will make twenty-eight, which is the
+amount of the pips on the three cards.
+
+
+_The Ten Duplicates._
+
+Select any twenty cards; let any person shuffle them; lay them by
+pairs on the board, without looking at them. You next desire several
+persons, (as many persons as there are pairs on the table,) each to
+look at different pairs and remember what cards compose them. You then
+take up all the cards in the order they lay, and replace them with
+their faces uppermost on the table, according to the order of the
+letters in the following words:
+
+ M U T U S
+ 1 2 3 4 5
+ D E D I T
+ 6 7 8 9 10
+ N O M E N
+ 11 12 13 14 15
+ C O C I S
+ 16 17 18 19 20
+
+(These words convey no meaning.)--You will observe, that they contain
+ten letters repeated, or two of each sort. You therefore ask each
+person which row or rows the cards he looked at are in; if he say the
+first, you know they must be the second and fourth, there being two
+letters of a sort (two U's) in that row; if he say the second and
+fourth, they must be the ninth and nineteenth, (two I's,) and so of
+the rest. This amusement, which is very simple, and requires very
+little practice, will be found to excite, in those who are
+unacquainted with the key, the greatest astonishment.
+
+The readiest way is to have a fac-simile of the key drawn on a card,
+to which you refer.
+
+
+_To tell how many Cards a Person takes out of a Pack, and to specify
+each Card._
+
+To perform this, you must so dispose a PIQUET pack of cards, that you
+can easily remember the order in which they are placed. Suppose, for
+instance, they are placed according to the words in the following
+line,
+
+ _Seven Aces, Eight Kings, Nine Queens, and Ten Knaves;_
+
+and that every card be of a different suite, following each other in
+this order: spades, clubs, hearts, and diamonds. Then the eight first
+cards will be the seven of spades, ace of clubs, eight of hearts, king
+of diamonds, nine of spades, queen of clubs, ten of hearts, and knave
+of diamonds, and so of the rest.
+
+You show that the cards are placed promiscuously, and you offer them
+with their backs upward to any one, that he may draw what quantity he
+pleases; you then dexterously look at the card that precedes and that
+which follows those he has taken. When he has carefully counted the
+cards, which is not to be done in your presence, (and, in order to
+give you time for recollection, you tell him to do it twice over, that
+he may be certain,) you then take them from him, mix them with the
+pack, shuffle, and tell him to shuffle.
+
+During all this time you recollect, by the foregoing line, all the
+cards he took out; and as you lay them down, one by one, you name each
+card.
+
+Unless a person has a most excellent memory, he had better not attempt
+the performance of the above amusement, as the least forgetfulness
+will spoil the whole, and make the operator appear ridiculous.
+
+
+_A Hundred different Names being written on the Cards, to tell the
+particular Name any Person thought of._
+
+Write on ten cards a hundred different names, observing that the
+last name on each card begins with one of the letters in the word
+INDROMACUS, which letters, in the order they stand, answer the numbers
+1 to 10, thus:
+
+ I N D R O M A C U S
+ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
+
+On ten other cards write the same names, with this restriction, that
+the first name on every card must be taken from the first of the other
+cards, whose last name begins with I; the second name must be taken
+from that whose last name begins with N; and so of the rest. Then let
+any person choose a card out of the first ten, and after he has fixed
+on a name, give it to you again, when you carefully note the last
+name, by which you know the number of that card. You then take the
+other ten cards, and, after shuffling them, show them to the person,
+and ask if he sees the name he chose, and when he answers in the
+affirmative, you look to that name which is the same in number from
+the top with the number of the card he took from the other parcel, and
+that will be the name he fixed on.
+
+Instead of ten cards there may be twenty to each parcel, by adding
+duplicates to each card; which will make it appear more mysterious,
+and will not at all embarrass it, as you have only to remember the
+last name on each card. Instead of names you may write questions on
+one of the parcels, and answers on the other.
+
+
+_Several different Cards being fixed on by different Persons, to name
+that on which each Person fixed._
+
+There must be as many different cards shown to _each person_, as there
+are cards to choose; so that, if there are three persons, you must
+show three cards to each person, telling the first to retain _one_ in
+his memory. You then lay those three cards down, and show three others
+to the second person, and three others to the third. Next take up the
+first person's cards, and lay them down separately, one by one, with
+their faces upwards; place the second person's cards over the first,
+and the third over the second's, so that there will be one card in
+each parcel belonging to each person. You then ask each of them in
+which parcel his card is, and by the answer you immediately know which
+card it is; for the first person's will always be the first, the
+second person's the second, and the third person's the third in that
+parcel where each says his card is.
+
+This amusement may be performed with a single person, by letting him
+fix on three, four, or more cards. In this case you must show him as
+many parcels as he is to choose cards, and every parcel must consist
+of that number, out of which he is to fix on one; and you then proceed
+as before, he telling you the parcel that contains each of his cards.
+
+
+_To name the Rank of a Card that a Person has drawn from a Piquet
+Pack._
+
+The rank of a card means whether it be an ace, king, queen, &c. You
+therefore first fix a certain number to each card; thus you call the
+king four, the queen three, the knave two, the ace one, and the others
+according to the number of their pips.
+
+You then shuffle the cards, and let a person draw any one of them;
+then turning up the remaining cards, you add the number of the first
+to that of the second, the second to the third, and so on, till it
+amounts to ten, which you then reject, and begin again; or if it be
+more, reject the ten, and carry the remainder to the next card, and so
+on to the last; and to the last amount add four, and subtract that sum
+from ten, if it be less, or from twenty, if it be more than ten, and
+the remainder will be the number of the card that was drawn; as for
+example, if the remainder be two, the card drawn was a knave; if
+three, a queen, and so on.
+
+
+_To tell the Amount of the Numbers of any two Cards drawn from a
+common Pack._
+
+Each court card in this amusement counts for ten, and the other cards
+according to the number of their pips. Let the person who draws the
+cards add as many more cards to each of those he has drawn as will
+make each of their numbers twenty-five. Then take the remaining cards
+in your hand, and, seeming to search for some card among them, tell
+them over to yourself, and their number will be the amount of the two
+cards drawn.
+
+For example.--Suppose the person has drawn a ten and a seven, then he
+must add fifteen cards to the first, to make the number twenty-five,
+and eighteen to the last, for the same reason; now fifteen and
+eighteen make thirty-three, and the two cards themselves make
+thirty-five, which deducted from fifty-two, leave seventeen, which
+must be the number of the remaining cards, and also of the two cards
+drawn.
+
+You may perform this amusement without touching the cards, thus:
+
+Let the person who has drawn the two cards deduct the number of each
+of them from twenty-six, which is half the number of the pack, and
+after adding the remainders together, let him tell you the amount,
+which you privately deduct from fifty-two, the total number of all the
+cards, and the remainder will be the amount of the two cards.
+
+_Example._--Suppose the two cards to be as before, ten and seven; then
+the person deducting ten from twenty-six, there remain sixteen, and
+deducting seven from twenty-six, there remain nineteen; these two
+remainders added together make thirty-five, which you subtract from
+fifty-two; and there must remain seventeen for the amount of the two
+cards, as before.
+
+
+_To tell the Amount of the Numbers of any Three Cards that a Person
+shall draw from the Pack._
+
+After the person has drawn his three cards, draw one yourself and lay
+it aside, for it is necessary that the number of the remaining cards
+be divisible by three, which they will not be in a pack of fifty-two
+cards, if only three be drawn. The card you draw, you may call the
+confederate, and pretend it is by the aid of that card you discover
+the amount of the others. Then tell the party to add as many more to
+each of his cards as will make its number sixteen, which is the third
+part of the remaining forty-eight cards; therefore, suppose he has
+drawn a ten, a seven, and a six; then, to the first he must add six
+cards, to the second nine, and to the third ten, which together make
+twenty-five, and the four cards drawn being added to them make
+twenty-nine. You then take the remaining cards, and, telling them
+over, as in the last amusement, you find their number to be
+twenty-three, the amount of the three cards the person drew.
+
+This amusement may also be performed without touching the cards,
+thus:--When the party has drawn his three cards, and you have drawn
+one, let him deduct the number of each of the cards he has drawn from
+seventeen, which is one-third of the pack after you have drawn your
+card; and let him tell you the amount of the several remainders, to
+which you privately add one to the card you drew, and, deducting that
+amount from fifty-two, (the whole number of the cards,) the remainder
+will be the amount of the three cards drawn.
+
+_Example._--Suppose the three cards to be ten, seven, and six, as
+before; then, each of those numbers subtracted from seventeen, the
+remainders will be respectively, seven, ten, and eleven, which, added
+together, make twenty-eight, to which the single card you drew being
+reckoned as one, and added, makes twenty-nine; and that number
+deducted from fifty-two, leaves twenty-three, which is the amount of
+the three cards the party drew.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+The following amusements principally depend on dexterity of hand; and,
+as what is termed _making the pass_, will be necessary to be acquired,
+to enable the operator to perform many of them, we subjoin the
+following explanation of this term:
+
+_How to make the Pass._--Hold the pack of cards in your right hand, so
+that the palm of your hand may be under the cards: place the thumb of
+that hand on one side of the pack; the first, second, and third
+fingers on the other side, and your little finger between those cards
+that are to be brought to the top, and the rest of the pack. Then
+place your left hand over the cards in such a manner that the thumb
+may be at C, the fore-finger at A, and the other fingers at B, as in
+the following figure:
+
+ +----------------+ +----------------+
+ | _Bottom._ | | _Top._ |
+ | | | |
+ | 2 | | |
+ | | | |
+ | _Thumb._ | | |
+ | 3 | | |
+ | 4 | | |
+ | | | |
+ | | | |
+ |_Little Finger._| | |
+ +----------------+ +----------------+
+ C
+
+The hands and the two parts of the cards being thus disposed, you draw
+off the lower cards, confined by the little finger and the other parts
+of the right hand, and place them, with an imperceptible motion, on
+the top of the pack.
+
+But before you attempt any of the tricks that depend on _making the
+pass_, you must have great practice, and be able to perform it so
+dexterously and expeditiously, that the eye cannot detect the movement
+of the hand; or you may, instead of deceiving others, expose yourself.
+
+_The Long Card._--Another stratagem, connected with the performance of
+many of the following tricks, is what is termed the _Long Card_; that
+is, a card, either a trifle longer or wider than the other cards, not
+perceptible to the eye of the spectator, but easily to be
+distinguished by the touch of the operator.
+
+
+_The Divining Card._
+
+Provide a pack in which there is a long card; open it at that part
+where the long card is, and present the pack to a person in such a
+manner that he will naturally draw that card. You then tell him to put
+it into any part of the pack, and shuffle the cards. You take the
+pack, and offer the same card in like manner to a second or third
+person, taking care that they do not stand near enough to see the card
+each other draws.
+
+You then draw several cards yourself, among which is the long card,
+and ask each of the parties if his card be among those cards, and he
+will naturally say _yes_, as they have all drawn the same card. You
+then shuffle all the cards together, and, cutting them at the long
+card, you hold it before the first person, so that the others may not
+see it, and tell him that is his card. You then put it in the pack,
+shuffle it, cut it again at the same card, and hold it to the second
+person.
+
+You can perform this recreation without the long card, in the
+following manner:
+
+Let a person draw any card, and replace it in the pack. You then _make
+the pass_, (see p. 107,) and bring that card to the top of the pack,
+and shuffle them, without losing sight of that card. You then offer
+that card to a second person, that he may draw it, and put it in the
+middle of the pack. You _make the pass_, and shuffle the cards a
+second time in the same manner, and offer the card to a third person,
+and so again to a fourth or fifth.
+
+
+_The Four Confederate Cards._
+
+A person draws four cards from the pack, and you tell him to remember
+one of them. He then returns them to the pack, and you dexterously
+place two under and two on the top of the pack. Under the bottom ones
+you place four cards of any sort, and then, taking eight or ten from
+the bottom cards, you spread them on the table, and ask the person if
+the card he fixed on be among them. If he say _no_, you are sure it is
+one of the two cards on the top. You then pass those two cards to the
+bottom and, drawing off the lowest of them, you ask if that is not his
+card. If he again say _no_, you take up that card, and bid him draw
+his card from the bottom of the pack. If, on the contrary, he say his
+cards _are_ among those you _first_ drew from the bottom, you must
+dexterously take up the four cards you put under them, and, placing
+those on the top, let the other two be the bottom cards of the pack,
+which you are to draw in the manner before described.
+
+
+_The Numerical Cards._
+
+Let the long card be the sixteenth in the pack of piquet cards. Take
+ten or twelve cards from the top of the pack, and, spreading them on
+the table, desire a person to think on any one of them, and to observe
+the number it is from the first card. Make the pass at the long card,
+which will then be at the bottom. Then ask the party the number his
+card was at, and, counting to yourself from that number to sixteen,
+turn the cards up, one by one, from the bottom. Then stop at the
+seventeenth card, and ask the person if he has seen his card, when he
+will say _no_. You then ask him how many more cards you shall draw
+before his card appears; and when he has named the number, you draw
+the card aside with your finger, turn up the number of cards he
+proposed, and throw down the card he fixed on.
+
+
+_The Card found out by the Point of the Sword._
+
+When a card has been drawn, you place it under the long card, and by
+shuffling them dexterously, you bring it to the top of the pack. Then
+lay or throw the pack on the ground, observing where the top card
+lies. A handkerchief is then bound round your eyes, which ought to be
+done by a confederate, in such a way that you can see the ground. A
+sword is put into your hand, with which you touch several of the
+cards, as if in doubt, but never losing sight of the top card, in
+which at last you fix the point of the sword, and present it to the
+party who drew it.
+
+
+_The Card hit upon by the Guess._
+
+Spread part of the pack before a person, in such way that only one
+court card is visible; and so arrange it, that it shall appear the
+most prominent and striking card. You desire him to think on one; and
+observe if he fix his eye on the court card. When he tells you he has
+determined on one, shuffle the cards, and, turning them up one by one,
+when you come to the court card tell him that is the one.
+
+If he does not seem to fix his eye on the court card, you should not
+hazard the experiment; but frame an excuse for performing some other
+amusement; neither should it be attempted with those who are
+conversant with these sort of deceptions.
+
+
+_The Card changed by Word of Command._
+
+You must have two cards of the same sort in the pack, (say the king of
+spades.) Place one next the bottom card, (say seven of hearts,) and
+the other at top. Shuffle the cards without displacing those three,
+and show a person that the bottom card is the seven of hearts. This
+card you dexterously slip aside with your finger, which you have
+previously wetted, and, taking the king of spades from the bottom,
+which the person supposes to be the seven of hearts, lay it on the
+table, telling him to cover it with his hand.
+
+Shuffle the cards again, without displacing the first and last card,
+and, shifting the other king of spades from the top to the bottom,
+show it to another person. You then draw that privately away, and,
+taking the bottom card, which will then be the seven of hearts, you
+lay that on the table, and tell the second person (who believes it to
+be the king of spades) to cover it with his hand.
+
+You then command the cards to change places; and when the two parties
+take off their hands and turn up the cards, they will see, to their
+great astonishment, that your commands are obeyed.
+
+
+_The Three Magical Parties._
+
+Offer the long card to a person, that he may draw it, and replace it
+in any part of the pack he pleases. _Make the pass_, and bring that
+card to the top. Next divide the pack in three parcels, putting the
+long card in the middle heap. You then ask the person which of the
+three heaps his card shall be in. He will, probably, say the middle;
+in which case you immediately show it to him. But if he say either of
+the others, you take all the cards in your hand, placing the parcel he
+has named over the other two, and observing to put your little finger
+between that and the middle heap, at the top of which is the card he
+drew. You then ask at what number in that heap he will have his card
+appear. If, for example, he say the sixth, you tell down five cards
+from the top of the pack, and then, dexterously making the pass, you
+bring the long card to the top, and tell it down as the sixth.
+
+
+_The Magic Vase._
+
+Construct a vase of wood, or pasteboard, see Fig. 20. On the inside
+let there be five divisions; two of them, _c d_, to be large enough to
+admit a pack of cards each; and the other three, _e f g_, only large
+enough to contain a single card. Place this vase on a bracket, L,
+which is fastened to the partition M. Fix a silken thread at H, the
+other end of which passes down the division _d_, and, over the pulley
+I, runs along the bracket L, and goes out behind the partition M.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 20.]
+
+Take three cards from the piquet pack, and place one of them in each
+of the divisions _e f g_, making the silk thread or line go under each
+of them. In the division _c_ put the remainder of the pack.
+
+You then get another pack of cards, at the top of which are to be
+three cards, the same as those in the three small divisions: and,
+making the pass, bring them to the middle of the pack. Let them be
+drawn by three persons; let them shuffle all the cards; after which
+place the pack in the division _d_, and tell the parties that the
+cards they drew will rise at their command, separately, from the vase.
+
+A confederate behind the partition then gently drawing the line, the
+three cards will then gradually appear from the vase; then taking the
+cards from _c_, you show that those three are gone from the pack.
+
+The vase must be placed so high that the company cannot see the
+inside.
+
+
+_The Divining Perspective Glass._
+
+Procure a small perspective-glass, wide enough, where the object-glass
+is placed, to hold the following table:
+
+ +-------+--------+--------+
+ | 1,131 | 10,132 | 19,133 |
+ | 2,231 | 11,232 | 20,233 |
+ | 3,331 | 12,332 | 21,333 |
+ +-------+--------+--------+
+ | 4,121 | 13,122 | 22,123 |
+ | 5,221 | 14,222 | 23,223 |
+ | 6,321 | 15,322 | 24,323 |
+ +-------+--------+--------+
+ | 7,111 | 16,112 | 25,113 |
+ | 8,211 | 17,212 | 26,213 |
+ | 9,311 | 18,312 | 27,313 |
+ +-------+--------+--------+
+
+Take a pack of twenty-seven cards; give them to a person, bid him fix,
+on one, shuffle them, and return them to you. Arrange the twenty-seven
+cards in three parcels, by laying one down, alternately, on each
+parcel; but before you lay each card down, show it to the person,
+without seeing it yourself. When you have completed the three parcels,
+ask him at what number, from one to twenty-seven, he will have his
+card appear, and in which heap it then is. You then look at the heap
+through your glass; and if the first of the three numbers, which
+stands against the number it is to appear at, be one, put that heap at
+top; if the number be at two, put it in the middle; and if it be
+three, put it at the bottom. Next divide the cards into three heaps,
+in the same manner, a second and third time, and his card will be at
+the number he chose.
+
+_Example._--Suppose the person wishes his card to be the twentieth
+from the top; and the first time of making the heaps, he says it is in
+the third heap; you then look at the table in the perspective, and you
+see that the first figure is two; you, therefore, put that heap in the
+middle of the pack. The second and third times, you in like manner put
+the heap in which he says it is, at bottom; the number each time being
+three. Then looking at the pack with your glass, as if to discover
+which the card was, you lay the cards down, one by one, and the
+twentieth will be the card fixed on.
+
+
+_The Card in the Ring._
+
+Get a ring, made of any metal, in which is set a large transparent
+stone or piece of glass, to the bottom of which is fastened a small
+piece of black silk; under the silk is to be the figure of a small
+card; and the silk must be so constructed that it may be either drawn
+aside or spread, by turning the stone round.
+
+You then cause a person to draw the same sort of card as that at the
+bottom of the ring; and tell him to burn it in the candle. Now, the
+ring being so constructed that the silk conceals the card underneath
+it, you first show him the ring, that he may see it is not there, and
+tell him you will make it appear; then rubbing the ashes of the card
+on the ring, you manage to turn the stone or glass dexterously round,
+and exhibit to him the small card at the bottom.
+
+
+_The Card in the Mirror._
+
+Provide a mirror, either round or oval, the frame of which must be at
+least as wide as a card, and the glass must be wider than the distance
+between the frame, by at least the width of a card. The glass in the
+middle must be made to move in two grooves, and so much of the
+quicksilver must be scraped off, as is equal to the size of a common
+card. You then paste over the part where the quicksilver is rubbed
+off, a piece of pasteboard, on which is a cord, that must exactly fit
+the space, which must at first be placed behind the frame.
+
+Fix this mirror against a partition, through which two strings are to
+go, by which an assistant in an adjoining room can easily move the
+glass in the grooves, and make the card appear or disappear at
+pleasure. Or it may be done without an assistant, if a table be placed
+against the partition, and a string from the glass be made to pass
+through a leg of it, and communicate with a small trigger, which you
+may easily push down with your foot, and at the same time wiping the
+glass with your handkerchief, under the pretence that the card may
+appear more conspicuous; which will also serve most effectually to
+disguise the operation.
+
+Having every thing thus arranged, you contrive to make a person draw
+the same sort of card as that fixed to the mirror; if you do not
+succeed in this with a stranger, make some pretence for shuffling the
+cards again, and present the pack to a confederate, who, of course,
+will draw the card you wish, and who is to show it to two or three
+persons next to him, under the pretence that it might slip his memory.
+This card you place in the middle of the pack, then _make the pass_,
+and bring it to the bottom. Direct the person to look for his card in
+the mirror, which the confederate behind the partition is to draw
+slowly forward; or if you perform the operation yourself, press the
+trigger with your foot, and the card will appear as if placed between
+the glass and the quicksilver. While the glass is drawing forward, you
+slide off the card from the bottom of the pack, and convey it away.
+
+
+_The Card in the Opera Glass._
+
+Procure an opera-glass, two inches and a half long; the tube to be
+made of ivory, so thin that it may appear transparent. Place it in a
+magnifying glass, of such a power, and at such a distance, that a
+card, three-quarters of an inch long, may appear like a common-sized
+card. At the bottom of the tube lay a circle of black pasteboard, to
+which fasten a small card, with the pips, or figures, on both sides,
+and in such a manner, that by turning the table, either side of the
+glass may be visible.
+
+You then offer two cards to two persons, similar to the double card in
+the glass. You put them in the pack again, or convey them to your
+pocket; and after a few flourishing motions you tell the persons you
+have conveyed their cards into the glass; then you show each person
+his card in the glass, by turning it in the proper position.
+
+You may easily induce the parties to draw the two cards you wish, by
+placing them first on the top of the pack, and then, by making the
+pass, bringing them to the middle.
+
+When you can make the pass in a dexterous manner, it is preferable to
+the long card, which obliges the operator to change the pack
+frequently, as, if the same card is always drawn, it may excite
+suspicion.
+
+
+_To separate the two Colours of a Pack of Cards by one Cut._
+
+To perform this amusement, all the cards of one colour must be cut
+something narrower at one end than the other. You show the cards, and
+give them to any one, that he may shuffle them; then holding them
+between your hands, one hand being at each extremity, with one motion
+you separate the hearts and diamonds from the spades and clubs.
+
+
+_The Metamorphosed Cards._
+
+In the middle of a pack place a card that is something wider than the
+rest, which we will suppose to be the knave of spades, under which
+place the seven of diamonds, and under that the ten of clubs. On the
+top of the pack put cards similar to these, and others on which are
+painted different objects, _viz._:
+
+ First card A bird
+ Second A seven of diamonds
+ Third A flower
+ Fourth Another seven of diamonds
+ Fifth A bird
+ Sixth A ten of clubs
+ Seventh A flower
+ Eighth Another ten of clubs;
+
+then seven or eight indifferent cards, the knave of spades, which is
+the wide card, the seven of diamonds, the ten of clubs, and the rest
+any indifferent cards.
+
+Two persons are to draw the two cards that are under the wide card,
+which are the seven of diamonds and the ten of clubs. You take the
+pack in your left hand, and open it at the wide end, as you open a
+book, and tell the person who drew the seven of diamonds to place it
+in that opening. You then blow on the cards, and, without closing
+them, instantly bring the card which is at top, and on which a bird is
+painted, over that seven of diamonds. To do this dexterously, you must
+wet the middle finger of your left hand, with which you are to bring
+the card to the middle of the pack. You then bid the person look at
+his card, and when he has remarked the change, to place it where it
+was before. Then blow on the cards a second time, and, bringing the
+seven of diamonds, which is at the top of the pack, to the opening,
+you bid him look at his card again, when he will see it is that which
+he drew. You may do the same with all the other painted cards, either
+with the same person, or with him who drew the ten of clubs.
+
+The whole artifice consists in bringing the card at the top of the
+pack to the opening in the middle, by the wet finger, which requires
+no great practice. Observe, not to let the pack go out of your hands.
+
+
+_To discover the Card which is drawn, by the Throw of a Die._
+
+Prepare a pack of cards, in which there are only six sorts of cards.
+Dispose these cards in such manner that each of the six different
+cards shall follow each other, and let the last of each suite be a
+long card. The cards being thus disposed, it follows, that if you
+divide them into six parcels, by cutting at each of the long cards,
+those parcels will all consist of similar cards.
+
+Let a person draw a card from the pack, and let him replace it in the
+parcel from whence it was drawn, by dexterously offering that part.
+Cut the cards several times, so that a long card be always at bottom.
+Divide the cards in this manner into six heaps, and giving a die to
+the person who drew the card, tell him that the point he throws shall
+indicate the parcel in which is the card he drew; then take up the
+parcel and show him the card.
+
+
+_To tell the Number of the Cards by their Weight._
+
+Take a parcel of cards, suppose forty, among which insert two long
+cards; let the first be, for example, the fifteenth, and the other the
+twenty-sixth from the top. Seem to shuffle the cards, and then cutting
+them at the first long card, poise those you have cut off in your left
+hand, and say, "There should be here fifteen cards." Cut them again at
+the second long card, and say, "There are here only eleven cards."
+Then poising the remainder, you say, "Here are fourteen cards."
+
+
+_The Four Inseparable Kings._
+
+Take the four kings, and behind the last of them place two other
+cards, so that they may not be seen. Then spread open the four kings
+to the company, and put the six cards at the bottom of the pack. Draw
+one of the kings, and put it at the top of the pack. Draw one of the
+two cards at the bottom, and put it towards the middle. Draw the
+other, and put it at some distance from the last, and then show that
+there remains a king at bottom. Then let any one cut the cards, and as
+there remains three kings at bottom, they will then be altogether in
+the middle of the pack.
+
+
+_To change the Cards which several Persons have drawn from the Pack._
+
+On the top of the pack put any card you please--suppose the queen of
+clubs; make the pass, bring that card to the middle of the pack, and
+offer it to a person to draw. Then, by cutting the cards, bring the
+queen again to the middle of the pack. Make the pass a second time,
+bring it to the top, and shuffle the cards without displacing those on
+the top. Make the pass a third time, bring it to the middle of the
+pack and offer it to a second person to draw, who must be at a proper
+distance from the first person, that he may not perceive it is the
+same card. After the like manner let five persons draw the same card.
+
+Shuffle the pack without losing sight of the queen of clubs, and,
+laying down four other cards with the queen, ask each person if he see
+his card there? They will all reply, "Yes," as they all drew the queen
+of clubs. Place four of those cards on the pack, and, drawing the
+queen privately away, you approach the first person, and showing him
+that card, so that the others cannot see it, ask if that be his card;
+then patting it on the top of the pack, blow on it, or give it a
+stroke with your hand, and show it in the same manner to the second
+person, and so of the rest.
+
+
+_The Card discovered under the Handkerchief._
+
+Let a person draw any card from the rest, and put it in the middle of
+the pack; you make the pass at that place, and the card will
+consequently be at top; then placing the pack on the table, cover it
+with a handkerchief; and, putting your hand under it, take off the top
+card, and after seeming to search among the cards for some time, draw
+it out.
+
+This amusement may be performed by putting the cards in another
+person's pocket, after the pass is made. Several cards may also be
+drawn and placed together in the middle of the pack, and the pass then
+made.
+
+
+_The Convertible Aces._
+
+On the ace of spades fix, with soap, a heart, and on the ace of hearts
+a spade, in such a manner that they will easily slip off.
+
+Show these two aces to the company; then, taking the ace of spades,
+you desire a person to put his foot upon it, and as you place it on
+the ground, draw away the spade. In like manner you place the seeming
+ace of hearts under the foot of another person. You then command the
+two cards to change their places; and that they obey your command, the
+two persons, on taking up their cards, will have ocular demonstration.
+
+A deception similar to this is sometimes practised with one card,
+suppose the ace of spades, over which a heart is pasted lightly. After
+showing a person the card, you let him hold one end of it, and you
+hold the other, and while you amuse him with discourse, you slide off
+the heart. Then laying the card on the table, you bid him cover it
+with his hand; you then knock under the table, and command the heart
+to turn into the ace of spades.
+
+
+_To tell the Card that a Person has touched with his Finger._
+
+This amusement is to be performed by confederacy. You previously agree
+with your confederate on certain signs, by which he is to denote the
+suite, and the particular card of each suite; thus: if he touch the
+first button of his coat, it signifies an ace; if the second, a king,
+&c.; and then again, if he take out his handkerchief, it denotes the
+suite to be hearts; if he take snuff, diamonds, &c. These
+preliminaries being settled, you give the pack to a person who is near
+your confederate, and tell him to separate any one card from the rest,
+while you are absent, and draw his finger once over it. He is then to
+return you the pack, and while you are shuffling the cards, you
+carefully note the signals made by your confederate; then turning the
+cards over one by one, you directly fix on the card he touched.
+
+
+_The Card in the Pocket-book._
+
+A confederate is previously to know the card you have taken from the
+pack, and put into your pocket-book. You then present the pack to him,
+and desire him to fix on a card, (which we will suppose to be the
+queen of diamonds,) and place the pack on the table. You then ask him
+the name of the card, and when he says the queen of diamonds, you ask
+him if he be not mistaken, and if he be sure that the card is in the
+pack: when he replies in the affirmative, you say, "It might be there
+when you looked over the cards, but I believe it is now in my pocket;"
+then desire a third person to put his hand in your pocket, and take
+out your book, and when it is opened the card will appear.
+
+
+_The Card in the Egg._
+
+Take a card, the same as your long card, and, rolling it up very
+close, put it in an egg, by making a hole as small as possible, and
+which you are to fill up carefully with white wax. You then offer the
+long card to be drawn, and when it is replaced in the pack, you
+shuffle the cards several times, giving the egg to the person who drew
+the card, and while he is breaking it, you privately withdraw the long
+card, that it may appear, upon examining the cards, to have gone from
+the pack into the egg. This may be rendered more surprising by having
+several eggs, in each of which is placed a card of the same sort, and
+then giving the person the liberty to choose which egg he thinks fit.
+
+This deception may be still further diversified, by having, as most
+public performers have, a confederate, who is previously to know the
+egg in which the card is placed; for you may then break the other
+eggs, and show that the only one that contains a card is that in which
+you directed it to be.
+
+
+_The Card discovered by the Touch or Smell._
+
+You offer the long card, or any other that you know, and as the person
+who has drawn it holds it in his hand, you pretend to feel the pips or
+figure on the under side, by your fore-finger; or you sagaciously
+smell to it, and then pronounce what card it is.
+
+If it be the long card, you may give the pack to the person who drew
+it, and leave him at liberty either to replace it or not. Then taking
+the pack, you feel immediately whether it be there or not, and,
+shuffling the cards in a careless manner, without looking at them, you
+pronounce accordingly.
+
+
+_The Inverted Cards._
+
+Prepare a pack of cards, by cutting one end of them about one-tenth of
+an inch narrower than the other; then offer the pack to any one, that
+he may draw a card; place the pack on the table, and observe carefully
+if he turn the card while he is looking at it; if he do not, when you
+take the pack from the table, you offer the other end of it for him to
+insert that card; but if he turn the card, you then offer him the same
+end of the pack. You afterwards offer the cards to a second or third
+person, for them to draw or replace a card in the same manner. You
+then let any one shuffle the cards, and, taking them again into your
+own hand, as you turn them up one by one, you easily perceive by the
+touch which are those cards that have been inverted, and, laying the
+first of them down on the table, you ask the person if that card be
+his; and if he say _no_, you ask the same of the second person; and if
+he say _no_, you tell the third person it is his card; and so of the
+second or third cards. You shall lay the pack on the table after each
+person has drawn his card, and turn it dexterously in taking it up,
+when it is to be turned, that the experiment may not appear to depend
+on the cards being inverted.
+
+
+_The Transmuted Cards._
+
+In a common pack of cards let the ace of hearts and nine of spades be
+something larger than the rest. With the juice of lemon draw over the
+ace of hearts a spade, large enough to cover it entirely, and on each
+side draw four other spades.
+
+Present the pack to two persons, so adroitly, that one of them shall
+draw the ace of hearts, and the other the nine of spades, and tell him
+who draws the latter, to burn it on a chafing-dish. You then take the
+ashes of that card, put them into a small metal box, and give it to
+him that has the ace of hearts, that he may himself put that card into
+the box and fasten it. Then put the box for a short time on the
+chafing-dish, and let the person who put the card in it take it off,
+and take out the card, which he will see is changed into the nine of
+spades.
+
+
+_The Convertible Cards._
+
+To perform this amusement you must observe, that there are several
+letters which may be changed into others, without any appearance of
+the alteration, as the _a_ into _d_, the _c_ into _a_, _e_, _d_, _g_,
+_o_, or _q_; the _i_ into _b_, _d_, or _l_; the _l_ into _t_; the _o_
+into _a_, _d_, _g_, or _q_; the _v_ into _y_, &c.
+
+Take a parcel of cards, suppose twenty, and on one of them write with
+juice of lemon or onion, or vitriol and water, the word law, (these
+letters should not be joined;) and on the other, with the same ink,
+the words _old woman_; then holding them to the fire, they both become
+visible. Now, you will observe, that by altering the _a_ in the word
+_law_ into _d_, and adding _o_ before the _l_, and _oman_ after the
+_w_, it becomes _old woman_. Therefore you make those alterations with
+the invisible ink, and let it remain so. On the rest of the cards you
+write any words you think fit.
+
+Present the cards in such manner to two persons, that one of them
+shall draw the word _law_, and the other the words _old woman_. You
+then tell the person who drew the word _law_, that it shall disappear,
+and the words on the other card shall be written in its place; and,
+that you may not change the cards, desire each of the parties to write
+his name on his card. Then putting the cards together, and holding
+them before the fire, as if to dry the names just written, the word
+_law_ will presently change into _old woman_.
+
+
+_The Enchanted Palace._
+
+On the six-sided plane A B C D E F, Fig. 21, draw six semi-diameters;
+and on each of these place perpendicularly two plane mirrors, which
+must join exactly at the centre, and which, placed back to back, must
+be as thin as possible. Decorate the exterior boundary of this piece,
+(which is at the extremity of the angles of the hexagon,) with six
+columns, that at the same time serve to support the mirrors by grooves
+formed on their inner sides. Add to these columns their entablatures,
+and cover the edifice in whatever manner you please. In each one of
+these six triangular spaces, contained between two mirrors, place
+little figures of pasteboard, in relief, representing such subjects,
+as, when seen in an hexagonal form, will produce an agreeable effect.
+To these add small figures of enamel, and take particular care to
+conceal by some object that has no relation to the subject, the place
+where the mirrors join, which, as before observed, all meet in the
+common centre.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 21.]
+
+When you look into any one of the six openings of this palace, the
+objects there contained, being reflected six times, will seem entirely
+to fill up the whole of the building. This illusion will appear very
+remarkable, especially if the objects chosen are properly adapted to
+the effect which the mirrors are intended to produce.
+
+If you place between two of these mirrors part of a fortification, as
+a curtain, and two demi-bastions, you will see an entire citadel with
+six bastions; or if you place part of a ball-room, ornamented with
+chandeliers and figures, all these objects being here multiplied, will
+afford a very pleasing prospect.
+
+
+_Opaque Bodies seemingly Transparent._
+
+Within the case A B C D, place four mirrors O P Q R, Fig. 22, so
+disposed, that they may each make an angle of 45 degrees, that is,
+that they may be half-way inclined from the perpendicular, as in the
+figure. In each of the two extremities A B, make a circular overture;
+in one of which fix the tube G L, in the other the tube M F, and
+observe, that in each of these is to be inserted another tube, as H
+and I. [_Observe._ These four tubes must terminate in the substance of
+the case, and not enter the inside, that they may not hinder the
+effect of the mirrors. The four-fold reflection of the rays of light
+from the mirrors, darkens in some degree the brightness of the object;
+some light is also lost by the magnifying power of the perspective.
+If, therefore, instead of the object-glass at G, and concave eye-glass
+at F, plain glasses were substituted, the magnifying power of the
+perspective will be taken away, and the object appear brighter.]
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 22.]
+
+Furnish the first of these tubes with an object-glass at G, and a
+concave eye-glass at F. You are to observe, that in regulating the
+focus of these glasses with regard to the length of the tube, you are
+to suppose it equal to the line G, or visual pointed ray, which
+entering at the aperture G is reflected by the four mirrors, and goes
+out at the other aperture F, where the eye-glass is placed. Put any
+glass you please into the two ends of the moveable tubes H and L; and
+lastly, place the machine on stand E, moveable at the point S, that it
+may be elevated or lowered at pleasure.
+
+When the eye is placed at F, and you look through the tube, the rays
+of light that proceed from the object T, passing through the glass G,
+are successively reflected by the mirrors O P Q and R to the eye at F,
+and there point the object T in its proper situation, and these rays
+appear to proceed directly from that object.
+
+The two moveable tubes H and I, at the extremity of which a glass is
+placed, serve only to disguise the illusion, for they have no
+communication with the interior of the machine. This instrument being
+moveable on the stand E, may be directed to any object; and if
+furnished with proper glasses, will answer the purpose of common
+perspective.
+
+The two moveable tubes, H and I, being brought together, the machine
+is directed towards any object; and, desiring a person to look at the
+end F, you ask him if he sees that object distinctly. You then
+separate the two moveable tubes, and, leaving space between them
+sufficiently wide to place your hand or any other solid body, you tell
+him that the machine has the power of making objects visible through
+the most opaque body; and as a proof, you desire him to look at the
+same object, when to his great surprise he will see it as distinctly
+as if no solid body interposed.
+
+This experiment is the more extraordinary as it is very difficult
+to conceive how the effect is produced; the two arms of the
+case appearing to be made for the purpose of supporting the
+perspective-glass; and to whatever object it be directed, the effect
+is still the same.
+
+
+_The Deforming Mirrors._
+
+If a person look in a concave mirror placed perpendicularly to
+another, (that is, supposing one mirror to be laid on the floor, and
+the other attached to the ceiling,) his face will appear entirely
+deformed. If the mirror be a little inclined, so as to make an angle
+of 80 degrees, (that is, one-ninth part from the perpendicular,) he
+will then see all the parts of his face, except the nose and forehead.
+If it be inclined to 60 degrees; (that is, one-third part,) he will
+appear with three noses and six eyes: in short, the apparent deformity
+will vary at each degree of inclination, and when the glass comes to
+45 degrees, (that is, half-way down,) the face will vanish. If,
+instead of placing the two mirrors in this situation, they are so
+disposed that their junction may be vertical, then different
+inclinations will produce other effects, as the situation of the
+object relative is quite different.
+
+
+_The Magic Tube._
+
+Procure a small tube of glass, whose canal is extremely narrow, and
+open at both ends; let one end of it be plunged in water, and the
+water within the tube will rise to a considerable height above the
+external surface: or if two or more tubes be immersed in the same
+fluid, the one with a narrow canal, and the other wider, the water
+will ascend higher in the former than the latter.
+
+
+_The Magician's Mirror._
+
+Construct a box of wood, of a cubical shape, A B C D, Fig. 23, of
+about fifteen inches every way. Let it be fixed to the pedestal P, at
+the usual height of a man's head. In each side of this box let there
+be an opening, of an oval form, ten inches high, and seven wide. In
+this box place two mirrors, A D, with their backs against each other.
+Let them cross the box in a diagonal line, and in a vertical position.
+Decorate the openings in the side of this box with four oval frames
+and transparent glasses, and cover each with a curtain so contrived as
+all to draw up together.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 23.]
+
+Place four persons in front of the four sides, and at equal distances
+from the box, and then draw them up that they may see themselves in
+the mirrors, when each of them, instead of his own figure, will see
+that of the person next to him, but who will appear to him to be
+placed on the opposite side. Their confusion will be the greater, as
+it will be very difficult, if not impossible, for them to discover the
+mirrors concealed in the box. The reason of this phenomenon is
+evident; for though the rays of light may be turned aside by a mirror,
+yet they always _appear_ to proceed in right lines.
+
+
+_The Perspective Mirror._
+
+Provide a box, A B C D, Fig. 24, of about two feet long, 15 inches
+wide, and 12 inches high. At the end A C, place the concave mirror,
+the focus of whose parallel rays is 18 inches from the reflecting
+surface. At I L place a pasteboard, blacked, in which a hole is cut,
+sufficiently large to see on the mirror H the object placed at B E F
+D. Cover the top of the box, from A to I, close, that the mirror H may
+be entirely darkened. The other part, I B, must be covered with glass,
+under which is placed a gauze, or oiled paper, to prevent the inside
+from being seen. Make an aperture at G, near the top of the side E B,
+beneath which, on the inside, place in succession, paintings of
+vistas, landscapes, figures, &c., so that they may be in front of the
+mirror H. Let the box be placed that the objects may be strongly
+illuminated by the sun, or by wax-lights placed under the enclosed
+part of the box A I. By this simple construction, the objects placed
+at G D will be thrown into their natural perspective, and if the
+subjects be properly chosen and well executed, the appearance will be
+both wonderful and pleasing.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 24.]
+
+
+_Gunpowder Exploded by Reflection._
+
+Place two concave mirrors at about 12 or 15 feet distance from each
+other, and let the axis of each be in the same line. In the focus of
+one of them place a live coal, and in the focus of the other place
+some gunpowder. With a pair of double bellows, which make a continual
+blast, keep constantly blowing the coal, and notwithstanding the
+distance between them, the powder will presently take fire.
+
+
+_The Igniting Mirrors._
+
+The rays of a luminous body placed in the focus of concave mirror,
+being reflected in parallel lines, and a second mirror being placed
+diametrically opposite to the first, will set fire to a combustible
+body, by collecting those rays in the focus.
+
+
+_The Armed Apparition._
+
+If a person with a drawn sword place himself before a large concave
+mirror, but further from it than its focus, he will see an inverted
+image of himself in the air, between him and the mirror, of a less
+size than himself. If he steadily present the sword towards the centre
+of the mirror, an image of the sword will come out from it, point to
+point, as if to fence with him; and by his pushing the sword nearer,
+the image will appear to come nearer to him, and almost to touch his
+breast. If the mirror be turned 45 degrees, or one-eighth round, the
+reflected image will go out perpendicularly to the direction of the
+sword presented, and apparently come to another person placed in the
+direction of the motion of the image, who, if he be unacquainted with
+the experiment, and does not see the original sword, will be much
+surprised and alarmed.
+
+
+_The Phantom._
+
+You inform a person that at a certain hour, and in a certain place, he
+shall see the apparition of a deceased friend, (whose portrait you
+possess.) In order to produce this phantom, there must be a door which
+opens into an apartment to which there is a considerable descent.
+Under that door you are to place the portrait, which must be inverted
+and strongly illuminated, that it may be brightly reflected by the
+mirror, which must be large and well polished. Then having introduced
+the incredulous spectator at another door, and placed him in the
+proper point of view, you suddenly throw open the door, when to his
+great surprise he will view the apparition of his friend.
+
+
+_The Distorting Mirror._
+
+Opticians sometimes grind a glass mirror concave in one direction
+only, or longitudinally; it is in fact a concave portion of a
+cylinder, the breadth of which may be considered that of the mirror. A
+person looking at his face in this mirror, in the direction of its
+concavity, will see it curiously distorted in a very lengthened
+appearance; and by turning the cylindrical mirror a quarter round, his
+visage will appear distorted another way, by an apparent increase in
+width only. If in a very near situation before it, you put your finger
+on the right hand side of your nose, it will appear the same in the
+mirror; but if in a distant situation, somewhat beyond the centre of
+concavity, you again look at your face in the mirror, your finger will
+appear to be removed to the other side of your nose.
+
+
+_Water colder than Ice._
+
+Put a lump of ice into an equal quantity of water, heated to 176
+degrees, the result will be, that the fluid will be no hotter than
+water just beginning to freeze; but if a little sea salt be added to
+the water, and it be heated only to 166 or 170, a fluid will be
+produced _colder than the ice was at first_.
+
+
+_Exploding Salt._
+
+If a small quantity of powdered charcoal and hyper-oxymuriate of
+potash be rubbed together in a mortar, an explosion will be produced,
+and the charcoal inflamed. Three parts of this salt, and one of
+sulphur, rubbed together in a mortar, produce a violent detonation. If
+struck with a hammer on an anvil, there is an explosion like the
+report of a pistol.
+
+When concentrated sulphuric acid is poured upon this salt, there is a
+considerable explosion; it is thrown about to a great distance,
+sometimes with a red flame; and there is exhaled a brown vapour,
+accompanied with a strong odour.
+
+
+_Dioptrical Paradox._
+
+Construct a machine similar to that in Fig. 25. Its effect will be,
+that a print, or an ornamented drawing, with any object, such as an
+ace of diamonds, &c. in the centre F, will be seen as an ace of clubs
+when placed in the machine, and viewed through a single plane glass
+only, contained in the tube E. The glass in the tube F, which produces
+this surprising change, is somewhat on the principle of the common
+multiplying glass, as represented at G, which, by the number of its
+inclined surfaces, and from the refractive power of the rays
+proceeding from the objects placed before it shows it in a multiplied
+state. The only difference is, that the sides of this glass are flat,
+and diverge upwards from the base to a point in the axis of the glass
+like a cone; it has six sides, and each side, from its angular
+position to the eye, has the property of refracting from the border of
+the print F, such a portion of it (designedly placed there) as will
+make a part in the composition of the figure to be represented; for
+the hexagonal and conical figure of this glass prevents any part of
+the ace of diamonds being seen; consequently the ace of clubs being
+previously and mechanically drawn in the circle of refraction in six
+different parts of the border, at 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and artfully
+disguised in the ornamental border, by blending them with it, the
+glass in the tube at E will change the appearance of the ace of
+diamonds, F, into the ace of clubs, G. In the same manner many other
+prints undergo similar changes, according to the will of an ingenious
+draughtsman who may design them. The figure of the glass is shown at
+H.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 25.]
+
+
+_To show the Spots in the Sun's Disk by its Image in the Camera
+Obscura._
+
+Put the object-glass of a ten or twelve feet telescope into the
+scioptric ball, and turn it about till it be directly opposite the
+sun. Then place the pasteboard mentioned in page 16, in the focus of
+the lens, and you will see a clear bright image of the sun, about an
+inch diameter, in which the spots on the sun's surface will be exactly
+described.
+
+As this image is too bright to be seen with pleasure by the naked eye,
+you may view it through a lens whose focus is at six or eight inches
+distance, which, while it prevents the light from being offensive,
+will, by magnifying both the image and the spot, make them appear to
+greater advantage.
+
+
+_The Diagonal Opera Glass._
+
+By the diagonal position of a plane mirror, a curious opera-glass is
+constructed, by which any person may be viewed in a theatre or public
+company without knowing it. It consists only in placing a concave
+glass near the plane mirror, in the end of a short round tube, and a
+convex glass in a hole in the side of the tube, then holding the end
+of the tube with the glass to the eye, all objects next to the hole in
+the side will be reflected so as to appear in a direct line forward,
+or in a position at right angles to the person's situation who is
+looked at. Plane glasses, instead of a convex and concave, may be
+used; in this case the size of the object will not be increased, but
+it will appear brighter.
+
+
+_To observe an Eclipse of the Sun, without Injury to the Eye._
+
+Take a burning-glass, or spectacle-glass, that magnifies very much;
+hold it before a book or pasteboard, twice the distance of its focus,
+and you will see the round body of the sun, and the manner in which
+the moon passes between the glass and the sun, during the whole
+eclipse.
+
+
+_The Burnt Writing restored._
+
+Cover the outside of a small memorandum book with black paper, and in
+one of its inside covers make a flap, to open secretly, and observe
+there must be nothing over the flap but the black paper that covers
+the book.
+
+Mix soot with black or brown soap, with which rub the side of the
+black paper next the flap; then wipe it clean, that a white paper
+pressed against it will not receive any mark.
+
+Provide a black-lead pencil that will not mark without pressing hard
+on the paper. Have likewise a small box, about the size of a
+memorandum book, and that opens on both sides, but on one of them by a
+private method. Give a person a pencil and a slip of thin paper, on
+which he is to write what he thinks proper; you present him the
+memorandum book at the same time, that he may not write on the bare
+paper. You tell him to keep what he writes to himself, and direct him
+to burn it on the iron plate laid on a chafing-dish of coals, and give
+you the ashes. You then go into another room to fetch your magic box,
+before described, and take with you the memorandum book.
+
+Having previously placed a paper under the flap in the cover of the
+book, when he presses hard with the pencil, to write on his paper,
+every stroke, by means of the stuff rubbed on the black paper, will
+appear on that under the flap. You therefore take it out, and put it
+into one side of the box.
+
+You then return to the other room, and taking a slip of black paper,
+you put it into the other side of the box, strewing the ashes of the
+burnt paper over it. Then shaking the box for a few moments, and at
+the same time turning it dexterously over, you open the other side,
+and show the person the paper you first put in, the writing on which
+he will readily acknowledge to be his.
+
+If there be a press or cupboard that communicates with the next room,
+you need only put the book in the press, and your assistant will open
+it, and put the paper in the box, which you presently after take out,
+and perform the rest of the amusement as before.
+
+There may likewise be a flap on the other cover of the book; and you
+may rub the paper against that with red lead. In this case you give
+the person the choice of writing either with a black or red pencil;
+and present him the proper side of the book accordingly.
+
+
+_The Opaque Box made Transparent._
+
+Make a box three or four inches long, and two or three wide, and have
+a sort of perspective-glass, the bottom of which is the same size with
+the box, and slides out, that you may privately place a paper on it.
+The sides of this perspective are to be of glass, covered on the
+inside with fine paper.
+
+Let a person write on a slip of paper, putting your memorandum book
+under it, as in the last amusement; then give him the little box, and
+let him put what he has written into it. In the mean time you put the
+memorandum book into the press, where the perspective is already
+placed. Your assistant then takes the paper out of the book, and puts
+it at the bottom of the perspective; which you presently take out of
+the press, and direct the person to put the little box that contains
+the paper under it. You then look in at the top of the perspective,
+and feigning to see through the top of the box, you read what is
+written on the paper at the bottom of the perspective.
+
+With this perspective box you may perform another amusement, which is,
+by having in a bag twelve or more ivory counters, numbered, which you
+show to the company, that they may see all the numbers are different.
+You tell a person to draw any one of them, and keep it close in his
+hand. You then put the bag in the press, when your assistant examines
+the counters, and sees which is wanting, and puts another of the same
+number at the bottom of the perspective, which you then take out, and
+placing the person's hand close to it, look in at the top, and
+pretending to see through his hand, you name the number on the counter
+in it.
+
+
+_The Transposable Pieces._
+
+Take two guineas and two shillings, and grind part of them away, on
+one side only, so that they may be but half the common thickness; and
+observe, that they must be quite thin at the edge; then rivet a guinea
+and a shilling together. Lay one of these double pieces, with the
+shilling upwards, on the palm of your hand, at the bottom of your
+three first fingers, and lay the other piece with the guinea upwards
+in the like manner, in the other hand. Let the company take notice in
+which hand is the guinea, and in which is the shilling. Then as you
+shut your hands, you naturally turn the pieces over, and when you open
+them again, the shilling and the guinea will appear to have changed
+their places.
+
+
+_The Penetrative Guinea._
+
+Provide a large tin box, of the size of a large snuff-box, and in this
+place eight other boxes, which will go easily into each other, and let
+the least of them be of a size to hold a guinea. Each of these boxes
+should shut with a hinge, and to the least of them there must be a
+small lock, that is fastened with a spring, but cannot be opened
+without a key;--observe, that all these boxes must shut so freely,
+that they may be all closed at once. Place these boxes in each other,
+with their tops open, in the drawer of the table on which you make
+your experiments; or, if you please, in your pocket, in such a manner
+that they cannot be displaced.
+
+Then ask a person to lend you a new guinea, and desire him to mark it,
+that it may not be changed. You take this piece in one hand, and in
+the other you have another of the same appearance, and putting your
+hand into the drawer, you slip the piece that is marked into the least
+box, and shutting them all at once, you take them out; then showing
+the piece you have in your hand, and which the company suppose to be
+the same that was marked, you pretend to make it pass through the box,
+and dexterously convey it away.
+
+You then present the box, for the spectators do not yet know there are
+more than one, to any person in company, who, when he opens it, finds
+another, and another, till he comes to the last, but that he cannot
+open without the key, which you then give him, and retiring to a
+distant part of the room, you tell him to take out the guinea himself,
+and see if it be that which he marked.
+
+This amusement may be made more surprising, by putting the key into
+the snuff-box of one of the company, which you may do by asking him
+for a pinch of snuff, and at the same time conceal the key, which must
+be very small, among the snuff; and when the person, who is to open
+the box, asks for the key, you tell him that one of the company has it
+in his snuff-box. This part of the amusement may likewise be performed
+by means of a confederate.
+
+
+_To make Pictures of Birds with their Natural Feathers._
+
+First take thin board or panel, of deal or wainscot, well seasoned,
+that it may not shrink; then paste white paper smoothly on it, and
+let it dry; if the colour of the wood show through, paste a second
+paper over it. When the paper is dry, get ready any bird that you
+would represent, and draw the outline as exact as you can on the
+papered panel. You then paint the ground-work, stump of a tree, the
+bill and legs, their proper colour, with water-colours, leaving the
+body to be covered with its own natural feathers. In the space you
+have left for the body, you lay on very thick gum-water, letting each
+coat dry before you lay on another, and so continuing until the gum is
+as thick as a shilling. Then take the feathers off the bird; and, as
+you proceed, draw a camels'-hair pencil, dipped in gum-water, over the
+coat of gum that you have laid on the paper, that it may more readily
+adhere. As you strip the bird, you must fix the feathers in their
+proper places on the board, and you shave the shafts or stems of the
+larger feathers, that they may lie flat. The most ready way to perform
+the operation, is to provide yourself with a pair of steel pliars to
+take up and lay on the feathers with. You should prepare some small
+leaden weights to lay on the feathers, that they may more readily
+adhere to, and lie flat on, the gum. The part where the eye is must be
+supplied by a small piece of paper, coloured and shaped like one; or
+you may, probably, be able to get a glass bead that will answer the
+purpose better. In order that the feathers may lie smooth and regular,
+when the whole is perfectly dry, lay a book, or a flat board, with a
+weight on it.
+
+
+_The Art of Bronzing._
+
+Bronzing is that process by which figures of plaster-of-paris, wood,
+&c. are made to have the appearance of copper or brass. The method is
+as follows:
+
+Dissolve copper filings in aqua fortis. When the copper has
+impregnated the acid, pour off the solution, and put into it some
+pieces of iron, or iron filings. The effect of this will be to sink
+the powder to the bottom of the acid. Pour off the liquor, and wash
+the powder in successive quantities of fresh water. When the powder is
+dry, it is to be rubbed on the figure with a soft cloth, or piece of
+leather; but observe, that previously to the application of the bronze
+powder, a dark blackish sort of green is first to be laid on the
+figure: and if you wish the powder to adhere stronger, mix it with
+gum-water, lay it on like paint, with a camels'-hair brush, or
+previously trace the parts to be bronzed with gold size, and when
+nearly dry, rub the powder over it.
+
+
+_Method of taking the Impression of Butterflies on Paper._
+
+Clip the wings off the butterfly, lay them on clean, in the form of a
+butterfly when flying. Spread some thick clean gum-water on another
+piece of paper, press it on the wings, and it will take them up; lay a
+piece of white paper over it, and rub it gently with your finger, or
+the smooth handle of a knife. The bodies are to be drawn in the space
+which you leave between the wings.
+
+
+_To soften Horn._
+
+To one pound of wood-ashes, add two pounds of quick lime; put them
+into a quart of water. Let the whole boil till reduced to one-third.
+Then dip a feather in, and if, on drawing it out, the plume should
+come off, it is a proof that it is boiled enough; if not, let it boil
+a little longer. When it is settled, filter it off, and in the liquor
+thus strained put in shavings of horn. Let them soak for three days;
+and, first anointing your hands with oil, work the horn into a mass,
+and print or mould it into any shape you please.
+
+
+_To make Moulds of Horn._
+
+If you wish to take the impression of any coin, medal, &c., previously
+anoint it with oil; then lay the horn shavings over it in its softened
+state. When dry, the impression will be sunk into the horn; and this
+will serve as a mould to re-produce, either by plaster-of-paris, putty
+and glue, or isinglass and ground egg-shells, the exact resemblance of
+the coin or medal.
+
+
+_To cast Figures in Imitation of Ivory._
+
+Make isinglass and strong brandy into a paste, with powder of
+egg-shells, very finely ground. You may give it what colour you
+please; but cast it warm into your mould, which you previously oil
+over. Leave the figure in the mould till dry, and you will find, on
+taking it out, that it bears a very strong resemblance to ivory.
+
+
+_To extract the Silver out of a Ring that is thick gilded, so that the
+Gold may remain entire._
+
+Take a silver ring that is thick gilded. Make a little hole through
+the gold into the silver; then put the ring into aqua fortis, in a
+warm place: it will dissolve the silver, and the gold will remain
+whole.
+
+
+_To soften Iron or Steel._
+
+Either of the following simple methods will make iron or steel as soft
+as lead:
+
+1. Anoint it all over with tallow; temper it in a gentle charcoal
+fire, and let it cool of itself.
+
+2. Take a little clay, cover your iron with it, temper it in a
+charcoal fire.
+
+3. When the iron or steel is red-hot, strew hellebore on it.
+
+4. Quench the iron or steel in the juice or water of common beans.
+
+
+_To take a Plaster-of-Paris Cast from a Person's Face._
+
+The person must lie on his back, and his hair be tied behind. Into
+each nostril put a conical piece of paper, open at each end to allow
+of breathing. The face is to be lightly oiled over, and the plaster
+being properly prepared is to be poured over the face, (taking care
+that the eyes are shut,) till it is a quarter of an inch thick. In a
+few minutes the plaster may be removed. In this a mould is to be
+formed, from which a second cast is to be taken, that will furnish
+casts exactly like the original.
+
+
+_Curious Experiment with a Glass of Water._
+
+Saturate a certain quantity of water in a moderate heat, with three
+ounces of sugar; and when it will no longer receive that, there is
+still room in it for two ounces of salt of tartar, and after that for
+an ounce and a drachm of green vitriol, nearly six drachms of nitre,
+the same of sal-ammoniac, two drachms and a scruple of alum, and a
+drachm and half of borax.
+
+
+_To make Artificial Coruscations._
+
+There is a method of producing artificial coruscations, or sparkling
+fiery meteors, which will be visible, not only in the dark but at
+noon-day, and that from two liquors actually cold. The method is
+this:--Fifteen grains of solid phosphorus are to be melted in about a
+drachm of water: when this is cold, pour upon it two ounces of oil of
+vitriol; let these be shaken together in a large phial, and they will
+at first heat, and afterwards will throw up fiery balls in great
+number, which will adhere like so many stars to the sides of the
+glass, and continue burning a considerable time; after this, if a
+small quantity of oil of turpentine be poured in without shaking the
+phial, the mixture will of itself take fire, and burn very furiously.
+The vessels should be large and open at the top.
+
+
+_Another Method._
+
+Artificial coruscations may also be produced by means of oil of
+vitriol and iron, in the following manner:--Take a glass vessel
+capable of holding three quarts: put into this three ounces of oil of
+vitriol, and twelve ounces of water, then warming the mixture a
+little, throw in at several times two ounces, or more, of clear iron
+filings: upon this, an ebullition and white vapours will arise; then
+present a lighted candle to the mouth of the vessel, and the vapour
+will take fire, and afford a bright fulmination or flash; like
+lightning. Applying the candle in this manner several times, the
+effect will always be the same; and sometimes the fire will fill the
+whole body of the glass, and even circulate to the bottom of the
+liquor; at others, it will only reach a little down its neck. The
+great caution to be used in making this experiment, is the making the
+vapour of a proper heat; for if made too cold few vapours will arise;
+and, if made too hot, they will arise too fast, and will only take
+fire in the neck of the glass, without any remarkable coruscation.
+
+
+_To produce Fire from Cane._
+
+The Chinese rattans, which are used, when split, for making cane
+chairs, will, when dry, if struck against each other, give fire; and
+are used accordingly in some places, in lieu of flint and steel.
+
+
+_To make an Eolian Harp._
+
+This instrument may be made by almost any carpenter: it consists of a
+long narrow box of very thin deal, about five or six inches deep, with
+a circle in the middle of the upper side, of an inch and a half in
+diameter, in which are to be drilled small holes. On this side, seven,
+ten, or more strings, of very fine gut, are stretched over bridges at
+each end, like the bridges of a fiddle, and screwed up or relaxed with
+screw pins. The strings must be all tuned to one and the same note,
+and the instrument be placed in some current of air, where the wind
+can pass over its strings with freedom. A window, of which the width
+is exactly equal to the length of the harp, with the sash just raised
+to give the air admission, is a proper situation. When the air blows
+upon these strings, with different degrees of force, it will excite
+different tones of sounds; sometimes the blast brings out all the
+tones in full concert, and sometimes it sinks them to the softest
+murmurs.
+
+
+_To show the Pressure of the Atmosphere._
+
+Invert a tall glass or jar in a dish of water, and place a lighted
+taper under it: as the taper consumes the air in the jar its pressure
+becomes less on the water immediately under the jar; while the
+pressure of the atmosphere on the water _without_ the circle of the
+jar remaining the same, part of the water in the dish will be forced
+up into the jar, to supply the place of the air which the taper has
+consumed. Nothing but the pressure of the atmosphere could thus cause
+part of the water to rise within the jar, above its own level.
+
+
+_Subaqueous Exhalation._
+
+Pour a little clear water into a small glass tumbler, and put one or
+two small pieces of phosphoret of lime into it. In a short time,
+flashes of fire will dart from the surface of the water, and terminate
+in ringlets of smoke, which will ascend in regular succession.
+
+
+_Remarkable Properties in certain Plants._
+
+Plants, when forced from their natural position, are endowed with a
+power to restore themselves. A hop-plant, twisting round a stick,
+directs its course from south to west, as the sun does. Untwist it,
+and tie it in the opposite direction, it dies. Leave it loose in the
+wrong direction, it recovers its natural direction in a single night.
+Twist a branch of a tree so as to invert its leaves, and fix it in
+that position; if left in any degree loose, it untwists itself
+gradually, till the leaves be restored to their natural position. What
+better can an animal do for its welfare? A root of a tree meeting with
+a ditch in its progress, is laid open to the air; what follows? It
+alters its course like a rational being, dips into the ground,
+surrounds the ditch, rises on the opposite side of its wonted distance
+from the surface, and then proceeds in its original direction. Lay a
+wet sponge near a root exposed to the air; the root will direct its
+course to the sponge; change the place of the sponge, the root varies
+its direction. Thrust a pole into the ground at a moderate distance
+from a climbing plant; the plant directs its course to the pole, lays
+hold of it, and rises on its natural height. A honeysuckle proceeds in
+its course, till it be too long for supporting its weight, and then
+strengthens itself by shooting into a spiral. If it meet with another
+plant of the same kind, they coalesce for mutual support; the one
+screwing to the right, the other to the left. If a honeysuckle twig
+meet with a dead branch, it screws from the right to the left. The
+claspers of briony shoot into the spiral, and lay hold of whatever
+comes in their way, for support. If, after completing a spiral of
+three rounds, they meet with nothing, they try again, by altering
+their course.
+
+
+_Flowers curiously affected by the Sun and the Weather._
+
+The petals of many flowers expand in the sun, but contract all night,
+or on the approach of rain; after the seeds are fecundated the petals
+no longer contract. All the trefoil may serve as a barometer to the
+husbandman; they always contract their leaves on an impending storm.
+
+
+_Easy Method of obtaining Flowers of different Colours from the same
+Stem._
+
+Scoop out the pith from a small twig of elder, and having split it
+lengthwise, fill each of the parts with small seeds that produce
+flowers of different colours, but that blossom nearly at the same
+time. Surround them with earth; and then tying together the two bits
+of wood, plant the whole in a pot filled with earth, properly
+prepared.
+
+
+_A Luminous Bottle, which will show the Hour on a Watch in the Dark._
+
+Throw a bit of phosphorus, of the size of a pea, into a long glass
+phial, and pour boiling oil carefully over it, till the phial is
+one-third filled. The phial must be carefully corked, and when used
+should be unstopped, to admit the external air, and closed again. The
+empty space of the phial will then appear luminous, and give as much
+light as an ordinary lamp. Each time that the light disappears, on
+removing the stopper it will instantly re-appear. In cold weather the
+bottle should be warmed in the hands before the stopper is removed. A
+phial thus prepared may be used every night for six months.
+
+
+_To make Luminous Writing in the Dark._
+
+Fix a small piece of solid phosphorus in a quill, and write with it
+upon paper; if the paper be carried into a dark room, the writing will
+appear beautifully luminous.
+
+
+_The Sublimated Tree._
+
+Into a large glass jar inverted upon a flat brick tile, and containing
+near its top a branch of fresh rosemary, or any other such shrub,
+moistened with water, introduce a flat thick piece of heated iron, on
+which place some gum benzoin, in gross powder. The benzoin, in
+consequence of the heat, will be separated, and ascend in white fumes,
+which will at length condense, and form a most beautiful appearance
+upon the leaves of the vegetable.
+
+
+_Easy and curious Methods of foretelling Rainy or Fine Weather._
+
+If a line be made of good whipcord, that is well dried, and a plummet
+affixed to the end of it, and then hung against a wainscot, and a line
+drawn under it, exactly where the plummet reaches, in very moderate
+weather it will be found to rise above it before rain, and to sink
+below when the weather is likely to become fair. But the best
+instrument of all, is a good pair of scales, in one of which let there
+be a brass weight of a pound, and in the other a pound of salt, or of
+saltpetre, well dried; a stand being placed under the scale, so as to
+hinder it falling too low. When it is inclined to rain, the salt will
+swell, and sink the scale: when the weather is growing fair, the brass
+weight will regain its ascendancy.
+
+
+_Contrivance for a Watch Lamp, perfectly safe, which will show the
+Hour of the Night, without any trouble, to a person lying in Bed._
+
+It consists of a stand, with three claws, the pillar of which is made
+hollow, for the purpose of receiving a water candlestick of an inch
+diameter. On the top of the pillar, by means of two hinges and a bolt,
+is fixed on a small proportionate table, a box of six sides, lined
+with brass, tin, or any shining metal, nine inches deep, and six
+inches in diameter. In the centre of one of these sides is fixed a
+lens, double convex, of at least three inches and a half diameter. The
+centre of the side directly opposite to the lens is perforated so as
+to receive the dial-plate of the watch, the body of which is confined
+on the outside, by means of a hollow slide. When the box is lighted by
+a common watch-light, the figures are magnified nearly to the size of
+those of an ordinary clock.
+
+
+_Curious Experiment with a Tulip._
+
+The bulb of a tulip in every respect resembles buds, except in their
+being produced under ground, and include the leaves and flower in
+miniature, which are to be expanded in the ensuing spring. By
+cautiously cutting in the early spring, through the concentric coats
+of a tulip root, longitudinally from the top to the base, and taking
+them off successively, the whole flower of the next summer's tulip is
+beautifully seen by the naked eye, with its petals, pistal, and
+stamina.
+
+
+_The Travelling of Sound experimentally proved._
+
+There is probably no substance which is not in some measure a
+conductor of sound; but sound is much enfeebled by passing from one
+medium to another. If a man, stopping one of his ears with his finger,
+stop the other also by pressing it against the end of a long stick,
+and a watch be applied to the opposite end of the stick, or a piece of
+timber, be it ever so long, the beating of the watch will be
+distinctly heard; whereas, in the usual way, it can scarcely be heard
+at the distance of fifteen or eighteen feet. The same effect will take
+place if he stops both his ears with his hands, and rest his teeth,
+his temple, or the gristly part of one of his ears against the end of
+a stick. Instead of a watch, a gentle scratch may be made at one end
+of a pole or rod, and the person who keeps his ear in close contact
+with the other end of the pole, will hear it very plainly. Thus,
+persons who are dull of hearing, may, by applying their teeth to some
+part of a harpsichord, or other sounding body, hear the sound much
+better than otherwise.
+
+If a person tie a strip of flannel about a yard long, round a poker,
+then press with his thumbs and fingers the ends of the flannel into
+his ears, while he swings the poker against an iron fender, he will
+hear a sound very like that of a large church bell.
+
+
+_To produce Metallic Lead from the Powder._
+
+Take one ounce of red lead, and half a drachm of charcoal in powder,
+incorporate them well in a mortar, and then fill the bowl of a
+tobacco-pipe with the mixture. Submit it to an intense heat, in a
+common fire, and when melted, pour it out upon a slab, and the result
+will be metallic lead completely revived.
+
+
+_To diversify the Colours of Flowers._
+
+Fill a vessel of what size or shape you please, with good rich earth,
+which has been dried and sifted in the sun, then plant in the same a
+slip or branch of a plant bearing a white flower, (for such only can
+be tinged,) and use no other water to water it with, but such as is
+tinged with red, if you desire red flowers; with blue, if blue
+flowers, &c. With this coloured water, water the plant twice a day,
+morning and evening, and remove it into the house at night, so that it
+drink not of the morning or evening dew for three weeks. You will then
+experience, that it will produce flowers, not altogether tinctured
+with that colour wherewith you watered it, but partly with that, and
+partly with the natural.
+
+
+_How far Sound travels in a Minute._
+
+However it may be with regard to the theories of sound, experience has
+taught us, that it travels at about the rate of 1142 feet in a second,
+or nearly thirteen miles in a minute. The method of calculating its
+progress is easily made known: when a gun is discharged at a distance,
+we see the fire long before we hear the sound; if, then, we know the
+distance of the place, and know the time of the interval between our
+first seeing the fire, and then hearing the report, this will show us
+exactly the time the sound has been travelling to us. For instance, if
+the gun be discharged a mile off, the moment the flash is seen I take
+a watch and count the seconds till I hear the sound; the number of
+seconds is the time the sound has been travelling a mile.
+
+
+_Easy Method of making a Rain Gauge._
+
+A very simple rain gauge, and one which will answer all practical
+purposes, consists of a copper funnel the area of whose opening is
+exactly ten square inches: this funnel is fixed in a bottle, and the
+quantity of rain caught is ascertained by multiplying the weight in
+ounces by 173, which gives the depth in inches and parts of an inch.
+In fixing these gauges, care must be taken that the rain may have free
+access to them: hence the tops of buildings are usually the best
+places. When the quantities of rain collected in them at different
+places are compared, the instruments ought to be fixed at the same
+heights above the ground at both places, because at different heights
+the quantities are always different, even at the same place.
+
+
+_To make beautiful Transparent coloured Water._
+
+The following liquors, which are coloured, being mixed, produce
+colours very different from their own. The yellow tincture of
+saffron, and the red tincture of roses, when mixed, produce a green.
+Blue tincture of violets, and brown spirit of sulphur, produce a
+crimson. Red tincture of roses, and brown spirits of hartshorn, make a
+blue. Blue tincture of violets, and blue solution of copper, give a
+violet colour. Blue tincture of cyanus, and blue spirit of
+sal-ammoniac coloured, make green. Blue solution of Hungarian vitriol,
+and brown ley of potash, make yellow. Blue solution of Hungarian
+vitriol, and red tincture of roses, make black; and blue tincture of
+cyanus, and green solution of copper, produce red.
+
+
+_Curious Experiment on Rays of Light._
+
+That the rays of light flow in all directions from different bodies,
+without interrupting one another, is plain from the following
+experiment:--Make a little hole in a thin plate of metal, and set the
+plate upright on a table, facing a row of lighted candles standing
+near together; then place a sheet of paper or pasteboard at a little
+distance from the other side of the plate; and the rays of all the
+candles, flowing through the hole, will form as many specks of light
+on the paper as there are candles before the plate; each speck as
+distinct and large as if there were only one candle to cast one speck;
+which shows that the rays do not obstruct each other in their motions,
+although they all cross in the same hole.
+
+
+_The Power of Water._
+
+Let a strong small iron tube of twenty feet in height be inserted into
+the bung-hole of a cask, and the aperture round so strongly closed,
+that it shall be water-tight; pour water into the cask till it is
+full, through the pipe; also continue filling the pipe till the cask
+bursts, which will be when the water is within a foot of the top of
+the tube. In this experiment the water, on bursting the vessel, will
+fly about with considerable violence.
+
+
+_The Pressure of Water._
+
+The pressure of water may be known to every one who will only take the
+trouble to look at the cock of a water-butt when turned: if the tub or
+cistern be full, the water runs with much greater velocity through
+the cock, and a vessel will be filled from it in a shorter time than
+when it is only half-full, although the cock, in both cases, is
+equally replete with the fluid during the time the vessel is filling.
+From this also is understood, how a hole or leak, near the keel of a
+ship, admits the water much quicker, and with greater violence, than
+one of the same size near what the mariners call the water's edge.
+
+
+_Refraction of Light._
+
+In the middle of an empty basin put a piece of money, and then retire
+from it till the edge of the basin hides the piece from your sight:
+then keep your head steady, let another person fill the basin gently
+with water; as the water rises in the basin the money will come in
+view; and when of a sufficient height in the basin, the whole of the
+piece will be in sight.
+
+
+_Wonderful Nature of Lightning._
+
+If two persons, standing in a room, looking different ways, and a loud
+clap of thunder, accompanied with zigzag lightning, happen, they will
+both distinctly see the flash at the same time; not only the
+illumination, but the very form of the lightning itself, and every
+angle it makes in its course will be as distinctly perceptible, as
+though they had both looked directly at the cloud from whence it
+proceeded. If a person happened at that time to be looking on a book,
+or other object, which he held in his hand, he would distinctly see
+the form of the lightning between him and the object at which he
+looked. This property seems peculiar to lightning, as it does not
+apply to any other kind of fire whatever.
+
+
+_To show that the White of Eggs contains an Alkali._
+
+Add to a wine-glass half full of tincture of red cabbage a small
+quantity of the white of an egg, either in a liquid state or rendered
+concrete by boiling. The tincture will lose its blue colour and become
+changed to green, because the white of the egg contains soda.
+
+
+_Two Inodorous Bodies become very Pungent and Odorous by Mixture._
+
+When equal parts of muriate of ammonia and unslaked lime, both
+substances destitute of odour, are intimately blended together in a
+mortar, a very pungent gas (ammonia) becomes evolved.
+
+
+_Interesting Experiment for the Microscope._
+
+The embryo grain of wheat, at the time of blossoming, being carefully
+taken out of the husk, will be found to have a small downy tuft at its
+extremity, which, when viewed in a microscope, greatly resembles the
+branches of thorn, spreading archwise, in opposite directions. By
+expanding a few of the grains, and selecting the most perfect, a very
+pretty microscopic object will be obtained for preservation.
+
+
+_The Travelling of Light._
+
+Light travels at the rate of a hundred and fifty thousand miles in a
+single second; and it is seven minutes in passing from the sun to the
+earth, which is nearly a distance of seventy millions of miles. Such
+is the rapidity with which these rays dart themselves forward that a
+journey they thus perform in less than eight minutes, a ball from the
+mouth of a cannon would not complete in several weeks! But the
+minuteness of the particles of light are still several degrees beyond
+their velocity; and they are therefore harmless, because so very
+small. A ray of light is nothing more than a constant stream of minute
+parts, still flowing from the luminary, so inconceivably little, that
+a candle in a single second of time, has been said to diffuse several
+hundreds of millions more particles of light, than there could be
+grains in the whole earth, if it were entirely one heap of sand. The
+sun furnishes them, and the stars also, without appearing in the least
+to consume, by granting us the supply. Its light is diffused in a wide
+sphere, and seems inexhaustible.
+
+
+_Calculation of the Mass of Water contained in the Sea._
+
+If we would have an idea of the enormous quantity of water which the
+sea contains, let us suppose a common and general depth of the ocean;
+by computing it at only 200 fathoms, or the tenth part of a mile, we
+shall see that there is sufficient water to cover the whole globe to
+the height of 503 feet of water; and if we were to reduce this water
+into one mass, we should find that it forms a globe of more than sixty
+thousand miles diameter.
+
+
+_Different Degrees of Heat imbibed from the Sun's Rays by Cloths of
+different Colours._
+
+Walk but a quarter of an hour in your garden, when the sun shines,
+with a part of your dress white, and a part black; then apply your
+hand to them alternately, and you will find a very great difference in
+their warmth. The black will be quite hot to the touch, and the white
+still cool.
+
+Try to fire paper with a burning-glass; if it be white, you will not
+easily burn it; but if you bring the focus to a black spot, or upon
+letters, written or printed, the paper will immediately be on fire
+under the letters.
+
+Thus, fullers and dyers find black cloths, of equal thickness with
+white ones, and hung out equally wet, dry in the sun much sooner than
+the white, being more readily heated by the sun's rays. It is the same
+before a fire, the heat of which sooner penetrates black stockings
+than white ones, and so is apt sooner to burn a man's shins. Also beer
+much sooner warms in a black mug set before the fire than a white one,
+or in a bright silver tankard. Take a number of little square pieces
+of cloth from a tailor's pattern card, of various colours; say black,
+deep blue, lighter blue, green, purple, red, yellow, white, and other
+colours, or shades of colours; lay them all out upon the snow in a
+bright sun-shiny morning; in a few hours, the black being warmed most
+by the sun will be sunk so low as to be below the stroke of the sun's
+rays; the dark blue almost as low; the lighter blue not quite so much
+as the dark; the other colours less, as they are lighter; and the
+quite white remain on the surface of the snow, as it will not have
+entered it at all.
+
+
+_Alternate Illusion._
+
+With a convex lens of about an inch focus, look attentively at a
+silver seal, on which a cipher is engraved. It will at first appear
+cut in, as to the naked eye; but if you continue to observe it some
+time, without changing your situation, it will seem to be in relief,
+and the lights and shades will appear the same as they did before. If
+you regard it with the same attention still longer, it will again
+appear to be engraved: and so on alternately.
+
+If you look off the seal for a few moments, when you view it again,
+instead of seeing it, as at first, engraved, it will appear in relief.
+
+If, while you are turned towards the light, you suddenly incline the
+seal, while you continue to regard it, those parts that seemed to be
+engraved will immediately appear in relief: and if, when you are
+regarding these seemingly prominent parts, you turn yourself so that
+the light may fall on the right hand, you will see the shadows on the
+same side from whence the light comes, which will appear not a little
+extraordinary. In like manner the shadows will appear on the left, if
+the light fall on that side. If instead of a seal you look at a piece
+of money, these alterations will not be visible, in whatever situation
+you place yourself.
+
+
+_Alarum._
+
+Against the wall of a room, near the ceiling, fix a wheel of twelve or
+eighteen inches diameter; on the rim of which place a number of bells
+in tune, and, if you please, of different sizes. To the axis of this
+wheel there should be fixed a fly to regulate its motion; and round
+the circumference there must be wound a rope, to the end of which is
+hung a weight.
+
+Near to the wheel let a stand be fixed, on which is an upright piece
+that holds a balance or moveable lever, on one end of which rests the
+weight just mentioned; and to the other end must hang an inverted
+hollow cone, or funnel, the aperture of which is very small. This cone
+must be graduated on the inside, that the sand put in may answer to
+the number of hours it is to run. Against the upright piece, on the
+side next the cone, there must be fixed a check, to prevent it from
+descending. This stand, together with the wheel, may be enclosed in a
+case, and so contrived, as to be moved from one room to another with
+very little trouble.
+
+It is evident, from the construction of this machine, that when a
+certain quantity of the sand is run out, the weight will descend, and
+put the wheel in motion, which motion will continue till the weight
+comes to the ground. If the wheel be required to continue longer in
+motion, two or more pulleys may be added, over which the rope may run.
+
+
+_Musical Cascade._
+
+Where there is a natural cascade, near the lower stream, but not in
+it, let there be placed a large wheel, equal to the breadth of the
+cascade: the diameter of this wheel, for about a foot from each end,
+must be much less than that of the middle part; and all the water from
+the cascade must be made to fall on the ends. The water that falls on
+the wheel may pass through pipes, so that part of it may be made
+occasionally to pass over or fall short of the wheel, as you would
+have the time of the music quicker or slower. The remaining part of
+the wheel, which is to be kept free from the water, must consist of
+bars, on which are placed stops that strike against the bells: these
+stops must likewise be moveable. It is evident from the construction
+of this machine, that the water falling on the floats at the end of
+the wheel, will make the stops, which are adapted to different tunes,
+strike the notes of those tunes on the respective bells. Two or three
+sets of bells may here be placed on the same line, when the cascade is
+sufficiently wide.
+
+Where there is not a natural cascade, one may be artificially
+constructed, by raising part of the ground, wherever there is a
+descent of water; whether it be a stream that supplies a reservoir or
+fountain, or serves domestic uses; or if it be refuse water that has
+already served some other purpose.
+
+
+_Writing on Glass by the Rays of the Sun._
+
+Dissolve chalk in aqua fortis, to the consistence of milk, and add to
+that a strong solution of silver. Keep this liquor in a glass decanter
+well stopped. Then cut out from a paper the letters you would have
+appear, and paste the paper on the decanter, which you are to place in
+the sun, in such a manner that its rays may pass through the spaces
+cut out of the paper, and fall on the surface of the liquor. The part
+of the glass through which the rays pass will turn black, and that
+under the paper will remain white. You must observe not to move the
+bottle during the time of the operation.
+
+
+_To produce the Appearance of a Flower from its Ashes._
+
+Make a tin box, with a cover that takes off. Let this box be supported
+by a pedestal of the same metal, and on which there is a little door.
+In the front of this box is to be a glass.
+
+In a groove, at a small distance from this glass, place a double
+glass, made in the same manner as described in p. 13, (_Magic
+Picture._) Between the front and back glasses place a small upright
+tin tube, supported by a cross piece. Let there be also a small
+chafing-dish placed in the pedestal. The box is to be opened behind.
+You privately place a flower in the tin tube, but not so near the
+front glass as to be in the least degree visible, and presenting one
+that resembles it to any person, desire him to burn it on the coals in
+a chafing-dish.
+
+You then strew some powder over the coals, which may be supposed to
+aid the ashes in producing the flower; and put the chafing-dish in the
+pedestal under the box. As the heat by degrees melts the composition
+between the glasses, the flower will gradually appear, but when the
+chafing-dish is taken away, and the powder of the ashes is supposed to
+be removed, the flower soon disappears.
+
+You may present several flowers, and let the person choose any one of
+them. In this case, while he is burning the flower, you fetch the box
+from another apartment, and at the same time put in a corresponding
+flower, which will make the experiment still more surprising.
+
+
+_Imitative Fire-works._
+
+Take a paper that is blacked on both sides, or instead of black, the
+paper may be coloured on each side with a deep blue, which will be
+still better for such as are to be seen through transparent papers. It
+must be of a proper size for the figure you intend to exhibit. In this
+paper cut out with a penknife several spaces, and with a piercer make
+a number of holes, rather long than round, and at no regular distance
+from each other.
+
+To represent revolving pyramids and globes, the paper must be cut
+through with a penknife, and the space cut out between each spiral
+should be three or four times as wide as the spirals themselves. You
+must observe to cut them so that the pyramid or globe may appear to
+turn on its axis. The columns that are represented in pieces of
+architecture, or in jets of fire, must be cut in the same manner, if
+they are to be represented as turning on their axis.
+
+In like manner may be exhibited a great variety of ornaments, ciphers,
+and medallions, which, when properly coloured, cannot fail of
+producing the most pleasing effect. There should not be a very great
+diversity of colours, as they would not produce the most agreeable
+appearance.
+
+When these pieces are drawn on a large scale, the architecture or
+ornaments may be shaded; and, to represent different shades, pieces of
+coloured paper must be pasted over each other, which will produce an
+effect that would not be expected from transparent paintings. Five or
+six pieces of paper pasted over each other will be sufficient to
+represent the strongest shades.
+
+To give these pieces the different motions they require, you must
+first consider the nature of each piece; if, for example, you have cut
+out the figure of the sun, or of a star, you must construct a wire
+wheel of the same diameter with these pieces; over this wheel you
+paste a very thin paper, on which is drawn, with black ink, the spiral
+figure. The wheel thus prepared, is to be placed behind the sun or
+star, in such a manner that its axis may be exactly opposite the
+centre of either of these figures. This wheel may be turned by any
+method you think proper.
+
+Now, the wheel being placed directly behind the sun, for example, and
+very near to it, is to be turned regularly round, and strongly
+illuminated by candles placed behind it. The lines that form the
+spiral will then appear, through the spaces cut out from the sun, to
+proceed from its centre to its circumference, and will resemble sparks
+of fire that incessantly succeed each other. The same effect will be
+produced by the star or by any other figure where the fire is not to
+appear as proceeding from the circumference of the centre.
+
+These two pieces, as well as those that follow, may be of any size,
+provided you observe the proportion between the parts of the figure
+and the spiral, which must be wider in larger figures than in small.
+If the sun, for example, have from six to twelve inches diameter, the
+width of the strokes that form the spiral need not be more than
+one-twentieth part of an inch, and the spaces between them, that form
+transparent parts, about two-tenths of an inch. If the sun be two feet
+diameter, the strokes should be one-eighth of an inch, and the space
+between, one quarter of an inch; and if the figure be six feet
+diameter, the strokes should be one quarter of an inch and the spaces
+five-twelfths of an inch. These pieces have a pleasing effect, when
+represented of a small size, but the deception is more striking when
+they are of large dimensions.
+
+It will be proper to place those pieces, when of a small size, in a
+box quite closed on every side, that none of the light may be diffused
+in the chamber: for which purpose it will be convenient to have a tin
+door behind the box, to which the candlesticks may be soldered, and
+the candles more easily lighted.
+
+The several figures cut out should be placed in frames, that they may
+be put, alternately, in a groove in the forepart of the box; or there
+may be two grooves, that the second piece may be put in before the
+first is taken out.
+
+The wheel must be carefully concealed from the eye of the spectator.
+
+Where there is an opportunity of representing these artificial fires
+by a hole in the partition, they will doubtless have a much more
+striking effect, as the spectator cannot then conjecture by what means
+they are produced.
+
+It is easy to conceive that by extending this method, wheels may be
+constructed with three or four spirals, to which may be given
+different directions. It is manifest also that, on the same principle,
+a great variety of transparent figures may be contrived, and which may
+be all placed before the spiral lines.
+
+
+_To represent Cascades of Fire._
+
+In cutting out cascades, you must take care to preserve a natural
+inequality in the parts cut out; for if, to save time, you should make
+all the holes with the same pointed tool, the uniformity of the parts
+will not fail to produce a disagreeable effect. As these cascades are
+very pleasing when well executed, so they are highly disgusting when
+imperfect. These are the most difficult pieces to cut out.
+
+To produce the apparent motion of these cascades, instead of drawing a
+spiral, you must have a slip of strong paper, of such length as you
+judge convenient. In this paper there must be a greater number of
+holes near each other, and made with pointed tools of different
+dimensions.
+
+At each end of the paper, a part of the same size with the cascade
+must be left uncut; and towards those parts the holes must be made at
+a greater distance from each other.
+
+When the cascade that is cut out is placed before the scroll of paper
+just mentioned, and it is entirely wound upon the roller, the part of
+the paper that is then between being quite opaque, no part of the
+cascade will be visible; but as the winch is gently turned, and
+regularly round, the transparent part of the paper will give to the
+cascade the appearance of fire that descends in the same direction;
+and the illusion will be so strong, that the spectators will think
+they see a cascade of fire; especially if the figure be judiciously
+cut out.
+
+
+_The Oracular Mirror._
+
+Provide a round mirror of about three inches in diameter and whose
+frame is an inch wide. Line the under part of the frame, in which
+holes are to be cut, with very thin glass; behind this glass let a
+mirror of about two inches diameter be placed, which is to be
+moveable, so that by inclining the frame to either side, part of the
+mirror will be visible behind the glass on that side.
+
+Then take Spanish chalk, or cypress vitriol, of which you make a
+pencil, and with this you may write on a glass, and rub it off with a
+cloth, and by breathing on the glass, the writing will appear and
+disappear several times. With this pencil write on one side of the
+mirror, before it is put in the frame, the word _yes_, and on the
+other side, _no_; and wipe them off with a cloth.
+
+You propose to a person to ask any question of this mirror that can be
+answered by the words _yes_ or _no_. Then turning the glass to one
+side, and putting your mouth close to it, as if to repeat the question
+softly, you breathe on it, and the word yes or no will immediately
+appear. This mirror will serve for many other agreeable amusements.
+
+
+_The Hour of the Day or Night told by a suspended Shilling._
+
+However improbable the following experiment may appear, it has been
+proved by repeated trials:
+
+Sling a shilling or sixpence at the end of a piece of thread by means
+of a loop. Then resting your elbow on a table, hold the other end of
+the thread betwixt your fore-finger and thumb, observing to let it
+pass across the ball of the thumb, and thus suspend the shilling into
+an empty goblet. Observe, your hand must be perfectly steady; and if
+you find it difficult to keep it in an immoveable posture, it is
+useless to attempt the experiment. Premising, however, that the
+shilling is properly suspended, you will observe, that when it has
+recovered its equilibrium, it will for a moment be stationary: it will
+then of its own accord, and without the least agency from the person
+holding it, assume the action of a pendulum, vibrating from side to
+side of the glass, and, after a few seconds, will strike the hour
+nearest to the time of day; for instance, if the time be twenty-five
+minutes past six, it will strike six; if thirty-five minutes past six,
+it will strike seven; and so on of any other hour.
+
+It is necessary to observe, that the thread should lie over the pulse
+of the thumb, and this may in some measure account for the _vibration_
+of the shilling; but to what cause its striking the precise hour is to
+be traced, remains unexplained; for it is no less astonishing than
+true, that when it has struck the proper number, its vibration ceases,
+it acquires a kind of rotatory motion, and at last becomes stationary,
+as before.
+
+
+_Of Lightning, and the best Method of guarding against its mischievous
+Effects._
+
+Experiments made in electricity first gave philosophers a suspicion,
+that the matter of lightning was the same with the electric matter.
+Experiments afterwards made on lightning obtained from the clouds by
+pointed rods, received into bottles, and subjected to every trial,
+have since proved this suspicion to be perfectly well founded; and
+that, whatever properties we find in electricity, are also the
+properties of lightning.
+
+This matter of lightning, or of electricity, is an extreme subtle
+fluid, penetrating other bodies, and subsisting in them, equally
+diffused.
+
+When, by any operation of art or nature, there happens to be a greater
+proportion of this fluid in one body than in another, the body which
+has most will communicate to that which has least, till the proportion
+becomes equal, provided the distance between them be not too great;
+or, if it be too great, till there be proper conductors to convey it
+from one to the other.
+
+If the communication be through the air, without any conductor, a
+bright light is seen between the bodies, and a sound is heard. In
+small experiments, we call this light and sound the electric spark and
+snap; but in the great operations of nature, the light is what we call
+_lightning_, and the sound (produced at the same time, though
+generally arriving later at our ears than the light does in our eyes)
+is, with its echoes, called _thunder_.
+
+If the communication of this fluid be by a conductor, it may be
+without either light or sound, the subtle fluid passing in the
+substance of the conductor.
+
+If the conductor be good, and of sufficient bigness, the fluid passes
+through it without hurting it. If otherwise, it is damaged or
+destroyed.
+
+All metals, and water, are good conductors. Other bodies may become
+conductors by having some quantity of water in them, as wood and other
+materials used in building, but not having much water in them, are not
+good conductors, and therefore are often damaged in the operation.
+
+Glass, wax, silk, wool, hair, feathers, and even wood perfectly dry,
+are non-conductors: that is, they resist instead of facilitating the
+passage of this subtle fluid.
+
+When this fluid has an opportunity of passing through two conductors,
+one good and sufficient, as of metal, the other not so good, it passes
+in the best, and will follow in any direction.
+
+The distance at which a body charged with this fluid will discharge
+itself suddenly, striking through the air into another body that is
+not charged, or not so highly charged, is different according to the
+quantity of the fluid, the dimensions and form of the bodies
+themselves, and the state of the air between them. This distance,
+whatever it happens to be between any two bodies, is called their
+striking _distance_, as, till they come within that distance of each
+other, no stroke will be made.
+
+The clouds have often more of this fluid in proportion than the earth:
+in which case, as soon as they come near enough, (that is, within the
+striking distance,) or meet with a conductor, the fluid quits them and
+strikes into the earth. A cloud fully charged with this fluid, if so
+high as to be beyond the striking distance from the earth, passes
+quietly without making noise or giving light, unless it meet with
+other clouds that have less.
+
+Tall trees and lofty buildings, as the towers and spires of churches,
+become sometimes conductors between the clouds and the earth; but, not
+being good ones, that is, not conveying the fluid freely, they are
+often damaged.
+
+Buildings that have their roofs covered with lead, or other metal, and
+spouts of metal continued from the roof into the ground to carry off
+the water, are never hurt by lightning, as, whenever it falls on such
+a building, it passes in the metals and not in the walls.
+
+When other buildings happen to be within the striking distance from
+such clouds, the fluid passes in the walls, whether of wood, brick, or
+stone, quitting the wall only when it can find better conductors near
+them, as metal rods, bolts, and hinges of windows or doors, gilding on
+wainscot, or frames of pictures, the silvering on the backs of
+looking-glasses, the wires for bells, and the bodies of animals, so
+containing watery fluids. And in passing through the house it follows
+the direction of these conductors, taking as many in its way as can
+assist in its passage, whether in a straight or crooked line, leaping
+from one to the other, if not far distant from each other, only
+rending the wall in the spaces where these partial good conductors are
+too distant from each other.
+
+An iron rod being placed on the outside of a building, from the
+highest part continued down into the moist earth, in any direction,
+straight or crooked, following the form of the roof or other parts of
+the building, will receive the lightning at its upper end, attracting
+it so as to prevent its striking any other part; and, affording it a
+good conveyance into the earth, will prevent its damaging any part of
+the building.
+
+A small quantity of metal is found able to conduct a quantity of this
+fluid. A wire no higher than a goose-quill has been known to conduct
+(with safety to the building, as far as the wire was continued) a
+quantity of lightning that did prodigious damage both above and below
+it; and probably larger rods are not necessary, though it is common in
+America to make them of half an inch, some three-quarters, or an inch,
+diameter.
+
+The rod may be fastened to the wall, chimney, &c., with staples of
+iron. The lightning will not leave the rod (a good conductor) to pass
+into the wall (a bad conductor) through those staples. It would
+rather, if any were in the wall, pass out of it into the rod, to get
+more readily by that conductor into the earth.
+
+If the building be very large and extensive, two or more rods may be
+placed in different parts, for greater security.
+
+Small ragged parts of clouds, suspended in the air between the great
+body of clouds and the earth, (like leaf gold in electrical
+experiments,) often serve as partial conductors for the lightning,
+which proceeds from one of them to another, and by their help comes
+within the striking distance to the earth or a building. It therefore
+strikes, through those conductors, a building that would otherwise be
+out of the striking distance.
+
+Long sharp points communicating with the earth, and presented to such
+parts of clouds, drawing silently from them the fluid they are charged
+with, they are then attracted to the cloud, and may leave the distance
+so great as to be beyond the reach of striking.
+
+It is therefore that we elevate the upper end of the rod, six or eight
+feet above the highest part of the building, tapering it gradually to
+a fine sharp point, which is gilt, to prevent its rusting.
+
+Thus the pointed rod either presents a stroke from the cloud, or if a
+stroke be made, conducts it to the earth, with safety to the building.
+
+The lower end of the rod should enter the earth so deep as to come at
+the moist part, perhaps two or three feet; and if bent when under the
+surface, so as to go in a horizontal line six or eight feet from the
+wall, and then bent again downwards three or four feet, it will
+prevent damage to any of the stones of the foundation.
+
+A person apprehensive of danger from lightning, happening during the
+time of thunder to be in a house not so secured, will do well to avoid
+sitting near the chimney, near a looking-glass, or any gilt pictures
+or wainscot; the safest place is in the middle of the room, (so it be
+not under a metal lustre suspended by a chain,) sitting in one chair
+and laying the feet up in another. It is still safer to bring two or
+three mattresses or beds into the middle of the room, and, folding
+them up double, place the chair upon them; for they, not being so good
+conductors as the walls, the lightning will not choose an interrupted
+course through the air of the room and the bedding, when it can go
+through a continued better conductor, the wall. But where it can be
+had, a hammock or swinging-bed, suspended by silk cords equally
+distant from the walls on every side, and from the ceiling and floor
+above and below, affords the safest situation a person can have in any
+room whatever; and what, indeed, may be deemed quite free from danger
+of any stroke by lightning.
+
+
+_The Leech, a Prognosticator of the Weather._
+
+Confine a leech in a large phial, three parts filled with rain water,
+regularly changed twice a week, and placed on a window frame, fronting
+the north. In fair and frosty weather it lies motionless, and rolled
+up in a spiral form, at the bottom of the glass: but prior to rain or
+snow, it creeps up to the top, where if the rain will be heavy and of
+some continuance, it remains a considerable time; if trifling, it
+quickly descends. Should the rain or snow be accompanied with wind, it
+darts about its habitation with amazing celerity, and seldom ceases
+until it begins to blow hard. If a storm of thunder or lightning be
+approaching, it is exceedingly agitated, and expresses its feelings in
+violent convulsive starts, at the top of the glass. It is remarkable
+that however fine and serene the weather may be, and not the least
+indication to change, either from the sky, the barometer, or any other
+cause whatsoever, yet, if the animal ever shift its position, or move
+in a desultory manner, so certain will the coincident results occur,
+within thirty-six hours, frequently within twenty-four, and sometimes
+in twelve; though its motions chiefly depend on the fall and duration
+of the wet, and the strength of the wind.
+
+
+_The Awn of Barley an Hydrometer._
+
+The awn of barley is furnished with stiff points, which, like the
+teeth of a saw, are all turned towards the point of it; as this long
+awn lies upon the ground, it extends itself in the moist air of night,
+and pushes forward the barley-corn, which it adheres to in the day; it
+shortens as it dries; and, as these points prevent it from receding,
+it draws up its pointed end, and thus, creeping like a worm, will
+travel many feet from the parent stem. That very ingenious mechanic
+philosopher, Mr. Edgworth, once made on this principle a wooden
+automaton: its back consisted of soft fir-wood, about an inch square,
+and four feet long, made of pieces cut the cross-way in respect to the
+fibres of the wood, and glued together; it had two feet before, and
+two behind, which supported the back horizontally, but were placed
+with their extremities, which were armed with sharp points of iron,
+bending backwards. Hence, in moist weather, the back lengthened, and
+the two foremost feet were pushed forwards; in dry weather the hinder
+feet were drawn after, as the obliquity of the points of the feet
+prevented it from receding.
+
+
+_The Power of Water when reduced to Vapour by Heat._
+
+Whatever force water may have while its parts remain together, is
+nothing, if compared to the almost incredible power with which its
+parts are endued, when they are reduced to vapour by heat. Those
+steams which we see rising from the surface of boiling water, and
+which to us appear feeble, yet, if properly conducted, acquire immense
+force. In the same manner as gunpowder has but small effect, if
+suffered to expand at large, so the steam issuing from water is
+impotent, where it is permitted to evaporate into the air; but where
+confined in a narrow compass, as, for instance, where it rises in an
+iron tube shut up on every side, it there exerts all the wonders of
+its strength. _Muschenbrook_ has proved by experiment, that the force
+of gunpowder is feeble when compared to that of rising steam. A
+hundred and forty pounds of gunpowder blew up a weight of thirty
+thousand pounds: but, on the other hand, a hundred and forty pounds of
+water, converted by heat into steam, lifted a weight of seventy-seven
+thousand pounds; and would lift a much greater, if there were means of
+giving the steam more heat with safety; for the hotter the steam the
+greater is its force.
+
+
+_Artificial Memory._
+
+In travelling along a road, the sight of the more remarkable scenes we
+meet with, frequently puts us in mind of the subjects we were thinking
+or talking of when we last saw them. Such facts, which were perfectly
+familiar, even to the vulgar, might very naturally suggest the
+possibility of assisting the memory, by establishing a connexion
+between the ideas we wish to remember, and certain sensible objects,
+which have been found from experience to make a permanent impression
+on the mind. It was said, that a person contrived a method of
+committing to memory the sermons which he was accustomed to hear, by
+fixing his attention, during the different heads of the discourse, on
+different compartments of the roof of the church, in such a manner as,
+that when he afterwards saw the roof, or remembered the order in which
+its compartments were disposed, he recollected the method which the
+preacher had observed in treating his subject. This contrivance was
+perfectly analogous to the topical memory of the ancients; an art
+which, whatever be the opinion we entertain of its use, is certainly
+entitled, in a high degree, to the praise of ingenuity.
+
+Suppose you fix in your memory the different apartments in some very
+large building, and that you had accustomed yourself to think of these
+apartments always in the same invariable order. Suppose further, that,
+in preparing yourself for a public discourse, in which you had
+occasion to treat of a great variety of particulars, you were anxious
+to fix in your memory the order you proposed to observe in the
+communication of your ideas. It is evident, that by a proper division
+of your subject into heads, and by connecting each head with a
+particular apartment, (which you could easily do, by conceiving
+yourself to be sitting in the apartment while you were studying the
+part of your discourse you mean to connect with it,) the habitual
+order in which these apartments occurred to your thoughts, would
+present to you in the proper arrangement, and without any effort on
+your part, the ideas of which you were to treat. It is also obvious,
+that very little practice would enable you to avail yourself of this
+contrivance, without any embarrassment or distraction of your
+attention.
+
+
+_To procure Hydrogen Gas._
+
+Provide a phial with a cork stopper, through which is thrust a piece
+of tobacco-pipe. Into the phial put a few pieces of zinc, or small
+iron nails; on this pour a mixture, of equal parts of sulphuric acid
+(oil of vitriol) and water, previously mixed in a tea-cup, to prevent
+accidents. Replace the cork stopper, with a piece of tobacco-pipe in
+it; the hydrogen gas will then be liberated through the pipe into a
+small steam. Apply the flame of a candle or taper to this steam, and
+it will immediately take fire, and burn with a clear flame until all
+the hydrogen in the phial be exhausted. In this experiment the zinc or
+iron, by the action of the acid, becomes oxygenized, and is dissolved,
+thus taking the oxygen from the sulphuric acid and water; the hydrogen
+(the other constituent part of the water) is thereby liberated, and
+ascends.
+
+
+_To fill a Bladder with Hydrogen Gas._
+
+Apply a bladder, previously wetted and compressed, in order to squeeze
+out all the common air, to the piece of tobacco-pipe inserted in the
+cork stopper of the phial, (as described in the experiment above.) The
+bladder will thus be filled with hydrogen gas.
+
+
+_Exploding Gas Bubbles._
+
+Adapt the end of a common tobacco-pipe to a bladder filled with
+hydrogen gas, and dip the bowl of the pipe into soap-suds, prepared as
+if for blowing up soap bubbles; squeeze out small portions of gas from
+the bladder into the soap-suds, and the bubbles will ascend into the
+air with very great rapidity, until they are out of sight. If a
+lighted taper or candle be applied to the bubbles as they ascend from
+the bowl of the pipe, they will explode with a loud noise.
+
+
+_Another Method._
+
+Put a small quantity of phosphorus and some potash, dissolved in
+water, into a retort; apply the flame of a candle or lamp to the
+bottom of the retort, until the contents boil. The phosphuretted
+hydrogen gas will then rise, and may be collected in receivers. But
+it, instead of receiving the gas into a jar, you let it simply ascend
+into water, the bubbles of gas will then explode in succession, as
+they reach the surface of the water, and a beautiful white smoke will
+be formed, which rises slowly and majestically to the ceiling. If bits
+of phosphorus are kept some hours in hydrogen gas, phosphorized
+hydrogen gas is produced: and if bubbles of this gas are thrown up
+into the receiver of an air-pump, previously filled with oxygen gas, a
+brilliant bluish flame will immediately fill the jar.
+
+
+_Singular Impression on the visual Nerves by a Luminous Object._
+
+If, while sitting in a room, you look earnestly at the middle of a
+window, a little while, when the day is bright, and then shut your
+eyes, the figure of the window will still remain in your eye, and so
+distinct that you may count the panes. A remarkable circumstance
+attending this experiment is, that the impression of forms is better
+retained than that of colours; for, after the eyes are shut, when you
+first discern the image of the window, the panes appear dark, and the
+cross-bars of the sashes, with the window frames and walls, appear
+white and bright; but if you still add to the darkness of the eyes, by
+covering them with your hand, the reverse instantly takes place--the
+panes appear luminous, and the cross-bars dark; and by removing the
+hand, they are again reversed.
+
+
+_Curious Effects of Oil upon Water, and Water upon Oil._
+
+Fasten a piece of pack-thread round a tumbler, with strings of the
+same from each side, meeting above it in a knot at about a foot
+distance from the top of the tumbler. Then putting in as much water as
+will fill about one-third part of the tumbler, lift it up by the knot,
+and swing it to and fro in the air; the water will keep its place as
+steadily in the glass as if it were ice. But pour gently in upon the
+water about as much oil, and then again swing it in the air as before,
+the tranquillity before possessed by the water will be transferred to
+the surface of the oil, and the water under it will be violently
+agitated.
+
+
+_Another curious Experiment with Oil and Water._
+
+Drop a small quantity of oil into water agitated by the wind; it will
+immediately spread itself with surprising swiftness upon the surface,
+and the oil, though scarcely more than a tea-spoonful, will produce an
+instant calm over a space several yards square. It should be done on
+the windward side of the pond or river, and you will observe it extend
+to the size of nearly half an acre, making it appear as smooth as a
+looking-glass. One remarkable circumstance in this experiment is the
+sudden, wide, and forcible spreading of a drop of oil on the surface
+of the water; for if a drop of oil be put upon a highly polished
+marble table, or a looking-glass, laid horizontally, the drop remains
+in its place, spreading very little, but when dropped on water it
+spreads instantly many feet round, becoming so thin as to produce the
+prismatic colours for a considerable space, and beyond them so much
+thinner as to be invisible, except in its effect in smoothing the
+waves at a much greater distance. It seems as if a repulsion of its
+particles took place as soon as it touched the water, and so strong as
+to act on other bodies swimming on the surface, as straw, leaves,
+chips, &c., forcing them to recede every way from the drop, as from a
+centre, leaving a large clear space.
+
+
+_Remarkable Effects on the visual Nerves, by looking through
+differently-coloured Glasses._
+
+After looking through green spectacles, the white paper of a book
+will, on first taking them off, appear to have a blush of red; and
+after looking through red glasses, a greenish cast. This seems to
+intimate a relation between green and red, not yet explained.
+
+_Weather Table._
+
+ --------------------+---------------------+------------------------
+ NEW AND FULL MOON. | SUMMER. | WINTER.
+ --------------------+---------------------+------------------------
+ If the new or full | |
+ moon enters into | |
+ the first or last | |
+ quarter of the | |
+ hour of 12 at noon | Very rainy | Snow and rain.
+ | |
+ If between the | |
+ hours of | |
+ (P.M.) 2 and 4 | Changeable | Fair and mild.
+ 4 and 6 | Fair | Fair.
+ 6 and 8 | { Fair, if wind | { Fair and frosty, if
+ | { at N.W. | { wind at N. or N.E.
+ | { Rainy, if wind | { Rain or snow, if S.
+ | { at S. or S.W. | { or S.W.
+ 8 and 10 | Ditto | Ditto.
+ 10 | Fair | Fair and frosty.
+ (A.M.) 2 | Ditto | { Hard frost, unless
+ | | { wind S.S.W.
+ 2 and 4 | Cold, with frequent |
+ | showers |
+ 4 and 6 | Rain | Ditto, ditto.
+ 6 and 8 | Wind and Rain | Stormy weather.
+ 8 and 10 | Changeable | { Cold and rain, if
+ | | { wind N.; snow if E.
+ 10 and 12 | Frequent showers | Cold, with high wind.
+ --------------------+---------------------+-----------------------
+
+
+
+
+A COMPLETE
+
+SYSTEM OF PYROTECHNY;
+
+OR THE
+
+ART OF MAKING FIRE-WORKS.
+
+
+In the art of making fire-works, great attention must be paid to the
+well-mixing of the materials--without which all labour is thrown away;
+to the purity of the articles; and to the proper quantities of each.
+Sulphur, to be good, must be of a high colour, and crack and bounce
+when held in the hand. For small fire-works, such as may be bought in
+the flour will be found quite good enough, but for the larger kinds,
+the lump brimstone ground is preferable.
+
+_Benzoin_ is used in fire-works, more for its pleasant scent than any
+material use for the purposes of fire. It may be procured at the
+chemists, ready for use. The oil is also used in wet composition, for
+stars, &c.
+
+
+_Of Sulphur, or Brimstone._
+
+Sulphur is by nature the food of fire, and one of the principal
+ingredients in gunpowder, and in almost all compositions of
+fire-works; therefore, great care ought to be taken of its being good,
+and brought to the highest perfection. Now, to know when the sulphur
+is good, you are to observe that it be of a high yellow; and if, when
+held in one's hand, it crackles and bounces, it is a sign that it is
+fresh and good: but as the method of reducing brimstone to a powder is
+very troublesome, it is better to buy the flour ready made, which is
+done in large quantities, and in great perfection; but when a great
+quantity of fire-works is to be made, it is best to use the lump
+brimstone ground, in the same manner as gunpowder.
+
+
+_Of Saltpetre._
+
+Saltpetre being the principal ingredient in fire-works, and a volatile
+body by reason of its aqueous and aërial parts, is easily rarefied by
+fire; but not so soon when foul and gross, as when purified from its
+gross and earthy parts, which greatly retard its velocity; therefore,
+when any quantity of fire-works is intended to be made, it would be
+necessary first to examine the saltpetre; for if it be not well
+cleansed from all impurities, and of a good sort, your works will not
+have their proper effect.
+
+
+_To pulverize Saltpetre._
+
+Take a copper kettle, the bottom being spherical, and put into it
+fourteen pounds of refined saltpetre, with two quarts or five pints of
+clean water; then put the kettle on a slow fire, and when the
+saltpetre is dissolved, if any impurities arise, skim them off, and
+keep constantly stirring it with two large spatulas, till all the
+water exhales; and when done enough, it will appear like white sand,
+and as fine as flour; but if it should boil too fast, take the kettle
+off the fire, and set it on some wet sand, which will prevent the
+nitre from sticking to the kettle. When you have pulverized a quantity
+of saltpetre, be careful to keep it in a dry place.
+
+
+_To prepare Charcoal for Fire-works._
+
+Charcoal is a preservative, by which the saltpetre and brimstone are
+made into gunpowder, by preventing the sulphur from suffocating the
+strong and windy exhalation of the nitre. There are several sorts of
+wood made use of for this purpose; some prefer hazel, others willow,
+and others alder. The method of burning the wood is this: cut it in
+pieces of two or three feet long, then slit each piece in four parts;
+scale off the bark and hard knots, and dry them in the sun, or in an
+oven; then make in the earth a square hole, and line it with bricks,
+in which lay the wood crossing one another, and set it on fire; when
+thoroughly lighted, and in a flame, cover the whole with boards, and
+fling earth over them close, to prevent the air from getting in, yet
+so as not to fall among the charcoal; and when it has lain thus for
+twenty-four hours, take out the coals and lay them in a dry place for
+use. It is to be observed, that charcoal for fire-works must always be
+soft and well burnt, which may be bought ready done.
+
+
+_Of Gunpowder, &c._
+
+Gunpowder being a principal ingredient in fire-works, it will not be
+improper to give a short definition of its strange explosive force,
+and cause of action, which, according to Dr. Shaw's opinion of the
+chemical cause of the explosive force of gunpowder, is as
+follows:--"Each grain of gunpowder consisting of a certain proportion
+of sulphur, nitre, and coal, the coal presently taking fire, upon
+contact of the smallest spark; at which time both the sulphur and the
+nitre immediately melt, and by means of the coal interposed between
+them, burst into flame; which spreading from grain to grain,
+propagates the same effect almost instantaneously, whence the whole
+mass of powder comes to be fired; and as nitre contains a large
+proportion both of air and water, which are now violently rarefied by
+the heat, a kind of fiery explosive blast is thus produced, wherein
+the nitre seems, by its aqueous and aërial parts, to act as bellows to
+the other inflammable bodies (sulphur and coal) to blow them into a
+flame, and carry off their whole substance in smoke and vapour."
+
+
+_How to meal Gunpowder, Brimstone, and Charcoal._
+
+There have been many methods used to grind these ingredients to a
+powder for fire-works, such as large mortars and pestles made of
+ebony, and other hard woods; but none of these methods have proved so
+effectual and speedy as the last invention, that of the mealing table.
+This table is made of elm, with a rim round its edge four or five
+inches high; and at the narrow end is a slider which runs in a groove
+and forms part of the rim; so that when you have taken out of the
+table as much powder as you conveniently can, with a copper shovel,
+you may sweep all clean out at the slider. When you are going to meal
+a quantity of powder, observe not to put too much on the table at
+once; but when you have put in a good proportion, take a muller and
+rub it therewith till all the grains are broken; sift it in a lawn
+sieve, that has a receiver and top to it; and that which does not pass
+through the sieve, return again to the table and grind it more, till
+you have brought it all fine enough to go through the sieve. Brimstone
+and charcoal are ground in the same manner as gunpowder, only the
+muller must be made of ebony, for these ingredients being harder than
+powder, would stick in the grain of the elm and be very difficult to
+grind; and as the brimstone is apt to stick and clog to the table, it
+would be best to keep one for that purpose only, by which means you
+will always have your brimstone clean and well ground.
+
+
+_Spur Fire._
+
+This fire is the most beautiful of any composition yet known. As it
+requires great trouble to bring it to perfection, particular care must
+be paid to the following instructions. They are made generally in
+cases about six inches long, but not driven very hard.
+
+ CHARGE. lb. oz. CHARGE. lb. oz.
+ Saltpetre 4 0 } { Saltpetre 1 0
+ Sulphur 2 0 } or { Sulphur 0 8
+ Lamp-black 1 8 } { Lamp-black 4 quarts.
+
+This composition is very difficult to mix. The saltpetre and brimstone
+must be first sifted together, and then put into a marble mortar, and
+the lamp-black with them, which you work down by degrees with a wooden
+pestle, till all the ingredients appear of one colour, which will be
+something greyish, but very near black; then drive a little into a
+case for trial, and fire it in a dark place; and if the sparks, which
+are called stars or pinks, come out in clusters, and afterwards spread
+well without any other sparks, it is a sign of its being good,
+otherwise, not; for if any drossy sparks appear, and the stars not
+full, it is then not mixed enough; but if the pinks are very small,
+and soon break, it is a sign that you have rubbed it too much.
+
+This mixture, when rubbed too much, will be too fierce, and hardly
+show any stars; and, on the contrary, when not mixed enough, will be
+too weak, and throw out an obscure smoke, and lumps of dross, without
+any stars. The reason of this charge being called the spur fire is,
+because the sparks it yields have a great resemblance to the rowel of
+a spur, from whence it takes its name. As the beauty of this
+composition cannot be seen at so great a distance as brilliant fire,
+it has a better effect in a room than in the open air, and may be
+fired in a chamber without any danger; it is of so innocent a nature,
+that, although an improper phrase, it may be called a cold fire; and
+so extraordinary is the fire produced from this composition, that, if
+well made, the sparks will not burn a handkerchief when held in the
+midst of them; you may hold them in your hand while burning, with as
+much safety as a candle; and if you put your hand within a foot of the
+case, you will feel the sparks fall like drops of rain.
+
+
+_To make Touch Paper._
+
+Dissolve in some spirits of wine or vinegar, a little saltpetre; then
+take some purple or blue paper, wet it with the above liquor, and when
+dry it will be fit for use. When you paste this paper on any of your
+works, take care that the paste does not touch that part which is to
+burn.
+
+The method of using this paper is, by cutting it into slips, long
+enough to go once round the mouth of the serpent, cracker, &c. When
+you paste on these slips, leave a little, above the mouth of the case,
+not pasted; then prime the case with meal-powder (see p. 165) and
+twist the paper to a point.
+
+
+_Of such Ingredients as show themselves in Sparks, when rammed into
+choked Cases._
+
+The set colours of fire produced by sparks are divided into four
+sorts, viz., the black, white, grey, and red; the black charges are
+composed of two ingredients, which are meal-powder and charcoal; the
+white of three, viz., saltpetre, sulphur, and charcoal; the grey of
+four, viz., meal-powder, saltpetre, brimstone, and charcoal; and the
+red of three, viz., meal-powder, charcoal, and saw-dust.
+
+There are, besides these four regular or set charges, two others
+which are distinguished by the names of compound and brilliant
+charges; the compound charge being made of many ingredients, such as
+meal-powder, saltpetre, brimstone, charcoal, saw-dust, sea-coal,
+antimony, glass-dust, brass-dust, steel-filings, cast-iron, tanners'
+dust, &c., or any thing that will yield sparks; all which must be
+managed with discretion. The brilliant fires are composed of
+meal-powder, saltpetre, brimstone, and steel-dust; or with
+meal-powder, and steel-filings only.
+
+
+_Of the Method of mixing Compositions._
+
+The performance of the principal part of fire-works depends much on
+the compositions being well mixed; therefore, great care ought to be
+taken in this part of the work, particularly in the composition for
+sky-rockets. When you have four or five pounds of ingredients to mix,
+which is a sufficient quantity at a time, (for a larger proportion
+will not do so well,) first put the different ingredients together,
+then work them about with your hands, till you think they are pretty
+well incorporated: after which, put them into a lawn sieve with a
+receiver and top to it; and if, after it is sifted, any should remain
+that will not pass through the sieve, grind it again till fine enough;
+and if it be twice sifted it will not be amiss; but the compositions
+for wheels and common works are not so material, nor need be so fine.
+But in all fixed works, from which the fire is to play regular, the
+ingredients must be very fine, and great care taken in mixing them
+well together: and observe, that, in all compositions wherein are
+steel or iron filings, the hands must not touch; nor will any works
+which have iron or steel in their charge, keep long in damp weather,
+without being properly prepared, according to the following
+directions:--
+
+It may sometimes happen, that fire-works may be required to be kept a
+long time, or sent abroad; neither of which could be done with
+brilliant fires, if made with filings unprepared; for this reason,
+that the saltpetre being of a damp nature, it causes the iron to rust,
+the natural consequence of which is, that when the works are fired,
+there will appear but very few brilliant sparks, but instead of them a
+number of red and drossy sparks; and besides, the charge will be so
+much weakened, that if this should happen to wheels, the fire will not
+be strong enough to force them round; to prevent such accidents,
+prepare your filings after the following manner:--Melt in a glazed
+earthen pan some brimstone over a slow fire, and when melted, throw in
+some filings, which keep stirring about till they are covered with
+brimstone; this you must do while it is on the fire; then take it off,
+and stir it very quick till cold, when you must roll it on a board
+with a wooden roller, till you have broken it as fine as corn powder;
+after which, sift from it as much of the brimstone as you can. There
+is another method of preparing filings, so as to keep two or three
+months in winter; this may be done by rubbing them between the
+strongest sort of brown paper, which has been previously moistened
+with linseed oil.
+
+N.B. If the brimstone should take fire, you may put it out, by
+covering the pan close at top. It is not of much consequence what
+quantity of brimstone you use, provided there is enough to give each
+grain of iron a coat; but as much as will cover the bottom of a pan of
+about one foot diameter, will do for five or six pounds of filings.
+Cast-iron for gerbes will be preserved by the above method.
+
+
+_To make Crackers._
+
+Cut some stout cartridge-paper into pieces three inches and a half
+broad, and one foot long; one edge of each of these pieces fold down
+lengthwise about three-quarters of an inch broad; then fold the double
+edge down a quarter of an inch, and turn the single edge back half
+over the double fold; open it, and lay all along the channel, which is
+formed by the foldings of the paper, some meal-powder; then fold it
+over and over till all the paper is doubled up, rubbing it down every
+turn; this being done, bend it backwards and forwards, two inches and
+a half or thereabouts, at a time, as often as the paper will allow;
+hold all these folds flat and close, and with a small pinching cord,
+give one turn round the middle of the cracker, and pinch it close;
+bind it with packthread, as tight as you can; then in the place where
+it was pinched, prime one end, and cap it with touch-paper. When these
+crackers are fired, they will give a report at every turn of the
+paper; if you would have a great number of bounces, you must cut the
+paper longer, or join them after they are made; but if they are made
+very long before they are pinched, you must have a piece of wood with
+a groove in it, deep enough to let in half the cracker; this will hold
+it straight while it is pinching.
+
+
+_To make Squibs and Serpents._
+
+First make the cases, of about six inches in length, by rolling slips
+of stout cartridge-paper three times round a roller, and pasting the
+last fold; tying it near the bottom as tight as possible, and making
+it air-tight at the end, by sealing-wax. Then take of gunpowder half a
+pound, charcoal one ounce, brimstone one ounce, and steel-filings half
+an ounce, (or in like proportion,) grind them with a muller, or pound
+them in a mortar. Your cases being dry and ready, first put a
+thimble-full of your powder, and ram it hard down with a ruler; then
+fill the case to the top with the aforesaid mixture, ramming it hard
+down in the course of filling, two or three times; when this is done
+point with touch-paper, which should be pasted on that part which
+touches the case, otherwise it is liable to drop off.
+
+
+_Sky-Rockets._
+
+Rockets being of the fire-works most in use, we shall give them the
+preference in description. As the performance of rockets depends much
+upon their moulds, they should be made according to the following
+proportions:--Taking the diameter of the orifice, its height should be
+equal to six diameters and two-thirds: the choke, one diameter and
+one-third of this model, will serve for every rocket from 4 oz. to 6
+lb.--For instance:--suppose the diameter of a rocket of 1 lb. be 1-1/2
+inch, then its length being 6 diameters and two-thirds, the length of
+the case must be 10-1/3 inches, and the choke 2-1/4 inches. Your
+rammer must have a collar of brass, to prevent the wood from
+splitting.
+
+_Method of rolling Rocket Cases._--The cases must be made of the
+strongest cartridge-paper, and rolled dry. The case of a
+middling-sized rocket will take up paper of four or five sheets thick;
+having cut your papers to a proper size, and the last sheet with a
+slope at one end, fold down one end, and lay your former on the double
+edge, and when you have rolled on the paper within two or three turns,
+lay the next sheet on that part which is loose, and roll it all on.
+Then, in order to roll the case as hard as possible, place it on a
+table, and with a smooth board roll it for some time forwards on the
+table, till it becomes quite hard and firm. This must be done with
+every sheet. You have next to choke the case; for which purpose draw
+your former a little distance from the bottom, then, with a cord, once
+round the case, pull it rather easy at first, and harder, till you
+have closed the end. To make it easy, you may dip the ends of the
+inner sheets in water before rolling, then bind it with small twine.
+
+Having thus pinched and tied the case so as not to give way, put it
+into the mould without its foot, and with a mallet drive the former
+hard on the end-piece, which will force the neck close and smooth.
+This done, cut the case to its proper length, allowing from the neck
+to the edge of the mouth half a diameter, which is equal to the
+height of the nipple; then take out the former, and drive the case
+over the piercer with a long rammer, and the vent will be of a proper
+size.
+
+Having formed your cases, we will now proceed to the description of
+the ingredients necessary for the rocket.
+
+_Of mixing the Composition._--The performance of the principal part of
+fire-works depends much on the compositions being well mixed;
+therefore, great care must be taken in this part of the work,
+particularly for the composition for sky-rockets. When you have four
+or five pounds of ingredients to mix, which is a sufficient quantity
+at a time, (for a large proportion will not do so well,) first put the
+different ingredients together, then work them about with your hands,
+till you think they are pretty well incorporated; after which, put
+them into a lawn sieve with a receiver and top to it; and if, after it
+is sifted, any remains that will not pass through the sieve, grind it
+again till it is fine enough; and if it be twice sifted it will not be
+amiss; but the compositions for wheels and common works are not so
+material, nor need be so fine. But in all fixed works, from which the
+fire is to play regular, the ingredients must be very fine, and great
+care taken in mixing them well together; and observe, that in all
+compositions wherein are iron filings, the hand must not touch them;
+nor will any works which have iron or steel in their charge keep long
+in damp weather.
+
+_To drive or ram Rockets._--Rockets are filled hollow, otherwise they
+would not ascend, and there is not a part that requires greater
+attention than this stage of the process. One blow more or less with
+the mallet will spoil the ascent.
+
+The charge of rockets must always be driven above the piercer, and on
+it must be rammed a thin head of clay; through the middle of which
+bore a small hole to the composition, that when the charge is burnt to
+the top, it may communicate its fire through the hole to the stars in
+the head. To a rocket of four ounces, give to each ladle-full of
+charge 16 strokes; to a rocket of 1 lb., 28; to a 2-pounder, 36; to a
+4-pounder, 42; and to a 6-pounder, 56; but rockets of a larger sort
+cannot be driven well by hand, but must be rammed with a machine made
+in the same manner as those for driving piles.
+
+The method of ramming wheel cases, or any other sort in which the
+charge is driven solid, is the same as sky-rockets.
+
+When you load the heads of your rockets with stars, rains, serpents,
+crackers, scrolls, or any thing else, according to your fancy,
+remember always to put a ladle-full of meal-powder into each head,
+which will be enough to burst the head and disperse the stars, or
+whatever it contains.
+
+_Decorations for Sky-rockets._--Sky-rockets may be decorated according
+to fancy. Some are headed with stars of different sorts, such as
+tailed, brilliant, white, blue, and yellow stars, &c. Some with gold
+and silver rains; others with serpents, crackers, fire-scrolls, and
+marrons; and some with small rockets and other devices, as the maker
+pleases.
+
+LENGTH OF ROCKET-STICKS.
+
+For rockets of 6 lb. 0 oz. the stick must be 14 ft. 10 in. long
+ 4 0 12 10
+ 2 0 9 4
+ 1 0 8 2
+ 0 8 6 6
+ 0 4 5 3
+
+Having your sticks ready, cut on one of the flat sides at the top a
+groove the length of the rocket, and as broad as the stick will allow;
+then on the opposite flat side cut two notches, for the cord which
+ties on the rocket to lie in; one of these notches must be near the
+top of the stick, and the other facing the neck of the rocket; the
+distance between these notches may be easily known, for the top of the
+stick should always touch the head of the rocket. When your rockets
+and sticks are ready, lay the rockets in the grooves in the sticks,
+and tie them on. We will now proceed to the charge for sky-rockets.
+
+ROCKETS OF FOUR OUNCES.
+
+ lb. oz.
+ Meal-powder 1 4
+ Saltpetre 0 4
+ Charcoal 0 2
+
+ROCKETS OF EIGHT OUNCES.
+
+ lb. oz.
+ Meal-powder 1 0
+ Saltpetre 0 4
+ Brimstone 0 3
+ Charcoal 0 1-1/2
+
+ONE POUND.
+
+ lb. oz.
+ Meal-powder 2 0
+ Saltpetre 0 8
+ Brimstone 0 4
+ Charcoal 0 2
+ Steel-filings 0 1-1/2
+
+SKY-ROCKETS IN GENERAL.
+
+ lb. oz.
+ Saltpetre 4 0
+ Brimstone 1-1/2 0
+ Charcoal 1 12
+ Meal-powder 0 2
+
+LARGE SKY-ROCKETS.
+
+ lb. oz.
+ Saltpetre 4 0
+ Meal-powder 1 0
+ Brimstone 1 0
+
+ROCKETS OF A MIDDLING SIZE.
+
+ lb. oz.
+ Meal-powder 1 0
+ Charcoal 1 0
+ Saltpetre 3 0
+ Sulphur 2 0
+
+
+ROCKET STARS.
+
+WHITE STARS.
+
+ lb. oz.
+ Meal-powder 0 4
+ Saltpetre 0 12
+ Sulphur vivum 0 6
+ Oil of spike 0 2
+ Camphor 0 5
+
+BLUE STARS.
+
+ lb. oz.
+ Meal-powder 0 8
+ Saltpetre 0 4
+ Sulphur 0 2
+ Spirits of wine 0 2
+ Oil of Spike 0 2
+
+VARIEGATED STARS.
+
+ lb. oz.
+ Meal-powder 0 3-1/2
+ Saltpetre 0 4
+ Sulphur vivum 0 2
+ Camphor 0 2
+
+BRILLIANT STARS.
+
+ lb. oz.
+ Saltpetre 0 8-1/2
+ Sulphur 0 1-1/2
+ Meal-powder 0 0-3/4
+
+Worked up with spirits of wine only.
+
+COMMON STARS.
+
+ lb. oz.
+ Saltpetre 1 0
+ Brimstone 0 4
+ Antimony 0 4-3/4
+ Isinglass 0 0-1/2
+ Camphor 0 0-1/4
+ Spirits of wine 0 0-1/4
+
+TAILED STARS.
+
+ lb. oz.
+ Meal-powder 0 2
+ Brimstone 0 2
+ Saltpetre 0 2
+ Charcoal (coarsely ground) 0 0-3/4
+
+STARS OF A FINE COLOUR.
+
+ lb. oz.
+ Sulphur 0 1
+ Meal-powder 0 1
+ Saltpetre 0 1
+ Camphor 0 0-1/4
+ Oil of turpentine 0 0-1/4
+
+
+RAINS.
+
+GOLD RAIN FOR SKY-ROCKETS.
+
+ lb. oz.
+ Saltpetre 0 8
+ Brimstone 0 2
+ Glass-dust 0 1
+ Antimony 0 0-3/4
+ Brass-dust 0 0-1/4
+ Saw-dust 0 0-1/4
+
+SILVER RAIN.
+
+ lb. oz.
+ Saltpetre 0 8
+ Brimstone 0 2
+ Charcoal 0 4
+ Steel-dust 0 0-1/4
+
+_To fix one Rocket on the top of another._--When sky-rockets are fixed
+one on the top of another, they are called _towering rockets_, on
+account of their mounting so very high. Towering rockets are made
+after this manner: Fix on a pound rocket a head without a collar; then
+take a four-ounce rocket, which may be headed or bounced, and rub the
+mouth of it with meal-powder wetted with spirit of wine: this done,
+put it in the head of a large rocket with its mouth downwards; but
+before it is put in, stick a bit of quick-match in the hole of the
+clay of the pound rocket, which match should be long enough to go a
+little way up the bore of the small rocket, to fire it when the large
+rocket is burnt out. As the four-ounce rocket is too small to fill the
+head of the other, roll round it as much tow as will make it stand
+upright in the centre of the head: the rocket being thus fixed, paste
+a single paper round the opening of the top of the head of the large
+rocket. The large rocket must have only half a diameter of charge
+rammed above the piercer; for, if filled to the usual height, it
+would turn before the small one takes fire, and entirely destroy the
+intended effect: when one rocket is headed with another, there will be
+no occasion for any blowing powder; for the force with which it goes
+off will be sufficient to disengage it from the head of the first
+fired rocket. The sticks for these rockets must be a little longer
+than for those headed with stars, rains, &c.
+
+_Caduceous Rockets._--They are such as, in rising, form two spiral
+lines, by reason of their being placed obliquely, one opposite to the
+other; and their counterpoise in the centre, which causes them to rise
+in a vertical direction. Rockets for this purpose must have their ends
+choked close, without either head or bounce; for a weight at the top
+would be a great obstruction to their mounting. No caduceous rockets
+ascend so high as single, because of their serpentine motion, and
+likewise the resistance of air, which is much greater than two rockets
+of the same size would meet with if fired singly.
+
+The sticks for this purpose must have all their sides equal, and the
+sides should be equal to the breadth of a stick proper for a
+sky-rocket of the same weight as those you intend to use, and made to
+taper downwards as usual, long enough to balance them, one length of a
+rocket from the cross stick, which must be placed from the large stick
+six diameters of one of the rockets, and its length seven diameters;
+so that each rocket, when tied on, may form, with the large stick, an
+angle of 60 degrees. In tying on the rockets, place their heads on the
+opposite side of the cross stick; then carry a leader from the mouth
+of one into that of the other. When these rockets are to be fired,
+suspend them between two hooks, or nails, then burn the leader through
+the middle, and both will take fire at the same time. Rockets of 1 lb.
+are a good size for this use.
+
+_Honorary Rockets._--These are the same as sky-rockets, except that
+they carry no head nor report, but are closed at top, on which is
+fixed a cone; then on the case, close to the top of the stick, is tied
+on a two-ounce case, about five or six inches long, filled with a
+strong charge, and pinched close at both ends; then in the reverse
+side, at each end, bore a hole in the same manner as in tourbillons,
+to be presently described; from each hole carry a leader into the top
+of the rocket. When the rocket is fired, and arrived to its proper
+height, it will give fire to the case at top; which will cause both
+rocket and stick to spin very fast in their return, and represent a
+worm of fire descending to the ground.
+
+There is another method of placing the small case, which is by letting
+the stick rise a little above the top of the rocket, and tying the
+case to it, so as to rest on the rocket: these rockets have no cones.
+
+A third method by which they are managed is this: in the top of a
+rocket fix a piece of wood, in which drive a small iron spindle; then
+make a hole in the middle of the small case, through which is put the
+spindle; then fix on the top of it a nut, to keep the case from
+falling off; when this is done, the case will turn very fast, without
+the rocket: but this method does not answer so well as either of the
+former.
+
+_To make a Rocket form an Arch in rising._--Having some rockets made,
+headed according to fancy, and tied on their sticks, get some sheet
+tin, and cut it into round pieces about three or four inches diameter;
+then on the stick of each rocket, under the mouth of the case, fix one
+of these pieces of tin 16 inches from the rocket's neck, and support
+it by a wooden bracket, as strong as possible: the use of this is,
+that when the rocket is ascending, the fire may play with greater
+force on the tin, which will divide the tail in such a manner that it
+will form an arch as it mounts, and will have a very good effect when
+well managed; if there is a short piece of port fire, of a strong
+charge, tied to the end of the stick, it will make a great addition;
+but this must be lighted before the rocket is fired.
+
+_To make several Rockets rise together._--Take six, or any number of
+sky-rockets, of any size; then cut some strong packthread into pieces
+of three or four yards long, and tie each end of these pieces to a
+rocket in this manner:
+
+Having tied one end of the packthread round the body of one rocket,
+and the other end to another, take a second piece of packthread, and
+make one end of it fast to one of the rockets already tied, and the
+other end to a third rocket, so that all the rockets, except the two
+on the outside, will be fastened to the two pieces of packthread: the
+length of thread from one rocket to the other may be what the maker
+pleases; but the rockets must be all of a size, and their heads filled
+with the same weight of stars, rains, &c.
+
+Having thus done, fix in the mouth of each rocket a leader of the same
+length; and when about to fire them, hang them almost close; then tie
+the ends of the leaders together, and prime them; this prime being
+fired, all the rockets will mount at the same time, and divide as far
+as the strings will allow; and this division they keep, provided they
+are all rammed alike, and well made. They are sometimes called
+chained rockets.
+
+_To fix several Rockets to the same Stick._--Two, three, or six
+sky-rockets, fixed on one stick, and fired together, make a grand and
+beautiful appearance; for the tails of all will seem but as one of an
+immense size, and the breaking of so many heads at once will resemble
+the bursting of an air-balloon. The management of this device requires
+a skilful hand; but if the following instructions be well observed,
+even by those who have not made a great progress in this art, there
+will be no doubt of the rockets having the desired effect.
+
+Rockets for this purpose must be made with the greatest exactness, all
+rammed by the same hand, in the same mould, and filled with the same
+proportion of composition: and after they are filled and headed, must
+all be of the same weight. The stick must also be well made (and
+proportioned) to the following directions; first, supposing the
+rockets to be half-pounders, whose sticks are six feet six inches
+long, then if two, three, or six of these are to be fixed on one
+stick, let the length of it be nine feet nine inches; then cut the top
+of it into as many sides as there are rockets, and let the length of
+each side be equal to the length of one of the rockets without its
+head; and in each side cut a groove (as usual;) then from the grooves
+plane it round, down to the bottom, where its thickness must be equal
+to half the top of the round part. As their thickness cannot be
+exactly ascertained, we shall give a rule, which generally answers for
+any number of rockets above two; the rule is this: that the stick at
+top must be thick enough, when the grooves are cut, for all the
+rockets to lie, without pressing each other, though as near as
+possible.
+
+When only two rockets are to be fixed on one stick, let the length of
+the stick be the last given proportion, but shaped after the common
+method, and the breadth and thickness double the usual dimensions. The
+point of poise must be in the usual place (let the number of rockets
+be what it will;) if sticks made by the above directions should be too
+heavy, plane them thinner; and if too light, make them thicker; but
+always make them of the same length.
+
+When more than two rockets are tied on one stick, there will be some
+danger of their flying up without the stick, unless the following
+precaution is taken: For cases being placed on all sides, there can be
+no notches for the cord which ties on the rockets to lie in:
+therefore, instead of notches, drive a small nail in each side of the
+stick, between the necks of the cases, and let the cord, which goes
+round their necks, be brought close under the nails; by this means the
+rockets will be as secure as when tied on singly. The rockets being
+thus fixed, carry a quick-match, without a pipe, from the mouth of one
+rocket to the other; this match being lighted will give fire to all at
+once.
+
+Though the directions already given may be sufficient for these
+rockets, we shall here add an improvement on a very essential part of
+this device, which is, that of hanging the rockets to be fired; for
+before the following method was contrived, many attempts proved
+unsuccessful. Instead, therefore, of the old and common manner of
+hanging them on nails or hooks, make use of the following contrivance:
+Have a ring made of strong iron wire, large enough for the stick to go
+in as far as the mouths of the rockets; then have another ring
+supported by a small iron, at some distance from the post or stand to
+which it is fixed; then have another ring fit to receive and guide the
+small end of the stick. Rockets thus suspended will have nothing to
+obstruct their fire; but when they are hung on nails or hooks, in such
+a manner that some of their mouths or against or upon a rail, there
+can be no certainty of their rising in a vertical direction.
+
+_To fire Rockets without Sticks._--You must have a stand, of a block
+of wood, a foot diameter, and make the bottom flat, so that it may
+stand steady: in the centre of the top of this block draw a circle two
+inches and a half diameter, and divide the circumference of it into
+three equal parts; then take three pieces of thick iron wire, each
+about three feet long, and drive them into the block, one at each
+point made on the circle; when these wires are driven in deep enough
+to hold them fast and upright, so that the distance from one to the
+other is the same at top as at bottom, the stand is complete.
+
+The stand being thus made, prepare the rockets thus: Take some common
+sky-rockets of any size, and head them as you please; then get some
+balls of lead, and tie to each a small wire two or two feet and a half
+long, and the other end of each wire tie to the neck of a rocket.
+These balls answer the purpose of sticks, when made of a proper
+weight, which is about two-thirds the weight of the rocket; but when
+they are of a proper size, they will balance the rocket in the same
+manner as a stick, at the usual point of poise. To fire these, hand
+them one at a time, between the tops of the wires, letting their heads
+rest on the point of the wires, and the balls hang down between them:
+if the wires should be too wide for the rockets, press them together
+till they fit; and if too close, force them open; the wires for this
+purpose must be softened, so as not to have any spring, or they will
+not keep their position when pressed close or opened.
+
+_Scrolls for Rockets._--Cases for scrolls should be made four or five
+inches in length, and their interior diameters three-eighths of an
+inch: one end of these cases must be pinched quite close before
+beginning to fill; and when filled, close the other end; then in the
+opposite sides make a small hole at each end, to the composition, as
+in tourbillons, and prime them with wet meal-powder. You may put in
+the head of the rocket as many of these cases as it will contain:
+being fired, they turn very quick in the air, and form a scroll or
+spiral line. They are generally filled with a strong charge, as that
+of serpents or brilliant fire.
+
+_Stands for Rockets._--Care must be taken, in placing the rockets,
+when they are to be fired, to give them a vertical direction at their
+first setting out; which may be managed thus: Have two rails of wood,
+of any length, supported at each end by a perpendicular leg, so that
+the rails may be horizontal, and let the distance from one to the
+other be almost equal to the length of the sticks of the rockets
+intended to be fired; then in the front of the top rail drive square
+hooks at eight inches distance, with their points turned sidewise, so
+that when the rockets are hung on them, the points will be before the
+sticks, and keep them from falling or being blown off by the wind; in
+the front of the rail at bottom must be staples, driven
+perpendicularly under the hooks at top; through these staples put the
+small ends of the rocket-sticks. Rockets are fired by applying a
+lighted port-fire to their mouths.
+
+_Table-Rockets._--Table-rockets are designed merely to show the truth
+of driving, and the judgment of a fire-worker; they having no other
+effect, when fired, than spinning round in the same place where they
+began, till they are burnt out, and showing nothing more than a
+horizontal circle of fire.
+
+The method of making these rockets is thus:--Have a cone turned out of
+hard wood two inches and a half in diameter, and as much high; round
+the base of it drive a line; on this line fix four spokes, each two
+inches long, so as to stand one opposite the other; then fill four
+nine-inch one-pound cases with any strong composition, within two
+inches of the top: these cases are made like tourbillons, and must be
+rammed with the greatest exactness.
+
+The rockets being filled, fix their open ends on the short spokes;
+then in the side of each case bore a hole near the clay; all these
+holes, or vents, must be so made that the fire of each case may act
+the same way; from these vents carry leaders to the top of the cone,
+and tie them together. When the rockets are to be fired, set them on a
+smooth table, and light the leaders in the middle, and all the cases
+will fire together and spin on the point of the cone.
+
+These rockets may be made to rise like tourbillons, by making the
+cases shorter, and boring four holes in the under side of each at
+equal distances; this being done they are called _double tourbillons_.
+
+_Note._--All the vents in the under side of the cases must be lighted
+at once, and the sharp point of the cone cut off; at which place make
+it spherical.
+
+
+WHEELS.
+
+Wheel-cases are made to any length; which must always depend on the
+size of the wheel, but must not exceed the length of each angle.
+
+Charge for wheel-cases, from 2 oz. to 4 lb.
+
+ lb. oz.
+ Meal-powder 4 0
+ Saltpetre 1 0
+ Brimstone 0 8
+ Charcoal 0 4
+
+The filings in this composition may be varied by using a portion of
+sea-coal, glass-dust, saw-dust, &c., or a combination of the whole.
+
+SLOW FIRE FOR WHEELS.
+
+ lb. oz.
+ Saltpetre 0 4
+ Brimstone 0 2
+ Meal-powder 0 1-1/2
+
+or, 1 oz. of brimstone may be used with 1 oz. of antimony.
+
+DEAD FIRE FOR WHEELS.
+
+ oz. dr.
+ Saltpetre 4-1/4 0
+ Brimstone 0-1/4 0
+ Lapis-caliminaris 0 2
+ Antimony 0 2
+
+_Single Vertical Wheels._--There are different sorts of vertical
+wheels; some having their fells of a circular form, others of an
+hexagonal, octagonal, or decagonal form, or of any number of sides,
+according to the length of the cases you design for the wheel; the
+spokes being fixed in the nave, nail slips of tin, with their edges
+turned up so as to form grooves for the cases to lie in; form the end
+of one spoke to that of another; then tie the cases in the grooves
+head to tail, in the same manner as those on the horizontal
+water-wheel; so that the cases, successively taking fire from one
+another, will keep the wheel in an equal rotation. Two of these wheels
+are very often fired together, one on each side of a building, and
+both lighted at the same time, and all the cases filled alike, to make
+them keep time together; as they will, if made by the following
+directions: In all the cases of both wheels, except the first, on each
+wheel drive two or three ladlesful of slow fire, in any part of the
+case; but be careful to ram the same quantity in each case; and in the
+end of one of the cases, on each wheel, you may ram one ladleful of
+dead-fire composition, which must be very lightly driven; you may also
+make many changes of fire by this method.
+
+Let the hole in the nave of the wheel be lined with brass, and made to
+turn on a smooth iron spindle. On the end of this spindle let there be
+a nut, to screw off and on; when you have put the wheel on the
+spindle, screw on the nut, which will keep the wheel from flying off.
+Let the mouth of the first case be a little raised. Vertical wheels
+are made from ten inches to three feet diameter, and the size of the
+cases must differ accordingly; four-ounce cases will do for wheels of
+14 or 16 inches diameter, which is the proportion generally used. The
+best wood for wheels of all sorts is a light and dry beech.
+
+_Horizontal Wheels._--They are best when their fells are made
+circular; in the middle of the top of the nave must be a pintle,
+turned out of the same piece as the nave, two inches long, and equal
+in diameter to the bore of one of the cases of the wheel; there must
+be a hole bored up the centre of the nave, within half an inch of the
+top of the pintle. The wheel being made; nail at the end of each spoke
+(of which there should be six or eight) a piece of wood, with a groove
+cut in it to receive the case. Fix these pieces in such a manner that
+half the cases may incline upwards and half downwards, and that, when
+they are tied on, their heads and tails may come very nearly together:
+from the tail of one case to the mouth of the other carry a leader,
+which should be secured with pasted paper. Besides these pipes, it
+will be necessary to put a little meal-powder within the pasted
+paper, to blow off the pipe, that there may be no obstruction to the
+fire from the cases. By means of these pipes the cases will
+successively take fire, burning one upwards and the other downwards.
+On the pintle fix a case of the same sort as those on the wheel; this
+case must be fired by a leader from the mouth of the last case on the
+wheel, which case must play downwards: instead of a common case in the
+middle, you may put a case of Chinese fire, long enough to burn as
+long as two or three of the cases on the wheel.
+
+Horizontal wheels are often fired two at a time, and made to keep time
+like vertical wheels, only they are made without any slow or dead
+fire; 10 or 12 inches will be enough for the diameter of wheels with
+six spokes.
+
+_Spiral Wheels._--They are only double horizontal wheels, and made
+thus: the nave must be about six inches long, and rather thicker than
+the single sort; instead of the pintle at top, make a hole for the
+case to be fixed in, and two sets of spokes, one set near the top of
+the nave, and the other near the bottom. At the end of each spoke cut
+a groove wherein you tie the cases, there being no fell: the spokes
+should not be more than two inches and a half long from the naves, so
+that the wheel may not be more than eight or nine inches diameter; the
+cases are placed in such a manner, that those at top play down, and
+those at bottom play up; but let the third or fourth case play
+horizontally. The case in the middle may begin with any of the others;
+six spokes will be enough for each set, so that the wheel may consist
+of 12 cases, besides that on the top: the cases six inches each.
+
+_Plural Wheels._--Plural wheels are made to turn horizontally, and to
+consist of three sets of spokes, placed six at top, six at bottom, and
+four in the middle; which last must be a little shorter than the rest:
+let the diameter of the wheel be 10 inches: the cases must be tied on
+the ends of the spokes in grooves cut on purpose, or on pieces of wood
+nailed on the ends of the spokes, with grooves cut in them as usual:
+in clothing these wheels, make the upper set of cases play obliquely
+downwards, the bottom set obliquely upwards, and the middle set
+horizontally. In placing the leaders, they must be managed so that the
+cases may burn thus, viz., first up, then down, then horizontal, and
+so on with the rest. But another change may be made, by driving in the
+end of the eighth case two or three ladlesful of slow fire, to burn
+till the wheel has stopped its course; then let the other cases be
+fixed the contrary way, which will make the wheel run back again; for
+the case at top you may put a small gerbe; and let the cases on the
+spokes be short, and filled with a strong brilliant charge.
+
+_Illuminated Spiral Wheel._--First have a circular horizontal wheel
+made two feet diameter, with a hole quite through the nave; then take
+three thin pieces of deal, three feet long each, and three-fourths of
+an inch broad each: nail one end of each of these pieces to the fell
+of the wheel, at an equal distance from one another, and the other end
+nail to a block with a hole in its bottom, which must be perpendicular
+to that in the block of the wheel, but not so large. The wheel being
+thus made, have a loop planed down very thin and flat; then nail one
+end of it into the fell of the wheel, and wind it round the three
+sticks in a spiral line from the wheel to the block at top; on the top
+of this block fix a case of Chinese fire; on the wheel you may place
+any number of cases, which must incline downwards, and burn two at a
+time. If the wheel should consist of ten cases, you may let the
+illuminations and Chinese fire begin with the second cases. The
+spindle for this wheel must be a little longer than the cone, and made
+very smooth at top, on which the upper block is to turn, and the whole
+weight of the wheel to rest.
+
+_Double Spiral Wheels._--For these wheels, the block or nave must be
+as long as the height of the worms, or spiral lines, but must be made
+very thin, and as light as possible. In this block must be fixed
+several spokes, which must diminish in length, from the wheel to the
+top, so as not to exceed the surface of a cone of the same height. To
+the ends of these spokes nail the worms, which must cross each other
+several times: close these worms with illuminations, the same as those
+on the single wheels; but the horizontal wheel you may clothe as you
+like. At the top of the worm place a case of spur-fire, or an amber
+light.
+
+_Balloon Wheels._--They are made to turn horizontally: they must be
+made two feet diameter, without any spokes, and very strong, with any
+number of sides. On the top of a wheel range and fix in pots, three
+inches diameter and seven inches high each, as many of these as there
+are cases on the wheel: near the bottom of each pot make a small vent;
+into each of these vents carry a leader from the tail of each case;
+load some of the pots with stars, and some with serpents, crackers,
+&c. As the wheels turn, the pots will successively be fired, and throw
+into the air a great variety of fires.
+
+
+BALLOON CASES.
+
+You must have an oval former, turned of smooth wood; then paste a
+quantity of brown or cartridge-paper, and let it lie till the paste
+has soaked all through; this done, rub the former with soap or grease,
+to prevent the paper from sticking to it; then lay the paper on in
+small slips, till you have made it one-third of the thickness of the
+shell intended. Having thus done, set it to dry; and when dry, cut it
+round the middle, leaving about one inch not cut, which will make the
+halves join much better than if quite separated. When you have some
+ready to join, place the halves even together, and let that dry; then
+lay on paper all over as before, everywhere equal. When the shell is
+thoroughly dry, burn a vent at top with a square iron.
+
+Shells that are designed for stars only, may be made quite round, and
+the thinner they are at the opening the better; for if they are too
+strong, the stars are apt to break at the bursting of the shell.
+Balloons must always be made to go easy into the mortars.
+
+
+MORTARS.
+
+These mortars must be made of pasteboard, with a small copper chamber
+at bottom, in which the powder is to be placed, on which the balloon
+is to be put. In the centre of the bottom of this chamber make a small
+hole a little down the foot: the hole must be met by another of the
+same size as the foot. Then putting a quick-match, or touch-string, of
+touch-paper, into the hole, your mortar will be ready to be fired.
+
+_To load Air Balloons with Stars, Serpents, &c., &c._--When you fill
+your shells, you must first put in the serpents, rains, &c., or
+whatever they are composed of, then the blowing powder; but the shells
+must not be quite filled. All those things must be put in at the
+fuse-hole, but marrons being too large to go in at the fuse-hole, must
+be put in before the inside shall be joined. When the shells are
+loaded, glue and drive in the fuses very tight. The number and
+quantities of each article for the different shells are as follows:
+
+ BALLOONS ILLUMINATED.
+ oz.
+ Meal-powder 1
+ Corn-powder 0-1/2
+ Powder for the mortar 2
+
+1 oz. driven or rolled stars, or as many as will fill the shell.
+
+ BALLOONS OR SERPENTS.
+ oz.
+ Meal-powder 1
+ Corn-powder 1
+ Powder for the mortar 2-1/2
+
+
+_Aigrettes._
+
+Mortars to throw aigrettes are generally made of pasteboard, of the
+same thickness as balloon mortars, and two diameters and a half long
+in the inside from the top of the foot: the foot must be made of elm
+without a chamber, but flat at top, and in the same proportions as
+those for balloon mortars; these mortars must also be bound round with
+a cord: sometimes eight or nine of these mortars, of about three or
+four inches diameter, are bound all together, so as to appear but one;
+but when they are made for this purpose, the bottom of the foot must
+be of the same diameter as the mortars, and only half a diameter high.
+The mortars being bound well together, fix them on a heavy solid block
+of wood. To load these mortars, first put on the inside bottom of each
+a piece of paper, and on it spread one ounce and a half of meal and
+corn-powder mixed; then tie the serpents up in parcels with
+quick-match, and put them in the mortar with their mouths downwards;
+but take care the parcels do not fit too tight in the mortars, and
+that all the serpents have been well primed with powder wetted with
+spirit of wine. On the top of the serpents in each mortar lay some
+paper or tow; then carry a leader from one mortar to the other all
+round, and then from all the outside mortars into that in the middle:
+these leaders must be put between the cases and the sides of the
+mortar, down to the powder at bottom: in the centre of the middle
+mortar fix a fire-pump, or brilliant fountain, which must be open at
+bottom, and long enough to project out of the mouth of the mortar;
+then paste papers on the tops of all the mortars.
+
+Mortars thus prepared are called a _nest of serpents_. When these
+mortars are to be fired, light the fire-pump, which when consumed will
+communicate to all the mortars at once by means of the leaders. For
+mortars of 8, 9, or 10 inches diameter, the serpents should be made in
+one and two-ounce cases, six or seven inches long, and fired by a
+leader brought out of the mouth of the mortar, and turned down on the
+outside, and the end of it covered with paper, to prevent the sparks
+of the other works from setting it on fire. For a six-inch mortar, let
+the quantity of powder for firing be two ounces; for an eight-inch,
+two ounces and three-quarters; and for a ten-inch, three ounces and
+three-quarters. Care must be taken in these, as well as small mortars,
+not to put in the serpents too tight, for fear of bursting the
+mortars. These mortars may be loaded with stars, crackers, &c.
+
+If the mortars, when loaded, are sent to any distance, or liable to be
+much moved, the firing powder should be secured from getting amongst
+the serpents, which would endanger the mortars, as well as hurt their
+performance. To prevent this, load the mortars thus: First put in the
+firing powder, and spread it equally about; then cut a round piece of
+blue touch-paper, equal to the exterior diameter of the mortar, and
+draw on it a circle equal to the interior diameter of the mortar, and
+notch it all round as far as that circle: then paste that part which
+is notched, and put it down the mortar close to the powder, and stick
+the pasted edge to the mortar: this will keep the powder always smooth
+at bottom, so that it may be moved or carried anywhere without
+receiving damage. The large single mortars are called _pots des
+aigrettes_.
+
+
+FIRE-PUMPS, OR ROMAN CANDLES.
+
+Cases for fire-pumps are made like those for tourbillons; only they
+are pasted instead of being rolled dry. Having rolled and dried your
+cases fill them: first put in a little meal-powder and then a star, on
+which ram, lightly, a ladle or two of composition, then a little
+meal-powder, and on that a star; then again composition, and so on
+till you have filled the case. Stars for fire-pumps should not be
+round, but must be made either square, or flat and circular with a
+hole through the middle: the quantity of powder for throwing the stars
+must increase as you come near the top of the case; for, if much
+powder be put at the bottom, it will burst the case. The stars must
+differ in size in this manner: let the star which you put in first be
+a little less than the bore of the case; but let the next star be a
+little larger, and the third star a little larger than the second, and
+so on: let them increase in diameter till within two of the top of the
+case, which two must fit in tight. As the loading of fire-pumps is
+somewhat difficult, it will be necessary to make two or three trials
+before you depend on their performance. When you fill a number of
+pumps, take care not to put in each an equal quantity of charge
+between the stars, so that when they are fired they may not throw up
+too many stars together. Cases for fire-pumps should be made very
+strong, and rolled on 4 or 8-ounce formers, 10 or 12 inches long each.
+
+ CHARGE.
+ lb. oz. lb. oz.
+ Saltpetre 5 0 Saltpetre 5 0
+ Brimstone 1 0 Brimstone 2 0
+ Meal-powder 1-1/2 0 Meal-powder 1 8
+ Glass-dust 1 0 Glass-dust 1 8
+
+
+AN ARTIFICIAL EARTHQUAKE.
+
+Mix the following ingredients to a paste, with water; bury it in the
+ground, and in a few hours the earth will break open in several
+places:
+
+ lb. oz.
+ Sulphur 4 0
+ Steel-dust 4 0
+
+
+_Chinese Fountains._
+
+To make a Chinese fountain, you must have a perpendicular piece of
+wood, seven feet long, and two inches and a half square. Sixteen
+inches from the top, fix on the front a cross piece one inch thick,
+and two and a half broad, with the broad side upwards; below this, fix
+three more pieces of the same width and thickness, at sixteen inches
+from each other; let the bottom rail be five feet long, and the others
+of such a length as to allow the fire-pumps to stand in the middle of
+the intervals of each other. The pyramid being thus made, fix in the
+holes made in the bottom rail five fire-pumps, at equal distances; on
+the second rail, place four pumps; on the third, three; on the fourth,
+two; and on the top of the post, one; but place them all to incline a
+little forward, that, when they throw out the stars, they may not
+strike against the cross-rails. Having fixed your fire-pumps, clothe
+them with leaders, so that they may all be fired together.
+
+
+_The Dodecahedron,_
+
+So called because it nearly represents a twelve-sided figure, is made
+thus: First have a ball turned out of some hard wood, 14 inches
+diameter; divide its surface into 14 equal parts, from which bore
+holes one inch and a half diameter, perpendicular to the centre, so
+that they may all meet in the middle: then let there be turned in the
+inside of each hole a female screw; and to all the holes but one must
+be made a round spoke five feet long, with four inches of the screw at
+one end to fit the holes; then in the screw-end of all the spokes bore
+a hole five inches long, which must be bored slanting, so as to come
+out at one side, a little above the screw; from which cut a small
+groove along the spoke within six inches of the other end, where make
+another hole through to the other side of the spoke. In this end fix a
+spindle, on which put a small wheel of three or four sides, each side
+six or seven inches long; these sides must have grooves cut in them
+large enough to receive a two or four-ounce case. When these wheels
+are clothed, put them on the spindles, and at the end of each spindle
+put a nut, to keep the wheel from falling off. The wheels being thus
+fixed, carry a pipe from the mouth of the first case on each wheel,
+through the hole in the side of the spoke, and from thence along the
+groove, and through the other hole, so as to hang out at the screw-end
+about an inch. The spokes being all prepared in this manner, you must
+have a post, on which you intend to fire the work, with an iron screw
+in the top of it, to fit one of the holes in the ball: on the screw
+fix the ball; then in the top hole of the ball put a little
+meal-powder and some loose quick-match: then screw in all the spokes;
+and in one side of the ball bore a hole, in which put a leader, and
+secure it at the end, and the work will be ready to be fired. By the
+leader the powder and match in the centre is fired, which will light
+the match at the ends of the spokes all at once, whereby all the
+wheels will be lighted at once. There may be an addition to this
+piece, by fixing a small globe on each wheel, or one on the top wheel
+only. A grey charge will be proper for the wheel-cases.
+
+
+_Stars with Points._
+
+These stars are made of different sizes, according to the work for
+which they are intended; they are made with cases from one ounce to
+one pound, but in general with four-ounce cases, four or five inches
+long: the case must be rolled with paste, and twice as thick as that
+of a rocket of the same bore. Having rolled a case, pinch one end of
+it quite close; then drive in half a diameter of clay; and when the
+case is dry, fill it with composition two or three inches to the
+length of the cases with which it is to burn: at top of the charge
+drive some clay; as the ends of these cases are seldom pinched, they
+would be liable to take fire. Having filled a case, divide the
+circumference of it at the pinched end close to the clay, into five
+equal parts; then bore five holes with a gimblet about the size of the
+neck of a common four-ounce case, into the composition; from one hole
+to the other carry a quick-match, and secure it with paper: this paper
+must be put on in the manner of that on the end of wheel-cases, so
+that the hollow part, which projects from the end of the case, may
+serve to receive a leader from any other work, to give fire to the
+points of the stars. These stars may be made with any number of
+points.
+
+
+_Fixed Sun with a transparent Face._
+
+To make a sun of the best kind, there should be two rows of cases,
+which should show a double glory, and make the rays strong and full.
+The frame or sun-wheel must be made thus: have a circular flat nave
+made very strong, 12 inches diameter; to this fix six strong flat
+spokes; on the front of these fix a circular fell, five feet diameter;
+within which, fix another fell, the length of one of the sun-cases
+less in diameter; within this fix a third fell, whose diameter must be
+less than the second by the length of one case and one-third. The
+wheel being made, divide the fells into so many equal parts as there
+are to be cases, (which may be done from 24 to 44:) at each division
+fix a flat iron staple: these staples must be made to fit the cases,
+to hold them fast on the wheel; let the staples be so placed, that one
+row of cases may lie in the middle of the intervals of the other.
+
+In the centre of the block of the sun drive a spindle, on which put a
+small hexagonal wheel, whose cases must be filled with the same charge
+as the cases of the sun; two cases of this wheel must burn at a time,
+and begin with those on the fells. Having fixed on all the cases,
+carry pipes of communication from one to the other, and from one side
+of the sun to the wheel in the middle, and from thence to the other
+side of the sun. These leaders will hold the wheel steady while the
+sun is fixing up, and will also be a sure method of lighting both
+cases of the wheel together. A sun thus made is called a _brilliant
+sun_, because the wood-work is entirely covered with fire from the
+wheel in the middle, so that there appears nothing but sparks of
+brilliant fire; but if you would have a transparent face in the
+centre, you must have one made of pasteboard of any size. The method
+of making a face is, by cutting out the eyes, nose, and mouth, for the
+sparks of the wheel to appear through; but instead of this face, you
+may have one painted on oil paper, or Persian silk, strained tight on
+a hoop; which hoop must be supported by three or four pieces of wire
+at six inches distance from the wheel in the centre, so that the light
+of it may illuminate the face. By this method may be shown, in the
+front of the sun, VIVAT REGINA, cut in pasteboard, or Apollo, painted
+in silk; but, for a small collection, a sun with a single glory and a
+wheel in front will be most suitable. Half-pound cases, filled ten
+inches with composition, will be a good size for a sun of five feet
+diameter; but, if larger, the cases must be greater in proportion.
+
+
+DETONATING WORKS.
+
+WATERLOO CRACKERS.
+
+Take a slip of cartridge-paper, about three-quarters of an inch in
+width, paste and double it; let it remain till dry, and cut it into
+two equal parts in length, (No. 1 and 2,) according to the following
+pattern:
+
+ +-----------------+---+-------+--------+
+ | No. 1. Glass. | S | Glass.| No. 2. |
+ +-----------------+---+-------+--------+
+
+Take some of the glass composition, and lay it across the paper as in
+the pattern, and put about a quarter of a grain of fulminating silver
+in the place marked S, and while the glass composition is moist, put
+the paper marked No. 2, over the farthest row of glass. Over all,
+paste twice over the part that covers the silver a piece of paper; let
+it dry, and when you wish to explode it, take hold of the two ends and
+pull them sharply from each other, and it will produce a loud report.
+
+
+DETONATING GIRDLE.
+
+Procure a piece of girth from 12 to 18 inches in length. Double it,
+and fold it down about 1-1/2 inch, similar to the fold of a letter,
+and then turn back one end of the girth, and it will form two
+compartments. Then take some gum and dissolve it in water; boil it
+till it is quite melted, and very thick; add coarse powdered glass,
+sufficient to make it into a very thick paste; place two upright rows
+of the glass composition in the inside of one of the folds, about as
+wide as the thickness of a lath, and as high as a half-crown laid
+flat; and when they are dry, sew the first fold together on the edge,
+and then the second at the opposite end, so that one end may be open.
+Then, in the centre of the two rows, put about a grain of fulminating
+silver, and paste a piece of cotton or silk over it. Make a hole at
+each end of the girdle, and hang it to a hook in the door-post, and
+the other hook on the door, observing to place the silk part so that
+it may come against the edge of the door when opened, which will cause
+a report as loud as a small cannon. The fulminating silver may be
+purchased at any of the operating chemists.
+
+
+DETONATING BALLS.
+
+Procure some glass globes, between the size of a pea and a small
+marble, in which there must be a small hole; put into it half a grain
+of fulminating silver. Paste a piece of paper carefully over the ball
+to prevent the silver from escaping. When you wish to explode one put
+it on the ground, and tread hard upon it, and it will go off with a
+loud noise. These balls may be made productive of much amusement in
+company, by placing a chair lightly on them; for whoever sits down
+upon them will cause them to explode. These globes may be procured at
+the barometer-makers.
+
+
+THE DETONATING TAPE.
+
+Is made of binding, about three-eighths of an inch in width. Observe
+the same directions as given for the girdle; you may either explode it
+yourself, by taking hold of each end, and rolling the ends from each
+other sharply, or give one end to another, and pull together.
+
+
+DETONATING CARDS.
+
+Take a piece of card about three-fourths of an inch in breadth and 12
+in length; slit it at one end, and place in the opening a quarter of a
+grain of fulminating silver; close the edges down with a little paste,
+and when dry you may use it by lighting the end in a candle.
+
+Having given the method by which these loud reports are produced, we
+shall mention some other effects to be produced by the silver, capable
+of affording much amusement. For instance, by placing about a quarter
+of a grain of the silver in the midst of some tobacco in a pipe, or
+between the leaves of a cigar, and closing the end again, to prevent
+the powder from falling out; when lighted, it causes a loud explosion;
+for heat, as well as friction, will equally do.
+
+Or, take one-third of the grain of fulminating silver; fold it up in a
+small piece of paper, and wrap it up in another piece, and paste it
+round a pin. These pins stuck in the wick of a candle make a very loud
+noise.
+
+Fulminating silver may be also used in the following manner:--Put half
+a grain in a piece of glass-paper, and enclose it in a piece of foil;
+put it then at the bottom or side of a drawer, and on opening or
+shutting it, it will immediately go off.
+
+Put a quarter of a grain of fulminating silver into a piece of paper,
+and place in the snuffers when quite cold; when the candle is snuffed,
+it will go off.
+
+
+AQUATIC FIRE-WORKS.
+
+Works that sport in the water are much esteemed by most admirers of
+fire-works, particularly water-rockets; and as they seem of a very
+extraordinary nature to those who are unacquainted with this art, they
+merit a particular explanation.
+
+
+_Water-Rockets._
+
+They may be made from four ounces to two pounds. If larger, they are
+too heavy; so that it will be difficult to make them keep above water
+without a cork float, which must be tied to the neck of the case; but
+the rockets will not dive so well with as without floats.
+
+Cases for these are made in the same manner and proportion as
+sky-rockets, only a little thicker of paper. When you fill those which
+are driven solid, put in first one ladleful of slow fire, then two of
+the proper charge, and on that one or two ladles of sinking charge,
+then the proper charge, then the sinking charge again, and so on, till
+you have filled the case within three diameters; then drive on the
+composition one ladleful of clay; through which make a small hole to
+the charge; then fill the case, within half a diameter, with
+corn-powder, on which turn down two or three rounds of the case in the
+inside; then pinch and tie the end very tight; having filled the
+rockets, (according to the above directions,) dip their ends in melted
+resin or sealing-wax, or else secure them well with grease. When you
+fire those rockets, throw in six or eight at a time; but, if you would
+have them all sink, or swim, at the same time, you must fill them with
+an equal quantity of composition, and fire them together.
+
+
+_Pipes of Communication for Water._
+
+They may be used under water, but must be a little thicker in the
+paper than those for land. Having rolled a sufficient number of pipes,
+and kept them till dry, wash them over with drying oil, and set them
+to dry; but when you oil them, leave about an inch and a half at each
+end dry, for joints; as, if they were oiled all over, when you come to
+join them, the paste will not stick where the paper is greasy: after
+the leaders are joined, and the paste dry, oil the joints. These pipes
+will lie many hours under water, without receiving any damage.
+
+
+_Horizontal Water-Wheels._
+
+To make horizontal wheels for the water, first get a large wooden bowl
+without a handle; then have an eight-sided wheel, made of a flat board
+18 inches diameter, so that the length of each side may nearly be
+seven inches: in all the sides cut a groove for the cases to lie in.
+This wheel being made, nail it on the top of the bowl; then take four
+eight-ounce cases, filled with a proper charge, each about six inches
+in length. Now, to clothe the wheel with these cases, get some
+whitish-brown paper, and cut it into slips; being pasted all over on
+one side, take one of the cases, and roll one of the slips of paper
+about an inch and a half on its end, so that there will remain about
+two inches and a half of the paper hollow from the end of the case:
+tie this case on one of the sides of the wheel, near the corners of
+which must be holes bored, through which put the packthread to tie the
+cases: having tied on the first case at the neck and end, put a little
+meal-powder in the hollow paper; then paste a slip of paper on the end
+of another case, the head of which put into the hollow paper on the
+first, allowing a sufficient distance from the tail of one to the head
+of the other, for the pasted paper to bend without tearing: tie on the
+second case as you did the first, and so on with the rest, except the
+last, which must be closed at the end, unless it is to communicate to
+any thing on the top of the wheel, such as fire-pumps or brilliant
+fires, fixed in holes cut in the wheel, and fired by the last or
+second case, as the fancy directs: six, eight, or any number, may be
+placed on the top of the wheel, provided they are not too heavy for
+the bowl.
+
+Before trying on the cases, cut the upper part of all their ends,
+except the last, a little shelving, that the fire from one may play
+over the other, without being obstructed by the case. Wheel-cases have
+no clay driven in their ends, nor pinched, but are always left open,
+only the last, or those which are not to lead fire, which must be well
+secured.
+
+
+_Water-Mines._
+
+For water-mines you must have a bowl with a wheel on it, made in the
+same manner as the water-wheel; only in its middle there must be a
+hole, of the same diameter as that of the intended mine. These mines
+are tin pots, with strong bottoms, and a little more than two
+diameters in length: the mine must be fixed in the hole in the wheel,
+with its bottom resting on the bowl; then loaded with serpents,
+crackers, stars, small water-rockets, &c., in the same manner as pots
+of aigrettes; but in their centre fix a case of Chinese fire, or a
+small gerbe, which must be lighted at the beginning of the last case
+on the wheel. These wheels are to be clothed as usual.
+
+
+_Fire Globes for the Water._
+
+Bowls for water-globes must be very large, and the wheels on them of
+ten sides: on each side nail a piece of wood four inches long; and on
+the outside of each piece cut a groove, wide enough to receive about
+one-fourth of the thickness of a four-ounce case: these pieces of wood
+must be nailed in the middle of each face of the wheel, and fixed in
+an oblique direction, so that the fire from the cases may incline
+upwards: the wheel being thus prepared, tie in each groove a
+four-ounce case filled with a grey charge; then carry a leader from
+the tail of one case to the mouth of the other.
+
+Globes for these wheels are made of two in hoops, with their edges
+outwards, fixed one within the other, at right angles. The diameter of
+these hoops must be rather less than that of the wheel. Having made
+the globe, drive in the centre of the wheel an iron spindle which must
+stand perpendicular, and its length be four or six inches more than
+the diameter of the globe.
+
+The spindle serves for an axis, on which is fixed the globe, which
+must stand four or six inches from the wheel; round one side of each
+hoop must be soldered little bits of tin, two inches and a half
+distance from each other; which pieces must be two inches in length
+each, and only fastened at one end, the other ends being left loose,
+to turn round the small port-fires, and hold them on: these port-fires
+must be made of such a length as will last out the cases on the wheel.
+There need not be any port-fires at the bottom of the globe within
+four inches of the spindle, as they would have no effect but to burn
+the wheel: all the port-fires must be placed perpendicularly from the
+centre of the globe, with their mouths outwards, and must be clothed
+with leaders, so as all to take fire with the second case of the
+wheel; and the cases must burn two at a time, one opposite the other.
+When two cases of a wheel begin together, two will end together;
+therefore the two opposite end cases must have their ends pinched and
+secured from fire. The method of firing such wheels is, by carrying a
+leader from the mouth of one of the first cases to that of the other;
+and the leader being burnt through the middle, will give fire to both
+at the same time.
+
+
+_Odoriferous Water-Balloons._
+
+They are made in the same manner as air-balloons, but very thin of
+paper, and in diameter one inch and three-fourths, with a vent of half
+an inch diameter. The shells being made, and quite dry, fill them with
+any of the following compositions, which must be rammed in tight:
+these balloons must be fired at the vent, and put into a bowl of
+water. Odoriferous works are generally fired in rooms.
+
+_Composition I._ Saltpetre two ounces, flour of sulphur one ounce,
+camphor half an ounce, yellow amber half an ounce, charcoal-dust
+three-fourths of an ounce, salt of Benzoin half an ounce, all powdered
+very fine and well mixed.
+
+II. Saltpetre twelve ounces, meal-powder three ounces, frankincense
+one ounce, myrrh half an ounce, camphor half an ounce, charcoal three
+ounces, all moistened with the oil of spike.
+
+III. Saltpetre two ounces, sulphur half an ounce, antimony half an
+ounce, amber half an ounce, cedar raspings one-fourth of an ounce, all
+mixed with the oil of roses and a few drops of bergamot.
+
+IV. Saltpetre four ounces, sulphur one ounce, saw-dust of juniper half
+an ounce, saw-dust of cypress one ounce, camphor one-fourth of an
+ounce, myrrh two drachms, dried rosemary one-fourth of an ounce, all
+moistened a little with the oil of roses.
+
+N.B. Water-rockets may be made with any of the above compositions,
+with a little alteration, to make them weaker or stronger, according
+to the size of the cases.
+
+
+_A Sea-fight with small Ships and a Fire-ship._
+
+Having procured four or five small ships, of two or three feet in
+length, make a number of small reports, which are to serve for guns.
+Of these range as many as you please on each side of the upper decks;
+then at the head and stern of each ship fix a two-ounce case, eight
+inches long, filled with a slow port-fire composition; but take care
+to place it in such a manner that the fire may fall in the water, and
+not burn the rigging; in these cases bore holes at unequal distances
+from one another, but make as many in each case as half the number of
+reports, so that one case may fire the guns on one side, and the other
+those on the opposite. The method of firing the guns is, by carrying a
+leader from the holes in the cases to the reports on the decks; you
+must make these leaders very small, and be careful in calculating the
+burning of the slow fire in the regulating cases, that more than two
+guns be not fired at a time. When you would have a broadside given,
+let a leader be carried to a cracker placed on the outside of the
+ship; which cracker must be tied loose, or the reports will be too
+slow: in all the ships put artificial guns at the port-holes. Reports
+for these and similar occasions are made by filling small cartridges
+with grained powder, pinching them close at each end, and, when used,
+boring a hole in the side, to which is placed a match or leader for
+firing them.
+
+Having filled and bored holes in two port-fires, for regulating the
+guns in one ship, make all the rest exactly the same; then, when you
+begin the engagement, light one ship first, and set it a sailing, and
+so on with the rest, sending them out singly, which will make them
+fire regularly, at different times, without confusion; for the time
+between the firing of each gun will be equal to that of lighting the
+slow fires.
+
+The fire-ship may be of any size, and need not be very good, for it is
+always lost in the action. To prepare a ship for this purpose, make a
+port-fire equal in size with those in the other ships, and place it at
+the stern; in every port place a larger port-fire, filled with a very
+strong composition, and painted in imitation of a gun, and let them
+all be fired at once by a leader from the slow fire, within two or
+three diameters of its bottom; all along both sides, on the top of the
+upper deck, lay star-composition about half an inch thick and one
+broad, which must be wetted with thin size, then primed with
+meal-powder, and secured from fire by pasting paper over it; in the
+place where you lay this composition, drive some little tacks with
+flat heads, to hold it fast to the deck; this must be fired just after
+the sham guns, and when burning will show a flame all round the ship:
+at the head take up the decks, and put in a tin mortar loaded with
+crackers, which mortar must be fired by a pipe from the end of the
+slow fire: the firing of this mortar will sink the ship, and make a
+pretty conclusion. The regulating port-fire of this ship must be
+lighted at the same time with the first fighting ship.
+
+Having prepared all the ships for fighting, we shall next proceed with
+the management of them when on the water. At one end of the pond, just
+under the surface of the water, fit two running blocks, at what
+distance you choose the ships should fight; and at the other end of
+the pond, opposite to each of these blocks, under the water, fix a
+double block; then on the land, by each of the double blocks, place
+two small windlasses; round one of them turn one end of a small cord,
+and put the other end through one of the blocks; then carry it through
+the single one at the opposite end of the pond, and bring it back
+through the double block again, and round the other windlass: to this
+cord, near the double block, tie as many small strings as half the
+number of the ships, at any distance; but these strings must not be
+more than two feet long each: make fast the loose end of each to a
+ship, just under her bowsprit; for if tied to the keel, or too near
+the water, it will overset the ship. Half the ships being thus
+prepared, near the other double block fix two more windlasses, to
+which fasten a cord, and to it tie the other half of the ships as
+before: when you fire the ships, pull in the cord with one of the
+windlasses, to get all the ships together; and when you have set fire
+to the first, turn that windlass which draws them out, and so on with
+the rest, till they are all out in the middle of the pond; then, by
+turning the other windlass, you will draw them back again; by which
+method you may make them change sides, and tack about backwards and
+forwards at pleasure. For the fire-ship fix the blocks and windlasses
+between the others, so that when she sails out she will be between the
+other ships: you must not let this ship advance till the guns at her
+ports take fire.
+
+
+_To fire Sky-Rockets under Water._
+
+You must have stands made as usual, only the rails must be placed flat
+instead of edgewise, and have holes in them for the rocket-sticks to
+go through; for if they were hung upon hooks, the motion of the water
+would throw them off: the stands being made, if the pond be deep
+enough, sink them at the sides so deep, that, when the rockets are in,
+their heads may just appear above the surface of the water; to the
+mouth of each rocket fix a leader, which put through the hole with a
+stick; then a little above the water must be a board, supported by the
+stand, and placed along one side of the rockets; then the ends of the
+leaders are turned up through holes made in this board, exactly
+opposite the rockets. By this means you may fire them singly or all at
+once. Rockets may be fired by this method in the middle of a pond, by
+a Neptune, a swan, a water-wheel, or any thing else you choose.
+
+
+_Neptune in his Chariot._
+
+To represent Neptune in his chariot, you must have a Neptune (made of
+wood, or basket-work) as big as life, fixed on a float large enough to
+bear his weight; on which must be two horses' heads and necks, so as
+to seem swimming. For the wheels of the chariot, there must be two
+vertical wheels of black fire, and on Neptune's head a horizontal
+wheel of brilliant fire, with all its cases, to play upwards. When
+this wheel is made, cover it with paper or pasteboard, cut and painted
+like Neptune's coronet; then let the trident be made without prongs,
+but instead of them, fix three cases of a weak grey charge, and on
+each horse's head put an eight-ounce case of brilliant fire, and on
+the mouth of each fix a short case, of the same diameter, filled with
+the white flame composition enough to last out all the cases on the
+wheels: these short cases must be open at bottom, that they may light
+the brilliant fires; for the horses' eyes put small port-fires, and
+in each nostril put a small case half filled with grey charge, and the
+rest with port-fire composition.
+
+If Neptune is to give fire to any building on the water, at his first
+setting out, the wheels of the chariot, and that on his head, with the
+white flame on the horses' heads, and the port-fires in their eyes and
+nostrils, must all be lighted at once; then from the bottom of the
+white flames carry a leader to the trident. As Neptune is to advance
+by the help of a block and cord, you must manage it so as not to let
+him turn about, till the brilliant fires on the horses and the trident
+begin; for it is by the fire from the horses (which plays almost
+upright,) that the building, or work, is lighted, which must be thus
+prepared. From the mouth of the case which is to be first fired, hang
+some loose quick-match to receive the fire from the horses. When
+Neptune is only to be shown by himself, without setting fire to any
+other works, let the white flames on the horses be very short, and not
+to last longer than one case of each wheel, and let two cases of each
+wheel burn at a time.
+
+
+_Swans and Ducks in Water._
+
+If you would have swans or ducks discharge rockets into the water,
+they must be made hollow, and of paper, and filled with small
+water-rockets, with some blowing powder to throw them out; but if this
+is not done, they may be made of wood, which will last many times.
+Having made and painted some swans, fix them on floats; then in the
+places where their eyes should be, bore holes two inches deep,
+inclining downwards, and wide enough to receive a small port-fire; the
+port-fire cases for this purpose must be made of brass, two inches
+long, and filled with a slow bright charge. In the middle of one of
+these cases make a little hole; then put the port-fire in the eye-hole
+of the swan, leaving about half an inch to project out; and in the
+other eye put another port-fire, with a hole made in it: then in the
+neck of the swan, within two inches of one of the eyes, bore a hole
+slantwise, to meet that in the port-fire; in this hole put a leader,
+and carry it to a water-rocket, that must be fixed under the tail with
+its mouth upwards. On the top of the head place two one-ounce cases,
+four inches long each, driven with brilliant fire; one of these cases
+must incline forwards, and the other backwards: these must be lighted
+at the same time as the water-rocket; to do which, bore a hole
+between them in the top of the swan's head, down to the hole in the
+port-fire, to which carry a leader: if the swan is filled with
+rockets, they must be fired by a pipe from the end of the water-rocket
+under the tail. When you set the swan a swimming, light the two eyes.
+
+
+_Water Fire-Fountains._
+
+To make a fire-fountain for the water, first have a float made of
+wood, three feet diameter; then in the middle fix a round
+perpendicular post, four feet high, and two inches diameter; round
+this post fix three circular wheels made of thin wood, without any
+spokes. The largest of these wheels must be placed within two or three
+inches of the float, and must be nearly of the same diameter. The
+second wheel must be two feet two inches diameter, and fixed at two
+feet distance from the first. The third wheel must be one foot four
+inches diameter, and fixed within six inches of the top of the post:
+the wheels being fixed, take 18 four or eight-ounce cases of brilliant
+fire, and place them round the first wheel with their mouths outwards,
+and inclining downwards; on the second wheel place 13 cases of the
+same, and in the same manner as those on the first; on the third,
+place eight more of these cases, in the same manner as before, and on
+the top of the post fix a gerbe; then clothe all the cases with
+leaders, so that both they and the gerbe may take fire at the same
+time. Before firing this work, try it in the water, to see whether the
+float is properly made, so as to keep the fountain upright.
+
+
+THE END.
+
+
+
+
+MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
+
+IN VARIOUS DEPARTMENTS OF LITERATURE,
+
+ PUBLISHED BY LEA AND BLANCHARD.
+
+
+ACTON'S MODERN COOKERY, with cuts, 12mo, cloth.
+
+AMERICAN ORNITHOLOGY, by Prince Charles Bonaparte, in 4 vols. folio,
+half bound, colored plates.
+
+AMERICAN MILITARY LAW AND PRACTICE OF COURTS MARTIAL, by Lieut.
+O'Brien, U. S. A., 1 vol. 8vo, cloth or law sheep.
+
+ANSTED'S ANCIENT WORLD, OR PICTURESQUE SKETCHES OF CREATION, 1 vol.
+12mo, numerous cuts.
+
+ADDISON ON CONTRACTS, 1 large vol. 8vo, law sheep.
+
+ARNOTT'S ELEMENTS OF PHYSICS, 1 vol. 8vo, sheep, with many wood-cuts.
+
+BOZ'S COMPLETE WORKS, in 8 vols. 8vo, extra cloth, with numerous
+plates.
+
+ Same work, common edition, in paper, 9 parts, price $3 50.
+
+ Same work in 3 large vols., good paper, fancy cloth, price
+ $3 75.
+
+BENTHAMIANA: Extracts from Bentham, in 1 vol. 12mo.
+
+BROWNE'S RELIGIO MEDICI, 1 vol. 12mo, extra cloth.
+
+BOLMAR'S FRENCH SERIES, consisting of--
+
+ A Selection of One Hundred Perrin's Fables, with a Key to the
+ Pronunciation.
+
+ A Series of Colloquial Phrases.
+
+ The First Eight Books of Fenelon's Telemachus.
+
+ Key to the same.
+
+ A Treatise on all the French Verbs, Regular and Irregular.
+
+ The whole forming five small volumes, half bound to match.
+
+BUTLER'S ATLAS OF ANCIENT GEOGRAPHY, 8vo, half bound.
+
+BUTLER'S GEOGRAPHIA CLASSICA, 1 vol. 8vo.
+
+BIRD'S NATURAL PHILOSOPHY, 1 vol. with many cuts.
+
+BRIGHAM ON MENTAL CULTIVATION, &c., 12mo, cloth.
+
+BRIDGEWATER TREATISES. The whole complete in 7 vols. 8vo, various
+bindings: containing--
+
+ ROGET'S ANIMAL AND VEGETABLE PHYSIOLOGY, in 2 vols, with many
+ cuts.
+
+ KIRBY ON THE HISTORY, HABITS, AND INSTINCT OF ANIMALS, 1 vol.
+ with plates.
+
+ PROUT ON CHEMISTRY.
+
+ CHALMERS ON THE MORAL CONDITION OF MAN.
+
+ WHEWELL ON ASTRONOMY.
+
+ BELL ON THE HAND.
+
+ KIDD ON THE PHYSICAL CONDITION OF MAN.
+
+ BUCKLAND'S GEOLOGY, 2 vols. with numerous plates and maps.
+
+ Roget, Buckland, and Kirby are sold separate.
+
+BROUGHAM ON THE FRENCH REVOLUTION, 1 vol. paper.
+
+BOY'S TREASURY OF SPORTS AND PASTIMES, 1 vol. 18mo, crimson cloth, 400
+illustrations.
+
+BARNABY RUDGE, by "Boz," paper or cloth.
+
+BROWNING'S HISTORY OF THE HUGUENOTS, 1 vol. 8vo.
+
+BREWSTER'S TREATISE ON OPTICS, 1 vol. 12mo, cuts.
+
+BABBAGE'S "FRAGMENT," 1 vol. 8vo.
+
+CAMPBELL'S LIVES OF THE LORD CHANCELLORS, 7 vols. crown 8vo, extra
+cloth.
+
+CHIMES, by Dickens, plates, 18mo, fancy cloth.
+
+CHRISTMAS STORIES--The Chimes, Carol, Cricket on the Hearth, and
+Battle of Life, together with Pictures from Italy, by Dickens, 1 vol
+8vo, paper, price 37-1/2 cents.
+
+COMPLETE COOK, paper, price only 25 cents.
+
+COMPLETE CONFECTIONER, paper, 25 cents.
+
+COMPLETE FLORIST, paper, 25 cents.
+
+COMPLETE GARDENER, paper, 25 cents.
+
+CURIOSITY SHOP, by "Boz," paper or doth.
+
+CÆSAR'S COMMENTARIES, 1 vol. 18mo, neat cloth; being vol. I. of
+Schmitz and Zumpf's Classical Series for Schools.
+
+CAMPBELL'S COMPLETE POETICAL WORKS, in 1 vol. crown 8vo, cloth gilt or
+white calf, plates.
+
+COOPER'S NAVAL HISTORY OF THE UNITED STATES, complete in 1 vol. 8vo,
+cloth, with plates and maps.
+
+COOPER'S NOVELS AND TALES, in 23 vols, sheep gilt, 12mo, or 47 vols.
+paper.
+
+COOPER'S SEA TALES, 6 vols. 12mo, cloth.
+
+COOPER'S LEATHER STOCKING TALES, 5 vols. 12mo, cloth.
+
+CARPENTER'S COMPARATIVE ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY, with numerous
+wood-cuts, (preparing).
+
+CARPENTER'S ANIMAL PHYSIOLOGY, with 300 wood-cuts, (preparing).
+
+CROLY'S HISTORY OF THE CHRISTIAN RELIGION, to be complete in 3 vols.,
+(at press).
+
+CLATER ON THE DISEASES OF HORSES, by Skinner, 1 vol. 12mo.
+
+CLATER'S CATTLE AND SHEEP DOCTOR, 1 vol. 12mo, cuts.
+
+CAMPBELL'S FREDERIC THE GREAT, 2 vols. 12mo, extra cloth.
+
+DON QUIXOTE, with numerous illustrations by Johannot; 2 vols., 8vo,
+cloth, or half morocco.
+
+DAVIDSON, MARGARET, Memoirs of and Poems, in 1 vol. 12mo, paper 50
+cents, or extra cloth.
+
+DAVIDSON, LUCRETIA, Poetical Remains, 1 vol. 12mo, paper 50 cents, or
+extra cloth.
+
+DAVIDSON, Mrs., Poetry and Life, in 1 vol. 12mo, paper 50 cents, or
+extra cloth.
+
+DANA ON CORALS, 1 vol. royal 4to, with Atlas of Plates, (at press).
+
+DOMBEY AND SON, by Dickens, 1 vol. 8vo, with 16 plates, price 50
+cents.
+
+ Same work, fine edition, 40 plates, extra cloth.
+
+DOG AND SPORTSMAN, by Skinner, plates, 1 vol. 12mo, cloth.
+
+DUNGLISON ON HUMAN HEALTH, 1 vol. 8vo, cloth or sheep.
+
+ENCYCLOPÆDIA OF GEOGRAPHY, in 3 octavo vols. many cuts and maps,
+various bindings.
+
+ENCYCLOPÆDIA AMERICANA, 14 vols. 8vo, various bindings. Vol. 14,
+bringing the work up to 1846, sold separate.
+
+EAST'S KING'S BENCH REPORTS, edited by G. M. Wharton, 16 vols. in 8,
+large 8vo, law sheep.
+
+EDUCATION OF MOTHERS, 1 vol. 12mo, cloth or paper.
+
+ENDLESS AMUSEMENT, neat 18mo, crimson cloth, with cuts.
+
+FIELDING'S SELECT WORKS, in 1 vol. 8vo, cloth, or 4 parts, paper.
+
+FRANCATELLI'S MODERN FRENCH COOK, in 1 vol. 8vo, with many cuts.
+
+FOWNES' RECENT WORK ON CHEMISTRY, second edition, by Bridges, 1 vol.
+12mo, many cuts, sheep or extra cloth.
+
+GRAHAME'S COLONIAL HISTORY OF THE UNITED STATES, 2 vols. 8vo, a new
+edition.
+
+GRAHAM'S ELEMENTS OF CHEMISTRY, 1 vol. large 8vo, many cuts, (new
+edition, in press).
+
+GIESELER'S ECCLESIASTICAL HISTORY, 3 vols. 8vo.
+
+GRIFFITHS' CHEMISTRY OF THE FOUR SEASONS, 1 vol. 12mo, many cuts.
+
+GRIFFITH'S MEDICAL BOTANY, 1 vol. large 8vo, extra cloth, nearly 400
+cuts.
+
+GROTE'S HISTORY OF GREECE, to form a neat 12mo series.
+
+HAWKER ON SHOOTING, Edited by Porter, with plates and cuts, 1 vol.
+8vo, beautiful extra cloth.
+
+HERSCHELL'S TREATISE ON ASTRONOMY, 1 vol. 12mo, cuts and plates.
+
+HALE'S ETHNOLOGY AND PHILOSOPHY OF THE U. S. EXPLORING EXPEDITION, 1
+vol. royal 4to, extra cloth.
+
+HEMANS' COMPLETE POETICAL WORKS, in 7 vols. 12mo.
+
+HEMANS' MEMOIRS, by her Sister, 1 vol. 12mo.
+
+HOLTHOUSE'S LAW DICTIONARY, by Penington, 1 vol. large 12mo, law
+sheep.
+
+HILLIARD ON REAL ESTATE, new and much Improved Edition, 2 large vols.
+8vo, law sheep.
+
+HILL ON TRUSTEES, by Troubat, 1 large vol. 8vo, law sheep.
+
+INGERSOLL'S HISTORY OF THE LATE WAR, 1 vol. 8vo.
+
+IRVING'S ROCKY MOUNTAINS, 2 vols. 12mo, cloth.
+
+JOHNSON'S DICTIONARY OF GARDENING, by Landreth, 1 vol. large royal
+12mo, 650 pages, many cuts.
+
+KNAPP'S TECHNOLOGY, OR CHEMISTRY APPLIED TO THE ARTS AND TO
+MANUFACTURES. Translated by Ronalds, Edited by Johnson. Vol. I.,
+with numerous illustrations.
+
+KEBLE'S CHRISTIAN YEAR, in 32mo, extra cloth. Illuminated title.
+
+KIRBY AND SPENCE'S ENTOMOLOGY, 1 large 8vo vol. with plates, plain or
+colored.
+
+LOVER'S IRISH STORIES, 1 vol. royal 12mo, with cuts, extra cloth.
+
+ Same work, paper, price 50 cents.
+
+LOVER'S RORY O'MORE, 1 vol. royal 12mo, with cuts, extra cloth.
+
+ Same work, paper, price 50 cents.
+
+ Same work, 8vo, price 25 cents.
+
+LOVER'S SONGS AND BALLADS, 12mo, paper, 25 cents.
+
+LIGHTS, SHADOWS, &c., of Whigs and Tories, 1 vol. 12mo.
+
+LANGUAGE OF FLOWERS, eighth edition, 1 vol. 18mo, colored plates,
+crimson cloth, gilt.
+
+LANDRETH'S RURAL REGISTER, for 1848, royal 12mo, many cuts, price 15
+cents. Copies for 1847 still on sale.
+
+LOVES OF THE POETS, by Mrs. Jamieson, 12mo.
+
+MARSTON, OR THE SOLDIER AND STATESMAN, by Croly, 8vo, sewed, 50 cents.
+
+MACKINTOSH'S DISSERTATION ON ETHICAL PHILOSOPHY, 1 vol. 8vo, cloth.
+
+MOORE'S HISTORY OF IRELAND, in 2 vols. 8vo, cloth. Second volume sold
+separate.
+
+MARTIN CHUZZLEWIT, by "Boz," cloth or paper.
+
+MULLER'S PHYSICS AND METEOROLOGY, 1 vol. large 8vo, 2 colored plates,
+and 550 wood-cuts.
+
+MILLWRIGHT'S AND MILLER'S GUIDE, by Oliver Evans, in 1 vol. 8vo,
+sheep, many plates.
+
+METCALF ON CALORIC, 1 vol. 8vo, (at press).
+
+MILL'S HISTORY OF THE CRUSADES, AND CHIVALRY, in one octavo volume.
+
+MILL'S SPORTSMAN'S LIBRARY, 1 vol. 12mo, extra cloth.
+
+NARRATIVE OF THE UNITED STATES' EXPLORING EXPEDITION, by Captain
+Charles Wilkes, U. S. N., in 6 vols. 4to, $60; or 6 vols. imperial
+8vo, $25, with very Numerous and Beautiful Illustrations, on wood,
+copper, and steel; or 5 vols. 8vo, $10, with over three hundred
+wood-cuts and maps.
+
+NIEBUHR'S HISTORY OF ROME, complete, 2 large vols. 8vo.
+
+NICHOLAS NICKLEBY, by "Boz," cloth or paper.
+
+OLIVER TWIST, by "Boz," cloth or paper.
+
+PICCIOLA,--The Prisoner of Fenestrella, illustrated edition, with
+cuts, royal 12mo, beautiful crimson cloth.
+
+ Same work, fancy paper, price 50 cents.
+
+PHILOSOPHY IN SPORT MADE SCIENCE IN EARNEST, 1 vol. 18mo, neat crimson
+cloth, with cuts.
+
+POPULAR VEGETABLE PHYSIOLOGY, by Carpenter, 1 vol. 12mo, many cuts.
+
+PICKWICK CLUB, by "Boz," cloth or paper.
+
+RUSH'S COURT OF LONDON, 1 vol. 8vo.
+
+RANKE'S HISTORY OF THE POPES OF ROME, 1 vol. 8vo, cloth.
+
+RANKE'S HISTORY OF THE REFORMATION IN GERMANY, to be complete in 1
+vol. 8vo.
+
+RANKE'S HISTORY OF THE OTTOMAN AND SPANISH EMPIRES, 8vo, price 50
+cents.
+
+ROGERS' POEMS, a splendid edition, Illustrated, imperial 8vo.
+
+ROGET'S OUTLINES OF PHYSIOLOGY, 1 vol. 8vo.
+
+ROSCOE'S LIVES OF THE KINGS OF ENGLAND, a 12mo Series to match Miss
+Strickland's Queens.
+
+STRICKLAND'S LIVES OF THE QUEENS OF ENGLAND, 12 vols. 12mo, cloth or
+paper. (This work is now complete.)
+
+ Same work, crown 8vo, extra cloth, two vols. in one; large
+ type, and fine paper, beautiful crimson cloth.
+
+SELECT WORKS OF TOBIAS SMOLLETT, cloth or paper.
+
+SIMPSON'S OVERLAND JOURNEY AROUND THE WORLD, crown 8vo, extra cloth.
+
+ Same work, 2 parts, paper, price $1 50.
+
+SIBORNE'S WATERLOO CAMPAIGN, with maps, 1 vol. large 8vo.
+
+SCHMITZ AND ZUMPT'S CLASSICAL SERIES FOR SCHOOLS, in neat 18mo
+volumes, in cloth.
+
+STABLE TALK AND TABLE TALK, FOR SPORTSMEN, 1 volume, 12mo.
+
+SPENCE ON THE JURISDICTION OF THE COURT OF CHANCERY, vol. I., large
+8vo, law sheep.
+
+ Vol. II., embracing the Practice, (nearly ready).
+
+SMALL BOOKS ON GREAT SUBJECTS; a neat 18mo series, price 25 cents
+each:--
+
+ No. 1. "PHILOSOPHICAL THEORIES AND PHILOSOPHICAL EXPERIENCE."
+
+ No. 2. "ON THE CONNECTION BETWEEN PHYSIOLOGY AND INTELLECTUAL
+ SCIENCE."
+
+ No. 3. "ON MAN'S POWER OVER HIMSELF TO PREVENT OR CONTROL
+ INSANITY."
+
+ No. 4. "AN INTRODUCTION TO PRACTICAL ORGANIC CHEMISTRY."
+
+ No. 5. "A BRIEF VIEW OF GREEK PHILOSOPHY UP TO THE AGE OF
+ PERICLES."
+
+ No. 6. "A BRIEF VIEW OF GREEK PHILOSOPHY FROM THE AGE OF
+ SOCRATES TO THE COMING OF CHRIST."
+
+ No. 7. "CHRISTIAN DOCTRINE AND PRACTICE IN THE SECOND CENTURY."
+
+ No. 8. "AN EXPOSITION OF VULGAR AND COMMON ERRORS, ADAPTED TO
+ THE YEAR OF GRACE 1845."
+
+ No. 9. "AN INTRODUCTION TO VEGETABLE PHYSIOLOGY, WITH
+ REFERENCES TO THE WORKS OF DE CANDOLLE, LINDLEY, &c."
+
+ No. 10. "ON THE PRINCIPLES OF CRIMINAL LAW."
+
+ No. 11. "CHRISTIAN SECTS IN THE NINETEENTH CENTURY."
+
+ No. 12. "PRINCIPLES OF GRAMMAR," &c.
+
+ Or the whole done up in three volumes, extra cloth.
+
+TAYLOR'S MEDICAL JURISPRUDENCE, Edited with respect to American
+Practice, by Griffith, 1 vol. 8vo.
+
+TAYLOR'S TOXICOLOGY, by Griffith, 1 vol. 8vo, (nearly ready).
+
+TRAILL'S OUTLINES OF MEDICAL JURISPRUDENCE, 1 small vol. 8vo, cloth.
+
+TRIMMER'S GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY, 1 vol. 8vo, cloth, many cuts.
+
+THOMSON'S DOMESTIC MANAGEMENT OF THE SICK ROOM, 1 vol. 12mo, extra
+cloth.
+
+TOKEAH, by Sealsfield, price 25 cents.
+
+VIRGILII CARMINA, 1 neat 18mo vol., extra cloth, being vol. II. of
+Schmitz and Zumpt's Classical Series.
+
+WALPOLE'S LETTERS, in 4 large vols. 8vo, extra cloth.
+
+WALPOLE'S NEW LETTERS TO SIR HORACE MANN, 2 vols. 8vo.
+
+WALPOLE'S MEMOIRS OF GEORGE THE THIRD, 2 vols. 8vo.
+
+WHITE'S UNIVERSAL HISTORY, a new and Improved work for Schools,
+Colleges, &c., with Questions by Professor Hart, in 1 vol. large 12mo,
+extra cloth, or half bound.
+
+WEISBACH'S PRINCIPLES OF THE MECHANICS OF MACHINERY AND ENGINEERING,
+vol. I, with five hundred cuts.
+
+WILLIAM THE CONQUEROR, Life of, by Roscoe, 1 vol. 12mo, extra cloth or
+fancy paper.
+
+WHEATON'S INTERNATIONAL LAW, 1 vol. large 8vo, law sheep, or extra
+cloth, third edition, much improved.
+
+WRAXALL'S POSTHUMOUS MEMOIRS, 1 vol. 8vo, extra cloth.
+
+WRAXALL'S HISTORICAL MEMOIRS, 1 vol. 8vo, do. do.
+
+YOUATT ON THE HORSE, &c., by Skinner, 1 vol. 8vo, many cuts.
+
+YOUATT ON THE DOG, with plates, 1 vol. crown 8vo, beautiful crimson
+cloth.
+
+YOUATT ON THE PIG, 1 vol. 12mo, extra cloth, with cuts.
+
+ Same work in paper, price 50 cents.
+
+ Together with numerous works in all departments of Medical
+ Science, Catalogues of which can be had on application.
+
+
+
+
+ * * * * *
+
+THE AMERICAN ENCYCLOPÆDIA.
+
+BROUGHT UP TO 1847.
+
+ THE ENCYCLOPÆDIA AMERICANA:
+
+ A POPULAR DICTIONARY
+ OF ARTS, SCIENCES, LITERATURE, HISTORY, POLITICS, AND BIOGRAPHY,
+
+ IN FOURTEEN LARGE OCTAVO VOLUMES OF OVER SIX HUNDRED DOUBLE
+ COLUMNED PAGES EACH.
+
+ For sale very low, in various styles of binding.
+
+ Some years having elapsed since the original thirteen volumes
+ of the ENCYCLOPÆDIA AMERICANA were published, to bring it up
+ to the present day, with the history of that period, at the
+ request of numerous subscribers, the publishers have just
+ issued a
+
+ SUPPLEMENTARY VOLUME (THE FOURTEENTH),
+ BRINGING THE WORK UP TO THE YEAR 1847.
+
+ EDITED BY HENRY VETHAKE, LL.D.
+
+ Vice-Provost and Professor of Mathematics in the University
+ of Pennsylvania, Author of "A Treatise on Political Economy."
+
+ In one large octavo volume of over 650 double columned pages.
+
+ The numerous subscribers who have been waiting the completion
+ of this volume can now perfect their sets, and all who want
+
+ A REGISTER OF THE EVENTS OF THE LAST FIFTEEN YEARS, FOR THE
+ WHOLE WORLD,
+
+ can obtain this volume separately: price Two Dollars uncut in
+ cloth, or Two Dollars and Fifty cents in leather, to match
+ the styles in which the publishers have been selling sets.
+
+ Subscribers in the large cities can be supplied on
+ application at any of the principal bookstores; and persons
+ residing in the country can have their sets matched by
+ sending a volume in charge of friends visiting the city.
+
+"This volume is worth owning by itself, as a most convenient and
+reliable compend of recent History, Biography, Statistics, &c., &c.
+The entire work forms the cheapest and probably now the most desirable
+Encyclopædia published for popular use."--_New York Tribune._
+
+"The Conversations Lexicon (Encyclopædia Americana) has become a
+household book in all the intelligent families in America, and is
+undoubtedly the best depository of biographical, historical,
+geographical, and political information of that kind which
+discriminating readers require."--_Silliman's Journal._
+
+"This volume of the Encyclopædia is a Westminster Abbey of American
+reputation. What names are on the roll since 1833!"--_N. Y. Literary
+World._
+
+"The work to which this volume forms a supplement, is one of the most
+important contributions that has ever been made to the literature of
+our country. Besides condensing into a comparatively narrow compass,
+the substance of larger works of the same kind which had preceded it,
+it contains a vast amount of information that is not elsewhere to be
+found, and is distinguished, not less for its admirable arrangement,
+than for the variety of subjects of which it treats. The present
+volume, which is edited by one of the most distinguished scholars of
+our country, is worthy to follow in the train of those which have
+preceded it. It is a remarkably felicitous condensation of the more
+recent improvements in science and the arts, besides forming a very
+important addition to the department of Biography, the general
+progress of society, &c., &c."--_Albany Argus._
+
+ * * * * *
+
+CAMPBELL'S LORD CHANCELLORS.
+
+NOW COMPLETE.
+
+ LIVES OF THE LORD CHANCELLORS AND KEEPERS OF THE GREAT SEAL
+ OF ENGLAND.
+
+ FROM THE EARLIEST TIMES TO THE REIGN OF KING GEORGE IV.,
+
+ BY JOHN LORD CAMPBELL, A.M., F.R.S.E.
+
+ Now complete in seven handsome crown octavo volumes.
+
+ _Bringing the work to the death of Lord Eldon, 1838._
+
+"The volumes teem with exciting incidents, abound in portraits,
+sketches, and anecdotes, and are at once interesting and instructive.
+The work is not only historical and biographical, but it is
+anecdotical and philosophical. Many of the chapters embody thrilling
+incidents, while as a whole, the publication may be regarded as of a
+high intellectual order."--_Inquirer._
+
+ * * * * *
+
+MURRAY'S ENCYCLOPÆDIA OF GEOGRAPHY.
+
+ THE ENCYCLOPÆDIA OF GEOGRAPHY,
+
+ COMPRISING
+
+ A COMPLETE DESCRIPTION OF THE EARTH, PHYSICAL, STATISTICAL,
+ CIVIL, AND POLITICAL.
+
+ EXHIBITING
+
+ ITS RELATION TO THE HEAVENLY BODIES, ITS PHYSICAL STRUCTURE,
+ THE NATURAL HISTORY OF EACH COUNTRY, AND THE INDUSTRY,
+ COMMERCE, POLITICAL INSTITUTIONS, AND CIVIL AND SOCIAL STATE
+ OF ALL NATIONS.
+
+ BY HUGH MURRAY, F.R.S.E., &c.
+
+ Assisted in Botany by Professor HOOKER--Zoology, &c., by W.
+ W. SWAINSON--Astronomy &c., by Professor WALLACE--Geology,
+ &c., by Professor JAMESON.
+
+ REVISED, WITH ADDITIONS,
+
+ BY THOMAS G. BRADFORD.
+
+ THE WHOLE BROUGHT UP, BY A SUPPLEMENT, TO 1843.
+
+ _In three large octavo volumes,_
+
+ VARIOUS STYLES OF BINDING.
+
+This great work, furnished at a remarkably cheap rate, contains
+about NINETEEN HUNDRED LARGE IMPERIAL PAGES, and is illustrated by
+EIGHTY-TWO SMALL MAPS, and a colored MAP OF THE UNITED STATES, after
+Tanner's, together with about ELEVEN HUNDRED WOOD-CUTS, executed in
+the best style.
+
+
+
+
+ * * * * *
+
+SCHOOL BOOKS.
+
+
+BIRD'S NATURAL PHILOSOPHY.
+
+NOW READY.
+
+ ELEMENTS OF NATURAL PHILOSOPHY,
+
+ BEING AN EXPERIMENTAL INTRODUCTION TO THE PHYSICAL SCIENCES.
+
+ ILLUSTRATED WITH OVER THREE HUNDRED WOOD-CUTS.
+
+ BY GOLDING BIRD, M.D.,
+
+ Assistant Physician to Guy's Hospital.
+
+ FROM THE THIRD LONDON EDITION.
+
+ In one neat volume.
+
+"By the appearance of Dr. Bird's work, the student has now all that he
+can desire in one neat, concise, and well-digested volume. The
+elements of natural philosophy are explained in very simple language,
+and illustrated by numerous wood-cuts."--_Medical Gazette._
+
+"A volume of useful and beautiful instruction for the
+young."--_Literary Gazette._
+
+"We should like to know that Dr. Bird's book was associated with every
+boys' and girls' school throughout the kingdom."--_Medical Gazette._
+
+"This work marks an advance which has long been wanting in our system
+of instruction. Mr. Bird has succeeded in producing an elementary work
+of great merit."--_Athenæum._
+
+ * * * * *
+
+HERSCHELL'S ASTRONOMY.
+
+ A TREATISE ON ASTRONOMY,
+ BY SIR JOHN F. W. HERSCHELL, F. R. S., &c.
+
+ WITH NUMEROUS PLATES AND WOOD-CUTS.
+
+ A NEW EDITION, WITH A PREFACE AND A SERIES OF QUESTIONS,
+ BY S. C. WALKER.
+
+ In one volume, 12mo.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+BREWSTER'S OPTICS.
+
+ ELEMENTS OF OPTICS,
+ BY SIR DAVID BREWSTER.
+
+ WITH NOTES AND ADDITIONS, BY A. D. BACHE, LL.D.
+ Superintendent of the Coast Survey, &c.
+
+ In one volume, 12mo., with numerous wood-cuts.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+MULLER'S PHYSICS AND METEOROLOGY.
+
+NOW READY.
+
+ PRINCIPLES OF PHYSICS AND METEOROLOGY,
+
+ BY J. MULLER,
+
+ Professor of Physics at the University of Freiburg.
+
+ ILLUSTRATED WITH NEARLY FIVE HUNDRED AND FIFTY ENGRAVINGS ON
+ WOOD, AND TWO COLORED PLATES.
+
+ In one octavo volume.
+
+ TRANSLATOR'S PREFACE.
+
+ In laying the following pages before the public, it seems
+ necessary to state that the design of them is to render more
+ easily accessible a greater portion of the general principles
+ of Physics and Meteorology than is usually to be obtained,
+ without the sacrifice of a greater amount of time and labour
+ than most persons can afford, or are willing to make. The
+ subjects of which this volume treats are very numerous--more
+ numerous, in fact, than at first sight it would seem possible
+ to embrace in so small a compass. The Author has, however, by
+ a system of the most judicious selection and condensation,
+ been enabled to introduce all the most important facts and
+ theories relating to Statics, Hydrostatics, Dynamics,
+ Hydrodynamics, Pneumatics, the Laws of the Motions of Waves
+ in general, Sound, the Theory of Musical Notes, the Voice and
+ Hearing, Geometrical and Physical Optics, Magnetism,
+ Electricity and Galvanism, in all their subdivisions, Heat
+ and Meteorology, within the space of an ordinary middle-sized
+ volume. Of the manner in which the translator has executed
+ his task, it behoves him to say nothing; he has attempted
+ nothing more than a plain, and nearly literal version of the
+ original. He cannot, however, conclude this brief
+ introductory note without directing the attention of his
+ Readers to the splendid manner in which the Publishers have
+ illustrated this volume.
+
+ _August, 1847._
+
+"The Physics of Muller is a work, superb, complete, unique: the
+greatest want known to English Science could not have been better
+supplied. The work is of surpassing interest. The value of this
+contribution to the scientific records of this country may be duly
+estimated by the fact, that the cost of the original drawings and
+engravings alone has exceeded the sum of 2000£."--_Lancet_, March,
+1847.
+
+"The plan adopted by Muller is simple; it reminds us of the excellent
+and popular treatise published many years since by Dr. Arnott, but it
+takes a much wider range of subjects. Like it, all the necessary
+explanations are given in clear and concise language, without more
+than an occasional reference to mathematics; and the treatise is most
+abundantly illustrated with well-executed wood engravings.
+
+"The author has actually contrived to comprise in about five hundred
+pages, including the space occupied by illustrations, Mechanics, the
+Laws of Motion, Acoustics, Light, Magnetism, Electricity, Galvanism,
+Electro-Magnetism, Heat, and Meteorology.
+
+"Medical practitioners and students, even if they have the means to
+procure, have certainly not the time to study an elaborate treatise in
+every branch of science: and the question therefore is, simply,
+whether they are to remain wholly ignorant of such subjects, or to
+make a profitable use of the labours of those who have the happy art
+of saying or suggesting much in a small space.
+
+"From our examination of this volume, we do not hesitate to recommend
+it to our readers as a useful book on a most interesting branch of
+science. We may remark, that the translation is so well executed, that
+we think the translator is doing himself injustice by concealing his
+name."--_London Medical Gazette_, August, 1847.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+GRAHAM'S CHEMISTRY.
+
+NEARLY READY.
+
+ ELEMENTS OF CHEMISTRY,
+ INCLUDING
+ THE APPLICATIONS OF THE SCIENCE IN THE ARTS.
+
+ BY T. GRAHAM, F. R. S., &c.
+
+ SECOND AMERICAN, FROM THE SECOND LONDON EDITION.
+ EDITED AND REVISED BY ROBERT BRIDGES, M.D.,
+
+ Professor of Chemistry in the Franklin Medical College,
+ Philadelphia.
+
+ In one large octavo volume, with numerous wood-engravings.
+
+This edition will be found enlarged and improved, so as to be fully brought
+up to a level with the science of the day.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+ARNOTT'S PHYSICS.
+
+ ELEMENTS OF PHYSICS; OR, NATURAL PHILOSOPHY,
+ GENERAL AND MEDICAL.
+
+ WRITTEN FOR UNIVERSAL USE, IN PLAIN, OR NON-TECHNICAL
+ LANGUAGE.
+
+ BY NIELL ARNOTT, M.D.
+ A NEW EDITION, BY ISAAC HAYS, M.D.
+
+ Complete in one octavo volume, with nearly two hundred
+ wood-cuts.
+
+This standard work has been long and favourably known as one of the
+best popular expositions of the interesting science it treats of. It
+is extensively used in many of the first seminaries.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+ELEMENTARY CHEMISTRY, THEORETICAL AND PRACTICAL,
+
+ BY GEORGE FOWNES, Ph.D.,
+ Chemical Lecturer in the Middlesex Hospital Medical School,
+ &c., &c.
+
+ WITH NUMEROUS ILLUSTRATIONS.
+
+ EDITED, WITH ADDITIONS,
+ BY ROBERT BRIDGES, M.D.,
+ Professor of General and Pharmaceutical Chemistry in the
+ Philadelphia College of Pharmacy, &c., &c.
+
+ SECOND AMERICAN EDITION.
+
+ In one large duodecimo volume, sheep, or extra cloth, with
+ nearly two hundred wood-cuts.
+
+The character of this work is such as to recommend it to all colleges
+and academies in want of a text-book. It is fully brought up to the
+day, containing all the late views and discoveries that have so
+entirely changed the face of the science, and it is completely
+illustrated with very numerous wood engravings, explanatory of all
+the different processes and forms of apparatus. Though strictly
+scientific, it is written with great clearness and simplicity of
+style, rendering it easy to be comprehended by those who are
+commencing the study.
+
+It may be had well bound in leather, or neatly done up in strong
+cloth. Its low price places it within the reach of all.
+
+ _Extract of a letter from Professor Millington, of William
+ and Mary College, Va._
+
+ "I have perused the book with much pleasure, and find it a
+ most admirable work; and, to my mind, such a one as is just
+ now much needed in schools and colleges. * * * All the books
+ I have met with on chemistry are either too puerile or too
+ erudite, and I confess Dr. Fownes' book seems to be the
+ happiest medium I have seen, and admirably suited to fill up
+ the hiatus."
+
+Though this work has been so recently published, it has already been
+adopted as a text-book by a large number of the higher schools and
+colleges throughout the country, and many of the Medical Institutions.
+As a work for the upper classes in academies and the junior students
+of colleges, there has been but one opinion expressed concerning it,
+and it may now be considered as THE TEXT-BOOK for the Chemical
+Student.
+
+
+
+
+ * * * * *
+
+POPULAR SCIENCE.
+
+
+KIRBY AND SPENCE'S ENTOMOLOGY, FOR POPULAR USE.
+
+ AN INTRODUCTION TO ENTOMOLOGY,
+
+ OR, ELEMENTS OF THE NATURAL HISTORY OF INSECTS; COMPRISING
+ AN ACCOUNT OF NOXIOUS AND USEFUL INSECTS, OF THEIR
+ METAMORPHOSES, FOOD, STRATAGEMS, HABITATIONS, SOCIETIES,
+ MOTIONS, NOISES, HYBERNATION, INSTINCT, &c., &c.
+
+ With Plates, Plain or Colored.
+
+ BY W. KIRBY, M.A., F.R.S., AND W. SPENCE, ESQ., F.R.S.
+
+ FROM THE SIXTH LONDON EDITION, WHICH WAS CORRECTED AND MUCH
+ ENLARGED.
+
+ In one large octavo volume, extra cloth.
+
+"We have been greatly interested in running over the pages of this
+treatise. There is scarcely, in the wide range of natural science, a
+more interesting or instructive study than that of insects, or one
+that is calculated to excite more curiosity or wonder.
+
+"The popular form of letters is adopted by the authors in imparting a
+knowledge of the subject, which renders the work peculiarly fitted for
+our district school libraries, which are open to all ages and
+classes."--_Hunt's Merchants' Magazine._
+
+ * * * * *
+
+JOHNSON AND LANDRETH ON FRUIT, KITCHEN, AND FLOWER GARDENING.
+
+ A DICTIONARY OF MODERN GARDENING,
+
+ BY GEORGE WILLIAM JOHNSON, ESQ.
+ Author of the "Principles of Practical Gardening," "The
+ Gardener's Almanac," &c.
+
+ WITH ONE HUNDRED AND EIGHTY WOOD-CUTS.
+
+ EDITED, WITH NUMEROUS ADDITIONS, BY DAVID LANDRETH, OF
+ PHILADELPHIA.
+
+ In one large royal duodecimo volume, extra cloth, of nearly
+ Six Hundred and Fifty double columned Pages.
+
+This edition has been greatly altered from the original. Many articles
+of little interest to Americans have been curtailed or wholly omitted,
+and much new matter, with numerous illustrations, added, especially
+with respect to the varieties of fruit which experience has shown to
+be peculiarly adapted to our climate. Still, the editor admits that he
+has only followed in the path so admirably marked out by Mr. Johnson,
+to whom the chief merit of the work belongs. It has been an object
+with the editor and publishers to increase its popular character,
+thereby adapting it to the larger class of horticultural readers in
+this country, and they trust it will prove what they have desired it
+to be, an Encyclopædia of Gardening, if not of Rural Affairs, so
+condensed and at such a price as to be within reach of nearly all whom
+those subjects interest.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+GRAHAME'S COLONIAL HISTORY.
+
+ HISTORY OF THE UNITED STATES.
+
+ FROM THE PLANTATION OF THE BRITISH COLONIES TILL THEIR
+ ASSUMPTION OF INDEPENDENCE.
+
+ SECOND AMERICAN EDITION, ENLARGED AND AMENDED, WITH A MEMOIR
+ BY PRESIDENT QUINCY.
+
+ IN TWO LARGE OCTAVO VOLUMES, EXTRA CLOTH, WITH A PORTRAIT.
+
+This work having assumed the position of a standard history of this
+country, the publishers have been induced to issue an edition in
+smaller size and at a less cost, that its circulation may be
+commensurate with its merits. It is now considered as the most
+impartial and trustworthy history that has yet appeared.
+
+A few copies of the edition in four volumes, on extra fine thick
+paper, price eight dollars, may still be had by gentlemen desirous
+of procuring a beautiful work for their libraries.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+ANSTED'S ANCIENT WORLD.
+
+JUST ISSUED.
+
+ THE ANCIENT WORLD, OR, PICTURESQUE SKETCHES OF CREATION,
+
+ BY D. T. ANSTED, M. A., F.R.S, F.G.S., &c.
+
+ PROFESSOR OF GEOLOGY, IN KING'S COLLEGE, LONDON.
+
+ In one very neat volume, fine extra cloth, with about One
+ Hundred and Fifty Illustrations.
+
+The object of this work is to present to the general reader the chief
+results of Geological investigation in a simple and comprehensive
+manner. The author has avoided all minute details of geological
+formations and particular observations, and has endeavoured as far as
+possible to present striking views of the wonderful results of the
+science, divested of its mere technicalities. The work is printed in a
+handsome manner, with numerous illustrations, and forms a neat volume
+for the centre table.
+
+"As a resume of what is at present known on the subject of fossil
+remains, it is worthy to be a companion to the author's 'Descriptive
+Geology,' a work of which we have spoken in the highest terms. This
+volume is illustrated in the style of all Van Voorst's Natural History
+works, and that is sufficient recommendation. Our extracts will convey
+a notion of the style of the work, which is, like all that Professor
+Ansted has written, clear and pointed.--_Athenæum._
+
+ * * * * *
+
+CHEMISTRY OF THE FOUR SEASONS,
+
+SPRING, SUMMER, AUTUMN, AND WINTER.
+
+ AN ESSAY, PRINCIPALLY CONCERNING NATURAL PHENOMENA, ADMITTING
+ OF INTERPRETATION BY CHEMICAL SCIENCE, AND ILLUSTRATING
+ PASSAGES OF SCRIPTURE.
+
+ BY THOMAS GRIFFITHS,
+
+ Professor of Chemistry in the Medical College of St.
+ Bartholomew's Hospital, &c.
+
+ In one large royal 12mo. volume, with many Wood-Cuts, extra
+ cloth.
+
+"Chemistry is assuredly one of the most useful and interesting of the
+natural sciences. Chemical changes meet us at every step, and during
+every season, the winds and the rain, the heat and the frosts, each
+have their peculiar and appropriate phenomena. And those who have
+hitherto remained insensible to these changes and unmoved amid such
+remarkable, and often startling results, will lose their apathy upon
+reading the Chemistry of the 'Four Seasons,' and be prepared to enjoy
+the highest intellectual pleasures. Conceived in a happy spirit, and
+written with taste and elegance, the essay of Mr. Griffiths cannot
+fail to receive the admiration of cultivated minds; and those who have
+looked less carefully into nature's beauties, will find themselves led
+on step by step, until they realize a new intellectual being. Such
+works, we believe, exert a happy influence over society, and hence we
+hope that the present one may be extensively read."--_The Western
+Lancet._
+
+ * * * * *
+
+PHILOSOPHY IN SPORT, MADE SCIENCE IN EARNEST;
+
+ BEING AN ATTEMPT TO ILLUSTRATE THE FIRST PRINCIPLES OF
+ NATURAL PHILOSOPHY, BY THE AID OF THE POPULAR TOYS AND SPORTS
+ OF YOUTH.
+
+ FROM THE SIXTH AND GREATLY IMPROVED LONDON EDITION.
+
+ In one very neat royal 18mo. volume, with nearly one hundred
+ illustrations on wood. Fine extra crimson cloth.
+
+"Messrs. Lea & Blanchard have issued, in a beautiful manner, a
+handsome book, called 'Philosophy in Sport, made Science in Earnest.'
+This is an admirable attempt to illustrate the first principles of
+Natural Philosophy, by the aid of the popular toys and sports of
+youth. Useful information is conveyed in an easy, graceful, yet
+dignified manner, and rendered easy to the simplest understanding. The
+book is an admirable one, and must meet with universal favour."--_N.
+Y. Evening Mirror._
+
+ * * * * *
+
+ENDLESS AMUSEMENT.
+
+JUST ISSUED.
+
+ ENDLESS AMUSEMENT,
+
+ A COLLECTION OF
+ NEARLY FOUR HUNDRED ENTERTAINING EXPERIMENTS IN
+ VARIOUS BRANCHES OF SCIENCE,
+
+ INCLUDING
+
+ ACOUSTICS, ARITHMETIC, CHEMISTRY, ELECTRICITY, HYDRAULICS,
+ HYDROSTATICS, MAGNETISM, MECHANICS, OPTICS, WONDERS OF THE
+ AIR PUMP, ALL THE POPULAR TRICKS AND CHANGES OF THE CARDS,
+ &c., &c.
+
+ TO WHICH IS ADDED,
+
+ A COMPLETE SYSTEM OF PYROTECHNY,
+ OR THE ART OF MAKING FIRE-WORKS:
+
+ THE WHOLE SO CLEARLY EXPLAINED AS TO BE WITHIN REACH OF THE
+ MOST LIMITED CAPACITY.
+
+ WITH ILLUSTRATIONS.
+ FROM THE SEVENTH LONDON EDITION.
+
+ In one neat royal 18mo. volume, fine extra crimson cloth.
+
+"It contains everything that can please the grave or the gay. It is
+'endless amusement,' and the publishers might have added, instruction.
+What a help to a dull gathering, or what an able adjunct to a
+children's party! It may be introduced to the scientific or to the
+family circle, and to each it will give instruction and pleasure. It
+is filled with illustrations. We shall give extracts from it
+occasionally."--_Lady's Book._
+
+
+
+
+ * * * * *
+
+SOMERVILLE'S PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY.
+
+ PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY.
+
+ BY MARY SOMERVILLE.
+ AUTHOR OF "CONNECTION OF THE PHYSICAL SCIENCES," ETC.
+
+ _In one neat royal 12mo. volume, extra cloth._
+
+ CONTENTS.--Geology--Form of the Great Continent--Highlands
+ of the Great Continent--Mountain Systems of the Great
+ Continent--Africa--American Continent--Low Lands of South
+ America--Central America--North America--Greenland--Australia--The
+ Ocean--Springs--European Rivers--African Rivers--Asiatic
+ Rivers--River Systems of North America--Rivers of South
+ America--Lakes--The Atmosphere--Vegetation--Vegetation
+ of the Great Continent--Flora of Tropical Asia--African
+ Flora--Australian Flora--American Vegetation--Distribution
+ of Insects--Distribution of Fishes--Distribution of
+ Reptiles--Distribution of Birds--Distribution of
+ Mammalia--Distribution, Conditions and Future Prospects
+ of the Human Race.
+
+While reading this work we could not help thinking how interesting, as
+well as useful, geography as a branch of education might be made in
+our schools. In many of them, however, this is not accomplished. It is
+to be hoped that this defect will be remedied; and that in all our
+educational institutions Geography will soon be taught in the proper
+way. Mrs. Somerville's work may, in this respect, be pointed to as a
+model.--_Tait's Edinburgh Magazine_, September, 1848.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+READINGS FOR THE YOUNG.
+
+ FROM THE WORKS OF SIR WALTER SCOTT.
+
+ _In two very handsome 18mo. volumes, with beautiful plates,
+ done up in crimson extra cloth._
+
+Messrs. Lea & Blanchard deserve the thanks of all the little people in
+the land for these delightful volumes, which are as agreeable to read as
+they are attractive in appearance.--_N. Y. Literary World._
+
+ * * * * *
+
+TALES AND STORIES FROM HISTORY.
+
+ BY AGNES STRICKLAND,
+ AUTHOR OF "LIVES OF THE QUEENS OF ENGLAND," ETC.
+
+ _In one handsome royal 18mo. volume, crimson extra cloth,
+ with illustrations._
+
+In these pretty tales from the legendary and authentic history of
+England and Continental Europe, Miss Strickland has hit a happy mean
+in presenting to the mind of youth, fact in its most fascinating, and
+fiction in its least objectionable garb. It is a little work which
+will be dog's eared, and pored over with absorbing interest by the
+school-boy.--_Balt. Patriot._
+
+ * * * * *
+
+The above works will be found admirable reading books for
+schools.--Lea & Blanchard also publish the following, which are
+suitable to advanced classes.
+
+ A POPULAR TREATISE ON VEGETABLE PHYSIOLOGY. By W. B.
+ Carpenter, M. D. In one royal 12mo. volume, with wood-cuts.
+
+ THE ANCIENT WORLD; OR, PICTURESQUE SKETCHES OF CREATION. By
+ D. T. Ansted, M. A., F. R. S., F. G. S. In one royal 12mo.
+ volume, with 150 wood-cuts.
+
+ THE CHEMISTRY OF THE FOUR SEASONS, SPRING, SUMMER, AUTUMN AND
+ WINTER; an Essay principally concerning Natural Phenomena
+ admitting of interpretation by Chemical Science, and
+ illustrating passages of Scripture. By Thomas Griffiths. In
+ one large royal 12mo. volume, with 60 wood-cuts.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+BOY'S TREASURY OF SPORTS.
+
+THE BOY'S TREASURY OF SPORTS, PASTIMES AND RECREATIONS.
+
+ WITH FOUR HUNDRED ILLUSTRATIONS.
+ BY SAMUEL WILLIAMS.
+
+ IS NOW READY.
+
+ In one very neat volume, bound in extra crimson cloth;
+ handsomely printed and illustrated with engravings in the
+ first style of art, and containing about six hundred and
+ fifty articles. A present for all seasons.
+
+PREFACE.
+
+This Illustrated Manual of "Sports, Pastimes, and Recreations," has
+been prepared with especial regard to the Health, Exercise, and
+Rational Enjoyment of the young readers to whom it is addressed.
+
+Every variety of commendable Recreation will be found in the following
+pages. First, you have the little Toys of the Nursery; the Tops and
+Marbles of the Play-ground; and the Balls of the Play-room, or the
+smooth Lawn.
+
+Then, you have a number of Pastimes that serve to gladden the
+fireside; to light up many faces right joyfully, and make the parlour
+re-echo with mirth.
+
+Next, come the Exercising Sports of the Field, the Green, and the
+Play-ground; followed by the noble and truly English game of Cricket.
+
+Gymnastics are next admitted; then, the delightful recreation of
+Swimming; and the healthful sport of Skating.
+
+Archery, once the pride of England, is then detailed; and very
+properly followed by Instructions in the graceful accomplishment of
+Fencing, and the manly and enlivening exercise of Riding.
+
+Angling, the pastime of childhood, boyhood, manhood, and old age, is
+next described; and by attention to the instructions here laid down,
+the lad with a stick and a string may soon become an expert Angler.
+
+Keeping Animals is a favourite pursuit of boyhood. Accordingly, we
+have described how to rear the Rabbit, the Squirrel, the Dormouse, the
+Guinea Pig, the Pigeon, and the Silkworm. A long chapter is adapted to
+the rearing of Song Birds; the several varieties of which, and their
+respective cages, are next described. And here we may hint, that
+kindness to Animals invariably denotes an excellent disposition: for,
+to pet a little creature one hour, and to treat it harshly the next,
+marks a capricious if not a cruel temper. Humanity is a jewel, which
+every boy should be proud to wear in his breast.
+
+We now approach the more sedate amusements--as Draughts and Chess: two
+of the noblest exercises of the ingenuity of the human mind. Dominoes
+and Bagatelle follow. With a knowledge of these four games, who would
+pass a dull hour in the dreariest day of winter; or who would sit idly
+by the fire?
+
+Amusements in Arithmetic, harmless Legerdemain, or sleight-of-hand,
+and Tricks with Cards, will delight many a family circle, when the
+business of the day is over, and the book is laid aside.
+
+Although the present volume is a book of amusements, Science has not
+been excluded from its pages. And why should it be? when Science is as
+entertaining as a fairy tale. The changes we read of in little
+nursery-books are not more amusing than the changes in Chemistry,
+Optics, Electricity, Magnetism, &c. By understanding these, you may
+almost become a little Magician.
+
+Toy Balloons and Paper Fireworks, (or Fireworks _without_ Fire,) come
+next. Then follow Instructions for Modelling in Card-Board; so that
+you may build for yourself a palace or a carriage, and, in short, make
+for yourself a little paper world.
+
+Puzzles and Paradoxes, Enigmas and Riddles, and Talking with the
+Fingers, next make up plenty of exercise for "Guess," and "Guess
+again." And as you have the "Keys" in your own hand, you may keep your
+friends in suspense, and make yourself as mysterious as the Sphynx.
+
+A chapter of Miscellanies--useful and amusing secrets--winds up the
+volume.
+
+The "Treasury" contains upwards of four hundred Engravings; so that it
+is not only a collection of "secrets worth knowing," but it is a book
+of pictures, as full of prints as a Christmas pudding is of plums.
+
+It may be as well to mention that the "Treasury" holds many new games
+that have never before been printed in a book of this kind. The old
+games have been described afresh. Thus it is, altogether, a new book.
+
+And now we take leave, wishing you many hours, and days, and weeks of
+enjoyment over these pages; and we hope that you may be as happy as
+this book is brimful of amusement.
+
+
+
+
+TRANSCRIBER'S NOTES
+
+
+1. Passages in italics are surrounded by _underscores_.
+
+2. Images have been moved from the middle of a paragraph to the
+closest paragraph break.
+
+3. The words coeli, manoeuvre and manoeuvres uses an "oe" ligature
+in the original.
+
+4. The fractional numbers are represented by a hyphen and a forward
+slash. For example, 3-1/2 represents three and a half.
+
+5. The following misprints have been corrected:
+ "umlimited" corrected to "unlimited" (page 67)
+ "immerged" corrected to "immersed" (page 124)
+ "shil ing" corrected to "shilling" (page 133)
+ "where-ever" corrected to "wherever" (page 148)
+ "sttll" corrected to "still" (page 149)
+ "mattrasses" corrected to "mattresses" (page 156)
+
+6. Other than the corrections listed above, printer's inconsistencies
+in spelling, punctuation, and hyphenation, have been retained.
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Endless Amusement, by Unknown
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK ENDLESS AMUSEMENT ***
+
+***** This file should be named 32492-8.txt or 32492-8.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+ http://www.gutenberg.org/3/2/4/9/32492/
+
+Produced by Chris Curnow and the Online Distributed
+Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This file was
+produced from images generously made available by The
+Internet Archive)
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+http://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
+paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works. See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+ the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+ you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is
+ owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+ has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+ Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments
+ must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+ prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+ returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+ sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+ address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+ the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+ you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+ does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+ License. You must require such a user to return or
+ destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+ and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+ Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+ money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+ electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+ of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+ distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at http://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+ Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+ Chief Executive and Director
+ gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit http://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+ http://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
diff --git a/32492-8.zip b/32492-8.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cd4763d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/32492-8.zip
Binary files differ
diff --git a/32492-h.zip b/32492-h.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b0f9a33
--- /dev/null
+++ b/32492-h.zip
Binary files differ
diff --git a/32492-h/32492-h.htm b/32492-h/32492-h.htm
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2402f60
--- /dev/null
+++ b/32492-h/32492-h.htm
@@ -0,0 +1,11235 @@
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN"
+ "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd">
+
+<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml">
+ <head>
+ <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=iso-8859-1" />
+ <title>
+ The Project Gutenberg eBook of Endless Amusement: A Collection of Nearly 400 Entertaining Experiments.
+ </title>
+ <style type="text/css">
+
+ p { margin-top: .75em;
+ text-align: justify;
+ margin-bottom: .75em;
+ }
+ h1,h2,h3,h4,h5,h6 {
+ text-align: center; /* all headings centered */
+ clear: both;
+ }
+ hr { width: 33%;
+ margin-top: 2em;
+ margin-bottom: 2em;
+ margin-left: auto;
+ margin-right: auto;
+ clear: both;
+ }
+
+ table {margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;}
+
+ body{margin-left: 10%;
+ margin-right: 10%;
+ }
+
+ .pagenum { /* uncomment the next line for invisible page numbers */
+ /* visibility: hidden; */
+ position: absolute;
+ left: 92%;
+ font-size: smaller;
+ text-align: right;
+ } /* page numbers */
+
+ .pagec { position: absolute; left: 85%; text-align: right;}
+
+ .blockquot{margin-left: 5%; margin-right: 10%;}
+ .bbox {border: solid 2px;}
+
+ .center {text-align: center;}
+ .smcap {font-variant: small-caps;}
+ .u {text-decoration: underline;}
+
+ .caption {font-weight: bold;}
+
+ .figcenter {margin: auto; text-align: center;}
+
+ .figleft {float: left; clear: left; margin-left: 0; margin-bottom: 0em; margin-top:
+ 0em; margin-right: 1em; padding: 0; text-align: center;}
+
+ .figright {float: right; clear: right; margin-left: 1em; margin-bottom: 0em;
+ margin-top: 0em; margin-right: 0; padding: 0; text-align: center;}
+
+ .footnote {margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%; font-size: 0.9em;}
+ .footnote .label {position: absolute; right: 84%; text-align: right;}
+ .fnanchor {vertical-align: super; font-size: .8em; text-decoration: none;}
+
+ </style>
+ </head>
+<body>
+
+
+<pre>
+
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of Endless Amusement, by Unknown
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: Endless Amusement
+ A Collection of Nearly 400 Entertaining Experiments
+
+Author: Unknown
+
+Release Date: May 23, 2010 [EBook #32492]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK ENDLESS AMUSEMENT ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Chris Curnow and the Online Distributed
+Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This file was
+produced from images generously made available by The
+Internet Archive)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+</pre>
+
+
+
+
+
+<h1>ENDLESS AMUSEMENT:</h1>
+
+<h3><small>A COLLECTION OF</small><br />
+<big>NEARLY 400 ENTERTAINING EXPERIMENTS</big></h3>
+
+<h3>IN VARIOUS BRANCHES OF SCIENCE;</h3>
+
+<h5>INCLUDING</h5>
+
+<h4>ACOUSTICS, ELECTRICITY, MAGNETISM,
+ARITHMETIC, HYDRAULICS, MECHANICS,
+CHEMISTRY, HYDROSTATICS, OPTICS;<br />
+
+WONDERS OF THE AIR-PUMP;</h4>
+
+<h4><small>ALL THE</small><br />
+<big>POPULAR TRICKS AND CHANGES OF THE CARDS,</big><br />
+&amp;c., &amp;c.</h4>
+
+<h4>TO WHICH IS ADDED,<br />
+<big>A COMPLETE SYSTEM OF PYROTECHNY;</big><br />
+<small>OR,</small><br />
+THE ART OF MAKING FIRE-WORKS.</h4>
+
+<h4>THE WHOLE SO CLEARLY EXPLAINED AS TO BE WITHIN THE<br />
+REACH OF THE MOST LIMITED CAPACITY.</h4>
+
+<h3>With Illustrations.</h3>
+
+<h4>FROM THE SEVENTH LONDON EDITION.</h4>
+
+<h3>PHILADELPHIA:<br />
+<big>LEA AND BLANCHARD.</big><br />
+1847.</h3>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class='pagenum'>[Pg iii]</span></p>
+<h2>CONTENTS.</h2>
+
+
+<div class="blockquot">
+<p>
+<span class='pagec'>Page</span><br />
+<br />
+Aces, the convertible <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_117">117</a></span><br />
+&AElig;olipiles <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_60">60</a></span><br />
+Aigrettes <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_185">185</a></span><br />
+Air-pump <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_77">77</a></span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">bottles broken by&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_77">77</a></span></span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">glass broken by&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_77">77</a></span></span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">hand fixed by&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_77">77</a></span></span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">water boiled by&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_78">78</a></span></span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">bubbles, vegetable&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_78">78</a></span></span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">electrified&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_98">98</a></span></span><br />
+Alarum <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_147">147</a></span><br />
+Alphabet, changes of, in square Yards <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_59">59</a></span><br />
+Apparition, armed <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_126">126</a></span><br />
+Atmosphere, to show the Pressure of <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_137">137</a></span><br />
+Aurora Borealis, electric <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_91">91</a></span><br />
+<br />
+Bacchus, animated <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_81">81</a></span><br />
+Ball, electrified <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_97">97</a></span><br />
+Ball, electric <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_99">99</a></span><br />
+Balloon, artificial <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_81">81</a></span><br />
+Balloon, electric <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_96">96</a></span><br />
+Balloon, Cases in Fire-works <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_184">184</a></span><br />
+Balloons, Paper, to construct <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_42">42</a></span><br />
+Balloons, in Fire-works, to load with Stars, Serpents, &amp;c. <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_184">184</a></span><br />
+Balls, dancing <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_93">93</a></span><br />
+Barley, the Awn of, an Hydrometer <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_157">157</a></span><br />
+Bell, magic <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_79">79</a></span><br />
+Bladder, exploded <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_80">80</a></span><br />
+Bladder, cemented <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_81">81</a></span><br />
+Blue, to change to White <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_35">35</a></span><br />
+Bodies, two inodorous, become pungent by Mixture <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_145">145</a></span><span class='pagenum'>[Pg iv]</span><br />
+Body, combustible, to ignite by reflection <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_57">57</a></span><br />
+Bottle, magic <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_48">48</a></span><br />
+Bottle, enchanted <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_59">59</a></span><br />
+Bronzing, the Art of <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_133">133</a></span><br />
+Bubble, exploding <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_13">13</a></span><br />
+Bubbles, a&euml;rial <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_78">78</a></span><br />
+Burning-glasses, account of two <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_32">32</a></span><br />
+Busts, talking <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_61">61</a></span><br />
+Butterflies, to take Impressions of on Paper <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_134">134</a></span><br />
+<br />
+Cameleon Spirit <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_23">23</a></span><br />
+Camera Obscura, to construct <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_16">16</a></span><br />
+Camphor, electrified <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_100">100</a></span><br />
+Candle lighted by electricity <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_84">84</a></span><br />
+Candle Bombs <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_84">84</a></span><br />
+Card, divining <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_107">107</a></span><br />
+Card, numerical <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_108">108</a></span><br />
+Card, hit upon by guess <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_109">109</a></span><br />
+Card, found by the Point of a Sword <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_109">109</a></span><br />
+Card, changed by Word of Command <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_109">109</a></span><br />
+Card, in the Ring <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_112">112</a></span><br />
+Card, in the Mirror <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_113">113</a></span><br />
+Card, in the Opera-glass <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_113">113</a></span><br />
+Card, discovered by the throw of a Die <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_115">115</a></span><br />
+Card, discovered under the Handkerchief <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_117">117</a></span><br />
+Card, to tell that a person has touched <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_117">117</a></span><br />
+Card, in the Pocket-book <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_118">118</a></span><br />
+Card, in the Egg <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_118">118</a></span><br />
+Card, discovered by the Touch or Smell <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_119">119</a></span><br />
+Cards, magnetic <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_71">71</a></span><br />
+Cards, Amusements with <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_101">101</a></span><br />
+Cards, Points on three, to name, &amp;c. <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_101">101</a></span><br />
+Cards, to tell how many taken from a Pack <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_102">102</a></span><br />
+Cards, to name several fixed on <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_104">104</a></span><br />
+Cards, to name the Rank of, drawn from a Piquet Pack <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_104">104</a></span><br />
+Cards, to tell the Numbers of any two <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_105">105</a></span><br />
+Cards, to tell the Numbers of any three <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_106">106</a></span><br />
+Cards, four confederate <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_108">108</a></span><br />
+Cards, to separate the two Colours of a Pack of, at one Cut <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_114">114</a></span><br />
+Cards, metamorphosed <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_114">114</a></span><br />
+Cards, Number of, told by their Weight <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_116">116</a></span><br />
+Cards, to change, that several persons have drawn from the Pack <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_116">116</a></span><br />
+<span class='pagenum'>[Pg v]</span>Cards, inverted <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_119">119</a></span><br />
+Cards, transmutable <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_119">119</a></span><br />
+Cards, convertible <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_120">120</a></span><br />
+Cascade, magical <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_50">50</a></span><br />
+Cascade, musical <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_148">148</a></span><br />
+Cascade, of fire, to represent <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_151">151</a></span><br />
+Cement, never-yielding <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_37">37</a></span><br />
+Changes on twelve Bells <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_58">58</a></span><br />
+Charcoal for Fire-works <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_164">164</a></span><br />
+Chase, magic <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_88">88</a></span><br />
+Coins, to take impressions of <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_44">44</a></span><br />
+Compositions for Fire-works, method of mixing <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_168">168</a></span><br />
+Concerto, solar <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_62">62</a></span><br />
+Cork heavier than Lead <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_81">81</a></span><br />
+Correspondence, secret <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_18">18</a>, <a href="#Page_25">25</a></span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">by music&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_20">20</a></span></span><br />
+Coruscations, artificial <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_136">136</a></span><br />
+Cotton electrified <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_92">92</a></span><br />
+Crackers, to make <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_169">169</a></span><br />
+Cylinder, illuminated <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_91">91</a></span><br />
+<br />
+Dance, magic <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_86">86</a></span><br />
+Dancer, hydraulic <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_49">49</a></span><br />
+Detonating works <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_190">190</a></span><br />
+Detonating Girdle <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_190">190</a></span><br />
+Detonating Balls <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_191">191</a></span><br />
+Detonating Tape <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_191">191</a></span><br />
+Detonating Cards <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_191">191</a></span><br />
+Dial, magnetic <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_71">71</a></span><br />
+Dodecahedron in Fire-works <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_187">187</a></span><br />
+Duplicates, ten <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_102">102</a></span><br />
+<br />
+Earthquake, artificial <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_22">22</a>, <a href="#Page_86">86</a>, <a href="#Page_187">187</a></span><br />
+Eclipse of the Sun, to observe <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_129">129</a></span><br />
+Egg, to form Figures on, in Relief <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_35">35</a></span><br />
+Eggs, white of, contains an Alkali <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_144">144</a></span><br />
+Electric effects of a Russian climate <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_30">30</a></span><br />
+Electricity, experiments in <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_83">83</a></span><br />
+Electricity, Resin lighted by <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_95">95</a></span><br />
+Electricity, Spirits ignited by <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_95">95</a></span><br />
+Eolian Harp, to make <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_137">137</a></span><br />
+Exhalations, subaqueous <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_137">137</a></span><br />
+Explosion, brilliant, under Water <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_54">54</a></span><br />
+<span class='pagenum'>[Pg vi]</span>Explosion, magical <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_86">86</a></span><br />
+Explosion, electric <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_98">98</a></span><br />
+<br />
+Feather, animated <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_83">83</a></span><br />
+Feathers heavier than Lead <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_79">79</a></span><br />
+Figures, two, one blows out, and the other re-lights a Candle <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_39">39</a></span><br />
+Fire produced by the mixture of two cold Liquids <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_13">13</a></span><br />
+Fire produced from Cane <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_136">136</a></span><br />
+Fire-pumps in Fire-works <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_186">186</a></span><br />
+Fire-works in miniature <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_27">27</a></span><br />
+Fire-works imitative <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_149">149</a></span><br />
+Fire-works Art of making <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_163">163</a></span><br />
+Fire-works aquatic <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_192">192</a></span><br />
+Flash of Lightning, to resemble on entering a Room <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_37">37</a></span><br />
+Flower, to produce the Appearance of, from its Ashes <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_149">149</a></span><br />
+Flowers, restored <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_26">26</a></span><br />
+Flowers, to diversify the Colours of <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_141">141</a></span><br />
+Fountain, fiery <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_44">44</a></span><br />
+Fountain, globular <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_48">48</a></span><br />
+Fountain, illuminated <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_51">51</a></span><br />
+Fountain, which acts by the Heat of the Sun <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_52">52</a></span><br />
+Fountain, magic <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_80">80</a></span><br />
+Fountain, electrical <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_87">87</a></span><br />
+Fountains, Chinese, in Fire-works <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_187">187</a></span><br />
+Fruit, withered, restored <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_78">78</a></span><br />
+Fulminating Powders <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_33">33</a></span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">more powerful&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_34">34</a></span></span><br />
+Fulminating Gold <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_40">40</a></span><br />
+Fulminating Mercury <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_54">54</a></span><br />
+<br />
+Gas Bubbles, exploding <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_160">160</a></span><br />
+Ghastly Appearance, to give to Persons in a Room <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_35">35</a></span><br />
+Glass, so to fill with Water that it cannot be removed without spilling the whole <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_38">38</a></span><br />
+Gold Chain, old, to make look like new <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_43">43</a></span><br />
+Gold to give Silver the Colour of <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_43">43</a></span><br />
+Guinea, penetrative <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_132">132</a></span><br />
+Gunpowder <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_165">165</a></span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">exploded by reflection&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_125">125</a></span></span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">Brimstone and Charcoal, to meal for Fire-works&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_165">165</a></span></span><br />
+<span class='pagenum'>[Pg vii]</span><br />
+Halo, artificial <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_80">80</a></span><br />
+Horn, to make Moulds of <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_134">134</a></span><br />
+Horn, to soften <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_134">134</a></span><br />
+Hour of the Day or Night told by a suspended Shilling <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_152">152</a></span><br />
+Hydrogen Gas, to procure <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_159">159</a></span><br />
+Hydrogen Gas, to fill a Bladder with <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_159">159</a></span><br />
+<br />
+Illuminations, artificial <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_22">22</a></span><br />
+Illuminations, chemical <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_36">36</a></span><br />
+Illusion, alternate <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_146">146</a></span><br />
+Incendiary, unconscious <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_88">88</a></span><br />
+Indromacus <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_103">103</a></span><br />
+Ink, invisible <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_23">23</a></span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">Gold, Silver, Yellow, Red, Green, Violet, and Grey&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_24">24</a>, <a href="#Page_25">25</a></span></span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">secret Correspondence by Means of&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_25">25</a></span></span><br />
+Ink, golden <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_41">41</a></span><br />
+Ink, white <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_42">42</a></span><br />
+Iron, transformed into Copper <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_36">36</a></span><br />
+Iron, transformed into Silver <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_36">36</a></span><br />
+Iron, melted in a Moment and run into Drops <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_37">37</a></span><br />
+Iron, or Steel, to soften <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_135">135</a></span><br />
+Ivory, to cast Figures in Imitation of <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_134">134</a></span><br />
+<br />
+Kings, the four inseparable <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_116">116</a></span><br />
+Kite, electric <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_87">87</a></span><br />
+<br />
+Lamp to burn twelve Months without replenishing <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_29">29</a></span><br />
+Lamp Chronometer <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_46">46</a></span><br />
+Landscape, artificial <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_66">66</a></span><br />
+Landscape, to draw correctly <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_67">67</a></span><br />
+Lead, metallic, produced from the Powder <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_141">141</a></span><br />
+Leech, a Prognosticator of Weather <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_157">157</a></span><br />
+Leyden Phial <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_94">94</a></span><br />
+Light, rays of <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_143">143</a></span><br />
+Light, refraction of <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_144">144</a></span><br />
+Light, travelling of <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_145">145</a></span><br />
+Lightning, artificial <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_14">14</a></span><br />
+Lightning, its wonderful Nature <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_144">144</a></span><br />
+Lightning, to guard against <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_153">153</a></span><br />
+Liquor that shines in the Dark <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_40">40</a></span><br />
+Liquor luminous <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_41">41</a></span><br />
+Luminaries, miraculous <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_89">89</a></span><br />
+<span class='pagenum'>[Pg viii]</span><br />
+Magic Lantern, Experiment with the <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_62">62</a></span><br />
+Magic Lantern, Glasses to paint <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_63">63</a></span><br />
+Magic Lantern, solar <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_60">60</a></span><br />
+Magnetism, Experiments in <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_70">70</a></span><br />
+Memory, artificial <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_158">158</a></span><br />
+Microscope, Experiment for the <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_145">145</a></span><br />
+Mirror, Magician's <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_124">124</a></span><br />
+Mirror, perspective <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_124">124</a></span><br />
+Mirror, distorting <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_126">126</a></span><br />
+Mirror, oracular <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_152">152</a></span><br />
+Mirrors, magical <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_53">53</a></span><br />
+Mirrors, deforming <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_123">123</a></span><br />
+Mirrors, igniting <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_125">125</a></span><br />
+Money augmented by optical Illusion <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_15">15</a></span><br />
+Money melted in a Walnut-shell <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_40">40</a></span><br />
+Mortars, in Fire-works <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_184">184</a></span><br />
+<br />
+Neptune in his Chariot <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_198">198</a></span><br />
+Number, to tell any, privately fixed on <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_45">45</a></span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">without asking questions&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_45">45</a></span></span><br />
+Number, divisible by 9, &amp;c. <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_55">55</a></span><br />
+Numbers, to find the difference of two, &amp;c. <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_56">56</a></span><br />
+<br />
+Objects, three, discernible only with both Eyes <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_15">15</a></span><br />
+Oil upon Water, and Water upon Oil, curious Effects of <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_161">161</a></span><br />
+Oil and Water, Experiments with <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_161">161</a></span><br />
+Opaque Bodies, seemingly transparent <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_121">121</a></span><br />
+Opaque Box made transparent <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_130">130</a></span><br />
+Opera-glass, diagonal <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_129">129</a></span><br />
+Oracle, inanimate <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_61">61</a></span><br />
+Orrery, magnetic <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_72">72</a></span><br />
+Orrery, electrical <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_92">92</a>, <a href="#Page_99">99</a></span><br />
+<br />
+Palace, enchanted <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_120">120</a></span><br />
+Parties, three magical <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_110">110</a></span><br />
+Paradox, dioptrical <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_127">127</a></span><br />
+Pass, how to make the <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_107">107</a></span><br />
+Perspective-glass, divining <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_111">111</a></span><br />
+Phantom <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_126">126</a></span><br />
+Phial of the four Elements <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_48">48</a></span><br />
+Philosophical Candle <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_37">37</a></span><br />
+Phosphorus Match Bottles <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_34">34</a></span><br />
+Phosphorus inflammable <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_53">53</a></span><br />
+<span class='pagenum'>[Pg ix]</span>Phosphorus, illuminated <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_97">97</a></span><br />
+Picture, magic <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_13">13</a></span><br />
+Pictures of Birds, to make, with their natural Feathers <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_132">132</a></span><br />
+Pieces, transposable <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_131">131</a></span><br />
+Plants, remarkable Properties in <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_138">138</a></span><br />
+Plaster of Paris cast, to take from a Person's Face <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_135">135</a></span><br />
+Pomatum, to make, with Wax and Water <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_36">36</a></span><br />
+Portrait, miraculous <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_85">85</a></span><br />
+Powder, which catches Fire when exposed to the Air <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_39">39</a></span><br />
+Prints, to remove Stains from <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_38">38</a></span><br />
+Prospect, boundless <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_57">57</a></span><br />
+Prospects, illuminated <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_68">68</a></span><br />
+Pyrotechny, a complete system of <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_163">163</a></span><br />
+<br />
+Rain and Hail, artificial <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_28">28</a></span><br />
+Rain Gauge, to make <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_142">142</a></span><br />
+Rainbow, artificial <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_60">60</a></span><br />
+Reflector, magnifying <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_16">16</a></span><br />
+Ring, to suspend by a Thread after the Thread has been burnt <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_35">35</a></span><br />
+Ring, on the Finger, to name, &amp;c. <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_49">49</a></span><br />
+Roman Candles, in Fire-works <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_186">186</a></span><br />
+Rocket Stars <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_173">173</a></span><br />
+Rocket to fix one on the Top of another <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_174">174</a></span><br />
+Rockets <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_170">170</a></span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">Method of rolling&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_170">170</a></span></span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">Composition for&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_171">171</a></span></span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">to drive&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_171">171</a></span></span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">Decorations for&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_172">172</a></span></span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">Caduceous&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_175">175</a></span></span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">Honorary&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_175">175</a></span></span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">which form an arch in rising&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_176">176</a></span></span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">to make several rise together&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_176">176</a></span></span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">to fix several on the same Stick&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_177">177</a></span></span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">to fire without Sticks&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_178">178</a></span></span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">Scrolls for&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_179">179</a></span></span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">Stands for&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_179">179</a></span></span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">Table&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_179">179</a></span></span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">Water&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_192">192</a></span></span><br />
+Rose, changeable <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_41">41</a></span><br />
+Resin lighted by Electricity <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_95">95</a></span><br />
+<br />
+Salt, exploding <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_127">127</a></span><br />
+Saltpetre for Fire-works <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_164">164</a></span><br />
+<span class='pagenum'>[Pg x]</span>Saltpetre, to pulverize for Fire-works <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_164">164</a></span><br />
+Sealing-wax spun into Threads by Electricity <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_100">100</a></span><br />
+Sea-fight, &amp;c. in Aquatic Fire-works <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_196">196</a></span><br />
+Serpents, for Fire-works, to make <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_169">169</a></span><br />
+Shillings, a Person having an even number of in one Hand, and an odd Number in the other, to tell in which Hand the odd or even Number is <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_17">17</a></span><br />
+Shock, inconceivable <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_88">88</a></span><br />
+Shower, mercurial <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_80">80</a></span><br />
+Shower, fiery <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_90">90</a></span><br />
+Silver-plate, to give a Lustre to <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_44">44</a></span><br />
+Silver extracted from a gilded Ring <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_135">135</a></span><br />
+Sky-rockets <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_170">170</a></span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">to fire under Water&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_198">198</a></span></span><br />
+Sound, travelling of <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_141">141</a>, <a href="#Page_142">142</a></span><br />
+Sparks, electric <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_93">93</a></span><br />
+Sparks, in choked Cases <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_167">167</a></span><br />
+Sparrows, Experiments with <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_82">82</a></span><br />
+Spectre on the Table <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_64">64</a></span><br />
+Spider, artificial <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_84">84</a></span><br />
+Spirit, Cameleon <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_23">23</a></span><br />
+Spots in the Sun's Disk, to show <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_128">128</a></span><br />
+Spur-fire <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_166">166</a></span><br />
+Square Yards, to contain the Changes of the Alphabet <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_59">59</a></span><br />
+Squares, Magic <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_55">55</a></span><br />
+Squibs, to make <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_169">169</a></span><br />
+Stars, with Points, in Fire-works <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_188">188</a></span><br />
+Steam, Power of <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_31">31</a></span><br />
+Steel or Iron, to soften <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_135">135</a></span><br />
+Stone, floating <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_78">78</a></span><br />
+Storm at Sea, to represent by the Magic Lantern <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_63">63</a></span><br />
+Sulphur for Fire-works <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_163">163</a></span><br />
+Sun, fixed, with a transparent Face <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_189">189</a></span><br />
+Sun's Rays, Effects of, on different coloured Cloths <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_146">146</a></span><br />
+Swans and Ducks in Aquatic Fire-works <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_199">199</a></span><br />
+<br />
+Tantalus, Cup of <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_85">85</a></span><br />
+Thunder, artificial <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_14">14</a>, <a href="#Page_15">15</a></span><br />
+Touch-paper, to make <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_167">167</a></span><br />
+Transcolorations, curious <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_29">29</a>, <a href="#Page_30">30</a></span><br />
+Transmutations, magical <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_35">35</a></span><br />
+Travelling of Sound <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_141">141</a>, <a href="#Page_142">142</a></span><br />
+Travelling of Light <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_145">145</a></span><br />
+Tree, Silver <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_27">27</a></span><br />
+<span class='pagenum'>[Pg xi]</span>Tree, Lead <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_27">27</a></span><br />
+Tree, Iron <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_55">55</a></span><br />
+Tree, sublimated <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_139">139</a></span><br />
+Tube, Magic <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_123">123</a></span><br />
+Tulip, Experiment with <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_140">140</a></span><br />
+<br />
+Vacuum, illuminated <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_90">90</a></span><br />
+Vase, Magic <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_110">110</a></span><br />
+Vessel, Magic <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_21">21</a></span><br />
+Vessel, that lets Water out of the Bottom as soon as the Mouth is uncorked <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_39">39</a></span><br />
+Verse, Magic <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_74">74</a></span><br />
+Viper, Experiment with <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_82">82</a></span><br />
+Visual Nerves, singular Impression on, by a luminous Object <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_160">160</a></span><br />
+Visual Nerves, singular Impression on, by looking through differently-coloured Glasses <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_161">161</a></span><br />
+Volcano, artificial <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_22">22</a></span><br />
+<br />
+Wand, magnetic <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_70">70</a></span><br />
+Wand, mercurial <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_79">79</a></span><br />
+Watch Dial, to tell by one the Hour when a Person intends to rise <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_17">17</a></span><br />
+Watch mysterious <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_70">70</a></span><br />
+Watch Lamp <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_140">140</a></span><br />
+Water gilding on Silver <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_43">43</a></span><br />
+Water which gives Silver a Gold Colour <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_43">43</a></span><br />
+Water to give any Metal a Gold Colour <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_43">43</a>, <a href="#Page_44">44</a></span><br />
+Water Sun <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_50">50</a></span><br />
+Water illuminated <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_96">96</a></span><br />
+Water colder than Ice <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_127">127</a></span><br />
+Water Experiment with a Glass of <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_135">135</a></span><br />
+Water beautifully transparent <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_142">142</a></span><br />
+Water Power of <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_143">143</a></span><br />
+Water Power in Steam <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_158">158</a></span><br />
+Water Pressure of <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_143">143</a></span><br />
+Water Mass of, contained in the Sea <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_145">145</a></span><br />
+Water Rockets <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_192">192</a></span><br />
+Water Wheels, horizontal <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_193">193</a></span><br />
+Water Pipes in Fire-works <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_193">193</a></span><br />
+Water Mines <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_194">194</a></span><br />
+Water Fire Globes <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_194">194</a></span><br />
+Water Balloons, odoriferous <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_195">195</a></span><br />
+Water Fire Fountains <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_200">200</a></span><br />
+<span class='pagenum'>[Pg xii]</span>Weather, to foretel <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_140">140</a></span><br />
+Weather, Table <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_162">162</a></span><br />
+Wheels, self-moving <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_79">79</a>, <a href="#Page_94">94</a></span><br />
+Wheels, in Fire-works&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_180">180</a></span><br />
+Wheels, single vertical&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_180">180</a></span><br />
+Wheels, horizontal&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_181">181</a></span><br />
+Wheels, plural&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_182">182</a></span><br />
+Wheels, spiral&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_182">182</a></span><br />
+Wheels, Balloon&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_183">183</a></span><br />
+Wheels, double spiral&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_183">183</a></span><br />
+Wheels, illuminated spiral&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_183">183</a></span><br />
+Winter, changed to Spring <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_26">26</a></span><br />
+Writing, mysterious <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_26">26</a></span><br />
+Writing, illuminated <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_28">28</a></span><br />
+Writing, burnt, restored <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_129">129</a></span><br />
+Writing, in the Dark, to make luminous <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_139">139</a></span><br />
+Writing, on Glass by the Rays of the Sun <span class='pagec'><a href="#Page_148">148</a></span><br />
+</p></div>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_13" id="Page_13">[Pg 13]</a></span></p>
+<h2>ENDLESS<br />
+<big>AMUSEMENT.</big></h2>
+
+
+<h4><i>To produce Fire by the Mixture of two cold Liquids.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Take half a pound of pure dry nitrate, in powder; put it
+into a retort that is quite dry; add an equal quantity of
+highly rectified oil of vitriol, and, distilling the mixture in
+a moderate sand heat, it will produce a liquor like a yellowish
+fume; this, when caught in a dry receiver, is <i>Glauber's
+Spirits of Nitre</i>; probably the preparation, under that name,
+may be obtained of the chemists, which will of course save
+much time and trouble.</p>
+
+<p>You then put a drachm of distilled oil of cloves, turpentine,
+or carraways, in a glass vessel; and if you add an equal
+quantity, or rather more, of the above spirit, though both are
+in themselves perfectly cold, yet, on mixing them together,
+a great flame will arise and destroy them both, leaving only
+a little resinous matter at the bottom.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Exploding Bubble.</i></h4>
+
+<p>If you take up a small quantity of melted glass with a tube, (the bowl
+of a common tobacco-pipe will do,) and let a drop fall into a vessel
+of water, it will chill and condense with a fine spiral tail, which
+being broken, the whole substance will burst with a loud explosion,
+without injury either to the party that holds it, or him that breaks
+it; but if the <i>thick</i> end be struck, even with a hammer, it will not
+break.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Magic Picture.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Take two level pieces of glass, (plate glass is the best,) about three
+inches long and four wide, exactly of the same size; lay one on the
+other, and leave a space between them<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_14" id="Page_14">[Pg 14]</a></span> by pasting a piece of card, or
+two or three small pieces of thick paper, at each corner.</p>
+
+<p>Join these glasses together at the edges by a composition of lime
+slaked by exposure to the air, and white of an egg. Cover all the
+edges of these glasses with parchment or bladder, except at one end,
+which is to be left open to admit the following composition.</p>
+
+<p>Dissolve, by a slow fire, six ounces of hogs'-lard, with half an ounce
+of white wax; to which you may add an ounce of clear linseed oil.</p>
+
+<p>This must be poured in a liquid state, and before a fire, between the
+glasses, by the space left in the sides, and which you are then to
+close up. Wipe the glasses clean, and hold them before the fire, to
+see that the composition will not run out at any part.</p>
+
+<p>Then fasten with gum a picture or print, painted on very thin paper,
+with its face to one of the glasses, and, if you like, you may fix the
+whole in a frame.</p>
+
+<p>While the mixture between the glasses is cold, the picture will be
+quite concealed, but become transparent when held to the fire; and, as
+the composition cools, it will gradually disappear.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Artificial Lightning.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Provide a tin tube that is larger at one end than it is at the other,
+and in which there are several holes. Fill this tube with powdered
+resin; and when it is shook over the flame of a torch, the reflection
+will produce the exact appearance of lightning.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Artificial Thunder.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Mix two drachms of the filings of iron, with one ounce of
+concentrated spirit of vitriol, in a strong bottle that holds
+about a quarter of a pint; stop it close, and in a few minutes
+shake the bottle; then taking out the cork, put a lighted
+candle near its mouth, which should be a little inclined, and
+you will soon observe an inflammation arise from the bottle,
+attended with a loud explosion.</p>
+
+<p>To guard against the danger of the bottle bursting, the
+best way would be to bury it in the ground, and apply the
+light to the mouth by means of a taper fastened to the end
+of a long stick.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_15" id="Page_15">[Pg 15]</a></span></p>
+<h4><i>Another way.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Mix three ounces of saltpetre, two ounces of salt of tartar,
+and two ounces of sulphur; roll the mixture up into a ball,
+of which take a quantity, about the size of a hazel-nut, and,
+placing it in a ladle or shovel over the fire, the explosion
+will resemble a loud clap of thunder.</p>
+
+<p>You will produce a much more violent commotion if you double or treble
+the quantity of the last experiment; suppose you put two or three
+ounces of the mixture into the shovel. For fear of accidents, it
+should not be done in the house, but by placing the shovel over a
+chafing-dish of very hot coals, in the open air, standing a great
+distance off.</p>
+
+<p>Common prudence will dictate the necessity of using great care in the
+above experiments, as an accident will soon happen if a person does
+not get out of the way before the composition explodes.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Money augmented by an Optical Illusion.</i></h4>
+
+<p>In a large drinking-glass of a conical shape, (small at
+the bottom and wide at the top,) put a shilling, and let
+the glass be half full of water; then place a plate on the
+top of it, and turn it quickly over, that the water may not
+escape. You will see on the plate a piece of coin of the size
+of half-a-crown; and a little higher up another the size of a
+shilling.</p>
+
+<p>It will add to the amusement this experiment affords, by
+giving the glass to any one in company, (but who, of course,
+has not witnessed your operations,) and, desiring him to
+throw away the water, but save the pieces, he will not be a
+little surprised at finding only one.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Three objects discernible only with both Eyes.</i></h4>
+
+<p>If you fix three pieces of paper against the wall of a room
+at equal distances, at the height of your eye, placing yourself
+directly before them, at a few yards' distance, and close
+your right eye, and look at them with your left, you will
+see only two of them, suppose the first and second; alter
+the position of your eye, and you will see the first and third:
+alter your position a second time, you will see the second
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_16" id="Page_16">[Pg 16]</a></span>
+and third, but never the whole three together; by which
+it appears, that a person who has only one eye can never
+see three objects placed in this position, nor all the parts
+of one object of the same extent, without altering his situation.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To construct the Camera Obscura.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Make a circular hole in the shutter of a window, from whence there is
+a prospect of some distance; in this hole place a magnifying glass,
+either double or single, whose focus is at the distance of five or six
+feet; no light must enter the room but through this glass. At a
+distance from it, equal to its focus, place a very white pasteboard,
+(what is called a Bristol board, if you can procure one large enough,
+will answer extremely well;) this board must be two feet and a half
+long, and eighteen or twenty inches high, with a black border round
+it: bend the length of it inward to the form of part of a circle,
+whose diameter is equal to double the focal distance of the glass. Fix
+it on a frame of the same figure, and put it on a moveable foot, that
+it may be easily placed at that distance from the glass, where the
+objects appear to the greatest perfection. When it is thus placed, all
+the objects in front of the window will be painted on the paper in an
+inverted position, with the greatest regularity, and in the most
+natural colours. If you place a swing looking-glass outside the
+window, by turning it more or less, you will have on the paper all the
+objects on each side the window.</p>
+
+<p>If, instead of placing the looking-glass outside the window, you place
+it in the room above the hole, (which must then be made near the top
+of the shutter,) you may have the representation on a paper placed
+horizontally on a table, and draw at your leisure all the objects
+reflected.</p>
+
+<p>Observe, the best situation is directly north; and the best time of
+the day is noon.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Magnifying Reflector.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Let the rays of light that pass through the magnifying
+glass in the shutter be thrown on a large concave mirror,
+properly fixed in a frame. Then take a third strip of glass,
+and stick any small object on it; hold it in the intervening
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_17" id="Page_17">[Pg 17]</a></span>
+rays at a little more than the focal distance from the mirror,
+and you will see on the opposite wall, amidst the reflected
+rays, the image of that object, very large, and beautifully
+clear and bright.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To tell by a Watch Dial the Hour when a Person intends to rise.</i></h4>
+
+<p>The person is told to set the hand of his watch at any hour
+he pleases, which hour he tells you; and you add in your
+mind 12 to it. You then desire him to count privately the
+number of that addition on the dial, commencing at the next
+hour to that at which he intends to rise, and including the
+hour at which he has placed the hand, which will give the
+answer: for example.</p>
+
+<p>A intends to rise at 6, (this he conceals to himself;) he
+places the hand at 8, which he tells B, who, in his own
+mind, adds 12 to 8, which makes twenty. B then tells A to
+count twenty on the dial, beginning at the next hour to that
+at which he proposes to rise, which will be 5, and counting
+backwards, reckoning each hour as one, and including in
+his addition the number of the hour the hand is placed
+at, the addition will end at 6, which is the hour proposed;
+thus,</p>
+
+<table border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" summary="Watch Dial">
+<tr>
+ <td>The hour the hand is placed at is</td>
+ <td align="right">8</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>The next hour to that which A intends to rise at is 5, which counts for</td>
+ <td align="right">1</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Count back the hours from 5, and reckon them at 1 each, there will be 11 hours, viz., 4, 3, 2, 1, 12, 11, 10, 9, 8, 7, 6 &nbsp; &nbsp;</td>
+ <td align="right">11</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td align="right">&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td align="right">Making &nbsp; &nbsp; </td>
+ <td align="right">20</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<h4><i>A person having an even Number of Shillings in one
+Hand, and an odd Number in the other, to tell in
+which hand the odd or even Number is.</i></h4>
+
+<p>You desire the person to multiply the number in his right
+hand by an odd figure, and the number in his left by an even
+one; and tell you if the products, added together, be odd or
+even. If even, the even number is in the right hand; if odd,
+the even number is in the left. For instance,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_18" id="Page_18">[Pg 18]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<table border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" summary="Even or Odd">
+<tr>
+ <td>I. Number in the right hand is <i>even</i></td>
+ <td align="right">18</td>
+ <td> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; In the left hand <i>odd</i></td>
+ <td align="right">7</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Multiply by</td>
+ <td align="right">3</td>
+ <td> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; Multiply by</td>
+ <td align="right">2</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td align="right">&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;</td>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td align="right">&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td align="right">Product &nbsp; &nbsp; </td>
+ <td align="right">54</td>
+ <td align="right">Product &nbsp; &nbsp; </td>
+ <td align="right">14</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Add the Product of the left hand</td>
+ <td align="right">14</td>
+ <td colspan="2">&nbsp;</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td align="right">&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;</td>
+ <td colspan="2">&nbsp;</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Which produces a total of</td>
+ <td align="right">68</td>
+ <td colspan="2">&nbsp;</td>
+</tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4">&nbsp;</td></tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>II. Number in the right hand is <i>odd</i></td>
+ <td align="right">7</td>
+ <td> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; In the left hand <i>even</i></td>
+ <td align="right">18</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Multiply by</td>
+ <td align="right">3</td>
+ <td> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; Multiply by</td>
+ <td align="right">2</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td align="right">&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;</td>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td align="right">&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td align="right">Product &nbsp; &nbsp; </td>
+ <td align="right">21</td>
+ <td align="right">Product &nbsp; &nbsp; </td>
+ <td align="right">36</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Add the Product of the left hand</td>
+ <td align="right">36</td>
+ <td colspan="2">&nbsp;</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td align="right">&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;</td>
+ <td colspan="2">&nbsp;</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Which produces a total of</td>
+ <td align="right">57</td>
+ <td colspan="2">&nbsp;</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<h4><i>Secret Correspondence.</i></h4>
+
+<p>To carry on a correspondence without the possibility of the meaning of
+the letter being detected, in case it should<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_19" id="Page_19">[Pg 19]</a></span> be opened by any other
+person, has employed the ingenuity of many. No method will be found
+more effectual for this purpose, or more easy, than the following.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 50%;">
+<span class="caption">Fig. 1.</span>
+<img src="images/i_001.jpg" width="100%" alt="Fig. 1." title="Fig. 1." />
+</div>
+
+<p>Provide a piece of square card or pasteboard, and draw a circle on it,
+which circle is to be divided into 27 equal parts, in each of which
+parts must be written <i>one</i> of the capital letters of the alphabet,
+and the &amp;, as in the figure. Let the centre of this circle be blank.
+Then draw another circle, also divided into 27 equal parts, in each of
+which write one of the small letters of the alphabet, and the &amp;. This
+circle must be cut round, and made exactly to fit the blank space in
+the centre of the large circle, and must run round a pivot or pin. The
+person with whom you correspond must have a similar dial, and at the
+beginning of your letter you must put the capital letter, and at the
+end the small letter, which answer to each other when you have fixed
+your dial.</p>
+
+<p>Suppose what you wish to communicate is as follows:</p>
+
+<div class="blockquot"><p><i>I am so watched I cannot see you as I promised; but I will
+meet you to-morrow in the park, with the letters, &amp;c.</i></p></div>
+
+<p>You begin with the letter <i>T</i>, and end with the letter <i>m</i>,
+which shows how you have fixed the dial, and how your correspondent
+must fix his, that he may decipher your letter.</p>
+
+<p>Then, for <i>I am</i>, you write <i>b uf</i>, and so of the rest, as
+follows.</p>
+
+<div class="bbox"><p style='text-align:center'><i>T b uf lh pumrvayx b rvugghm lyy rhn ul b ikhfblyx vnm b pbee fyym
+rhn mh-fhkkhp bg may iukd pbma may eymmykl, tw. m.</i></p></div>
+
+
+<h4><i>Another Way.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Take two pieces of card, pasteboard, or stiff paper, through which
+you cut long squares at different distances. One of these you keep
+yourself, and the other you give to your correspondent. You lay the
+pasteboard on a paper, and, in the spaces cut out, write what you
+would have understood by him only; then fill the intermediate spaces
+with any words that will connect the whole together, and make a
+different sense. When he receives it, he lays his pasteboard over
+the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_20" id="Page_20">[Pg 20]</a></span> whole, and those words which are between crotchets [ ] form the
+intelligence you wish to communicate. For example: suppose you want
+to express these word,</p>
+
+<div class="blockquot"><p>"<i>Don't trust Robert: I have found him a villain.</i>"</p></div>
+
+<p>"[Don't] fail to send my books. I [trust] they will be ready when
+[Robert] calls on you. [I have] heard that you have [found] your dog.
+I call [him a villain] who stole him." You may place a pasteboard of
+this kind three other ways&mdash;the bottom at top&mdash;the top at bottom, or
+by turning it over; but in this case you must previously apprize your
+correspondent, or he may not be able to decipher your meaning.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Secret Correspondence by Music.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Form a circle like Fig. 2, divided into twenty-six parts, with a
+letter of the alphabet written in each. The interior of the circle is
+moveable, like that in Fig. 1, and the circumference is to be ruled
+like music-paper. Place in each division a note different in figure or
+position.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 60%;">
+<span class="caption">Fig. 2.</span>
+<img src="images/i_002.jpg" width="100%" alt="Fig. 2." title="Fig. 2." />
+</div>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 90%;">
+<img src="images/i_003.jpg" width="100%" alt="" title="" />
+</div>
+
+<p>Within the musical lines place the three keys, and on the
+outer circle the figures to denote time. Then get a ruled
+paper, and place one of the keys (suppose <i>ge-re-sol</i>) against
+the time 2-4ths, at the beginning of the paper, which will
+inform your correspondent how to place his circle. You then<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_21" id="Page_21">[Pg 21]</a></span>
+copy the notes that answer to the letters of the words you
+intend to write, in the manner expressed above.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Magic Vessel.</i></h4>
+
+<p>On the bottom of a vessel, lay three pieces of money, the
+first at A, the second at B, and the third at C, Fig. 3. Then
+place a person at D, where he can see no farther into the vessel
+than E. You tell him, that by pouring water in the vessel
+you will make him see three different pieces of money; and
+bid him observe, that you do not convey any money in with
+the water. But be careful that you pour the water in very
+gently, or the pieces will move out of their places, and thereby
+destroy the experiment.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 50%;">
+<span class="caption">Fig. 3.</span>
+<img src="images/i_004.jpg" width="100%" alt="Fig. 3." title="Fig. 3." />
+</div>
+
+<p>When the water rises up to F, the piece at A will be visible; when it
+reaches G, both A and B will be visible; and when it comes up to H,
+all three pieces will be visible.</p>
+
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_22" id="Page_22">[Pg 22]</a></span></p>
+<h4><i>Artificial Earthquake and Volcano.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Grind an equal quantity of fresh iron filings with pure
+sulphur, till the whole be reduced to a fine powder. Be
+careful not to let any wet come near it. Then bury about
+thirty pounds of it a foot deep in the earth, and in about six
+or eight hours the ground will heave and swell, and shortly
+after send forth smoke and flames like a burning mountain.
+If the earth is raised in a conical shape, it will be no bad
+miniature resemblance of one of the burning mountains.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Artificial Illuminations.</i></h4>
+
+<p>A very pleasing exhibition may be made with very little trouble or
+expense, in the following manner: Provide a box, which you fit up with
+architectural designs cut out on pasteboard; prick small holes in
+those parts of the building where you wish the illuminations to
+appear, observing, that in proportion to the perspective, the holes
+are to be made smaller; and on the near objects the holes are to be
+made larger. Behind these designs thus perforated, you fix a lamp or
+candle, but in such a manner that the reflection of the light shall
+only shine through the holes; then placing a light of just sufficient
+brilliance to show the design of the buildings before it, and making a
+hole for the sight at the front end of the box, you will have a very
+tolerable representation of illuminated buildings.</p>
+
+<p>The best way of throwing the light in front, is to place an oiled
+paper before it, which will cast a mellow gleam over the scenery, and
+not diminish the effect of the illumination. This can be very easily
+planned, both not to obstruct the sight, nor be seen to disadvantage.
+The lights behind the picture should be very strong; and if a
+magnifying glass were placed in the sight hole, it would tend greatly
+to increase the effect. The box must be covered in, leaving an
+aperture for the smoke of the lights to pass through.</p>
+
+<p>The above exhibition can only be shown at candle-light; but there is
+another way, by fixing small pieces of gold on the building, instead
+of drilling the holes; which gives something like the appearance of
+illumination, but by no means equal to the foregoing experiment.</p>
+
+<p>N.B. It would be an improvement, if paper of various colours, rendered
+transparent by oil, were placed between the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_23" id="Page_23">[Pg 23]</a></span> lights behind and the
+aperture in the buildings, as they would then resemble lamps of
+different colours.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Cameleon Spirit.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Put into a decanter volatile spirit, in which you have dissolved
+copper filings, and it will produce a fine blue. If the bottle be
+stopped, the colour will disappear; but when unstopped, it will
+return. This experiment may be often repeated.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Invisible Ink.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Put litharge of lead into very strong vinegar, and let it stand
+twenty-four hours. Strain it off, and let it remain till quite
+settled; then put the liquor in a bottle.</p>
+
+<p>You next dissolve orpiment in quick lime water, by setting the water
+in the sun for two or three days, turning it five or six times a-day.
+Keep the bottle containing this liquor well corked, as the vapour is
+highly pernicious if received into the mouth.</p>
+
+<p>Write what you wish with a pen dipped in the first liquor; and, to
+make it visible, expose it to the vapour of the second liquor. If you
+wish them to disappear again, draw a sponge or pencil, dipped in aqua
+fortis, or spirit of nitre, over the paper; and if you wish them to
+re-appear, let the paper be quite dry, and then pass the solution of
+orpiment over it.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Another.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Dissolve bismuth in nitrous acid. When the writing with
+this fluid is exposed to the vapour of liver of sulphur, it will
+become quite black.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Another.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Dissolve green vitriol and a little nitrous acid in common
+water. Write your characters with a new pen.</p>
+
+<p>Next infuse small Aleppo galls, slightly bruised in water.
+In two or three days, pour the liquor off.</p>
+
+<p>By drawing a pencil dipped in this second solution over
+the characters written with the first, they will appear a beautiful
+black.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_24" id="Page_24">[Pg 24]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Invisible Gold Ink.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Put as much gold in as small a quantity of aqua regia as
+will dissolve it, and dilute it with two or three times the quantity
+of distilled water.</p>
+
+<p>Next dissolve, in a separate vessel, fine pewter in aqua
+regia, and when it is well impregnated, add an equal quantity
+of distilled water.</p>
+
+<p>Write your characters with the first solution: let it dry in
+the shade. To make them visible, draw a pencil or sponge,
+dipped in the second solution, over the paper, and the characters
+will appear of a purple colour.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Invisible Silver Ink.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Dissolve fine silver in aqua fortis; and after the dissolution, add
+some distilled water in the same manner as in the gold ink.</p>
+
+<p>What is written with the above ink will remain invisible for three or
+four months, if kept from the air; but may be easily read in an hour,
+if exposed to the fire, air, or sun.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Invisible Yellow Ink.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Steep marigold flowers seven or eight days in clear distilled
+vinegar. Press the flowers and strain the liquor, which
+is to be kept in a bottle well corked. If you would have it
+still more clear, add, when you use it, some pure water.</p>
+
+<p>To make the characters visible, which you write with this
+ink, pass a sponge over the paper, dipped in the following
+solution:</p>
+
+<p>Take a quantity of flowers of pansy, or the common violet,
+bruise them in a mortar with water, strain the liquor in
+a cloth, and keep it in a bottle.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Invisible Red Ink.</i></h4>
+
+<p>To the pure spirit of vitriol or nitre, add eight times as much
+water.</p>
+
+<p>Use the above solution of violets to make visible the characters
+written with this ink.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Invisible Green Ink.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Dissolve salt of tartar, clean and dry, in a sufficient quantity
+of river water. Use the violet solution to render it visible.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_25" id="Page_25">[Pg 25]</a></span></p>
+
+<h4><i>Another Invisible Green Ink.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Dissolve zaffre, in powder, in aqua regia, for twenty-four
+hours. Pour the liquor off, and the same quantity of common
+water, and keep it in a bottle well corked.</p>
+
+<p>This ink will not be visible till exposed to the fire or the
+sun; and will again be invisible when it becomes cold.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Invisible Violet Ink.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Express the juice of lemons, and keep it in a bottle well
+corked. Use the violet infusion to make the writing visible.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Invisible Grey Ink.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Mix alum with lemon-juice. The letters written with this
+ink will be invisible till dipped in water.</p>
+
+<hr style='width: 45%;' />
+
+<p>We now present our readers with a variety of amusing
+experiments, which may be performed by the foregoing
+inks; and they will, probably, suggest others equally amusing
+and useful.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>A Secret Correspondence by means of Invisible Ink.</i></h4>
+
+<p>A person wishing to carry on a correspondence with
+another, and who is fearful of having his letter opened, or
+intercepted, can adopt the following plan:</p>
+
+<p>Write any unimportant matter with common ink, and
+let the lines be very wide apart: then between these
+lines write the communication you wish to make, with
+any of the above invisible inks you can most readily
+procure.</p>
+
+<p>Your correspondent is to be previously apprized of the
+method of making the characters visible: and writing in
+common ink will serve to lull the suspicions of those who
+might intercept the letter, and who, not finding any thing
+important in it, will either forward or keep it. In either
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_26" id="Page_26">[Pg 26]</a></span>
+case there can be no danger, as the writing will not be
+visible without the proper application.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Mysterious Writing.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Write on a piece of paper with common ink any question; then
+underneath it write the answer either in invisible silver ink, or the
+invisible green ink, made with zaffre and aqua regia, described in
+pages 24 and 25.</p>
+
+<p>You give this paper to your friend, and tell him to place it against
+the wall, or on his dressing-table, keeping the door locked, that he
+may be sure no person has entered his room: he will next day find the
+answer written on it.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Restored Flowers.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Make a bouquet of artificial flowers; the leaves should be formed of
+parchment. Dip the roses in the red invisible ink, the jonquilles in
+the yellow, the pinks in the violet, and the leaves in the green ink.
+They will all appear white; and you show them to the company,
+observing, that you will restore them to their natural colours, and
+desiring any person to fix any private mark on them he pleases, that
+he may be sure there is no deception. You then, unperceived by the
+company, dip them in the revivifying liquor, used to make the yellow
+ink visible, described in page 24, and, drawing them gently out, that
+the liquor may drop, and the flowers have time to acquire their
+colours, you present them to the company, who will see, with surprise,
+that they each appear in their natural colours.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Winter changed to Spring.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Take a print that represents winter, and colour those parts
+which should appear green, with the second green invisible
+ink, described in page 25; observing, of course, the usual
+rules of perspective, by making the near parts deeper in
+colour than the others. The other objects must be painted
+in their natural colours. Then put the print into a frame
+with a glass, and cover the back with a paper that is pasted
+only at its extremities.</p>
+
+<p>When this print is exposed to a moderate fire, or the warm
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_27" id="Page_27">[Pg 27]</a></span>
+sun, the foliage, which appeared covered with snow, will
+change to a pleasing green; and if a yellow tint be thrown
+on the lighter parts before the invisible ink is drawn over it,
+this green will be of different shades. When it is exposed
+to the cold, it will again resume its first appearance of
+winter.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Silver Tree.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Dissolve an ounce of fine silver in three ounces of strong aqua
+fortis, in a glass bottle. When the silver is dissolved; pour the aqua
+fortis into another glass vessel, (a decanter will be best,) with
+seven or eight ounces of mercury, to which add a quart of common
+water; to the whole add your dissolved silver, and let it remain
+untouched.</p>
+
+<p>In a few days the mercury will appear covered with a number of little
+branches of a silver colour. This appearance will increase for a month
+or two, and will remain after the mercury is entirely dissolved.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Lead Tree.</i></h4>
+
+<p>A more modern invention, and an easier method by far than the above,
+is the following:</p>
+
+<p>To a piece of zinc fasten a wire, crooked in the form of the worm of a
+still; let the other end of the worm be thrust through a cork. You
+then pour spring water into a phial or decanter, to which you add a
+small quantity of sugar of lead; thrust the zinc into the bottle, and
+with the cork at the end of the wire fasten it up. In a few days the
+tree will begin to grow, and produce a most beautiful effect.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To produce beautiful Fire-works in Miniature.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Put half a drachm of solid phosphorus into a large pint Florence
+flask; holding it slanting, that the phosphorus may not break the
+glass. Pour upon it a gill and a half of water, and place the whole
+over a tea-kettle lamp, or any common tin lamp, filled with spirit of
+wine. Light the wick, which should be almost half an inch from the
+flask; and as soon as the water is heated, streams of fire<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_28" id="Page_28">[Pg 28]</a></span> will issue
+from the water by starts, resembling sky-rockets; some particles will
+adhere to the sides of the glass representing stars; and will
+frequently display brilliant rays. These appearances will continue at
+times till the water begins to simmer, when immediately a curious
+aurora borealis begins, and gradually ascends, till it collects to a
+pointed flame; when it has continued half a minute, blow out the flame
+of the lamp, and the point that was formed will rush down, forming
+beautiful illuminated clouds of fire, rolling over each other for some
+time, which disappearing, a splendid hemisphere of stars presents
+itself: after waiting a minute or two, light the lamp again, and
+nearly the same phenomenon will be displayed as from the beginning.
+Let the repetition of lighting and blowing out the lamp be made for
+three or four times at least, that the stars may be increased. After
+the third or fourth time of blowing out the lamp, in a few minutes
+after the internal surface of the flask is dry, many of the stars will
+shoot with great splendour, from side to side, and some of them will
+fire off with brilliant rays; these appearances will continue several
+minutes. What remains in the flask will serve for the same experiment
+several times, and without adding any more water. Care should be
+taken, after the operation is over, to lay the flask and water in a
+cool, secure place.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Artificial Rain and Hail.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Make a hollow cylinder of wood; let it be very thin at
+the sides, about eight or ten inches wide, and two or three
+feet diameter. Divide its inside into five equal parts, by
+boards of five or six inches wide, and let there be between
+them and the wooden circle, a space of about one-sixth of
+an inch. You are to place these boards obliquely. In this
+cylinder put four or five pounds of shot that will easily pass
+through the opening. When turned upside down, the noise
+of the shot going through the various partitions will resemble
+rain; and if you put large shot, it will produce the sound of
+hail.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Illuminated Writing.</i></h4>
+
+<p>It is well known that if any words are written on a wall
+with solid phosphorus, the writing will appear as if on fire;
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_29" id="Page_29">[Pg 29]</a></span>
+but it is necessary to give this caution, lest accidents should
+occur. In using it, let a cup of water be always near you;
+and do not keep it more than a minute and a half in your
+hand, for fear the warmth of your hand should set it on fire.
+When you have written a few words with it, put the phosphorus
+into the cup of water, and let it stay a little to cool;
+then take it out, and write with it again.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>A Lamp that will burn Twelve Months without replenishing.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Take a stick of phosphorus, and put it into a large dry
+phial, not corked, and it will afford a light sufficient to
+discern any object in a room when held near it. The phials
+should be kept in a cool place, where there is no great current
+of air, and it will continue its luminous appearance for
+more than twelve months.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Curious Transcolorations.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Put half a table-spoonful of syrup of violets and three
+table-spoonfuls of water into a glass; stir them well
+together with a stick, and put half the mixture into another
+glass. If you add a few drops of acid of vitriol into one
+of the glasses and stir it, it will be changed into a crimson;
+put a few drops of fixed alkali dissolved into the other
+glass, and when you stir it, it will change to green. If
+you drop slowly into the green liquor, from the side of the
+glass, a few drops of acid of vitriol, you will perceive
+crimson at the bottom, purple in the middle, and green at
+the top; and by adding a little fixed alkali dissolved, to
+the other glass, the same colours will appear in different
+order.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Another.</i></h4>
+
+<p>If you put a tea-spoonful of a liquor composed of copper
+infused in acid of vitriol, into a glass, and add two or three
+table-spoonfuls of water to it, there will be no sensible colour
+produced; but if you add a little volatile alkali to it, and
+stir it, you will perceive a very beautiful blue colour. Add
+a little acid of vitriol, the colour will instantly disappear upon
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_30" id="Page_30">[Pg 30]</a></span>
+stirring it; and by adding a little fixed alkali dissolved, it will
+return again.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Another.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Put half a tea-spoonful of a liquor composed of iron
+infused in acid of vitriol, into half a glass of water; and add
+a few drops of phlogisticated alkali, and a beautiful Prussian
+blue will appear.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Curious Account of the Electric Effects of a Russian Climate.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Mr. &AElig;pinus in a letter to Dr. Guthrie, relates the following
+phenomena, which took place in Russia, when a severe frost had
+continued for several weeks.</p>
+
+<p>Mr. &AElig;pinus was sent for to the palace to see an uncommon phenomenon.
+On going into the apartment of Prince Orloff, he found him at his
+toilet, and that every time his valet drew the comb through his hair,
+a strong crackling noise was heard; and on darkening the room, sparks
+were seen following the comb in great abundance, while the prince
+himself was so completely electrified, that strong sparks could be
+drawn from his hands and face; nay, he was even electrified when he
+was only powdered with a puff.</p>
+
+<p>A few days after, he was witness to a more striking effect of the
+electric state of a Russian atmosphere. The Grand Duke of Russia sent
+for him one evening in the twilight, and told him, that having briskly
+drawn a flannel cover off a green damask chair in his bed-chamber, he
+was astonished at the appearance of a strong bright flame that
+followed; but considering it as an electrical appearance, he had tried
+to produce a similar illumination on different pieces of furniture,
+and could then show him a beautiful and surprising experiment. His
+highness threw himself on his bed, which was covered with a damask
+quilt, laced with gold; and, rubbing it with his hands in all
+directions, the young prince, who had then reached his twelfth year,
+appeared swimming in fire, as at every stroke flames arose all around
+him, darted to the gold-laced border, ran along it, and up to that of
+the bed, and even to the very top.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_31" id="Page_31">[Pg 31]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>While he was showing this experiment, Prince Orloff came into the
+room, with a sable muff in his hand, and showed us, that by only
+whirling it five or six times round his head in the air, he could
+electrify himself so strongly, as to send out sparks from all the
+uncovered parts of his body.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Astonishing Power of Steam.</i></h4>
+
+<p>If you put a small quantity of water into a tea-kettle, and place it
+on the fire, it will disappear in a short time, having escaped in the
+steam. But if its escape be prevented by stopping up the spout and
+crevices, it will force its way by bursting the vessel in which it was
+confined.</p>
+
+<p>If the steam of boiling water be at liberty, the water never attains
+more than a certain degree of heat; but if confined in a close vessel,
+the additional fire not escaping, the power of the steam is increased,
+it re-acts upon the water, and raises the heat so much higher, that it
+would keep lead in a melting state; and so penetrating, that it would
+soften the marrow-bone of an ox, in a few minutes.</p>
+
+<p>There is an instrument contrived for the foregoing purposes, called
+Papin's Digester, from the name of its inventor, and from its
+digestive powers on substances exposed to its action. It is a very
+strong vessel, made of copper, fitted with a thick close cover, and
+fastened down by several strong screws, so as to render it steam-tight
+in great degrees of heat. To render it safe, while being used, there
+is a valve on the cover, to let out the steam, when it is too violent;
+this valve is kept down by a steel-yard, with a weight moveable upon
+it, to regulate the degrees of the steam within.</p>
+
+<p>The following account of an accident with one of these
+instruments, will give some idea of the great force of
+steam.</p>
+
+<p>Mr. Papin (the inventor) having fixed all things right,
+and included about a pint of water, with two ounces of
+marrow-bone, he placed the vessel horizontally between
+the bars of the grate, about half-way into the fire. In three
+minutes he found it raised to a great heat, and perceiving
+the heat in a very short time become more raging, stepped
+to a side-table for an iron to take the digester out of the fire,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_32" id="Page_32">[Pg 32]</a></span>
+when it suddenly burst with the explosion of a musket. It
+was heard at a considerable distance, and actually shook the
+house. The bottom of the vessel that was in the fire gave
+way; the blast of the expanded water blew all the coals
+out of the fire into the room, the remainder of the vessel
+flew across the room, and, hitting the leaf of an oak table,
+an inch thick, broke it all in pieces, and rebounded half the
+length of the room back again. He could not perceive the
+least sign of water, though he looked carefully for it;
+the fire was quite extinguished, and every coal black in an
+instant.</p>
+
+<p>The following accident was attended with more fatal consequences.</p>
+
+<p>A steam-engine was repairing at Chelsea, and, as the
+workmen were endeavouring to discover the defect, the
+boiler suddenly exploded, and a cloud of steam rushing out
+at the fracture, struck one of the men who was near it, like
+a blast of lightning, and killed him in a moment; when his
+companions endeavoured to take off his clothes, the flesh
+came off with them from the bones.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Account of the Wonderful Effects of two immense Burning-Glasses.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Mr. de Tschirnhausen constructed a burning-glass, between three and
+four feet in diameter, and whose focus was rendered more powerful by a
+second one. This glass melted tiles, slates, pumice-stone, &amp;c., in a
+moment; pitch, and all resins, were melted even under water; the ashes
+of vegetables, wood, and other matters, were converted into glass;
+indeed, it either melted, calcined, or dissipated into smoke, every
+thing applied to its focus.</p>
+
+<p>Mr. Parker, of Fleet-street, made a burning-glass, three feet in
+diameter; it was formed of flint glass, and when on its frame, exposed
+a surface of 2 feet 8&frac12; inches to the solar rays. It had a small
+glass fitted to it, to converge the rays, and heighten the effect. The
+experiments made by it were more powerful and accurate than those
+performed by any other glass. The following is a brief epitome of its
+astonishing power.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_33" id="Page_33">[Pg 33]</a></span></p>
+
+<table border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" summary="Substances melted">
+<tr>
+ <th><i>Substances melted, with their weight; and the Time in Seconds, which they took in melting.</i></th>
+ <th>Weight in Grains.</th>
+ <th>Time in Seconds.</th>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Pure gold</td><td align="center">20</td><td align="center">4</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Pure silver</td><td align="center">20</td><td align="center">3</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Pure copper</td><td align="center">33</td><td align="center">20</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Pure platina</td><td align="center">10</td><td align="center">3</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Nickel</td><td align="center">16</td><td align="center">3</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>A cube of bar-iron</td><td align="center">10</td><td align="center">12</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>A cube of cast-iron</td><td align="center">10</td><td align="center">3</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>A cube of steel</td><td align="center">10</td><td align="center">12</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Scoria of wrought-iron</td><td align="center">12</td><td align="center">2</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Kearsh</td><td align="center">10</td><td align="center">3</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Cauk, or terra ponderosa</td><td align="center">10</td><td align="center">7</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>A topaz, or chrysolite</td><td align="center">3</td><td align="center">45</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>An oriental emerald</td><td align="center">2</td><td align="center">25</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Crystal pebble</td><td align="center">7</td><td align="center">6</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>White agate</td><td align="center">10</td><td align="center">30</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Oriental flint</td><td align="center">10</td><td align="center">30</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Rough cornelian</td><td align="center">10</td><td align="center">75</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Jasper</td><td align="center">10</td><td align="center">25</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Onyx</td><td align="center">10</td><td align="center">20</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Garnet</td><td align="center">10</td><td align="center">17</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>White rhomboidal spar</td><td align="center">10</td><td align="center">60</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Zeolites</td><td align="center">10</td><td align="center">23</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Rotten-stone</td><td align="center">10</td><td align="center">80</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Common slate</td><td align="center">10</td><td align="center">2</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Asbestos</td><td align="center">10</td><td align="center">10</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Common lime-stone</td><td align="center">10</td><td align="center">55</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Pumice-stone</td><td align="center">10</td><td align="center">24</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Lava</td><td align="center">10</td><td align="center">7</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Volcanic clay</td><td align="center">10</td><td align="center">60</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Cornish moor-stone</td><td align="center">10</td><td align="center">60</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<h4><i>Fulminating Powder.</i></h4>
+
+<p>This powder is made by rubbing together, in a hot marble
+mortar, with a wooden pestle, three parts, by weight, of nitre,
+two of mild vegetable alkali, and one of flowers of sulphur,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_34" id="Page_34">[Pg 34]</a></span>
+till the whole is accurately mixed. If a drachm of this powder
+be exposed to a gentle heat, in an iron ladle, till it melts,
+it will explode with a noise as loud as the report of a cannon.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>A more powerful fulminating Powder.</i></h4>
+
+<p>The most wonderful instance of chemical detonation is formed by the
+combination of volatile alkali with silver. Gunpowder, or fulminating
+gold, are not to be compared with this invention, and the great danger
+attending its manufacture prevents us from giving a methodical account
+of its preparation to our readers, particularly as it can be
+purchased, properly prepared, of the chemists.</p>
+
+<p>The slightest agitation or friction is sufficient to cause its
+explosion. When it is once obtained, it can no longer be touched with
+safety. The falling of a few atoms of it, from a small height,
+produces an explosion; a drop of water falling on it has the same
+effect. No attempt, therefore, can be made to enclose it in a bottle,
+but it must be let alone in the capsule, wherein, by evaporation, it
+obtains this terrible property. To make this experiment with safety,
+no greater quantity than a grain of silver should be used; the last
+process of drying should be made in a metallic vessel, and the face of
+the operator defended by a mask with strong glass eyes.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To make the Phosphorus Match Bottles.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Nothing more is necessary for this purpose, than to drop small pieces
+of dry phosphorus into a common phial; gently heat it till it melts;
+and then turn the bottle round, that it may adhere to the sides. The
+phial should be closely corked; and when used, a common brimstone
+match is to be introduced, and rubbed against the sides of the phial:
+this inflames the match when it is brought out of the bottle. Though
+there is no danger in phosphorus, till friction, or fire, is applied,
+yet persons cannot be too cautious in the use of it, as instances have
+been known of one of these bottles catching fire in the pocket, and
+very much endangering the person who carried it; likewise, if
+carelessly used, small particles are apt to get under the nails, or on
+the hand; and if, by accident, they are held to the fire, or rubbed
+together, a flame will presently kindle.</p>
+
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_35" id="Page_35">[Pg 35]</a></span></p>
+<h4><i>To make a Ring suspend by a Thread, after the Thread has been burned.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Soak a piece of thread in urine, or common salt and water.
+Tie it to a ring, not larger than a wedding-ring. When you
+apply the flame of a candle to it, it will burn to ashes, but
+yet sustain the ring.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To form Figures in relief on an Egg.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Design on the shell any figure or ornament you please, with melted
+tallow, or any other fat oily substance; then immerse the egg into
+very strong vinegar, and let it remain till the acid has corroded that
+part of the shell which is not covered with the greasy matter: those
+parts will then appear in relief, exactly as you have drawn them.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To give a ghastly Appearance to Persons in a Room.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Dissolve salt in an infusion of saffron and spirits of wine.
+Dip some tow in this solution, and, having set fire to it, extinguish
+all other lights in the room.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To change Blue to White.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Dissolve copper filings in a phial of volatile alkali; when
+the phial is unstopped, the liquor will be blue; when stopped,
+it will be white.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Magical Transmutations.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Infuse a few shavings of logwood in common water, and when the
+liquor is sufficiently red, pour it into a bottle. Then take three
+drinking-glasses, and rinse one of them with strong vinegar; throw
+into the second a small quantity of pounded alum, which will not be
+observed if the glass has been recently washed, and leave the third
+without any preparation. If the red liquor in the bottle be poured
+into the first glass, it will appear of a straw colour; if into the
+second, it will pass gradually from bluish-grey to black, when stirred
+with a key, or any piece of iron, which has been previously dipped in
+strong vinegar. In the third glass, the red liquor will assume a
+violet tint.</p>
+
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_36" id="Page_36">[Pg 36]</a></span></p>
+<h4><i>To make Pomatum with Water and Wax.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Water and wax are two substances that do not naturally unite together;
+therefore, to those who witness the following process, without knowing
+the cause, it will have the appearance of marvellous. Put into a new
+glazed earthen pot, six ounces of river water and two ounces of white
+wax, in which, you must previously conceal a strong dose of salt of
+tartar. If the whole be then exposed to a considerable degree of heat,
+it will assume the consistence of pomatum, and may be used as such.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Iron transformed into Copper.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Dissolve blue vitriol in water, till the water is well impregnated
+with it; and immerse into the solution small plates of iron, or coarse
+iron filings. These will be attacked and dissolved by the acid of the
+vitriol, while the copper naturally contained in the vitriol will be
+sunk and deposited in the place of the iron dissolved. If the piece of
+iron be too large for dissolving, it will be so completely covered
+with particles of copper, as to resemble that metal itself.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Iron transformed into Silver.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Dissolve mercury in marine acid, and dip a piece of iron
+into it, or rub the solution over the iron, and it will assume
+a silver appearance.</p>
+
+<p>It is scarcely necessary to say, that these transmutations
+are only apparent, though to the credulous it would seem
+that they were actually transformed.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Chemical Illuminations.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Put into a middling-sized bottle, with a short wide
+neck, three ounces of oil or spirit of vitriol, with twelve
+ounces of common water, and throw into it, at different
+times, an ounce or two of iron filings. A violent commotion
+will then take place, and white vapours will arise from
+the mixture. If a taper be held to the mouth of the bottle,
+these vapours will inflame and produce a violent explosion,
+which may be repeated as long as the vapours continue.</p>
+
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_37" id="Page_37">[Pg 37]</a></span></p>
+<h4><i>The Philosophical Candle.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Provide a bladder, into the orifice of which is inserted
+a metal tube, some inches in length, that can be adapted
+to the neck of a bottle, containing the same mixture as in
+the last experiment. Having suffered the atmospheric air
+to be expelled from the bottle, by the elastic vapour produced
+by the solution, apply the orifice of the bladder to the mouth
+of the bottle, after carefully squeezing the common air out
+of it, (which you must not fail to do, or the bladder will
+violently explode.) The bladder will thus become filled
+with the inflammable air, which, when forced out against
+the flame of a candle, by pressing the sides of the bladder,
+will form a beautiful green flame.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To make the appearance of a Flash of Lightning, when
+any one enters a Room with a lighted Candle.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Dissolve camphor in spirit of wine, and deposit the vessel containing
+the solution in a very close room, where the spirit of wine must be
+made to evaporate by strong and speedy boiling. If any one then enters
+the room with a lighted candle, the air will inflame, while the
+combustion will be so sudden, and of so short a duration, as to
+occasion no danger.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To melt Iron in a Moment and make it run into Drops.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Bring a bar of iron to a white heat, and then apply to it
+a roll of sulphur. The iron will immediately melt and run
+into drops.</p>
+
+<p>This experiment should be performed over a basin of
+water, in which the drops that fall down will be quenched.
+These drops will be found reduced into a sort of cast-iron.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Never-yielding Cement.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Calcine oyster-shells, pound them, sift them through
+a silk sieve, and grind them on porphyry till they are
+reduced to the finest powder. Then take the whites of
+several eggs, according to the quantity of the powder;
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_38" id="Page_38">[Pg 38]</a></span>
+and having mixed them with the powder, form the whole
+into a kind of paste. With this paste join the pieces of
+china, or glass, and press them together for seven or eight
+minutes. This cement will stand both heat and water, and
+will never give way, even if the article should, by accident,
+fall to the ground.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To remove Stains and Blemishes from Prints.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Paste a piece of paper to a very smooth clear table, that the boiling
+water used in the operation may not require a colour which might
+lessen its success. Spread out the print you wish to clean upon the
+table, and sprinkle it with boiling water; taking care to moisten it
+throughout by very carefully applying a very fine sponge. After you
+have repeated this process five or six times, you will observe the
+stains or spots extend themselves; but this is only a proof that the
+dirt begins to be dissolved.</p>
+
+<p>After this preparation, lay the print smoothly and carefully into a
+copper or wooden vessel, larger than the size of the print. Then cover
+it with a boiling ley of potash, taking care to keep it hot as long as
+possible. After the whole is cooled, strain off the liquor, take out
+the print with care, spread it on a stretched cord, and when half dry,
+press it between leaves of white paper, to prevent wrinkles.</p>
+
+<p>By this process, spots and stains of any kind will be effectually
+removed.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To so fill a Glass with Water, that it cannot be
+removed without spilling the whole.</i></h4>
+
+<p>This is a mere trick, but may afford some amusement. You offer to bet
+any person that you will so fill a glass with water that he shall not
+move it off the table without spilling the whole contents. You then
+fill the glass, and, laying a piece of paper or thin card over the
+top, you dexterously turn the glass upside down on the table, and then
+drawing away the paper, you leave the water in the glass, with its
+foot upwards. It will therefore be impossible to remove the glass from
+the table without spilling every drop.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_39" id="Page_39">[Pg 39]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Two Figures, one of which blows out and the other re-lights a Candle.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Make two figures, of any shape or materials you please; insert in the
+mouth of one a small tube, at the end of which is a piece of
+phosphorus, and in the mouth of the other a tube containing at the end
+a few grains of gunpowder; taking care that each be retained in the
+tube by a piece of paper. If the second figure be applied to the flame
+of a taper, it will extinguish it; and the first will light it again.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>A vessel that will let Water out at the Bottom, as
+soon as the Mouth is uncorked.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Provide a tin vessel, two or three inches in diameter, and five or six
+inches in height, having a mouth about three inches in width; and in
+the bottom several small holes, just large enough to admit a small
+needle. Plunge it in water with its mouth open, and when full, while
+it remains in the water, stop it very closely. You can play a trick
+with a person, by desiring him to uncork it; if he places it on his
+knee for that purpose, the moment it is uncorked the water will run
+through at the bottom, and make him completely wet.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>A Powder which catches Fire when exposed to the Air.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Put three ounces of rock alum, and one ounce of honey
+or sugar, into a new earthen dish, glazed, and which is
+capable of standing a strong heat; keep the mixture over
+the fire, stirring it continually till it becomes very dry and
+hard; then remove it from the fire, and pound it to a coarse
+powder. Put this powder into a long-necked bottle, leaving
+a part of the vessel empty; and, having placed it in a crucible,
+fill up the crucible with fine sand, and surround it with
+burning coals. When the bottle has been kept at a red heat
+for about seven or eight minutes, and no more vapour issues
+from it, remove it from the fire, then stop it with a piece of
+cork; and, having suffered it to cool, preserve the mixture
+in small bottles well closed.</p>
+
+<p>If you unclose one of these bottles, and let fall a few
+grains of this powder on a bit of paper, or any other very
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_40" id="Page_40">[Pg 40]</a></span>
+dry substance, it will first become blue, then brown, and
+will at last burn the paper or other dry substance on which
+it has fallen.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Fulminating Gold.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Put into a small long-necked bottle, resting on a little
+sand, one part of fine gold filings, and three parts of aqua
+regia, (nitro-muriatic acid.) When the gold is dissolved,
+pour the solution into a glass, and add five or six times the
+quantity of water. Then take spirit of sal ammoniac or oil
+of tartar, and pour it drop by drop into the solution, until
+the gold is entirely precipitated to the bottom of the glass.
+Decant the liquor that swims at the top, by inclining the
+glass; and, having washed it several times in warm water,
+dry it at a moderate heat, placing it on paper capable of
+absorbing all the moisture.</p>
+
+<p>If a grain of this powder, put into a spoon, (it should be an
+iron one,) be exposed to the flame of a candle, it will
+explode with a very loud report.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To melt a piece of Money in a Walnut-shell, without
+injuring the shell.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Bend any thin coin, and put it into half a walnut-shell; place the
+shell on a little sand, to keep it steady. Then fill the shell with a
+mixture made of three parts of very dry pounded nitre, one part of
+flowers of sulphur, and a little saw-dust well sifted. If you then set
+light to the mixture, you will find, when it is melted, that the metal
+will also be melted at the bottom of the shell, in form of a button,
+which will become hard when the burning matter round it is consumed:
+the shell will have sustained very little injury.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>A Liquid that Shines in the Dark.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Take a bit of phosphorus, about the size of a pea; break it into small
+parts, which you are to put into a glass half full of very pure water,
+and boil it in a small earthen vessel, over a very moderate fire. Have
+in readiness a long narrow bottle, with a well-fitted glass stopper,
+and immerse it, with its mouth open, into boiling water. On<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_41" id="Page_41">[Pg 41]</a></span> taking it
+out, empty the water, and immediately pour in the mixture in a boiling
+state; then put in the stopper, and cover it with mastich, to prevent
+the entrance of the external air.</p>
+
+<p>This water will shine in the dark for several months,
+even without being touched; and, if it be shaken in dry
+warm weather, brilliant flashes will be seen to rise through
+the middle of the water.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Luminous Liquor.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Put a little phosphorus, with essence of cloves, into a
+bottle, which must be kept closely stopped. Every time
+the bottle is unclosed, the liquor will appear luminous.
+This experiment must be performed in the dark.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The changeable Rose.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Take a common full-blown rose, and, having thrown a
+little sulphur finely pounded into a chafing-dish with coals,
+expose the rose to the vapour. By this process the rose will
+become whitish; but if it be afterwards held some time in
+water, it will resume its former colour.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Golden Ink.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Take some white gum arabic, reduce it to an impalpable powder, in a
+brass mortar; dissolve it in strong brandy, and add a little common
+water to render it more liquid. Provide some gold in a shell, which
+must be detached, in order to reduce it to a powder. When this is
+done, moisten it with the gummy solution, and stir the whole with a
+small hair-brush, or your finger; then leave it for a night, that the
+gold may be better dissolved. If the composition become dry during the
+night, dilute it with more gum water, in which a little saffron has
+been infused; but take care that the gold solution be sufficiently
+liquid to flow freely in a pen. When the writing is dry, polish it
+with a dry tooth.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Another way.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Reduce gum ammoniac into powder, and dissolve it in gum arabic water,
+to which a little garlic juice has been<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_42" id="Page_42">[Pg 42]</a></span> added. This water will not
+dissolve the ammonia so as to form a transparent liquid; for the
+result will be a milky liquor. With the liquor form your letters or
+ornaments on paper or vellum, with a pen or fine camels'-hair brush;
+then let them dry, and afterwards breathe on them some time, till they
+become moist; then apply a few bits of leaf gold to the letters, which
+you press down gently with cotton wool. When the whole is dry, brush
+off the superfluous gold with a large camels'-hair brush, and, to make
+it more brilliant, burnish with a dog's tooth.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>White Ink, for Writing on black Paper.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Having carefully washed some egg-shells, remove the internal skin, and
+grind them on a piece of porphyry. Then put the powder into a small
+vessel of pure water, and when it has settled at the bottom, draw off
+the water, and dry the powder in the sun. This powder must be
+preserved in a bottle; when you want to use it, put a small quantity
+of gum ammoniac into distilled vinegar, and leave it to dissolve
+during the night. Next morning the solution will appear exceedingly
+white; and if you then strain it through a piece of linen cloth, and
+add to it the powder of egg-shells, in sufficient quantity, you will
+obtain a very white ink.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To construct Paper Balloons.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Take several sheets of silk paper; cut them in the shape of a spindle;
+or, to speak more familiarly, like the coverings of the sections of an
+orange; join these pieces together, into one spherical or globular
+body, and border the aperture with a ribbon, leaving the ends, that
+you may suspend them from the following lamp.</p>
+
+<p>Construct a small basket of very fine wire, if the balloon is small,
+and suspend it from the aperture, so that the smoke from the flame of
+a few leaves of paper, wrapped together, and dipped in oil, may heat
+the inside of it. Before you light this paper, suspend the balloon in
+such a manner, that it may, in a great measure, be exhausted of air,
+and as soon as it has been dilated, let it go, together with the wire
+basket, which will serve as ballast.</p>
+
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_43" id="Page_43">[Pg 43]</a></span></p>
+<h4><i>Water-Gilding upon Silver.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Take copper-flakes, on which pour strong vinegar; add alum and salt in
+equal quantities; set them on a fire, and when the vinegar is boiled,
+till it becomes one-fourth part of its original quantity, throw into
+it the metal you design to gild, and it will assume a copper colour.
+Continue boiling it, and it will change into a fine gold colour.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>A Water which gives Silver a Gold Colour.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Take sulphur and nitre, of each an equal quantity; grind them together
+very fine, and put them into an unglazed vessel; cover and lute it
+well; then set it over a slow fire for 24 hours; put what remains into
+a strong crucible, and let it dissolve; put it into a phial, and
+whatever silver you anoint with it will have a gold colour.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To make an old Gold Chain appear like new.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Dissolve sal ammoniac in urine, boil the chain in it, and
+it will have a fine gold colour.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To give Silver the Colour of Gold.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Dissolve in common aqua fortis as much silver as you please. To eight
+ounces of silver, take four ounces of hepatic aloes, six ounces of
+turmeric, and two ounces of prepared tutty, that has been several
+times quenched in urine. Put these to the solution of the silver; they
+will dissolve, but rise up in the glass like a sponge; this glass must
+therefore be large, to prevent running over. Then draw it off, and you
+will have ten ounces of silver as yellow as gold.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>A Water to give any Metal a Gold Colour.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Take fine sulphur and pulverize it; then boil some stale
+spring water; pour it hot upon the powder, and stir it well
+together; boil it again, and pour into it an ounce of dragon's
+blood. After it is well boiled, take it off, and filter it through
+a fine cloth; pour this water into a matrass, (a chemical<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_44" id="Page_44">[Pg 44]</a></span>
+vessel,) after you have put in what you design to colour;
+close it well, and boil it a third time, and the metal will be
+a fine gold colour.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Another way.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Take hepatic aloes, nitre, and Roman vitriol, of each equal
+quantities; and distil them with water, in an alembic, till
+all the spirits are extracted; it will at last yield a yellowish
+water, which will tinge any sort of metal of a gold colour.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To give Silver-plate a Lustre.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Dissolve alum in a strong ley, and scum it carefully; then
+mix it up with soap, and wash your silver utensils with it,
+using a linen rag.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Fiery Fountain.</i></h4>
+
+<p>If twenty grains of phosphorus, cut very small, and mixed
+with forty grains of powder of zinc, be put into four drachms
+of water, and two drachms of concentrated sulphuric acid be
+added thereto, bubbles of inflamed phosphoretted hydrogen
+gas will quickly cover the whole surface of the fluid in succession,
+forming a real fountain of fire.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To take Impressions of Coins, Medals, &amp;c.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Cut fish-glue, or isinglass, into small pieces, immerse it in clear
+water, and set it on a slow fire; when gradually dissolved, let it
+boil slowly, stirring it with a wooden spoon, and taking off the scum.
+The liquor being sufficiently adhesive, take it off the fire, let it
+cool a little, and then pour it on the medal or coin you wish to copy,
+having first rubbed the coin over with oil. Let the composition lay
+about the thickness of a crown-piece on the medal. Then set it in a
+moderate air, neither too hot nor too cold, and let it cool and dry.
+When it is dry, it will loosen itself; you will find the impression
+correct, and the finest strokes expressed with the greatest accuracy.</p>
+
+<p>You may give a most pleasing effect to the composition, by mixing any
+colour with it, red, yellow, blue, green, &amp;c., and if you add a little
+parchment size to it, it will make it<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_45" id="Page_45">[Pg 45]</a></span> harder and better. This size is
+made by gently simmering the cuttings of clear white parchment in a
+pipkin, with a little water, till it becomes adhesive.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To tell a Person any Number he may privately fix on.</i></h4>
+
+<p>When the person has fixed on a number, bid him double
+it and add four to that doubling; then multiply the whole
+by 5; to the product let him add 12, and multiply the amount
+by 10. From the total of all this, let him deduct 320, and
+tell you the remainder; from which, if you cut off the two
+last figures, the number that remains will be what he fixed
+upon. For instance,</p>
+
+<table border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" summary="To tell a Number">
+<tr>
+ <td>Suppose the number chosen is</td>
+ <td align="right">7</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Which doubled</td>
+ <td align="right">14</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Add 4 to it, and it will make</td>
+ <td align="right">18</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Multiply 18 by 5, gives</td>
+ <td align="right">90</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>To which add 12, is</td>
+ <td align="right">102</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Multiply that by 10, makes</td>
+ <td align="right">1020</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>From which deducting 320, the remainder is</td>
+ <td align="right">700</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>And by striking off the two ciphers, it becomes the number thought on</td>
+ <td align="right">7</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<h4><i>To tell any Number a Person has fixed on, without
+asking him any Questions.</i></h4>
+
+<p>You tell the person to choose any number from 1 to 15;
+he is to add 1 to that number, and triple the amount. Then,</p>
+
+<p>1. He is to take the half of that triple, and triple that half.<br />
+2. To take the half of the last triple, and triple that half.<br />
+3. To take the half of the last triple.<br />
+4. To take the half of that half.</p>
+
+<p>Thus, it will be seen, there are four cases where the half
+is to be taken; the three first are denoted by one of the eight
+following Latin words, each word being composed of three
+syllables; and those that contain the letter i refer to those
+cases where the half cannot be taken without a fraction;
+therefore, in those cases, the person who makes the deduction
+is to add 1 to the number divided. The fourth case shows
+which of the two numbers annexed to every word has been
+chosen; for if the fourth half can be taken without adding 1,
+the number chosen is in the first column; but if not, it is in
+the second.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_46" id="Page_46">[Pg 46]</a></span></p>
+
+<table border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" summary="To tell a Number without questions">
+<tr>
+ <td><i>The words.</i> &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; </td>
+ <td colspan="2"><i>The numbers they denote.</i></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Mi-se-ris</td>
+ <td align="right">8</td>
+ <td align="right">0</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Ob-tin-git</td>
+ <td align="right">1</td>
+ <td align="right">9</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Ni-mi-um</td>
+ <td align="right">2</td>
+ <td align="right">19</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>No-ta-ri</td>
+ <td align="right">3</td>
+ <td align="right">11</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>In-fer-nos</td>
+ <td align="right">4</td>
+ <td align="right">12</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Or-di-nes</td>
+ <td align="right">13</td>
+ <td align="right">5</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Ti-mi-di</td>
+ <td align="right">6</td>
+ <td align="right">14</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Te-ne-ant</td>
+ <td align="right">15</td>
+ <td align="right">7</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+
+<p>For example:</p>
+
+<table border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" summary="Example">
+<tr>
+ <td>Suppose the number chosen is</td><td align="right">9</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>To which is to be added </td><td align="right"> 1</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td><td>&mdash;&mdash;</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td><td align="right">10</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>The triple of that number is </td><td align="right"> 30</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>The half of which is </td><td align="right"> 15</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>The triple of that half must be </td><td align="right"> 45</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>And the half of that<a href="#Footnote_A_1" class="fnanchor">[A]</a> </td><td align="right"> 23</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>The triple half of that half </td><td align="right"> 69</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>The half of that<a href="#Footnote_A_1" class="fnanchor">[A]</a> </td><td align="right"> 35</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>And the half of that half<a href="#Footnote_A_1" class="fnanchor">[A]</a> </td><td align="right"> 18</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p><a name="Footnote_A_1" id="Footnote_A_1"></a><span class="label">[A]</span>
+At all these stages, 1 must be added, to take the half without a fraction.</p></div>
+
+<p>While the person is performing the operation, you remark,
+that at the second and third stages he is obliged to add 1;
+and, consequently, that the word <i>ob-tin-git</i>, in the second and
+third syllables of which is an i, denotes that the number must
+be either 1 or 9; and, by observing that he cannot take the
+last half without adding 1, you know that it must be the
+number in the second column. If he makes no addition at
+any one of the four stages, the number he chose must be 15,
+as that is the only number that has not a fraction at either
+of the divisions.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Lamp Chronometer.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Figure 4 represents a chamber lamp, A, consisting of a
+cylindrical vessel made of tin, in the shape of a candle, and
+is to be filled with oil. This vessel should be about three
+inches high and one inch diameter, placed in a stand, B.
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_47" id="Page_47">[Pg 47]</a></span>
+The whole apparatus, of lamp and stand, can be purchased, ready-made,
+at any tin-shop in London. To the stand, B, is fixed the handle C,
+which supports the frame D, about 12 inches high, and four inches
+wide. This frame is to be covered with oiled paper, and divided into
+12 equal parts by horizontal lines, at the end of which are written
+the numbers for the hours, from 1 to 12, and between the horizontal
+lines, and diagonals, divided into halves, quarters, &amp;c. On the handle
+C, and close to the glass, is fixed the style or hand E.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 80%;">
+<span class="caption">Fig. 4.</span>
+<img src="images/i_005.jpg" width="100%" alt="Fig. 4." title="Fig. 4." />
+</div>
+
+<p>Now, as the distance of the style from the flame of the
+lamp is only half an inch, then, if the distance of the frame
+from the style be six inches, while the float that contains the
+light descends by the decrease on the oil, one inch, the shadow
+of the style of the frame will ascend 12 inches, being its
+whole length, and show by its progression, the regular increase
+of the hours, with their several divisions.</p>
+
+<p>You must be careful always to burn the same oil, which<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_48" id="Page_48">[Pg 48]</a></span>
+must be the best; and the wick must never vary in size; if
+these precautions are not attended to, the dial never can be
+accurate.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Phial of the Four Elements.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Take a phial, six or seven inches long, and about three quarters of an
+inch in diameter. In this phial put, first, glass coarsely powdered;
+secondly, oil of tartar per deliquum; thirdly, tincture of salt of
+tartar; and lastly, distilled rock oil.</p>
+
+<p>The glass and the various liquors being of different densities, if you
+shake the phial, and then let it rest a few moments, the three liquors
+will entirely separate, and each assume its place; thus forming no
+indifferent resemblance of the four elements, earth, fire, water, and
+air: the powdered glass (which should be of some dark colour)
+representing the earth; the oil of tartar, water; the tincture, air;
+and the rock oil, fire.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Magic Bottle.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Take a small bottle, the neck of which is not more than
+the sixth of an inch in diameter. With a funnel, fill the
+bottle quite full of red wine, and place it in a glass vessel,
+similar to a show-glass, whose height exceeds that of the
+bottle about two inches; fill this vessel with water. The
+wine will shortly come out of the bottle, and rise in the form
+of a small column to the surface of the water; while at the
+same time, the water, entering the bottle, will supply the
+place of the wine. The reason of this is, that as water is
+specifically heavier than wine, it must hold the lower place,
+while the other rises to the top.</p>
+
+<p>An effect equally pleasing will be produced, if the bottle
+be filled with water, and the vessel with wine.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Globular Fountain.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Make a hollow globe, of copper or lead, and of a size adapted to the
+quantity of water that comes from a pipe (hereafter mentioned) to
+which it is to be fixed, and which may be fastened to any kind of
+pump, provided it be so constructed, that the water shall have no
+other means of escape than through the pipe. Pierce a number of small
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_49" id="Page_49">[Pg 49]</a></span>
+holes through the globe, that all tend towards its centre, and annex
+it to the pipe that communicates with the pump. The water that comes
+from the pump, rushing with violence into the globe, will be forced
+out at the holes, and form a very pleasing sphere of water.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Hydraulic Dancer.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Procure a little figure made of cork, which you may dress as your
+fancy dictates. In this figure place a small hollow cone made of thin
+leaf brass.</p>
+
+<p>When the figure is placed on a jet d'eau, that plays in a
+perpendicular direction, it will be suspended on the top of the water,
+and perform a great variety of amusing motions.</p>
+
+<p>If a hollow ball of very thin copper, of an inch diameter, be placed
+on a similar jet, it will remain suspended, turning round, and
+spreading the water all about it.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>A Person having put a Ring an one of his Fingers, to name the Person,
+the Hand, the Finger, and the Joint on which it is placed.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Let a third person double the number of the order in which he stands
+who has the ring, and add 5 to that number; then multiply that sum by
+5, and to the product add 10. Let him next add 1 to the last number,
+if the ring be on the right hand, and 2 if on the left, and multiply
+the whole by 10: to the product of this he must add the number of the
+finger, (counting the thumb as the first finger,) and multiply the
+whole again by 10. Let him then add the number of the joint, and,
+lastly, to the whole join 35.</p>
+
+<p>He is then to tell you the amount of the whole, from which you are to
+subtract 3535, and the remainder will consist of four figures; the
+first of which will express the rank in which the person stands, the
+second the hand, (number 1 signifying the right, and 2 the left,) the
+third number the finger, and the fourth the joint.&mdash;For example:</p>
+
+<p>Suppose the person who stands the third in order has put the ring upon
+the second joint of the thumb of his left hand; then,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_50" id="Page_50">[Pg 50]</a></span></p>
+
+<table border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" summary="Ring">
+<tr>
+ <td>The double of the rank of the third person is</td><td align="right">6</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>To which add</td><td align="right">5</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td><td align="right">&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td><td align="right">11</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Multiply the sum by </td><td align="right"> 5</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td><td align="right">&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td><td align="right">55</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>To which add </td><td align="right"> 10</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>And the number of the left hand </td><td align="right"> 2</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td><td align="right">&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td><td align="right">67</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Which being multiplied by </td><td align="right"> 10</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td><td align="right">&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td><td align="right">670</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>To which add the number of the thumb </td><td align="right"> 1</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td><td align="right">&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td><td align="right">671</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>And multiply again by </td><td align="right"> 10</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td><td align="right">&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td><td align="right">6710</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Then add the number of the joint </td><td align="right"> 2</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>And lastly the number </td><td align="right"> 35</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td><td align="right">&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td><td align="right">6747</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>From which deducting </td><td align="right"> 3535</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td><td align="right">&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>The remainder is </td><td align="right"> 3212</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td><td align="right">&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<p>Of which, as we have said, the 3 denotes the third person, the 2 the
+left hand, the 1 the thumb, and the last 2 the second joint.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Water Sun.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Provide two portions of a hollow sphere, that are very shallow; join
+them together in such a manner that the hollow between them be very
+narrow. Fix them vertically to a pipe from whence a jet proceeds. Bore
+a number of small holes all around that part where the two pieces are
+joined together. The water rushing through the holes will form a very
+pleasing water sun, or star.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Magical Cascade.</i></h4>
+
+<div class="figright" style="width: 252px;">
+<span class="caption">Fig. 5.</span>
+<img src="images/i_006.jpg" width="252" height="410" alt="Fig. 5." title="Fig. 5." />
+</div>
+
+<p>Procure a tin vessel, shaped like Fig. 5, about five inches high and
+four in diameter, with a cover, C, closed at top.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_51" id="Page_51">[Pg 51]</a></span> To the bottom of
+this vessel, let the pipe D E be soldered. This pipe is to be ten
+inches long, and half an inch in diameter, open at each end, and the
+upper end must be above the water in the vessel. To the bottom also
+fix five or six small tubes, F, about one-eighth of an inch in
+diameter. By these pipes, the water in the vessel is to run slowly
+out.</p>
+
+<p>Place this machine in a tin
+basin, G H, with a hole in the
+middle, about a quarter of an
+inch in diameter. Fix to the
+tube D E, any sort of ornament
+that will keep the machine firm
+on the basin, observing, that
+these supports are sufficiently
+long to leave about a quarter of
+an inch between the end of the
+tube and the orifice in the basin;
+and let there be a vessel under the basin to catch the water
+that runs out.</p>
+
+<p>As the small pipes discharge more water into the basin
+than can run out of the central orifice, the water will rise in
+the basin above the lower end of the pipe, and prevent the
+air from getting into the vessel, by which the water will
+cease to flow from the small pipes. But as the water continues
+to flow from the basin, the air will have liberty again
+to enter the vessel by the tube, and the water will again
+flow from the small pipes, and alternately stop and flow,
+while any water remains in the vessel.</p>
+
+<p>As you can guess when the pipes will flow, and when
+they will stop, you may so manage it, that they will appear
+to act by word of command.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The illuminated Fountain, that plays when the Candles
+are lighted, and stops when they are extinguished.</i></h4>
+
+<div class="figleft" style="width: 220px;">
+<span class="caption">Fig. 6.</span>
+<img src="images/i_007.jpg" width="220" height="410" alt="Fig. 6." title="Fig. 6." />
+</div>
+
+<p>Provide two cylindrical vessels, A B and C D, as in Fig.
+6. Connect them by four tubes open at each end, as H I,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_52" id="Page_52">[Pg 52]</a></span>
+&amp;c., so that the air may descend out
+of the higher into the lower vessel.
+To these tubes fix candlesticks, and
+to the hollow cover, E F, of the lower
+vessel, fit a tube, K, reaching almost
+to the bottom of the vessel. At G let
+there be an aperture with a screw,
+whereby water may be poured into
+C D, which, when filled, must be
+closed by the screw.</p>
+
+<p>When the candles are lighted, the
+air in the upper cover and contiguous
+pipes will be thereby rarefied, and
+the jet from the small tube, K, will
+begin to play: as the air becomes more
+rarefied, the force of the jet will increase,
+and it will continue to play till
+the water in the lower vessel is exhausted.
+As the motion of the jet is
+caused by the heat of the candles,
+when they are extinguished the fountain
+will stop.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>A Fountain which acts by the heat of the Sun.</i></h4>
+
+<div class="figleft" style="width: 210px;">
+<span class="caption">Fig. 7.</span>
+<img src="images/i_008.jpg" width="220" height="335" alt="Fig. 7." title="Fig. 7." />
+</div>
+
+<p>In the annexed engraving, Fig. 7, G N S is a thin hollow globe of
+copper, eighteen inches diameter, supported by a small inverted basin,
+placed on a stand with four legs, A B C D, which have between them, at
+the bottom, a basin of two feet diameter. Through the leg C passes a
+concealed pipe, which comes from G, the bottom of the inside of the
+globe. This pipe goes by H V, and joins the upright pipe <i>u</i> I, to
+make a jet, as I. The short pipe, <i>u</i> I, which goes to the bottom, has
+a valve at <i>u</i>, under the horizontal pipe H V, and another valve at T,
+above that Horizontal pipe, under the cock at K. The use of this cock
+is to keep the fountain from playing in the day, if you think proper.
+The north pole N of the globe has a screw that opens a hole, whereby
+water is poured into the globe.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_53" id="Page_53">[Pg 53]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The machine being thus prepared, and the globe half filled
+with water, put it in an open place, when the heat of the
+sun rarefying the air as it heats the copper, the air will press
+strongly against the water, which, coming down the pipe,
+will lift up the valve at V, and shut the valve at u. The cock
+being opened, the water will spout out at I, and continue to
+play a long while, if the sun shines.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Inflammable Phosphorus.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Take the meal of flour of any vegetable, put it into an iron pan over
+a moderate fire, and keep it stirring with an iron spoon till it
+changes to a black powder; to one part of this add four parts of raw
+alum. Make the whole into a fine powder; put it again into the iron
+pan, and keep stirring it till it almost catches fire, to prevent its
+forming into lumps, as it is apt to do when the alum melts; in which
+case it must be broken again, stirred about, and accurately mixed with
+the flour, till it emits no more fumes, and the whole appears a fine
+black powder.</p>
+
+<p>Put this powder in a clean dry phial with a narrow neck, filling it to
+about one-third of the top. Then stop the mouth of the phial with
+loose paper, so as to let the air pass freely through it, and leave
+room for the fumes to come through the neck. Place the phial in a
+crucible, encompassed on all sides with sand, so that it may not touch
+any part of the crucible, but a considerable space everywhere left
+between. The phial must be covered up with sand, leaving only a small
+part bare, by which you can discern whether the powder is ignited. In
+this state, the crucible is to be surrounded with coals, kindled
+slowly till it is well heated on all sides, and then the fire is to be
+raised, till the crucible and every thing in it is red-hot; keep it in
+this state an hour; after this, the fire still burning as fiercely,
+close up the orifice of the phial with wax, to exclude the air. Leave
+it to cool, and you will find in it a black dusty coal formed of the
+flour and alum.</p>
+
+<p>Shake a small quantity of this out of the phial into the cool air, and
+it will immediately take fire, but will not burn any thing. Keep the
+bottle dry, as even the air will spoil it effectually.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Magical Mirrors.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Make two holes in the wainscot of a room, each a foot
+high and ten inches wide, and about a foot distant from each<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_54" id="Page_54">[Pg 54]</a></span>
+other. Let these apertures be about the height of a man's
+head, and in each of them place a transparent glass in a
+frame, like a common mirror.</p>
+
+<p>Behind the partition, and directly facing each aperture, place two
+mirrors enclosed in the wainscot, in an angle of forty-five
+degrees.<a name="FNanchor_A_2" id="FNanchor_A_2"></a><a href="#Footnote_A_2" class="fnanchor">[B]</a>
+These mirrors are each to be eighteen inches square: and
+all the space between them must be enclosed with pasteboard painted
+black, and well closed, that no light can enter; let there be also two
+curtains to cover them, which you may draw aside at pleasure.</p>
+
+<p>When a person looks into one of these fictitious mirrors, instead of
+seeing his own face he will see the object that is in front of the
+other; thus, if two persons stand at the same time before these
+mirrors, instead of each seeing himself; they will reciprocally see
+each other.</p>
+
+<p>There should be a sconce with a lighted candle, placed on each side of
+the two glasses in the wainscot, to enlighten the faces of the persons
+who look in them, or the experiment will not have so remarkable an
+effect.</p>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p><a name="Footnote_A_2" id="Footnote_A_2"></a><a href="#FNanchor_A_2"><span class="label">[B]</span></a>
+That is, half-way between a line drawn perpendicularly to
+the ground and its surface.</p></div>
+
+
+<h4><i>To cause a brilliant Explosion under Water.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Drop a piece of phosphorus, the size of a pea, into a tumbler of hot
+water; and, from a bladder furnished with a stop-cock, force a stream
+of oxygen directly upon it. This will afford a most brilliant
+combustion under water.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Fulminating Mercury.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Dissolve 100 grains of mercury by heat, in an ounce and a half of
+nitric acid. This solution being poured cold upon two measured ounces
+of alcohol previously introduced into any convenient glass vessel, a
+moderate heat is to be applied, till effervescence is excited. A white
+fume then begins to appear on the surface of the liquor, and the
+powder will be gradually precipitated when the action ceases. The
+precipitate is to be immediately collected on a filter, well washed
+with distilled water, and cautiously dried in a heat not exceeding
+that of a water-bath. Washing the powder immediately is material,
+because it is liable to the re-action of the nitric acid; and, while
+any of the acid adheres to it, it is very subject to the action of
+light. From 100 grains of mercury, about 130 of the powder are
+obtained.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_55" id="Page_55">[Pg 55]</a></span>
+This powder, when struck on an anvil with a hammer, explodes with a
+sharp stunning noise, and with such force as to indent both hammer and
+anvil. Three or four grains are sufficient for one experiment.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Iron Tree.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Dissolve iron filings in aqua fortis, moderately concentrated, till
+the acid is saturated; then add to it gradually, a solution of fixed
+alkali, (commonly called oil of tartar per deliquum.) A strong
+effervescence will ensue, and the iron, instead of falling to the
+bottom of the vessel, will afterwards rise so as to cover the sides,
+forming a multitude of ramifications heaped one upon the other, which
+will sometimes pass over the edge of the vessel, and extend themselves
+on the outside, with all the appearance of a plant.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To make any Number divisible by Nine, by adding a
+Figure to it.</i></h4>
+
+<p>If (for example) the number named be 72,857, you tell
+the person who names it to place the number 7 between any
+two figures of that sum, and it will be divisible by 9; for if
+any number be multiplied by 9, the sum of the figures of the
+product will be either 9, or a number divisible by 9.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Arithmetical Squares.</i></h4>
+
+<p>An arithmetical magical square consists of numbers so
+disposed in parallel and equal lines, that the sum of each,
+taken any way of the square, amounts to the same.</p>
+
+<p>Any five of these sums taken in a right line make 65. You will observe
+that five numbers in the diagonals A to D, and B to C, of the magical
+square, answer to the ranks E to F, and G to H, in the natural square,
+and that 13 is the centre number of both squares.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 80%;">
+<img src="images/i_009.jpg" width="100%" alt="" title="" />
+</div>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_56" id="Page_56">[Pg 56]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>To form a magical square, first transpose the two ranks in the natural
+square to the diagonals of the magical square; then place the number 1
+under the central number 13, and the number 2 in the next diagonal
+downward. The number 3 should be placed in the same diagonal line; but
+as there is no room in the square, you are to place it in that part it
+would occupy if another square were placed under this. For the same
+reason, the number 4, by following the diagonal direction, falling out
+of the square, it is to be put into the part it would hold in another
+square, placed by the side of this. You then proceed to numbers 5 and
+6, still descending; but as the place 6 should hold is already filled,
+you then go back to the diagonal, and consequently place the 6 in the
+second place under the 5, so that there may remain an empty space
+between the two numbers. The same rule is to observed, whenever you
+find a space already filled.</p>
+
+<p>You proceed in this manner to fill all the empty cases in the angle
+where the 15 is placed: and as there is no space for the 16 in the
+same diagonal, descending, you must place it in the part it would hold
+in another square, and continue the same plan till all the spaces are
+filled. This method will serve equally for all sorts of arithmetical
+progressions composed of odd numbers; even numbers being too
+complicated to afford any amusement.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To find the Difference between two Numbers, the
+greatest of which is unknown.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Take as many nines as there are figures in the smallest
+number, and subtract that sum from the number of nines.
+Let another person add that difference to the largest number,
+and, taking away the first figure of the amount, add it
+to the last figure, and that sum will be the difference of the
+two numbers.</p>
+
+<p>For example: Robert, who is 22, tells George, who is
+older, that he can discover the difference of their ages; he
+therefore privately deducts 22 from 99, and the difference,
+which is 77, he tells George to add to his age, and to take away
+the first figure from the amount, and add it to the last figure,
+and that last sum will be the difference of their ages. Thus,
+the difference between<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_57" id="Page_57">[Pg 57]</a></span></p>
+
+<table border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" summary="Difference">
+<tr>
+ <td>Robert's age and 99, is</td><td align="right">77</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>To which George adding his age</td><td align="right">35</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td><td align="right">&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>The sum will be</td><td align="right">112</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td><td align="right">&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td><td align="right">12</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td><td align="right">1</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td><td align="right">&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Then by taking away the first figure, 1, and adding it to the last figure, 2, the sum is</td><td align="right">13</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Which added to Robert's age</td><td align="right">22</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td><td align="right">&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Gives George's age, which is</td><td align="right">35</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Boundless Prospect.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Take a square box, about six inches long and twelve high, or of any
+other proportionate dimensions. Cover the inside with four flat pieces
+of looking-glass placed perpendicular to the bottom of the box. Place
+at the bottom any objects you please, as a piece of fortification, a
+castle, tents, soldiers, &amp;c. On the top, place a frame of glass shaped
+like the bottom of a pyramid, as in Fig. 8, and so formed as to fit on
+the box like a cover. The four sides of this cover are to be composed
+of ground glass, or covered inside with gauze, so that the light may
+enter, and yet the inside be invisible, except at the top, which must
+be covered with transparent glass: when you look through this glass,
+the inside will present a pleasing prospect of a boundless extent;
+and, if managed with care, will afford a deal of amusement.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 70%;">
+<span class="caption">Fig. 8.</span>
+<img src="images/i_010.jpg" width="100%" alt="Fig. 8." title="Fig. 8." />
+</div>
+
+
+<h4><i>To set Fire to a combustible Body by Reflection.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Place two concave mirrors at about twelve feet distance
+from each other, and let the axis of each be in the same
+line. In the focus of one of them place a live coal, and
+in the focus of the other some gunpowder. With a pair of<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_58" id="Page_58">[Pg 58]</a></span>
+strong bellows keep blowing the coal, and notwithstanding the
+distance between them, the powder will presently take fire.</p>
+
+<p>The mirror may be either made of glass, metal, or pasteboard
+gilt.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To find the Number of Changes that may be rung on Twelve Bells.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Multiply the numbers from 1 to 12 continually into each
+other, as follow: and the last product will give the number
+required.</p>
+
+<p style='text-align:right; margin-right: 50%;'>
+<span style="margin-left: 5em;">1</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 5em;">2</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 5em;">&mdash;&mdash;</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 5em;">2</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 5em;">3</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 5em;">&mdash;&mdash;</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 5em;">6</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 5em;">4</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 5em;">&mdash;&mdash;</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 5em;">24</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 5em;">5</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 5em;">&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 5em;">120</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 5em;">6</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 5em;">&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 5em;">720</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 5em;">7</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 5em;">&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 5em;">5,040</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 5em;">8</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 5em;">&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 5em;">40,320</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 5em;">9</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 5em;">&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 5em;">362,880</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 5em;">10</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 5em;">&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 5em;">3,628,800</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 5em;">11</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 5em;">&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 5em;">39,916,800</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 5em;">12</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 5em;">&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 5em;">479,001,600</span><br />
+</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_59" id="Page_59">[Pg 59]</a></span></p>
+
+<h4><i>To find how many square Yards it would require to
+write all the Changes of the Twenty-four Letters of
+the Alphabet, written so small, that each Letter
+should not occupy more than the hundredth part
+of a square Inch.</i></h4>
+
+<p>By adopting the plan of the preceding article, the changes
+of the twenty-four letters will be found to be</p>
+
+<div class="blockquot"><p>62,044,840,173,323,943,936,000.</p></div>
+
+<p>Now, the inches in a square yard being 1,296, that number multiplied
+by 100 gives 129,600, which is the number of letters each square yard
+will contain; therefore, if we divide the above row of figures,
+(the number of changes,) by 129,600, the quotient, which is
+478,741,050,720,092,160, will be the number of yards required to
+contain the above mentioned number of changes. But as all the 24
+letters are contained in every permutation, it will require a space
+24 times as large, <i>viz.</i>,</p>
+
+<div class="blockquot"><p>11,849,785,210,282,211,840.</p></div>
+
+<p>Now, as the surface of the whole globe only contains
+617,197,435,008,000 square yards, it would require a surface
+18,620 times as large as the earth to contain them.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Enchanted Bottle.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Fill a glass bottle with water to the beginning of the
+neck; leave the neck empty, and cork it. Suspend this
+bottle opposite a concave mirror, and beyond its focus, that
+it may appear reversed. Place yourself still further distant
+from the bottle; and instead of the water appearing, as it
+really is, at the bottom of the bottle, the bottom will be empty,
+and the water seen at the top.</p>
+
+<p>If the bottle be suspended with the neck downwards, it
+will be reflected in its natural position, and the water at
+the bottom, although in reality it is inverted, and fills the
+neck; leaving the bottom vacant. While the bottle is in this
+position, uncork it, and let the water run gradually out: it
+will appear, that while the real bottle is emptying, the
+reflected one is filling. Care must be taken that the bottle
+is not more than half or three parts full, and that no other
+liquid is used but water, as in either of these cases the illusion
+ceases.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_60" id="Page_60">[Pg 60]</a></span></p>
+
+<h4><i>The Solar Magic Lantern.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Make a box, a foot high, eighteen inches wide, and about three inches
+deep. Two of the opposite sides of this box must be quite open, and in
+each of the other sides let there be a groove wide enough to admit a
+stiff paper or pasteboard. You fasten the box against a window, on
+which the sun's rays fall direct. The rest of the window should be
+closed up, that no light may enter.</p>
+
+<p>Next provide several sheets of stiff paper, blacked on one side. On
+these papers cut out such figures as your fancy may dictate; place
+them alternately in the grooves of the box, with their blacked sides
+towards you, and look at them through a large and clear glass prism;
+and if the light be strong, they will appear painted with the most
+lively colours. If you cut on one of these papers the form of a
+rainbow, about three-quarters of an inch wide, you will have a very
+good representation of the natural one.</p>
+
+<p>For greater convenience, the prism may be placed on a stand on the
+table, made to turn round on an axis.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Artificial Rainbow.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Opposite a window into which the sun shines direct suspend a glass
+globe, filled with clean water, by means of a string that runs over a
+pulley, so that the sun's rays may fall on it. Then drawing the globe
+gradually up, you will observe, when it comes to a certain height, and
+by placing yourself in a proper situation, a purple colour in the
+glass; and by drawing it up gradually higher, the other prismatic
+colours, blue, green, yellow, and red, will successively appear; after
+which, the colours will disappear, till the globe is raised to about
+fifty degrees, when they will again appear, but in an inverted order,
+the red appearing first, and the blue or violet last; on raising the
+globe a little higher, they will totally vanish.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The &AElig;olipiles.</i></h4>
+
+<p>The &aelig;olipile is a small hollow globe of brass, or other
+metal, in which a slender neck or pipe is inserted. This
+ball, when made red-hot, is cast into a vessel of water,
+which will rush into its cavity, then almost void of air.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_61" id="Page_61">[Pg 61]</a></span>
+The ball being then set on the fire, the water, by the rarefaction
+of the internal air, will be forced out in steam by fits,
+with great violence, and with strange noise.</p>
+
+<p>If to the necks of two or more of these balls, there be
+fitted those calls that are used by fowlers and hunters, and
+the balls placed on the fire, the steam rushing from them
+will make such a horrible noise, that it will astonish any
+person who is ignorant of the contrivance.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Talking Busts.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Procure two busts of plaster of Paris; place them on pedestals, on the
+opposite sides of the room. Let a thin tube, of an inch diameter, pass
+from the ear of one head through the pedestal, under the floor, and go
+up to the mouth of the other; taking care that the end of the tube
+that is next the ear of the one head, be considerably larger than that
+end which comes to the mouth of the other.</p>
+
+<p>Now, when a person speaks quite low into the ear of one
+bust, the sound is reverberated through the length of the
+tube, and will be distinctly heard by any one placing his
+ear to the mouth of the other. It is not necessary that the
+tube should come to the lips of the bust. If there be two
+tubes, one going to the ear, and the other to the mouth of
+each head, two persons may converse together, by whispers,
+without the knowledge of any person who may stand in the
+middle of the room.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Inanimate Oracle.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Place a bust on a pedestal in the corner of a room, and
+let there be two tubes, as in the preceding article, one to go
+from the mouth, and the other from the ear, through the
+pedestal and the floor to an under apartment; there may be
+also wires, that go from the under jaw and the eyes of the
+bust, by which they may be easily moved.</p>
+
+<p>A person being placed in the room underneath, and applying his ear to
+one of the tubes at a signal given, will hear any question asked, and
+can immediately reply, by applying his mouth to the tube which
+communicates below, at the same time moving the eyes by the wire, to
+accompany his speech.</p>
+
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_62" id="Page_62">[Pg 62]</a></span></p>
+<h4><i>The Solar Concerto.</i></h4>
+
+<p>In a large case, similar to what is used for dials and spring clocks,
+the front of which, or at least the lower part, must be of glass,
+covered on the inside with gauze, place a barrel organ, which when
+wound up is prevented from playing by a catch that takes a toothed
+wheel at the end of the barrel. To one end of this catch join a wire,
+at the end of which is a flat circle of cork, of the same dimensions
+with the inside of a glass tube, in which it is to rise and fall. This
+tube must communicate with a reservoir that goes across the front part
+of the bottom of the case, which is to be filled with spirits, such as
+is used in thermometers.</p>
+
+<p>This case being placed in the sun, the spirits will be rarefied by the
+heat, and, rising in the tube, will lift up the catch or trigger, and
+set the organ in play; which will continue as long as it is kept in
+the sun; for the spirits cannot run out of the tube, that part of the
+catch to which the circle is fixed being prevented from rising beyond
+a certain point, by a check placed over it. Care must be taken to
+remove the machine out of the sun before the organ runs down, that its
+stopping may be evidently affected by the cold.</p>
+
+<p>In winter it will perform when placed before the fire.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2>CURIOUS EXPERIMENTS WITH THE MAGIC LANTERN.</h2>
+
+
+<p>The construction of this amusing optical machine is so well known,
+that to describe it would be superfluous; particularly as it can now
+be purchased at a very reasonable expense, at any of the opticians':
+but as many persons who have a taste for drawing might not be pleased
+with the designs to be had at the shops, or might wish to indulge
+their fancy in a variety of objects, which to purchase would become
+expensive, we here present our readers, in the first place, with the
+method of drawing them, which will<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_63" id="Page_63">[Pg 63]</a></span> be succeeded by a plain
+description of some very diverting experiments.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Of Painting the Glasses.</i></h4>
+
+<p>You first draw on a paper, the size of the glass, the subject you mean
+to paint; fasten this at each end of the glass with paste, or any
+other cement, to prevent it from slipping. Then with some very black
+paint mixed with varnish, draw with a fine camels'-hair pencil, very
+lightly, the outlines sketched on the paper, which, of course, are
+reflected through the glass. Some persons affirm that those outlines
+can be more readily traced with japan writing ink, and a common pen
+with a fine nib; but this, even if it succeeds in making a delicate
+black outline, is sure to be effaced by damp or wet.</p>
+
+<p>It would improve the natural resemblance, if the outlines were drawn
+with a strong tint of each of the natural colours of the object; but
+in this respect you may please your own fancy. When the outlines are
+dry, colour and shade your figures; but observe, to temper your
+colours with strong white varnish. A pleasing effect will be produced,
+if you leave strong lights in some parts of the drapery, &amp;c., without
+any colours. The best colours for this purpose are transparent ones;
+opaque or mineral colours will not do. The following are in most
+repute.</p>
+
+<table border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" summary="Glass Painting">
+<tr>
+ <td>For </td><td>Pink and crimson &nbsp; &nbsp; </td><td>Lake or carmine.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td><td>Blue</td><td>Prussian blue.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td><td>Green</td><td>Calcined verdigris, or distilled ditto.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td><td>Yellow</td><td>Gamboge.</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<h4><i>To represent a Storm at Sea.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Provide two strips of glass, whose frames are thin enough
+to admit both strips freely into the groove of the lantern.
+On one of these glasses paint the appearance of the sea from a
+smooth calm to a violent storm. Let these representations
+run gradually into each other, as in Fig. 9, and you will
+of course observe, that the more natural and picturesque
+the painting is, the more natural and pleasing will be the
+reflection.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_64" id="Page_64">[Pg 64]</a></span></p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 80%;">
+<span class="caption">Fig. 9.</span>
+<img src="images/i_011_b.jpg" width="100%" alt="Fig. 9." title="Fig. 9." />
+</div>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 80%;">
+<span class="caption">Fig. 10.</span>
+<img src="images/i_011_a.jpg" width="100%" alt="Fig. 10." title="Fig. 10." />
+</div>
+
+
+<p>On the other glass, Fig.
+10, paint various vessels on
+the ocean, observing to let
+that end where the storm is,
+appear in a state of violent
+commotion, and the vessels
+as if raised on the waves in
+an unsettled position, with
+heavy clouds about them.</p>
+
+<p>You then pass the glasses
+slowly through the groove,
+and when you come to that
+part where the storm is supposed
+to begin, move them
+gently up and down, which
+will give the appearance of
+the sea and vessels being
+agitated; increase the motion
+till they come to the
+height of the storm. You
+will thus have a very natural
+representation of the sea and
+ships in a calm and storm;
+and as you gradually draw
+the glasses back, the tempest
+will subside, the sky appear
+clear, and the vessels glide
+gently over the waves.</p>
+
+<p>By the means of two or
+three glasses, you may also
+represent a battle on land, or
+a naval engagement, with a
+variety of other pleasing experiments.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To produce the appearance of a Spectre on a Pedestal
+in the middle of a Table.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Enclose a small magic lantern in a box, Fig. 11, large
+enough to contain a small swing dressing-glass, which will
+reflect the light thrown on it by the lantern in such a way,
+that it will pass out at the aperture made at the top of the
+box; which aperture should be oval, and of a size adapted
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_65" id="Page_65">[Pg 65]</a></span>
+to the cone of light to pass through it. There should be a
+flap with hinges, to cover the opening, that the inside of the
+box may not be seen.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 80%;">
+<span class="caption">Fig. 11.</span>
+<img src="images/i_012.jpg" width="100%" alt="Fig. 11." title="Fig. 11." />
+</div>
+
+<p>There must be holes in that part of the box which is over
+the lantern, to let the smoke out; and over this must be
+placed a chafing-dish of an oblong figure, large enough to
+hold several lighted coals. This chafing-dish, for the better
+carrying on the deception, may be enclosed in a painted tin
+box, about a foot high, with a hole at top, and should stand
+on four feet, to let the smoke from the lantern escape.</p>
+
+<p>There must also be a glass planned to rise up and down
+in the groove <i>a b</i>, and so managed by a cord and pulley,
+<i>c d e f</i>, that it may be raised up and let down by the cord
+coming through the outside of the box. On this glass, the
+spectre, (or any other figure you please,) must be painted
+in a contracted or equal form, as the figure will reflect a
+greater length than it is drawn.</p>
+
+<p>When you have lighted the lamp in the lantern, and placed
+the mirror in a proper direction, put the box on a table, and,
+setting the chafing-dish in it, throw some incense, in powder,
+on the coals. You then open the trap door and let down the
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_66" id="Page_66">[Pg 66]</a></span>
+glass in the groove slowly, and when you perceive the smoke
+diminish, draw up the glass, that the figure may disappear,
+and shut the trap door.</p>
+
+<p>This exhibition will afford a deal of wonder; but observe,
+that all the lights in the room must be extinguished; and the
+box should be placed on a high table, that the aperture through
+which the light comes out may not be seen.</p>
+
+<p>There are many other pleasing experiments which may
+be made with the magic lantern, but the limits of our work
+will not permit us to specify them, without excluding many
+other equally interesting subjects of a different nature.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Artificial Landscape.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Procure a box, as in Fig. 12, of about a foot long, eight
+inches wide, and six inches high, or any other dimensions
+you please, so they do not greatly vary from these proportions.
+At each of its opposite ends, on the inside of this box, place
+a piece of looking-glass that shall exactly fit: but at that end
+where the sight hole A is, scrape the quicksilver off the glass,
+through which the eye can view the objects.</p>
+
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 80%;">
+<span class="caption">Fig. 12.</span>
+<img src="images/i_013.jpg" width="100%" alt="Fig. 12." title="Fig. 12." />
+</div>
+
+<p>Cover the box with gauze, over which place a piece of
+transparent glass, which is to be well fastened in. Let there
+be two grooves at each of the places C D E F, to receive two
+printed scenes, as follow: On two pieces of pasteboard, let
+there be skilfully painted, on both sides, any subject you
+think proper, as woods, bowers, gardens, houses, &amp;c.; and on
+two other boards, the same subjects on one side only, and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_67" id="Page_67">[Pg 67]</a></span>
+cut out all the white parts: observe also, that there ought to
+be in one of them some object relative to the subject, placed
+at A, that the mirror placed at B may not reflect the hole on
+the opposite side.</p>
+
+<p>The boards painted on both sides are to slide in the grooves
+C D E F, and those painted on one side are to be placed
+against the opposite mirrors A and B; then cover the box
+with its transparent top. This box should be placed in a
+strong light, to have a good effect.</p>
+
+<p>When it is viewed through the sight hole, it will present an unlimited
+prospect of rural scenery, gradually losing itself in obscurity; and
+be found well worth the pains bestowed on its construction.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To draw, easily and correctly, a Landscape, or any other Object,
+without being obliged to observe the Rules of Perspective, and without
+the Aid of the Camera Obscura.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Procure a box of pasteboard, A B C D, Fig. 13, of about
+a foot and a half long, and made in the shape of a truncated
+pyramid, whose base, B D F G, is eight inches wide, and
+six inches high. Fix to the other end of it a tube of four or
+five inches long, and which you can draw out from the box
+more or less. Line the inside of the box with black paper,
+and place it on a leg or stand of wood, H, and on which it
+may be elevated or depressed by the hinge I.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 80%;">
+<span class="caption">Fig. 13.</span>
+<img src="images/i_014.jpg" width="100%" alt="Fig. 13." title="Fig. 13." />
+</div>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_68" id="Page_68">[Pg 68]</a></span>
+Take a small frame of wood, and divide it at every inch
+by lines of black silk drawn across it, forming forty-eight
+equal parts; divide these into still smaller equal parts, by
+lines of finer silk:<a name="FNanchor_A_3" id="FNanchor_A_3"></a><a href="#Footnote_A_3" class="fnanchor">[C]</a>
+fix this frame at the end of B D, as the base of the pyramid.</p>
+
+<p>Provide a drawing-paper, divided into the same number
+of parts as in the frame, by lines, lightly drawn in pencil. It
+is not material of what size these divisions are; that will
+depend entirely on the size you propose to draw the objects
+by this instrument.</p>
+
+<p>Place this instrument opposite a landscape, or any other
+object that you want to draw, and fix the leg firmly on, or in
+the ground, that it may not shake; then turning it to the side
+you choose, raise or incline it, and put the tube further in or
+out, till you have gained an advantageous view of the object
+you intend to draw.</p>
+
+<p>Place your eye, E, by the instrument, which you have adjusted to the
+height of your eye, and, looking through the tube, carefully observe
+all that is contained in each division of the frame, and transpose it
+to the corresponding division in your paper; and if you have the least
+knowledge in painting or even drawing, you will make a very pleasing
+picture, and one in which all the objects will appear in the most
+exact proportion.</p>
+
+<p>By the same method you may draw all sorts of objects, as architecture,
+views, &amp;c., and even human figures, if they remain some time in the
+same attitude, and are at a proper distance from the instrument.</p>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p><a name="Footnote_A_3" id="Footnote_A_3"></a><a href="#FNanchor_A_3"><span class="label">[C]</span></a>
+The different thicknesses of the silk serve to
+distinguish more readily the corresponding divisions.</p></div>
+
+
+<h4><i>Illuminated Prospects.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Provide yourself with some of those prints that are commonly used in
+optical machines, printed on very thin white paper; taking care to
+make choice of such as have the greatest effect from the manner in
+which the objects are placed in perspective. Place one of these on the
+borders of a frame, and paint it carefully with the most lively
+colours, making use of none that are terrestrial. Observe to retouch
+those parts several times where the engraving is
+strongest,<a name="FNanchor_B_4" id="FNanchor_B_4"></a><a href="#Footnote_B_4" class="fnanchor">[D]</a>
+then cut off the upper part or sky, and fix that on another frame.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_69" id="Page_69">[Pg 69]</a></span>
+The prints being thus prepared, place them in a box,
+A B C D, Figs. 14 and 15, the opening to which, E F G H,
+should be a little less than the print. Cover this opening with
+a glass, and paint all the space between that and the prints,
+which should be about two or three inches, black. The frame
+that contains the sky should be about an inch behind the
+other. In the back part of this box, which is behind the
+prints, and which may be about four inches deep, place four
+or five small candlesticks to hold wax lights, and cover that
+part entirely with tin, that it may be the more luminous.</p>
+
+<table border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" summary="Figures" width="90%">
+<tr><td>
+<div class="figleft" style="width: 100%;">
+<span class="caption">Fig. 14.</span>
+<img src="images/i_015_a.jpg" width="100%" alt="Fig. 14." title="Fig. 14." />
+</div>
+</td><td>
+<div class="figright" style="width: 100%;">
+<span class="caption">Fig. 15.</span>
+<img src="images/i_015_b.jpg" width="100%" alt="Fig. 15." title="Fig. 15." />
+</div>
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+<p>When the print is placed between the wax lights and the
+opening in the front of the box, and there is no other light
+in the room, the effect will be highly pleasing; especially if
+the lights are at a sufficient distance from each other, and
+not too strong, that they may not occasion any blots in the
+print. Those prints that represent the rising or setting of the
+sun will have a very picturesque appearance. Such as represent
+conflagrations have also a striking effect.</p>
+
+<p>There should be two grooves for the print next the glass,
+that you may insert a second subject before you draw away
+the first; and that the lights in the back of the box may not
+be discovered.</p>
+
+<p>You must not, thinking to make the print more transparent,
+cover it with varnish; for that will prevent the gradation of
+the colours from being visible. The frame should enter the
+side of the box by a groove, that a variety of subjects may
+be introduced.</p>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p><a name="Footnote_B_4" id="Footnote_B_4"></a><a href="#FNanchor_B_4"><span class="label">[D]</span></a>
+When you colour a print, place it before you, against a
+piece of glass, in a position nearly erect, that it may be enlightened
+by the sun. You may also colour both sides of the print.</p></div>
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_70" id="Page_70">[Pg 70]</a></span></p>
+<h2>EXPERIMENTS IN MAGNETISM.</h2>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Magnetic Wand.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Bore a hole three-tenths of an inch in diameter, through a round stick
+of wood; or get a hollow cane about eight inches long, and half an
+inch thick. Provide a small steel rod, and let it be very strongly
+impregnated with a good magnet: this rod is to be put in the hole you
+have bored through the wand, and closed at each end by two small ends
+of ivory that screw on, different in their shapes, that you may better
+distinguish the poles of the magnetic bar.</p>
+
+<p>When you present the north pole of this wand to the
+south<a name="FNanchor_A_5" id="FNanchor_A_5"></a><a href="#Footnote_A_5" class="fnanchor">[E]</a>
+pole of a magnetic needle, suspended on a pivot, or to a light body swimming on
+the surface of the water, (in which you have placed a magnetic bar,)
+that body will approach the wand, and present that end which contains
+the south end of the bar: but if you present the north or south end of
+the wand to the north or south end of the needle, it will recede from
+it.</p>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p><a name="Footnote_A_5" id="Footnote_A_5"></a><a href="#FNanchor_A_5"><span class="label">[E]</span></a>
+For the more clearly explaining this, it is to be
+observed, that the two ends of a magnet are called its poles. When
+placed on a pivot, in just equilibrium, that end which turns to the
+north is called the north pole, and the other end the south pole.</p></div>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Mysterious Watch.</i></h4>
+
+<p>You desire any person to lend you his watch, and ask him if it will go
+when laid on the table. He will, no doubt, say it will; in which case,
+you place it over the end of the magnet, and it will presently stop.
+You then mark the precise spot where you placed the watch, and, moving
+the point of the magnet, you give the watch to another person, and
+desire him to make the experiment; in which he not succeeding, you
+give it to a third (at the same time replacing the magnet) and he will
+immediately perform it.</p>
+
+<p>This experiment cannot be effected, unless you use a very strongly
+impregnated magnetic bar, (which may be purchased at the opticians',)
+and the balance of the watch must be of steel, which may be easily
+ascertained by previously opening it, and looking at the works.</p>
+
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_71" id="Page_71">[Pg 71]</a></span></p>
+<h4><i>The Magnetic Dial.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Procure a circle of wood or ivory, about 5 or 6 inches diameter, which
+must turn quite free on a stand with a circular border; on the ivory
+or wood circle fix a pasteboard, on which you place, in proper
+divisions, the hours, as on a dial. There must be a small groove in
+the circular frame, to receive the pasteboard circle; and observe,
+that the dial must be made to turn so free, that it may go round
+without moving the circular border in which it is placed.</p>
+
+<p>Between the pasteboard circle and the bottom of the frame,
+place a small artificial magnet, that has a hole in its middle.
+On the outside of the frame, place a small pin, which serves
+to show when the magnetic needle is to stop. This needle
+must turn quite free on its pivot, and its two sides should be
+in exact equilibrium.</p>
+
+<p>Then provide a small bag, with five or six divisions, like a lady's
+work-bag, but smaller. In one of these divisions put small square
+pieces of pasteboard, on which are written the numbers from 1 to 12.
+In each of the other divisions put twelve or more similar pieces,
+observing that all the pieces in each division must be marked with the
+same number. The needle being placed upon its pivot, and turned
+quickly about, it will necessarily stop at that point where the north
+end of the magnetic bar is placed, and which you previously know, by
+the situation of the small pin in the circular border.</p>
+
+<p>You then present to any person that division of the bag
+which contains the several pieces on which is written the
+number opposite to the north end of the bar, and tell him to
+draw any one he pleases. Then placing the needle on the
+pivot, you turn it quickly about, and it must necessarily stop
+at that particular number.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Magnetic Cards.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Draw a pasteboard circle; you then provide yourself with two needles,
+similar to those used in the foregoing experiment, (which you must
+distinguish by some private mark,) with their opposite points touched
+with the magnet. When you place that needle whose pointed end is
+touched, on the pivot described in the centre of the circle, it will
+stop on one of the four pips, against which you have placed the pin
+in<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_72" id="Page_72">[Pg 72]</a></span> the frame; then take the needle off, and, placing the other, it
+will stop on the opposite point.</p>
+
+<p>Having matters thus arranged, desire a person to draw a card from a
+piquet pack, offering that card against which you have placed the pin
+of the dial, which you may easily do, by having a card a little longer
+than the rest. If he should not draw it the first time, as he probably
+may not, you must make some excuse for shuffling them again, such as
+letting the cards fall, as if by accident, or some other man&#339;uvre,
+until he fix on the card. You then tell him to keep it close, and not
+let it be seen. Then give him one of the two needles, and desire him
+to place it on the pivot, and turn it round, when it will stop at the
+colour of the card he chose; then taking that needle off, and
+exchanging it, unperceived, for the other, give it to a second person,
+telling him to do the same, and it will stop at the name of the
+identical card the first person chose.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Magnetic Orrery.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Construct a round box, Fig. 16, about eight inches diameter, and half
+an inch deep. On the bottom fix a circular pasteboard drawn like the
+figure. You are likewise to have another pasteboard, drawn exactly the
+same, which must turn freely in the box, by means of an axis placed on
+a pivot, one end of which is to be fixed in the centre of the circle.</p>
+
+<p>On each of the seven smaller circles on the pasteboard, which you have
+fixed at the bottom of the box, place a magnetic bar, two inches long,
+in the same direction with the diameters of those circles, and their
+poles, in the situations expressed in the figure.</p>
+
+<p>There must be an index like the hour hand of a dial, fixed on the axis
+of the central circle, by which the pasteboard circle in the box may
+be turned about; also a needle (forming in the figure the other hand)
+that will turn freely on the axis, without moving the circular
+pasteboard.</p>
+
+<p>In each of the places where the word <i>question</i> is, write a different
+question; and in each of the seven circles where the planetary signs
+are, write two answers to each question; observing, that there must
+only be seven words in each question: for instance,</p>
+
+<p>In division No. 1, of the circle G, which stands opposite<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_73" id="Page_73">[Pg 73]</a></span> question
+No. 1, write the first word of the first answer. In the division No.
+2, of the next circle, write the second word; and so on to the last,
+which will be in the seventh division of the seventh circle.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 80%;">
+<span class="caption">Fig. 16.</span>
+<img src="images/i_016.jpg" width="100%" alt="Fig. 16." title="Fig. 16." />
+</div>
+
+<p>In the eighth division of the first circle, write the first word of
+the second answer; in the ninth, the second word of the same answer;
+and so on to the fourteenth division of the seventh circle, which must
+contain the last word of that answer.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_74" id="Page_74">[Pg 74]</a></span></p><p>The same must be done for all the seven questions, and to each of
+these must be assigned two answers, the words of which are to be
+dispersed through the seven circles.</p>
+
+<p>At the centre of each of these circles place a pivot, and have two
+sets of magnetic needles like the hands of a watch, the pointed end of
+one set being north, and the other south.</p>
+
+<p>Now, the index of the central circle being directed to any one of the
+questions, if you place one of the two magnetic needles on each of the
+seven lesser circles, they will fix themselves according to the
+directions of the bars on the corresponding circles at the bottom of
+the box, and consequently point to the seven words that compose the
+answer. If you place one of the other needles on each circle, it will
+point to the words that are diametrically opposite to those of the
+first answer, the north pole being in the place of the south pole of
+the other.</p>
+
+<p>You therefore present this orrery to any person, and desire him to
+choose one of the questions there written. You then set the index of
+the central circle to that question; and, putting one of the needles
+on each of the seven circles, you turn it about, and when they all
+settle, the seven words they point to compose the answer.</p>
+
+<p>The moveable needle, whose point in the figure stands at September, is
+to place against the names of the months; and when the party has fixed
+upon a question, you place that needle against the month in which he
+was born, which will make the ceremony appear a sort of magic
+divination. The planetary signs are merely intended to aid this
+deception, and give it the appearance of astrology.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Magic Verse.</i></h4>
+
+<p>The eight words which compose this Latin verse,</p>
+
+<div class="blockquot"><p>
+"<i>Tot sunt tibi dote, quot c&#339;li sidera, virgo,</i>"<a name="FNanchor_A_6" id="FNanchor_A_6"></a><a href="#Footnote_A_6" class="fnanchor">[F]</a><br />
+</p></div>
+
+<p>being privately placed in any one of the different combinations of
+which they are susceptible, and which are 40,320 in number, to tell
+the order in which they are placed.</p>
+
+<p>Provide a box that shuts with hinges, and is eight inches
+long, three wide, and half an inch deep, Fig. 17. Have eight
+pieces of wood, about one-third of an inch thick, two inches
+long, and one and a half wide, which will therefore, when
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_75" id="Page_75">[Pg 75]</a></span>
+placed close together, exactly fill the box. In each of these pieces
+or tablets place a magnetic bar, with their poles, as is expressed in
+Fig. 18. The bars being covered over, write on each of the tablets, in
+the order they then stand, one of the words of the foregoing Latin
+verse.</p>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p><a name="Footnote_A_6" id="Footnote_A_6"></a><a href="#FNanchor_A_6"><span class="label">[F]</span></a>
+"Thy charms, O, Virgin! are as numerous as the stars of heaven."</p></div>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 80%;">
+<span class="caption">Fig. 17.</span>
+<img src="images/i_017.jpg" width="100%" alt="Fig. 17." title="Fig. 17." />
+</div>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 80%;">
+<span class="caption">Fig. 18.</span>
+<img src="images/i_018.jpg" width="100%" alt="Fig. 18." title="Fig. 18." />
+</div>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_76" id="Page_76">[Pg 76]</a></span>
+On a very thin board of the same dimensions with the box, draw the
+eight circles, Fig. 19, A B C D E F G H, whose centres should be
+exactly over those of the eight tablets in the box, when the board is
+placed upon it. Divide each of those circles into eight parts, as in
+the figure, and in each of those divisions write one of the words of
+the Latin verse, and in the precise order expressed in the plate, so
+that when the board is placed over the box, the eight touched needles
+placed at the centre of the circles may be regulated by the poles of
+the bars in the box, and consequently the word that the needle points
+to in the circle will be the same with that inscribed on the tablet.
+Cover the board with a glass, to prevent the needles from rising off
+their pivots, as is done in the sea-compass.</p>
+
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 80%;">
+<span class="caption">Fig. 19.</span>
+<img src="images/i_019.jpg" width="100%" alt="Fig. 19." title="Fig. 19." />
+</div>
+
+<p>Over the board place four plates of glass, I L M N, Fig. 17, which
+will give the machine the figure of a truncated pyramid, of eight
+inches high. Cover it with a glass, or rather a board, in which are
+placed two lenses, O, of eight inches focus, and distant from each
+other about half an inch. Line the four plates of glass that compose
+the sides with very thin paper, that will admit the light, and at the
+same time prevent the company from seeing the circles on the board.</p>
+
+<p>These preparations being made, you give the box to any one, and tell
+him to place the tablets, on which the words are written privately, in
+what position he thinks proper, then to close the box, and, if he
+please, to wrap it up in paper,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_77" id="Page_77">[Pg 77]</a></span> seal it, and give it to you. Then
+placing the board with the pyramid upon it, you immediately tell him
+the order in which the tablets are placed, by reading the words to
+which the needles on the circles point.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2>INTERESTING EXPERIMENTS WITH THE AIR-PUMP.</h2>
+
+
+<p>We shall not occupy the time of our readers by describing
+the form and nature of the air-pump; since those persons
+whose circumstances will enable them to have it, can purchase
+it properly made at an optician's, at less expense, and
+with far less trouble, than they can construct, or cause it to
+be constructed, themselves.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Bottles broken by Air.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Take a square bottle of thin glass, and of any size. Apply
+it to the hole of the air-pump, and exhaust the air. The bottle
+will sustain the weight of the external air as long as it is able,
+but at length it will suddenly burst into very small particles,
+and with a loud explosion.</p>
+
+<p>An opposite effect will be produced, if the mouth of a bottle
+be sealed so close that no air can escape; then place it
+in the receiver, and exhaust the air from its surface. The
+air which is confined within the bottle, when the external air
+is drawn off, will act so powerfully as to break the bottle
+into pieces.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Glass broken by Air.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Lay a square of glass on the top of an open receiver, and
+exhaust the air. The weight of the external air will press
+on the glass, and smash it to atoms.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Hand fixed by Air.</i></h4>
+
+<p>If a person hold his hand on an open receiver, and the
+air be exhausted, it will be fixed as if pressed by a weight of
+sixty pounds.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_78" id="Page_78">[Pg 78]</a></span></p>
+
+<h4><i>Water boiled by Air.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Take water made so warm that you can just bear your hand in it, but
+that has not been boiled; put it under the receiver, and exhaust the
+air. Bubbles of air will soon be seen to rise, at first very small,
+but presently become larger, and will be at last so great, and rise
+with such rapidity, as to give the water the appearance of boiling.
+This will continue till the air is let into the receiver, when it will
+instantly cease.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>A&euml;rial Bubbles.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Take a stone, or any heavy substance, and putting it in a
+large glass with water, place it in the receiver. The air being
+exhausted, the spring of that which is in the pores of the
+solid body, by expanding the particles, will make them rise
+on its surface in numberless globules, which resemble the
+pearly drops of dew on the tops of the grass. The effect
+ceases when the air is let into the receiver.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The floating Stone.</i></h4>
+
+<p>To a piece of cork tie a small stone that will just sink it; and,
+putting it in a vessel of water, place it under the receiver. Then
+exhausting the receiver, the bubbles of air will expand from its
+pores, and, adhering to its surface, will render it, together with the
+stone, lighter than water, and consequently they will rise to the
+surface, and float.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Withered Fruit restored.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Take a shrivelled apple, and, placing it under the receiver, exhaust
+the air. The apple will immediately be plumped up, and look as fresh
+as when first gathered: for this reason, that the pressure of the
+external air being taken off, the air in the apple extends it, so much
+indeed that it will sometimes burst. If the air be let into the
+receiver, the apple will be restored to its pristine shrivelled state.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Vegetable Air-Bubbles.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Put a small branch of the tree with its leaves, or part of a
+small plant, in a vessel of water, and, placing the vessel in
+the receiver, exhaust the air.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_79" id="Page_79">[Pg 79]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>When the pressure of the external air is taken off, the spring of that
+contained in the air-vessels of the plant, by expanding the particles,
+will make them rise from the orifices of all the vessels for a long
+time together, and produce a most beautiful appearance.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Mercurial Wand.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Take a piece of stick, cut it even at each end with a penknife, and
+immerse it in a vessel of mercury. When the air is pumped out of the
+receiver, it will at the same time come out of the pores of the wood,
+through the mercury, as will be visible at each end of the stick. When
+the air is again let into the receiver, it falls on the surface of the
+mercury, and forces it into the pores of the wood, to possess the
+place of the air.</p>
+
+<p>When the rod is taken out, it will be found considerably heavier than
+before, and that it has changed its colour, being now all over of a
+bluish hue. If cut transversely, the quicksilver will be seen to
+glitter in every part of it.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Magic Bell.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Fix a small bell to the wire that goes through the top of the
+receiver. If you shake the wire, the bell will ring while the air is
+in the receiver; but when the air is drawn off, the sound will by
+degrees become faint, till at last not the least noise can be heard.
+As you let the air in again, the sound returns.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Feathers heavier than Lead.</i></h4>
+
+<p>At one end of a fine balance, hang a piece of lead, and at the other
+as many feathers as will poise it; then place the balance in the
+receiver. As the air is exhausted, the feathers will appear to
+overweigh the lead, and when all the air is drawn off, the feathers
+will preponderate, and the lead ascend.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The self-moving Wheel.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Take a circle of tin, about ten inches in diameter, or of any other
+size that will go into the receiver, and to its circumference fix a
+number of tin vanes, each about an inch square. Let this wheel be
+placed between two upright<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_80" id="Page_80">[Pg 80]</a></span> pieces on an axis, whose extremities are
+quite small, so that the wheel may turn in a vertical position with
+the least possible force. Place the wheel and axis in the receiver,
+and exhaust the air. Let there be a small pipe with a cock; one end of
+the pipe to be outside the top of the receiver, and the other to come
+directly over the vanes of the wheel.</p>
+
+<p>When the air is exhausted, turn the cock, and a current will rush
+against the vanes of the wheel, and set it in motion, which will
+increase, till the receiver is filled with air.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Artificial Halo.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Place a candle on one side of the receiver, and let the spectator
+place himself at a distance from the other side. Directly the air
+begins to be exhausted, the light of the candle will be refracted in
+circles of various colours.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Mercurial Shower.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Cement a piece of wood into the lower part of the neck of an open
+receiver, and pour mercury over it. After a few strokes of the pump,
+the pressure of the air on the mercury will force it through the pores
+of the wood in the form of a beautiful shower. If you take care that
+the receiver is clear and free from spots or dust, and it is dry
+weather, it will appear like a fiery shower, when exhibited in a dark
+room.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Magic Fountain.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Take a tall glass tube, hermetically sealed both at top and bottom, by
+means of a brass cap screwed on to a stop-cock, and place it on the
+plate of the pump. When the air is exhausted, turn the cock, take the
+tube off the plate, and plunge it into a basin of mercury or water.
+Then the cock being again turned, the fluid, by the pressure of the
+air, will play upon the tube in the form of a beautiful fountain.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Exploded Bladder.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Take a glass pipe open at both ends, to one of which tie fast a wet
+bladder, and let it dry. Then place it on the plate of the pump. While
+the air presses the bladder equally on both sides, it will lie even
+and straight; but as soon as the air is exhausted, it will press
+inwards, and be<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_81" id="Page_81">[Pg 81]</a></span> quite concave on the upper side. In proportion as the
+air is exhausted, the bladder will become more stretched; it will soon
+yield to the incumbent pressure, and burst with a loud explosion. To
+make this experiment more easy, one part of the bladder should be
+scraped with a knife, and some of its external fibres taken off.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Cemented Bladder.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Tie the neck of the bladder to a stop-cock, which is to be screwed to
+the plate of the pump, and the air exhausted from the bladder; then
+turn the stop-cock, to prevent the re-entrance of the air, and unscrew
+the whole from the pump. The bladder will be transformed into two flat
+skins, so closely applied together, that the strongest man cannot
+raise them half an inch from each other; for an ordinary-sized
+bladder, of six inches across the widest part, will have one side
+pressed upon the other with a force equal to 396 pounds' weight.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Cork heavier than Lead.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Let a large piece of cork be pendent from one end of a
+balance beam, and a small piece of lead from the other; the
+lead should rather preponderate. If this apparatus be placed
+under a receiver on the pump, you will find that when the
+air is exhausted, the lead, which seemed the heaviest body,
+will ascend, and the cork outweigh the lead. Restore the
+air, and the effect will cease. This phenomenon is only on
+account of the difference of the size in the two objects.
+The lead, which owes its heaviness to the operation of the
+air, yields to a lighter because a larger substance when
+deprived of its assistance.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The animated Bacchus.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Construct a figure of Bacchus, seated on a cask; let his
+belly be formed by a bladder, and let a tube proceed from
+his mouth to the cask. Fill this tube with coloured water
+or wine, then place the whole under the receiver. Exhaust
+the air, and the liquor will be thrown up into his mouth.
+While he is drinking, his belly will expand.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Artificial Balloon.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Take a bladder containing only a small quantity of air, and a piece of
+lead to it, sufficient to sink it, if immersed<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_82" id="Page_82">[Pg 82]</a></span> in water. Put this
+apparatus into a jar of water, and place the whole under a receiver.
+Then exhaust the air, and the bladder will expand, become a balloon
+lighter than the fluid in which it floats, and ascend, carrying the
+weight with it.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Curious Experiments with a Viper.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Many natural philosophers, in their eagerness to display the powers of
+science, have overlooked one of the first duties of life, humanity;
+and, with this view, have tortured and killed many harmless animals,
+to exemplify the amazing effects of the air-pump. We, however, will
+not stain the pages of this little work by recommending any such
+species of cruelty, which in many instances can merely gratify
+curiosity; but as our readers might like to read the effect on
+animals, we extract from the learned Boyle an account of his
+experiment with a viper.</p>
+
+<p>He took a newly-caught viper, and, shutting it up in a small receiver,
+extracted the air. At first, upon the air being drawn away, the viper
+began to swell; a short time after it gasped and opened its jaws; it
+then resumed its former lankness, and began to move up and down within
+the receiver, as if to seek for air. After a while, it foamed a
+little, leaving the foam sticking to the inside of the glass; soon
+after, the body and neck became prodigiously swelled, and a blister
+appeared on its back. Within an hour and a half from the time the
+receiver was exhausted, the distended viper moved, being yet alive,
+though its jaws remained quite stretched; its black tongue reached
+beyond the mouth, which had also become black in the inside: in this
+situation it continued for three hours; but on the air being
+re-admitted, the viper's mouth was presently closed, and soon after
+opened again; and these motions continued some time, as if there were
+still some remains of life.</p>
+
+<p>It is thus with animals of every kind; even minute microscopical
+insects cannot live without air.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Experiments with Sparrows.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Count Morozzo placed successively several full-grown
+sparrows under a glass receiver, inverted over water. It was
+filled with atmospheric air, and afterwards with vital air.
+He found,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_83" id="Page_83">[Pg 83]</a></span></p>
+
+<table border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" summary="Experiment I">
+<tr>
+ <th>First.&mdash;That in <i>atmospheric</i> air, &nbsp; &nbsp; </th>
+ <th><small>HOURS</small></th>
+ <th><small>MIN.</small></th>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>The first sparrow lived</td><td align="right">3</td><td align="right">0</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>The second sparrow lived</td><td align="right">0</td><td align="right">3</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>The third sparrow lived</td><td align="right">0</td><td align="right">1</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<p>The water rose in the vessels eight lines during the life
+of the first; four during the life of the second; and the third
+produced no absorption.</p>
+
+<table border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" summary="Experiment II">
+<tr>
+ <th>Second.&mdash;In <i>vital</i> air or <i>oxygen</i>, &nbsp; &nbsp; </th>
+ <th><small>HOURS</small></th>
+ <th><small>MIN.</small></th>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>The first sparrow lived</td><td align="right">5</td><td align="right">23</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>The second</td><td align="right">2</td><td align="right">10</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>The third</td><td align="right">1</td><td align="right">30</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>The fourth</td><td align="right">1</td><td align="right">10</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>The fifth</td><td align="right">0</td><td align="right">30</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>The sixth</td><td align="right">0</td><td align="right">47</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>The seventh</td><td align="right">0</td><td align="right">27</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>The eighth</td><td align="right">0</td><td align="right">30</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>The ninth</td><td align="right">0</td><td align="right">22</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>The tenth</td><td align="right">0</td><td align="right">21</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+
+<p>The above experiments elicit the following conclusions:&mdash;1. That an
+animal will live longer in vital than in atmospheric air.&mdash;2. That
+one animal can live in air, in which another has died.&mdash;3. That,
+independently of air, some respect must be had to the constitution of
+the animal; for the sixth lived 47 minutes, the fifth only thirty.&mdash;4.
+That there is either an absorption of air, or the production of a new
+kind of air, which is absorbed by the water as it rises.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2>AMUSING EXPERIMENTS IN ELECTRICITY.</h2>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Animated Feather.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Electrify a smooth glass tube with a rubber, and hold a small feather
+at a short distance from it. The feather will instantly fly to the
+tube, and adhere to it for a short time; it will then fly off, and the
+tube can never be brought close to the feather till it has touched the
+side of the room, or some<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_84" id="Page_84">[Pg 84]</a></span> other body that communicates with the
+ground. If, therefore, you take care to keep the tube between the
+feather and the side of the room, you may drive it round to all parts
+of the room without touching it; and, what is very remarkable, the
+same side of the feather will be constantly opposite the tube.</p>
+
+<p>While the feather is flying before the smooth tube, it will be
+immediately attracted by an excited rough tube or a stick of wax, and
+fly continually from one tube to the other, till the electricity of
+both is discharged.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Candle lighted by Electricity.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Charge a small coated phial, whose knob is bent outwards
+so as to hang a little over the body of the phial; then wrap
+some loose cotton over the extremity of a long brass pin or
+wire, so as to stick moderately fast to its substance. Next
+roll this extremity of the pin, which is wrapped up in cotton,
+in some fine powdered resin; then apply the extremity of
+the pin or wire to the external coating of the charged phial,
+and bring, as quickly as possible, the other extremity, that
+is wrapped round with cotton, to the knob; the powdered
+resin takes fire, and communicates its flame to the cotton,
+and both together burn long enough to light a candle. Dipping
+the cotton in oil of turpentine will do as well, if you use
+a larger sized jar.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Candle Bombs.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Procure some small glass bubbles, having a neck about
+an inch long, with very slender bores, by means of which a
+small quantity of water is to be introduced into them, and
+the orifice afterwards closed up. This stalk being put through
+the wick of a burning candle, the flame boils the water into
+a steam, and the glass is broken with a loud explosion.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Artificial Spider.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Cut a piece of burnt cork, about the size of a pea, into
+the shape of a spider; make its legs of linen thread, and put
+a grain or two of lead in it to give it more weight. Suspend
+it by a fine line of silk between an electrified arch and an
+excited stick of wax; and it will jump continually from one
+body to the other, moving its legs at the same time, as if animated,
+to the great surprise of the unconscious spectator.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_85" id="Page_85">[Pg 85]</a></span></p>
+
+<h4><i>The Miraculous Portrait.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Get a large print (suppose of the king) with a frame and
+glass. Cut the print out at about two inches from the frame
+all round; then with thin paste fix the border that is left on
+the inside of the glass, pressing it smooth and close; fill up
+the vacancy, by covering the glass well with leaf-gold or thin
+tin-foil, so that it may lie close. Cover likewise the inner
+edge of the bottom part of the back of the frame with the
+same tin-foil, and make a communication between that and
+the tin-foil in the middle of the glass; then put in the board,
+and that side is finished. Next turn up the glass, and cover
+the fore-side with tin-foil, exactly over that on the back part;
+and when it is dry, paste over it the panel of the print that
+was cut out, observing to bring the corresponding parts of
+the border and panel together, so that the picture will appear
+as at first, only part of it behind the glass, and part before.
+Lastly, hold the print horizontally by the top, and place a little
+moveable gilt crown on the king's head.</p>
+
+<p>Now, if the tin-foil on both sides of the glass be moderately
+electrified, and another person take hold of the bottom of the
+frame with one hand, so that his fingers touch the tin-foil,
+and with the other hand attempt to take off the crown, he
+will receive a very smart blow, and fail in the attempt. The
+operator, who holds the frame by the upper end, where there
+is no tin-foil, feels nothing of the shock, and can touch the
+face of the king without danger, which he pretends is a test
+of his loyalty.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Cup of Tantalus.</i></h4>
+
+<p>You place a cup of any sort of metal on a stool of baked wood or a
+cake of wax. Fill it to the brim with any liquor; let it communicate
+with the branch by a small chain; and when it is moderately
+electrified, desire a person to taste the liquor, without touching the
+cup with his hands, and he will instantly receive a shock on his lips.
+The motion of the wheel being stopped, you taste the liquor yourself,
+and desire the rest of the company to do so; you then give your
+operator (who is concealed in an adjoining room) the signal, and he
+again charges the cup; you desire the same person to taste the liquor
+a second time, and he will receive a second shock.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_86" id="Page_86">[Pg 86]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Magical Explosion.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Make up some gunpowder, in the form of a small cartridge, in each end
+of which put a blunt wire, so that the ends inside of the cartridge be
+about half an inch off each other; then join the chain that proceeds
+from one side of the electrifying battery, to the wire at the other
+end, the shock will instantly pass through the powder, and set it on
+fire.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Artificial Earthquake.</i></h4>
+
+<p>In the middle of a large basin of water, lay a round wet board. On the
+board place any kind of building, made of pasteboard, of separate
+pieces, and not fastened together. Then, fixing a wire that
+communicates with the two chains of the electrifying battery, so that
+it may pass over the board and the surface of the water, upon making
+the explosion, the water will become agitated as in an earthquake, and
+the board, moving up and down, will overturn the structure, while the
+cause of the commotion is totally concealed.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Magic Dance.</i></h4>
+
+<p>From the middle of the brass arch suspend three small bells. The two
+outer bells hang by chains, and the middle one by a silk string, while
+a chain connects it with the floor. Two small knobs of brass, which
+serve as clappers, hang by silk strings, one between each two bells.
+Therefore, when the two outer bells communicating with the conductor
+are electrified, they will attract the clappers and be struck by them.
+The clappers being thus loaded with electricity, will be repelled, and
+fly to discharge themselves upon the middle bell, after which they
+will be again attracted by the outer bells; and thus, by striking the
+bells alternately, the ringing may be continued as long as the
+operator pleases.</p>
+
+<p>You next suspend a plate of metal from the same part of the arch to
+which the bells are connected; then, at the distance of a few inches
+from the arch, and exactly under it, place a metal stand <i>of the same
+size</i>. On the stand place several figures of men, animals, or what you
+please, cut in paper, and pretty sharply pointed at each extremity.
+When the plate that hangs from the arch is electrified, the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_87" id="Page_87">[Pg 87]</a></span> figures
+will dance with astonishing rapidity, and the bells will keep ringing,
+to the no small entertainment of the spectators.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Electrical Fountain.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Suspend a vessel of water from the middle of the brass arch, and place
+in the vessel a small tube. The water will be one continued stream;
+and if the electrification be strong, a number of streams will issue,
+in form of a cone, the top of which will be at the extremity of the
+tube. This experiment may be stopped and renewed almost instantly, as
+if at the word of command.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Electric Kite.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Make a small cross of two light strips of cedar, the arms so long as
+to reach to the four corners of a large thin silk handkerchief, when
+extended; tie the corners of the handkerchief to the extremities of
+the cross; and you have the body of the kite, which being properly
+accommodated with a tail, loop, and string, will rise in the air like
+those made of paper; but this being silk, it is more adapted to bear
+the wet and wind of a thunder gust, without tearing. To the top of the
+upright stick of the cross is to be fixed a very sharp-pointed wire,
+rising a foot or more above the wood. To the end of the twine is to be
+tied a silk ribbon, and where the silk and twine join, a key may be
+fastened. This kite is to be raised when a thunder-storm appears to be
+coming on; and the person who holds the string must stand within a
+door or window, or under some cover, so that the silk ribbon may not
+be wet; and care must be taken that the twine do not touch the frame
+of the door or window. As soon as any of the thunder clouds come over
+the kite, the pointed wire will draw the electric fire from them, and
+the kite, with all the twine, will be electrified, while the loose
+filaments of the twine will stand out every way, and be attracted by
+an approaching finger. When the rain has wetted the kite and twine, so
+that it can conduct the electric fire freely, you will find it stream
+out plentifully from the key, on the approach of your knuckle. At this
+key an electric phial may be charged; and from electric fire thus
+obtained, spirits may be kindled, and all the other electric
+experiments performed which are usually done by the help of a rubbed
+glass or tube; and thereby the identity of the electric matter with
+that of lightning completely demonstrated.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_88" id="Page_88">[Pg 88]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Magic Chase.</i></h4>
+
+<p>On the top of a finely-pointed wire, rising perpendicularly from the
+conductor, let another wire, sharpened at each end, be made to move
+freely, as on a centre. If it be well balanced, and the points bent
+horizontally, in opposite directions, it will, when electrified, turn
+very swiftly round, by the re-action of the air against the current
+which flows from off the points. These points may be nearly concealed,
+and the figures of men and horses, with hounds, and a hare, stag, or
+fox, may be placed upon the wires, so as to turn round with them, when
+they appear as if in pursuit. The chase may be diversified, and a
+greater variety of figures upon them, by increasing the number of
+wires proceeding from the same centre.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Unconscious Incendiary.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Let a person stand upon a stool made of baked wood, or upon a cake of
+wax, and hold a chain which communicates with the branch. On turning
+the wheel he will become electrified; his whole body forming part of
+the prime conductor; and he will emit sparks whenever he is touched by
+a person standing on the floor.</p>
+
+<p>If the electrified person put his finger, or a rod of iron, into a
+dish containing warm spirits of wine, it will be immediately in a
+blaze; and if there be a wick or thread in the spirit, that
+communicates with a train of gunpowder, he may be made to blow up a
+magazine, or set a city on fire, with a piece of cold iron, and at the
+same time be ignorant of the mischief he is doing.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Inconceivable Shock.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Put in a person's hand a wire that is fixed on to the hook that comes
+from the chain, which communicates with one side of the battery, and
+in his other hand put a small wire with a hook at the end of it, which
+you direct him to fix on to a hook which comes from the other chain.
+On attempting to do this, he will instantly receive a shock from his
+body, without being able to guess the cause.</p>
+
+<p>Care should be taken that the shock be not too strong; and regard
+should be had to the constitution and disposition of the party, as a
+shock that would hardly affect one<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_89" id="Page_89">[Pg 89]</a></span> person, might be productive of
+very serious consequences to another.</p>
+
+<p>Much entertainment may be derived from concealing the chain that
+communicates with that which proceeds from the outside of the battery,
+under a carpet, and placing the wire that communicates with the chain
+from the inside, in such a manner that a person may put his hand on it
+without suspicion, at the same time that his feet are upon the other
+wire.</p>
+
+<p>The whole company may be made to partake of the shock, by joining
+hands, and forming a circle. The experiment may also be varied if they
+tread upon each other's toes, or lay their hands upon each other's
+heads. It might happen, by the latter method, that the whole company
+would be struck to the ground; but it will be productive of no danger,
+and very little inconvenience; on the contrary, it has happened that
+they have neither heard nor felt the shock.</p>
+
+<hr style='width: 45%;' />
+
+<p>To exhibit the five following amusements in electricity, the room in
+which they are performed must be darkened.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Miraculous Luminaries.</i></h4>
+
+<p>You must previously prepare the following phosphorus: Calcine common
+oyster-shells, by burning them in the fire for half an hour; then
+reduce them to powder; of the clearest of which take three parts, and
+of flowers of sulphur one part; put the mixture into a crucible, about
+an inch and a half deep. Let it burn in a strong fire for rather
+better than an hour; and when it is cool, turn it out and break it in
+pieces; and, taking those pieces into a dark place, scrape off the
+parts that shine brightest, which, if good, will be a white powder.</p>
+
+<p>Then construct a circular board, of three or four feet diameter, on
+the centre of which draw in gum-water, or any adhesive liquid, a
+half-moon, of three or four inches diameter, and a number of stars
+round it, at different distances, and of various magnitudes. Strew the
+phosphorus over the figures, to the thickness of about a quarter of an
+inch, laying one coat over the other. Place this board behind a
+curtain; and when you draw the curtain up or back, discharge one
+electrifying jar or phial over each figure, at the distance of about
+an inch, and they will become illuminated, exhibiting a very striking<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_90" id="Page_90">[Pg 90]</a></span>
+resemblance of the moon and stars; and will continue to shine for
+about half an hour, their splendour becoming gradually more faint.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Fiery Shower.</i></h4>
+
+<p>On the plate put a number of any kind of seeds, grains of sand, or
+brass dust. The conductor being strongly electrified, those light
+particles will be attracted and repelled by the plate suspended from
+the conductor, with amazing rapidity, so as to exhibit a perfect fiery
+shower.</p>
+
+<p>Another way is by a sponge that has been soaked in water. When this
+sponge is first hung to the conductor, the water will drop from it
+very slowly; but when it is electrified, the drops will fall very
+fast, and appear like small globes of fire, illuminating the basin
+into which they fall.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Illuminated Vacuum.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Take a tall receiver that is very dry, and fix through the top of it,
+with cement, a blunt wire; then exhaust the receiver, and present the
+knob of the wire to the conductor, and every spark will pass through
+the vacuum in a broad stream of light, visible through the whole
+length of the receiver, let it be as tall as it will. This generally
+divides into a variety of beautiful rivulets, which are continually
+changing their course, uniting and dividing again in the most pleasing
+manner.</p>
+
+<p>If a jar be discharged through this vacuum, it presents the appearance
+of a very dense body of fire, darting directly through the centre of
+the vacuum, without touching the sides; whereas, when a single spark
+passes through, it generally goes more or less to the side, and a
+finger placed on the outside of the glass will draw it wherever a
+person pleases. If the vessel be grasped by both hands, every spark is
+felt like the pulsation of a large artery; and all the fire makes
+towards the hands. This pulsation is even felt at some distance from
+the receiver, and a light is seen between the hand and the glass.</p>
+
+<p>All this while, the pointed wire is supposed to be electrified
+positively; if it be electrified negatively, the appearance is
+astonishingly different; instead of streams of fire, nothing is seen
+but one uniform luminous appearance, like a white cloud, or the <i>milky
+way</i> in a clear star-light night. It seldom reaches the whole length
+of the vessel, but generally appears only at the end of the wire, like
+a lucid ball.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_91" id="Page_91">[Pg 91]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>If a small phial be inserted in the neck of a small receiver, so that
+the external surface of the glass be exposed to the vacuum, it will
+produce a very beautiful appearance. The phial must be coated on the
+inside; and while it is charging, at every spark taken from the
+conductor into the inside, a flash of light is seen to dart at the
+same time from every part of the external surface of the phial, so as
+to quite fill the receiver. Upon making the discharge, the light is
+seen to run in a much closer body, the whole coming out at once.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Illuminated Cylinder.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Provide a glass cylinder, three feet long, and three inches diameter;
+near the bottom of it fix a brass plate, and have another brass plate,
+so contrived that you may let it down the cylinder, and bring it as
+near the first plate as you desire. Let this cylinder be exhausted and
+insulated, and when the upper part is electrified, the electric matter
+will pass from one plate to the other, when they are at the greatest
+distance from each other that the cylinder will admit. The brass plate
+at the bottom of the cylinder will also be as strongly electrified as
+if it were connected by a wire to the prime conductor.</p>
+
+<p>The electric matter, as it passes through this vacuum, presents a most
+brilliant spectacle, exhibiting sparkling flashes of fire the whole
+length of the tube, and of a bright silver hue, representing the most
+lively exhalations of the aurora borealis.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Electric Aurora Borealis.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Make a Torricellian vacuum<a name="FNanchor_A_7" id="FNanchor_A_7"></a><a href="#Footnote_A_7" class="fnanchor">[G]</a>
+in a glass tube, about three feet long, and hermetically
+sealed.<a name="FNanchor_B_8" id="FNanchor_B_8"></a><a href="#Footnote_B_8" class="fnanchor">[H]</a>
+Let one end of this tube be held in the hand, and the other applied to
+the conductor; and immediately the whole tube will be illuminated from
+one end; and when taken from the conductor will continue luminous,
+without interruption, for a considerable time, very often about a
+quarter of an hour. If, after this, it be drawn through the hand
+either way, the light will be uncommonly brilliant, and, without the
+least interruption, from one end to
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_92" id="Page_92">[Pg 92]</a></span>
+the other, even to its whole length. After this operation,
+which discharges it in a great measure, it will still flash at
+intervals, though it be held only at the extremity, and quite still;
+but if it be grasped by the other hand at the same time, in a
+different place, strong flashes of light will dart from one end to the
+other. This will continue for twenty-four hours, and often longer,
+without any fresh excitation. Small and long glass tubes, exhausted of
+air, and bent in many irregular crooks and angles, will, when properly
+electrified, exhibit a very beautiful representation of vivid flashes
+of lightning.</p>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p><a name="Footnote_A_7" id="Footnote_A_7"></a><a href="#FNanchor_A_7"><span class="label">[G]</span></a>
+A Torricellian vacuum is made by filling a tube with pure
+mercury and then inverting it, in the same manner as in making a
+barometer; for as the mercury runs out, all the space above will be a
+true vacuum.</p></div>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p><a name="Footnote_B_8" id="Footnote_B_8"></a><a href="#FNanchor_B_8"><span class="label">[H]</span></a>
+A glass is hermetically sealed by holding the end of it
+in the flame of a candle, till it begin to melt, and then twisting it
+together with a pair of pincers.</p></div>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Electrical Orrery.</i></h4>
+
+<p>By the motion of circulating points, we may in some measure imitate
+the revolutions of the heavenly bodies, forming what is called the
+<i>Electrical Orrery</i>. Let a single wire, with the extremities pointed
+and turned, be nicely balanced on a point; fix a small glass ball over
+its centre to represent the sun. At one extremity of the wire, let a
+small wire be soldered perpendicularly, and on this balance another
+small wire with its ends pointed and turned, and having a small pith
+ball in its centre, to represent the earth, and a smaller ball of the
+same kind at one of the angles, for the moon. Let the whole be
+supported upon a glass pillar, and be conducted by a chain proceeding
+from the prime conductor to the wire supporting the glass ball. Now,
+when the machine is put in motion, the wires will turn round, so that
+the ball representing the earth will move round the central ball, and
+the little ball at the angle of the smaller wire will at the same time
+revolve about the earth.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Electrified Cotton.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Take a small lock of cotton, extended in every direction as much as
+can conveniently be done, and by a linen thread about five or six
+inches long, or by a thread drawn out of the same cotton, tie it to
+the end of the prime conductor; then set the machine in motion, and
+the lock of cotton, on being electrified, will immediately swell, by
+repelling its filaments from one another, and will stretch itself
+towards the nearest conductor. In this situation let the cylinder be
+kept in motion, and present the end of your finger, or the knob of a
+wire, towards the lock of cotton, which will then immediately move
+towards the finger, and endeavour to<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_93" id="Page_93">[Pg 93]</a></span> touch it; but take with the
+other hand a pointed needle, and present its point towards the cotton,
+a little above the end of the finger, and the cotton will be observed
+immediately to shrink upwards, and move towards the prime conductor.
+Remove the needle, and the cotton will come again towards the finger.
+Present the needle, and the cotton will shrink again.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Electric Sparks.</i></h4>
+
+<p>When the prime conductor is situated in its proper place, and
+electrified by whirling the cylinder, if a metallic wire, with a ball
+at its extremity, or the knuckle or a finger be presented to the prime
+conductor, a spark will be seen to issue between them, which will be
+more vivid, and will be attended with a greater or less explosion,
+according as the ball is larger. The strongest and most vivid sparks
+are drawn from that end or side of the prime conductor which is
+farthest from the cylinder. The sparks have the same appearance
+whether they be taken from the positive or negative conductor; they
+sometimes appear like a long line of fire reaching from the prime
+conductor to the opposed body, and often (particularly when the spark
+is long, and different conducting substances in the line of its
+direction) it will have the appearance of being bent to sharp angles
+in different places, exactly resembling a flash of lightning.</p>
+
+<p>The figure of a spark varies with the superficial dimensions of the
+part from which it is taken. If it be drawn from a ball of two or
+three inches in diameter, it will have the appearance of a straight
+line; but if the ball from which it is drawn be much smaller, as half
+an inch in diameter, it will assume the zig-zag appearance above
+mentioned.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Dancing Balls.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Take a common tumbler or glass jar, and having placed a brass ball in
+one of the holes of the prime conductor, set the machine in motion,
+and let the balls touch the inside of the tumbler; while the ball
+touches only one point, no more of the surface of the glass will be
+electrified, but by moving the tumblers about, so as to make the ball
+touch many points successively, all the points will be electrified, as
+will appear by turning down the tumbler over a number of pith or cork
+balls placed on a table. These balls will immediately begin to fly
+about.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_94" id="Page_94">[Pg 94]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Leyden Phial.</i></h4>
+
+<p>When a nail or piece of thick brass wire, &amp;c., is put into a small
+apothecary's phial, and electrified, remarkable effects follow; but
+the phial must be very dry or warm. Rub it once beforehand with your
+finger, on which put some pounded chalk. If a little mercury, or a few
+drops of spirit of wine, be put into it, the experiment succeeds the
+better. As soon as this phial and nail are removed from the
+electrifying glass, or the prime conductor, to which it has been
+exposed, is taken away, it throws out a stream of flame so long, that
+with this burning-machine in your hand, you may take about sixty steps
+in walking about your room. When it is electrified strongly, you may
+take it into another room, and there fire spirits of wine with it. If,
+while it is electrifying, you put your finger, or a piece of gold
+which you hold in your hand, to the nail, you receive a shock which
+stuns your arms and shoulders.</p>
+
+<p>A tin tube, or a man placed upon electrics, is electrified much
+stronger by these means than in the common way. When you present this
+phial and nail it to a tin tube, fifteen feet long, nothing but
+experience can make a person believe how strongly it is electrified.
+Two thin glasses have been broken by the shock of it. It appears
+extraordinary, that when this phial and nail are in contact with their
+conducting or non-conducting matter, the strong shock does not follow.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Self-moving Wheel.</i></h4>
+
+<p>The self-moving wheel is made of a thin round plate of window-glass,
+seventeen inches in diameter, well gilt on both sides, to within two
+inches of the circumference. Two small hemispheres of wood are then
+fixed with cement, to the middle of the upper and under sides,
+centrally opposite, and in each of them a thick strong wire, eight or
+ten inches long, making together the axis of the wheel. It turns
+horizontally on a point at the lower end of its axis, which rests on a
+bit of brass, cemented within a glass salt-cellar. The upper end of
+its axis passes through a hole in a thin brass plate, cemented to a
+long and strong piece of glass, which keeps it six or eight inches
+distant from any non-electric, and has a small ball of wax or metal on
+its top.</p>
+
+<p>In a circle on the table which supports the wheel, are fixed twelve
+small pillars of glass, at about eleven inches distance, with a
+thimble on the top of each. On the edge<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_95" id="Page_95">[Pg 95]</a></span> of the wheel is a small
+leaden bullet, communicating by a wire with the upper surface of the
+wheel; and about six inches from it is another bullet, communicating,
+in like manner, with the under surface. When the wheel is to be
+charged by the upper surface, a communication must be made from the
+under surface with the table.</p>
+
+<p>When it is well charged it begins to move. The bullet nearest to a
+pillar moves towards the thimble on that pillar, and, passing by,
+electrifies it, and then pushes itself from it. The succeeding bullet,
+which communicates with the other surface of the glass, more strongly
+attracts that thimble, on account of its being electrified before by
+the other bullet; and thus the wheel increases its motion, till the
+resistance of the air regulates it. It will go half an hour, and make,
+one minute with another, twenty turns in a minute, which is six
+hundred turns in the whole, the bullet of the upper surface giving in
+each turn twelve sparks to the thimbles, which make seven thousand two
+hundred sparks, and the bullet of the under surface receiving as many
+from the thimble, these bullets moving in the time nearly two thousand
+five hundred feet. The thimbles should be well fixed, and in so exact
+a circle, that the bullets may pass within a very small distance of
+each of them.</p>
+
+<p>If instead of two bullets you put eight, four communicating with the
+upper surface, and four with the under surface, placed alternately,
+(which eight, at about six inches distance, complete the
+circumference,) the force and swiftness will be greatly increased, the
+wheel making fifty turns in a minute; but then it will not continue
+moving so long.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Resin ignited by Electricity.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Wrap some cotton wool, containing as much powdered resin as it will
+hold, about one of the knobs of a discharging-rod. Then having charged
+a Leyden jar, apply the naked knob of the rod to the external coating,
+and the knob enveloped by the cotton to the ball of the wire. The act
+of discharging the jar will set fire to the resin.</p>
+
+<p>A piece of phosphorus or camphor wrapped in cotton wool, and used in
+the same way, will be much more easily inflamed.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Spirits ignited by Electricity.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Hang a small ball with a stem to the prime conductor, so that the ball
+may project below the conductor. Then warm<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_96" id="Page_96">[Pg 96]</a></span> a little ardent spirit, by
+holding it a short time over a candle in a metallic spoon; hold the
+spoon about an inch below the ball, and set the machine in motion. A
+spark will soon issue from the ball and set fire to the spirits.</p>
+
+<p>This experiment may be varied different ways, and may be rendered very
+agreeable to a company of spectators. A person, for instance, standing
+upon an electric stool, and communicating with the prime conductor,
+may hold the spoon with the spirits in his hand, and another person,
+standing upon the floor, may set the spirits on fire, by bringing his
+finger within a small distance of it. Instead of his finger he may
+fire the spirits with a piece of ice, when the experiment will seem
+much more surprising. If the spoon be held by the person standing upon
+the floor, and the insulated person bring some conducting substance
+over the surface of the spirit, the experiment succeeds as well.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Electric Balloon.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Two balloons, made of the allantoides of a calf, are to be filled with
+hydrogen gas, of which each contains about two cubic feet. To each of
+these is to be suspended, by a silken thread about eight feet long,
+such a weight as is just sufficient to prevent it from rising higher
+in the air; they are connected, the one with the positive, the other
+with the negative conductor, by small wires about 30 feet in length;
+and being kept nearly 20 feet asunder, are placed as far from the
+machine as the length of the wires will admit. On being electrified,
+these balloons will rise up in the air as high as the wire will allow,
+attracting each other, and uniting as it were into one cloud, gently
+descending.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Illuminated Water.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Connect one end of a chain with the outside of a charged phial, and
+let the other end lie on the table. Place the end of another piece of
+chain at the distance of about a quarter of an inch from the former;
+and set a glass decanter of water on these separated ends. On making
+the discharge, the water will appear perfectly luminous.</p>
+
+<p>The electric spark may be rendered visible in water, in the following
+manner:&mdash;Take a glass tube of about half an inch in diameter, and six
+inches long; fill it with water,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_97" id="Page_97">[Pg 97]</a></span> and to each extremity of the tube
+adapt a cork, which may confine the water; through each cork insert a
+blunt wire, so that the extremities of the wires within the tube may
+be very near one another; then, on connecting one of these wires with
+the coating of a small charged phial, and touching the other wire with
+the knob of it, the shock will pass through the wires, and cause a
+vivid spark to appear within their extremities within the tube. The
+charge in this experiment must be very weak, or there will be danger
+of bursting the tube.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Electrified Ball.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Place an ivory ball on the prime conductor of the machine, and take a
+strong spark, or send the charge of a Leyden phial through its centre,
+and the ball will appear perfectly luminous; but if the charge be not
+sent through the centre, it will pass over the surface of the ball and
+singe it. A spark made to pass through a ball of box-wood, not only
+illuminates the whole, but makes it appear of a beautiful crimson, or
+rather a fine scarlet colour.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Illuminated Phosphorus.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Put some of Canton's phosphorus into a clear glass phial, and stop it
+with a glass stopper, or a cork and sealing-wax. If this wire be kept
+in a darkened room (which for this experiment must be very dark) it
+will give no light; but let two or three strong sparks be drawn from
+the prime conductor, when the phial is kept about two inches distant
+from the sparks, so that it may be exposed to that light, and this
+phial will receive the light and afterwards will appear illuminated
+for a considerable time.</p>
+
+<p>This powder may be stuck upon a board by means of the white of an egg,
+so as to represent figures of planets, letters, or any thing else, at
+the pleasure of the operator, and these figures may be illuminated in
+the dark, in the same manner as the above described phial.</p>
+
+<p>A beautiful method of expressing geometrical figures with the above
+powder, is to bend small glass tubes, of about the tenth part of an
+inch diameter, in the shape of the figure desired, and then to fill
+them with the phosphoric powder. These may be illuminated in the
+manner described; and they are not so subject to be spoiled, as the
+figures represented upon the board frequently are.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_98" id="Page_98">[Pg 98]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Luminous Writing.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Small pieces of tin-foil may be stuck on a flat piece of glass, so as
+to represent various fanciful figures. Upon the same principle is the
+word <small>LIGHT</small> produced, in luminous characters.</p>
+
+<p>It is formed by the small separations of the tin-foil pasted on a
+piece of glass fixed in a frame of baked wood. To use this, the frame
+must be held in the hand, and the ball presented to the conductor. The
+spark will then be exhibited in the intervals composing the word, from
+whence it passes to the hook, and thence to the ground by a chain. The
+brilliancy of this is equal to that of the spiral tubes.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Electric Explosion.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Take a card, a quire of paper, or the cover of a book; and keep it
+close to the outside coating of a charged jar: put one knob of the
+discharging-rod upon the card, quire of paper, &amp;c., so that, between
+the knob and coating of the jar, the thickness of that card or quire
+of paper only is interposed; lastly, by bringing the other knob of the
+discharged rod near the knob of the jar, make the discharge, and the
+electric spark will pierce a hole (or perhaps several) quite through
+the card or quire of paper. This hole has a bur raised on each side,
+except the card, &amp;c., be pressed hard between the discharging-rod and
+the jar. If this experiment be made with two cards instead of one,
+which, however, must be kept very little distant from one another,
+each of the cards, after the explosion, will be found pierced with one
+or more holes, and each hole will have burs on both surfaces of each
+card. The hole, or holes, are larger or smaller, according as the
+card, &amp;c., is more damp or more dry. It is remarkable, that if the
+nostrils are presented to it, they will be affected with a sulphurous,
+or rather a phosphoric smell, just like that produced by an excited
+electric.</p>
+
+<p>If, instead of paper, a very thin plate of glass, resin, sealing-wax,
+or the like, be interposed between the knob of the discharging-rod and
+the outside coating of the jar, on making the discharge, this will be
+broken in several pieces.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Electrified Air.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Fix two or three pointed needles into the prime conductor of an
+electrical machine, and set the glass in motion so as to<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_99" id="Page_99">[Pg 99]</a></span> keep the
+prime conductor electrified for several minutes. If now, an
+electometer be brought within the air that is contiguous to the prime
+conductor, it will exhibit signs of electricity, and this air will
+continue electrified for some time, even after the machine has been
+removed into another room. The air, in this case, is electrified
+positively; it maybe negatively electrified by fixing the needles in
+the negative conductor while insulated, and making a communication
+between the prime conductor and the table, by means of a chain or
+other conducting substance.</p>
+
+<p>The air of a room may be electrified in another way. Charge a large
+jar, and insulate it; then connect two or more sharp-pointed wires or
+needles, with the knob of the jar, and connect the outside coating of
+the jar with the table. If the jar be charged positively, the air of
+the room will soon become positively electrified likewise; but if the
+jar be charged negatively, the electricity communicated by it to the
+air will also become negative. A charged jar being held in one hand,
+and the flame of an insulated candle held in the other being brought
+near the knob of the jar, will also produce the same effect.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Another Electric Orrery.</i> (See page 92.)</h4>
+
+<p>From the prime conductor of an electric machine suspend six concentric
+hoops of metal at different distances from each other, in such a
+manner as to represent in some measure the proportional distances of
+the planets. Under these, and at a distance of about half an inch,
+place a metallic plate, and upon this plate, within each of the hoops,
+a glass bubble blown very thin and light. On electrifying the hoops,
+the bubbles will be immediately attracted by them, and will continue
+to move round the hoops as long as the electrification continues. If
+the electricity be very strong, the bubbles will frequently be driven
+off, run hither and thither on the plate, making a variety of
+surprising motions round their axis; after which they will return to
+the hoop, and circulate as before; and if the room be darkened, they
+will all appear beautifully illuminated with electric light.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Electric Ball.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Provide a ball of cork about three-quarters of an inch in diameter,
+hollowed out in the internal part by cutting it in<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_100" id="Page_100">[Pg 100]</a></span> two hemispheres,
+scooping out the inside, and then joining them together with paste.
+Having attached this to a silk thread between three and four feet in
+length, suspend it in such a manner that it may just touch the knob of
+an electric jar, the outside of which communicates with the ground. On
+the first contact it will be repelled to a considerable distance, and
+after making several vibrations, will remain stationary; but if a
+candle be placed at some distance behind it, so that the ball may be
+between it and the bottle, the ball will instantly begin to move, and
+will turn round the knob of the jar, moving in a kind of ellipsis as
+long as there is any electricity in the bottle. This experiment is
+very striking, though the motions are far from being regular; but it
+is remarkable that they always affect the elliptical rather than the
+circular form.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To spin Sealing-wax into Threads by Electricity.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Stick a small piece of sealing-wax on the end of a wire, and set fire
+to it. Then put an electrical machine in motion, and present the wax
+just blown out at the distance of some inches from the prime
+conductor. A number of extremely fine filaments will immediately dart
+from the sealing-wax to the conductor, on which they will be condensed
+into a kind of net-work resembling wool.</p>
+
+<p>If the wire with the sealing-wax be stuck into one of the holes of the
+conductor, and a piece of paper be presented at a moderate distance
+from the wax, just after it has been ignited, on setting the machine
+in motion, a net-work of wax will be formed on the paper. The same
+effect, but in a slighter degree, will be produced, if the paper be
+briskly rubbed with a piece of elastic gum, and the melting
+sealing-wax be held pretty near the paper immediately after rubbing.</p>
+
+<p>If the paper thus painted, as it were, with sealing-wax be gently
+warmed by holding the back of it to the fire, the wax will adhere to
+it, and the result of the experiment will thus be rendered permanent.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Electrified Camphor.</i></h4>
+
+<p>A beautiful experiment of the same nature is made with camphor. A
+spoon holding a piece of lighted camphor is made to communicate with
+an electrified body, as the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_101" id="Page_101">[Pg 101]</a></span> prime conductor of a machine; while the
+conductor continues electrified by keeping the machine in motion, the
+camphor will throw out ramifications, and appear to shoot like a
+vegetable.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2>AMUSEMENTS WITH CARDS.</h2>
+
+
+<p>Many of the following recreations are performed by arithmetical
+calculations, and may therefore be considered as connected with
+science; but as it has been the aim of this work to unite amusement
+with instruction, some experiments on this subject are introduced, the
+performance of which depends on dexterity of hand. As this is only to
+be acquired by practice, and, after all, is merely a mechanical
+operation, the study of it will produce little useful knowledge,
+though it may afford much entertainment; but as it must be gratifying
+to know the method by which they are performed by those persons
+skilled in such man&#339;uvres, who publicly exhibit them to the
+astonishment of the spectator, they are presented to our readers, that
+when they recognize them at any of these exhibitions, their eyes may
+not be in danger of deceiving their judgment.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To tell the Number of Points on Three Cards, placed
+under Three different Parcels of Cards.</i></h4>
+
+<p>You first premise that the ace counts for eleven; the court
+cards ten each; and the others according to the number of
+their pips. You then propose to any person in company to
+choose three cards, and to place over each as many as will
+make the number of the points of that card, fifteen; take the
+remaining cards, and, under the appearance of looking for
+a particular card, count how many there are, and by adding
+sixteen to that number, you will have the amount of the pips
+on the three cards. For example:</p>
+
+<p>Suppose a person choose a seven, a ten, and an ace;
+then over the seven he must place eight cards; over the ten,
+five cards; and over the ace, four cards. In this instance
+there will remain twelve cards; to which if you add sixteen
+it will make twenty-eight, which is the amount of the pips
+on the three cards.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_102" id="Page_102">[Pg 102]</a></span></p>
+
+<h4><i>The Ten Duplicates.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Select any twenty cards; let any person shuffle them; lay them by
+pairs on the board, without looking at them. You next desire several
+persons, (as many persons as there are pairs on the table,) each to
+look at different pairs and remember what cards compose them. You then
+take up all the cards in the order they lay, and replace them with
+their faces uppermost on the table, according to the order of the
+letters in the following words:</p>
+
+<div class="blockquot"><p>
+M &nbsp; U &nbsp; T &nbsp; U &nbsp; S<br />
+1 &nbsp; 2 &nbsp; 3 &nbsp; 4 &nbsp; 5<br />
+D &nbsp; E &nbsp; D &nbsp; I &nbsp; T<br />
+6 &nbsp; 7 &nbsp; 8 &nbsp; 9 &nbsp;10<br />
+N &nbsp; O &nbsp; M &nbsp; E &nbsp; N<br />
+11 &nbsp;12 &nbsp;13 &nbsp;14 &nbsp;15<br />
+C &nbsp; O &nbsp; C &nbsp; I &nbsp; S<br />
+16 &nbsp;17 &nbsp;18 &nbsp;19 &nbsp;20<br />
+</p></div>
+
+<p>(These words convey no meaning.)&mdash;You will observe, that
+they contain ten letters repeated, or two of each sort. You
+therefore ask each person which row or rows the cards he
+looked at are in; if he say the first, you know they must
+be the second and fourth, there being two letters of a sort
+(two U's) in that row; if he say the second and fourth, they
+must be the ninth and nineteenth, (two I's,) and so of the
+rest. This amusement, which is very simple, and requires
+very little practice, will be found to excite, in those who are
+unacquainted with the key, the greatest astonishment.</p>
+
+<p>The readiest way is to have a fac-simile of the key drawn
+on a card, to which you refer.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To tell how many Cards a Person takes out of a
+Pack, and to specify each Card.</i></h4>
+
+<p>To perform this, you must so dispose a <small>PIQUET</small> pack of
+cards, that you can easily remember the order in which they
+are placed. Suppose, for instance, they are placed according
+to the words in the following line,</p>
+
+<div class="blockquot"><p><i>Seven Aces, Eight Kings, Nine Queens, and Ten Knaves;</i></p></div>
+
+<p>and that every card be of a different suite, following each
+other in this order: spades, clubs, hearts, and diamonds.
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_103" id="Page_103">[Pg 103]</a></span>
+Then the eight first cards will be the seven of spades, ace of
+clubs, eight of hearts, king of diamonds, nine of spades,
+queen of clubs, ten of hearts, and knave of diamonds, and so
+of the rest.</p>
+
+<p>You show that the cards are placed promiscuously, and you offer them
+with their backs upward to any one, that he may draw what quantity he
+pleases; you then dexterously look at the card that precedes and that
+which follows those he has taken. When he has carefully counted the
+cards, which is not to be done in your presence, (and, in order to
+give you time for recollection, you tell him to do it twice over, that
+he may be certain,) you then take them from him, mix them with the
+pack, shuffle, and tell him to shuffle.</p>
+
+<p>During all this time you recollect, by the foregoing line, all the
+cards he took out; and as you lay them down, one by one, you name each
+card.</p>
+
+<p>Unless a person has a most excellent memory, he had better not attempt
+the performance of the above amusement, as the least forgetfulness
+will spoil the whole, and make the operator appear ridiculous.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>A Hundred different Names being written on the Cards, to tell the
+particular Name any Person thought of.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Write on ten cards a hundred different names, observing
+that the last name on each card begins with one of the letters
+in the word INDROMACUS, which letters, in the order they
+stand, answer the numbers 1 to 10, thus:</p>
+
+<div class="blockquot"><p>
+I &nbsp; N &nbsp; D &nbsp; R &nbsp; O &nbsp; M &nbsp; A &nbsp; C &nbsp; U &nbsp; S<br />
+1 &nbsp; 2 &nbsp; 3 &nbsp; 4 &nbsp; 5 &nbsp; 6 &nbsp; 7 &nbsp; 8 &nbsp; 9 &nbsp; 10<br />
+</p></div>
+
+<p>On ten other cards write the same names, with this restriction, that
+the first name on every card must be taken from the first of the other
+cards, whose last name begins with I; the second name must be taken
+from that whose last name begins with N; and so of the rest. Then let
+any person choose a card out of the first ten, and after he has fixed
+on a name, give it to you again, when you carefully note the last
+name, by which you know the number of that card. You then take the
+other ten cards, and, after shuffling them, show them to the person,
+and ask if he sees the name he chose, and when he answers in the
+affirmative, you look to that name which is the same in<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_104" id="Page_104">[Pg 104]</a></span> number from
+the top with the number of the card he took from the other parcel, and
+that will be the name he fixed on.</p>
+
+<p>Instead of ten cards there may be twenty to each parcel, by adding
+duplicates to each card; which will make it appear more mysterious,
+and will not at all embarrass it, as you have only to remember the
+last name on each card. Instead of names you may write questions on
+one of the parcels, and answers on the other.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Several different Cards being fixed on by different Persons, to name
+that on which each Person fixed.</i></h4>
+
+<p>There must be as many different cards shown to <i>each person</i>, as there
+are cards to choose; so that, if there are three persons, you must
+show three cards to each person, telling the first to retain <i>one</i> in
+his memory. You then lay those three cards down, and show three others
+to the second person, and three others to the third. Next take up the
+first person's cards, and lay them down separately, one by one, with
+their faces upwards; place the second person's cards over the first,
+and the third over the second's, so that there will be one card in
+each parcel belonging to each person. You then ask each of them in
+which parcel his card is, and by the answer you immediately know which
+card it is; for the first person's will always be the first, the
+second person's the second, and the third person's the third in that
+parcel where each says his card is.</p>
+
+<p>This amusement may be performed with a single person, by letting him
+fix on three, four, or more cards. In this case you must show him as
+many parcels as he is to choose cards, and every parcel must consist
+of that number, out of which he is to fix on one; and you then proceed
+as before, he telling you the parcel that contains each of his cards.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To name the Rank of a Card that a Person has drawn from a Piquet
+Pack.</i></h4>
+
+<p>The rank of a card means whether it be an ace, king, queen, &amp;c. You
+therefore first fix a certain number to each card; thus you call the
+king four, the queen three, the knave two, the ace one, and the others
+according to the number of their pips.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_105" id="Page_105">[Pg 105]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>You then shuffle the cards, and let a person draw any one of them;
+then turning up the remaining cards, you add the number of the first
+to that of the second, the second to the third, and so on, till it
+amounts to ten, which you then reject, and begin again; or if it be
+more, reject the ten, and carry the remainder to the next card, and so
+on to the last; and to the last amount add four, and subtract that sum
+from ten, if it be less, or from twenty, if it be more than ten, and
+the remainder will be the number of the card that was drawn; as for
+example, if the remainder be two, the card drawn was a knave; if
+three, a queen, and so on.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To tell the Amount of the Numbers of any two Cards drawn from a
+common Pack.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Each court card in this amusement counts for ten, and the other cards
+according to the number of their pips. Let the person who draws the
+cards add as many more cards to each of those he has drawn as will
+make each of their numbers twenty-five. Then take the remaining cards
+in your hand, and, seeming to search for some card among them, tell
+them over to yourself, and their number will be the amount of the two
+cards drawn.</p>
+
+<p>For example.&mdash;Suppose the person has drawn a ten and a seven, then he
+must add fifteen cards to the first, to make the number twenty-five,
+and eighteen to the last, for the same reason; now fifteen and
+eighteen make thirty-three, and the two cards themselves make
+thirty-five, which deducted from fifty-two, leave seventeen, which
+must be the number of the remaining cards, and also of the two cards
+drawn.</p>
+
+<p>You may perform this amusement without touching the cards, thus:</p>
+
+<p>Let the person who has drawn the two cards deduct the number of each
+of them from twenty-six, which is half the number of the pack, and
+after adding the remainders together, let him tell you the amount,
+which you privately deduct from fifty-two, the total number of all the
+cards, and the remainder will be the amount of the two cards.</p>
+
+<p><i>Example.</i>&mdash;Suppose the two cards to be as before, ten and seven; then
+the person deducting ten from twenty-six, there remain sixteen, and
+deducting seven from twenty-six, there remain nineteen; these two
+remainders added together make thirty-five, which you subtract from
+fifty-two; and there must remain seventeen for the amount of the two
+cards, as before.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_106" id="Page_106">[Pg 106]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To tell the Amount of the Numbers of any Three Cards that a Person
+shall draw from the Pack.</i></h4>
+
+<p>After the person has drawn his three cards, draw one yourself and lay
+it aside, for it is necessary that the number of the remaining cards
+be divisible by three, which they will not be in a pack of fifty-two
+cards, if only three be drawn. The card you draw, you may call the
+confederate, and pretend it is by the aid of that card you discover
+the amount of the others. Then tell the party to add as many more to
+each of his cards as will make its number sixteen, which is the third
+part of the remaining forty-eight cards; therefore, suppose he has
+drawn a ten, a seven, and a six; then, to the first he must add six
+cards, to the second nine, and to the third ten, which together make
+twenty-five, and the four cards drawn being added to them make
+twenty-nine. You then take the remaining cards, and, telling them
+over, as in the last amusement, you find their number to be
+twenty-three, the amount of the three cards the person drew.</p>
+
+<p>This amusement may also be performed without touching the cards,
+thus:&mdash;When the party has drawn his three cards, and you have drawn
+one, let him deduct the number of each of the cards he has drawn from
+seventeen, which is one-third of the pack after you have drawn your
+card; and let him tell you the amount of the several remainders, to
+which you privately add one to the card you drew, and, deducting that
+amount from fifty-two, (the whole number of the cards,) the remainder
+will be the amount of the three cards drawn.</p>
+
+<p><i>Example.</i>&mdash;Suppose the three cards to be ten, seven, and six, as
+before; then, each of those numbers subtracted from seventeen, the
+remainders will be respectively, seven, ten, and eleven, which, added
+together, make twenty-eight, to which the single card you drew being
+reckoned as one, and added, makes twenty-nine; and that number
+deducted from fifty-two, leaves twenty-three, which is the amount of
+the three cards the party drew.</p>
+
+<hr style='width: 45%;' />
+
+<p>The following amusements principally depend on dexterity of hand; and,
+as what is termed <i>making the pass</i>, will be necessary to be acquired,
+to enable the operator to perform many of them, we subjoin the
+following explanation of this term:<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_107" id="Page_107">[Pg 107]</a></span></p>
+
+<p><i>How to make the Pass.</i>&mdash;Hold the pack of cards in your right hand, so
+that the palm of your hand may be under the cards: place the thumb of
+that hand on one side of the pack; the first, second, and third
+fingers on the other side, and your little finger between those cards
+that are to be brought to the top, and the rest of the pack. Then
+place your left hand over the cards in such a manner that the thumb
+may be at C, the fore-finger at A, and the other fingers at B, as in
+the following figure:</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 60%;">
+<img src="images/i_020.jpg" width="100%" alt="" title="" />
+</div>
+
+<p>The hands and the two parts of the cards being thus disposed,
+you draw off the lower cards, confined by the little finger
+and the other parts of the right hand, and place them, with
+an imperceptible motion, on the top of the pack.</p>
+
+<p>But before you attempt any of the tricks that depend on <i>making
+the pass</i>, you must have great practice, and be able to perform
+it so dexterously and expeditiously, that the eye cannot
+detect the movement of the hand; or you may, instead of deceiving
+others, expose yourself.</p>
+
+<p><i>The Long Card.</i>&mdash;Another stratagem, connected with the
+performance of many of the following tricks, is what is termed
+the <i>Long Card</i>; that is, a card, either a trifle longer or wider
+than the other cards, not perceptible to the eye of the spectator,
+but easily to be distinguished by the touch of the operator.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Divining Card.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Provide a pack in which there is a long card; open it at
+that part where the long card is, and present the pack to a
+person in such a manner that he will naturally draw that
+card. You then tell him to put it into any part of the pack,
+and shuffle the cards. You take the pack, and offer the same<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_108" id="Page_108">[Pg 108]</a></span>
+card in like manner to a second or third person, taking care
+that they do not stand near enough to see the card each other
+draws.</p>
+
+<p>You then draw several cards yourself, among which is the
+long card, and ask each of the parties if his card be among
+those cards, and he will naturally say <i>yes</i>, as they have all
+drawn the same card. You then shuffle all the cards together,
+and, cutting them at the long card, you hold it before the first
+person, so that the others may not see it, and tell him that is
+his card. You then put it in the pack, shuffle it, cut it again
+at the same card, and hold it to the second person.</p>
+
+<p>You can perform this recreation without the long card, in
+the following manner:</p>
+
+<p>Let a person draw any card, and replace it in the pack.
+You then <i>make the pass</i>, (see p. 107,) and bring that card to
+the top of the pack, and shuffle them, without losing sight of
+that card. You then offer that card to a second person, that he
+may draw it, and put it in the middle of the pack. You <i>make
+the pass</i>, and shuffle the cards a second time in the same
+manner, and offer the card to a third person, and so again to
+a fourth or fifth.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Four Confederate Cards.</i></h4>
+
+<p>A person draws four cards from the pack, and you tell him
+to remember one of them. He then returns them to the pack,
+and you dexterously place two under and two on the top of
+the pack. Under the bottom ones you place four cards of
+any sort, and then, taking eight or ten from the bottom cards,
+you spread them on the table, and ask the person if the card
+he fixed on be among them. If he say <i>no</i>, you are sure it
+is one of the two cards on the top. You then pass those two
+cards to the bottom and, drawing off the lowest of them, you
+ask if that is not his card. If he again say <i>no</i>, you take up
+that card, and bid him draw his card from the bottom of the
+pack. If, on the contrary, he say his cards <i>are</i> among those
+you <i>first</i> drew from the bottom, you must dexterously take
+up the four cards you put under them, and, placing those on
+the top, let the other two be the bottom cards of the pack,
+which you are to draw in the manner before described.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Numerical Cards.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Let the long card be the sixteenth in the pack of piquet cards. Take
+ten or twelve cards from the top of the pack,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_109" id="Page_109">[Pg 109]</a></span> and, spreading them on
+the table, desire a person to think on any one of them, and to observe
+the number it is from the first card. Make the pass at the long card,
+which will then be at the bottom. Then ask the party the number his
+card was at, and, counting to yourself from that number to sixteen,
+turn the cards up, one by one, from the bottom. Then stop at the
+seventeenth card, and ask the person if he has seen his card, when he
+will say <i>no</i>. You then ask him how many more cards you shall draw
+before his card appears; and when he has named the number, you draw
+the card aside with your finger, turn up the number of cards he
+proposed, and throw down the card he fixed on.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Card found out by the Point of the Sword.</i></h4>
+
+<p>When a card has been drawn, you place it under the long card, and by
+shuffling them dexterously, you bring it to the top of the pack. Then
+lay or throw the pack on the ground, observing where the top card
+lies. A handkerchief is then bound round your eyes, which ought to be
+done by a confederate, in such a way that you can see the ground. A
+sword is put into your hand, with which you touch several of the
+cards, as if in doubt, but never losing sight of the top card, in
+which at last you fix the point of the sword, and present it to the
+party who drew it.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Card hit upon by the Guess.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Spread part of the pack before a person, in such way that only one
+court card is visible; and so arrange it, that it shall appear the
+most prominent and striking card. You desire him to think on one; and
+observe if he fix his eye on the court card. When he tells you he has
+determined on one, shuffle the cards, and, turning them up one by one,
+when you come to the court card tell him that is the one.</p>
+
+<p>If he does not seem to fix his eye on the court card, you should not
+hazard the experiment; but frame an excuse for performing some other
+amusement; neither should it be attempted with those who are
+conversant with these sort of deceptions.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Card changed by Word of Command.</i></h4>
+
+<p>You must have two cards of the same sort in the pack, (say the king of
+spades.) Place one next the bottom card, (say seven of hearts,) and
+the other at top. Shuffle the cards<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_110" id="Page_110">[Pg 110]</a></span> without displacing those three,
+and show a person that the bottom card is the seven of hearts. This
+card you dexterously slip aside with your finger, which you have
+previously wetted, and, taking the king of spades from the bottom,
+which the person supposes to be the seven of hearts, lay it on the
+table, telling him to cover it with his hand.</p>
+
+<p>Shuffle the cards again, without displacing the first and last card,
+and, shifting the other king of spades from the top to the bottom,
+show it to another person. You then draw that privately away, and,
+taking the bottom card, which will then be the seven of hearts, you
+lay that on the table, and tell the second person (who believes it to
+be the king of spades) to cover it with his hand.</p>
+
+<p>You then command the cards to change places; and when the two parties
+take off their hands and turn up the cards, they will see, to their
+great astonishment, that your commands are obeyed.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Three Magical Parties.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Offer the long card to a person, that he may draw it, and replace it
+in any part of the pack he pleases. <i>Make the pass</i>, and bring that
+card to the top. Next divide the pack in three parcels, putting the
+long card in the middle heap. You then ask the person which of the
+three heaps his card shall be in. He will, probably, say the middle;
+in which case you immediately show it to him. But if he say either of
+the others, you take all the cards in your hand, placing the parcel he
+has named over the other two, and observing to put your little finger
+between that and the middle heap, at the top of which is the card he
+drew. You then ask at what number in that heap he will have his card
+appear. If, for example, he say the sixth, you tell down five cards
+from the top of the pack, and then, dexterously making the pass, you
+bring the long card to the top, and tell it down as the sixth.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Magic Vase.</i></h4>
+
+<div class="figright" style="width: 265px;">
+<span class="caption">Fig. 20.</span>
+<img src="images/i_021.jpg" width="265" height="410" alt="Fig. 20." title="Fig. 20." />
+</div>
+
+<p>Construct a vase of wood, or pasteboard, see Fig. 20. On
+the inside let there be five divisions; two of them, <i>c d</i>, to be
+large enough to admit a pack of cards each; and the other
+three, <i>e f g</i>, only large enough to contain a single card. Place
+this vase on a bracket, L, which is fastened to the partition M.
+Fix a silken thread at H, the other end of which passes down
+the division <i>d</i>, and, over the pulley I, runs along the bracket
+L, and goes out behind the partition M.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_111" id="Page_111">[Pg 111]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Take three cards from the piquet
+pack, and place one of them in each
+of the divisions <i>e f g</i>, making the
+silk thread or line go under each of
+them. In the division <i>c</i> put the remainder
+of the pack.</p>
+
+<p>You then get another pack of
+cards, at the top of which are to be
+three cards, the same as those in
+the three small divisions: and,
+making the pass, bring them to
+the middle of the pack. Let them
+be drawn by three persons; let them
+shuffle all the cards; after which
+place the pack in the division <i>d</i>, and
+tell the parties that the cards they
+drew will rise at their command,
+separately, from the vase.</p>
+
+<p>A confederate behind the partition then gently drawing
+the line, the three cards will then gradually appear from the
+vase; then taking the cards from <i>c</i>, you show that those three
+are gone from the pack.</p>
+
+<p>The vase must be placed so high that the company cannot
+see the inside.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Divining Perspective Glass.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Procure a small perspective-glass, wide enough, where
+the object-glass is placed, to hold the following table:</p>
+
+<table border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" summary="Perspective Glass">
+<tr align="center">
+ <td>1,131<br />2,231<br />3,331</td>
+ <td>10,132<br />11,232<br />12,332</td>
+ <td>19,133<br />20,233<br />21,333</td>
+</tr>
+<tr align="center">
+ <td>4,121<br />5,221<br />6,321</td>
+ <td>13,122<br />14,222<br />15,322</td>
+ <td>22,123<br />23,223<br />24,323</td>
+</tr>
+<tr align="center">
+ <td>7,111<br />8,211<br />9,311</td>
+ <td>16,112<br />17,212<br />18,312</td>
+ <td>25,113<br />26,213<br />27,313</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_112" id="Page_112">[Pg 112]</a></span>
+Take a pack of twenty-seven cards; give them to a person, bid him fix,
+on one, shuffle them, and return them to you. Arrange the twenty-seven
+cards in three parcels, by laying one down, alternately, on each
+parcel; but before you lay each card down, show it to the person,
+without seeing it yourself. When you have completed the three parcels,
+ask him at what number, from one to twenty-seven, he will have his
+card appear, and in which heap it then is. You then look at the heap
+through your glass; and if the first of the three numbers, which
+stands against the number it is to appear at, be one, put that heap at
+top; if the number be at two, put it in the middle; and if it be
+three, put it at the bottom. Next divide the cards into three heaps,
+in the same manner, a second and third time, and his card will be at
+the number he chose.</p>
+
+<p><i>Example.</i>&mdash;Suppose the person wishes his card to be the
+twentieth from the top; and the first time of making the
+heaps, he says it is in the third heap; you then look at the
+table in the perspective, and you see that the first figure is
+two; you, therefore, put that heap in the middle of the
+pack. The second and third times, you in like manner
+put the heap in which he says it is, at bottom; the number
+each time being three. Then looking at the pack with your
+glass, as if to discover which the card was, you lay the cards
+down, one by one, and the twentieth will be the card fixed
+on.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Card in the Ring.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Get a ring, made of any metal, in which is set a large transparent
+stone or piece of glass, to the bottom of which is fastened a small
+piece of black silk; under the silk is to be the figure of a small
+card; and the silk must be so constructed that it may be either drawn
+aside or spread, by turning the stone round.</p>
+
+<p>You then cause a person to draw the same sort of card as that at the
+bottom of the ring; and tell him to burn it in the candle. Now, the
+ring being so constructed that the silk conceals the card underneath
+it, you first show him the ring, that he may see it is not there, and
+tell him you will make it appear; then rubbing the ashes of the card
+on the ring, you manage to turn the stone or glass dexterously round,
+and exhibit to him the small card at the bottom.</p>
+
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_113" id="Page_113">[Pg 113]</a></span></p>
+<h4><i>The Card in the Mirror.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Provide a mirror, either round or oval, the frame of which must be at
+least as wide as a card, and the glass must be wider than the distance
+between the frame, by at least the width of a card. The glass in the
+middle must be made to move in two grooves, and so much of the
+quicksilver must be scraped off, as is equal to the size of a common
+card. You then paste over the part where the quicksilver is rubbed
+off, a piece of pasteboard, on which is a cord, that must exactly fit
+the space, which must at first be placed behind the frame.</p>
+
+<p>Fix this mirror against a partition, through which two strings are to
+go, by which an assistant in an adjoining room can easily move the
+glass in the grooves, and make the card appear or disappear at
+pleasure. Or it may be done without an assistant, if a table be placed
+against the partition, and a string from the glass be made to pass
+through a leg of it, and communicate with a small trigger, which you
+may easily push down with your foot, and at the same time wiping the
+glass with your handkerchief, under the pretence that the card may
+appear more conspicuous; which will also serve most effectually to
+disguise the operation.</p>
+
+<p>Having every thing thus arranged, you contrive to make
+a person draw the same sort of card as that fixed to the
+mirror; if you do not succeed in this with a stranger, make
+some pretence for shuffling the cards again, and present the
+pack to a confederate, who, of course, will draw the card
+you wish, and who is to show it to two or three persons
+next to him, under the pretence that it might slip his memory.
+This card you place in the middle of the pack, then <i>make
+the pass</i>, and bring it to the bottom. Direct the person to
+look for his card in the mirror, which the confederate behind
+the partition is to draw slowly forward; or if you perform
+the operation yourself, press the trigger with your foot,
+and the card will appear as if placed between the glass and
+the quicksilver. While the glass is drawing forward, you slide
+off the card from the bottom of the pack, and convey it away.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Card in the Opera Glass.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Procure an opera-glass, two inches and a half long; the tube to be
+made of ivory, so thin that it may appear transparent. Place it in a
+magnifying glass, of such a power, and at such a distance, that a
+card, three-quarters of an inch<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_114" id="Page_114">[Pg 114]</a></span> long, may appear like a common-sized
+card. At the bottom of the tube lay a circle of black pasteboard, to
+which fasten a small card, with the pips, or figures, on both sides,
+and in such a manner, that by turning the table, either side of the
+glass may be visible.</p>
+
+<p>You then offer two cards to two persons, similar to the double card in
+the glass. You put them in the pack again, or convey them to your
+pocket; and after a few flourishing motions you tell the persons you
+have conveyed their cards into the glass; then you show each person
+his card in the glass, by turning it in the proper position.</p>
+
+<p>You may easily induce the parties to draw the two cards you wish, by
+placing them first on the top of the pack, and then, by making the
+pass, bringing them to the middle.</p>
+
+<p>When you can make the pass in a dexterous manner, it is
+preferable to the long card, which obliges the operator to
+change the pack frequently, as, if the same card is always
+drawn, it may excite suspicion.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To separate the two Colours of a Pack of Cards by one Cut.</i></h4>
+
+<p>To perform this amusement, all the cards of one colour
+must be cut something narrower at one end than the other.
+You show the cards, and give them to any one, that he may
+shuffle them; then holding them between your hands, one
+hand being at each extremity, with one motion you separate
+the hearts and diamonds from the spades and clubs.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Metamorphosed Cards.</i></h4>
+
+<p>In the middle of a pack place a card that is something
+wider than the rest, which we will suppose to be the knave
+of spades, under which place the seven of diamonds, and
+under that the ten of clubs. On the top of the pack put cards
+similar to these, and others on which are painted different
+objects, <i>viz.</i>:</p>
+
+<table border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" summary="Metamorphosed Cards">
+<tr>
+ <td>First card &nbsp; &nbsp; </td><td>A bird</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Second</td><td>A seven of diamonds</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Third </td><td> A flower</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Fourth </td><td> Another seven of diamonds</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Fifth </td><td> A bird</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Sixth </td><td> A ten of clubs</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Seventh </td><td> A flower</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Eighth </td><td> Another ten of clubs;</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_115" id="Page_115">[Pg 115]</a></span>
+then seven or eight indifferent cards, the knave of spades,
+which is the wide card, the seven of diamonds, the ten of
+clubs, and the rest any indifferent cards.</p>
+
+<p>Two persons are to draw the two cards that are under the wide card,
+which are the seven of diamonds and the ten of clubs. You take the
+pack in your left hand, and open it at the wide end, as you open a
+book, and tell the person who drew the seven of diamonds to place it
+in that opening. You then blow on the cards, and, without closing
+them, instantly bring the card which is at top, and on which a bird is
+painted, over that seven of diamonds. To do this dexterously, you must
+wet the middle finger of your left hand, with which you are to bring
+the card to the middle of the pack. You then bid the person look at
+his card, and when he has remarked the change, to place it where it
+was before. Then blow on the cards a second time, and, bringing the
+seven of diamonds, which is at the top of the pack, to the opening,
+you bid him look at his card again, when he will see it is that which
+he drew. You may do the same with all the other painted cards, either
+with the same person, or with him who drew the ten of clubs.</p>
+
+<p>The whole artifice consists in bringing the card at the top of the
+pack to the opening in the middle, by the wet finger, which requires
+no great practice. Observe, not to let the pack go out of your hands.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To discover the Card which is drawn, by the Throw of a Die.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Prepare a pack of cards, in which there are only six sorts of cards.
+Dispose these cards in such manner that each of the six different
+cards shall follow each other, and let the last of each suite be a
+long card. The cards being thus disposed, it follows, that if you
+divide them into six parcels, by cutting at each of the long cards,
+those parcels will all consist of similar cards.</p>
+
+<p>Let a person draw a card from the pack, and let him replace it in the
+parcel from whence it was drawn, by dexterously offering that part.
+Cut the cards several times, so that a long card be always at bottom.
+Divide the cards in this manner into six heaps, and giving a die to
+the person who drew the card, tell him that the point he throws shall
+indicate the parcel in which is the card he drew; then take up the
+parcel and show him the card.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_116" id="Page_116">[Pg 116]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To tell the Number of the Cards by their Weight.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Take a parcel of cards, suppose forty, among which insert two long
+cards; let the first be, for example, the fifteenth, and the other the
+twenty-sixth from the top. Seem to shuffle the cards, and then cutting
+them at the first long card, poise those you have cut off in your left
+hand, and say, "There should be here fifteen cards." Cut them again at
+the second long card, and say, "There are here only eleven cards."
+Then poising the remainder, you say, "Here are fourteen cards."</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Four Inseparable Kings.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Take the four kings, and behind the last of them place two other
+cards, so that they may not be seen. Then spread open the four kings
+to the company, and put the six cards at the bottom of the pack. Draw
+one of the kings, and put it at the top of the pack. Draw one of the
+two cards at the bottom, and put it towards the middle. Draw the
+other, and put it at some distance from the last, and then show that
+there remains a king at bottom. Then let any one cut the cards, and as
+there remains three kings at bottom, they will then be altogether in
+the middle of the pack.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To change the Cards which several Persons have drawn from the Pack.</i></h4>
+
+<p>On the top of the pack put any card you please&mdash;suppose the queen of
+clubs; make the pass, bring that card to the middle of the pack, and
+offer it to a person to draw. Then, by cutting the cards, bring the
+queen again to the middle of the pack. Make the pass a second time,
+bring it to the top, and shuffle the cards without displacing those on
+the top. Make the pass a third time, bring it to the middle of the
+pack and offer it to a second person to draw, who must be at a proper
+distance from the first person, that he may not perceive it is the
+same card. After the like manner let five persons draw the same card.</p>
+
+<p>Shuffle the pack without losing sight of the queen of clubs, and,
+laying down four other cards with the queen, ask each person if he see
+his card there? They will all reply, "Yes," as they all drew the queen
+of clubs. Place four of those cards on the pack, and, drawing the
+queen privately away,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_117" id="Page_117">[Pg 117]</a></span> you approach the first person, and showing him
+that card, so that the others cannot see it, ask if that be his card;
+then patting it on the top of the pack, blow on it, or give it a
+stroke with your hand, and show it in the same manner to the second
+person, and so of the rest.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Card discovered under the Handkerchief.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Let a person draw any card from the rest, and put it in the middle of
+the pack; you make the pass at that place, and the card will
+consequently be at top; then placing the pack on the table, cover it
+with a handkerchief; and, putting your hand under it, take off the top
+card, and after seeming to search among the cards for some time, draw
+it out.</p>
+
+<p>This amusement may be performed by putting the cards in another
+person's pocket, after the pass is made. Several cards may also be
+drawn and placed together in the middle of the pack, and the pass then
+made.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Convertible Aces.</i></h4>
+
+<p>On the ace of spades fix, with soap, a heart, and on the ace of hearts
+a spade, in such a manner that they will easily slip off.</p>
+
+<p>Show these two aces to the company; then, taking the ace of spades,
+you desire a person to put his foot upon it, and as you place it on
+the ground, draw away the spade. In like manner you place the seeming
+ace of hearts under the foot of another person. You then command the
+two cards to change their places; and that they obey your command, the
+two persons, on taking up their cards, will have ocular demonstration.</p>
+
+<p>A deception similar to this is sometimes practised with one card,
+suppose the ace of spades, over which a heart is pasted lightly. After
+showing a person the card, you let him hold one end of it, and you
+hold the other, and while you amuse him with discourse, you slide off
+the heart. Then laying the card on the table, you bid him cover it
+with his hand; you then knock under the table, and command the heart
+to turn into the ace of spades.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To tell the Card that a Person has touched with his Finger.</i></h4>
+
+<p>This amusement is to be performed by confederacy. You previously agree
+with your confederate on certain signs, by<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_118" id="Page_118">[Pg 118]</a></span> which he is to denote the
+suite, and the particular card of each suite; thus: if he touch the
+first button of his coat, it signifies an ace; if the second, a king,
+&amp;c.; and then again, if he take out his handkerchief, it denotes the
+suite to be hearts; if he take snuff, diamonds, &amp;c. These
+preliminaries being settled, you give the pack to a person who is near
+your confederate, and tell him to separate any one card from the rest,
+while you are absent, and draw his finger once over it. He is then to
+return you the pack, and while you are shuffling the cards, you
+carefully note the signals made by your confederate; then turning the
+cards over one by one, you directly fix on the card he touched.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Card in the Pocket-book.</i></h4>
+
+<p>A confederate is previously to know the card you have taken from the
+pack, and put into your pocket-book. You then present the pack to him,
+and desire him to fix on a card, (which we will suppose to be the
+queen of diamonds,) and place the pack on the table. You then ask him
+the name of the card, and when he says the queen of diamonds, you ask
+him if he be not mistaken, and if he be sure that the card is in the
+pack: when he replies in the affirmative, you say, "It might be there
+when you looked over the cards, but I believe it is now in my pocket;"
+then desire a third person to put his hand in your pocket, and take
+out your book, and when it is opened the card will appear.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Card in the Egg.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Take a card, the same as your long card, and, rolling it up very
+close, put it in an egg, by making a hole as small as possible, and
+which you are to fill up carefully with white wax. You then offer the
+long card to be drawn, and when it is replaced in the pack, you
+shuffle the cards several times, giving the egg to the person who drew
+the card, and while he is breaking it, you privately withdraw the long
+card, that it may appear, upon examining the cards, to have gone from
+the pack into the egg. This may be rendered more surprising by having
+several eggs, in each of which is placed a card of the same sort, and
+then giving the person the liberty to choose which egg he thinks fit.</p>
+
+<p>This deception may be still further diversified, by having, as most
+public performers have, a confederate, who is previously to know the
+egg in which the card is placed; for you<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_119" id="Page_119">[Pg 119]</a></span> may then break the other
+eggs, and show that the only one that contains a card is that in which
+you directed it to be.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Card discovered by the Touch or Smell.</i></h4>
+
+<p>You offer the long card, or any other that you know, and as the person
+who has drawn it holds it in his hand, you pretend to feel the pips or
+figure on the under side, by your fore-finger; or you sagaciously smell
+to it, and then pronounce what card it is.</p>
+
+<p>If it be the long card, you may give the pack to the person who drew
+it, and leave him at liberty either to replace it or not. Then taking
+the pack, you feel immediately whether it be there or not, and,
+shuffling the cards in a careless manner, without looking at them, you
+pronounce accordingly.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Inverted Cards.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Prepare a pack of cards, by cutting one end of them about
+one-tenth of an inch narrower than the other; then offer the
+pack to any one, that he may draw a card; place the pack
+on the table, and observe carefully if he turn the card while
+he is looking at it; if he do not, when you take the pack
+from the table, you offer the other end of it for him to insert
+that card; but if he turn the card, you then offer him the
+same end of the pack. You afterwards offer the cards to a
+second or third person, for them to draw or replace a card in
+the same manner. You then let any one shuffle the cards,
+and, taking them again into your own hand, as you turn them
+up one by one, you easily perceive by the touch which are
+those cards that have been inverted, and, laying the first of
+them down on the table, you ask the person if that card be
+his; and if he say <i>no</i>, you ask the same of the second person;
+and if he say <i>no</i>, you tell the third person it is his card;
+and so of the second or third cards. You shall lay the pack
+on the table after each person has drawn his card, and turn
+it dexterously in taking it up, when it is to be turned, that
+the experiment may not appear to depend on the cards being
+inverted.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Transmuted Cards.</i></h4>
+
+<p>In a common pack of cards let the ace of hearts and nine
+of spades be something larger than the rest. With the juice<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_120" id="Page_120">[Pg 120]</a></span>
+of lemon draw over the ace of hearts a spade, large enough
+to cover it entirely, and on each side draw four other spades.</p>
+
+<p>Present the pack to two persons, so adroitly, that one of
+them shall draw the ace of hearts, and the other the nine of
+spades, and tell him who draws the latter, to burn it on a
+chafing-dish. You then take the ashes of that card, put them
+into a small metal box, and give it to him that has the ace
+of hearts, that he may himself put that card into the box and
+fasten it. Then put the box for a short time on the chafing-dish,
+and let the person who put the card in it take it off, and
+take out the card, which he will see is changed into the nine
+of spades.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Convertible Cards.</i></h4>
+
+<p>To perform this amusement you must observe, that there
+are several letters which may be changed into others, without
+any appearance of the alteration, as the <i>a</i> into <i>d</i>, the <i>c</i>
+into <i>a</i>, <i>e</i>, <i>d</i>, <i>g</i>, <i>o</i>, or <i>q</i>; the <i>i</i> into <i>b</i>, <i>d</i>, or <i>l</i>; the <i>l</i> into <i>t</i>; the
+<i>o</i> into <i>a</i>, <i>d</i>, <i>g</i>, or <i>q</i>; the <i>v</i> into <i>y</i>, &amp;c.</p>
+
+<p>Take a parcel of cards, suppose twenty, and on one of
+them write with juice of lemon or onion, or vitriol and water,
+the word law, (these letters should not be joined;) and on
+the other, with the same ink, the words <i>old woman</i>; then
+holding them to the fire, they both become visible. Now,
+you will observe, that by altering the <i>a</i> in the word <i>law</i> into
+<i>d</i>, and adding <i>o</i> before the <i>l</i>, and <i>oman</i> after the <i>w</i>, it becomes
+<i>old woman</i>. Therefore you make those alterations with the
+invisible ink, and let it remain so. On the rest of the cards
+you write any words you think fit.</p>
+
+<p>Present the cards in such manner to two persons, that one of them
+shall draw the word <i>law</i>, and the other the words <i>old woman</i>. You
+then tell the person who drew the word <i>law</i>, that it shall disappear,
+and the words on the other card shall be written in its place; and,
+that you may not change the cards, desire each of the parties to write
+his name on his card. Then putting the cards together, and holding
+them before the fire, as if to dry the names just written, the word
+<i>law</i> will presently change into <i>old woman</i>.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Enchanted Palace.</i></h4>
+
+<div class="figright" style="width: 260px;">
+<span class="caption">Fig. 21.</span>
+<img src="images/i_022.jpg" width="260" height="512" alt="Fig. 21." title="Fig. 21." />
+</div>
+
+<p>On the six-sided plane A B C D E F, Fig. 21, draw six semi-diameters;
+and on each of these place perpendicularly<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_121" id="Page_121">[Pg 121]</a></span> two plane mirrors, which
+must join exactly at the centre, and which, placed back to back, must
+be as thin as possible. Decorate the exterior boundary of this piece,
+(which is at the extremity of the angles of the hexagon,) with six
+columns, that at the same time serve to support the mirrors by grooves
+formed on their inner sides. Add to these columns their entablatures,
+and cover the edifice in whatever manner you please. In each one of
+these six triangular spaces, contained between two mirrors, place
+little figures of pasteboard, in relief, representing such subjects,
+as, when seen in an hexagonal form, will produce an agreeable effect.
+To these add small figures of enamel, and take particular care to
+conceal by some object that has no relation to the subject, the place
+where the mirrors join, which, as before observed, all meet in the
+common centre.</p>
+
+<p>When you look into any one of the six openings of this palace, the
+objects there contained, being reflected six times, will seem entirely
+to fill up the whole of the building. This illusion will appear very
+remarkable, especially if the objects chosen are properly adapted to
+the effect which the mirrors are intended to produce.</p>
+
+<p>If you place between two of these mirrors part of a fortification, as
+a curtain, and two demi-bastions, you will see an entire citadel with
+six bastions; or if you place part of a ball-room, ornamented with
+chandeliers and figures, all these objects being here multiplied, will
+afford a very pleasing prospect.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Opaque Bodies seemingly Transparent.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Within the case A B C D, place four mirrors O P Q R, Fig. 22, so
+disposed, that they may each make an angle of 45 degrees, that is,
+that they may be half-way inclined from<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_122" id="Page_122">[Pg 122]</a></span> the perpendicular, as in the
+figure. In each of the two extremities A B, make a circular overture;
+in one of which fix the tube G L, in the other the tube M F, and
+observe, that in each of these is to be inserted another tube, as H
+and I. [<i>Observe.</i> These four tubes must terminate in the substance of
+the case, and not enter the inside, that they may not hinder the
+effect of the mirrors. The four-fold reflection of the rays of light
+from the mirrors, darkens in some degree the brightness of the object;
+some light is also lost by the magnifying power of the perspective.
+If, therefore, instead of the object-glass at G, and concave eye-glass
+at F, plain glasses were substituted, the magnifying power of the
+perspective will be taken away, and the object appear brighter.]</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 60%;">
+<span class="caption">Fig. 22.</span>
+<img src="images/i_023.jpg" width="100%" alt="Fig. 22." title="Fig. 22." />
+</div>
+
+<p>Furnish the first of these tubes with an object-glass at G, and a
+concave eye-glass at F. You are to observe, that in regulating the
+focus of these glasses with regard to the length of the tube, you are
+to suppose it equal to the line G, or visual pointed ray, which
+entering at the aperture G is reflected by the four mirrors, and goes
+out at the other aperture F, where the eye-glass is placed. Put any
+glass you please into the two ends of the moveable tubes H and L; and
+lastly, place the machine on stand E, moveable at the point S, that it
+may be elevated or lowered at pleasure.</p>
+
+<p>When the eye is placed at F, and you look through the tube, the rays
+of light that proceed from the object T, passing through the glass G,
+are successively reflected by the mirrors O P Q and R to the eye at F,
+and there point the object T in its proper situation, and these rays
+appear to proceed directly from that object.</p>
+
+<p>The two moveable tubes H and I, at the extremity of<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_123" id="Page_123">[Pg 123]</a></span> which a glass is
+placed, serve only to disguise the illusion, for they have no
+communication with the interior of the machine. This instrument being
+moveable on the stand E, may be directed to any object; and if
+furnished with proper glasses, will answer the purpose of common
+perspective.</p>
+
+<p>The two moveable tubes, H and I, being brought together, the machine
+is directed towards any object; and, desiring a person to look at the
+end F, you ask him if he sees that object distinctly. You then
+separate the two moveable tubes, and, leaving space between them
+sufficiently wide to place your hand or any other solid body, you tell
+him that the machine has the power of making objects visible through
+the most opaque body; and as a proof, you desire him to look at the
+same object, when to his great surprise he will see it as distinctly
+as if no solid body interposed.</p>
+
+<p>This experiment is the more extraordinary as it is very difficult
+to conceive how the effect is produced; the two arms of the
+case appearing to be made for the purpose of supporting the
+perspective-glass; and to whatever object it be directed, the effect
+is still the same.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Deforming Mirrors.</i></h4>
+
+<p>If a person look in a concave mirror placed perpendicularly to
+another, (that is, supposing one mirror to be laid on the floor, and
+the other attached to the ceiling,) his face will appear entirely
+deformed. If the mirror be a little inclined, so as to make an angle
+of 80 degrees, (that is, one-ninth part from the perpendicular,) he
+will then see all the parts of his face, except the nose and forehead.
+If it be inclined to 60 degrees; (that is, one-third part,) he will
+appear with three noses and six eyes: in short, the apparent deformity
+will vary at each degree of inclination, and when the glass comes to
+45 degrees, (that is, half-way down,) the face will vanish. If,
+instead of placing the two mirrors in this situation, they are so
+disposed that their junction may be vertical, then different
+inclinations will produce other effects, as the situation of the
+object relative is quite different.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Magic Tube.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Procure a small tube of glass, whose canal is extremely narrow, and
+open at both ends; let one end of it be plunged<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_124" id="Page_124">[Pg 124]</a></span> in water, and the
+water within the tube will rise to a considerable height above the
+external surface: or if two or more tubes be immersed in the same
+fluid, the one with a narrow canal, and the other wider, the water
+will ascend higher in the former than the latter.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Magician's Mirror.</i></h4>
+
+<div class="figleft" style="width: 280px;">
+<span class="caption">Fig. 23.</span>
+<img src="images/i_024.jpg" width="280" height="308" alt="Fig. 23." title="Fig. 23." />
+</div>
+
+<p>Construct a box of wood, of a cubical shape, A B C D, Fig. 23, of
+about fifteen inches every way. Let it be fixed to the pedestal P, at
+the usual height of a man's head. In each side of this box let there
+be an opening, of an oval form, ten inches high, and seven wide. In
+this box place two mirrors, A D, with their backs against each other.
+Let them cross the box in a diagonal line, and in a vertical position.
+Decorate the openings in the side of this box with four oval frames
+and transparent glasses, and cover each with a curtain so contrived as
+all to draw up together.</p>
+
+<p>Place four persons in front of the four sides, and at equal distances
+from the box, and then draw them up that they may see themselves in
+the mirrors, when each of them, instead of his own figure, will see
+that of the person next to him, but who will appear to him to be
+placed on the opposite side. Their confusion will be the greater, as
+it will be very difficult, if not impossible, for them to discover the
+mirrors concealed in the box. The reason of this phenomenon is
+evident; for though the rays of light may be turned aside by a mirror,
+yet they always <i>appear</i> to proceed in right lines.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Perspective Mirror.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Provide a box, A B C D, Fig. 24, of about two feet long, 15 inches
+wide, and 12 inches high. At the end A C, place the concave mirror,
+the focus of whose parallel rays is 18<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_125" id="Page_125">[Pg 125]</a></span> inches from the reflecting
+surface. At I L place a pasteboard, blacked, in which a hole is cut,
+sufficiently large to see on the mirror H the object placed at B E F
+D. Cover the top of the box, from A to I, close, that the mirror H may
+be entirely darkened. The other part, I B, must be covered with glass,
+under which is placed a gauze, or oiled paper, to prevent the inside
+from being seen. Make an aperture at G, near the top of the side E B,
+beneath which, on the inside, place in succession, paintings of
+vistas, landscapes, figures, &amp;c., so that they may be in front of the
+mirror H. Let the box be placed that the objects may be strongly
+illuminated by the sun, or by wax-lights placed under the enclosed
+part of the box A I. By this simple construction, the objects placed
+at G D will be thrown into their natural perspective, and if the
+subjects be properly chosen and well executed, the appearance will be
+both wonderful and pleasing.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 80%;">
+<span class="caption">Fig. 24.</span>
+<img src="images/i_025.jpg" width="100%" alt="Fig. 24." title="Fig. 24." />
+</div>
+
+
+<h4><i>Gunpowder Exploded by Reflection.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Place two concave mirrors at about 12 or 15 feet distance
+from each other, and let the axis of each be in the same line.
+In the focus of one of them place a live coal, and in the focus
+of the other place some gunpowder. With a pair of double
+bellows, which make a continual blast, keep constantly blowing
+the coal, and notwithstanding the distance between them,
+the powder will presently take fire.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Igniting Mirrors.</i></h4>
+
+<p>The rays of a luminous body placed in the focus of concave
+mirror, being reflected in parallel lines, and a second<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_126" id="Page_126">[Pg 126]</a></span>
+mirror being placed diametrically opposite to the first, will
+set fire to a combustible body, by collecting those rays in the
+focus.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Armed Apparition.</i></h4>
+
+<p>If a person with a drawn sword place himself before a large concave
+mirror, but further from it than its focus, he will see an inverted
+image of himself in the air, between him and the mirror, of a less
+size than himself. If he steadily present the sword towards the centre
+of the mirror, an image of the sword will come out from it, point to
+point, as if to fence with him; and by his pushing the sword nearer,
+the image will appear to come nearer to him, and almost to touch his
+breast. If the mirror be turned 45 degrees, or one-eighth round, the
+reflected image will go out perpendicularly to the direction of the
+sword presented, and apparently come to another person placed in the
+direction of the motion of the image, who, if he be unacquainted with
+the experiment, and does not see the original sword, will be much
+surprised and alarmed.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Phantom.</i></h4>
+
+<p>You inform a person that at a certain hour, and in a certain place, he
+shall see the apparition of a deceased friend, (whose portrait you
+possess.) In order to produce this phantom, there must be a door which
+opens into an apartment to which there is a considerable descent.
+Under that door you are to place the portrait, which must be inverted
+and strongly illuminated, that it may be brightly reflected by the
+mirror, which must be large and well polished. Then having introduced
+the incredulous spectator at another door, and placed him in the
+proper point of view, you suddenly throw open the door, when to his
+great surprise he will view the apparition of his friend.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Distorting Mirror.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Opticians sometimes grind a glass mirror concave in one direction
+only, or longitudinally; it is in fact a concave portion of a
+cylinder, the breadth of which may be considered that of the mirror. A
+person looking at his face in this mirror, in the direction of its
+concavity, will see it curiously dis<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_127" id="Page_127">[Pg 127]</a></span>torted in a very lengthened
+appearance; and by turning the cylindrical mirror a quarter round, his
+visage will appear distorted another way, by an apparent increase in
+width only. If in a very near situation before it, you put your finger
+on the right hand side of your nose, it will appear the same in the
+mirror; but if in a distant situation, somewhat beyond the centre of
+concavity, you again look at your face in the mirror, your finger will
+appear to be removed to the other side of your nose.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Water colder than Ice.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Put a lump of ice into an equal quantity of water, heated to 176
+degrees, the result will be, that the fluid will be no hotter than
+water just beginning to freeze; but if a little sea salt be added to
+the water, and it be heated only to 166 or 170, a fluid will be
+produced <i>colder than the ice was at first</i>.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Exploding Salt.</i></h4>
+
+<p>If a small quantity of powdered charcoal and hyper-oxymuriate of
+potash be rubbed together in a mortar, an explosion will be produced,
+and the charcoal inflamed. Three parts of this salt, and one of
+sulphur, rubbed together in a mortar, produce a violent detonation. If
+struck with a hammer on an anvil, there is an explosion like the
+report of a pistol.</p>
+
+<p>When concentrated sulphuric acid is poured upon this salt, there is a
+considerable explosion; it is thrown about to a great distance,
+sometimes with a red flame; and there is exhaled a brown vapour,
+accompanied with a strong odour.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Dioptrical Paradox.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Construct a machine similar to that in Fig. 25. Its effect will be,
+that a print, or an ornamented drawing, with any object, such as an
+ace of diamonds, &amp;c. in the centre F, will be seen as an ace of clubs
+when placed in the machine, and viewed through a single plane glass
+only, contained in the tube E. The glass in the tube F, which produces
+this surprising change, is somewhat on the principle of the common
+multiplying glass, as represented at G, which, by the number of its
+inclined surfaces, and from the refractive power of the rays
+proceeding from the objects placed before it shows<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_128" id="Page_128">[Pg 128]</a></span> it in a multiplied
+state. The only difference is, that the sides of this glass are flat,
+and diverge upwards from the base to a point in the axis of the glass
+like a cone; it has six sides, and each side, from its angular
+position to the eye, has the property of refracting from the border of
+the print F, such a portion of it (designedly placed there) as will
+make a part in the composition of the figure to be represented; for
+the hexagonal and conical figure of this glass prevents any part of
+the ace of diamonds being seen; consequently the ace of clubs being
+previously and mechanically drawn in the circle of refraction in six
+different parts of the border, at 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and artfully
+disguised in the ornamental border, by blending them with it, the
+glass in the tube at E will change the appearance of the ace of
+diamonds, F, into the ace of clubs, G. In the same manner many other
+prints undergo similar changes, according to the will of an ingenious
+draughtsman who may design them. The figure of the glass is shown at
+H.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 70%;">
+<span class="caption">Fig. 25.</span>
+<img src="images/i_026.jpg" width="100%" alt="Fig. 25." title="Fig. 25." />
+</div>
+
+
+<h4><i>To show the Spots in the Sun's Disk by its Image in
+the Camera Obscura.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Put the object-glass of a ten or twelve feet telescope into the
+scioptric ball, and turn it about till it be directly<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_129" id="Page_129">[Pg 129]</a></span> opposite the
+sun. Then place the pasteboard mentioned in page 16, in the focus of
+the lens, and you will see a clear bright image of the sun, about an
+inch diameter, in which the spots on the sun's surface will be exactly
+described.</p>
+
+<p>As this image is too bright to be seen with pleasure by the naked eye,
+you may view it through a lens whose focus is at six or eight inches
+distance, which, while it prevents the light from being offensive,
+will, by magnifying both the image and the spot, make them appear to
+greater advantage.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Diagonal Opera Glass.</i></h4>
+
+<p>By the diagonal position of a plane mirror, a curious opera-glass is
+constructed, by which any person may be viewed in a theatre or public
+company without knowing it. It consists only in placing a concave
+glass near the plane mirror, in the end of a short round tube, and a
+convex glass in a hole in the side of the tube, then holding the end
+of the tube with the glass to the eye, all objects next to the hole in
+the side will be reflected so as to appear in a direct line forward,
+or in a position at right angles to the person's situation who is
+looked at. Plane glasses, instead of a convex and concave, may be
+used; in this case the size of the object will not be increased, but
+it will appear brighter.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To observe an Eclipse of the Sun, without Injury to the Eye.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Take a burning-glass, or spectacle-glass, that magnifies very much;
+hold it before a book or pasteboard, twice the distance of its focus,
+and you will see the round body of the sun, and the manner in which
+the moon passes between the glass and the sun, during the whole
+eclipse.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Burnt Writing restored.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Cover the outside of a small memorandum book with black paper, and in
+one of its inside covers make a flap, to open secretly, and observe
+there must be nothing over the flap but the black paper that covers
+the book.</p>
+
+<p>Mix soot with black or brown soap, with which rub the side of the
+black paper next the flap; then wipe it clean,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_130" id="Page_130">[Pg 130]</a></span> that a white paper
+pressed against it will not receive any mark.</p>
+
+<p>Provide a black-lead pencil that will not mark without pressing hard
+on the paper. Have likewise a small box, about the size of a
+memorandum book, and that opens on both sides, but on one of them by a
+private method. Give a person a pencil and a slip of thin paper, on
+which he is to write what he thinks proper; you present him the
+memorandum book at the same time, that he may not write on the bare
+paper. You tell him to keep what he writes to himself, and direct him
+to burn it on the iron plate laid on a chafing-dish of coals, and give
+you the ashes. You then go into another room to fetch your magic box,
+before described, and take with you the memorandum book.</p>
+
+<p>Having previously placed a paper under the flap in the cover of the
+book, when he presses hard with the pencil, to write on his paper,
+every stroke, by means of the stuff rubbed on the black paper, will
+appear on that under the flap. You therefore take it out, and put it
+into one side of the box.</p>
+
+<p>You then return to the other room, and taking a slip of black paper,
+you put it into the other side of the box, strewing the ashes of the
+burnt paper over it. Then shaking the box for a few moments, and at
+the same time turning it dexterously over, you open the other side,
+and show the person the paper you first put in, the writing on which
+he will readily acknowledge to be his.</p>
+
+<p>If there be a press or cupboard that communicates with the next room,
+you need only put the book in the press, and your assistant will open
+it, and put the paper in the box, which you presently after take out,
+and perform the rest of the amusement as before.</p>
+
+<p>There may likewise be a flap on the other cover of the book; and you
+may rub the paper against that with red lead. In this case you give
+the person the choice of writing either with a black or red pencil;
+and present him the proper side of the book accordingly.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Opaque Box made Transparent.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Make a box three or four inches long, and two or three wide, and have
+a sort of perspective-glass, the bottom of which is the same size with
+the box, and slides out, that you<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_131" id="Page_131">[Pg 131]</a></span> may privately place a paper on it.
+The sides of this perspective are to be of glass, covered on the
+inside with fine paper.</p>
+
+<p>Let a person write on a slip of paper, putting your memorandum book
+under it, as in the last amusement; then give him the little box, and
+let him put what he has written into it. In the mean time you put the
+memorandum book into the press, where the perspective is already
+placed. Your assistant then takes the paper out of the book, and puts
+it at the bottom of the perspective; which you presently take out of
+the press, and direct the person to put the little box that contains
+the paper under it. You then look in at the top of the perspective,
+and feigning to see through the top of the box, you read what is
+written on the paper at the bottom of the perspective.</p>
+
+<p>With this perspective box you may perform another amusement, which is,
+by having in a bag twelve or more ivory counters, numbered, which you
+show to the company, that they may see all the numbers are different.
+You tell a person to draw any one of them, and keep it close in his
+hand. You then put the bag in the press, when your assistant examines
+the counters, and sees which is wanting, and puts another of the same
+number at the bottom of the perspective, which you then take out, and
+placing the person's hand close to it, look in at the top, and
+pretending to see through his hand, you name the number on the counter
+in it.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Transposable Pieces.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Take two guineas and two shillings, and grind part of them away, on
+one side only, so that they may be but half the common thickness; and
+observe, that they must be quite thin at the edge; then rivet a guinea
+and a shilling together. Lay one of these double pieces, with the
+shilling upwards, on the palm of your hand, at the bottom of your
+three first fingers, and lay the other piece with the guinea upwards
+in the like manner, in the other hand. Let the company take notice in
+which hand is the guinea, and in which is the shilling. Then as you
+shut your hands, you naturally turn the pieces over, and when you open
+them again, the shilling and the guinea will appear to have changed
+their places.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_132" id="Page_132">[Pg 132]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Penetrative Guinea.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Provide a large tin box, of the size of a large snuff-box, and in this
+place eight other boxes, which will go easily into each other, and let
+the least of them be of a size to hold a guinea. Each of these boxes
+should shut with a hinge, and to the least of them there must be a
+small lock, that is fastened with a spring, but cannot be opened
+without a key;&mdash;observe, that all these boxes must shut so freely,
+that they may be all closed at once. Place these boxes in each other,
+with their tops open, in the drawer of the table on which you make
+your experiments; or, if you please, in your pocket, in such a manner
+that they cannot be displaced.</p>
+
+<p>Then ask a person to lend you a new guinea, and desire him to mark it,
+that it may not be changed. You take this piece in one hand, and in
+the other you have another of the same appearance, and putting your
+hand into the drawer, you slip the piece that is marked into the least
+box, and shutting them all at once, you take them out; then showing
+the piece you have in your hand, and which the company suppose to be
+the same that was marked, you pretend to make it pass through the box,
+and dexterously convey it away.</p>
+
+<p>You then present the box, for the spectators do not yet know there are
+more than one, to any person in company, who, when he opens it, finds
+another, and another, till he comes to the last, but that he cannot
+open without the key, which you then give him, and retiring to a
+distant part of the room, you tell him to take out the guinea himself,
+and see if it be that which he marked.</p>
+
+<p>This amusement may be made more surprising, by putting
+the key into the snuff-box of one of the company, which you
+may do by asking him for a pinch of snuff, and at the same
+time conceal the key, which must be very small, among the
+snuff; and when the person, who is to open the box, asks
+for the key, you tell him that one of the company has it in
+his snuff-box. This part of the amusement may likewise be
+performed by means of a confederate.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To make Pictures of Birds with their Natural Feathers.</i></h4>
+
+<p>First take thin board or panel, of deal or wainscot, well seasoned,
+that it may not shrink; then paste white paper<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_133" id="Page_133">[Pg 133]</a></span> smoothly on it, and
+let it dry; if the colour of the wood show through, paste a second
+paper over it. When the paper is dry, get ready any bird that you
+would represent, and draw the outline as exact as you can on the
+papered panel. You then paint the ground-work, stump of a tree, the
+bill and legs, their proper colour, with water-colours, leaving the
+body to be covered with its own natural feathers. In the space you
+have left for the body, you lay on very thick gum-water, letting each
+coat dry before you lay on another, and so continuing until the gum is
+as thick as a shilling. Then take the feathers off the bird; and, as
+you proceed, draw a camels'-hair pencil, dipped in gum-water, over the
+coat of gum that you have laid on the paper, that it may more readily
+adhere. As you strip the bird, you must fix the feathers in their
+proper places on the board, and you shave the shafts or stems of the
+larger feathers, that they may lie flat. The most ready way to perform
+the operation, is to provide yourself with a pair of steel pliars to
+take up and lay on the feathers with. You should prepare some small
+leaden weights to lay on the feathers, that they may more readily
+adhere to, and lie flat on, the gum. The part where the eye is must be
+supplied by a small piece of paper, coloured and shaped like one; or
+you may, probably, be able to get a glass bead that will answer the
+purpose better. In order that the feathers may lie smooth and regular,
+when the whole is perfectly dry, lay a book, or a flat board, with a
+weight on it.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Art of Bronzing.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Bronzing is that process by which figures of plaster-of-paris, wood,
+&amp;c. are made to have the appearance of copper or brass. The method is
+as follows:</p>
+
+<p>Dissolve copper filings in aqua fortis. When the copper has
+impregnated the acid, pour off the solution, and put into it some
+pieces of iron, or iron filings. The effect of this will be to sink
+the powder to the bottom of the acid. Pour off the liquor, and wash
+the powder in successive quantities of fresh water. When the powder is
+dry, it is to be rubbed on the figure with a soft cloth, or piece of
+leather; but observe, that previously to the application of the bronze
+powder, a dark blackish sort of green is first to be laid on the
+figure: and if you wish the powder to adhere stronger, mix it with
+gum-water, lay it on like paint, with a camels'-hair brush,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_134" id="Page_134">[Pg 134]</a></span> or
+previously trace the parts to be bronzed with gold size, and when
+nearly dry, rub the powder over it.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Method of taking the Impression of Butterflies on Paper.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Clip the wings off the butterfly, lay them on clean, in the form of a
+butterfly when flying. Spread some thick clean gum-water on another
+piece of paper, press it on the wings, and it will take them up; lay a
+piece of white paper over it, and rub it gently with your finger, or
+the smooth handle of a knife. The bodies are to be drawn in the space
+which you leave between the wings.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To soften Horn.</i></h4>
+
+<p>To one pound of wood-ashes, add two pounds of quick lime; put them
+into a quart of water. Let the whole boil till reduced to one-third.
+Then dip a feather in, and if, on drawing it out, the plume should
+come off, it is a proof that it is boiled enough; if not, let it boil
+a little longer. When it is settled, filter it off, and in the liquor
+thus strained put in shavings of horn. Let them soak for three days;
+and, first anointing your hands with oil, work the horn into a mass,
+and print or mould it into any shape you please.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To make Moulds of Horn.</i></h4>
+
+<p>If you wish to take the impression of any coin, medal, &amp;c., previously
+anoint it with oil; then lay the horn shavings over it in its softened
+state. When dry, the impression will be sunk into the horn; and this
+will serve as a mould to re-produce, either by plaster-of-paris, putty
+and glue, or isinglass and ground egg-shells, the exact resemblance of
+the coin or medal.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To cast Figures in Imitation of Ivory.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Make isinglass and strong brandy into a paste, with powder of
+egg-shells, very finely ground. You may give it what colour you
+please; but cast it warm into your mould, which you previously oil
+over. Leave the figure in the mould till dry, and you will find, on
+taking it out, that it bears a very strong resemblance to ivory.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_135" id="Page_135">[Pg 135]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To extract the Silver out of a Ring that is thick gilded, so that the
+Gold may remain entire.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Take a silver ring that is thick gilded. Make a little hole through
+the gold into the silver; then put the ring into aqua fortis, in a
+warm place: it will dissolve the silver, and the gold will remain
+whole.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To soften Iron or Steel.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Either of the following simple methods will make iron or steel as soft
+as lead:</p>
+
+<p>1. Anoint it all over with tallow; temper it in a gentle charcoal
+fire, and let it cool of itself.<br />
+
+2. Take a little clay, cover your iron with it, temper it in a
+charcoal fire.<br />
+
+3. When the iron or steel is red-hot, strew hellebore on it.<br />
+
+4. Quench the iron or steel in the juice or water of common beans.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To take a Plaster-of-Paris Cast from a Person's Face.</i></h4>
+
+<p>The person must lie on his back, and his hair be tied behind. Into
+each nostril put a conical piece of paper, open at each end to allow
+of breathing. The face is to be lightly oiled over, and the plaster
+being properly prepared is to be poured over the face, (taking care
+that the eyes are shut,) till it is a quarter of an inch thick. In a
+few minutes the plaster may be removed. In this a mould is to be
+formed, from which a second cast is to be taken, that will furnish
+casts exactly like the original.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Curious Experiment with a Glass of Water.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Saturate a certain quantity of water in a moderate heat, with three
+ounces of sugar; and when it will no longer receive that, there is
+still room in it for two ounces of salt of tartar, and after that for
+an ounce and a drachm of green vitriol, nearly six drachms of nitre,
+the same of sal-ammoniac, two drachms and a scruple of alum, and a
+drachm and half of borax.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_136" id="Page_136">[Pg 136]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To make Artificial Coruscations.</i></h4>
+
+<p>There is a method of producing artificial coruscations, or sparkling
+fiery meteors, which will be visible, not only in the dark but at
+noon-day, and that from two liquors actually cold. The method is
+this:&mdash;Fifteen grains of solid phosphorus are to be melted in about a
+drachm of water: when this is cold, pour upon it two ounces of oil of
+vitriol; let these be shaken together in a large phial, and they will
+at first heat, and afterwards will throw up fiery balls in great
+number, which will adhere like so many stars to the sides of the
+glass, and continue burning a considerable time; after this, if a
+small quantity of oil of turpentine be poured in without shaking the
+phial, the mixture will of itself take fire, and burn very furiously.
+The vessels should be large and open at the top.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Another Method.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Artificial coruscations may also be produced by means of oil of
+vitriol and iron, in the following manner:&mdash;Take a glass vessel
+capable of holding three quarts: put into this three ounces of oil of
+vitriol, and twelve ounces of water, then warming the mixture a
+little, throw in at several times two ounces, or more, of clear iron
+filings: upon this, an ebullition and white vapours will arise; then
+present a lighted candle to the mouth of the vessel, and the vapour
+will take fire, and afford a bright fulmination or flash; like
+lightning. Applying the candle in this manner several times, the
+effect will always be the same; and sometimes the fire will fill the
+whole body of the glass, and even circulate to the bottom of the
+liquor; at others, it will only reach a little down its neck. The
+great caution to be used in making this experiment, is the making the
+vapour of a proper heat; for if made too cold few vapours will arise;
+and, if made too hot, they will arise too fast, and will only take
+fire in the neck of the glass, without any remarkable coruscation.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To produce Fire from Cane.</i></h4>
+
+<p>The Chinese rattans, which are used, when split, for making cane
+chairs, will, when dry, if struck against each<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_137" id="Page_137">[Pg 137]</a></span> other, give fire; and
+are used accordingly in some places, in lieu of flint and steel.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To make an Eolian Harp.</i></h4>
+
+<p>This instrument may be made by almost any carpenter: it consists of a
+long narrow box of very thin deal, about five or six inches deep, with
+a circle in the middle of the upper side, of an inch and a half in
+diameter, in which are to be drilled small holes. On this side, seven,
+ten, or more strings, of very fine gut, are stretched over bridges at
+each end, like the bridges of a fiddle, and screwed up or relaxed with
+screw pins. The strings must be all tuned to one and the same note,
+and the instrument be placed in some current of air, where the wind
+can pass over its strings with freedom. A window, of which the width
+is exactly equal to the length of the harp, with the sash just raised
+to give the air admission, is a proper situation. When the air blows
+upon these strings, with different degrees of force, it will excite
+different tones of sounds; sometimes the blast brings out all the
+tones in full concert, and sometimes it sinks them to the softest
+murmurs.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To show the Pressure of the Atmosphere.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Invert a tall glass or jar in a dish of water, and place a lighted
+taper under it: as the taper consumes the air in the jar its pressure
+becomes less on the water immediately under the jar; while the
+pressure of the atmosphere on the water <i>without</i> the circle of the
+jar remaining the same, part of the water in the dish will be forced
+up into the jar, to supply the place of the air which the taper has
+consumed. Nothing but the pressure of the atmosphere could thus cause
+part of the water to rise within the jar, above its own level.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Subaqueous Exhalation.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Pour a little clear water into a small glass tumbler, and put one or
+two small pieces of phosphoret of lime into it. In a short time,
+flashes of fire will dart from the surface of the water, and terminate
+in ringlets of smoke, which will ascend in regular succession.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_138" id="Page_138">[Pg 138]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Remarkable Properties in certain Plants.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Plants, when forced from their natural position, are endowed with a
+power to restore themselves. A hop-plant, twisting round a stick,
+directs its course from south to west, as the sun does. Untwist it,
+and tie it in the opposite direction, it dies. Leave it loose in the
+wrong direction, it recovers its natural direction in a single night.
+Twist a branch of a tree so as to invert its leaves, and fix it in
+that position; if left in any degree loose, it untwists itself
+gradually, till the leaves be restored to their natural position. What
+better can an animal do for its welfare? A root of a tree meeting with
+a ditch in its progress, is laid open to the air; what follows? It
+alters its course like a rational being, dips into the ground,
+surrounds the ditch, rises on the opposite side of its wonted distance
+from the surface, and then proceeds in its original direction. Lay a
+wet sponge near a root exposed to the air; the root will direct its
+course to the sponge; change the place of the sponge, the root varies
+its direction. Thrust a pole into the ground at a moderate distance
+from a climbing plant; the plant directs its course to the pole, lays
+hold of it, and rises on its natural height. A honeysuckle proceeds in
+its course, till it be too long for supporting its weight, and then
+strengthens itself by shooting into a spiral. If it meet with another
+plant of the same kind, they coalesce for mutual support; the one
+screwing to the right, the other to the left. If a honeysuckle twig
+meet with a dead branch, it screws from the right to the left. The
+claspers of briony shoot into the spiral, and lay hold of whatever
+comes in their way, for support. If, after completing a spiral of
+three rounds, they meet with nothing, they try again, by altering
+their course.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Flowers curiously affected by the Sun and the Weather.</i></h4>
+
+<p>The petals of many flowers expand in the sun, but contract all night,
+or on the approach of rain; after the seeds are fecundated the petals
+no longer contract. All the trefoil may serve as a barometer to the
+husbandman; they always contract their leaves on an impending storm.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_139" id="Page_139">[Pg 139]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Easy Method of obtaining Flowers of different Colours from the same
+Stem.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Scoop out the pith from a small twig of elder, and having split it
+lengthwise, fill each of the parts with small seeds that produce
+flowers of different colours, but that blossom nearly at the same
+time. Surround them with earth; and then tying together the two bits
+of wood, plant the whole in a pot filled with earth, properly
+prepared.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>A Luminous Bottle, which will show the Hour on a Watch in the Dark.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Throw a bit of phosphorus, of the size of a pea, into a long glass
+phial, and pour boiling oil carefully over it, till the phial is
+one-third filled. The phial must be carefully corked, and when used
+should be unstopped, to admit the external air, and closed again. The
+empty space of the phial will then appear luminous, and give as much
+light as an ordinary lamp. Each time that the light disappears, on
+removing the stopper it will instantly re-appear. In cold weather the
+bottle should be warmed in the hands before the stopper is removed. A
+phial thus prepared may be used every night for six months.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To make Luminous Writing in the Dark.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Fix a small piece of solid phosphorus in a quill, and write with it
+upon paper; if the paper be carried into a dark room, the writing will
+appear beautifully luminous.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Sublimated Tree.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Into a large glass jar inverted upon a flat brick tile, and containing
+near its top a branch of fresh rosemary, or any other such shrub,
+moistened with water, introduce a flat thick piece of heated iron, on
+which place some gum benzoin, in gross powder. The benzoin, in
+consequence of the heat, will be separated, and ascend in white fumes,
+which will at length condense, and form a most beautiful appearance
+upon the leaves of the vegetable.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_140" id="Page_140">[Pg 140]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Easy and curious Methods of foretelling Rainy or Fine Weather.</i></h4>
+
+<p>If a line be made of good whipcord, that is well dried, and a plummet
+affixed to the end of it, and then hung against a wainscot, and a line
+drawn under it, exactly where the plummet reaches, in very moderate
+weather it will be found to rise above it before rain, and to sink
+below when the weather is likely to become fair. But the best
+instrument of all, is a good pair of scales, in one of which let there
+be a brass weight of a pound, and in the other a pound of salt, or of
+saltpetre, well dried; a stand being placed under the scale, so as to
+hinder it falling too low. When it is inclined to rain, the salt will
+swell, and sink the scale: when the weather is growing fair, the brass
+weight will regain its ascendancy.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Contrivance for a Watch Lamp, perfectly safe, which will show the
+Hour of the Night, without any trouble, to a person lying in Bed.</i></h4>
+
+<p>It consists of a stand, with three claws, the pillar of which is made
+hollow, for the purpose of receiving a water candlestick of an inch
+diameter. On the top of the pillar, by means of two hinges and a bolt,
+is fixed on a small proportionate table, a box of six sides, lined
+with brass, tin, or any shining metal, nine inches deep, and six
+inches in diameter. In the centre of one of these sides is fixed a
+lens, double convex, of at least three inches and a half diameter. The
+centre of the side directly opposite to the lens is perforated so as
+to receive the dial-plate of the watch, the body of which is confined
+on the outside, by means of a hollow slide. When the box is lighted by
+a common watch-light, the figures are magnified nearly to the size of
+those of an ordinary clock.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Curious Experiment with a Tulip.</i></h4>
+
+<p>The bulb of a tulip in every respect resembles buds, except in their
+being produced under ground, and include the leaves and flower in
+miniature, which are to be expanded in the ensuing spring. By
+cautiously cutting in the early spring, through the concentric coats
+of a tulip root, longitudinally from the top to the base, and taking
+them off successively,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_141" id="Page_141">[Pg 141]</a></span> the whole flower of the next summer's tulip is
+beautifully seen by the naked eye, with its petals, pistal, and
+stamina.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Travelling of Sound experimentally proved.</i></h4>
+
+<p>There is probably no substance which is not in some measure a
+conductor of sound; but sound is much enfeebled by passing from one
+medium to another. If a man, stopping one of his ears with his finger,
+stop the other also by pressing it against the end of a long stick,
+and a watch be applied to the opposite end of the stick, or a piece of
+timber, be it ever so long, the beating of the watch will be
+distinctly heard; whereas, in the usual way, it can scarcely be heard
+at the distance of fifteen or eighteen feet. The same effect will take
+place if he stops both his ears with his hands, and rest his teeth,
+his temple, or the gristly part of one of his ears against the end of
+a stick. Instead of a watch, a gentle scratch may be made at one end
+of a pole or rod, and the person who keeps his ear in close contact
+with the other end of the pole, will hear it very plainly. Thus,
+persons who are dull of hearing, may, by applying their teeth to some
+part of a harpsichord, or other sounding body, hear the sound much
+better than otherwise.</p>
+
+<p>If a person tie a strip of flannel about a yard long, round a poker,
+then press with his thumbs and fingers the ends of the flannel into
+his ears, while he swings the poker against an iron fender, he will
+hear a sound very like that of a large church bell.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To produce Metallic Lead from the Powder.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Take one ounce of red lead, and half a drachm of charcoal in powder,
+incorporate them well in a mortar, and then fill the bowl of a
+tobacco-pipe with the mixture. Submit it to an intense heat, in a
+common fire, and when melted, pour it out upon a slab, and the result
+will be metallic lead completely revived.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To diversify the Colours of Flowers.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Fill a vessel of what size or shape you please, with good rich earth,
+which has been dried and sifted in the sun, then plant in the same a
+slip or branch of a plant bearing a white flower, (for such only can
+be tinged,) and use no other water to water it with, but such as is
+tinged with red, if you desire<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_142" id="Page_142">[Pg 142]</a></span> red flowers; with blue, if blue
+flowers, &amp;c. With this coloured water, water the plant twice a day,
+morning and evening, and remove it into the house at night, so that it
+drink not of the morning or evening dew for three weeks. You will then
+experience, that it will produce flowers, not altogether tinctured
+with that colour wherewith you watered it, but partly with that, and
+partly with the natural.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>How far Sound travels in a Minute.</i></h4>
+
+<p>However it may be with regard to the theories of sound, experience has
+taught us, that it travels at about the rate of 1142 feet in a second,
+or nearly thirteen miles in a minute. The method of calculating its
+progress is easily made known: when a gun is discharged at a distance,
+we see the fire long before we hear the sound; if, then, we know the
+distance of the place, and know the time of the interval between our
+first seeing the fire, and then hearing the report, this will show us
+exactly the time the sound has been travelling to us. For instance, if
+the gun be discharged a mile off, the moment the flash is seen I take
+a watch and count the seconds till I hear the sound; the number of
+seconds is the time the sound has been travelling a mile.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Easy Method of making a Rain Gauge.</i></h4>
+
+<p>A very simple rain gauge, and one which will answer all practical
+purposes, consists of a copper funnel the area of whose opening is
+exactly ten square inches: this funnel is fixed in a bottle, and the
+quantity of rain caught is ascertained by multiplying the weight in
+ounces by 173, which gives the depth in inches and parts of an inch.
+In fixing these gauges, care must be taken that the rain may have free
+access to them: hence the tops of buildings are usually the best
+places. When the quantities of rain collected in them at different
+places are compared, the instruments ought to be fixed at the same
+heights above the ground at both places, because at different heights
+the quantities are always different, even at the same place.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To make beautiful Transparent coloured Water.</i></h4>
+
+<p>The following liquors, which are coloured, being mixed, produce
+colours very different from their own. The yellow<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_143" id="Page_143">[Pg 143]</a></span> tincture of
+saffron, and the red tincture of roses, when mixed, produce a green.
+Blue tincture of violets, and brown spirit of sulphur, produce a
+crimson. Red tincture of roses, and brown spirits of hartshorn, make a
+blue. Blue tincture of violets, and blue solution of copper, give a
+violet colour. Blue tincture of cyanus, and blue spirit of
+sal-ammoniac coloured, make green. Blue solution of Hungarian vitriol,
+and brown ley of potash, make yellow. Blue solution of Hungarian
+vitriol, and red tincture of roses, make black; and blue tincture of
+cyanus, and green solution of copper, produce red.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Curious Experiment on Rays of Light.</i></h4>
+
+<p>That the rays of light flow in all directions from different bodies,
+without interrupting one another, is plain from the following
+experiment:&mdash;Make a little hole in a thin plate of metal, and set the
+plate upright on a table, facing a row of lighted candles standing
+near together; then place a sheet of paper or pasteboard at a little
+distance from the other side of the plate; and the rays of all the
+candles, flowing through the hole, will form as many specks of light
+on the paper as there are candles before the plate; each speck as
+distinct and large as if there were only one candle to cast one speck;
+which shows that the rays do not obstruct each other in their motions,
+although they all cross in the same hole.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Power of Water.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Let a strong small iron tube of twenty feet in height be inserted into
+the bung-hole of a cask, and the aperture round so strongly closed,
+that it shall be water-tight; pour water into the cask till it is
+full, through the pipe; also continue filling the pipe till the cask
+bursts, which will be when the water is within a foot of the top of
+the tube. In this experiment the water, on bursting the vessel, will
+fly about with considerable violence.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Pressure of Water.</i></h4>
+
+<p>The pressure of water may be known to every one who will only take the
+trouble to look at the cock of a water-butt when turned: if the tub or
+cistern be full, the water<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_144" id="Page_144">[Pg 144]</a></span> runs with much greater velocity through
+the cock, and a vessel will be filled from it in a shorter time than
+when it is only half-full, although the cock, in both cases, is
+equally replete with the fluid during the time the vessel is filling.
+From this also is understood, how a hole or leak, near the keel of a
+ship, admits the water much quicker, and with greater violence, than
+one of the same size near what the mariners call the water's edge.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Refraction of Light.</i></h4>
+
+<p>In the middle of an empty basin put a piece of money, and then retire
+from it till the edge of the basin hides the piece from your sight:
+then keep your head steady, let another person fill the basin gently
+with water; as the water rises in the basin the money will come in
+view; and when of a sufficient height in the basin, the whole of the
+piece will be in sight.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Wonderful Nature of Lightning.</i></h4>
+
+<p>If two persons, standing in a room, looking different ways, and a loud
+clap of thunder, accompanied with zigzag lightning, happen, they will
+both distinctly see the flash at the same time; not only the
+illumination, but the very form of the lightning itself, and every
+angle it makes in its course will be as distinctly perceptible, as
+though they had both looked directly at the cloud from whence it
+proceeded. If a person happened at that time to be looking on a book,
+or other object, which he held in his hand, he would distinctly see
+the form of the lightning between him and the object at which he
+looked. This property seems peculiar to lightning, as it does not
+apply to any other kind of fire whatever.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To show that the White of Eggs contains an Alkali.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Add to a wine-glass half full of tincture of red cabbage a small
+quantity of the white of an egg, either in a liquid state or rendered
+concrete by boiling. The tincture will lose its blue colour and become
+changed to green, because the white of the egg contains soda.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_145" id="Page_145">[Pg 145]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Two Inodorous Bodies become very Pungent and Odorous by Mixture.</i></h4>
+
+<p>When equal parts of muriate of ammonia and unslaked lime, both
+substances destitute of odour, are intimately blended together in a
+mortar, a very pungent gas (ammonia) becomes evolved.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Interesting Experiment for the Microscope.</i></h4>
+
+<p>The embryo grain of wheat, at the time of blossoming, being carefully
+taken out of the husk, will be found to have a small downy tuft at its
+extremity, which, when viewed in a microscope, greatly resembles the
+branches of thorn, spreading archwise, in opposite directions. By
+expanding a few of the grains, and selecting the most perfect, a very
+pretty microscopic object will be obtained for preservation.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Travelling of Light.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Light travels at the rate of a hundred and fifty thousand miles in a
+single second; and it is seven minutes in passing from the sun to the
+earth, which is nearly a distance of seventy millions of miles. Such
+is the rapidity with which these rays dart themselves forward that a
+journey they thus perform in less than eight minutes, a ball from the
+mouth of a cannon would not complete in several weeks! But the
+minuteness of the particles of light are still several degrees beyond
+their velocity; and they are therefore harmless, because so very
+small. A ray of light is nothing more than a constant stream of minute
+parts, still flowing from the luminary, so inconceivably little, that
+a candle in a single second of time, has been said to diffuse several
+hundreds of millions more particles of light, than there could be
+grains in the whole earth, if it were entirely one heap of sand. The
+sun furnishes them, and the stars also, without appearing in the least
+to consume, by granting us the supply. Its light is diffused in a wide
+sphere, and seems inexhaustible.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Calculation of the Mass of Water contained in the Sea.</i></h4>
+
+<p>If we would have an idea of the enormous quantity of water which the
+sea contains, let us suppose a common and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_146" id="Page_146">[Pg 146]</a></span> general depth of the ocean;
+by computing it at only 200 fathoms, or the tenth part of a mile, we
+shall see that there is sufficient water to cover the whole globe to
+the height of 503 feet of water; and if we were to reduce this water
+into one mass, we should find that it forms a globe of more than sixty
+thousand miles diameter.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Different Degrees of Heat imbibed from the Sun's Rays by Cloths of
+different Colours.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Walk but a quarter of an hour in your garden, when the sun shines,
+with a part of your dress white, and a part black; then apply your
+hand to them alternately, and you will find a very great difference in
+their warmth. The black will be quite hot to the touch, and the white
+still cool.</p>
+
+<p>Try to fire paper with a burning-glass; if it be white, you will not
+easily burn it; but if you bring the focus to a black spot, or upon
+letters, written or printed, the paper will immediately be on fire
+under the letters.</p>
+
+<p>Thus, fullers and dyers find black cloths, of equal thickness with
+white ones, and hung out equally wet, dry in the sun much sooner than
+the white, being more readily heated by the sun's rays. It is the same
+before a fire, the heat of which sooner penetrates black stockings
+than white ones, and so is apt sooner to burn a man's shins. Also beer
+much sooner warms in a black mug set before the fire than a white one,
+or in a bright silver tankard. Take a number of little square pieces
+of cloth from a tailor's pattern card, of various colours; say black,
+deep blue, lighter blue, green, purple, red, yellow, white, and other
+colours, or shades of colours; lay them all out upon the snow in a
+bright sun-shiny morning; in a few hours, the black being warmed most
+by the sun will be sunk so low as to be below the stroke of the sun's
+rays; the dark blue almost as low; the lighter blue not quite so much
+as the dark; the other colours less, as they are lighter; and the
+quite white remain on the surface of the snow, as it will not have
+entered it at all.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Alternate Illusion.</i></h4>
+
+<p>With a convex lens of about an inch focus, look attentively at a
+silver seal, on which a cipher is engraved. It will at first appear
+cut in, as to the naked eye; but if you<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_147" id="Page_147">[Pg 147]</a></span> continue to observe it some
+time, without changing your situation, it will seem to be in relief,
+and the lights and shades will appear the same as they did before. If
+you regard it with the same attention still longer, it will again
+appear to be engraved: and so on alternately.</p>
+
+<p>If you look off the seal for a few moments, when you view it again,
+instead of seeing it, as at first, engraved, it will appear in relief.</p>
+
+<p>If, while you are turned towards the light, you suddenly incline the
+seal, while you continue to regard it, those parts that seemed to be
+engraved will immediately appear in relief: and if, when you are
+regarding these seemingly prominent parts, you turn yourself so that
+the light may fall on the right hand, you will see the shadows on the
+same side from whence the light comes, which will appear not a little
+extraordinary. In like manner the shadows will appear on the left, if
+the light fall on that side. If instead of a seal you look at a piece
+of money, these alterations will not be visible, in whatever situation
+you place yourself.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Alarum.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Against the wall of a room, near the ceiling, fix a wheel of twelve or
+eighteen inches diameter; on the rim of which place a number of bells
+in tune, and, if you please, of different sizes. To the axis of this
+wheel there should be fixed a fly to regulate its motion; and round
+the circumference there must be wound a rope, to the end of which is
+hung a weight.</p>
+
+<p>Near to the wheel let a stand be fixed, on which is an upright piece
+that holds a balance or moveable lever, on one end of which rests the
+weight just mentioned; and to the other end must hang an inverted
+hollow cone, or funnel, the aperture of which is very small. This cone
+must be graduated on the inside, that the sand put in may answer to
+the number of hours it is to run. Against the upright piece, on the
+side next the cone, there must be fixed a check, to prevent it from
+descending. This stand, together with the wheel, may be enclosed in a
+case, and so contrived, as to be moved from one room to another with
+very little trouble.</p>
+
+<p>It is evident, from the construction of this machine, that when a
+certain quantity of the sand is run out, the weight will descend, and
+put the wheel in motion, which motion<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_148" id="Page_148">[Pg 148]</a></span> will continue till the weight
+comes to the ground. If the wheel be required to continue longer in
+motion, two or more pulleys may be added, over which the rope may run.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Musical Cascade.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Where there is a natural cascade, near the lower stream, but not in
+it, let there be placed a large wheel, equal to the breadth of the
+cascade: the diameter of this wheel, for about a foot from each end,
+must be much less than that of the middle part; and all the water from
+the cascade must be made to fall on the ends. The water that falls on
+the wheel may pass through pipes, so that part of it may be made
+occasionally to pass over or fall short of the wheel, as you would
+have the time of the music quicker or slower. The remaining part of
+the wheel, which is to be kept free from the water, must consist of
+bars, on which are placed stops that strike against the bells: these
+stops must likewise be moveable. It is evident from the construction
+of this machine, that the water falling on the floats at the end of
+the wheel, will make the stops, which are adapted to different tunes,
+strike the notes of those tunes on the respective bells. Two or three
+sets of bells may here be placed on the same line, when the cascade is
+sufficiently wide.</p>
+
+<p>Where there is not a natural cascade, one may be artificially
+constructed, by raising part of the ground, wherever there is a
+descent of water; whether it be a stream that supplies a reservoir or
+fountain, or serves domestic uses; or if it be refuse water that has
+already served some other purpose.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Writing on Glass by the Rays of the Sun.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Dissolve chalk in aqua fortis, to the consistence of milk, and add to
+that a strong solution of silver. Keep this liquor in a glass decanter
+well stopped. Then cut out from a paper the letters you would have
+appear, and paste the paper on the decanter, which you are to place in
+the sun, in such a manner that its rays may pass through the spaces
+cut out of the paper, and fall on the surface of the liquor. The part
+of the glass through which the rays pass will turn black, and that
+under the paper will remain white. You<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_149" id="Page_149">[Pg 149]</a></span> must observe not to move the
+bottle during the time of the operation.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To produce the Appearance of a Flower from its Ashes.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Make a tin box, with a cover that takes off. Let this box be supported
+by a pedestal of the same metal, and on which there is a little door.
+In the front of this box is to be a glass.</p>
+
+<p>In a groove, at a small distance from this glass, place a double
+glass, made in the same manner as described in p. 13, (<i>Magic
+Picture.</i>) Between the front and back glasses place a small upright
+tin tube, supported by a cross piece. Let there be also a small
+chafing-dish placed in the pedestal. The box is to be opened behind.
+You privately place a flower in the tin tube, but not so near the
+front glass as to be in the least degree visible, and presenting one
+that resembles it to any person, desire him to burn it on the coals in
+a chafing-dish.</p>
+
+<p>You then strew some powder over the coals, which may be supposed to
+aid the ashes in producing the flower; and put the chafing-dish in the
+pedestal under the box. As the heat by degrees melts the composition
+between the glasses, the flower will gradually appear, but when the
+chafing-dish is taken away, and the powder of the ashes is supposed to
+be removed, the flower soon disappears.</p>
+
+<p>You may present several flowers, and let the person choose any one of
+them. In this case, while he is burning the flower, you fetch the box
+from another apartment, and at the same time put in a corresponding
+flower, which will make the experiment still more surprising.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Imitative Fire-works.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Take a paper that is blacked on both sides, or instead of black, the
+paper may be coloured on each side with a deep blue, which will be
+still better for such as are to be seen through transparent papers. It
+must be of a proper size for the figure you intend to exhibit. In this
+paper cut out with a penknife several spaces, and with a piercer make
+a number of holes, rather long than round, and at no regular distance
+from each other.</p>
+
+<p>To represent revolving pyramids and globes, the paper<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_150" id="Page_150">[Pg 150]</a></span> must be cut
+through with a penknife, and the space cut out between each spiral
+should be three or four times as wide as the spirals themselves. You
+must observe to cut them so that the pyramid or globe may appear to
+turn on its axis. The columns that are represented in pieces of
+architecture, or in jets of fire, must be cut in the same manner, if
+they are to be represented as turning on their axis.</p>
+
+<p>In like manner may be exhibited a great variety of ornaments, ciphers,
+and medallions, which, when properly coloured, cannot fail of
+producing the most pleasing effect. There should not be a very great
+diversity of colours, as they would not produce the most agreeable
+appearance.</p>
+
+<p>When these pieces are drawn on a large scale, the architecture or
+ornaments may be shaded; and, to represent different shades, pieces of
+coloured paper must be pasted over each other, which will produce an
+effect that would not be expected from transparent paintings. Five or
+six pieces of paper pasted over each other will be sufficient to
+represent the strongest shades.</p>
+
+<p>To give these pieces the different motions they require, you must
+first consider the nature of each piece; if, for example, you have cut
+out the figure of the sun, or of a star, you must construct a wire
+wheel of the same diameter with these pieces; over this wheel you
+paste a very thin paper, on which is drawn, with black ink, the spiral
+figure. The wheel thus prepared, is to be placed behind the sun or
+star, in such a manner that its axis may be exactly opposite the
+centre of either of these figures. This wheel may be turned by any
+method you think proper.</p>
+
+<p>Now, the wheel being placed directly behind the sun, for example, and
+very near to it, is to be turned regularly round, and strongly
+illuminated by candles placed behind it. The lines that form the
+spiral will then appear, through the spaces cut out from the sun, to
+proceed from its centre to its circumference, and will resemble sparks
+of fire that incessantly succeed each other. The same effect will be
+produced by the star or by any other figure where the fire is not to
+appear as proceeding from the circumference of the centre.</p>
+
+<p>These two pieces, as well as those that follow, may be of any size,
+provided you observe the proportion between the parts of the figure
+and the spiral, which must be wider in larger figures than in small.
+If the sun, for example, have from six to twelve inches diameter, the
+width of the strokes<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_151" id="Page_151">[Pg 151]</a></span> that form the spiral need not be more than
+one-twentieth part of an inch, and the spaces between them, that form
+transparent parts, about two-tenths of an inch. If the sun be two feet
+diameter, the strokes should be one-eighth of an inch, and the space
+between, one quarter of an inch; and if the figure be six feet
+diameter, the strokes should be one quarter of an inch and the spaces
+five-twelfths of an inch. These pieces have a pleasing effect, when
+represented of a small size, but the deception is more striking when
+they are of large dimensions.</p>
+
+<p>It will be proper to place those pieces, when of a small size, in a
+box quite closed on every side, that none of the light may be diffused
+in the chamber: for which purpose it will be convenient to have a tin
+door behind the box, to which the candlesticks may be soldered, and
+the candles more easily lighted.</p>
+
+<p>The several figures cut out should be placed in frames, that they may
+be put, alternately, in a groove in the forepart of the box; or there
+may be two grooves, that the second piece may be put in before the
+first is taken out.</p>
+
+<p>The wheel must be carefully concealed from the eye of the spectator.</p>
+
+<p>Where there is an opportunity of representing these artificial fires
+by a hole in the partition, they will doubtless have a much more
+striking effect, as the spectator cannot then conjecture by what means
+they are produced.</p>
+
+<p>It is easy to conceive that by extending this method, wheels may be
+constructed with three or four spirals, to which may be given
+different directions. It is manifest also that, on the same principle,
+a great variety of transparent figures may be contrived, and which may
+be all placed before the spiral lines.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To represent Cascades of Fire.</i></h4>
+
+<p>In cutting out cascades, you must take care to preserve a natural
+inequality in the parts cut out; for if, to save time, you should make
+all the holes with the same pointed tool, the uniformity of the parts
+will not fail to produce a disagreeable effect. As these cascades are
+very pleasing when well executed, so they are highly disgusting when
+imperfect. These are the most difficult pieces to cut out.</p>
+
+<p>To produce the apparent motion of these cascades, instead of drawing a
+spiral, you must have a slip of strong paper, of<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_152" id="Page_152">[Pg 152]</a></span> such length as you
+judge convenient. In this paper there must be a greater number of
+holes near each other, and made with pointed tools of different
+dimensions.</p>
+
+<p>At each end of the paper, a part of the same size with the cascade
+must be left uncut; and towards those parts the holes must be made at
+a greater distance from each other.</p>
+
+<p>When the cascade that is cut out is placed before the scroll of paper
+just mentioned, and it is entirely wound upon the roller, the part of
+the paper that is then between being quite opaque, no part of the
+cascade will be visible; but as the winch is gently turned, and
+regularly round, the transparent part of the paper will give to the
+cascade the appearance of fire that descends in the same direction;
+and the illusion will be so strong, that the spectators will think
+they see a cascade of fire; especially if the figure be judiciously
+cut out.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Oracular Mirror.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Provide a round mirror of about three inches in diameter and whose
+frame is an inch wide. Line the under part of the frame, in which
+holes are to be cut, with very thin glass; behind this glass let a
+mirror of about two inches diameter be placed, which is to be
+moveable, so that by inclining the frame to either side, part of the
+mirror will be visible behind the glass on that side.</p>
+
+<p>Then take Spanish chalk, or cypress vitriol, of which you make a
+pencil, and with this you may write on a glass, and rub it off with a
+cloth, and by breathing on the glass, the writing will appear and
+disappear several times. With this pencil write on one side of the
+mirror, before it is put in the frame, the word <i>yes</i>, and on the
+other side, <i>no</i>; and wipe them off with a cloth.</p>
+
+<p>You propose to a person to ask any question of this mirror that can be
+answered by the words <i>yes</i> or <i>no</i>. Then turning the glass to one
+side, and putting your mouth close to it, as if to repeat the question
+softly, you breathe on it, and the word yes or no will immediately
+appear. This mirror will serve for many other agreeable amusements.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Hour of the Day or Night told by a suspended Shilling.</i></h4>
+
+<p>However improbable the following experiment may appear, it has been
+proved by repeated trials:<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_153" id="Page_153">[Pg 153]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Sling a shilling or sixpence at the end of a piece of thread by means
+of a loop. Then resting your elbow on a table, hold the other end of
+the thread betwixt your fore-finger and thumb, observing to let it
+pass across the ball of the thumb, and thus suspend the shilling into
+an empty goblet. Observe, your hand must be perfectly steady; and if
+you find it difficult to keep it in an immoveable posture, it is
+useless to attempt the experiment. Premising, however, that the
+shilling is properly suspended, you will observe, that when it has
+recovered its equilibrium, it will for a moment be stationary: it will
+then of its own accord, and without the least agency from the person
+holding it, assume the action of a pendulum, vibrating from side to
+side of the glass, and, after a few seconds, will strike the hour
+nearest to the time of day; for instance, if the time be twenty-five
+minutes past six, it will strike six; if thirty-five minutes past six,
+it will strike seven; and so on of any other hour.</p>
+
+<p>It is necessary to observe, that the thread should lie over the pulse
+of the thumb, and this may in some measure account for the <i>vibration</i>
+of the shilling; but to what cause its striking the precise hour is to
+be traced, remains unexplained; for it is no less astonishing than
+true, that when it has struck the proper number, its vibration ceases,
+it acquires a kind of rotatory motion, and at last becomes stationary,
+as before.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Of Lightning, and the best Method of guarding against its mischievous
+Effects.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Experiments made in electricity first gave philosophers a suspicion,
+that the matter of lightning was the same with the electric matter.
+Experiments afterwards made on lightning obtained from the clouds by
+pointed rods, received into bottles, and subjected to every trial,
+have since proved this suspicion to be perfectly well founded; and
+that, whatever properties we find in electricity, are also the
+properties of lightning.</p>
+
+<p>This matter of lightning, or of electricity, is an extreme subtle
+fluid, penetrating other bodies, and subsisting in them, equally
+diffused.</p>
+
+<p>When, by any operation of art or nature, there happens to be a greater
+proportion of this fluid in one body than in another, the body which
+has most will communicate to that which has least, till the proportion
+becomes equal, provided the distance between them be not too great;
+or, if it be too<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_154" id="Page_154">[Pg 154]</a></span> great, till there be proper conductors to convey it
+from one to the other.</p>
+
+<p>If the communication be through the air, without any conductor, a
+bright light is seen between the bodies, and a sound is heard. In
+small experiments, we call this light and sound the electric spark and
+snap; but in the great operations of nature, the light is what we call
+<i>lightning</i>, and the sound (produced at the same time, though
+generally arriving later at our ears than the light does in our eyes)
+is, with its echoes, called <i>thunder</i>.</p>
+
+<p>If the communication of this fluid be by a conductor, it may be
+without either light or sound, the subtle fluid passing in the
+substance of the conductor.</p>
+
+<p>If the conductor be good, and of sufficient bigness, the fluid passes
+through it without hurting it. If otherwise, it is damaged or
+destroyed.</p>
+
+<p>All metals, and water, are good conductors. Other bodies may become
+conductors by having some quantity of water in them, as wood and other
+materials used in building, but not having much water in them, are not
+good conductors, and therefore are often damaged in the operation.</p>
+
+<p>Glass, wax, silk, wool, hair, feathers, and even wood perfectly dry,
+are non-conductors: that is, they resist instead of facilitating the
+passage of this subtle fluid.</p>
+
+<p>When this fluid has an opportunity of passing through two conductors,
+one good and sufficient, as of metal, the other not so good, it passes
+in the best, and will follow in any direction.</p>
+
+<p>The distance at which a body charged with this fluid will discharge
+itself suddenly, striking through the air into another body that is
+not charged, or not so highly charged, is different according to the
+quantity of the fluid, the dimensions and form of the bodies
+themselves, and the state of the air between them. This distance,
+whatever it happens to be between any two bodies, is called their
+striking <i>distance</i>, as, till they come within that distance of each
+other, no stroke will be made.</p>
+
+<p>The clouds have often more of this fluid in proportion than the earth:
+in which case, as soon as they come near enough, (that is, within the
+striking distance,) or meet with a conductor, the fluid quits them and
+strikes into the earth. A cloud fully charged with this fluid, if so
+high as to be beyond the striking distance from the earth, passes
+quietly without<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_155" id="Page_155">[Pg 155]</a></span> making noise or giving light, unless it meet with
+other clouds that have less.</p>
+
+<p>Tall trees and lofty buildings, as the towers and spires of churches,
+become sometimes conductors between the clouds and the earth; but, not
+being good ones, that is, not conveying the fluid freely, they are
+often damaged.</p>
+
+<p>Buildings that have their roofs covered with lead, or other metal, and
+spouts of metal continued from the roof into the ground to carry off
+the water, are never hurt by lightning, as, whenever it falls on such
+a building, it passes in the metals and not in the walls.</p>
+
+<p>When other buildings happen to be within the striking distance from
+such clouds, the fluid passes in the walls, whether of wood, brick, or
+stone, quitting the wall only when it can find better conductors near
+them, as metal rods, bolts, and hinges of windows or doors, gilding on
+wainscot, or frames of pictures, the silvering on the backs of
+looking-glasses, the wires for bells, and the bodies of animals, so
+containing watery fluids. And in passing through the house it follows
+the direction of these conductors, taking as many in its way as can
+assist in its passage, whether in a straight or crooked line, leaping
+from one to the other, if not far distant from each other, only
+rending the wall in the spaces where these partial good conductors are
+too distant from each other.</p>
+
+<p>An iron rod being placed on the outside of a building, from the
+highest part continued down into the moist earth, in any direction,
+straight or crooked, following the form of the roof or other parts of
+the building, will receive the lightning at its upper end, attracting
+it so as to prevent its striking any other part; and, affording it a
+good conveyance into the earth, will prevent its damaging any part of
+the building.</p>
+
+<p>A small quantity of metal is found able to conduct a quantity of this
+fluid. A wire no higher than a goose-quill has been known to conduct
+(with safety to the building, as far as the wire was continued) a
+quantity of lightning that did prodigious damage both above and below
+it; and probably larger rods are not necessary, though it is common in
+America to make them of half an inch, some three-quarters, or an inch,
+diameter.</p>
+
+<p>The rod may be fastened to the wall, chimney, &amp;c., with staples of
+iron. The lightning will not leave the rod (a good conductor) to pass
+into the wall (a bad conductor)<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_156" id="Page_156">[Pg 156]</a></span> through those staples. It would
+rather, if any were in the wall, pass out of it into the rod, to get
+more readily by that conductor into the earth.</p>
+
+<p>If the building be very large and extensive, two or more rods may be
+placed in different parts, for greater security.</p>
+
+<p>Small ragged parts of clouds, suspended in the air between the great
+body of clouds and the earth, (like leaf gold in electrical
+experiments,) often serve as partial conductors for the lightning,
+which proceeds from one of them to another, and by their help comes
+within the striking distance to the earth or a building. It therefore
+strikes, through those conductors, a building that would otherwise be
+out of the striking distance.</p>
+
+<p>Long sharp points communicating with the earth, and presented to such
+parts of clouds, drawing silently from them the fluid they are charged
+with, they are then attracted to the cloud, and may leave the distance
+so great as to be beyond the reach of striking.</p>
+
+<p>It is therefore that we elevate the upper end of the rod, six or eight
+feet above the highest part of the building, tapering it gradually to
+a fine sharp point, which is gilt, to prevent its rusting.</p>
+
+<p>Thus the pointed rod either presents a stroke from the cloud, or if a
+stroke be made, conducts it to the earth, with safety to the building.</p>
+
+<p>The lower end of the rod should enter the earth so deep as to come at
+the moist part, perhaps two or three feet; and if bent when under the
+surface, so as to go in a horizontal line six or eight feet from the
+wall, and then bent again downwards three or four feet, it will
+prevent damage to any of the stones of the foundation.</p>
+
+<p>A person apprehensive of danger from lightning, happening during the
+time of thunder to be in a house not so secured, will do well to avoid
+sitting near the chimney, near a looking-glass, or any gilt pictures
+or wainscot; the safest place is in the middle of the room, (so it be
+not under a metal lustre suspended by a chain,) sitting in one chair
+and laying the feet up in another. It is still safer to bring two or
+three mattresses or beds into the middle of the room, and, folding
+them up double, place the chair upon them; for they, not being so good
+conductors as the walls, the lightning will not choose an interrupted
+course through the air of the room and the bedding, when it can go
+through a continued better conductor, the wall. But where it can be
+had, a hammock or swinging-bed, suspended by silk cords equally
+distant from the walls<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_157" id="Page_157">[Pg 157]</a></span> on every side, and from the ceiling and floor
+above and below, affords the safest situation a person can have in any
+room whatever; and what, indeed, may be deemed quite free from danger
+of any stroke by lightning.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Leech, a Prognosticator of the Weather.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Confine a leech in a large phial, three parts filled with rain water,
+regularly changed twice a week, and placed on a window frame, fronting
+the north. In fair and frosty weather it lies motionless, and rolled
+up in a spiral form, at the bottom of the glass: but prior to rain or
+snow, it creeps up to the top, where if the rain will be heavy and of
+some continuance, it remains a considerable time; if trifling, it
+quickly descends. Should the rain or snow be accompanied with wind, it
+darts about its habitation with amazing celerity, and seldom ceases
+until it begins to blow hard. If a storm of thunder or lightning be
+approaching, it is exceedingly agitated, and expresses its feelings in
+violent convulsive starts, at the top of the glass. It is remarkable
+that however fine and serene the weather may be, and not the least
+indication to change, either from the sky, the barometer, or any other
+cause whatsoever, yet, if the animal ever shift its position, or move
+in a desultory manner, so certain will the coincident results occur,
+within thirty-six hours, frequently within twenty-four, and sometimes
+in twelve; though its motions chiefly depend on the fall and duration
+of the wet, and the strength of the wind.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Awn of Barley an Hydrometer.</i></h4>
+
+<p>The awn of barley is furnished with stiff points, which, like the
+teeth of a saw, are all turned towards the point of it; as this long
+awn lies upon the ground, it extends itself in the moist air of night,
+and pushes forward the barley-corn, which it adheres to in the day; it
+shortens as it dries; and, as these points prevent it from receding,
+it draws up its pointed end, and thus, creeping like a worm, will
+travel many feet from the parent stem. That very ingenious mechanic
+philosopher, Mr. Edgworth, once made on this principle a wooden
+automaton: its back consisted of soft fir-wood, about an inch square,
+and four feet long, made of pieces cut the cross-way in respect to the
+fibres of the wood, and glued together; it had two feet before, and
+two behind, which supported the back horizontally, but were placed
+with<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_158" id="Page_158">[Pg 158]</a></span> their extremities, which were armed with sharp points of iron,
+bending backwards. Hence, in moist weather, the back lengthened, and
+the two foremost feet were pushed forwards; in dry weather the hinder
+feet were drawn after, as the obliquity of the points of the feet
+prevented it from receding.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Power of Water when reduced to Vapour by Heat.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Whatever force water may have while its parts remain together, is
+nothing, if compared to the almost incredible power with which its
+parts are endued, when they are reduced to vapour by heat. Those
+steams which we see rising from the surface of boiling water, and
+which to us appear feeble, yet, if properly conducted, acquire immense
+force. In the same manner as gunpowder has but small effect, if
+suffered to expand at large, so the steam issuing from water is
+impotent, where it is permitted to evaporate into the air; but where
+confined in a narrow compass, as, for instance, where it rises in an
+iron tube shut up on every side, it there exerts all the wonders of
+its strength. <i>Muschenbrook</i> has proved by experiment, that the force
+of gunpowder is feeble when compared to that of rising steam. A
+hundred and forty pounds of gunpowder blew up a weight of thirty
+thousand pounds: but, on the other hand, a hundred and forty pounds of
+water, converted by heat into steam, lifted a weight of seventy-seven
+thousand pounds; and would lift a much greater, if there were means of
+giving the steam more heat with safety; for the hotter the steam the
+greater is its force.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Artificial Memory.</i></h4>
+
+<p>In travelling along a road, the sight of the more remarkable scenes we
+meet with, frequently puts us in mind of the subjects we were thinking
+or talking of when we last saw them. Such facts, which were perfectly
+familiar, even to the vulgar, might very naturally suggest the
+possibility of assisting the memory, by establishing a connexion
+between the ideas we wish to remember, and certain sensible objects,
+which have been found from experience to make a permanent impression
+on the mind. It was said, that a person contrived a method of
+committing to memory the sermons which he was accustomed to hear, by
+fixing his attention, during the different heads of the discourse, on
+different compartments of the roof of the church, in such a manner as,
+that when he afterwards saw the roof, or remembered the order in which
+its compartments were disposed, he recol<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_159" id="Page_159">[Pg 159]</a></span>lected the method which the
+preacher had observed in treating his subject. This contrivance was
+perfectly analogous to the topical memory of the ancients; an art
+which, whatever be the opinion we entertain of its use, is certainly
+entitled, in a high degree, to the praise of ingenuity.</p>
+
+<p>Suppose you fix in your memory the different apartments in some very
+large building, and that you had accustomed yourself to think of these
+apartments always in the same invariable order. Suppose further, that,
+in preparing yourself for a public discourse, in which you had
+occasion to treat of a great variety of particulars, you were anxious
+to fix in your memory the order you proposed to observe in the
+communication of your ideas. It is evident, that by a proper division
+of your subject into heads, and by connecting each head with a
+particular apartment, (which you could easily do, by conceiving
+yourself to be sitting in the apartment while you were studying the
+part of your discourse you mean to connect with it,) the habitual
+order in which these apartments occurred to your thoughts, would
+present to you in the proper arrangement, and without any effort on
+your part, the ideas of which you were to treat. It is also obvious,
+that very little practice would enable you to avail yourself of this
+contrivance, without any embarrassment or distraction of your
+attention.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To procure Hydrogen Gas.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Provide a phial with a cork stopper, through which is thrust a piece
+of tobacco-pipe. Into the phial put a few pieces of zinc, or small
+iron nails; on this pour a mixture, of equal parts of sulphuric acid
+(oil of vitriol) and water, previously mixed in a tea-cup, to prevent
+accidents. Replace the cork stopper, with a piece of tobacco-pipe in
+it; the hydrogen gas will then be liberated through the pipe into a
+small steam. Apply the flame of a candle or taper to this steam, and
+it will immediately take fire, and burn with a clear flame until all
+the hydrogen in the phial be exhausted. In this experiment the zinc or
+iron, by the action of the acid, becomes oxygenized, and is dissolved,
+thus taking the oxygen from the sulphuric acid and water; the hydrogen
+(the other constituent part of the water) is thereby liberated, and
+ascends.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To fill a Bladder with Hydrogen Gas.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Apply a bladder, previously wetted and compressed, in order to squeeze
+out all the common air, to the piece of<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_160" id="Page_160">[Pg 160]</a></span> tobacco-pipe inserted in the
+cork stopper of the phial, (as described in the experiment above.) The
+bladder will thus be filled with hydrogen gas.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Exploding Gas Bubbles.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Adapt the end of a common tobacco-pipe to a bladder filled with
+hydrogen gas, and dip the bowl of the pipe into soap-suds, prepared as
+if for blowing up soap bubbles; squeeze out small portions of gas from
+the bladder into the soap-suds, and the bubbles will ascend into the
+air with very great rapidity, until they are out of sight. If a
+lighted taper or candle be applied to the bubbles as they ascend from
+the bowl of the pipe, they will explode with a loud noise.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Another Method.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Put a small quantity of phosphorus and some potash, dissolved in
+water, into a retort; apply the flame of a candle or lamp to the
+bottom of the retort, until the contents boil. The phosphuretted
+hydrogen gas will then rise, and may be collected in receivers. But
+it, instead of receiving the gas into a jar, you let it simply ascend
+into water, the bubbles of gas will then explode in succession, as
+they reach the surface of the water, and a beautiful white smoke will
+be formed, which rises slowly and majestically to the ceiling. If bits
+of phosphorus are kept some hours in hydrogen gas, phosphorized
+hydrogen gas is produced: and if bubbles of this gas are thrown up
+into the receiver of an air-pump, previously filled with oxygen gas, a
+brilliant bluish flame will immediately fill the jar.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Singular Impression on the visual Nerves by a Luminous Object.</i></h4>
+
+<p>If, while sitting in a room, you look earnestly at the middle of a
+window, a little while, when the day is bright, and then shut your
+eyes, the figure of the window will still remain in your eye, and so
+distinct that you may count the panes. A remarkable circumstance
+attending this experiment is, that the impression of forms is better
+retained than that of colours; for, after the eyes are shut, when you
+first discern the image of the window, the panes appear dark, and the
+cross-bars of the sashes, with the window frames and walls, appear
+white and bright; but if you still add to the darkness of the eyes, by
+covering them with your hand, the reverse instantly takes place&mdash;the
+panes appear lumi<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_161" id="Page_161">[Pg 161]</a></span>nous, and the cross-bars dark; and by removing the
+hand, they are again reversed.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Curious Effects of Oil upon Water, and Water upon Oil.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Fasten a piece of pack-thread round a tumbler, with strings of the
+same from each side, meeting above it in a knot at about a foot
+distance from the top of the tumbler. Then putting in as much water as
+will fill about one-third part of the tumbler, lift it up by the knot,
+and swing it to and fro in the air; the water will keep its place as
+steadily in the glass as if it were ice. But pour gently in upon the
+water about as much oil, and then again swing it in the air as before,
+the tranquillity before possessed by the water will be transferred to
+the surface of the oil, and the water under it will be violently
+agitated.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Another curious Experiment with Oil and Water.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Drop a small quantity of oil into water agitated by the wind; it will
+immediately spread itself with surprising swiftness upon the surface,
+and the oil, though scarcely more than a tea-spoonful, will produce an
+instant calm over a space several yards square. It should be done on
+the windward side of the pond or river, and you will observe it extend
+to the size of nearly half an acre, making it appear as smooth as a
+looking-glass. One remarkable circumstance in this experiment is the
+sudden, wide, and forcible spreading of a drop of oil on the surface
+of the water; for if a drop of oil be put upon a highly polished
+marble table, or a looking-glass, laid horizontally, the drop remains
+in its place, spreading very little, but when dropped on water it
+spreads instantly many feet round, becoming so thin as to produce the
+prismatic colours for a considerable space, and beyond them so much
+thinner as to be invisible, except in its effect in smoothing the
+waves at a much greater distance. It seems as if a repulsion of its
+particles took place as soon as it touched the water, and so strong as
+to act on other bodies swimming on the surface, as straw, leaves,
+chips, &amp;c., forcing them to recede every way from the drop, as from a
+centre, leaving a large clear space.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Remarkable Effects on the visual Nerves, by looking through
+differently-coloured Glasses.</i></h4>
+
+<p>After looking through green spectacles, the white paper of a book
+will, on first taking them off, appear to have a<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_162" id="Page_162">[Pg 162]</a></span> blush of red; and
+after looking through red glasses, a greenish cast. This seems to
+intimate a relation between green and red, not yet explained.</p>
+
+<h4><i>Weather Table.</i></h4>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 80%;">
+<img src="images/i_164.png" width="100%" alt="Weather Table" title="Weather Table" />
+</div>
+
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_163" id="Page_163">[Pg 163]</a></span></p>
+<h4>A COMPLETE</h4>
+
+<h2>SYSTEM OF PYROTECHNY;</h2>
+
+<h4>OR THE</h4>
+
+<h3>ART OF MAKING FIRE-WORKS.</h3>
+
+
+<p>In the art of making fire-works, great attention must be paid to the
+well-mixing of the materials&mdash;without which all labour is thrown away;
+to the purity of the articles; and to the proper quantities of each.
+Sulphur, to be good, must be of a high colour, and crack and bounce
+when held in the hand. For small fire-works, such as may be bought in
+the flour will be found quite good enough, but for the larger kinds,
+the lump brimstone ground is preferable.</p>
+
+<p><i>Benzoin</i> is used in fire-works, more for its pleasant scent than any
+material use for the purposes of fire. It may be procured at the
+chemists, ready for use. The oil is also used in wet composition, for
+stars, &amp;c.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Of Sulphur, or Brimstone.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Sulphur is by nature the food of fire, and one of the principal
+ingredients in gunpowder, and in almost all compositions of
+fire-works; therefore, great care ought to be taken of its being good,
+and brought to the highest perfection. Now, to know when the sulphur
+is good, you are to observe that it be of a high yellow; and if, when
+held in one's hand, it crackles and bounces, it is a sign that it is
+fresh and good: but as the method of reducing brimstone to a powder is
+very troublesome, it is better to buy the flour ready made, which is
+done in large quantities, and in great perfection; but when a great
+quantity of fire-works is to be made, it is best to use the lump
+brimstone ground, in the same manner as gunpowder.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_164" id="Page_164">[Pg 164]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Of Saltpetre.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Saltpetre being the principal ingredient in fire-works, and a volatile
+body by reason of its aqueous and a&euml;rial parts, is easily rarefied by
+fire; but not so soon when foul and gross, as when purified from its
+gross and earthy parts, which greatly retard its velocity; therefore,
+when any quantity of fire-works is intended to be made, it would be
+necessary first to examine the saltpetre; for if it be not well
+cleansed from all impurities, and of a good sort, your works will not
+have their proper effect.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To pulverize Saltpetre.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Take a copper kettle, the bottom being spherical, and put into it
+fourteen pounds of refined saltpetre, with two quarts or five pints of
+clean water; then put the kettle on a slow fire, and when the
+saltpetre is dissolved, if any impurities arise, skim them off, and
+keep constantly stirring it with two large spatulas, till all the
+water exhales; and when done enough, it will appear like white sand,
+and as fine as flour; but if it should boil too fast, take the kettle
+off the fire, and set it on some wet sand, which will prevent the
+nitre from sticking to the kettle. When you have pulverized a quantity
+of saltpetre, be careful to keep it in a dry place.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To prepare Charcoal for Fire-works.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Charcoal is a preservative, by which the saltpetre and brimstone are
+made into gunpowder, by preventing the sulphur from suffocating the
+strong and windy exhalation of the nitre. There are several sorts of
+wood made use of for this purpose; some prefer hazel, others willow,
+and others alder. The method of burning the wood is this: cut it in
+pieces of two or three feet long, then slit each piece in four parts;
+scale off the bark and hard knots, and dry them in the sun, or in an
+oven; then make in the earth a square hole, and line it with bricks,
+in which lay the wood crossing one another, and set it on fire; when
+thoroughly lighted, and in a flame, cover the whole with boards, and
+fling earth over them close, to prevent the air from getting in, yet
+so as not to fall among the charcoal; and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_165" id="Page_165">[Pg 165]</a></span> when it has lain thus for
+twenty-four hours, take out the coals and lay them in a dry place for
+use. It is to be observed, that charcoal for fire-works must always be
+soft and well burnt, which may be bought ready done.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Of Gunpowder, &amp;c.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Gunpowder being a principal ingredient in fire-works, it will not be
+improper to give a short definition of its strange explosive force,
+and cause of action, which, according to Dr. Shaw's opinion of the
+chemical cause of the explosive force of gunpowder, is as
+follows:&mdash;"Each grain of gunpowder consisting of a certain proportion
+of sulphur, nitre, and coal, the coal presently taking fire, upon
+contact of the smallest spark; at which time both the sulphur and the
+nitre immediately melt, and by means of the coal interposed between
+them, burst into flame; which spreading from grain to grain,
+propagates the same effect almost instantaneously, whence the whole
+mass of powder comes to be fired; and as nitre contains a large
+proportion both of air and water, which are now violently rarefied by
+the heat, a kind of fiery explosive blast is thus produced, wherein
+the nitre seems, by its aqueous and a&euml;rial parts, to act as bellows to
+the other inflammable bodies (sulphur and coal) to blow them into a
+flame, and carry off their whole substance in smoke and vapour."</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>How to meal Gunpowder, Brimstone, and Charcoal.</i></h4>
+
+<p>There have been many methods used to grind these ingredients to a
+powder for fire-works, such as large mortars and pestles made of
+ebony, and other hard woods; but none of these methods have proved so
+effectual and speedy as the last invention, that of the mealing table.
+This table is made of elm, with a rim round its edge four or five
+inches high; and at the narrow end is a slider which runs in a groove
+and forms part of the rim; so that when you have taken out of the
+table as much powder as you conveniently can, with a copper shovel,
+you may sweep all clean out at the slider. When you are going to meal
+a quantity of powder, observe not to put too much on the table at
+once; but when you have put in a good proportion, take a muller and
+rub it therewith till all the grains are broken; sift it in a lawn
+sieve, that has a receiver and top to it; and that which does not pass
+through the sieve, return again to the table and grind it<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_166" id="Page_166">[Pg 166]</a></span> more, till
+you have brought it all fine enough to go through the sieve. Brimstone
+and charcoal are ground in the same manner as gunpowder, only the
+muller must be made of ebony, for these ingredients being harder than
+powder, would stick in the grain of the elm and be very difficult to
+grind; and as the brimstone is apt to stick and clog to the table, it
+would be best to keep one for that purpose only, by which means you
+will always have your brimstone clean and well ground.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Spur Fire.</i></h4>
+
+<p>This fire is the most beautiful of any composition yet known. As it
+requires great trouble to bring it to perfection, particular care must
+be paid to the following instructions. They are made generally in
+cases about six inches long, but not driven very hard.</p>
+
+<table border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" summary="Spur Fire">
+<tr>
+ <th><small>CHARGE.</small></th>
+ <th><i>lb.</i></th>
+ <th><i>oz.</i></th>
+ <th>&nbsp;</th>
+ <th><small>CHARGE.</small></th>
+ <th><i>lb.</i></th>
+ <th><i>oz.</i></th>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Saltpetre</td>
+ <td align="right">4</td>
+ <td align="right">0</td>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td>Saltpetre</td>
+ <td align="right">1</td>
+ <td align="right">0</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Sulphur</td>
+ <td align="right">2</td>
+ <td align="right">0</td>
+ <td> &nbsp; &nbsp; or &nbsp; &nbsp;</td>
+ <td>Sulphur</td>
+ <td align="right">0</td>
+ <td align="right">8</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Lamp-black</td>
+ <td align="right">1</td>
+ <td align="right">8</td>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td>Lamp-black &nbsp;</td>
+ <td align="right" colspan="2">4 quarts.</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+
+<p>This composition is very difficult to mix. The saltpetre and brimstone
+must be first sifted together, and then put into a marble mortar, and
+the lamp-black with them, which you work down by degrees with a wooden
+pestle, till all the ingredients appear of one colour, which will be
+something greyish, but very near black; then drive a little into a
+case for trial, and fire it in a dark place; and if the sparks, which
+are called stars or pinks, come out in clusters, and afterwards spread
+well without any other sparks, it is a sign of its being good,
+otherwise, not; for if any drossy sparks appear, and the stars not
+full, it is then not mixed enough; but if the pinks are very small,
+and soon break, it is a sign that you have rubbed it too much.</p>
+
+<p>This mixture, when rubbed too much, will be too fierce, and hardly
+show any stars; and, on the contrary, when not mixed enough, will be
+too weak, and throw out an obscure smoke, and lumps of dross, without
+any stars. The reason of this charge being called the spur fire is,
+because the sparks it yields have a great resemblance to the rowel of
+a spur, from whence it takes its name. As the beauty of this
+composition cannot be seen at so great a distance as brilliant<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_167" id="Page_167">[Pg 167]</a></span> fire,
+it has a better effect in a room than in the open air, and may be
+fired in a chamber without any danger; it is of so innocent a nature,
+that, although an improper phrase, it may be called a cold fire; and
+so extraordinary is the fire produced from this composition, that, if
+well made, the sparks will not burn a handkerchief when held in the
+midst of them; you may hold them in your hand while burning, with as
+much safety as a candle; and if you put your hand within a foot of the
+case, you will feel the sparks fall like drops of rain.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To make Touch Paper.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Dissolve in some spirits of wine or vinegar, a little saltpetre; then
+take some purple or blue paper, wet it with the above liquor, and when
+dry it will be fit for use. When you paste this paper on any of your
+works, take care that the paste does not touch that part which is to
+burn.</p>
+
+<p>The method of using this paper is, by cutting it into slips, long
+enough to go once round the mouth of the serpent, cracker, &amp;c. When
+you paste on these slips, leave a little, above the mouth of the case,
+not pasted; then prime the case with meal-powder (see p. 165) and
+twist the paper to a point.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Of such Ingredients as show themselves in Sparks, when rammed into
+choked Cases.</i></h4>
+
+<p>The set colours of fire produced by sparks are divided into four
+sorts, viz., the black, white, grey, and red; the black charges are
+composed of two ingredients, which are meal-powder and charcoal; the
+white of three, viz., saltpetre, sulphur, and charcoal; the grey of
+four, viz., meal-powder, saltpetre, brimstone, and charcoal; and the
+red of three, viz., meal-powder, charcoal, and saw-dust.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_168" id="Page_168">[Pg 168]</a></span>
+There are, besides these four regular or set charges, two others
+which are distinguished by the names of compound and brilliant
+charges; the compound charge being made of many ingredients, such as
+meal-powder, saltpetre, brimstone, charcoal, saw-dust, sea-coal,
+antimony, glass-dust, brass-dust, steel-filings, cast-iron, tanners'
+dust, &amp;c., or any thing that will yield sparks; all which must be
+managed with discretion. The brilliant fires are composed of
+meal-powder, saltpetre, brimstone, and steel-dust; or with
+meal-powder, and steel-filings only.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Of the Method of mixing Compositions.</i></h4>
+
+<p>The performance of the principal part of fire-works depends much on
+the compositions being well mixed; therefore, great care ought to be
+taken in this part of the work, particularly in the composition for
+sky-rockets. When you have four or five pounds of ingredients to mix,
+which is a sufficient quantity at a time, (for a larger proportion
+will not do so well,) first put the different ingredients together,
+then work them about with your hands, till you think they are pretty
+well incorporated: after which, put them into a lawn sieve with a
+receiver and top to it; and if, after it is sifted, any should remain
+that will not pass through the sieve, grind it again till fine enough;
+and if it be twice sifted it will not be amiss; but the compositions
+for wheels and common works are not so material, nor need be so fine.
+But in all fixed works, from which the fire is to play regular, the
+ingredients must be very fine, and great care taken in mixing them
+well together: and observe, that, in all compositions wherein are
+steel or iron filings, the hands must not touch; nor will any works
+which have iron or steel in their charge, keep long in damp weather,
+without being properly prepared, according to the following
+directions:&mdash;</p>
+
+<p>It may sometimes happen, that fire-works may be required to be kept a
+long time, or sent abroad; neither of which could be done with
+brilliant fires, if made with filings unprepared; for this reason,
+that the saltpetre being of a damp nature, it causes the iron to rust,
+the natural consequence of which is, that when the works are fired,
+there will appear but very few brilliant sparks, but instead of them a
+number of red and drossy sparks; and besides, the charge will be so
+much weakened, that if this should happen to wheels, the fire will not
+be strong enough to force them round; to prevent such accidents,
+prepare your filings after the following manner:&mdash;Melt in a glazed
+earthen pan some brimstone over a slow fire, and when melted, throw in
+some filings, which keep stirring about till they are covered with
+brimstone; this you must do while it is on the fire; then take it off,
+and stir it very quick till cold, when you must roll it on a board
+with a wooden roller, till you have broken it as fine as corn powder;
+after which, sift from it as much of the brimstone as you can. There
+is another method of preparing filings, so as to keep two or three
+months in winter; this may be done<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_169" id="Page_169">[Pg 169]</a></span> by rubbing them between the
+strongest sort of brown paper, which has been previously moistened
+with linseed oil.</p>
+
+<p>N.B. If the brimstone should take fire, you may put it out, by
+covering the pan close at top. It is not of much consequence what
+quantity of brimstone you use, provided there is enough to give each
+grain of iron a coat; but as much as will cover the bottom of a pan of
+about one foot diameter, will do for five or six pounds of filings.
+Cast-iron for gerbes will be preserved by the above method.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To make Crackers.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Cut some stout cartridge-paper into pieces three inches and a half
+broad, and one foot long; one edge of each of these pieces fold down
+lengthwise about three-quarters of an inch broad; then fold the double
+edge down a quarter of an inch, and turn the single edge back half
+over the double fold; open it, and lay all along the channel, which is
+formed by the foldings of the paper, some meal-powder; then fold it
+over and over till all the paper is doubled up, rubbing it down every
+turn; this being done, bend it backwards and forwards, two inches and
+a half or thereabouts, at a time, as often as the paper will allow;
+hold all these folds flat and close, and with a small pinching cord,
+give one turn round the middle of the cracker, and pinch it close;
+bind it with packthread, as tight as you can; then in the place where
+it was pinched, prime one end, and cap it with touch-paper. When these
+crackers are fired, they will give a report at every turn of the
+paper; if you would have a great number of bounces, you must cut the
+paper longer, or join them after they are made; but if they are made
+very long before they are pinched, you must have a piece of wood with
+a groove in it, deep enough to let in half the cracker; this will hold
+it straight while it is pinching.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To make Squibs and Serpents.</i></h4>
+
+<p>First make the cases, of about six inches in length, by rolling slips
+of stout cartridge-paper three times round a roller, and pasting the
+last fold; tying it near the bottom as tight as possible, and making
+it air-tight at the end, by sealing-wax. Then take of gunpowder half a
+pound, charcoal one ounce, brimstone one ounce, and steel-filings half
+an ounce, (or in like proportion,) grind them with a muller, or pound
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_170" id="Page_170">[Pg 170]</a></span>
+them in a mortar. Your cases being dry and ready, first put a
+thimble-full of your powder, and ram it hard down with a ruler; then
+fill the case to the top with the aforesaid mixture, ramming it hard
+down in the course of filling, two or three times; when this is done
+point with touch-paper, which should be pasted on that part which
+touches the case, otherwise it is liable to drop off.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Sky-Rockets.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Rockets being of the fire-works most in use, we shall give them the
+preference in description. As the performance of rockets depends much
+upon their moulds, they should be made according to the following
+proportions:&mdash;Taking the diameter of the orifice, its height should be
+equal to six diameters and two-thirds: the choke, one diameter and
+one-third of this model, will serve for every rocket from 4 oz. to 6
+lb.&mdash;For instance:&mdash;suppose the diameter of a rocket of 1 lb. be 1&frac12;
+inch, then its length being 6 diameters and two-thirds, the length of
+the case must be 10&#8531; inches, and the choke 2&frac14; inches. Your
+rammer must have a collar of brass, to prevent the wood from
+splitting.</p>
+
+<p><i>Method of rolling Rocket Cases.</i>&mdash;The cases must be made
+of the strongest cartridge-paper, and rolled dry. The case of a
+middling-sized rocket will take up paper of four or five sheets thick;
+having cut your papers to a proper size, and the last sheet with a
+slope at one end, fold down one end, and lay your former on the double
+edge, and when you have rolled on the paper within two or three turns,
+lay the next sheet on that part which is loose, and roll it all on.
+Then, in order to roll the case as hard as possible, place it on a
+table, and with a smooth board roll it for some time forwards on the
+table, till it becomes quite hard and firm. This must be done with
+every sheet. You have next to choke the case; for which purpose draw
+your former a little distance from the bottom, then, with a cord, once
+round the case, pull it rather easy at first, and harder, till you
+have closed the end. To make it easy, you may dip the ends of the
+inner sheets in water before rolling, then bind it with small twine.</p>
+
+<p>Having thus pinched and tied the case so as not to give way, put it
+into the mould without its foot, and with a mallet drive the former
+hard on the end-piece, which will force the neck close and smooth.
+This done, cut the case to its proper length, allowing from the neck
+to the edge of the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_171" id="Page_171">[Pg 171]</a></span>
+mouth half a diameter, which is equal to the
+height of the nipple; then take out the former, and drive the case
+over the piercer with a long rammer, and the vent will be of a proper
+size.</p>
+
+<p>Having formed your cases, we will now proceed to the description of
+the ingredients necessary for the rocket.</p>
+
+<p><i>Of mixing the Composition.</i>&mdash;The performance of the principal part of
+fire-works depends much on the compositions being well mixed;
+therefore, great care must be taken in this part of the work,
+particularly for the composition for sky-rockets. When you have four
+or five pounds of ingredients to mix, which is a sufficient quantity
+at a time, (for a large proportion will not do so well,) first put the
+different ingredients together, then work them about with your hands,
+till you think they are pretty well incorporated; after which, put
+them into a lawn sieve with a receiver and top to it; and if, after it
+is sifted, any remains that will not pass through the sieve, grind it
+again till it is fine enough; and if it be twice sifted it will not be
+amiss; but the compositions for wheels and common works are not so
+material, nor need be so fine. But in all fixed works, from which the
+fire is to play regular, the ingredients must be very fine, and great
+care taken in mixing them well together; and observe, that in all
+compositions wherein are iron filings, the hand must not touch them;
+nor will any works which have iron or steel in their charge keep long
+in damp weather.</p>
+
+<p><i>To drive or ram Rockets.</i>&mdash;Rockets are filled hollow, otherwise they
+would not ascend, and there is not a part that requires greater
+attention than this stage of the process. One blow more or less with
+the mallet will spoil the ascent.</p>
+
+<p>The charge of rockets must always be driven above the piercer, and on
+it must be rammed a thin head of clay; through the middle of which
+bore a small hole to the composition, that when the charge is burnt to
+the top, it may communicate its fire through the hole to the stars in
+the head. To a rocket of four ounces, give to each ladle-full of
+charge 16 strokes; to a rocket of 1 lb., 28; to a 2-pounder, 36; to a
+4-pounder, 42; and to a 6-pounder, 56; but rockets of a larger sort
+cannot be driven well by hand, but must be rammed with a machine made
+in the same manner as those for driving piles.</p>
+
+<p>The method of ramming wheel cases, or any other sort in which the
+charge is driven solid, is the same as sky-rockets.</p>
+
+<p>When you load the heads of your rockets with stars, rains,
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_172" id="Page_172">[Pg 172]</a></span>
+serpents, crackers, scrolls, or any thing else, according to your fancy,
+remember always to put a ladle-full of meal-powder into each head,
+which will be enough to burst the head and disperse the stars, or
+whatever it contains.</p>
+
+<p><i>Decorations for Sky-rockets.</i>&mdash;Sky-rockets may be decorated according
+to fancy. Some are headed with stars of different sorts, such as
+tailed, brilliant, white, blue, and yellow stars, &amp;c. Some with gold
+and silver rains; others with serpents, crackers, fire-scrolls, and
+marrons; and some with small rockets and other devices, as the maker
+pleases.</p>
+
+<h5>LENGTH OF ROCKET-STICKS.</h5>
+
+<table border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" summary="ROCKET STICKS">
+<tr>
+ <td>For rockets of</td>
+ <td align="right">6</td>
+ <td>lb.</td>
+ <td align="right">0</td>
+ <td>oz. the stick must be</td>
+ <td align="right">14</td>
+ <td>ft.</td>
+ <td align="right">10</td>
+ <td>in. long</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td align="right">4</td>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td align="right">0</td>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td align="right">12</td>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td align="right">10</td>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td align="right">2</td>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td align="right">0</td>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td align="right">9</td>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td align="right">4</td>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td align="right">1</td>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td align="right">0</td>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td align="right">8</td>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td align="right">2</td>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td align="right">0</td>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td align="right">8</td>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td align="right">6</td>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td align="right">6</td>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td align="right">0</td>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td align="right">4</td>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td align="right">5</td>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td align="right">3</td>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+
+<p>Having your sticks ready, cut on one of the flat sides at the top a
+groove the length of the rocket, and as broad as the stick will allow;
+then on the opposite flat side cut two notches, for the cord which
+ties on the rocket to lie in; one of these notches must be near the
+top of the stick, and the other facing the neck of the rocket; the
+distance between these notches may be easily known, for the top of the
+stick should always touch the head of the rocket. When your rockets
+and sticks are ready, lay the rockets in the grooves in the sticks,
+and tie them on. We will now proceed to the charge for sky-rockets.</p>
+
+
+<h5>ROCKETS OF FOUR OUNCES.</h5>
+
+<table border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" summary="ROCKET OF FOUR OUNCES">
+<tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td>lb.</td>
+ <td>oz.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Meal-powder &nbsp; &nbsp; </td>
+ <td>1</td>
+ <td>4</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Saltpetre</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>4</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Charcoal</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>2</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<h5>ROCKETS OF EIGHT OUNCES.</h5>
+
+<table border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" summary="ROCKET OF EIGHT OUNCES">
+<tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td>lb.</td>
+ <td>oz.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Meal-powder &nbsp; &nbsp; </td>
+ <td>1</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Saltpetre</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>4</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Brimstone</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>3</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Charcoal</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>1&frac12;</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<h5>ONE POUND.</h5>
+
+<table border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" summary="ROCKET OF ONE POUND">
+<tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td>lb.</td>
+ <td>oz.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Meal-powder &nbsp; &nbsp; </td>
+ <td>2</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Saltpetre</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>8</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Brimstone</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>4</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Charcoal</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>2</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Steel-filings</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>1&frac12;</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_173" id="Page_173">[Pg 173]</a></span></p>
+
+<h5>SKY-ROCKETS IN GENERAL.</h5>
+
+<table border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" summary="SKY ROCKETS IN GENERAL">
+<tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td>lb.</td>
+ <td>oz.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Saltpetre</td>
+ <td>4</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Brimstone</td>
+ <td>1&frac12;</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Charcoal</td>
+ <td>1</td>
+ <td>12</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Meal-powder &nbsp; &nbsp; </td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>2</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<h5>LARGE SKY-ROCKETS.</h5>
+
+<table border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" summary="LARGE SKY ROCKETS">
+<tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td>lb.</td>
+ <td>oz.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Saltpetre</td>
+ <td>4</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Meal-powder &nbsp; &nbsp; </td>
+ <td>1</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Brimstone</td>
+ <td>1</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<h5>ROCKETS OF A MIDDLING SIZE.</h5>
+
+<table border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" summary="MIDDLING SKY ROCKETS">
+<tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td>lb.</td>
+ <td>oz.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Meal-powder &nbsp; &nbsp; </td>
+ <td>1</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Charcoal</td>
+ <td>1</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Saltpetre</td>
+ <td>3</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Sulphur</td>
+ <td>2</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<h4>ROCKET STARS.</h4>
+
+<h5>WHITE STARS.</h5>
+
+<table border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" summary="WHITE STARS">
+<tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td>lb.</td>
+ <td>oz.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Meal-powder &nbsp; &nbsp; </td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>4</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Saltpetre</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>12</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Sulphur vivum</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>6</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Oil of spike</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>2</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Camphor</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>5</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<h5>BLUE STARS.</h5>
+
+<table border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" summary="BLUE STARS">
+<tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td>lb.</td>
+ <td>oz.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Meal-powder &nbsp; &nbsp; </td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>8</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Saltpetre</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>4</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Sulphur</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>2</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Spirits of wine</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>2</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Oil of spike</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>2</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<h5>VARIEGATED STARS.</h5>
+
+<table border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" summary="VARIEGATED STARS">
+<tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td>lb.</td>
+ <td>oz.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Meal-powder &nbsp; &nbsp; </td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>3&frac12;</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Saltpetre</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>4</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Sulphur vivum</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>2</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Camphor</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>2</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<h5>BRILLIANT STARS.</h5>
+
+<table border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" summary="BRILLIANT STARS">
+<tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td>lb.</td>
+ <td>oz.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Saltpetre</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>8&frac12;</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Sulphur</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>1&frac12;</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Meal-powder &nbsp; &nbsp; </td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>0&frac34;</td>
+</tr>
+<tr> <td>Worked up with spirits of wine only.</td> </tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<h5>COMMON STARS.</h5>
+
+<table border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" summary="COMMON STARS">
+<tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td>lb.</td>
+ <td>oz.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Saltpetre</td>
+ <td>1</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Brimstone</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>4</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Antimony</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>4&frac34;</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Isinglass &nbsp; &nbsp; </td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>0&frac12;</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Camphor</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>0&frac14;</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Spirits of wine</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>0&frac14;</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_174" id="Page_174">[Pg 174]</a></span></p>
+
+<h5>TAILED STARS.</h5>
+
+<table border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" summary="TAILED STARS">
+<tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td>lb.</td>
+ <td>oz.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Meal-powder &nbsp; &nbsp; </td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>2</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Brimstone</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>2</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Saltpetre</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>2</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Charcoal (coarsely ground) &nbsp; &nbsp; </td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>0&frac34;</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<h5>STARS OF A FINE COLOUR.</h5>
+
+<table border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" summary="FINE STARS">
+<tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td>lb.</td>
+ <td>oz.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Sulphur</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>1</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Meal-powder &nbsp; &nbsp; </td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>1</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Saltpetre</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>1</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Camphor</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>0&frac14;</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Oil of turpentine</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>0&frac14;</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+
+
+
+<h4>RAINS.</h4>
+
+<h5>GOLD RAIN FOR SKY-ROCKETS.</h5>
+
+
+<table border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" summary="GOLD RAIN">
+<tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td>lb.</td>
+ <td>oz.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Saltpetre</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>8</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Brimstone</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>2</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Glass-dust</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>1</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Antimony</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>0&frac34;</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Brass-dust &nbsp; &nbsp; </td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>0&frac14;</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Saw-dust</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>0&frac14;</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+
+<h5>SILVER RAIN.</h5>
+
+
+<table border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" summary="SILVER RAIN">
+<tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td>lb.</td>
+ <td>oz.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Saltpetre &nbsp; &nbsp; </td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>8</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Brimstone</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>2</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Charcoal</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>4</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Steel-dust</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>0&frac14;</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+
+<p><i>To fix one Rocket on the top of another.</i>&mdash;When sky-rockets are fixed
+one on the top of another, they are called <i>towering rockets</i>, on
+account of their mounting so very high. Towering rockets are made
+after this manner: Fix on a pound rocket a head without a collar; then
+take a four-ounce rocket, which may be headed or bounced, and rub the
+mouth of it with meal-powder wetted with spirit of wine: this done,
+put it in the head of a large rocket with its mouth downwards; but
+before it is put in, stick a bit of quick-match in the hole of the
+clay of the pound rocket, which match should be long enough to go a
+little way up the bore of the small rocket, to fire it when the large
+rocket is burnt out. As the four-ounce rocket is too small to fill the
+head of the other, roll round it as much tow as will make it stand
+upright in the centre of the head: the rocket being thus fixed, paste
+a single paper round the opening of the top of the head of the large
+rocket. The large rocket must have only half a diameter of charge
+rammed above the piercer; for, if filled to the usual height,
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_175" id="Page_175">[Pg 175]</a></span>
+it would turn before the small one takes fire, and entirely destroy the
+intended effect: when one rocket is headed with another, there will be
+no occasion for any blowing powder; for the force with which it goes
+off will be sufficient to disengage it from the head of the first
+fired rocket. The sticks for these rockets must be a little longer
+than for those headed with stars, rains, &amp;c.</p>
+
+<p><i>Caduceous Rockets.</i>&mdash;They are such as, in rising, form two spiral
+lines, by reason of their being placed obliquely, one opposite to the
+other; and their counterpoise in the centre, which causes them to rise
+in a vertical direction. Rockets for this purpose must have their ends
+choked close, without either head or bounce; for a weight at the top
+would be a great obstruction to their mounting. No caduceous rockets
+ascend so high as single, because of their serpentine motion, and
+likewise the resistance of air, which is much greater than two rockets
+of the same size would meet with if fired singly.</p>
+
+<p>The sticks for this purpose must have all their sides equal, and the
+sides should be equal to the breadth of a stick proper for a
+sky-rocket of the same weight as those you intend to use, and made to
+taper downwards as usual, long enough to balance them, one length of a
+rocket from the cross stick, which must be placed from the large stick
+six diameters of one of the rockets, and its length seven diameters;
+so that each rocket, when tied on, may form, with the large stick, an
+angle of 60 degrees. In tying on the rockets, place their heads on the
+opposite side of the cross stick; then carry a leader from the mouth
+of one into that of the other. When these rockets are to be fired,
+suspend them between two hooks, or nails, then burn the leader through
+the middle, and both will take fire at the same time. Rockets of 1 lb.
+are a good size for this use.</p>
+
+<p><i>Honorary Rockets.</i>&mdash;These are the same as sky-rockets, except that
+they carry no head nor report, but are closed at top, on which is
+fixed a cone; then on the case, close to the top of the stick, is tied
+on a two-ounce case, about five or six inches long, filled with a
+strong charge, and pinched close at both ends; then in the reverse
+side, at each end, bore a hole in the same manner as in tourbillons,
+to be presently described; from each hole carry a leader into the top
+of the rocket. When the rocket is fired, and arrived to its proper
+height, it will give fire to the case at top; which will cause both
+rocket and stick to spin very fast in their return, and represent a
+worm of fire descending to the ground.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_176" id="Page_176">[Pg 176]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>There is another method of placing the small case, which is by letting
+the stick rise a little above the top of the rocket, and tying the
+case to it, so as to rest on the rocket: these rockets have no cones.</p>
+
+<p>A third method by which they are managed is this: in the top of a
+rocket fix a piece of wood, in which drive a small iron spindle; then
+make a hole in the middle of the small case, through which is put the
+spindle; then fix on the top of it a nut, to keep the case from
+falling off; when this is done, the case will turn very fast, without
+the rocket: but this method does not answer so well as either of the
+former.</p>
+
+<p><i>To make a Rocket form an Arch in rising.</i>&mdash;Having some rockets made,
+headed according to fancy, and tied on their sticks, get some sheet
+tin, and cut it into round pieces about three or four inches diameter;
+then on the stick of each rocket, under the mouth of the case, fix one
+of these pieces of tin 16 inches from the rocket's neck, and support
+it by a wooden bracket, as strong as possible: the use of this is,
+that when the rocket is ascending, the fire may play with greater
+force on the tin, which will divide the tail in such a manner that it
+will form an arch as it mounts, and will have a very good effect when
+well managed; if there is a short piece of port fire, of a strong
+charge, tied to the end of the stick, it will make a great addition;
+but this must be lighted before the rocket is fired.</p>
+
+<p><i>To make several Rockets rise together.</i>&mdash;Take six, or any number of
+sky-rockets, of any size; then cut some strong packthread into pieces
+of three or four yards long, and tie each end of these pieces to a
+rocket in this manner:</p>
+
+<p>Having tied one end of the packthread round the body of one rocket,
+and the other end to another, take a second piece of packthread, and
+make one end of it fast to one of the rockets already tied, and the
+other end to a third rocket, so that all the rockets, except the two
+on the outside, will be fastened to the two pieces of packthread: the
+length of thread from one rocket to the other may be what the maker
+pleases; but the rockets must be all of a size, and their heads filled
+with the same weight of stars, rains, &amp;c.</p>
+
+<p>Having thus done, fix in the mouth of each rocket a leader of the same
+length; and when about to fire them, hang them almost close; then tie
+the ends of the leaders together, and prime them; this prime being
+fired, all the rockets will mount at the same time, and divide as far
+as the strings will allow; and this division they keep, provided they
+are all<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_177" id="Page_177">[Pg 177]</a></span> rammed alike, and well made. They are sometimes called
+chained rockets.</p>
+
+<p><i>To fix several Rockets to the same Stick.</i>&mdash;Two, three, or six
+sky-rockets, fixed on one stick, and fired together, make a grand and
+beautiful appearance; for the tails of all will seem but as one of an
+immense size, and the breaking of so many heads at once will resemble
+the bursting of an air-balloon. The management of this device requires
+a skilful hand; but if the following instructions be well observed,
+even by those who have not made a great progress in this art, there
+will be no doubt of the rockets having the desired effect.</p>
+
+<p>Rockets for this purpose must be made with the greatest exactness, all
+rammed by the same hand, in the same mould, and filled with the same
+proportion of composition: and after they are filled and headed, must
+all be of the same weight. The stick must also be well made (and
+proportioned) to the following directions; first, supposing the
+rockets to be half-pounders, whose sticks are six feet six inches
+long, then if two, three, or six of these are to be fixed on one
+stick, let the length of it be nine feet nine inches; then cut the top
+of it into as many sides as there are rockets, and let the length of
+each side be equal to the length of one of the rockets without its
+head; and in each side cut a groove (as usual;) then from the grooves
+plane it round, down to the bottom, where its thickness must be equal
+to half the top of the round part. As their thickness cannot be
+exactly ascertained, we shall give a rule, which generally answers for
+any number of rockets above two; the rule is this: that the stick at
+top must be thick enough, when the grooves are cut, for all the
+rockets to lie, without pressing each other, though as near as
+possible.</p>
+
+<p>When only two rockets are to be fixed on one stick, let the length of
+the stick be the last given proportion, but shaped after the common
+method, and the breadth and thickness double the usual dimensions. The
+point of poise must be in the usual place (let the number of rockets
+be what it will;) if sticks made by the above directions should be too
+heavy, plane them thinner; and if too light, make them thicker; but
+always make them of the same length.</p>
+
+<p>When more than two rockets are tied on one stick, there will be some
+danger of their flying up without the stick, unless the following
+precaution is taken: For cases being placed on all sides, there can be
+no notches for the cord which ties on the rockets to lie in:
+therefore, instead of notches, drive<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_178" id="Page_178">[Pg 178]</a></span> a small nail in each side of the
+stick, between the necks of the cases, and let the cord, which goes
+round their necks, be brought close under the nails; by this means the
+rockets will be as secure as when tied on singly. The rockets being
+thus fixed, carry a quick-match, without a pipe, from the mouth of one
+rocket to the other; this match being lighted will give fire to all at
+once.</p>
+
+<p>Though the directions already given may be sufficient for these
+rockets, we shall here add an improvement on a very essential part of
+this device, which is, that of hanging the rockets to be fired; for
+before the following method was contrived, many attempts proved
+unsuccessful. Instead, therefore, of the old and common manner of
+hanging them on nails or hooks, make use of the following contrivance:
+Have a ring made of strong iron wire, large enough for the stick to go
+in as far as the mouths of the rockets; then have another ring
+supported by a small iron, at some distance from the post or stand to
+which it is fixed; then have another ring fit to receive and guide the
+small end of the stick. Rockets thus suspended will have nothing to
+obstruct their fire; but when they are hung on nails or hooks, in such
+a manner that some of their mouths or against or upon a rail, there
+can be no certainty of their rising in a vertical direction.</p>
+
+<p><i>To fire Rockets without Sticks.</i>&mdash;You must have a stand, of a block
+of wood, a foot diameter, and make the bottom flat, so that it may
+stand steady: in the centre of the top of this block draw a circle two
+inches and a half diameter, and divide the circumference of it into
+three equal parts; then take three pieces of thick iron wire, each
+about three feet long, and drive them into the block, one at each
+point made on the circle; when these wires are driven in deep enough
+to hold them fast and upright, so that the distance from one to the
+other is the same at top as at bottom, the stand is complete.</p>
+
+<p>The stand being thus made, prepare the rockets thus: Take some common
+sky-rockets of any size, and head them as you please; then get some
+balls of lead, and tie to each a small wire two or two feet and a half
+long, and the other end of each wire tie to the neck of a rocket.
+These balls answer the purpose of sticks, when made of a proper
+weight, which is about two-thirds the weight of the rocket; but when
+they are of a proper size, they will balance the rocket in the same
+manner as a stick, at the usual point of poise. To fire these, hand
+them one at a time, between the tops of the wires, letting their heads
+rest on the point of the wires, and the balls<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_179" id="Page_179">[Pg 179]</a></span> hang down between them:
+if the wires should be too wide for the rockets, press them together
+till they fit; and if too close, force them open; the wires for this
+purpose must be softened, so as not to have any spring, or they will
+not keep their position when pressed close or opened.</p>
+
+<p><i>Scrolls for Rockets.</i>&mdash;Cases for scrolls should be made four or five
+inches in length, and their interior diameters three-eighths of an
+inch: one end of these cases must be pinched quite close before
+beginning to fill; and when filled, close the other end; then in the
+opposite sides make a small hole at each end, to the composition, as
+in tourbillons, and prime them with wet meal-powder. You may put in
+the head of the rocket as many of these cases as it will contain:
+being fired, they turn very quick in the air, and form a scroll or
+spiral line. They are generally filled with a strong charge, as that
+of serpents or brilliant fire.</p>
+
+<p><i>Stands for Rockets.</i>&mdash;Care must be taken, in placing the rockets,
+when they are to be fired, to give them a vertical direction at their
+first setting out; which may be managed thus: Have two rails of wood,
+of any length, supported at each end by a perpendicular leg, so that
+the rails may be horizontal, and let the distance from one to the
+other be almost equal to the length of the sticks of the rockets
+intended to be fired; then in the front of the top rail drive square
+hooks at eight inches distance, with their points turned sidewise, so
+that when the rockets are hung on them, the points will be before the
+sticks, and keep them from falling or being blown off by the wind; in
+the front of the rail at bottom must be staples, driven
+perpendicularly under the hooks at top; through these staples put the
+small ends of the rocket-sticks. Rockets are fired by applying a
+lighted port-fire to their mouths.</p>
+
+<p><i>Table-Rockets.</i>&mdash;Table-rockets are designed merely to show the truth
+of driving, and the judgment of a fire-worker; they having no other
+effect, when fired, than spinning round in the same place where they
+began, till they are burnt out, and showing nothing more than a
+horizontal circle of fire.</p>
+
+<p>The method of making these rockets is thus:&mdash;Have a cone turned out of
+hard wood two inches and a half in diameter, and as much high; round
+the base of it drive a line; on this line fix four spokes, each two
+inches long, so as to stand one opposite the other; then fill four
+nine-inch one-pound cases with any strong composition, within two
+inches<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_180" id="Page_180">[Pg 180]</a></span> of the top: these cases are made like tourbillons, and must be
+rammed with the greatest exactness.</p>
+
+<p>The rockets being filled, fix their open ends on the short spokes;
+then in the side of each case bore a hole near the clay; all these
+holes, or vents, must be so made that the fire of each case may act
+the same way; from these vents carry leaders to the top of the cone,
+and tie them together. When the rockets are to be fired, set them on a
+smooth table, and light the leaders in the middle, and all the cases
+will fire together and spin on the point of the cone.</p>
+
+<p>These rockets may be made to rise like tourbillons, by making the
+cases shorter, and boring four holes in the under side of each at
+equal distances; this being done they are called <i>double tourbillons</i>.</p>
+
+<p><i>Note.</i>&mdash;All the vents in the under side of the cases must be lighted
+at once, and the sharp point of the cone cut off; at which place make
+it spherical.</p>
+
+
+<h4>WHEELS.</h4>
+
+<p>Wheel-cases are made to any length; which must always depend on the
+size of the wheel, but must not exceed the length of each angle.</p>
+
+<table border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" summary="WHEELS">
+<tr>
+ <td colspan="3">Charge for wheel-cases, from 2 oz. to 4 lb.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td>lb.</td>
+ <td>oz.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Meal-powder</td>
+ <td>4</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Saltpetre &nbsp; &nbsp; </td>
+ <td>1</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Brimstone</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>8</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Charcoal</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>4</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+
+<p>The filings in this composition may be varied by using a
+portion of sea-coal, glass-dust, saw-dust, &amp;c., or a combination
+of the whole.</p>
+
+<h5>SLOW FIRE FOR WHEELS.</h5>
+
+<table border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" summary="SLOW FIRE FOR WHEELS">
+<tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td>lb.</td>
+ <td>oz.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Saltpetre &nbsp; &nbsp; </td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>4</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Brimstone</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>2</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Meal-powder</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>1&frac12;</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td colspan="3">or, 1 oz. of brimstone may be used with 1 oz. of antimony.</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<h5>DEAD FIRE FOR WHEELS.</h5>
+
+<table border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" summary="DEAD FIRE FOR WHEELS">
+<tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td>oz.</td>
+ <td>dr.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Saltpetre &nbsp; &nbsp; </td>
+ <td>4&frac14;</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Brimstone</td>
+ <td>0&frac14;</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Lapis-caliminaris &nbsp; &nbsp; </td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>2</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Antimony</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>2</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+
+<p><i>Single Vertical Wheels.</i>&mdash;There are different sorts of vertical
+wheels; some having their fells of a circular form, others<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_181" id="Page_181">[Pg 181]</a></span>
+of an hexagonal, octagonal, or decagonal form, or of any number of sides,
+according to the length of the cases you design for the wheel; the
+spokes being fixed in the nave, nail slips of tin, with their edges
+turned up so as to form grooves for the cases to lie in; form the end
+of one spoke to that of another; then tie the cases in the grooves
+head to tail, in the same manner as those on the horizontal
+water-wheel; so that the cases, successively taking fire from one
+another, will keep the wheel in an equal rotation. Two of these wheels
+are very often fired together, one on each side of a building, and
+both lighted at the same time, and all the cases filled alike, to make
+them keep time together; as they will, if made by the following
+directions: In all the cases of both wheels, except the first, on each
+wheel drive two or three ladlesful of slow fire, in any part of the
+case; but be careful to ram the same quantity in each case; and in the
+end of one of the cases, on each wheel, you may ram one ladleful of
+dead-fire composition, which must be very lightly driven; you may also
+make many changes of fire by this method.</p>
+
+<p>Let the hole in the nave of the wheel be lined with brass, and made to
+turn on a smooth iron spindle. On the end of this spindle let there be
+a nut, to screw off and on; when you have put the wheel on the
+spindle, screw on the nut, which will keep the wheel from flying off.
+Let the mouth of the first case be a little raised. Vertical wheels
+are made from ten inches to three feet diameter, and the size of the
+cases must differ accordingly; four-ounce cases will do for wheels of
+14 or 16 inches diameter, which is the proportion generally used. The
+best wood for wheels of all sorts is a light and dry beech.</p>
+
+<p><i>Horizontal Wheels.</i>&mdash;They are best when their fells are made
+circular; in the middle of the top of the nave must be a pintle,
+turned out of the same piece as the nave, two inches long, and equal
+in diameter to the bore of one of the cases of the wheel; there must
+be a hole bored up the centre of the nave, within half an inch of the
+top of the pintle. The wheel being made; nail at the end of each spoke
+(of which there should be six or eight) a piece of wood, with a groove
+cut in it to receive the case. Fix these pieces in such a manner that
+half the cases may incline upwards and half downwards, and that, when
+they are tied on, their heads and tails may come very nearly together:
+from the tail of one case to the mouth of the other carry a leader,
+which should be secured with pasted paper. Besides these pipes, it
+will be neces<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_182" id="Page_182">[Pg 182]</a></span>sary to put a little meal-powder within the pasted
+paper, to blow off the pipe, that there may be no obstruction to the
+fire from the cases. By means of these pipes the cases will
+successively take fire, burning one upwards and the other downwards.
+On the pintle fix a case of the same sort as those on the wheel; this
+case must be fired by a leader from the mouth of the last case on the
+wheel, which case must play downwards: instead of a common case in the
+middle, you may put a case of Chinese fire, long enough to burn as
+long as two or three of the cases on the wheel.</p>
+
+<p>Horizontal wheels are often fired two at a time, and made to keep time
+like vertical wheels, only they are made without any slow or dead
+fire; 10 or 12 inches will be enough for the diameter of wheels with
+six spokes.</p>
+
+<p><i>Spiral Wheels.</i>&mdash;They are only double horizontal wheels, and made
+thus: the nave must be about six inches long, and rather thicker than
+the single sort; instead of the pintle at top, make a hole for the
+case to be fixed in, and two sets of spokes, one set near the top of
+the nave, and the other near the bottom. At the end of each spoke cut
+a groove wherein you tie the cases, there being no fell: the spokes
+should not be more than two inches and a half long from the naves, so
+that the wheel may not be more than eight or nine inches diameter; the
+cases are placed in such a manner, that those at top play down, and
+those at bottom play up; but let the third or fourth case play
+horizontally. The case in the middle may begin with any of the others;
+six spokes will be enough for each set, so that the wheel may consist
+of 12 cases, besides that on the top: the cases six inches each.</p>
+
+<p><i>Plural Wheels.</i>&mdash;Plural wheels are made to turn horizontally, and to
+consist of three sets of spokes, placed six at top, six at bottom, and
+four in the middle; which last must be a little shorter than the rest:
+let the diameter of the wheel be 10 inches: the cases must be tied on
+the ends of the spokes in grooves cut on purpose, or on pieces of wood
+nailed on the ends of the spokes, with grooves cut in them as usual:
+in clothing these wheels, make the upper set of cases play obliquely
+downwards, the bottom set obliquely upwards, and the middle set
+horizontally. In placing the leaders, they must be managed so that the
+cases may burn thus, viz., first up, then down, then horizontal, and
+so on with the rest. But another change may be made, by driving in the
+end of the eighth case two or three ladlesful of slow fire, to burn
+till the wheel has stopped its course;<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_183" id="Page_183">[Pg 183]</a></span> then let the other cases be
+fixed the contrary way, which will make the wheel run back again; for
+the case at top you may put a small gerbe; and let the cases on the
+spokes be short, and filled with a strong brilliant charge.</p>
+
+<p><i>Illuminated Spiral Wheel.</i>&mdash;First have a circular horizontal wheel
+made two feet diameter, with a hole quite through the nave; then take
+three thin pieces of deal, three feet long each, and three-fourths of
+an inch broad each: nail one end of each of these pieces to the fell
+of the wheel, at an equal distance from one another, and the other end
+nail to a block with a hole in its bottom, which must be perpendicular
+to that in the block of the wheel, but not so large. The wheel being
+thus made, have a loop planed down very thin and flat; then nail one
+end of it into the fell of the wheel, and wind it round the three
+sticks in a spiral line from the wheel to the block at top; on the top
+of this block fix a case of Chinese fire; on the wheel you may place
+any number of cases, which must incline downwards, and burn two at a
+time. If the wheel should consist of ten cases, you may let the
+illuminations and Chinese fire begin with the second cases. The
+spindle for this wheel must be a little longer than the cone, and made
+very smooth at top, on which the upper block is to turn, and the whole
+weight of the wheel to rest.</p>
+
+<p><i>Double Spiral Wheels.</i>&mdash;For these wheels, the block or nave must be
+as long as the height of the worms, or spiral lines, but must be made
+very thin, and as light as possible. In this block must be fixed
+several spokes, which must diminish in length, from the wheel to the
+top, so as not to exceed the surface of a cone of the same height. To
+the ends of these spokes nail the worms, which must cross each other
+several times: close these worms with illuminations, the same as those
+on the single wheels; but the horizontal wheel you may clothe as you
+like. At the top of the worm place a case of spur-fire, or an amber
+light.</p>
+
+<p><i>Balloon Wheels.</i>&mdash;They are made to turn horizontally: they must be
+made two feet diameter, without any spokes, and very strong, with any
+number of sides. On the top of a wheel range and fix in pots, three
+inches diameter and seven inches high each, as many of these as there
+are cases on the wheel: near the bottom of each pot make a small vent;
+into each of these vents carry a leader from the tail of each case;
+load some of the pots with stars, and some with serpents, crackers,
+&amp;c. As the wheels turn, the pots will successively be fired, and throw
+into the air a great variety of fires.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_184" id="Page_184">[Pg 184]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h4>BALLOON CASES.</h4>
+
+<p>You must have an oval former, turned of smooth wood; then paste a
+quantity of brown or cartridge-paper, and let it lie till the paste
+has soaked all through; this done, rub the former with soap or grease,
+to prevent the paper from sticking to it; then lay the paper on in
+small slips, till you have made it one-third of the thickness of the
+shell intended. Having thus done, set it to dry; and when dry, cut it
+round the middle, leaving about one inch not cut, which will make the
+halves join much better than if quite separated. When you have some
+ready to join, place the halves even together, and let that dry; then
+lay on paper all over as before, everywhere equal. When the shell is
+thoroughly dry, burn a vent at top with a square iron.</p>
+
+<p>Shells that are designed for stars only, may be made quite round, and
+the thinner they are at the opening the better; for if they are too
+strong, the stars are apt to break at the bursting of the shell.
+Balloons must always be made to go easy into the mortars.</p>
+
+
+<h4>MORTARS.</h4>
+
+<p>These mortars must be made of pasteboard, with a small copper chamber
+at bottom, in which the powder is to be placed, on which the balloon
+is to be put. In the centre of the bottom of this chamber make a small
+hole a little down the foot: the hole must be met by another of the
+same size as the foot. Then putting a quick-match, or touch-string, of
+touch-paper, into the hole, your mortar will be ready to be fired.</p>
+
+<p><i>To load Air Balloons with Stars, Serpents, &amp;c., &amp;c.</i>&mdash;When you fill
+your shells, you must first put in the serpents, rains, &amp;c., or
+whatever they are composed of, then the blowing powder; but the shells
+must not be quite filled. All those things must be put in at the
+fuse-hole, but marrons being too large to go in at the fuse-hole, must
+be put in before the inside shall be joined. When the shells are
+loaded, glue and drive in the fuses very tight. The number and
+quantities of each article for the different shells are as follows:</p>
+
+
+<h5>BALLOONS ILLUMINATED.</h5>
+
+<table border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" summary="BALLOONS ILLUMINATED">
+<tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td>oz.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Meal-powder &nbsp; &nbsp; </td>
+ <td>1</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Corn-powder &nbsp; &nbsp; </td>
+ <td>0&frac12;</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Powder for the mortar &nbsp; &nbsp; </td>
+ <td>2</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<p>1 oz. driven or rolled stars, or as many as will fill the shell.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_185" id="Page_185">[Pg 185]</a></span></p>
+
+<h5>BALLOONS OR SERPENTS.</h5>
+
+
+<table border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" summary="BALLOONS OR SERPENTS">
+<tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td>oz.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Meal-powder &nbsp; &nbsp; </td>
+ <td>1</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Corn-powder &nbsp; &nbsp; </td>
+ <td>1</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Powder for the mortar &nbsp; &nbsp; </td>
+ <td>2&frac12;</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<h4><i>Aigrettes.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Mortars to throw aigrettes are generally made of pasteboard, of the
+same thickness as balloon mortars, and two diameters and a half long
+in the inside from the top of the foot: the foot must be made of elm
+without a chamber, but flat at top, and in the same proportions as
+those for balloon mortars; these mortars must also be bound round with
+a cord: sometimes eight or nine of these mortars, of about three or
+four inches diameter, are bound all together, so as to appear but one;
+but when they are made for this purpose, the bottom of the foot must
+be of the same diameter as the mortars, and only half a diameter high.
+The mortars being bound well together, fix them on a heavy solid block
+of wood. To load these mortars, first put on the inside bottom of each
+a piece of paper, and on it spread one ounce and a half of meal and
+corn-powder mixed; then tie the serpents up in parcels with
+quick-match, and put them in the mortar with their mouths downwards;
+but take care the parcels do not fit too tight in the mortars, and
+that all the serpents have been well primed with powder wetted with
+spirit of wine. On the top of the serpents in each mortar lay some
+paper or tow; then carry a leader from one mortar to the other all
+round, and then from all the outside mortars into that in the middle:
+these leaders must be put between the cases and the sides of the
+mortar, down to the powder at bottom: in the centre of the middle
+mortar fix a fire-pump, or brilliant fountain, which must be open at
+bottom, and long enough to project out of the mouth of the mortar;
+then paste papers on the tops of all the mortars.</p>
+
+<p>Mortars thus prepared are called a <i>nest of serpents</i>. When these
+mortars are to be fired, light the fire-pump, which when consumed will
+communicate to all the mortars at once by means of the leaders. For
+mortars of 8, 9, or 10 inches diameter, the serpents should be made in
+one and two-ounce cases, six or seven inches long, and fired by a
+leader brought out of the mouth of the mortar, and turned down on the
+outside, and the end of it covered with paper, to prevent the sparks
+of the other works from setting it on fire. For a six-<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_186" id="Page_186">[Pg 186]</a></span>inch mortar,
+let the quantity of powder for firing be two ounces; for an
+eight-inch, two ounces and three-quarters; and for a ten-inch, three
+ounces and three-quarters. Care must be taken in these, as well as
+small mortars, not to put in the serpents too tight, for fear of
+bursting the mortars. These mortars may be loaded with stars,
+crackers, &amp;c.</p>
+
+<p>If the mortars, when loaded, are sent to any distance, or liable to be
+much moved, the firing powder should be secured from getting amongst
+the serpents, which would endanger the mortars, as well as hurt their
+performance. To prevent this, load the mortars thus: First put in the
+firing powder, and spread it equally about; then cut a round piece of
+blue touch-paper, equal to the exterior diameter of the mortar, and
+draw on it a circle equal to the interior diameter of the mortar, and
+notch it all round as far as that circle: then paste that part which
+is notched, and put it down the mortar close to the powder, and stick
+the pasted edge to the mortar: this will keep the powder always smooth
+at bottom, so that it may be moved or carried anywhere without
+receiving damage. The large single mortars are called <i>pots des
+aigrettes</i>.</p>
+
+
+<h4>FIRE-PUMPS, OR ROMAN CANDLES.</h4>
+
+<p>Cases for fire-pumps are made like those for tourbillons; only they
+are pasted instead of being rolled dry. Having rolled and dried your
+cases fill them: first put in a little meal-powder and then a star, on
+which ram, lightly, a ladle or two of composition, then a little
+meal-powder, and on that a star; then again composition, and so on
+till you have filled the case. Stars for fire-pumps should not be
+round, but must be made either square, or flat and circular with a
+hole through the middle: the quantity of powder for throwing the stars
+must increase as you come near the top of the case; for, if much
+powder be put at the bottom, it will burst the case. The stars must
+differ in size in this manner: let the star which you put in first be
+a little less than the bore of the case; but let the next star be a
+little larger, and the third star a little larger than the second, and
+so on: let them increase in diameter till within two of the top of the
+case, which two must fit in tight. As the loading of fire-pumps is
+somewhat difficult, it will be necessary to make two or three trials
+before you depend on their performance. When you fill a number of
+pumps, take care not to put in each an equal quantity of
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_187" id="Page_187">[Pg 187]</a></span>
+charge between the stars, so that when they are fired they may not throw up
+too many stars together. Cases for fire-pumps should be made very
+strong, and rolled on 4 or 8-ounce formers, 10 or 12 inches long each.</p>
+
+<h5>CHARGE.</h5>
+
+<table border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" summary="ROMAN CANDLES">
+<tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td>lb.</td>
+ <td>oz.</td>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td>lb.</td>
+ <td>oz.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Saltpetre &nbsp; &nbsp; </td>
+ <td>5</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>Saltpetre &nbsp; &nbsp; </td>
+ <td>5</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Brimstone &nbsp; &nbsp; </td>
+ <td>1</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>Brimstone &nbsp; &nbsp; </td>
+ <td>2</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Meal-powder &nbsp; &nbsp; </td>
+ <td>1&frac12;</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>Meal-powder &nbsp; &nbsp; </td>
+ <td>1</td>
+ <td>8</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Glass-dust &nbsp; &nbsp; </td>
+ <td>1</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+ <td>Glass-dust &nbsp; &nbsp; </td>
+ <td>1</td>
+ <td>8</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+
+
+
+<h4>AN ARTIFICIAL EARTHQUAKE.</h4>
+
+<p>Mix the following ingredients to a paste, with water; bury
+it in the ground, and in a few hours the earth will break open
+in several places:</p>
+
+<table border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" summary="AN ARTIFICIAL EARTHQUAKE">
+<tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td>lb.</td>
+ <td>oz.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Sulphur &nbsp; &nbsp; </td>
+ <td>4</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td>Steel-dust &nbsp; &nbsp; </td>
+ <td>4</td>
+ <td>0</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<h4><i>Chinese Fountains.</i></h4>
+
+<p>To make a Chinese fountain, you must have a perpendicular piece of
+wood, seven feet long, and two inches and a half square. Sixteen
+inches from the top, fix on the front a cross piece one inch thick,
+and two and a half broad, with the broad side upwards; below this, fix
+three more pieces of the same width and thickness, at sixteen inches
+from each other; let the bottom rail be five feet long, and the others
+of such a length as to allow the fire-pumps to stand in the middle of
+the intervals of each other. The pyramid being thus made, fix in the
+holes made in the bottom rail five fire-pumps, at equal distances; on
+the second rail, place four pumps; on the third, three; on the fourth,
+two; and on the top of the post, one; but place them all to incline a
+little forward, that, when they throw out the stars, they may not
+strike against the cross-rails. Having fixed your fire-pumps, clothe
+them with leaders, so that they may all be fired together.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>The Dodecahedron,</i></h4>
+
+<p>So called because it nearly represents a twelve-sided figure, is made
+thus: First have a ball turned out of some hard wood, 14 inches
+diameter; divide its surface into 14 equal parts, from which bore
+holes one inch and a half<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_188" id="Page_188">[Pg 188]</a></span> diameter, perpendicular to the centre, so
+that they may all meet in the middle: then let there be turned in the
+inside of each hole a female screw; and to all the holes but one must
+be made a round spoke five feet long, with four inches of the screw at
+one end to fit the holes; then in the screw-end of all the spokes bore
+a hole five inches long, which must be bored slanting, so as to come
+out at one side, a little above the screw; from which cut a small
+groove along the spoke within six inches of the other end, where make
+another hole through to the other side of the spoke. In this end fix a
+spindle, on which put a small wheel of three or four sides, each side
+six or seven inches long; these sides must have grooves cut in them
+large enough to receive a two or four-ounce case. When these wheels
+are clothed, put them on the spindles, and at the end of each spindle
+put a nut, to keep the wheel from falling off. The wheels being thus
+fixed, carry a pipe from the mouth of the first case on each wheel,
+through the hole in the side of the spoke, and from thence along the
+groove, and through the other hole, so as to hang out at the screw-end
+about an inch. The spokes being all prepared in this manner, you must
+have a post, on which you intend to fire the work, with an iron screw
+in the top of it, to fit one of the holes in the ball: on the screw
+fix the ball; then in the top hole of the ball put a little
+meal-powder and some loose quick-match: then screw in all the spokes;
+and in one side of the ball bore a hole, in which put a leader, and
+secure it at the end, and the work will be ready to be fired. By the
+leader the powder and match in the centre is fired, which will light
+the match at the ends of the spokes all at once, whereby all the
+wheels will be lighted at once. There may be an addition to this
+piece, by fixing a small globe on each wheel, or one on the top wheel
+only. A grey charge will be proper for the wheel-cases.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Stars with Points.</i></h4>
+
+<p>These stars are made of different sizes, according to the work for
+which they are intended; they are made with cases from one ounce to
+one pound, but in general with four-ounce cases, four or five inches
+long: the case must be rolled with paste, and twice as thick as that
+of a rocket of the same bore. Having rolled a case, pinch one end of
+it quite close; then drive in half a diameter of clay; and when the
+case is dry, fill it with composition two or three inches to the
+length of<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_189" id="Page_189">[Pg 189]</a></span> the cases with which it is to burn: at top of the charge
+drive some clay; as the ends of these cases are seldom pinched, they
+would be liable to take fire. Having filled a case, divide the
+circumference of it at the pinched end close to the clay, into five
+equal parts; then bore five holes with a gimblet about the size of the
+neck of a common four-ounce case, into the composition; from one hole
+to the other carry a quick-match, and secure it with paper: this paper
+must be put on in the manner of that on the end of wheel-cases, so
+that the hollow part, which projects from the end of the case, may
+serve to receive a leader from any other work, to give fire to the
+points of the stars. These stars may be made with any number of
+points.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Fixed Sun with a transparent Face.</i></h4>
+
+<p>To make a sun of the best kind, there should be two rows of cases,
+which should show a double glory, and make the rays strong and full.
+The frame or sun-wheel must be made thus: have a circular flat nave
+made very strong, 12 inches diameter; to this fix six strong flat
+spokes; on the front of these fix a circular fell, five feet diameter;
+within which, fix another fell, the length of one of the sun-cases
+less in diameter; within this fix a third fell, whose diameter must be
+less than the second by the length of one case and one-third. The
+wheel being made, divide the fells into so many equal parts as there
+are to be cases, (which may be done from 24 to 44:) at each division
+fix a flat iron staple: these staples must be made to fit the cases,
+to hold them fast on the wheel; let the staples be so placed, that one
+row of cases may lie in the middle of the intervals of the other.</p>
+
+<p>In the centre of the block of the sun drive a spindle, on which put a
+small hexagonal wheel, whose cases must be filled with the same charge
+as the cases of the sun; two cases of this wheel must burn at a time,
+and begin with those on the fells. Having fixed on all the cases,
+carry pipes of communication from one to the other, and from one side
+of the sun to the wheel in the middle, and from thence to the other
+side of the sun. These leaders will hold the wheel steady while the
+sun is fixing up, and will also be a sure method of lighting both
+cases of the wheel together. A sun thus made is called a <i>brilliant
+sun</i>, because the wood-work is entirely covered with fire from the
+wheel in the middle, so that there appears nothing but sparks of
+brilliant fire; but if you would<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_190" id="Page_190">[Pg 190]</a></span> have a transparent face in the
+centre, you must have one made of pasteboard of any size. The method
+of making a face is, by cutting out the eyes, nose, and mouth, for the
+sparks of the wheel to appear through; but instead of this face, you
+may have one painted on oil paper, or Persian silk, strained tight on
+a hoop; which hoop must be supported by three or four pieces of wire
+at six inches distance from the wheel in the centre, so that the light
+of it may illuminate the face. By this method may be shown, in the
+front of the sun, <span class="smcap">Vivat Regina</span>, cut in pasteboard, or Apollo, painted
+in silk; but, for a small collection, a sun with a single glory and a
+wheel in front will be most suitable. Half-pound cases, filled ten
+inches with composition, will be a good size for a sun of five feet
+diameter; but, if larger, the cases must be greater in proportion.</p>
+
+
+<h4>DETONATING WORKS.</h4>
+
+<h5>WATERLOO CRACKERS.</h5>
+
+<p>Take a slip of cartridge-paper, about three-quarters of an inch in
+width, paste and double it; let it remain till dry, and cut it into
+two equal parts in length, (No. 1 and 2,) according to the following
+pattern:</p>
+
+<table border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" summary="WATERLOO CRACKERS">
+<tr>
+ <td> &nbsp; No. 1. &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; Glass. &nbsp; </td>
+ <td> &nbsp; S &nbsp; </td>
+ <td> &nbsp; Glass. &nbsp; </td>
+ <td> &nbsp; No. 2. &nbsp; </td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+
+<p>Take some of the glass composition, and lay it across the paper as in
+the pattern, and put about a quarter of a grain of fulminating silver
+in the place marked S, and while the glass composition is moist, put
+the paper marked No. 2, over the farthest row of glass. Over all,
+paste twice over the part that covers the silver a piece of paper; let
+it dry, and when you wish to explode it, take hold of the two ends and
+pull them sharply from each other, and it will produce a loud report.</p>
+
+
+<h5>DETONATING GIRDLE.</h5>
+
+<p>Procure a piece of girth from 12 to 18 inches in length. Double it,
+and fold it down about 1&frac12; inch, similar to the fold of a letter,
+and then turn back one end of the girth, and it will form two
+compartments. Then take some gum and dissolve it in water; boil it
+till it is quite melted, and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_191" id="Page_191">[Pg 191]</a></span> very thick; add coarse powdered glass,
+sufficient to make it into a very thick paste; place two upright rows
+of the glass composition in the inside of one of the folds, about as
+wide as the thickness of a lath, and as high as a half-crown laid
+flat; and when they are dry, sew the first fold together on the edge,
+and then the second at the opposite end, so that one end may be open.
+Then, in the centre of the two rows, put about a grain of fulminating
+silver, and paste a piece of cotton or silk over it. Make a hole at
+each end of the girdle, and hang it to a hook in the door-post, and
+the other hook on the door, observing to place the silk part so that
+it may come against the edge of the door when opened, which will cause
+a report as loud as a small cannon. The fulminating silver may be
+purchased at any of the operating chemists.</p>
+
+
+<h5>DETONATING BALLS.</h5>
+
+<p>Procure some glass globes, between the size of a pea and a small
+marble, in which there must be a small hole; put into it half a grain
+of fulminating silver. Paste a piece of paper carefully over the ball
+to prevent the silver from escaping. When you wish to explode one put
+it on the ground, and tread hard upon it, and it will go off with a
+loud noise. These balls may be made productive of much amusement in
+company, by placing a chair lightly on them; for whoever sits down
+upon them will cause them to explode. These globes may be procured at
+the barometer-makers.</p>
+
+
+<h5>THE DETONATING TAPE.</h5>
+
+<p>Is made of binding, about three-eighths of an inch in width.
+Observe the same directions as given for the girdle; you
+may either explode it yourself, by taking hold of each end,
+and rolling the ends from each other sharply, or give one
+end to another, and pull together.</p>
+
+
+<h5>DETONATING CARDS.</h5>
+
+<p>Take a piece of card about three-fourths of an inch in breadth and 12
+in length; slit it at one end, and place in the opening a quarter of a
+grain of fulminating silver; close the edges down with a little paste,
+and when dry you may use it by lighting the end in a candle.</p>
+
+<p>Having given the method by which these loud reports are produced, we
+shall mention some other effects to be produced by the silver, capable
+of affording much amusement. For instance, by placing about a quarter
+of a grain<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_192" id="Page_192">[Pg 192]</a></span> of the silver in the midst of some tobacco in a pipe, or
+between the leaves of a cigar, and closing the end again, to prevent
+the powder from falling out; when lighted, it causes a loud explosion;
+for heat, as well as friction, will equally do.</p>
+
+<p>Or, take one-third of the grain of fulminating silver; fold it up in a
+small piece of paper, and wrap it up in another piece, and paste it
+round a pin. These pins stuck in the wick of a candle make a very loud
+noise.</p>
+
+<p>Fulminating silver may be also used in the following manner:&mdash;Put half
+a grain in a piece of glass-paper, and enclose it in a piece of foil;
+put it then at the bottom or side of a drawer, and on opening or
+shutting it, it will immediately go off.</p>
+
+<p>Put a quarter of a grain of fulminating silver into a piece of paper,
+and place in the snuffers when quite cold; when the candle is snuffed,
+it will go off.</p>
+
+
+<h4>AQUATIC FIRE-WORKS.</h4>
+
+<p>Works that sport in the water are much esteemed by most admirers of
+fire-works, particularly water-rockets; and as they seem of a very
+extraordinary nature to those who are unacquainted with this art, they
+merit a particular explanation.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Water-Rockets.</i></h4>
+
+<p>They may be made from four ounces to two pounds. If larger, they are
+too heavy; so that it will be difficult to make them keep above water
+without a cork float, which must be tied to the neck of the case; but
+the rockets will not dive so well with as without floats.</p>
+
+<p>Cases for these are made in the same manner and proportion as
+sky-rockets, only a little thicker of paper. When you fill those which
+are driven solid, put in first one ladleful of slow fire, then two of
+the proper charge, and on that one or two ladles of sinking charge,
+then the proper charge, then the sinking charge again, and so on, till
+you have filled the case within three diameters; then drive on the
+composition one ladleful of clay; through which make a small hole to
+the charge; then fill the case, within half a diameter, with
+corn-powder, on which turn down two or three rounds of the case in
+the inside; then pinch and tie the end very tight; having<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_193" id="Page_193">[Pg 193]</a></span> filled the
+rockets, (according to the above directions,) dip their ends in melted
+resin or sealing-wax, or else secure them well with grease. When you
+fire those rockets, throw in six or eight at a time; but, if you would
+have them all sink, or swim, at the same time, you must fill them with
+an equal quantity of composition, and fire them together.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Pipes of Communication for Water.</i></h4>
+
+<p>They may be used under water, but must be a little thicker in the
+paper than those for land. Having rolled a sufficient number of pipes,
+and kept them till dry, wash them over with drying oil, and set them
+to dry; but when you oil them, leave about an inch and a half at each
+end dry, for joints; as, if they were oiled all over, when you come to
+join them, the paste will not stick where the paper is greasy: after
+the leaders are joined, and the paste dry, oil the joints. These pipes
+will lie many hours under water, without receiving any damage.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Horizontal Water-Wheels.</i></h4>
+
+<p>To make horizontal wheels for the water, first get a large wooden bowl
+without a handle; then have an eight-sided wheel, made of a flat board
+18 inches diameter, so that the length of each side may nearly be
+seven inches: in all the sides cut a groove for the cases to lie in.
+This wheel being made, nail it on the top of the bowl; then take four
+eight-ounce cases, filled with a proper charge, each about six inches
+in length. Now, to clothe the wheel with these cases, get some
+whitish-brown paper, and cut it into slips; being pasted all over on
+one side, take one of the cases, and roll one of the slips of paper
+about an inch and a half on its end, so that there will remain about
+two inches and a half of the paper hollow from the end of the case:
+tie this case on one of the sides of the wheel, near the corners of
+which must be holes bored, through which put the packthread to tie the
+cases: having tied on the first case at the neck and end, put a little
+meal-powder in the hollow paper; then paste a slip of paper on the end
+of another case, the head of which put into the hollow paper on the
+first, allowing a sufficient distance from the tail of one to the head
+of the other, for the pasted paper to bend without tearing: tie on the
+second case as you did the first, and so on with the rest, except the
+last,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_194" id="Page_194">[Pg 194]</a></span> which must be closed at the end, unless it is to communicate to
+any thing on the top of the wheel, such as fire-pumps or brilliant
+fires, fixed in holes cut in the wheel, and fired by the last or
+second case, as the fancy directs: six, eight, or any number, may be
+placed on the top of the wheel, provided they are not too heavy for
+the bowl.</p>
+
+<p>Before trying on the cases, cut the upper part of all their ends,
+except the last, a little shelving, that the fire from one may play
+over the other, without being obstructed by the case. Wheel-cases have
+no clay driven in their ends, nor pinched, but are always left open,
+only the last, or those which are not to lead fire, which must be well
+secured.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Water-Mines.</i></h4>
+
+<p>For water-mines you must have a bowl with a wheel on it, made in the
+same manner as the water-wheel; only in its middle there must be a
+hole, of the same diameter as that of the intended mine. These mines
+are tin pots, with strong bottoms, and a little more than two
+diameters in length: the mine must be fixed in the hole in the wheel,
+with its bottom resting on the bowl; then loaded with serpents,
+crackers, stars, small water-rockets, &amp;c., in the same manner as pots
+of aigrettes; but in their centre fix a case of Chinese fire, or a
+small gerbe, which must be lighted at the beginning of the last case
+on the wheel. These wheels are to be clothed as usual.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Fire Globes for the Water.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Bowls for water-globes must be very large, and the wheels on them of
+ten sides: on each side nail a piece of wood four inches long; and on
+the outside of each piece cut a groove, wide enough to receive about
+one-fourth of the thickness of a four-ounce case: these pieces of wood
+must be nailed in the middle of each face of the wheel, and fixed in
+an oblique direction, so that the fire from the cases may incline
+upwards: the wheel being thus prepared, tie in each groove a
+four-ounce case filled with a grey charge; then carry a leader from
+the tail of one case to the mouth of the other.</p>
+
+<p>Globes for these wheels are made of two in hoops, with their edges
+outwards, fixed one within the other, at right angles. The diameter of
+these hoops must be rather less<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_195" id="Page_195">[Pg 195]</a></span> than that of the wheel. Having made
+the globe, drive in the centre of the wheel an iron spindle which must
+stand perpendicular, and its length be four or six inches more than
+the diameter of the globe.</p>
+
+<p>The spindle serves for an axis, on which is fixed the globe, which
+must stand four or six inches from the wheel; round one side of each
+hoop must be soldered little bits of tin, two inches and a half
+distance from each other; which pieces must be two inches in length
+each, and only fastened at one end, the other ends being left loose,
+to turn round the small port-fires, and hold them on: these port-fires
+must be made of such a length as will last out the cases on the wheel.
+There need not be any port-fires at the bottom of the globe within
+four inches of the spindle, as they would have no effect but to burn
+the wheel: all the port-fires must be placed perpendicularly from the
+centre of the globe, with their mouths outwards, and must be clothed
+with leaders, so as all to take fire with the second case of the
+wheel; and the cases must burn two at a time, one opposite the other.
+When two cases of a wheel begin together, two will end together;
+therefore the two opposite end cases must have their ends pinched and
+secured from fire. The method of firing such wheels is, by carrying a
+leader from the mouth of one of the first cases to that of the other;
+and the leader being burnt through the middle, will give fire to both
+at the same time.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Odoriferous Water-Balloons.</i></h4>
+
+<p>They are made in the same manner as air-balloons, but very thin of
+paper, and in diameter one inch and three-fourths, with a vent of half
+an inch diameter. The shells being made, and quite dry, fill them with
+any of the following compositions, which must be rammed in tight:
+these balloons must be fired at the vent, and put into a bowl of
+water. Odoriferous works are generally fired in rooms.</p>
+
+<p><i>Composition I.</i> Saltpetre two ounces, flour of sulphur one ounce,
+camphor half an ounce, yellow amber half an ounce, charcoal-dust
+three-fourths of an ounce, salt of Benzoin half an ounce, all powdered
+very fine and well mixed.</p>
+
+<p>II. Saltpetre twelve ounces, meal-powder three ounces, frankincense
+one ounce, myrrh half an ounce, camphor half an ounce, charcoal three
+ounces, all moistened with the oil of spike.</p>
+
+<p>III. Saltpetre two ounces, sulphur half an ounce, antimony<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_196" id="Page_196">[Pg 196]</a></span> half an
+ounce, amber half an ounce, cedar raspings one-fourth of an ounce, all
+mixed with the oil of roses and a few drops of bergamot.</p>
+
+<p>IV. Saltpetre four ounces, sulphur one ounce, saw-dust of juniper half
+an ounce, saw-dust of cypress one ounce, camphor one-fourth of an
+ounce, myrrh two drachms, dried rosemary one-fourth of an ounce, all
+moistened a little with the oil of roses.</p>
+
+<p>N.B. Water-rockets may be made with any of the above compositions,
+with a little alteration, to make them weaker or stronger, according
+to the size of the cases.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>A Sea-fight with small Ships and a Fire-ship.</i></h4>
+
+<p>Having procured four or five small ships, of two or three feet in
+length, make a number of small reports, which are to serve for guns.
+Of these range as many as you please on each side of the upper decks;
+then at the head and stern of each ship fix a two-ounce case, eight
+inches long, filled with a slow port-fire composition; but take care
+to place it in such a manner that the fire may fall in the water, and
+not burn the rigging; in these cases bore holes at unequal distances
+from one another, but make as many in each case as half the number of
+reports, so that one case may fire the guns on one side, and the other
+those on the opposite. The method of firing the guns is, by carrying a
+leader from the holes in the cases to the reports on the decks; you
+must make these leaders very small, and be careful in calculating the
+burning of the slow fire in the regulating cases, that more than two
+guns be not fired at a time. When you would have a broadside given,
+let a leader be carried to a cracker placed on the outside of the
+ship; which cracker must be tied loose, or the reports will be too
+slow: in all the ships put artificial guns at the port-holes. Reports
+for these and similar occasions are made by filling small cartridges
+with grained powder, pinching them close at each end, and, when used,
+boring a hole in the side, to which is placed a match or leader for
+firing them.</p>
+
+<p>Having filled and bored holes in two port-fires, for regulating the
+guns in one ship, make all the rest exactly the same; then, when you
+begin the engagement, light one ship first, and set it a sailing, and
+so on with the rest, sending them out singly, which will make them
+fire regularly, at different times, without confusion; for the time
+between the firing of each gun will be equal to that of lighting the
+slow fires.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_197" id="Page_197">[Pg 197]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The fire-ship may be of any size, and need not be very good, for it is
+always lost in the action. To prepare a ship for this purpose, make a
+port-fire equal in size with those in the other ships, and place it at
+the stern; in every port place a larger port-fire, filled with a very
+strong composition, and painted in imitation of a gun, and let them
+all be fired at once by a leader from the slow fire, within two or
+three diameters of its bottom; all along both sides, on the top of the
+upper deck, lay star-composition about half an inch thick and one
+broad, which must be wetted with thin size, then primed with
+meal-powder, and secured from fire by pasting paper over it; in the
+place where you lay this composition, drive some little tacks with
+flat heads, to hold it fast to the deck; this must be fired just after
+the sham guns, and when burning will show a flame all round the ship:
+at the head take up the decks, and put in a tin mortar loaded with
+crackers, which mortar must be fired by a pipe from the end of the
+slow fire: the firing of this mortar will sink the ship, and make a
+pretty conclusion. The regulating port-fire of this ship must be
+lighted at the same time with the first fighting ship.</p>
+
+<p>Having prepared all the ships for fighting, we shall next proceed with
+the management of them when on the water. At one end of the pond, just
+under the surface of the water, fit two running blocks, at what
+distance you choose the ships should fight; and at the other end of
+the pond, opposite to each of these blocks, under the water, fix a
+double block; then on the land, by each of the double blocks, place
+two small windlasses; round one of them turn one end of a small cord,
+and put the other end through one of the blocks; then carry it through
+the single one at the opposite end of the pond, and bring it back
+through the double block again, and round the other windlass: to this
+cord, near the double block, tie as many small strings as half the
+number of the ships, at any distance; but these strings must not be
+more than two feet long each: make fast the loose end of each to a
+ship, just under her bowsprit; for if tied to the keel, or too near
+the water, it will overset the ship. Half the ships being thus
+prepared, near the other double block fix two more windlasses, to
+which fasten a cord, and to it tie the other half of the ships as
+before: when you fire the ships, pull in the cord with one of the
+windlasses, to get all the ships together; and when you have set fire
+to the first, turn that windlass which draws them out, and so on with
+the rest, till they are all out<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_198" id="Page_198">[Pg 198]</a></span> in the middle of the pond; then, by
+turning the other windlass, you will draw them back again; by which
+method you may make them change sides, and tack about backwards and
+forwards at pleasure. For the fire-ship fix the blocks and windlasses
+between the others, so that when she sails out she will be between the
+other ships: you must not let this ship advance till the guns at her
+ports take fire.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>To fire Sky-Rockets under Water.</i></h4>
+
+<p>You must have stands made as usual, only the rails must be placed flat
+instead of edgewise, and have holes in them for the rocket-sticks to
+go through; for if they were hung upon hooks, the motion of the water
+would throw them off: the stands being made, if the pond be deep
+enough, sink them at the sides so deep, that, when the rockets are in,
+their heads may just appear above the surface of the water; to the
+mouth of each rocket fix a leader, which put through the hole with a
+stick; then a little above the water must be a board, supported by the
+stand, and placed along one side of the rockets; then the ends of the
+leaders are turned up through holes made in this board, exactly
+opposite the rockets. By this means you may fire them singly or all at
+once. Rockets may be fired by this method in the middle of a pond, by
+a Neptune, a swan, a water-wheel, or any thing else you choose.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Neptune in his Chariot.</i></h4>
+
+<p>To represent Neptune in his chariot, you must have a Neptune (made of
+wood, or basket-work) as big as life, fixed on a float large enough to
+bear his weight; on which must be two horses' heads and necks, so as
+to seem swimming. For the wheels of the chariot, there must be two
+vertical wheels of black fire, and on Neptune's head a horizontal
+wheel of brilliant fire, with all its cases, to play upwards. When
+this wheel is made, cover it with paper or pasteboard, cut and painted
+like Neptune's coronet; then let the trident be made without prongs,
+but instead of them, fix three cases of a weak grey charge, and on
+each horse's head put an eight-ounce case of brilliant fire, and on
+the mouth of each fix a short case, of the same diameter, filled with
+the white flame composition enough to last out all the cases on the
+wheels: these short cases must be open at bottom, that they may light
+the brilliant fires; for the horses' eyes put small port-fires, and
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_199" id="Page_199">[Pg 199]</a></span>
+in each nostril put a small case half filled with grey charge, and the
+rest with port-fire composition.</p>
+
+<p>If Neptune is to give fire to any building on the water, at his first
+setting out, the wheels of the chariot, and that on his head, with the
+white flame on the horses' heads, and the port-fires in their eyes and
+nostrils, must all be lighted at once; then from the bottom of the
+white flames carry a leader to the trident. As Neptune is to advance
+by the help of a block and cord, you must manage it so as not to let
+him turn about, till the brilliant fires on the horses and the trident
+begin; for it is by the fire from the horses (which plays almost
+upright,) that the building, or work, is lighted, which must be thus
+prepared. From the mouth of the case which is to be first fired, hang
+some loose quick-match to receive the fire from the horses. When
+Neptune is only to be shown by himself, without setting fire to any
+other works, let the white flames on the horses be very short, and not
+to last longer than one case of each wheel, and let two cases of each
+wheel burn at a time.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Swans and Ducks in Water.</i></h4>
+
+<p>If you would have swans or ducks discharge rockets into the water,
+they must be made hollow, and of paper, and filled with small
+water-rockets, with some blowing powder to throw them out; but if this
+is not done, they may be made of wood, which will last many times.
+Having made and painted some swans, fix them on floats; then in the
+places where their eyes should be, bore holes two inches deep,
+inclining downwards, and wide enough to receive a small port-fire; the
+port-fire cases for this purpose must be made of brass, two inches
+long, and filled with a slow bright charge. In the middle of one of
+these cases make a little hole; then put the port-fire in the eye-hole
+of the swan, leaving about half an inch to project out; and in the
+other eye put another port-fire, with a hole made in it: then in the
+neck of the swan, within two inches of one of the eyes, bore a hole
+slantwise, to meet that in the port-fire; in this hole put a leader,
+and carry it to a water-rocket, that must be fixed under the tail with
+its mouth upwards. On the top of the head place two one-ounce cases,
+four inches long each, driven with brilliant fire; one of these cases
+must incline forwards, and the other backwards: these must be lighted
+at the same time as the water-rocket; to do which, bore a hole between
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_200" id="Page_200">[Pg 200]</a></span>
+them in the top of the swan's head, down to the hole in the
+port-fire, to which carry a leader: if the swan is filled with
+rockets, they must be fired by a pipe from the end of the water-rocket
+under the tail. When you set the swan a swimming, light the two eyes.</p>
+
+
+<h4><i>Water Fire-Fountains.</i></h4>
+
+<p>To make a fire-fountain for the water, first have a float made of
+wood, three feet diameter; then in the middle fix a round
+perpendicular post, four feet high, and two inches diameter; round
+this post fix three circular wheels made of thin wood, without any
+spokes. The largest of these wheels must be placed within two or three
+inches of the float, and must be nearly of the same diameter. The
+second wheel must be two feet two inches diameter, and fixed at two
+feet distance from the first. The third wheel must be one foot four
+inches diameter, and fixed within six inches of the top of the post:
+the wheels being fixed, take 18 four or eight-ounce cases of brilliant
+fire, and place them round the first wheel with their mouths outwards,
+and inclining downwards; on the second wheel place 13 cases of the
+same, and in the same manner as those on the first; on the third,
+place eight more of these cases, in the same manner as before, and on
+the top of the post fix a gerbe; then clothe all the cases with
+leaders, so that both they and the gerbe may take fire at the same
+time. Before firing this work, try it in the water, to see whether the
+float is properly made, so as to keep the fountain upright.</p>
+
+
+<h5>THE END.</h5>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2>MISCELLANEOUS WORKS<br /><br />
+<small>IN VARIOUS DEPARTMENTS OF LITERATURE,</small><br /><br />
+PUBLISHED BY LEA AND BLANCHARD.</h2>
+
+
+<p>ACTON'S MODERN COOKERY, with cuts, 12mo, cloth.</p>
+
+<p>AMERICAN ORNITHOLOGY, by Prince Charles Bonaparte, in 4 vols.
+folio, half bound, colored plates.</p>
+
+<p>AMERICAN MILITARY LAW AND PRACTICE OF COURTS MARTIAL,
+by Lieut. O'Brien, U. S. A., 1 vol. 8vo, cloth or law sheep.</p>
+
+<p>ANSTED'S ANCIENT WORLD, OR PICTURESQUE SKETCHES OF
+CREATION, 1 vol. 12mo, numerous cuts.</p>
+
+<p>ADDISON ON CONTRACTS, 1 large vol. 8vo, law sheep.</p>
+
+<p>ARNOTT'S ELEMENTS OF PHYSICS, 1 vol. 8vo, sheep, with many
+wood-cuts.</p>
+
+<p>BOZ'S COMPLETE WORKS, in 8 vols. 8vo, extra cloth, with numerous plates.<br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">Same work, common edition, in paper, 9 parts, price $3 50.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">Same work in 3 large vols., good paper, fancy cloth, price $3 75.</span></p>
+
+<p>BENTHAMIANA: Extracts from Bentham, in 1 vol. 12mo.</p>
+
+<p>BROWNE'S RELIGIO MEDICI, 1 vol. 12mo, extra cloth.</p>
+
+<p>BOLMAR'S FRENCH SERIES, consisting of&mdash;<br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">A Selection of One Hundred Perrin's Fables, with a Key to the
+Pronunciation.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">A Series of Colloquial Phrases.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">The First Eight Books of Fenelon's Telemachus.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">Key to the same.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">A Treatise on all the French Verbs, Regular and Irregular.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 2em;">The whole forming five small volumes, half bound to match.</span></p>
+
+<p>BUTLER'S ATLAS OF ANCIENT GEOGRAPHY, 8vo, half bound.</p>
+
+<p>BUTLER'S GEOGRAPHIA CLASSICA, 1 vol. 8vo.</p>
+
+<p>BIRD'S NATURAL PHILOSOPHY, 1 vol. with many cuts.</p>
+
+<p>BRIGHAM ON MENTAL CULTIVATION, &amp;c., 12mo, cloth.</p>
+
+<p>BRIDGEWATER TREATISES. The whole complete in 7 vols. 8vo, various
+bindings: containing&mdash;<br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><span class="smcap">Roget's Animal and Vegetable Physiology</span>, in 2 vols, with many cuts.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><span class="smcap">Kirby on the History, Habits, and Instinct of Animals</span>, 1 vol. with plates.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><span class="smcap">Prout on Chemistry.</span></span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><span class="smcap">Chalmers on the Moral Condition of Man.</span></span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><span class="smcap">Whewell on Astronomy.</span></span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><span class="smcap">Bell on the Hand.</span></span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><span class="smcap">Kidd on the Physical Condition of Man.</span></span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><span class="smcap">Buckland's Geology</span>, 2 vols. with numerous plates and maps.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 2em;">Roget, Buckland, and Kirby are sold separate.</span></p>
+
+<p>BROUGHAM ON THE FRENCH REVOLUTION, 1 vol. paper.</p>
+
+<p>BOY'S TREASURY OF SPORTS AND PASTIMES, 1 vol. 18mo, crimson
+cloth, 400 illustrations.</p>
+
+<p>BARNABY RUDGE, by "Boz," paper or cloth.</p>
+
+<p>BROWNING'S HISTORY OF THE HUGUENOTS, 1 vol. 8vo.</p>
+
+<p>BREWSTER'S TREATISE ON OPTICS, 1 vol. 12mo, cuts.</p>
+
+<p>BABBAGE'S "FRAGMENT," 1 vol. 8vo.</p>
+
+<p>CAMPBELL'S LIVES OF THE LORD CHANCELLORS, 7 vols. crown 8vo, extra cloth.</p>
+
+<p>CHIMES, by Dickens, plates, 18mo, fancy cloth.</p>
+
+<p>CHRISTMAS STORIES&mdash;The Chimes, Carol, Cricket on the Hearth, and
+Battle of Life, together with Pictures from Italy, by Dickens, 1 vol 8vo,
+paper, price 37&frac12; cents.</p>
+
+<p>COMPLETE COOK, paper, price only 25 cents.</p>
+
+<p>COMPLETE CONFECTIONER, paper, 25 cents.</p>
+
+<p>COMPLETE FLORIST, paper, 25 cents.</p>
+
+<p>COMPLETE GARDENER, paper, 25 cents.</p>
+
+<p>CURIOSITY SHOP, by "Boz," paper or doth.</p>
+
+<p>C&AElig;SAR'S COMMENTARIES, 1 vol. 18mo, neat cloth; being vol. I. of
+Schmitz and Zumpf's Classical Series for Schools.</p>
+
+<p>CAMPBELL'S COMPLETE POETICAL WORKS, in 1 vol. crown 8vo,
+cloth gilt or white calf, plates.</p>
+
+<p>COOPER'S NAVAL HISTORY OF THE UNITED STATES, complete
+in 1 vol. 8vo, cloth, with plates and maps.</p>
+
+<p>COOPER'S NOVELS AND TALES, in 23 vols, sheep gilt, 12mo, or 47
+vols. paper.</p>
+
+<p>COOPER'S SEA TALES, 6 vols. 12mo, cloth.</p>
+
+<p>COOPER'S LEATHER STOCKING TALES, 5 vols. 12mo, cloth.</p>
+
+<p>CARPENTER'S COMPARATIVE ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY,
+with numerous wood-cuts, (preparing).</p>
+
+<p>CARPENTER'S ANIMAL PHYSIOLOGY, with 300 wood-cuts, (preparing).</p>
+
+<p>CROLY'S HISTORY OF THE CHRISTIAN RELIGION, to be complete
+in 3 vols., (at press).</p>
+
+<p>CLATER ON THE DISEASES OF HORSES, by Skinner, 1 vol. 12mo.</p>
+
+<p>CLATER'S CATTLE AND SHEEP DOCTOR, 1 vol. 12mo, cuts.</p>
+
+<p>CAMPBELL'S FREDERIC THE GREAT, 2 vols. 12mo, extra cloth.</p>
+
+<p>DON QUIXOTE, with numerous illustrations by Johannot; 2 vols.,
+8vo, cloth, or half morocco.</p>
+
+<p>DAVIDSON, MARGARET, Memoirs of and Poems, in 1 vol. 12mo, paper
+50 cents, or extra cloth.</p>
+
+<p>DAVIDSON, LUCRETIA, Poetical Remains, 1 vol. 12mo, paper 50 cents,
+or extra cloth.</p>
+
+<p>DAVIDSON, Mrs., Poetry and Life, in 1 vol. 12mo, paper 50 cents, or extra cloth.</p>
+
+<p>DANA ON CORALS, 1 vol. royal 4to, with Atlas of Plates, (at press).</p>
+
+<p>DOMBEY AND SON, by Dickens, 1 vol. 8vo, with 16 plates, price 50 cents.<br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">Same work, fine edition, 40 plates, extra cloth.</span></p>
+
+<p>DOG AND SPORTSMAN, by Skinner, plates, 1 vol. 12mo, cloth.</p>
+
+<p>DUNGLISON ON HUMAN HEALTH, 1 vol. 8vo, cloth or sheep.</p>
+
+<p>ENCYCLOP&AElig;DIA OF GEOGRAPHY, in 3 octavo vols. many cuts and
+maps, various bindings.</p>
+
+<p>ENCYCLOP&AElig;DIA AMERICANA, 14 vols. 8vo, various bindings.
+Vol. 14, bringing the work up to 1846, sold separate.</p>
+
+<p>EAST'S KING'S BENCH REPORTS, edited by G. M. Wharton, 16 vols. in
+8, large 8vo, law sheep.</p>
+
+<p>EDUCATION OF MOTHERS, 1 vol. 12mo, cloth or paper.</p>
+
+<p>ENDLESS AMUSEMENT, neat 18mo, crimson cloth, with cuts.</p>
+
+<p>FIELDING'S SELECT WORKS, in 1 vol. 8vo, cloth, or 4 parts, paper.</p>
+
+<p>FRANCATELLI'S MODERN FRENCH COOK, in 1 vol. 8vo, with many
+cuts.</p>
+
+<p>FOWNES' RECENT WORK ON CHEMISTRY, second edition, by Bridges,
+1 vol. 12mo, many cuts, sheep or extra cloth.</p>
+
+<p>GRAHAME'S COLONIAL HISTORY OF THE UNITED STATES, 2
+vols. 8vo, a new edition.</p>
+
+<p>GRAHAM'S ELEMENTS OF CHEMISTRY, 1 vol. large 8vo, many cuts,
+(new edition, in press).</p>
+
+<p>GIESELER'S ECCLESIASTICAL HISTORY, 3 vols. 8vo.</p>
+
+<p>GRIFFITHS' CHEMISTRY OF THE FOUR SEASONS, 1 vol. 12mo,
+many cuts.</p>
+
+<p>GRIFFITH'S MEDICAL BOTANY, 1 vol. large 8vo, extra cloth, nearly
+400 cuts.</p>
+
+<p>GROTE'S HISTORY OF GREECE, to form a neat 12mo series.</p>
+
+<p>HAWKER ON SHOOTING, Edited by Porter, with plates and cuts, 1 vol.
+8vo, beautiful extra cloth.</p>
+
+<p>HERSCHELL'S TREATISE ON ASTRONOMY, 1 vol. 12mo, cuts and
+plates.</p>
+
+<p>HALE'S ETHNOLOGY AND PHILOSOPHY OF THE U. S. EXPLORING
+EXPEDITION, 1 vol. royal 4to, extra cloth.</p>
+
+<p>HEMANS' COMPLETE POETICAL WORKS, in 7 vols. 12mo.</p>
+
+<p>HEMANS' MEMOIRS, by her Sister, 1 vol. 12mo.</p>
+
+<p>HOLTHOUSE'S LAW DICTIONARY, by Penington, 1 vol. large 12mo,
+law sheep.</p>
+
+<p>HILLIARD ON REAL ESTATE, new and much Improved Edition, 2
+large vols. 8vo, law sheep.</p>
+
+<p>HILL ON TRUSTEES, by Troubat, 1 large vol. 8vo, law sheep.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_205" id="Page_205">[Pg 205]</a></span></p>
+<p>INGERSOLL'S HISTORY OF THE LATE WAR, 1 vol. 8vo.</p>
+
+<p>IRVING'S ROCKY MOUNTAINS, 2 vols. 12mo, cloth.</p>
+
+<p>JOHNSON'S DICTIONARY OF GARDENING, by Landreth, 1 vol. large
+royal 12mo, 650 pages, many cuts.</p>
+
+<p>KNAPP'S TECHNOLOGY, OR CHEMISTRY APPLIED TO THE ARTS
+AND TO MANUFACTURES. Translated by Ronalds, Edited by Johnson.
+Vol. I., with numerous illustrations.</p>
+
+<p>KEBLE'S CHRISTIAN YEAR, in 32mo, extra cloth. Illuminated title.</p>
+
+<p>KIRBY AND SPENCE'S ENTOMOLOGY, 1 large 8vo vol. with plates,
+plain or colored.</p>
+
+<p>LOVER'S IRISH STORIES, 1 vol. royal 12mo, with cuts, extra cloth.<br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">Same work, paper, price 50 cents.</span></p>
+
+<p>LOVER'S RORY O'MORE, 1 vol. royal 12mo, with cuts, extra cloth.<br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">Same work, paper, price 50 cents.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">Same work, 8vo, price 25 cents.</span></p>
+
+<p>LOVER'S SONGS AND BALLADS, 12mo, paper, 25 cents.</p>
+
+<p>LIGHTS, SHADOWS, &amp;c., of Whigs and Tories, 1 vol. 12mo.</p>
+
+<p>LANGUAGE OF FLOWERS, eighth edition, 1 vol. 18mo, colored plates,
+crimson cloth, gilt.</p>
+
+<p>LANDRETH'S RURAL REGISTER, for 1848, royal 12mo, many cuts,
+price 15 cents. Copies for 1847 still on sale.</p>
+
+<p>LOVES OF THE POETS, by Mrs. Jamieson, 12mo.</p>
+
+<p>MARSTON, OR THE SOLDIER AND STATESMAN, by Croly, 8vo,
+sewed, 50 cents.</p>
+
+<p>MACKINTOSH'S DISSERTATION ON ETHICAL PHILOSOPHY, 1 vol.
+8vo, cloth.</p>
+
+<p>MOORE'S HISTORY OF IRELAND, in 2 vols. 8vo, cloth. Second volume
+sold separate.</p>
+
+<p>MARTIN CHUZZLEWIT, by "Boz," cloth or paper.</p>
+
+<p>MULLER'S PHYSICS AND METEOROLOGY, 1 vol. large 8vo, 2 colored
+plates, and 550 wood-cuts.</p>
+
+<p>MILLWRIGHT'S AND MILLER'S GUIDE, by Oliver Evans, in 1 vol.
+8vo, sheep, many plates.</p>
+
+<p>METCALF ON CALORIC, 1 vol. 8vo, (at press).</p>
+
+<p>MILL'S HISTORY OF THE CRUSADES, AND CHIVALRY, in one
+octavo volume.</p>
+
+<p>MILL'S SPORTSMAN'S LIBRARY, 1 vol. 12mo, extra cloth.</p>
+
+<p>NARRATIVE OF THE UNITED STATES' EXPLORING EXPEDITION,
+by Captain Charles Wilkes, U. S. N., in 6 vols. 4to, $60; or 6 vols.
+imperial 8vo, $25, with very Numerous and Beautiful Illustrations, on
+wood, copper, and steel; or 5 vols. 8vo, $10, with over three hundred
+wood-cuts and maps.</p>
+
+<p>NIEBUHR'S HISTORY OF ROME, complete, 2 large vols. 8vo.</p>
+
+<p>NICHOLAS NICKLEBY, by "Boz," cloth or paper.</p>
+
+<p>OLIVER TWIST, by "Boz," cloth or paper.</p>
+
+<p>PICCIOLA,&mdash;The Prisoner of Fenestrella, illustrated edition, with cuts,
+royal 12mo, beautiful crimson cloth.<br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">Same work, fancy paper, price 50 cents.</span></p>
+
+<p>PHILOSOPHY IN SPORT MADE SCIENCE IN EARNEST, 1 vol.
+18mo, neat crimson cloth, with cuts.</p>
+
+<p>POPULAR VEGETABLE PHYSIOLOGY, by Carpenter, 1 vol. 12mo,
+many cuts.</p>
+
+<p>PICKWICK CLUB, by "Boz," cloth or paper.</p>
+
+<p>RUSH'S COURT OF LONDON, 1 vol. 8vo.</p>
+
+<p>RANKE'S HISTORY OF THE POPES OF ROME, 1 vol. 8vo, cloth.</p>
+
+<p>RANKE'S HISTORY OF THE REFORMATION IN GERMANY, to be
+complete in 1 vol. 8vo.</p>
+
+<p>RANKE'S HISTORY OF THE OTTOMAN AND SPANISH EMPIRES,
+8vo, price 50 cents.</p>
+
+<p>ROGERS' POEMS, a splendid edition, Illustrated, imperial 8vo.</p>
+
+<p>ROGET'S OUTLINES OF PHYSIOLOGY, 1 vol. 8vo.</p>
+
+<p>ROSCOE'S LIVES OF THE KINGS OF ENGLAND, a 12mo Series to
+match Miss Strickland's Queens.</p>
+
+<p>STRICKLAND'S LIVES OF THE QUEENS OF ENGLAND, 12 vols.
+12mo, cloth or paper. (This work is now complete.)<br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">Same work, crown 8vo, extra cloth, two vols. in one; large type, and fine
+paper, beautiful crimson cloth.</span></p>
+
+<p>SELECT WORKS OF TOBIAS SMOLLETT, cloth or paper.</p>
+
+<p>SIMPSON'S OVERLAND JOURNEY AROUND THE WORLD, crown 8vo, extra cloth.<br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">Same work, 2 parts, paper, price $1 50.</span></p>
+
+<p>SIBORNE'S WATERLOO CAMPAIGN, with maps, 1 vol. large 8vo.</p>
+
+<p>SCHMITZ AND ZUMPT'S CLASSICAL SERIES FOR SCHOOLS, in
+neat 18mo volumes, in cloth.</p>
+
+<p>STABLE TALK AND TABLE TALK, FOR SPORTSMEN, 1 volume,
+12mo.</p>
+
+<p>SPENCE ON THE JURISDICTION OF THE COURT OF CHANCERY,
+vol. I., large 8vo, law sheep.<br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">Vol. II., embracing the Practice, (nearly ready).</span></p>
+
+<p>SMALL BOOKS ON GREAT SUBJECTS; a neat 18mo series, price 25
+cents each:&mdash;</p>
+
+<div class="blockquot"><p>No. 1. "<span class="smcap">Philosophical Theories and Philosophical Experience.</span>"<br />
+No. 2. "<span class="smcap">On the Connection between Physiology and Intellectual
+Science.</span>"<br />
+No. 3. "<span class="smcap">On Man's Power over himself to Prevent or Control Insanity.</span>"<br />
+No. 4. "<span class="smcap">An Introduction to Practical Organic Chemistry.</span>"<br />
+No. 5. "<span class="smcap">A Brief View of Greek Philosophy up to the Age of Pericles.</span>"<br />
+No. 6. "<span class="smcap">A Brief View of Greek Philosophy from the Age of Socrates
+to the Coming of Christ.</span>"<br />
+No. 7. "<span class="smcap">Christian Doctrine and Practice in the Second Century.</span>"<br />
+No. 8. "<span class="smcap">An Exposition of Vulgar and Common Errors, adapted to
+the Year of Grace 1845.</span>"<br />
+No. 9. "<span class="smcap">An Introduction to Vegetable Physiology, with References
+to the Works of De Candolle, Lindley, &amp;c.</span>"<br />
+No. 10. "<span class="smcap">On the Principles of Criminal Law.</span>"<br />
+No. 11. "<span class="smcap">Christian Sects in the Nineteenth Century.</span>"<br />
+No. 12. "<span class="smcap">Principles of Grammar</span>," &amp;c.</p></div>
+
+<p><span style="margin-left: 1em;">Or the whole done up in three volumes, extra cloth.</span></p>
+
+<p>TAYLOR'S MEDICAL JURISPRUDENCE, Edited with respect to American
+Practice, by Griffith, 1 vol. 8vo.</p>
+
+<p>TAYLOR'S TOXICOLOGY, by Griffith, 1 vol. 8vo, (nearly ready).</p>
+
+<p>TRAILL'S OUTLINES OF MEDICAL JURISPRUDENCE, 1 small vol.
+8vo, cloth.</p>
+
+<p>TRIMMER'S GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY, 1 vol. 8vo, cloth, many
+cuts.</p>
+
+<p>THOMSON'S DOMESTIC MANAGEMENT OF THE SICK ROOM, 1
+vol. 12mo, extra cloth.</p>
+
+<p>TOKEAH, by Sealsfield, price 25 cents.</p>
+
+<p>VIRGILII CARMINA, 1 neat 18mo vol., extra cloth, being vol. II. of
+Schmitz and Zumpt's Classical Series.</p>
+
+<p>WALPOLE'S LETTERS, in 4 large vols. 8vo, extra cloth.</p>
+
+<p>WALPOLE'S NEW LETTERS TO SIR HORACE MANN, 2 vols. 8vo.</p>
+
+<p>WALPOLE'S MEMOIRS OF GEORGE THE THIRD, 2 vols. 8vo.</p>
+
+<p>WHITE'S UNIVERSAL HISTORY, a new and Improved work for
+Schools, Colleges, &amp;c., with Questions by Professor Hart, in 1 vol. large
+12mo, extra cloth, or half bound.</p>
+
+<p>WEISBACH'S PRINCIPLES OF THE MECHANICS OF MACHINERY
+AND ENGINEERING, vol. I, with five hundred cuts.</p>
+
+<p>WILLIAM THE CONQUEROR, Life of, by Roscoe, 1 vol. 12mo, extra
+cloth or fancy paper.</p>
+
+<p>WHEATON'S INTERNATIONAL LAW, 1 vol. large 8vo, law sheep, or
+extra cloth, third edition, much improved.</p>
+
+<p>WRAXALL'S POSTHUMOUS MEMOIRS, 1 vol. 8vo, extra cloth.</p>
+
+<p>WRAXALL'S HISTORICAL MEMOIRS, 1 vol. 8vo, do. do.</p>
+
+<p>YOUATT ON THE HORSE, &amp;c., by Skinner, 1 vol. 8vo, many cuts.</p>
+
+<p>YOUATT ON THE DOG, with plates, 1 vol. crown 8vo, beautiful crimson
+cloth.</p>
+
+<p>YOUATT ON THE PIG, 1 vol. 12mo, extra cloth, with cuts.<br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">Same work in paper, price 50 cents.</span>
+</p>
+
+
+<p><small>Together with numerous works in all departments of Medical Science,
+Catalogues of which can be had on application.</small></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style='width: 65%;' />
+<h3>THE AMERICAN ENCYCLOP&AElig;DIA.<br />
+<small>BROUGHT UP TO 1847.</small></h3>
+
+<h4><big>THE ENCYCLOP&AElig;DIA AMERICANA:</big><br />
+<small>A POPULAR DICTIONARY</small><br />
+OF ARTS, SCIENCES, LITERATURE, HISTORY, POLITICS, AND BIOGRAPHY,<br />
+<br />
+<small>IN FOURTEEN LARGE OCTAVO VOLUMES OF OVER SIX HUNDRED<br />
+DOUBLE COLUMNED PAGES EACH.</small></h4>
+
+<p style='text-align:center'>For sale very low, in various styles of binding.</p>
+
+<div class="blockquot"><p>Some years having elapsed since the original thirteen volumes of the
+ENCYCLOP&AElig;DIA AMERICANA were published, to bring it up to the present
+day, with the history of that period, at the request of numerous
+subscribers, the publishers have just issued a</p></div>
+
+<h4><small>SUPPLEMENTARY VOLUME (THE FOURTEENTH),</small><br />
+<big>BRINGING THE WORK UP TO THE YEAR 1847.</big><br />
+EDITED BY HENRY VETHAKE, LL.D.<br />
+<small>Vice-Provost and Professor of Mathematics in the University of
+Pennsylvania, Author of "A Treatise on Political Economy."</small></h4>
+
+<p style='text-align:center'>In one large octavo volume of over 650 double columned pages.</p>
+
+<div class="blockquot"><p>The numerous subscribers who have been waiting the completion of this
+volume can now perfect their sets, and all who want</p></div>
+
+<h5>A REGISTER OF THE EVENTS OF THE LAST FIFTEEN YEARS, FOR THE WHOLE WORLD,</h5>
+
+<div class="blockquot"><p>can obtain this volume separately: price Two Dollars uncut in cloth,
+or Two Dollars and Fifty cents in leather, to match the styles in
+which the publishers have been selling sets.</p>
+
+<p>Subscribers in the large cities can be supplied on application at any
+of the principal bookstores; and persons residing in the country can
+have their sets matched by sending a volume in charge of friends
+visiting the city.</p></div>
+
+<p>"This volume is worth owning by itself, as a most convenient and
+reliable compend of recent History, Biography, Statistics, &amp;c., &amp;c.
+The entire work forms the cheapest and probably now the most desirable
+Encyclop&aelig;dia published for popular use."&mdash;<i>New York Tribune.</i><br />
+<br />
+"The Conversations Lexicon (Encyclop&aelig;dia Americana) has become a
+household book in all the intelligent families in America, and is
+undoubtedly the best depository of biographical, historical,
+geographical, and political information of that kind which
+discriminating readers require."&mdash;<i>Silliman's Journal.</i><br />
+<br />
+"This volume of the Encyclop&aelig;dia is a Westminster Abbey of American
+reputation. What names are on the roll since 1833!"&mdash;<i>N. Y. Literary
+World.</i><br />
+<br />
+"The work to which this volume forms a supplement, is one of the most
+important contributions that has ever been made to the literature of
+our country. Besides condensing into a comparatively narrow compass,
+the substance of larger works of the same kind which had preceded it,
+it contains a vast amount of information that is not elsewhere to be
+found, and is distinguished, not less for its admirable arrangement,
+than for the variety of subjects of which it treats. The present
+volume, which is edited by one of the most distinguished scholars of
+our country, is worthy to follow in the train of those which have
+preceded it. It is a remarkably felicitous condensation of the more
+recent improvements in science and the arts, besides forming a very
+important addition to the department of Biography, the general
+progress of society, &amp;c., &amp;c."&mdash;<i>Albany Argus.</i></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style='width: 45%;' />
+<h3><big>CAMPBELL'S LORD CHANCELLORS.</big><br />
+<small>NOW COMPLETE.</small></h3>
+
+<h4><big>LIVES OF THE LORD CHANCELLORS AND KEEPERS OF
+THE GREAT SEAL OF ENGLAND.</big><br />
+<small>FROM THE EARLIEST TIMES TO THE REIGN OF KING GEORGE IV.,</small><br />
+BY JOHN LORD CAMPBELL, A.M., F.R.S.E.</h4>
+
+<p style='text-align:center'>Now complete in seven handsome crown octavo volumes.<br />
+<i>Bringing the work to the death of Lord Eldon, 1838.</i></p>
+
+<p>"The volumes teem with exciting incidents, abound in portraits,
+sketches, and anecdotes, and are at once interesting and instructive.
+The work is not only historical and biographical, but it is
+anecdotical and philosophical. Many of the chapters embody thrilling
+incidents, while as a whole, the publication may be regarded as of a
+high intellectual order."&mdash;<i>Inquirer.</i></p>
+
+<hr style='width: 45%;' />
+
+<h2>MURRAY'S ENCYCLOP&AElig;DIA OF GEOGRAPHY.</h2>
+
+<h4><big>THE ENCYCLOP&AElig;DIA OF GEOGRAPHY,</big><br />
+<small>COMPRISING</small><br />
+A COMPLETE DESCRIPTION OF THE EARTH, PHYSICAL, STATISTICAL,
+CIVIL, AND POLITICAL.<br />
+<small>EXHIBITING<br />
+ITS RELATION TO THE HEAVENLY BODIES, ITS PHYSICAL STRUCTURE, THE<br />
+NATURAL HISTORY OF EACH COUNTRY, AND THE INDUSTRY,<br />
+COMMERCE, POLITICAL INSTITUTIONS, AND CIVIL<br />
+AND SOCIAL STATE OF ALL NATIONS.</small><br />
+<br />
+BY HUGH MURRAY, F.R.S.E., &amp;c.<br />
+<small>Assisted in Botany by Professor HOOKER&mdash;Zoology, &amp;c., by W. W.
+SWAINSON&mdash;Astronomy &amp;c., by Professor WALLACE&mdash;Geology, &amp;c., by
+Professor JAMESON.</small><br />
+<br />
+<small>REVISED, WITH ADDITIONS,</small><br />
+BY THOMAS G. BRADFORD.<br />
+<small>THE WHOLE BROUGHT UP, BY A SUPPLEMENT, TO 1843.</small></h4>
+
+<p style='text-align:center'><i>In three large octavo volumes,</i><br />
+VARIOUS STYLES OF BINDING.</p>
+
+<p>This great work, furnished at a remarkably cheap rate, contains about
+<span class="smcap">Nineteen Hundred large imperial Pages</span>, and is illustrated by <span class="smcap">Eighty-Two
+small Maps</span>, and a colored <span class="smcap">Map of the United States</span>, after Tanner's,
+together with about <span class="smcap">Eleven Hundred Wood-Cuts</span>, executed in the
+best style.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style='width: 65%;' />
+<h2><span class="u">SCHOOL BOOKS.</span></h2>
+
+<h3><big>BIRD'S NATURAL PHILOSOPHY.</big><br />
+<small>NOW READY.</small></h3>
+
+<h3>ELEMENTS OF NATURAL PHILOSOPHY,<br />
+<small>BEING AN EXPERIMENTAL INTRODUCTION TO THE PHYSICAL SCIENCES.<br />
+ILLUSTRATED WITH OVER THREE HUNDRED WOOD-CUTS.</small><br />
+<br />
+BY GOLDING BIRD, M.D.,<br />
+<small>Assistant Physician to Guy's Hospital.<br />
+FROM THE THIRD LONDON EDITION.</small></h3>
+
+<p style='text-align:center'>In one neat volume.</p>
+
+<p>"By the appearance of Dr. Bird's work, the student has now all that he
+can desire in one neat, concise, and well-digested volume. The
+elements of natural philosophy are explained in very simple language,
+and illustrated by numerous wood-cuts."&mdash;<i>Medical Gazette.</i><br />
+<br />
+"A volume of useful and beautiful instruction for the
+young."&mdash;<i>Literary Gazette.</i><br />
+<br />
+"We should like to know that Dr. Bird's book was associated with every
+boys' and girls' school throughout the kingdom."&mdash;<i>Medical Gazette.</i><br />
+<br />
+"This work marks an advance which has long been wanting in our system
+of instruction. Mr. Bird has succeeded in producing an elementary work
+of great merit."&mdash;<i>Athen&aelig;um.</i></p>
+
+
+<hr style='width: 45%;' />
+
+<h2>HERSCHELL'S ASTRONOMY.</h2>
+
+<h4><big>A TREATISE ON ASTRONOMY,</big><br />
+BY SIR JOHN F. W. HERSCHELL, F. R. S., &amp;c.<br />
+<small>WITH NUMEROUS PLATES AND WOOD-CUTS.</small><br />
+A NEW EDITION, WITH A PREFACE AND A SERIES OF QUESTIONS,<br />
+BY S. C. WALKER.</h4>
+
+<p style='text-align:center'>In one volume, 12mo.</p>
+
+
+<hr style='width: 45%;' />
+
+<h2>BREWSTER'S OPTICS.</h2>
+
+<h4><big>ELEMENTS OF OPTICS,</big><br />
+BY SIR DAVID BREWSTER.<br />
+<small>WITH NOTES AND ADDITIONS, BY A. D. BACHE, LL.D.<br />
+Superintendent of the Coast Survey, &amp;c.</small></h4>
+
+<p style='text-align:center'>In one volume, 12mo., with numerous wood-cuts.</p>
+
+
+<hr style='width: 45%;' />
+
+<h3><big>MULLER'S PHYSICS AND METEOROLOGY.</big><br />
+<small>NOW READY.</small></h3>
+
+<h4><big>PRINCIPLES OF PHYSICS AND METEOROLOGY,</big><br />
+BY J. MULLER,<br />
+Professor of Physics at the University of Freiburg.<br />
+<small>ILLUSTRATED WITH NEARLY FIVE HUNDRED AND FIFTY ENGRAVINGS ON WOOD,
+AND TWO COLORED PLATES.</small></h4>
+
+<p style='text-align:center'>In one octavo volume.</p>
+
+<h4>TRANSLATOR'S PREFACE.</h4>
+
+<div class="blockquot"><p>In laying the following pages before the public, it seems necessary to
+state that the design of them is to render more easily accessible a
+greater portion of the general principles of Physics and Meteorology
+than is usually to be obtained, without the sacrifice of a greater
+amount of time and labour than most persons can afford, or are willing
+to make. The subjects of which this volume treats are very
+numerous&mdash;more numerous, in fact, than at first sight it would seem
+possible to embrace in so small a compass. The Author has, however, by
+a system of the most judicious selection and condensation, been
+enabled to introduce all the most important facts and theories
+relating to Statics, Hydrostatics, Dynamics, Hydrodynamics,
+Pneumatics, the Laws of the Motions of Waves in general, Sound, the
+Theory of Musical Notes, the Voice and Hearing, Geometrical and
+Physical Optics, Magnetism, Electricity and Galvanism, in all their
+subdivisions, Heat and Meteorology, within the space of an ordinary
+middle-sized volume. Of the manner in which the translator has
+executed his task, it behoves him to say nothing; he has attempted
+nothing more than a plain, and nearly literal version of the original.
+He cannot, however, conclude this brief introductory note without
+directing the attention of his Readers to the splendid manner in which
+the Publishers have illustrated this volume.</p>
+
+<p><i>August, 1847.</i></p>
+</div>
+
+<p>"The Physics of Muller is a work, superb, complete, unique: the
+greatest want known to English Science could not have been better
+supplied. The work is of surpassing interest. The value of this
+contribution to the scientific records of this country may be duly
+estimated by the fact, that the cost of the original drawings and
+engravings alone has exceeded the sum of 2000&pound;."&mdash;<i>Lancet</i>,
+March, 1847.</p>
+
+<p>"The plan adopted by Muller is simple; it reminds us of the excellent
+and popular treatise published many years since by Dr. Arnott, but it
+takes a much wider range of subjects. Like it, all the necessary
+explanations are given in clear and concise language, without more
+than an occasional reference to mathematics; and the treatise is most
+abundantly illustrated with well-executed wood engravings.</p>
+
+<p>"The author has actually contrived to comprise in about five hundred
+pages, including the space occupied by illustrations, Mechanics, the
+Laws of Motion, Acoustics, Light, Magnetism, Electricity, Galvanism,
+Electro-Magnetism, Heat, and Meteorology.</p>
+
+<p>"Medical practitioners and students, even if they have the means to
+procure, have certainly not the time to study an elaborate treatise in
+every branch of science: and the question therefore is, simply,
+whether they are to remain wholly ignorant of such subjects, or to
+make a profitable use of the labours of those who have the happy art
+of saying or suggesting much in a small space.</p>
+
+<p>"From our examination of this volume, we do not hesitate to recommend
+it to our readers as a useful book on a most interesting branch of
+science. We may remark, that the translation is so well executed, that
+we think the translator is doing himself injustice by concealing his
+name."&mdash;<i>London Medical Gazette</i>, August, 1847.</p>
+
+
+<hr style='width: 45%;' />
+
+<h3><big>GRAHAM'S CHEMISTRY.</big><br />
+<small>NEARLY READY.</small></h3>
+
+<h4><big>ELEMENTS OF CHEMISTRY,</big><br />
+<small>INCLUDING</small><br />
+THE APPLICATIONS OF THE SCIENCE IN THE ARTS.<br />
+BY T. GRAHAM, F. R. S., &amp;c.<br />
+<small>SECOND AMERICAN, FROM THE SECOND LONDON EDITION.</small><br />
+EDITED AND REVISED BY ROBERT BRIDGES, M.D.,<br />
+<small>Professor of Chemistry in the Franklin Medical College, Philadelphia.</small></h4>
+
+<p style='text-align:center'>In one large octavo volume, with numerous wood-engravings.</p>
+
+<p>This edition will be found enlarged and improved, so as to be fully brought
+up to a level with the science of the day.</p>
+
+
+<hr style='width: 45%;' />
+
+<h2>ARNOTT'S PHYSICS.</h2>
+
+<h4><big>ELEMENTS OF PHYSICS; OR, NATURAL PHILOSOPHY,</big><br />
+GENERAL AND MEDICAL.<br />
+<small>WRITTEN FOR UNIVERSAL USE, IN PLAIN, OR NON-TECHNICAL LANGUAGE.</small><br />
+<br />
+BY NIELL ARNOTT, M.D.<br />
+<small>A NEW EDITION, BY ISAAC HAYS, M.D.</small></h4>
+
+<p style='text-align:center'>Complete in one octavo volume, with nearly two hundred wood-cuts.</p>
+
+<p>This standard work has been long and favourably known as one of the
+best popular expositions of the interesting science it treats of. It
+is extensively used in many of the first seminaries.</p>
+
+
+<hr style='width: 45%;' />
+
+<h4><big>ELEMENTARY CHEMISTRY, THEORETICAL AND PRACTICAL,</big><br />
+<span class="smcap">BY GEORGE FOWNES, Ph.D.,</span><br />
+<small>Chemical Lecturer in the Middlesex Hospital Medical School, &amp;c., &amp;c.</small><br />
+<br />
+WITH NUMEROUS ILLUSTRATIONS.<br />
+<small>EDITED, WITH ADDITIONS,</small><br />
+BY ROBERT BRIDGES, M.D.,<br />
+<small>Professor of General and Pharmaceutical Chemistry in the Philadelphia College of Pharmacy, &amp;c., &amp;c.<br />
+<br />
+SECOND AMERICAN EDITION.</small></h4>
+
+<p style='text-align:center'>In one large duodecimo volume, sheep, or extra cloth, with nearly<br />
+two hundred wood-cuts.</p>
+
+<p>The character of this work is such as to recommend it to all colleges
+and academies in want of a text-book. It is fully brought up to the
+day, containing all the late views and discoveries that have so
+entirely changed the face of the science, and it is completely
+illustrated with very numerous wood engravings, explanatory of all the
+different processes and forms of apparatus. Though strictly
+scientific, it is written with great clearness and simplicity of
+style, rendering it easy to be comprehended by those who are
+commencing the study.</p>
+
+<p>It may be had well bound in leather, or neatly done up in strong
+cloth. Its low price places it within the reach of all.</p>
+
+<div class="blockquot"><p style='text-align:center'><i>Extract of a letter from Professor Millington, of William and Mary College, Va.</i></p>
+
+<p>"I have perused the book with much pleasure, and find it a most
+admirable work; and, to my mind, such a one as is just now much needed
+in schools and colleges. * * * All the books I have met with on chemistry
+are either too puerile or too erudite, and I confess Dr. Fownes' book
+seems to be the happiest medium I have seen, and admirably suited to
+fill up the hiatus."</p></div>
+
+<p>Though this work has been so recently published, it has already been
+adopted as a text-book by a large number of the higher schools and
+colleges throughout the country, and many of the Medical Institutions.
+As a work for the upper classes in academies and the junior students
+of colleges, there has been but one opinion expressed concerning it,
+and it may now be considered as <span class="smcap">The Text-Book</span> for the Chemical
+Student.</p>
+
+
+<hr style='width: 65%;' />
+<h2><span class="u">POPULAR SCIENCE.</span></h2>
+
+<h3>KIRBY AND SPENCE'S ENTOMOLOGY, FOR POPULAR USE.</h3>
+
+<h4>AN INTRODUCTION TO ENTOMOLOGY,<br />
+<small>OR, ELEMENTS OF THE NATURAL HISTORY OF INSECTS; COMPRISING AN ACCOUNT<br />
+OF NOXIOUS AND USEFUL INSECTS, OF THEIR METAMORPHOSES,<br />
+FOOD, STRATAGEMS, HABITATIONS, SOCIETIES, MOTIONS,<br />
+NOISES, HYBERNATION, INSTINCT, &amp;c., &amp;c.</small><br />
+<br />
+With Plates, Plain or Colored.<br />
+<br />
+BY W. KIRBY, M.A., F.R.S., AND W. SPENCE, ESQ., F.R.S.<br />
+<small>FROM THE SIXTH LONDON EDITION, WHICH WAS CORRECTED AND MUCH ENLARGED.<br />
+<br />
+In one large octavo volume, extra cloth.</small></h4>
+
+<p>"We have been greatly interested in running over the pages of this
+treatise. There is scarcely, in the wide range of natural science, a
+more interesting or instructive study than that of insects, or one
+that is calculated to excite more curiosity or wonder.</p>
+
+<p>"The popular form of letters is adopted by the authors in imparting a
+knowledge of the subject, which renders the work peculiarly fitted for
+our district school libraries, which are open to all ages and
+classes."&mdash;<i>Hunt's Merchants' Magazine.</i></p>
+
+
+<hr style='width: 45%;' />
+<h3>JOHNSON AND LANDRETH ON FRUIT, KITCHEN, AND FLOWER GARDENING.</h3>
+
+<h4><big>A DICTIONARY OF MODERN GARDENING,</big><br />
+BY GEORGE WILLIAM JOHNSON, ESQ.<br />
+<small>Author of the "Principles of Practical Gardening," "The Gardener's
+Almanac," &amp;c.<br />
+WITH ONE HUNDRED AND EIGHTY WOOD-CUTS.</small><br />
+EDITED, WITH NUMEROUS ADDITIONS, BY DAVID LANDRETH, OF PHILADELPHIA.</h4>
+
+<p style='text-align:center'>In one large royal duodecimo volume, extra cloth, of nearly Six Hundred<br />
+and Fifty double columned Pages.</p>
+
+<p>This edition has been greatly altered from the original. Many articles
+of little interest to Americans have been curtailed or wholly omitted,
+and much new matter, with numerous illustrations, added, especially
+with respect to the varieties of fruit which experience has shown to
+be peculiarly adapted to our climate. Still, the editor admits that he
+has only followed in the path so admirably marked out by Mr. Johnson,
+to whom the chief merit of the work belongs. It has been an object
+with the editor and publishers to increase its popular character,
+thereby adapting it to the larger class of horticultural readers in
+this country, and they trust it will prove what they have desired it
+to be, an Encyclop&aelig;dia of Gardening, if not of Rural Affairs, so
+condensed and at such a price as to be within reach of nearly all whom
+those subjects interest.</p>
+
+<hr style='width: 45%;' />
+
+<h3>GRAHAME'S COLONIAL HISTORY.</h3>
+
+<h4><big>HISTORY OF THE UNITED STATES.</big><br />
+<small>FROM THE PLANTATION OF THE BRITISH COLONIES TILL
+THEIR ASSUMPTION OF INDEPENDENCE.<br />
+SECOND AMERICAN EDITION, ENLARGED AND AMENDED,</small><br />
+WITH A MEMOIR BY PRESIDENT QUINCY.<br />
+<small>IN TWO LARGE OCTAVO VOLUMES, EXTRA CLOTH, WITH A PORTRAIT.</small></h4>
+
+<p>This work having assumed the position of a standard history of this
+country, the publishers have been induced to issue an edition in
+smaller size and at a less cost, that its circulation may be
+commensurate with its merits. It is now considered as the most
+impartial and trustworthy history that has yet appeared.</p>
+
+<p>A few copies of the edition in four volumes, on extra fine thick
+paper, price eight dollars, may still be had by gentlemen desirous of
+procuring a beautiful work for their libraries.</p>
+
+
+<hr style='width: 45%;' />
+
+<h4><big>ANSTED'S ANCIENT WORLD.</big><br />
+<small>JUST ISSUED.</small></h4>
+
+<h3><big>THE ANCIENT WORLD, OR, PICTURESQUE SKETCHES OF CREATION,</big><br />
+BY D. T. ANSTED, M. A., F.R.S, F.G.S., &amp;c.<br />
+<small>PROFESSOR OF GEOLOGY, IN KING'S COLLEGE, LONDON.</small></h3>
+
+<p style='text-align:center'>In one very neat volume, fine extra cloth, with about One Hundred<br />
+and Fifty Illustrations.</p>
+
+<p>The object of this work is to present to the general reader the chief
+results of Geological investigation in a simple and comprehensive
+manner. The author has avoided all minute details of geological
+formations and particular observations, and has endeavoured as far as
+possible to present striking views of the wonderful results of the
+science, divested of its mere technicalities. The work is printed in a
+handsome manner, with numerous illustrations, and forms a neat volume
+for the centre table.</p>
+
+<p>"As a resume of what is at present known on the subject of fossil
+remains, it is worthy to be a companion to the author's 'Descriptive
+Geology,' a work of which we have spoken in the highest terms. This
+volume is illustrated in the style of all Van Voorst's Natural History
+works, and that is sufficient recommendation. Our extracts will convey
+a notion of the style of the work, which is, like all that Professor
+Ansted has written, clear and pointed.&mdash;<i>Athen&aelig;um.</i></p>
+
+
+<hr style='width: 45%;' />
+
+<h3><big>CHEMISTRY OF THE FOUR SEASONS,</big><br />
+SPRING, SUMMER, AUTUMN, AND WINTER.</h3>
+
+<h4>AN ESSAY, PRINCIPALLY CONCERNING NATURAL PHENOMENA, ADMITTING<br />
+OF INTERPRETATION BY CHEMICAL SCIENCE, AND<br />
+ILLUSTRATING PASSAGES OF SCRIPTURE.<br />
+<br />
+<big>BY THOMAS GRIFFITHS,</big><br />
+Professor of Chemistry in the Medical College of St. Bartholomew's Hospital, &amp;c.</h4>
+
+<p style='text-align:center'>In one large royal 12mo. volume, with many Wood-Cuts, extra cloth.</p>
+
+<p>"Chemistry is assuredly one of the most useful and interesting of the
+natural sciences. Chemical changes meet us at every step, and during
+every season, the winds and the rain, the heat and the frosts, each
+have their peculiar and appropriate phenomena. And those who have
+hitherto remained insensible to these changes and unmoved amid such
+remarkable, and often startling results, will lose their apathy upon
+reading the Chemistry of the 'Four Seasons,' and be prepared to enjoy
+the highest intellectual pleasures. Conceived in a happy spirit, and
+written with taste and elegance, the essay of Mr. Griffiths cannot
+fail to receive the admiration of cultivated minds; and those who have
+looked less carefully into nature's beauties, will find themselves led
+on step by step, until they realize a new intellectual being. Such
+works, we believe, exert a happy influence over society, and hence we
+hope that the present one may be extensively read."&mdash;<i>The Western
+Lancet.</i></p>
+
+
+<hr style='width: 45%;' />
+
+<h4><big>PHILOSOPHY IN SPORT, MADE SCIENCE IN EARNEST;</big><br />
+<br />
+BEING AN ATTEMPT TO ILLUSTRATE THE FIRST PRINCIPLES<br />
+OF NATURAL PHILOSOPHY, BY THE AID<br />
+OF THE POPULAR TOYS AND<br />
+SPORTS OF YOUTH.<br />
+<small>FROM THE SIXTH AND GREATLY IMPROVED LONDON EDITION.</small></h4>
+
+<p style='text-align:center'>In one very neat royal 18mo. volume, with nearly one hundred illustrations<br />
+on wood. Fine extra crimson cloth.</p>
+
+<p>"Messrs. Lea &amp; Blanchard have issued, in a beautiful manner, a
+handsome book, called 'Philosophy in Sport, made Science in Earnest.'
+This is an admirable attempt to illustrate the first principles of
+Natural Philosophy, by the aid of the popular toys and sports of
+youth. Useful information is conveyed in an easy, graceful, yet
+dignified manner, and rendered easy to the simplest understanding. The
+book is an admirable one, and must meet with universal favour."&mdash;<i>N.
+Y. Evening Mirror.</i></p>
+
+
+<hr style='width: 45%;' />
+
+<h3><big>ENDLESS AMUSEMENT.</big><br />
+<small>JUST ISSUED.</small></h3>
+
+<h4><big>ENDLESS AMUSEMENT,</big><br />
+<small>A COLLECTION OF</small><br />
+NEARLY FOUR HUNDRED ENTERTAINING EXPERIMENTS IN<br />
+VARIOUS BRANCHES OF SCIENCE,<br />
+<br />
+<small>INCLUDING</small><br />
+<br />
+ACOUSTICS, ARITHMETIC, CHEMISTRY, ELECTRICITY, HYDRAULICS, HYDROSTATICS,<br />
+MAGNETISM, MECHANICS, OPTICS, WONDERS OF<br />
+THE AIR PUMP, ALL THE POPULAR TRICKS AND<br />
+CHANGES OF THE CARDS, &amp;c., &amp;c.<br />
+<br />
+<small>TO WHICH IS ADDED,</small><br />
+<br />
+<big>A COMPLETE SYSTEM OF PYROTECHNY,</big><br />
+OR THE ART OF MAKING FIRE-WORKS:<br />
+<small>THE WHOLE SO CLEARLY EXPLAINED AS TO BE WITHIN REACH OF
+THE MOST LIMITED CAPACITY.</small><br />
+<br />
+WITH ILLUSTRATIONS.<br />
+<small>FROM THE SEVENTH LONDON EDITION.</small></h4>
+
+<p style='text-align:center'>In one neat royal 18mo. volume, fine extra crimson cloth.</p>
+
+<p>"It contains everything that can please the grave or the gay. It is
+'endless amusement,' and the publishers might have added, instruction.
+What a help to a dull gathering, or what an able adjunct to a
+children's party! It may be introduced to the scientific or to the
+family circle, and to each it will give instruction and pleasure. It
+is filled with illustrations. We shall give extracts from it
+occasionally."&mdash;<i>Lady's Book.</i></p>
+
+
+<hr style='width: 65%;' />
+
+<h5>SOMERVILLE'S PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY.</h5>
+
+<h4><big>PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY.</big><br />
+<br />
+BY MARY SOMERVILLE.<br />
+<br />
+<small>AUTHOR OF "CONNECTION OF THE PHYSICAL SCIENCES," ETC.</small></h4>
+
+<p style='text-align:center'><i>In one neat royal 12mo. volume, extra cloth.</i></p>
+
+<div class="blockquot"><p>CONTENTS.&mdash;Geology&mdash;Form of the Great Continent&mdash;Highlands of the
+Great Continent&mdash;Mountain Systems of the Great
+Continent&mdash;Africa&mdash;American Continent&mdash;Low Lands of South
+America&mdash;Central America&mdash;North America&mdash;Greenland&mdash;Australia&mdash;The
+Ocean&mdash;Springs&mdash;European Rivers&mdash;African Rivers&mdash;Asiatic Rivers&mdash;River
+Systems of North America&mdash;Rivers of South America&mdash;Lakes&mdash;The
+Atmosphere&mdash;Vegetation&mdash;Vegetation of the Great Continent&mdash;Flora of
+Tropical Asia&mdash;African Flora&mdash;Australian Flora&mdash;American
+Vegetation&mdash;Distribution of Insects&mdash;Distribution of
+Fishes&mdash;Distribution of Reptiles&mdash;Distribution of Birds&mdash;Distribution
+of Mammalia&mdash;Distribution, Conditions and Future Prospects of the
+Human Race.</p></div>
+
+<p>While reading this work we could not help thinking how interesting, as
+well as useful, geography as a branch of education might be made in
+our schools. In many of them, however, this is not accomplished. It is
+to be hoped that this defect will be remedied; and that in all our
+educational institutions Geography will soon be taught in the proper
+way. Mrs. Somerville's work may, in this respect, be pointed to as a
+model.&mdash;<i>Tait's Edinburgh Magazine</i>, September, 1848.</p>
+
+<hr style='width: 45%;' />
+
+<h4><big>READINGS FOR THE YOUNG.</big><br />
+<br />
+FROM THE WORKS OF SIR WALTER SCOTT.</h4>
+
+<p style='text-align:center'><i>In two very handsome 18mo. volumes, with beautiful plates, done up in
+crimson extra cloth.</i></p>
+
+<p>Messrs. Lea &amp; Blanchard deserve the thanks of all the little people in
+the land for these delightful volumes, which are as agreeable to read as
+they are attractive in appearance.&mdash;<i>N. Y. Literary World.</i></p>
+
+<hr style='width: 45%;' />
+
+<h4><big>TALES AND STORIES FROM HISTORY.</big><br />
+<br />
+BY AGNES STRICKLAND,<br />
+<br />
+<small>AUTHOR OF "LIVES OF THE QUEENS OF ENGLAND," ETC.</small></h4>
+
+<p style='text-align:center'><i>In one handsome royal 18mo. volume, crimson extra cloth, with
+illustrations.</i><br />
+</p>
+
+<p>In these pretty tales from the legendary and authentic history of
+England and Continental Europe, Miss Strickland has hit a happy mean
+in presenting to the mind of youth, fact in its most fascinating, and
+fiction in its least objectionable garb. It is a little work which
+will be dog's eared, and pored over with absorbing interest by the
+school-boy.&mdash;<i>Balt. Patriot.</i></p>
+
+<hr style='width: 45%;' />
+
+<p>The above works will be found admirable reading books for schools.&mdash;Lea
+&amp; Blanchard also publish the following, which are suitable to advanced
+classes.</p>
+
+<div class="blockquot"><p>A POPULAR TREATISE ON VEGETABLE PHYSIOLOGY. By
+W. B. Carpenter, M. D. In one royal 12mo. volume, with wood-cuts.</p>
+
+<p>THE ANCIENT WORLD; OR, PICTURESQUE SKETCHES OF
+CREATION. By D. T. Ansted, M. A., F. R. S., F. G. S. In one royal
+12mo. volume, with 150 wood-cuts.</p>
+
+<p>THE CHEMISTRY OF THE FOUR SEASONS, SPRING, SUMMER,
+AUTUMN AND WINTER; an Essay principally concerning Natural
+Phenomena admitting of interpretation by Chemical Science, and
+illustrating passages of Scripture. By Thomas Griffiths. In one large
+royal 12mo. volume, with 60 wood-cuts.</p></div><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_217" id="Page_217">[Pg 217]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+
+<hr style='width: 65%;' />
+
+<h3>BOY'S TREASURY OF SPORTS.</h3>
+<h5><big>THE BOY'S TREASURY OF SPORTS, PASTIMES<br />
+AND RECREATIONS.</big><br />
+<br />
+WITH FOUR HUNDRED ILLUSTRATIONS.<br />
+<br />
+BY SAMUEL WILLIAMS.<br />
+<br />
+<small>IS NOW READY.</small></h5>
+
+<p style='text-align:center'>In one very neat volume, bound in extra crimson cloth; handsomely printed<br />
+and illustrated with engravings in the first style of art, and<br />
+containing about six hundred and fifty articles.<br />
+A present for all seasons.</p>
+
+<h4>PREFACE.</h4>
+
+<p>This Illustrated Manual of "Sports, Pastimes, and Recreations," has
+been prepared with especial regard to the Health, Exercise, and
+Rational Enjoyment of the young readers to whom it is addressed.</p>
+
+<p>Every variety of commendable Recreation will be found in the following
+pages. First, you have the little Toys of the Nursery; the Tops and
+Marbles of the Play-ground; and the Balls of the Play-room, or the
+smooth Lawn.</p>
+
+<p>Then, you have a number of Pastimes that serve to gladden the
+fireside; to light up many faces right joyfully, and make the parlour
+re-echo with mirth.</p>
+
+<p>Next, come the Exercising Sports of the Field, the Green, and the
+Play-ground; followed by the noble and truly English game of Cricket.</p>
+
+<p>Gymnastics are next admitted; then, the delightful recreation of
+Swimming; and the healthful sport of Skating.</p>
+
+<p>Archery, once the pride of England, is then detailed; and very
+properly followed by Instructions in the graceful accomplishment of
+Fencing, and the manly and enlivening exercise of Riding.</p>
+
+<p>Angling, the pastime of childhood, boyhood, manhood, and old age, is
+next described; and by attention to the instructions here laid down,
+the lad with a stick and a string may soon become an expert Angler.</p>
+
+<p>Keeping Animals is a favourite pursuit of boyhood. Accordingly, we
+have described how to rear the Rabbit, the Squirrel, the Dormouse, the
+Guinea Pig, the Pigeon, and the Silkworm. A long chapter is adapted to
+the rearing of Song Birds; the several varieties of which, and their
+respective cages, are next described. And here we may hint, that
+kindness to Animals invariably denotes an excellent disposition: for,
+to pet a little creature one hour, and to treat it harshly the next,
+marks a capricious if not a cruel temper. Humanity is a jewel, which
+every boy should be proud to wear in his breast.</p>
+
+<p>We now approach the more sedate amusements&mdash;as Draughts and Chess: two
+of the noblest exercises of the ingenuity of the human mind. Dominoes
+and Bagatelle follow. With a knowledge of these four games, who would
+pass a dull hour in the dreariest day of winter; or who would sit idly
+by the fire?</p>
+
+<p>Amusements in Arithmetic, harmless Legerdemain, or sleight-of-hand,
+and Tricks with Cards, will delight many a family circle, when the
+business of the day is over, and the book is laid aside.</p>
+
+<p>Although the present volume is a book of amusements, Science has not
+been excluded from its pages. And why should it be? when Science is as
+entertaining as a fairy tale. The changes we read of in little
+nursery-books are not more amusing than the changes in Chemistry,
+Optics, Electricity, Magnetism, &amp;c. By understanding these, you may
+almost become a little Magician.</p>
+
+<p>Toy Balloons and Paper Fireworks, (or Fireworks <i>without</i> Fire,) come
+next. Then follow Instructions for Modelling in Card-Board; so that
+you may build for yourself a palace or a carriage, and, in short, make
+for yourself a little paper world.</p>
+
+<p>Puzzles and Paradoxes, Enigmas and Riddles, and Talking with the
+Fingers, next make up plenty of exercise for "Guess," and "Guess
+again." And as you have the "Keys" in your own hand, you may keep your
+friends in suspense, and make yourself as mysterious as the Sphynx.</p>
+
+<p>A chapter of Miscellanies&mdash;useful and amusing secrets&mdash;winds up the
+volume.</p>
+
+<p>The "Treasury" contains upwards of four hundred Engravings; so that it
+is not only a collection of "secrets worth knowing," but it is a book
+of pictures, as full of prints as a Christmas pudding is of plums.</p>
+
+<p>It may be as well to mention that the "Treasury" holds many new games
+that have never before been printed in a book of this kind. The old
+games have been described afresh. Thus it is, altogether, a new book.</p>
+
+<p>And now we take leave, wishing you many hours, and days, and weeks of
+enjoyment over these pages; and we hope that you may be as happy as
+this book is brimful of amusement.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style='width: 65%;' />
+
+<h2>TRANSCRIBER'S NOTES</h2>
+
+<div class="blockquot"><p>1. Images have been moved from the middle of a paragraph to the
+closest paragraph break.<br />
+<br />
+2. The following misprints have been corrected:<br />
+&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; "umlimited" corrected to "unlimited" (page 67)<br />
+&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; "immerged" corrected to "immersed" (page 124)<br />
+&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; "shil ing" corrected to "shilling" (page 133)<br />
+&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; "where-ever" corrected to "wherever" (page 148)<br />
+&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; "sttll" corrected to "still" (page 149)<br />
+&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; "mattrasses" corrected to "mattresses" (page 156)<br />
+<br />
+3. Other than the corrections listed above, printer's inconsistencies
+in spelling, punctuation, and hyphenation, have been retained.</p></div>
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+<pre>
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Endless Amusement, by Unknown
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK ENDLESS AMUSEMENT ***
+
+***** This file should be named 32492-h.htm or 32492-h.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+ http://www.gutenberg.org/3/2/4/9/32492/
+
+Produced by Chris Curnow and the Online Distributed
+Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This file was
+produced from images generously made available by The
+Internet Archive)
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+http://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
+paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works. See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+ the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+ you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is
+ owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+ has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+ Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments
+ must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+ prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+ returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+ sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+ address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+ the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+ you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+ does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+ License. You must require such a user to return or
+ destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+ and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+ Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+ money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+ electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+ of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+ distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at http://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+ Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+ Chief Executive and Director
+ gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit http://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+ http://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
+
+</pre>
+
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/32492-h/images/i_001.jpg b/32492-h/images/i_001.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..42a05bd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/32492-h/images/i_001.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/32492-h/images/i_002.jpg b/32492-h/images/i_002.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1965060
--- /dev/null
+++ b/32492-h/images/i_002.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/32492-h/images/i_003.jpg b/32492-h/images/i_003.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d8912da
--- /dev/null
+++ b/32492-h/images/i_003.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/32492-h/images/i_004.jpg b/32492-h/images/i_004.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c22a3ed
--- /dev/null
+++ b/32492-h/images/i_004.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/32492-h/images/i_005.jpg b/32492-h/images/i_005.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6b3aacf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/32492-h/images/i_005.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/32492-h/images/i_006.jpg b/32492-h/images/i_006.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6014e03
--- /dev/null
+++ b/32492-h/images/i_006.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/32492-h/images/i_007.jpg b/32492-h/images/i_007.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6660dc4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/32492-h/images/i_007.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/32492-h/images/i_008.jpg b/32492-h/images/i_008.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fedbd17
--- /dev/null
+++ b/32492-h/images/i_008.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/32492-h/images/i_009.jpg b/32492-h/images/i_009.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c2a33ea
--- /dev/null
+++ b/32492-h/images/i_009.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/32492-h/images/i_010.jpg b/32492-h/images/i_010.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f60288e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/32492-h/images/i_010.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/32492-h/images/i_011_a.jpg b/32492-h/images/i_011_a.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9a8fca0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/32492-h/images/i_011_a.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/32492-h/images/i_011_b.jpg b/32492-h/images/i_011_b.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fe6973c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/32492-h/images/i_011_b.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/32492-h/images/i_012.jpg b/32492-h/images/i_012.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c4977aa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/32492-h/images/i_012.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/32492-h/images/i_013.jpg b/32492-h/images/i_013.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2e3b1bf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/32492-h/images/i_013.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/32492-h/images/i_014.jpg b/32492-h/images/i_014.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..94277c4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/32492-h/images/i_014.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/32492-h/images/i_015_a.jpg b/32492-h/images/i_015_a.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7c0ae94
--- /dev/null
+++ b/32492-h/images/i_015_a.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/32492-h/images/i_015_b.jpg b/32492-h/images/i_015_b.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1a6729b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/32492-h/images/i_015_b.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/32492-h/images/i_016.jpg b/32492-h/images/i_016.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..92b876e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/32492-h/images/i_016.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/32492-h/images/i_017.jpg b/32492-h/images/i_017.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..74251af
--- /dev/null
+++ b/32492-h/images/i_017.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/32492-h/images/i_018.jpg b/32492-h/images/i_018.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a581829
--- /dev/null
+++ b/32492-h/images/i_018.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/32492-h/images/i_019.jpg b/32492-h/images/i_019.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..13d91df
--- /dev/null
+++ b/32492-h/images/i_019.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/32492-h/images/i_020.jpg b/32492-h/images/i_020.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0870d70
--- /dev/null
+++ b/32492-h/images/i_020.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/32492-h/images/i_021.jpg b/32492-h/images/i_021.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..468f91d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/32492-h/images/i_021.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/32492-h/images/i_022.jpg b/32492-h/images/i_022.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2c5189a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/32492-h/images/i_022.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/32492-h/images/i_023.jpg b/32492-h/images/i_023.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6aa13c3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/32492-h/images/i_023.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/32492-h/images/i_024.jpg b/32492-h/images/i_024.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..97b9c5f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/32492-h/images/i_024.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/32492-h/images/i_025.jpg b/32492-h/images/i_025.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f41dc1c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/32492-h/images/i_025.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/32492-h/images/i_026.jpg b/32492-h/images/i_026.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..930a831
--- /dev/null
+++ b/32492-h/images/i_026.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/32492-h/images/i_164.png b/32492-h/images/i_164.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..acb7883
--- /dev/null
+++ b/32492-h/images/i_164.png
Binary files differ
diff --git a/32492.txt b/32492.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8a388fc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/32492.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,9987 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of Endless Amusement, by Unknown
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: Endless Amusement
+ A Collection of Nearly 400 Entertaining Experiments
+
+Author: Unknown
+
+Release Date: May 23, 2010 [EBook #32492]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ASCII
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK ENDLESS AMUSEMENT ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Chris Curnow and the Online Distributed
+Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This file was
+produced from images generously made available by The
+Internet Archive)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ ENDLESS AMUSEMENT:
+
+ A COLLECTION OF
+ NEARLY 400 ENTERTAINING EXPERIMENTS
+
+ IN VARIOUS BRANCHES OF SCIENCE;
+
+ INCLUDING
+
+ ACOUSTICS, ELECTRICITY, MAGNETISM,
+ ARITHMETIC, HYDRAULICS, MECHANICS,
+ CHEMISTRY, HYDROSTATICS, OPTICS;
+
+ WONDERS OF THE AIR-PUMP;
+
+ ALL THE
+ POPULAR TRICKS AND CHANGES OF THE CARDS,
+ &c., &c.
+
+ TO WHICH IS ADDED,
+ A COMPLETE SYSTEM OF PYROTECHNY;
+
+ OR,
+ THE ART OF MAKING FIRE-WORKS.
+
+ THE WHOLE SO CLEARLY EXPLAINED AS TO BE WITHIN THE
+ REACH OF THE MOST LIMITED CAPACITY.
+
+ With Illustrations.
+
+ FROM THE SEVENTH LONDON EDITION.
+
+ PHILADELPHIA:
+ LEA AND BLANCHARD.
+ 1847.
+
+
+
+
+CONTENTS.
+
+
+ Page
+ Aces, the convertible 117
+ AEolipiles 60
+ Aigrettes 185
+ Air-pump 77
+ bottles broken by 77
+ glass broken by 77
+ hand fixed by 77
+ water boiled by 78
+ bubbles, vegetable 78
+ electrified 98
+ Alarum 147
+ Alphabet, changes of, in square Yards 59
+ Apparition, armed 126
+ Atmosphere, to show the Pressure of 137
+ Aurora Borealis, electric 91
+
+ Bacchus, animated 81
+ Ball, electrified 97
+ electric 99
+ Balloon, artificial 81
+ electric 96
+ Cases in Fire-works 184
+ Balloons, Paper, to construct 42
+ in Fire-works, to load with Stars, Serpents, &c. 184
+ Balls, dancing 93
+ Barley, the Awn of, an Hydrometer 157
+ Bell, magic 79
+ Bladder, exploded 80
+ cemented 81
+ Blue, to change to White 35
+ Bodies, two inodorous, become pungent by Mixture 145
+ Body, combustible, to ignite by reflection 57
+ Bottle, magic 48
+ enchanted 59
+ Bronzing, the Art of 133
+ Bubble, exploding 13
+ Bubbles, aerial 78
+ Burning-glasses, account of two 32
+ Busts, talking 61
+ Butterflies, to take Impressions of on Paper 134
+
+ Cameleon Spirit 23
+ Camera Obscura, to construct 16
+ Camphor, electrified 100
+ Candle lighted by electricity 84
+ Bombs 84
+ Card, divining 107
+ numerical 108
+ hit upon by guess 109
+ found by the Point of a Sword 109
+ changed by Word of Command 109
+ in the Ring 112
+ in the Mirror 113
+ in the Opera-glass 113
+ discovered by the throw of a Die 115
+ under the Handkerchief 117
+ to tell that a person has touched 117
+ in the Pocket-book 118
+ in the Egg 118
+ discovered by the Touch or Smell 119
+ Cards, magnetic 71
+ Amusements with 101
+ Points on three, to name, &c. 101
+ to tell how many taken from a Pack 102
+ to name several fixed on 104
+ to name the Rank of, drawn from a Piquet Pack 104
+ to tell the Numbers of any two 105
+ three 106
+ four confederate 108
+ to separate the two Colours of a Pack of, at one Cut 114
+ metamorphosed 114
+ Number of, told by their Weight 116
+ to change, that several persons have drawn from the
+ Pack 116
+ inverted 119
+ transmutable 119
+ convertible 120
+ Cascade, magical 50
+ musical 148
+ of fire, to represent 151
+ Cement, never-yielding 37
+ Changes on twelve Bells 58
+ Charcoal for Fire-works 164
+ Chase, magic 88
+ Coins, to take impressions of 44
+ Compositions for Fire-works, method of mixing 168
+ Concerto, solar 62
+ Cork heavier than Lead 81
+ Correspondence, secret 18, 25
+ by music 20
+ Coruscations, artificial 136
+ Cotton electrified 92
+ Crackers, to make 169
+ Cylinder, illuminated 91
+
+ Dance, magic 86
+ Dancer, hydraulic 49
+ Detonating works 190
+ Girdle 190
+ Balls 191
+ Tape 191
+ Cards 191
+ Dial, magnetic 71
+ Dodecahedron in Fire-works 187
+ Duplicates, ten 102
+
+ Earthquake, artificial 22, 86, 187
+ Eclipse of the Sun, to observe 129
+ Egg, to form Figures on, in Relief 35
+ Eggs, white of, contains an Alkali 144
+ Electric effects of a Russian climate 30
+ Electricity, experiments in 83
+ Resin lighted by 95
+ Spirits ignited by 95
+ Eolian Harp, to make 137
+ Exhalations, subaqueous 137
+ Explosion, brilliant, under Water 54
+ Explosion, magical 86
+ electric 98
+
+ Feather, animated 83
+ Feathers heavier than Lead 79
+ Figures, two, one blows out, and the other re-lights a Candle 39
+ Fire produced by the mixture of two cold Liquids 13
+ from Cane 136
+ Fire-pumps in Fire-works 186
+ Fire-works in miniature 27
+ imitative 149
+ Art of making 163
+ aquatic 192
+ Flash of Lightning, to resemble on entering a Room 37
+ Flower, to produce the Appearance of, from its Ashes 149
+ Flowers, restored 26
+ to diversify the Colours of 141
+ Fountain, fiery 44
+ globular 48
+ illuminated 51
+ which acts by the Heat of the Sun 52
+ magic 80
+ electrical 87
+ Fountains, Chinese, in Fire-works 187
+ Fruit, withered, restored 78
+ Fulminating Powders 33
+ more powerful 34
+ Gold 40
+ Mercury 54
+
+ Gas Bubbles, exploding 160
+ Ghastly Appearance, to give to Persons in a Room 35
+ Glass, so to fill with Water that it cannot be removed without
+ spilling the whole 38
+ Gold Chain, old, to make look like new 43
+ to give Silver the Colour of 43
+ Guinea, penetrative 132
+ Gunpowder 165
+ exploded by reflection 125
+ Brimstone and Charcoal, to meal for Fire-works 165
+
+ Halo, artificial 80
+ Horn, to make Moulds of 134
+ to soften 134
+ Hour of the Day or Night told by a suspended Shilling 152
+ Hydrogen Gas, to procure 159
+ to fill a Bladder with 159
+
+ Illuminations, artificial 22
+ chemical 36
+ Illusion, alternate 146
+ Incendiary, unconscious 88
+ Indromacus 103
+ Ink, invisible 23
+ Gold, Silver, Yellow, Red, Green, Violet,
+ and Grey 24, 25
+ secret Correspondence by Means of 25
+ golden 41
+ white 42
+ Iron, transformed into Copper 36
+ Silver 36
+ melted in a Moment and run into Drops 37
+ or Steel, to soften 135
+ Ivory, to cast Figures in Imitation of 134
+
+ Kings, the four inseparable 116
+ Kite, electric 87
+
+ Lamp to burn twelve Months without replenishing 29
+ Chronometer 46
+ Landscape, artificial 66
+ to draw correctly 67
+ Lead, metallic, produced from the Powder 141
+ Leech, a Prognosticator of Weather 157
+ Leyden Phial 94
+ Light, rays of 143
+ refraction of 144
+ travelling of 145
+ Lightning, artificial 14
+ its wonderful Nature 144
+ to guard against 153
+ Liquor that shines in the Dark 40
+ luminous 41
+ Luminaries, miraculous 89
+
+ Magic Lantern, Experiment with the 62
+ Glasses to paint 63
+ solar 60
+ Magnetism, Experiments in 70
+ Memory, artificial 158
+ Microscope, Experiment for the 145
+ Mirror, Magician's 124
+ perspective 124
+ distorting 126
+ oracular 152
+ Mirrors, magical 53
+ deforming 123
+ igniting 125
+ Money augmented by optical Illusion 15
+ melted in a Walnut-shell 40
+ Mortars, in Fire-works 184
+
+ Neptune in his Chariot 198
+ Number, to tell any, privately fixed on 45
+ without asking questions 45
+ divisible by 9, &c. 55
+ Numbers, to find the difference of two, &c. 56
+
+ Objects, three, discernible only with both Eyes 15
+ Oil upon Water, and Water upon Oil, curious Effects of 161
+ and Water, Experiments with 161
+ Opaque Bodies, seemingly transparent 121
+ Box made transparent 130
+ Opera-glass, diagonal 129
+ Oracle, inanimate 61
+ Orrery, magnetic 72
+ electrical 92, 99
+
+ Palace, enchanted 120
+ Parties, three magical 110
+ Paradox, dioptrical 127
+ Pass, how to make the 107
+ Perspective-glass, divining 111
+ Phantom 126
+ Phial of the four Elements 48
+ Philosophical Candle 37
+ Phosphorus Match Bottles 34
+ inflammable 53
+ Phosphorus, illuminated 97
+ Picture, magic 13
+ Pictures of Birds, to make, with their natural Feathers 132
+ Pieces, transposable 131
+ Plants, remarkable Properties in 138
+ Plaster of Paris cast, to take from a Person's Face 135
+ Pomatum, to make, with Wax and Water 36
+ Portrait, miraculous 85
+ Powder, which catches Fire when exposed to the Air 39
+ Prints, to remove Stains from 38
+ Prospect, boundless 57
+ Prospects, illuminated 68
+ Pyrotechny, a complete system of 163
+
+ Rain and Hail, artificial 28
+ Gauge, to make 142
+ Rainbow, artificial 60
+ Reflector, magnifying 16
+ Ring, to suspend by a Thread after the Thread has been burnt 35
+ on the Finger, to name, &c. 49
+ Roman Candles, in Fire-works 186
+ Rocket Stars 173
+ to fix one on the Top of another 174
+ Rockets 170
+ Method of rolling 170
+ Composition for 171
+ to drive 171
+ Decorations for 172
+ Caduceous 175
+ Honorary 175
+ which form an arch in rising 176
+ to make several rise together 176
+ to fix several on the same Stick 177
+ to fire without Sticks 178
+ Scrolls for 179
+ Stands for 179
+ Table 179
+ Water 192
+ Rose, changeable 41
+ Resin lighted by Electricity 95
+
+ Salt, exploding 127
+ Saltpetre for Fire-works 164
+ Saltpetre, to pulverize for Fire-works 164
+ Sealing-wax spun into Threads by Electricity 100
+ Sea-fight, &c. in Aquatic Fire-works 196
+ Serpents, for Fire-works, to make 169
+ Shillings, a Person having an even number of in one Hand, and
+ an odd Number in the other, to tell in which Hand the
+ odd or even Number is 17
+ Shock, inconceivable 88
+ Shower, mercurial 80
+ fiery 90
+ Silver-plate, to give a Lustre to 44
+ extracted from a gilded Ring 135
+ Sky-rockets 170
+ to fire under Water 198
+ Sound, travelling of 141, 142
+ Sparks, electric 93
+ in choked Cases 167
+ Sparrows, Experiments with 82
+ Spectre on the Table 64
+ Spider, artificial 84
+ Spirit, Cameleon 23
+ Spots in the Sun's Disk, to show 128
+ Spur-fire 166
+ Square Yards, to contain the Changes of the Alphabet 59
+ Squares, Magic 55
+ Squibs, to make 169
+ Stars, with Points, in Fire-works 188
+ Steam, Power of 31
+ Steel or Iron, to soften 135
+ Stone, floating 78
+ Storm at Sea, to represent by the Magic Lantern 63
+ Sulphur for Fire-works 163
+ Sun, fixed, with a transparent Face 189
+ Sun's Rays, Effects of, on different coloured Cloths 146
+ Swans and Ducks in Aquatic Fire-works 199
+
+ Tantalus, Cup of 85
+ Thunder, artificial 14, 15
+ Touch-paper, to make 167
+ Transcolorations, curious 29, 30
+ Transmutations, magical 35
+ Travelling of Sound 141, 142
+ Light 145
+ Tree, Silver 27
+ Tree, Lead 27
+ Iron 55
+ sublimated 139
+ Tube, Magic 123
+ Tulip, Experiment with 140
+
+ Vacuum, illuminated 90
+ Vase, Magic 110
+ Vessel, Magic 21
+ that lets Water out of the Bottom as soon as the
+ Mouth is uncorked 39
+ Verse, Magic 74
+ Viper, Experiment with 82
+ Visual Nerves, singular Impression on, by a luminous Object 160
+ by looking through
+ differently-coloured Glasses 161
+ Volcano, artificial 22
+
+ Wand, magnetic 70
+ mercurial 79
+ Watch Dial, to tell by one the Hour when a Person intends
+ to rise 17
+ mysterious 70
+ Lamp 140
+ Water gilding on Silver 43
+ which gives Silver a Gold Colour 43
+ to give any Metal a Gold Colour 43, 44
+ Sun 50
+ illuminated 96
+ colder than Ice 127
+ Experiment with a Glass of 135
+ beautifully transparent 142
+ Power of 143
+ in Steam 158
+ Pressure of 143
+ Mass of, contained in the Sea 145
+ Rockets 192
+ Wheels, horizontal 193
+ Pipes in Fire-works 193
+ Mines 194
+ Fire Globes 194
+ Balloons, odoriferous 195
+ Fire Fountains 200
+ Weather, to foretel 140
+ Table 162
+ Wheels, self-moving 79, 94
+ in Fire-works 180
+ single vertical 180
+ horizontal 181
+ plural 182
+ spiral 182
+ Balloon 183
+ double spiral 183
+ illuminated spiral 183
+ Winter, changed to Spring 26
+ Writing, mysterious 26
+ illuminated 28
+ burnt, restored 129
+ in the Dark, to make luminous 139
+ on Glass by the Rays of the Sun 148
+
+
+
+
+ENDLESS
+AMUSEMENT.
+
+
+_To produce Fire by the Mixture of two cold Liquids._
+
+Take half a pound of pure dry nitrate, in powder; put it into a retort
+that is quite dry; add an equal quantity of highly rectified oil of
+vitriol, and, distilling the mixture in a moderate sand heat, it will
+produce a liquor like a yellowish fume; this, when caught in a dry
+receiver, is _Glauber's Spirits of Nitre_; probably the preparation,
+under that name, may be obtained of the chemists, which will of course
+save much time and trouble.
+
+You then put a drachm of distilled oil of cloves, turpentine, or
+carraways, in a glass vessel; and if you add an equal quantity, or
+rather more, of the above spirit, though both are in themselves
+perfectly cold, yet, on mixing them together, a great flame will arise
+and destroy them both, leaving only a little resinous matter at the
+bottom.
+
+
+_The Exploding Bubble._
+
+If you take up a small quantity of melted glass with a tube, (the bowl
+of a common tobacco-pipe will do,) and let a drop fall into a vessel
+of water, it will chill and condense with a fine spiral tail, which
+being broken, the whole substance will burst with a loud explosion,
+without injury either to the party that holds it, or him that breaks
+it; but if the _thick_ end be struck, even with a hammer, it will not
+break.
+
+
+_The Magic Picture._
+
+Take two level pieces of glass, (plate glass is the best,) about three
+inches long and four wide, exactly of the same size; lay one on the
+other, and leave a space between them by pasting a piece of card, or
+two or three small pieces of thick paper, at each corner.
+
+Join these glasses together at the edges by a composition of lime
+slaked by exposure to the air, and white of an egg. Cover all the
+edges of these glasses with parchment or bladder, except at one end,
+which is to be left open to admit the following composition.
+
+Dissolve, by a slow fire, six ounces of hogs'-lard, with half an ounce
+of white wax; to which you may add an ounce of clear linseed oil.
+
+This must be poured in a liquid state, and before a fire, between the
+glasses, by the space left in the sides, and which you are then to
+close up. Wipe the glasses clean, and hold them before the fire, to
+see that the composition will not run out at any part.
+
+Then fasten with gum a picture or print, painted on very thin paper,
+with its face to one of the glasses, and, if you like, you may fix the
+whole in a frame.
+
+While the mixture between the glasses is cold, the picture will be
+quite concealed, but become transparent when held to the fire; and, as
+the composition cools, it will gradually disappear.
+
+
+_Artificial Lightning._
+
+Provide a tin tube that is larger at one end than it is at the other,
+and in which there are several holes. Fill this tube with powdered
+resin; and when it is shook over the flame of a torch, the reflection
+will produce the exact appearance of lightning.
+
+
+_Artificial Thunder._
+
+Mix two drachms of the filings of iron, with one ounce of concentrated
+spirit of vitriol, in a strong bottle that holds about a quarter of a
+pint; stop it close, and in a few minutes shake the bottle; then
+taking out the cork, put a lighted candle near its mouth, which should
+be a little inclined, and you will soon observe an inflammation arise
+from the bottle, attended with a loud explosion.
+
+To guard against the danger of the bottle bursting, the best way would
+be to bury it in the ground, and apply the light to the mouth by means
+of a taper fastened to the end of a long stick.
+
+
+_Another way._
+
+Mix three ounces of saltpetre, two ounces of salt of tartar, and two
+ounces of sulphur; roll the mixture up into a ball, of which take a
+quantity, about the size of a hazel-nut, and, placing it in a ladle or
+shovel over the fire, the explosion will resemble a loud clap of
+thunder.
+
+You will produce a much more violent commotion if you double or treble
+the quantity of the last experiment; suppose you put two or three
+ounces of the mixture into the shovel. For fear of accidents, it
+should not be done in the house, but by placing the shovel over a
+chafing-dish of very hot coals, in the open air, standing a great
+distance off.
+
+Common prudence will dictate the necessity of using great care in the
+above experiments, as an accident will soon happen if a person does
+not get out of the way before the composition explodes.
+
+
+_Money augmented by an Optical Illusion._
+
+In a large drinking-glass of a conical shape, (small at the bottom and
+wide at the top,) put a shilling, and let the glass be half full of
+water; then place a plate on the top of it, and turn it quickly over,
+that the water may not escape. You will see on the plate a piece of
+coin of the size of half-a-crown; and a little higher up another the
+size of a shilling.
+
+It will add to the amusement this experiment affords, by giving the
+glass to any one in company, (but who, of course, has not witnessed
+your operations,) and, desiring him to throw away the water, but save
+the pieces, he will not be a little surprised at finding only one.
+
+
+_Three objects discernible only with both Eyes._
+
+If you fix three pieces of paper against the wall of a room at equal
+distances, at the height of your eye, placing yourself directly before
+them, at a few yards' distance, and close your right eye, and look at
+them with your left, you will see only two of them, suppose the first
+and second; alter the position of your eye, and you will see the first
+and third: alter your position a second time, you will see the second
+and third, but never the whole three together; by which it appears,
+that a person who has only one eye can never see three objects placed
+in this position, nor all the parts of one object of the same extent,
+without altering his situation.
+
+
+_To construct the Camera Obscura._
+
+Make a circular hole in the shutter of a window, from whence there is
+a prospect of some distance; in this hole place a magnifying glass,
+either double or single, whose focus is at the distance of five or six
+feet; no light must enter the room but through this glass. At a
+distance from it, equal to its focus, place a very white pasteboard,
+(what is called a Bristol board, if you can procure one large enough,
+will answer extremely well;) this board must be two feet and a half
+long, and eighteen or twenty inches high, with a black border round
+it: bend the length of it inward to the form of part of a circle,
+whose diameter is equal to double the focal distance of the glass. Fix
+it on a frame of the same figure, and put it on a moveable foot, that
+it may be easily placed at that distance from the glass, where the
+objects appear to the greatest perfection. When it is thus placed, all
+the objects in front of the window will be painted on the paper in an
+inverted position, with the greatest regularity, and in the most
+natural colours. If you place a swing looking-glass outside the
+window, by turning it more or less, you will have on the paper all the
+objects on each side the window.
+
+If, instead of placing the looking-glass outside the window, you place
+it in the room above the hole, (which must then be made near the top
+of the shutter,) you may have the representation on a paper placed
+horizontally on a table, and draw at your leisure all the objects
+reflected.
+
+Observe, the best situation is directly north; and the best time of
+the day is noon.
+
+
+_The Magnifying Reflector._
+
+Let the rays of light that pass through the magnifying glass in the
+shutter be thrown on a large concave mirror, properly fixed in a
+frame. Then take a third strip of glass, and stick any small object on
+it; hold it in the intervening rays at a little more than the focal
+distance from the mirror, and you will see on the opposite wall,
+amidst the reflected rays, the image of that object, very large, and
+beautifully clear and bright.
+
+
+_To tell by a Watch Dial the Hour when a Person intends to rise._
+
+The person is told to set the hand of his watch at any hour he
+pleases, which hour he tells you; and you add in your mind 12 to it.
+You then desire him to count privately the number of that addition on
+the dial, commencing at the next hour to that at which he intends to
+rise, and including the hour at which he has placed the hand, which
+will give the answer: for example.
+
+A intends to rise at 6, (this he conceals to himself;) he places the
+hand at 8, which he tells B, who, in his own mind, adds 12 to 8, which
+makes twenty. B then tells A to count twenty on the dial, beginning at
+the next hour to that at which he proposes to rise, which will be 5,
+and counting backwards, reckoning each hour as one, and including in
+his addition the number of the hour the hand is placed at, the
+addition will end at 6, which is the hour proposed; thus,
+
+ The hour the hand is placed at is 8
+ The next hour to that which A intends to rise at is 5, which
+ counts for 1
+ Count back the hours from 5, and reckon them at 1 each, there
+ will be 11 hours, viz., 4, 3, 2, 1, 12, 11, 10, 9, 8, 7, 6 11
+ ----
+ Making 20
+
+
+_A person having an even Number of Shillings in one Hand, and an odd
+Number in the other, to tell in which hand the odd or even Number is._
+
+You desire the person to multiply the number in his right hand by an
+odd figure, and the number in his left by an even one; and tell you if
+the products, added together, be odd or even. If even, the even number
+is in the right hand; if odd, the even number is in the left. For
+instance,
+
+ I. Number in the right In the left hand _odd_ 7
+ hand is _even_ 18 Multiply by 2
+ Multiply by 3 ----
+ ---- Product 14
+ Product 54 ----
+ Add the Product of
+ the left hand 14
+ ----
+ Which produces a
+ total of 68
+
+
+ II. Number in the right In the left hand _even_ 18
+ hand is _odd_ 7 Multiply by 2
+ Multiply by 3 ----
+ ---- Product 36
+ Product 21
+ Add the Product of
+ the left hand 36
+ ----
+ Which produces a
+ total of 57
+
+
+_Secret Correspondence._
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 1.]
+
+To carry on a correspondence without the possibility of the meaning of
+the letter being detected, in case it should be opened by any other
+person, has employed the ingenuity of many. No method will be found
+more effectual for this purpose, or more easy, than the following.
+
+Provide a piece of square card or pasteboard, and draw a circle on it,
+which circle is to be divided into 27 equal parts, in each of which
+parts must be written _one_ of the capital letters of the alphabet,
+and the &, as in the figure. Let the centre of this circle be blank.
+Then draw another circle, also divided into 27 equal parts, in each of
+which write one of the small letters of the alphabet, and the &. This
+circle must be cut round, and made exactly to fit the blank space in
+the centre of the large circle, and must run round a pivot or pin. The
+person with whom you correspond must have a similar dial, and at the
+beginning of your letter you must put the capital letter, and at the
+end the small letter, which answer to each other when you have fixed
+your dial.
+
+Suppose what you wish to communicate is as follows:
+
+ _I am so watched I cannot see you as I promised; but I will
+ meet you to-morrow in the park, with the letters, &c._
+
+You begin with the letter _T_, and end with the letter _m_, which
+shows how you have fixed the dial, and how your correspondent must fix
+his, that he may decipher your letter.
+
+Then, for _I am_, you write _b uf_, and so of the rest, as follows.
+
+ _T b uf lh pumrvayx b rvugghm lyy rhn ul b ikhfblyx vnm b
+ pbee fyym rhn mh-fhkkhp bg may iukd pbma may eymmykl, tw.
+ m._
+
+
+_Another Way._
+
+Take two pieces of card, pasteboard, or stiff paper, through which
+you cut long squares at different distances. One of these you keep
+yourself, and the other you give to your correspondent. You lay the
+pasteboard on a paper, and, in the spaces cut out, write what you
+would have understood by him only; then fill the intermediate spaces
+with any words that will connect the whole together, and make a
+different sense. When he receives it, he lays his pasteboard over
+the whole, and those words which are between crotchets [ ] form the
+intelligence you wish to communicate. For example: suppose you want
+to express these word,
+
+ "_Don't trust Robert: I have found him a villain._"
+
+"[Don't] fail to send my books. I [trust] they will be ready when
+[Robert] calls on you. [I have] heard that you have [found] your dog.
+I call [him a villain] who stole him." You may place a pasteboard of
+this kind three other ways--the bottom at top--the top at bottom, or
+by turning it over; but in this case you must previously apprize your
+correspondent, or he may not be able to decipher your meaning.
+
+
+_Secret Correspondence by Music._
+
+Form a circle like Fig. 2, divided into twenty-six parts, with a
+letter of the alphabet written in each. The interior of the circle is
+moveable, like that in Fig. 1, and the circumference is to be ruled
+like music-paper. Place in each division a note different in figure or
+position.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 2.]
+
+[Illustration: Music Piece]
+
+Within the musical lines place the three keys, and on the outer circle
+the figures to denote time. Then get a ruled paper, and place one of
+the keys (suppose _ge-re-sol_) against the time 2-4ths, at the
+beginning of the paper, which will inform your correspondent how to
+place his circle. You then copy the notes that answer to the letters
+of the words you intend to write, in the manner expressed above.
+
+
+_The Magic Vessel._
+
+On the bottom of a vessel, lay three pieces of money, the first at A,
+the second at B, and the third at C, Fig. 3. Then place a person at D,
+where he can see no farther into the vessel than E. You tell him, that
+by pouring water in the vessel you will make him see three different
+pieces of money; and bid him observe, that you do not convey any money
+in with the water. But be careful that you pour the water in very
+gently, or the pieces will move out of their places, and thereby
+destroy the experiment.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 3.]
+
+When the water rises up to F, the piece at A will be visible; when it
+reaches G, both A and B will be visible; and when it comes up to H,
+all three pieces will be visible.
+
+
+_Artificial Earthquake and Volcano._
+
+Grind an equal quantity of fresh iron filings with pure sulphur, till
+the whole be reduced to a fine powder. Be careful not to let any wet
+come near it. Then bury about thirty pounds of it a foot deep in the
+earth, and in about six or eight hours the ground will heave and
+swell, and shortly after send forth smoke and flames like a burning
+mountain. If the earth is raised in a conical shape, it will be no bad
+miniature resemblance of one of the burning mountains.
+
+
+_Artificial Illuminations._
+
+A very pleasing exhibition may be made with very little trouble or
+expense, in the following manner: Provide a box, which you fit up with
+architectural designs cut out on pasteboard; prick small holes in
+those parts of the building where you wish the illuminations to
+appear, observing, that in proportion to the perspective, the holes
+are to be made smaller; and on the near objects the holes are to be
+made larger. Behind these designs thus perforated, you fix a lamp or
+candle, but in such a manner that the reflection of the light shall
+only shine through the holes; then placing a light of just sufficient
+brilliance to show the design of the buildings before it, and making a
+hole for the sight at the front end of the box, you will have a very
+tolerable representation of illuminated buildings.
+
+The best way of throwing the light in front, is to place an oiled
+paper before it, which will cast a mellow gleam over the scenery, and
+not diminish the effect of the illumination. This can be very easily
+planned, both not to obstruct the sight, nor be seen to disadvantage.
+The lights behind the picture should be very strong; and if a
+magnifying glass were placed in the sight hole, it would tend greatly
+to increase the effect. The box must be covered in, leaving an
+aperture for the smoke of the lights to pass through.
+
+The above exhibition can only be shown at candle-light; but there is
+another way, by fixing small pieces of gold on the building, instead
+of drilling the holes; which gives something like the appearance of
+illumination, but by no means equal to the foregoing experiment.
+
+N.B. It would be an improvement, if paper of various colours, rendered
+transparent by oil, were placed between the lights behind and the
+aperture in the buildings, as they would then resemble lamps of
+different colours.
+
+
+_The Cameleon Spirit._
+
+Put into a decanter volatile spirit, in which you have dissolved
+copper filings, and it will produce a fine blue. If the bottle be
+stopped, the colour will disappear; but when unstopped, it will
+return. This experiment may be often repeated.
+
+
+_Invisible Ink._
+
+Put litharge of lead into very strong vinegar, and let it stand
+twenty-four hours. Strain it off, and let it remain till quite
+settled; then put the liquor in a bottle.
+
+You next dissolve orpiment in quick lime water, by setting the water
+in the sun for two or three days, turning it five or six times a-day.
+Keep the bottle containing this liquor well corked, as the vapour is
+highly pernicious if received into the mouth.
+
+Write what you wish with a pen dipped in the first liquor; and, to
+make it visible, expose it to the vapour of the second liquor. If you
+wish them to disappear again, draw a sponge or pencil, dipped in aqua
+fortis, or spirit of nitre, over the paper; and if you wish them to
+re-appear, let the paper be quite dry, and then pass the solution of
+orpiment over it.
+
+
+_Another._
+
+Dissolve bismuth in nitrous acid. When the writing with this fluid is
+exposed to the vapour of liver of sulphur, it will become quite black.
+
+
+_Another._
+
+Dissolve green vitriol and a little nitrous acid in common water.
+Write your characters with a new pen.
+
+Next infuse small Aleppo galls, slightly bruised in water. In two or
+three days, pour the liquor off.
+
+By drawing a pencil dipped in this second solution over the characters
+written with the first, they will appear a beautiful black.
+
+
+_Invisible Gold Ink._
+
+Put as much gold in as small a quantity of aqua regia as will dissolve
+it, and dilute it with two or three times the quantity of distilled
+water.
+
+Next dissolve, in a separate vessel, fine pewter in aqua regia, and
+when it is well impregnated, add an equal quantity of distilled water.
+
+Write your characters with the first solution: let it dry in the
+shade. To make them visible, draw a pencil or sponge, dipped in the
+second solution, over the paper, and the characters will appear of a
+purple colour.
+
+
+_Invisible Silver Ink._
+
+Dissolve fine silver in aqua fortis; and after the dissolution, add
+some distilled water in the same manner as in the gold ink.
+
+What is written with the above ink will remain invisible for three or
+four months, if kept from the air; but may be easily read in an hour,
+if exposed to the fire, air, or sun.
+
+
+_Invisible Yellow Ink._
+
+Steep marigold flowers seven or eight days in clear distilled vinegar.
+Press the flowers and strain the liquor, which is to be kept in a
+bottle well corked. If you would have it still more clear, add, when
+you use it, some pure water.
+
+To make the characters visible, which you write with this ink, pass a
+sponge over the paper, dipped in the following solution:
+
+Take a quantity of flowers of pansy, or the common violet, bruise them
+in a mortar with water, strain the liquor in a cloth, and keep it in a
+bottle.
+
+
+_Invisible Red Ink._
+
+To the pure spirit of vitriol or nitre, add eight times as much water.
+
+Use the above solution of violets to make visible the characters
+written with this ink.
+
+
+_Invisible Green Ink._
+
+Dissolve salt of tartar, clean and dry, in a sufficient quantity of
+river water. Use the violet solution to render it visible.
+
+
+_Another Invisible Green Ink._
+
+Dissolve zaffre, in powder, in aqua regia, for twenty-four hours. Pour
+the liquor off, and the same quantity of common water, and keep it in
+a bottle well corked.
+
+This ink will not be visible till exposed to the fire or the sun; and
+will again be invisible when it becomes cold.
+
+
+_Invisible Violet Ink._
+
+Express the juice of lemons, and keep it in a bottle well corked. Use
+the violet infusion to make the writing visible.
+
+
+_Invisible Grey Ink._
+
+Mix alum with lemon-juice. The letters written with this ink will be
+invisible till dipped in water.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+We now present our readers with a variety of amusing experiments,
+which may be performed by the foregoing inks; and they will, probably,
+suggest others equally amusing and useful.
+
+
+_A Secret Correspondence by means of Invisible Ink._
+
+A person wishing to carry on a correspondence with another, and who is
+fearful of having his letter opened, or intercepted, can adopt the
+following plan:
+
+Write any unimportant matter with common ink, and let the lines be
+very wide apart: then between these lines write the communication you
+wish to make, with any of the above invisible inks you can most
+readily procure.
+
+Your correspondent is to be previously apprized of the method of
+making the characters visible: and writing in common ink will serve to
+lull the suspicions of those who might intercept the letter, and who,
+not finding any thing important in it, will either forward or keep it.
+In either case there can be no danger, as the writing will not be
+visible without the proper application.
+
+
+_The Mysterious Writing._
+
+Write on a piece of paper with common ink any question; then
+underneath it write the answer either in invisible silver ink, or the
+invisible green ink, made with zaffre and aqua regia, described in
+pages 24 and 25.
+
+You give this paper to your friend, and tell him to place it against
+the wall, or on his dressing-table, keeping the door locked, that he
+may be sure no person has entered his room: he will next day find the
+answer written on it.
+
+
+_The Restored Flowers._
+
+Make a bouquet of artificial flowers; the leaves should be formed of
+parchment. Dip the roses in the red invisible ink, the jonquilles in
+the yellow, the pinks in the violet, and the leaves in the green ink.
+They will all appear white; and you show them to the company,
+observing, that you will restore them to their natural colours, and
+desiring any person to fix any private mark on them he pleases, that
+he may be sure there is no deception. You then, unperceived by the
+company, dip them in the revivifying liquor, used to make the yellow
+ink visible, described in page 24, and, drawing them gently out, that
+the liquor may drop, and the flowers have time to acquire their
+colours, you present them to the company, who will see, with surprise,
+that they each appear in their natural colours.
+
+
+_Winter changed to Spring._
+
+Take a print that represents winter, and colour those parts which
+should appear green, with the second green invisible ink, described in
+page 25; observing, of course, the usual rules of perspective, by
+making the near parts deeper in colour than the others. The other
+objects must be painted in their natural colours. Then put the print
+into a frame with a glass, and cover the back with a paper that is
+pasted only at its extremities.
+
+When this print is exposed to a moderate fire, or the warm sun, the
+foliage, which appeared covered with snow, will change to a pleasing
+green; and if a yellow tint be thrown on the lighter parts before the
+invisible ink is drawn over it, this green will be of different
+shades. When it is exposed to the cold, it will again resume its first
+appearance of winter.
+
+
+_The Silver Tree._
+
+Dissolve an ounce of fine silver in three ounces of strong aqua
+fortis, in a glass bottle. When the silver is dissolved; pour the aqua
+fortis into another glass vessel, (a decanter will be best,) with
+seven or eight ounces of mercury, to which add a quart of common
+water; to the whole add your dissolved silver, and let it remain
+untouched.
+
+In a few days the mercury will appear covered with a number of little
+branches of a silver colour. This appearance will increase for a month
+or two, and will remain after the mercury is entirely dissolved.
+
+
+_The Lead Tree._
+
+A more modern invention, and an easier method by far than the above,
+is the following:
+
+To a piece of zinc fasten a wire, crooked in the form of the worm of a
+still; let the other end of the worm be thrust through a cork. You
+then pour spring water into a phial or decanter, to which you add a
+small quantity of sugar of lead; thrust the zinc into the bottle, and
+with the cork at the end of the wire fasten it up. In a few days the
+tree will begin to grow, and produce a most beautiful effect.
+
+
+_To produce beautiful Fire-works in Miniature._
+
+Put half a drachm of solid phosphorus into a large pint Florence
+flask; holding it slanting, that the phosphorus may not break the
+glass. Pour upon it a gill and a half of water, and place the whole
+over a tea-kettle lamp, or any common tin lamp, filled with spirit of
+wine. Light the wick, which should be almost half an inch from the
+flask; and as soon as the water is heated, streams of fire will issue
+from the water by starts, resembling sky-rockets; some particles will
+adhere to the sides of the glass representing stars; and will
+frequently display brilliant rays. These appearances will continue at
+times till the water begins to simmer, when immediately a curious
+aurora borealis begins, and gradually ascends, till it collects to a
+pointed flame; when it has continued half a minute, blow out the flame
+of the lamp, and the point that was formed will rush down, forming
+beautiful illuminated clouds of fire, rolling over each other for some
+time, which disappearing, a splendid hemisphere of stars presents
+itself: after waiting a minute or two, light the lamp again, and
+nearly the same phenomenon will be displayed as from the beginning.
+Let the repetition of lighting and blowing out the lamp be made for
+three or four times at least, that the stars may be increased. After
+the third or fourth time of blowing out the lamp, in a few minutes
+after the internal surface of the flask is dry, many of the stars will
+shoot with great splendour, from side to side, and some of them will
+fire off with brilliant rays; these appearances will continue several
+minutes. What remains in the flask will serve for the same experiment
+several times, and without adding any more water. Care should be
+taken, after the operation is over, to lay the flask and water in a
+cool, secure place.
+
+
+_Artificial Rain and Hail._
+
+Make a hollow cylinder of wood; let it be very thin at the sides,
+about eight or ten inches wide, and two or three feet diameter. Divide
+its inside into five equal parts, by boards of five or six inches
+wide, and let there be between them and the wooden circle, a space of
+about one-sixth of an inch. You are to place these boards obliquely.
+In this cylinder put four or five pounds of shot that will easily pass
+through the opening. When turned upside down, the noise of the shot
+going through the various partitions will resemble rain; and if you
+put large shot, it will produce the sound of hail.
+
+
+_Illuminated Writing._
+
+It is well known that if any words are written on a wall with solid
+phosphorus, the writing will appear as if on fire; but it is
+necessary to give this caution, lest accidents should occur. In using
+it, let a cup of water be always near you; and do not keep it more
+than a minute and a half in your hand, for fear the warmth of your
+hand should set it on fire. When you have written a few words with it,
+put the phosphorus into the cup of water, and let it stay a little to
+cool; then take it out, and write with it again.
+
+
+_A Lamp that will burn Twelve Months without replenishing._
+
+Take a stick of phosphorus, and put it into a large dry phial, not
+corked, and it will afford a light sufficient to discern any object in
+a room when held near it. The phials should be kept in a cool place,
+where there is no great current of air, and it will continue its
+luminous appearance for more than twelve months.
+
+
+_Curious Transcolorations._
+
+Put half a table-spoonful of syrup of violets and three
+table-spoonfuls of water into a glass; stir them well together with a
+stick, and put half the mixture into another glass. If you add a few
+drops of acid of vitriol into one of the glasses and stir it, it will
+be changed into a crimson; put a few drops of fixed alkali dissolved
+into the other glass, and when you stir it, it will change to green.
+If you drop slowly into the green liquor, from the side of the glass,
+a few drops of acid of vitriol, you will perceive crimson at the
+bottom, purple in the middle, and green at the top; and by adding a
+little fixed alkali dissolved, to the other glass, the same colours
+will appear in different order.
+
+
+_Another._
+
+If you put a tea-spoonful of a liquor composed of copper infused in
+acid of vitriol, into a glass, and add two or three table-spoonfuls of
+water to it, there will be no sensible colour produced; but if you add
+a little volatile alkali to it, and stir it, you will perceive a very
+beautiful blue colour. Add a little acid of vitriol, the colour will
+instantly disappear upon stirring it; and by adding a little fixed
+alkali dissolved, it will return again.
+
+
+_Another._
+
+Put half a tea-spoonful of a liquor composed of iron infused in acid
+of vitriol, into half a glass of water; and add a few drops of
+phlogisticated alkali, and a beautiful Prussian blue will appear.
+
+
+_Curious Account of the Electric Effects of a Russian Climate._
+
+Mr. AEpinus in a letter to Dr. Guthrie, relates the following
+phenomena, which took place in Russia, when a severe frost had
+continued for several weeks.
+
+Mr. AEpinus was sent for to the palace to see an uncommon phenomenon.
+On going into the apartment of Prince Orloff, he found him at his
+toilet, and that every time his valet drew the comb through his hair,
+a strong crackling noise was heard; and on darkening the room, sparks
+were seen following the comb in great abundance, while the prince
+himself was so completely electrified, that strong sparks could be
+drawn from his hands and face; nay, he was even electrified when he
+was only powdered with a puff.
+
+A few days after, he was witness to a more striking effect of the
+electric state of a Russian atmosphere. The Grand Duke of Russia sent
+for him one evening in the twilight, and told him, that having briskly
+drawn a flannel cover off a green damask chair in his bed-chamber, he
+was astonished at the appearance of a strong bright flame that
+followed; but considering it as an electrical appearance, he had tried
+to produce a similar illumination on different pieces of furniture,
+and could then show him a beautiful and surprising experiment. His
+highness threw himself on his bed, which was covered with a damask
+quilt, laced with gold; and, rubbing it with his hands in all
+directions, the young prince, who had then reached his twelfth year,
+appeared swimming in fire, as at every stroke flames arose all around
+him, darted to the gold-laced border, ran along it, and up to that of
+the bed, and even to the very top.
+
+While he was showing this experiment, Prince Orloff came into the
+room, with a sable muff in his hand, and showed us, that by only
+whirling it five or six times round his head in the air, he could
+electrify himself so strongly, as to send out sparks from all the
+uncovered parts of his body.
+
+
+_Astonishing Power of Steam._
+
+If you put a small quantity of water into a tea-kettle, and place it
+on the fire, it will disappear in a short time, having escaped in the
+steam. But if its escape be prevented by stopping up the spout and
+crevices, it will force its way by bursting the vessel in which it was
+confined.
+
+If the steam of boiling water be at liberty, the water never attains
+more than a certain degree of heat; but if confined in a close vessel,
+the additional fire not escaping, the power of the steam is increased,
+it re-acts upon the water, and raises the heat so much higher, that it
+would keep lead in a melting state; and so penetrating, that it would
+soften the marrow-bone of an ox, in a few minutes.
+
+There is an instrument contrived for the foregoing purposes, called
+Papin's Digester, from the name of its inventor, and from its
+digestive powers on substances exposed to its action. It is a very
+strong vessel, made of copper, fitted with a thick close cover, and
+fastened down by several strong screws, so as to render it steam-tight
+in great degrees of heat. To render it safe, while being used, there
+is a valve on the cover, to let out the steam, when it is too violent;
+this valve is kept down by a steel-yard, with a weight moveable upon
+it, to regulate the degrees of the steam within.
+
+The following account of an accident with one of these instruments,
+will give some idea of the great force of steam.
+
+Mr. Papin (the inventor) having fixed all things right, and included
+about a pint of water, with two ounces of marrow-bone, he placed the
+vessel horizontally between the bars of the grate, about half-way into
+the fire. In three minutes he found it raised to a great heat, and
+perceiving the heat in a very short time become more raging, stepped
+to a side-table for an iron to take the digester out of the fire,
+when it suddenly burst with the explosion of a musket. It was heard at
+a considerable distance, and actually shook the house. The bottom of
+the vessel that was in the fire gave way; the blast of the expanded
+water blew all the coals out of the fire into the room, the remainder
+of the vessel flew across the room, and, hitting the leaf of an oak
+table, an inch thick, broke it all in pieces, and rebounded half the
+length of the room back again. He could not perceive the least sign of
+water, though he looked carefully for it; the fire was quite
+extinguished, and every coal black in an instant.
+
+The following accident was attended with more fatal consequences.
+
+A steam-engine was repairing at Chelsea, and, as the workmen were
+endeavouring to discover the defect, the boiler suddenly exploded, and
+a cloud of steam rushing out at the fracture, struck one of the men
+who was near it, like a blast of lightning, and killed him in a
+moment; when his companions endeavoured to take off his clothes, the
+flesh came off with them from the bones.
+
+
+_Account of the Wonderful Effects of two immense Burning-Glasses._
+
+Mr. de Tschirnhausen constructed a burning-glass, between three and
+four feet in diameter, and whose focus was rendered more powerful by a
+second one. This glass melted tiles, slates, pumice-stone, &c., in a
+moment; pitch, and all resins, were melted even under water; the ashes
+of vegetables, wood, and other matters, were converted into glass;
+indeed, it either melted, calcined, or dissipated into smoke, every
+thing applied to its focus.
+
+Mr. Parker, of Fleet-street, made a burning-glass, three feet in
+diameter; it was formed of flint glass, and when on its frame, exposed
+a surface of 2 feet 8-1/2 inches to the solar rays. It had a small
+glass fitted to it, to converge the rays, and heighten the effect. The
+experiments made by it were more powerful and accurate than those
+performed by any other glass. The following is a brief epitome of its
+astonishing power.
+
+ --------------------------------------+-------+-------+
+ Substances melted, with their weight; |Weight | Time |
+ and the Time in Seconds, which | in | in |
+ they took in melting. |Grains.|Seconds|
+ --------------------------------------+-------+-------+
+ Pure gold | 20 | 4 |
+ ---- silver | 20 | 3 |
+ ---- copper | 33 | 20 |
+ ---- platina | 10 | 3 |
+ Nickel | 16 | 3 |
+ A cube of bar-iron | 10 | 12 |
+ --------- cast-iron | 10 | 3 |
+ --------- steel | 10 | 12 |
+ Scoria of wrought-iron | 12 | 2 |
+ Kearsh | 10 | 3 |
+ Cauk, or terra ponderosa | 10 | 7 |
+ A topaz, or chrysolite | 3 | 45 |
+ An oriental emerald | 2 | 25 |
+ Crystal pebble | 7 | 6 |
+ White agate | 10 | 30 |
+ Oriental flint | 10 | 30 |
+ Rough cornelian | 10 | 75 |
+ Jasper | 10 | 25 |
+ Onyx | 10 | 20 |
+ Garnet | 10 | 17 |
+ White rhomboidal spar | 10 | 60 |
+ Zeolites | 10 | 23 |
+ Rotten-stone | 10 | 80 |
+ Common slate | 10 | 2 |
+ Asbestos | 10 | 10 |
+ Common lime-stone | 10 | 55 |
+ Pumice-stone | 10 | 24 |
+ Lava | 10 | 7 |
+ Volcanic clay | 10 | 60 |
+ Cornish moor-stone | 10 | 60 |
+ --------------------------------------+-------+-------+
+
+
+_Fulminating Powder._
+
+This powder is made by rubbing together, in a hot marble mortar, with
+a wooden pestle, three parts, by weight, of nitre, two of mild
+vegetable alkali, and one of flowers of sulphur, till the whole is
+accurately mixed. If a drachm of this powder be exposed to a gentle
+heat, in an iron ladle, till it melts, it will explode with a noise as
+loud as the report of a cannon.
+
+
+_A more powerful fulminating Powder._
+
+The most wonderful instance of chemical detonation is formed by the
+combination of volatile alkali with silver. Gunpowder, or fulminating
+gold, are not to be compared with this invention, and the great danger
+attending its manufacture prevents us from giving a methodical account
+of its preparation to our readers, particularly as it can be
+purchased, properly prepared, of the chemists.
+
+The slightest agitation or friction is sufficient to cause its
+explosion. When it is once obtained, it can no longer be touched with
+safety. The falling of a few atoms of it, from a small height,
+produces an explosion; a drop of water falling on it has the same
+effect. No attempt, therefore, can be made to enclose it in a bottle,
+but it must be let alone in the capsule, wherein, by evaporation, it
+obtains this terrible property. To make this experiment with safety,
+no greater quantity than a grain of silver should be used; the last
+process of drying should be made in a metallic vessel, and the face of
+the operator defended by a mask with strong glass eyes.
+
+
+_To make the Phosphorus Match Bottles._
+
+Nothing more is necessary for this purpose, than to drop small pieces
+of dry phosphorus into a common phial; gently heat it till it melts;
+and then turn the bottle round, that it may adhere to the sides. The
+phial should be closely corked; and when used, a common brimstone
+match is to be introduced, and rubbed against the sides of the phial:
+this inflames the match when it is brought out of the bottle. Though
+there is no danger in phosphorus, till friction, or fire, is applied,
+yet persons cannot be too cautious in the use of it, as instances have
+been known of one of these bottles catching fire in the pocket, and
+very much endangering the person who carried it; likewise, if
+carelessly used, small particles are apt to get under the nails, or on
+the hand; and if, by accident, they are held to the fire, or rubbed
+together, a flame will presently kindle.
+
+
+_To make a Ring suspend by a Thread, after the Thread has been
+burned._
+
+Soak a piece of thread in urine, or common salt and water. Tie it to a
+ring, not larger than a wedding-ring. When you apply the flame of a
+candle to it, it will burn to ashes, but yet sustain the ring.
+
+
+_To form Figures in relief on an Egg._
+
+Design on the shell any figure or ornament you please, with melted
+tallow, or any other fat oily substance; then immerse the egg into
+very strong vinegar, and let it remain till the acid has corroded that
+part of the shell which is not covered with the greasy matter: those
+parts will then appear in relief, exactly as you have drawn them.
+
+
+_To give a ghastly Appearance to Persons in a Room._
+
+Dissolve salt in an infusion of saffron and spirits of wine. Dip some
+tow in this solution, and, having set fire to it, extinguish all other
+lights in the room.
+
+
+_To change Blue to White._
+
+Dissolve copper filings in a phial of volatile alkali; when the phial
+is unstopped, the liquor will be blue; when stopped, it will be white.
+
+
+_Magical Transmutations._
+
+Infuse a few shavings of logwood in common water, and when the liquor
+is sufficiently red, pour it into a bottle. Then take three
+drinking-glasses, and rinse one of them with strong vinegar; throw
+into the second a small quantity of pounded alum, which will not be
+observed if the glass has been recently washed, and leave the third
+without any preparation. If the red liquor in the bottle be poured
+into the first glass, it will appear of a straw colour; if into the
+second, it will pass gradually from bluish-grey to black, when stirred
+with a key, or any piece of iron, which has been previously dipped in
+strong vinegar. In the third glass, the red liquor will assume a
+violet tint.
+
+
+_To make Pomatum with Water and Wax._
+
+Water and wax are two substances that do not naturally unite together;
+therefore, to those who witness the following process, without knowing
+the cause, it will have the appearance of marvellous. Put into a new
+glazed earthen pot, six ounces of river water and two ounces of white
+wax, in which, you must previously conceal a strong dose of salt of
+tartar. If the whole be then exposed to a considerable degree of heat,
+it will assume the consistence of pomatum, and may be used as such.
+
+
+_Iron transformed into Copper._
+
+Dissolve blue vitriol in water, till the water is well impregnated
+with it; and immerse into the solution small plates of iron, or coarse
+iron filings. These will be attacked and dissolved by the acid of the
+vitriol, while the copper naturally contained in the vitriol will be
+sunk and deposited in the place of the iron dissolved. If the piece of
+iron be too large for dissolving, it will be so completely covered
+with particles of copper, as to resemble that metal itself.
+
+
+_Iron transformed into Silver._
+
+Dissolve mercury in marine acid, and dip a piece of iron into it, or
+rub the solution over the iron, and it will assume a silver
+appearance.
+
+It is scarcely necessary to say, that these transmutations are only
+apparent, though to the credulous it would seem that they were
+actually transformed.
+
+
+_Chemical Illuminations._
+
+Put into a middling-sized bottle, with a short wide neck, three ounces
+of oil or spirit of vitriol, with twelve ounces of common water, and
+throw into it, at different times, an ounce or two of iron filings. A
+violent commotion will then take place, and white vapours will arise
+from the mixture. If a taper be held to the mouth of the bottle, these
+vapours will inflame and produce a violent explosion, which may be
+repeated as long as the vapours continue.
+
+
+_The Philosophical Candle._
+
+Provide a bladder, into the orifice of which is inserted a metal tube,
+some inches in length, that can be adapted to the neck of a bottle,
+containing the same mixture as in the last experiment. Having suffered
+the atmospheric air to be expelled from the bottle, by the elastic
+vapour produced by the solution, apply the orifice of the bladder to
+the mouth of the bottle, after carefully squeezing the common air out
+of it, (which you must not fail to do, or the bladder will violently
+explode.) The bladder will thus become filled with the inflammable
+air, which, when forced out against the flame of a candle, by pressing
+the sides of the bladder, will form a beautiful green flame.
+
+
+_To make the appearance of a Flash of Lightning, when any one enters a
+Room with a lighted Candle._
+
+Dissolve camphor in spirit of wine, and deposit the vessel containing
+the solution in a very close room, where the spirit of wine must be
+made to evaporate by strong and speedy boiling. If any one then enters
+the room with a lighted candle, the air will inflame, while the
+combustion will be so sudden, and of so short a duration, as to
+occasion no danger.
+
+
+_To melt Iron in a Moment and make it run into Drops._
+
+Bring a bar of iron to a white heat, and then apply to it a roll of
+sulphur. The iron will immediately melt and run into drops.
+
+This experiment should be performed over a basin of water, in which
+the drops that fall down will be quenched. These drops will be found
+reduced into a sort of cast-iron.
+
+
+_Never-yielding Cement._
+
+Calcine oyster-shells, pound them, sift them through a silk sieve, and
+grind them on porphyry till they are reduced to the finest powder.
+Then take the whites of several eggs, according to the quantity of the
+powder; and having mixed them with the powder, form the whole into a
+kind of paste. With this paste join the pieces of china, or glass, and
+press them together for seven or eight minutes. This cement will stand
+both heat and water, and will never give way, even if the article
+should, by accident, fall to the ground.
+
+
+_To remove Stains and Blemishes from Prints._
+
+Paste a piece of paper to a very smooth clear table, that the boiling
+water used in the operation may not require a colour which might
+lessen its success. Spread out the print you wish to clean upon the
+table, and sprinkle it with boiling water; taking care to moisten it
+throughout by very carefully applying a very fine sponge. After you
+have repeated this process five or six times, you will observe the
+stains or spots extend themselves; but this is only a proof that the
+dirt begins to be dissolved.
+
+After this preparation, lay the print smoothly and carefully into a
+copper or wooden vessel, larger than the size of the print. Then cover
+it with a boiling ley of potash, taking care to keep it hot as long as
+possible. After the whole is cooled, strain off the liquor, take out
+the print with care, spread it on a stretched cord, and when half dry,
+press it between leaves of white paper, to prevent wrinkles.
+
+By this process, spots and stains of any kind will be effectually
+removed.
+
+
+_To so fill a Glass with Water, that it cannot be removed without
+spilling the whole._
+
+This is a mere trick, but may afford some amusement. You offer to bet
+any person that you will so fill a glass with water that he shall not
+move it off the table without spilling the whole contents. You then
+fill the glass, and, laying a piece of paper or thin card over the
+top, you dexterously turn the glass upside down on the table, and then
+drawing away the paper, you leave the water in the glass, with its
+foot upwards. It will therefore be impossible to remove the glass from
+the table without spilling every drop.
+
+
+_Two Figures, one of which blows out and the other re-lights a
+Candle._
+
+Make two figures, of any shape or materials you please; insert in the
+mouth of one a small tube, at the end of which is a piece of
+phosphorus, and in the mouth of the other a tube containing at the end
+a few grains of gunpowder; taking care that each be retained in the
+tube by a piece of paper. If the second figure be applied to the flame
+of a taper, it will extinguish it; and the first will light it again.
+
+
+_A vessel that will let Water out at the Bottom, as soon as the Mouth
+is uncorked._
+
+Provide a tin vessel, two or three inches in diameter, and five or six
+inches in height, having a mouth about three inches in width; and in
+the bottom several small holes, just large enough to admit a small
+needle. Plunge it in water with its mouth open, and when full, while
+it remains in the water, stop it very closely. You can play a trick
+with a person, by desiring him to uncork it; if he places it on his
+knee for that purpose, the moment it is uncorked the water will run
+through at the bottom, and make him completely wet.
+
+
+_A Powder which catches Fire when exposed to the Air._
+
+Put three ounces of rock alum, and one ounce of honey or sugar, into a
+new earthen dish, glazed, and which is capable of standing a strong
+heat; keep the mixture over the fire, stirring it continually till it
+becomes very dry and hard; then remove it from the fire, and pound it
+to a coarse powder. Put this powder into a long-necked bottle, leaving
+a part of the vessel empty; and, having placed it in a crucible, fill
+up the crucible with fine sand, and surround it with burning coals.
+When the bottle has been kept at a red heat for about seven or eight
+minutes, and no more vapour issues from it, remove it from the fire,
+then stop it with a piece of cork; and, having suffered it to cool,
+preserve the mixture in small bottles well closed.
+
+If you unclose one of these bottles, and let fall a few grains of this
+powder on a bit of paper, or any other very dry substance, it will
+first become blue, then brown, and will at last burn the paper or
+other dry substance on which it has fallen.
+
+
+_Fulminating Gold._
+
+Put into a small long-necked bottle, resting on a little sand, one
+part of fine gold filings, and three parts of aqua regia,
+(nitro-muriatic acid.) When the gold is dissolved, pour the solution
+into a glass, and add five or six times the quantity of water. Then
+take spirit of sal ammoniac or oil of tartar, and pour it drop by drop
+into the solution, until the gold is entirely precipitated to the
+bottom of the glass. Decant the liquor that swims at the top, by
+inclining the glass; and, having washed it several times in warm
+water, dry it at a moderate heat, placing it on paper capable of
+absorbing all the moisture.
+
+If a grain of this powder, put into a spoon, (it should be an iron
+one,) be exposed to the flame of a candle, it will explode with a very
+loud report.
+
+
+_To melt a piece of Money in a Walnut-shell, without injuring the
+shell._
+
+Bend any thin coin, and put it into half a walnut-shell; place the
+shell on a little sand, to keep it steady. Then fill the shell with a
+mixture made of three parts of very dry pounded nitre, one part of
+flowers of sulphur, and a little saw-dust well sifted. If you then set
+light to the mixture, you will find, when it is melted, that the metal
+will also be melted at the bottom of the shell, in form of a button,
+which will become hard when the burning matter round it is consumed:
+the shell will have sustained very little injury.
+
+
+_A Liquid that Shines in the Dark._
+
+Take a bit of phosphorus, about the size of a pea; break it into small
+parts, which you are to put into a glass half full of very pure water,
+and boil it in a small earthen vessel, over a very moderate fire. Have
+in readiness a long narrow bottle, with a well-fitted glass stopper,
+and immerse it, with its mouth open, into boiling water. On taking it
+out, empty the water, and immediately pour in the mixture in a boiling
+state; then put in the stopper, and cover it with mastich, to prevent
+the entrance of the external air.
+
+This water will shine in the dark for several months, even without
+being touched; and, if it be shaken in dry warm weather, brilliant
+flashes will be seen to rise through the middle of the water.
+
+
+_Luminous Liquor._
+
+Put a little phosphorus, with essence of cloves, into a bottle, which
+must be kept closely stopped. Every time the bottle is unclosed, the
+liquor will appear luminous. This experiment must be performed in the
+dark.
+
+
+_The changeable Rose._
+
+Take a common full-blown rose, and, having thrown a little sulphur
+finely pounded into a chafing-dish with coals, expose the rose to the
+vapour. By this process the rose will become whitish; but if it be
+afterwards held some time in water, it will resume its former colour.
+
+
+_Golden Ink._
+
+Take some white gum arabic, reduce it to an impalpable powder, in a
+brass mortar; dissolve it in strong brandy, and add a little common
+water to render it more liquid. Provide some gold in a shell, which
+must be detached, in order to reduce it to a powder. When this is
+done, moisten it with the gummy solution, and stir the whole with a
+small hair-brush, or your finger; then leave it for a night, that the
+gold may be better dissolved. If the composition become dry during the
+night, dilute it with more gum water, in which a little saffron has
+been infused; but take care that the gold solution be sufficiently
+liquid to flow freely in a pen. When the writing is dry, polish it
+with a dry tooth.
+
+
+_Another way._
+
+Reduce gum ammoniac into powder, and dissolve it in gum arabic water,
+to which a little garlic juice has been added. This water will not
+dissolve the ammonia so as to form a transparent liquid; for the
+result will be a milky liquor. With the liquor form your letters or
+ornaments on paper or vellum, with a pen or fine camels'-hair brush;
+then let them dry, and afterwards breathe on them some time, till they
+become moist; then apply a few bits of leaf gold to the letters, which
+you press down gently with cotton wool. When the whole is dry, brush
+off the superfluous gold with a large camels'-hair brush, and, to make
+it more brilliant, burnish with a dog's tooth.
+
+
+_White Ink, for Writing on black Paper._
+
+Having carefully washed some egg-shells, remove the internal skin, and
+grind them on a piece of porphyry. Then put the powder into a small
+vessel of pure water, and when it has settled at the bottom, draw off
+the water, and dry the powder in the sun. This powder must be
+preserved in a bottle; when you want to use it, put a small quantity
+of gum ammoniac into distilled vinegar, and leave it to dissolve
+during the night. Next morning the solution will appear exceedingly
+white; and if you then strain it through a piece of linen cloth, and
+add to it the powder of egg-shells, in sufficient quantity, you will
+obtain a very white ink.
+
+
+_To construct Paper Balloons._
+
+Take several sheets of silk paper; cut them in the shape of a spindle;
+or, to speak more familiarly, like the coverings of the sections of an
+orange; join these pieces together, into one spherical or globular
+body, and border the aperture with a ribbon, leaving the ends, that
+you may suspend them from the following lamp.
+
+Construct a small basket of very fine wire, if the balloon is small,
+and suspend it from the aperture, so that the smoke from the flame of
+a few leaves of paper, wrapped together, and dipped in oil, may heat
+the inside of it. Before you light this paper, suspend the balloon in
+such a manner, that it may, in a great measure, be exhausted of air,
+and as soon as it has been dilated, let it go, together with the wire
+basket, which will serve as ballast.
+
+
+_Water-Gilding upon Silver._
+
+Take copper-flakes, on which pour strong vinegar; add alum and salt in
+equal quantities; set them on a fire, and when the vinegar is boiled,
+till it becomes one-fourth part of its original quantity, throw into
+it the metal you design to gild, and it will assume a copper colour.
+Continue boiling it, and it will change into a fine gold colour.
+
+
+_A Water which gives Silver a Gold Colour._
+
+Take sulphur and nitre, of each an equal quantity; grind them together
+very fine, and put them into an unglazed vessel; cover and lute it
+well; then set it over a slow fire for 24 hours; put what remains into
+a strong crucible, and let it dissolve; put it into a phial, and
+whatever silver you anoint with it will have a gold colour.
+
+
+_To make an old Gold Chain appear like new._
+
+Dissolve sal ammoniac in urine, boil the chain in it, and it will have
+a fine gold colour.
+
+
+_To give Silver the Colour of Gold._
+
+Dissolve in common aqua fortis as much silver as you please. To eight
+ounces of silver, take four ounces of hepatic aloes, six ounces of
+turmeric, and two ounces of prepared tutty, that has been several
+times quenched in urine. Put these to the solution of the silver; they
+will dissolve, but rise up in the glass like a sponge; this glass must
+therefore be large, to prevent running over. Then draw it off, and you
+will have ten ounces of silver as yellow as gold.
+
+
+_A Water to give any Metal a Gold Colour._
+
+Take fine sulphur and pulverize it; then boil some stale spring water;
+pour it hot upon the powder, and stir it well together; boil it again,
+and pour into it an ounce of dragon's blood. After it is well boiled,
+take it off, and filter it through a fine cloth; pour this water into
+a matrass, (a chemical vessel,) after you have put in what you design
+to colour; close it well, and boil it a third time, and the metal will
+be a fine gold colour.
+
+
+_Another way._
+
+Take hepatic aloes, nitre, and Roman vitriol, of each equal
+quantities; and distil them with water, in an alembic, till all the
+spirits are extracted; it will at last yield a yellowish water, which
+will tinge any sort of metal of a gold colour.
+
+
+_To give Silver-plate a Lustre._
+
+Dissolve alum in a strong ley, and scum it carefully; then mix it up
+with soap, and wash your silver utensils with it, using a linen rag.
+
+
+_The Fiery Fountain._
+
+If twenty grains of phosphorus, cut very small, and mixed with forty
+grains of powder of zinc, be put into four drachms of water, and two
+drachms of concentrated sulphuric acid be added thereto, bubbles of
+inflamed phosphoretted hydrogen gas will quickly cover the whole
+surface of the fluid in succession, forming a real fountain of fire.
+
+
+_To take Impressions of Coins, Medals, &c._
+
+Cut fish-glue, or isinglass, into small pieces, immerse it in clear
+water, and set it on a slow fire; when gradually dissolved, let it
+boil slowly, stirring it with a wooden spoon, and taking off the scum.
+The liquor being sufficiently adhesive, take it off the fire, let it
+cool a little, and then pour it on the medal or coin you wish to copy,
+having first rubbed the coin over with oil. Let the composition lay
+about the thickness of a crown-piece on the medal. Then set it in a
+moderate air, neither too hot nor too cold, and let it cool and dry.
+When it is dry, it will loosen itself; you will find the impression
+correct, and the finest strokes expressed with the greatest accuracy.
+
+You may give a most pleasing effect to the composition, by mixing any
+colour with it, red, yellow, blue, green, &c., and if you add a little
+parchment size to it, it will make it harder and better. This size is
+made by gently simmering the cuttings of clear white parchment in a
+pipkin, with a little water, till it becomes adhesive.
+
+
+_To tell a Person any Number he may privately fix on._
+
+When the person has fixed on a number, bid him double it and add four
+to that doubling; then multiply the whole by 5; to the product let him
+add 12, and multiply the amount by 10. From the total of all this, let
+him deduct 320, and tell you the remainder; from which, if you cut off
+the two last figures, the number that remains will be what he fixed
+upon. For instance,
+
+ Suppose the number chosen is 7
+ Which doubled 14
+ Add 4 to it, and it will make 18
+ Multiply 18 by 5, gives 90
+ To which add 12, is 102
+ Multiply that by 10, makes 1020
+ From which deducting 320, the remainder is 700
+ And by striking off the two ciphers, it becomes
+ the number thought on 7
+
+
+_To tell any Number a Person has fixed on, without asking him any
+Questions._
+
+You tell the person to choose any number from 1 to 15; he is to add 1
+to that number, and triple the amount. Then,
+
+ 1. He is to take the half of that triple, and triple that half.
+ 2. To take the half of the last triple, and triple that half.
+ 3. To take the half of the last triple.
+ 4. To take the half of that half.
+
+Thus, it will be seen, there are four cases where the half is to be
+taken; the three first are denoted by one of the eight following Latin
+words, each word being composed of three syllables; and those that
+contain the letter i refer to those cases where the half cannot be
+taken without a fraction; therefore, in those cases, the person who
+makes the deduction is to add 1 to the number divided. The fourth case
+shows which of the two numbers annexed to every word has been chosen;
+for if the fourth half can be taken without adding 1, the number
+chosen is in the first column; but if not, it is in the second.
+
+ _The words._ _The numbers they denote._
+
+ Mi-se-ris 8 0
+ Ob-tin-git 1 9
+ Ni-mi-um 2 19
+ No-ta-ri 3 11
+ In-fer-nos 4 12
+ Or-di-nes 13 5
+ Ti-mi-di 6 14
+ Te-ne-ant 15 7
+
+For example:
+
+ Suppose the number chosen is 9
+ To which is to be added 1
+ ----
+ 10
+ The triple of that number is 30
+ The half of which is 15
+ The triple of that half must be 45
+ And the half of that[A] 23
+ The triple half of that half 69
+ The half of that[A] 35
+ And the half of that half[A] 18
+
+ [A] At all these stages, 1 must be added, to take the half
+ without a fraction.
+
+While the person is performing the operation, you remark, that at the
+second and third stages he is obliged to add 1; and, consequently,
+that the word _ob-tin-git_, in the second and third syllables of which
+is an i, denotes that the number must be either 1 or 9; and, by
+observing that he cannot take the last half without adding 1, you know
+that it must be the number in the second column. If he makes no
+addition at any one of the four stages, the number he chose must be
+15, as that is the only number that has not a fraction at either of
+the divisions.
+
+
+_The Lamp Chronometer._
+
+Figure 4 represents a chamber lamp, A, consisting of a cylindrical
+vessel made of tin, in the shape of a candle, and is to be filled with
+oil. This vessel should be about three inches high and one inch
+diameter, placed in a stand, B. The whole apparatus, of lamp and
+stand, can be purchased, ready-made, at any tin-shop in London. To the
+stand, B, is fixed the handle C, which supports the frame D, about 12
+inches high, and four inches wide. This frame is to be covered with
+oiled paper, and divided into 12 equal parts by horizontal lines, at
+the end of which are written the numbers for the hours, from 1 to 12,
+and between the horizontal lines, and diagonals, divided into halves,
+quarters, &c. On the handle C, and close to the glass, is fixed the
+style or hand E.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 4.]
+
+Now, as the distance of the style from the flame of the lamp is only
+half an inch, then, if the distance of the frame from the style be six
+inches, while the float that contains the light descends by the
+decrease on the oil, one inch, the shadow of the style of the frame
+will ascend 12 inches, being its whole length, and show by its
+progression, the regular increase of the hours, with their several
+divisions.
+
+You must be careful always to burn the same oil, which must be the
+best; and the wick must never vary in size; if these precautions are
+not attended to, the dial never can be accurate.
+
+
+_The Phial of the Four Elements._
+
+Take a phial, six or seven inches long, and about three quarters of an
+inch in diameter. In this phial put, first, glass coarsely powdered;
+secondly, oil of tartar per deliquum; thirdly, tincture of salt of
+tartar; and lastly, distilled rock oil.
+
+The glass and the various liquors being of different densities, if you
+shake the phial, and then let it rest a few moments, the three liquors
+will entirely separate, and each assume its place; thus forming no
+indifferent resemblance of the four elements, earth, fire, water, and
+air: the powdered glass (which should be of some dark colour)
+representing the earth; the oil of tartar, water; the tincture, air;
+and the rock oil, fire.
+
+
+_The Magic Bottle._
+
+Take a small bottle, the neck of which is not more than the sixth of
+an inch in diameter. With a funnel, fill the bottle quite full of red
+wine, and place it in a glass vessel, similar to a show-glass, whose
+height exceeds that of the bottle about two inches; fill this vessel
+with water. The wine will shortly come out of the bottle, and rise in
+the form of a small column to the surface of the water; while at the
+same time, the water, entering the bottle, will supply the place of
+the wine. The reason of this is, that as water is specifically heavier
+than wine, it must hold the lower place, while the other rises to the
+top.
+
+An effect equally pleasing will be produced, if the bottle be filled
+with water, and the vessel with wine.
+
+
+_The Globular Fountain._
+
+Make a hollow globe, of copper or lead, and of a size adapted to the
+quantity of water that comes from a pipe (hereafter mentioned) to
+which it is to be fixed, and which may be fastened to any kind of
+pump, provided it be so constructed, that the water shall have no
+other means of escape than through the pipe. Pierce a number of small
+holes through the globe, that all tend towards its centre, and annex
+it to the pipe that communicates with the pump. The water that comes
+from the pump, rushing with violence into the globe, will be forced
+out at the holes, and form a very pleasing sphere of water.
+
+
+_The Hydraulic Dancer._
+
+Procure a little figure made of cork, which you may dress as your
+fancy dictates. In this figure place a small hollow cone made of thin
+leaf brass.
+
+When the figure is placed on a jet d'eau, that plays in a
+perpendicular direction, it will be suspended on the top of the water,
+and perform a great variety of amusing motions.
+
+If a hollow ball of very thin copper, of an inch diameter, be placed
+on a similar jet, it will remain suspended, turning round, and
+spreading the water all about it.
+
+
+_A Person having put a Ring an one of his Fingers, to name the Person,
+the Hand, the Finger, and the Joint on which it is placed._
+
+Let a third person double the number of the order in which he stands
+who has the ring, and add 5 to that number; then multiply that sum by
+5, and to the product add 10. Let him next add 1 to the last number,
+if the ring be on the right hand, and 2 if on the left, and multiply
+the whole by 10: to the product of this he must add the number of the
+finger, (counting the thumb as the first finger,) and multiply the
+whole again by 10. Let him then add the number of the joint, and,
+lastly, to the whole join 35.
+
+He is then to tell you the amount of the whole, from which you are to
+subtract 3535, and the remainder will consist of four figures; the
+first of which will express the rank in which the person stands, the
+second the hand, (number 1 signifying the right, and 2 the left,) the
+third number the finger, and the fourth the joint.--For example:
+
+Suppose the person who stands the third in order has put the ring upon
+the second joint of the thumb of his left hand; then,
+
+ The double of the rank of the third person is 6
+ To which add 5
+ ____
+ 11
+ Multiply the sum by 5
+ ____
+ 55
+ To which add 10
+ And the number of the left hand 2
+ ____
+ 67
+ Which being multiplied by 10
+ ____
+ 670
+ To which add the number of the thumb 1
+ ____
+ 671
+ And multiply again by 10
+ ____
+ 6710
+ Then add the number of the joint 2
+ And lastly the number 35
+ ____
+ 6747
+ From which deducting 3535
+ ____
+ The remainder is 3212
+ ____
+
+Of which, as we have said, the 3 denotes the third person, the 2 the
+left hand, the 1 the thumb, and the last 2 the second joint.
+
+
+_The Water Sun._
+
+Provide two portions of a hollow sphere, that are very shallow; join
+them together in such a manner that the hollow between them be very
+narrow. Fix them vertically to a pipe from whence a jet proceeds. Bore
+a number of small holes all around that part where the two pieces are
+joined together. The water rushing through the holes will form a very
+pleasing water sun, or star.
+
+
+_The Magical Cascade._
+
+Procure a tin vessel, shaped like Fig. 5, about five inches high and
+four in diameter, with a cover, C, closed at top. To the bottom of
+this vessel, let the pipe D E be soldered. This pipe is to be ten
+inches long, and half an inch in diameter, open at each end, and the
+upper end must be above the water in the vessel. To the bottom also
+fix five or six small tubes, F, about one-eighth of an inch in
+diameter. By these pipes, the water in the vessel is to run slowly
+out.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 5.]
+
+Place this machine in a tin basin, G H, with a hole in the middle,
+about a quarter of an inch in diameter. Fix to the tube D E, any sort
+of ornament that will keep the machine firm on the basin, observing,
+that these supports are sufficiently long to leave about a quarter of
+an inch between the end of the tube and the orifice in the basin; and
+let there be a vessel under the basin to catch the water that runs
+out.
+
+As the small pipes discharge more water into the basin than can run
+out of the central orifice, the water will rise in the basin above the
+lower end of the pipe, and prevent the air from getting into the
+vessel, by which the water will cease to flow from the small pipes.
+But as the water continues to flow from the basin, the air will have
+liberty again to enter the vessel by the tube, and the water will
+again flow from the small pipes, and alternately stop and flow, while
+any water remains in the vessel.
+
+As you can guess when the pipes will flow, and when they will stop,
+you may so manage it, that they will appear to act by word of command.
+
+
+_The illuminated Fountain, that plays when the Candles are lighted,
+and stops when they are extinguished._
+
+Provide two cylindrical vessels, A B and C D, as in Fig. 6. Connect
+them by four tubes open at each end, as H I, &c., so that the air may
+descend out of the higher into the lower vessel. To these tubes fix
+candlesticks, and to the hollow cover, E F, of the lower vessel, fit a
+tube, K, reaching almost to the bottom of the vessel. At G let there
+be an aperture with a screw, whereby water may be poured into C D,
+which, when filled, must be closed by the screw.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 6.]
+
+When the candles are lighted, the air in the upper cover and
+contiguous pipes will be thereby rarefied, and the jet from the small
+tube, K, will begin to play: as the air becomes more rarefied, the
+force of the jet will increase, and it will continue to play till the
+water in the lower vessel is exhausted. As the motion of the jet is
+caused by the heat of the candles, when they are extinguished the
+fountain will stop.
+
+
+_A Fountain which acts by the heat of the Sun._
+
+In the annexed engraving, Fig. 7, G N S is a thin hollow globe of
+copper, eighteen inches diameter, supported by a small inverted basin,
+placed on a stand with four legs, A B C D, which have between them, at
+the bottom, a basin of two feet diameter. Through the leg C passes a
+concealed pipe, which comes from G, the bottom of the inside of the
+globe. This pipe goes by H V, and joins the upright pipe _u_ I, to
+make a jet, as I. The short pipe, _u_ I, which goes to the bottom, has
+a valve at _u_, under the horizontal pipe H V, and another valve at T,
+above that Horizontal pipe, under the cock at K. The use of this cock
+is to keep the fountain from playing in the day, if you think proper.
+The north pole N of the globe has a screw that opens a hole, whereby
+water is poured into the globe.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 7.]
+
+The machine being thus prepared, and the globe half filled with water,
+put it in an open place, when the heat of the sun rarefying the air as
+it heats the copper, the air will press strongly against the water,
+which, coming down the pipe, will lift up the valve at V, and shut the
+valve at u. The cock being opened, the water will spout out at I, and
+continue to play a long while, if the sun shines.
+
+
+_Inflammable Phosphorus._
+
+Take the meal of flour of any vegetable, put it into an iron pan over
+a moderate fire, and keep it stirring with an iron spoon till it
+changes to a black powder; to one part of this add four parts of raw
+alum. Make the whole into a fine powder; put it again into the iron
+pan, and keep stirring it till it almost catches fire, to prevent its
+forming into lumps, as it is apt to do when the alum melts; in which
+case it must be broken again, stirred about, and accurately mixed with
+the flour, till it emits no more fumes, and the whole appears a fine
+black powder.
+
+Put this powder in a clean dry phial with a narrow neck, filling it to
+about one-third of the top. Then stop the mouth of the phial with
+loose paper, so as to let the air pass freely through it, and leave
+room for the fumes to come through the neck. Place the phial in a
+crucible, encompassed on all sides with sand, so that it may not touch
+any part of the crucible, but a considerable space everywhere left
+between. The phial must be covered up with sand, leaving only a small
+part bare, by which you can discern whether the powder is ignited. In
+this state, the crucible is to be surrounded with coals, kindled
+slowly till it is well heated on all sides, and then the fire is to be
+raised, till the crucible and every thing in it is red-hot; keep it in
+this state an hour; after this, the fire still burning as fiercely,
+close up the orifice of the phial with wax, to exclude the air. Leave
+it to cool, and you will find in it a black dusty coal formed of the
+flour and alum.
+
+Shake a small quantity of this out of the phial into the cool air, and
+it will immediately take fire, but will not burn any thing. Keep the
+bottle dry, as even the air will spoil it effectually.
+
+
+_The Magical Mirrors._
+
+Make two holes in the wainscot of a room, each a foot high and ten
+inches wide, and about a foot distant from each other. Let these
+apertures be about the height of a man's head, and in each of them
+place a transparent glass in a frame, like a common mirror.
+
+Behind the partition, and directly facing each aperture, place two
+mirrors enclosed in the wainscot, in an angle of forty-five
+degrees.[B] These mirrors are each to be eighteen inches square: and
+all the space between them must be enclosed with pasteboard painted
+black, and well closed, that no light can enter; let there be also two
+curtains to cover them, which you may draw aside at pleasure.
+
+When a person looks into one of these fictitious mirrors, instead of
+seeing his own face he will see the object that is in front of the
+other; thus, if two persons stand at the same time before these
+mirrors, instead of each seeing himself; they will reciprocally see
+each other.
+
+There should be a sconce with a lighted candle, placed on each side of
+the two glasses in the wainscot, to enlighten the faces of the persons
+who look in them, or the experiment will not have so remarkable an
+effect.
+
+ [B] That is, half-way between a line drawn perpendicularly to
+ the ground and its surface.
+
+
+_To cause a brilliant Explosion under Water._
+
+Drop a piece of phosphorus, the size of a pea, into a tumbler of hot
+water; and, from a bladder furnished with a stop-cock, force a stream
+of oxygen directly upon it. This will afford a most brilliant
+combustion under water.
+
+
+_Fulminating Mercury._
+
+Dissolve 100 grains of mercury by heat, in an ounce and a half of
+nitric acid. This solution being poured cold upon two measured ounces
+of alcohol previously introduced into any convenient glass vessel, a
+moderate heat is to be applied, till effervescence is excited. A white
+fume then begins to appear on the surface of the liquor, and the
+powder will be gradually precipitated when the action ceases. The
+precipitate is to be immediately collected on a filter, well washed
+with distilled water, and cautiously dried in a heat not exceeding
+that of a water-bath. Washing the powder immediately is material,
+because it is liable to the re-action of the nitric acid; and, while
+any of the acid adheres to it, it is very subject to the action of
+light. From 100 grains of mercury, about 130 of the powder are
+obtained.
+
+This powder, when struck on an anvil with a hammer, explodes with a
+sharp stunning noise, and with such force as to indent both hammer and
+anvil. Three or four grains are sufficient for one experiment.
+
+
+_The Iron Tree._
+
+Dissolve iron filings in aqua fortis, moderately concentrated, till
+the acid is saturated; then add to it gradually, a solution of fixed
+alkali, (commonly called oil of tartar per deliquum.) A strong
+effervescence will ensue, and the iron, instead of falling to the
+bottom of the vessel, will afterwards rise so as to cover the sides,
+forming a multitude of ramifications heaped one upon the other, which
+will sometimes pass over the edge of the vessel, and extend themselves
+on the outside, with all the appearance of a plant.
+
+
+_To make any Number divisible by Nine, by adding a Figure to it._
+
+If (for example) the number named be 72,857, you tell the person who
+names it to place the number 7 between any two figures of that sum,
+and it will be divisible by 9; for if any number be multiplied by 9,
+the sum of the figures of the product will be either 9, or a number
+divisible by 9.
+
+
+_Arithmetical Squares._
+
+An arithmetical magical square consists of numbers so disposed in
+parallel and equal lines, that the sum of each, taken any way of the
+square, amounts to the same.
+
+Any five of these sums taken in a right line make 65. You will observe
+that five numbers in the diagonals A to D, and B to C, of the magical
+square, answer to the ranks E to F, and G to H, in the natural square,
+and that 13 is the centre number of both squares.
+
+ _A Natural Square._ _A Magical Square._
+ A G B A B
+ +--+--+--+--+--+ +--+--+--+--+--+
+ | 1| 2| 3| 4| 5| |11|24| 7|20| 3|
+ +--+--+--+--+--+ +--+--+--+--+--+
+ | 6| 7| 8| 9|10| | 4|12|25| 8|16|
+ +--+--+--+--+--+ +--+--+--+--+--+
+ E |11|12|13|14|15| F |17| 5|13|21| 9|
+ +--+--+--+--+--+ +--+--+--+--+--+
+ |16|17|18|19|20| |10|18| 1|14|22|
+ +--+--+--+--+--+ +--+--+--+--+--+
+ |21|22|23|24|25| |23| 6|19| 2|15|
+ +--+--+--+--+--+ +--+--+--+--+--+
+ C H D C D
+
+To form a magical square, first transpose the two ranks in the natural
+square to the diagonals of the magical square; then place the number 1
+under the central number 13, and the number 2 in the next diagonal
+downward. The number 3 should be placed in the same diagonal line; but
+as there is no room in the square, you are to place it in that part it
+would occupy if another square were placed under this. For the same
+reason, the number 4, by following the diagonal direction, falling out
+of the square, it is to be put into the part it would hold in another
+square, placed by the side of this. You then proceed to numbers 5 and
+6, still descending; but as the place 6 should hold is already filled,
+you then go back to the diagonal, and consequently place the 6 in the
+second place under the 5, so that there may remain an empty space
+between the two numbers. The same rule is to observed, whenever you
+find a space already filled.
+
+You proceed in this manner to fill all the empty cases in the angle
+where the 15 is placed: and as there is no space for the 16 in the
+same diagonal, descending, you must place it in the part it would hold
+in another square, and continue the same plan till all the spaces are
+filled. This method will serve equally for all sorts of arithmetical
+progressions composed of odd numbers; even numbers being too
+complicated to afford any amusement.
+
+
+_To find the Difference between two Numbers, the greatest of which is
+unknown._
+
+Take as many nines as there are figures in the smallest number, and
+subtract that sum from the number of nines. Let another person add
+that difference to the largest number, and, taking away the first
+figure of the amount, add it to the last figure, and that sum will be
+the difference of the two numbers.
+
+For example: Robert, who is 22, tells George, who is older, that he
+can discover the difference of their ages; he therefore privately
+deducts 22 from 99, and the difference, which is 77, he tells George
+to add to his age, and to take away the first figure from the amount,
+and add it to the last figure, and that last sum will be the
+difference of their ages. Thus, the difference between
+
+ Robert's age and 99, is 77
+ To which George adding his age 35
+ ----
+ The sum will be 112
+ ----
+ 12
+ 1
+ ----
+ Then by taking away the first figure, 1, }
+ and adding it to the last figure, 2, } 13
+ the sum is }
+ Which added to Robert's age 22
+ ----
+ Gives George's age, which is 35
+
+
+_The Boundless Prospect._
+
+Take a square box, about six inches long and twelve high, or of any
+other proportionate dimensions. Cover the inside with four flat pieces
+of looking-glass placed perpendicular to the bottom of the box. Place
+at the bottom any objects you please, as a piece of fortification, a
+castle, tents, soldiers, &c. On the top, place a frame of glass shaped
+like the bottom of a pyramid, as in Fig. 8, and so formed as to fit on
+the box like a cover. The four sides of this cover are to be composed
+of ground glass, or covered inside with gauze, so that the light may
+enter, and yet the inside be invisible, except at the top, which must
+be covered with transparent glass: when you look through this glass,
+the inside will present a pleasing prospect of a boundless extent;
+and, if managed with care, will afford a deal of amusement.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 8.]
+
+
+_To set Fire to a combustible Body by Reflection._
+
+Place two concave mirrors at about twelve feet distance from each
+other, and let the axis of each be in the same line. In the focus of
+one of them place a live coal, and in the focus of the other some
+gunpowder. With a pair of strong bellows keep blowing the coal, and
+notwithstanding the distance between them, the powder will presently
+take fire.
+
+The mirror may be either made of glass, metal, or pasteboard gilt.
+
+
+_To find the Number of Changes that may be rung on Twelve Bells._
+
+Multiply the numbers from 1 to 12 continually into each other, as
+follow: and the last product will give the number required.
+
+ 1
+ 2
+ --
+ 2
+ 3
+ --
+ 6
+ 4
+ --
+ 24
+ 5
+ ----
+ 120
+ 6
+ ----
+ 720
+ 7
+ -----
+ 5,040
+ 8
+ ------
+ 40,320
+ 9
+ -------
+ 362,880
+ 10
+ ---------
+ 3,628,800
+ 11
+ ----------
+ 39,916,800
+ 12
+ -----------
+ 479,001,600
+
+
+_To find how many square Yards it would require to write all the
+Changes of the Twenty-four Letters of the Alphabet, written so small,
+that each Letter should not occupy more than the hundredth part of a
+square Inch._
+
+By adopting the plan of the preceding article, the changes of the
+twenty-four letters will be found to be
+
+ 62,044,840,173,323,943,936,000.
+
+Now, the inches in a square yard being 1,296, that number multiplied
+by 100 gives 129,600, which is the number of letters each square yard
+will contain; therefore, if we divide the above row of figures,
+(the number of changes,) by 129,600, the quotient, which is
+478,741,050,720,092,160, will be the number of yards required to
+contain the above mentioned number of changes. But as all the 24
+letters are contained in every permutation, it will require a space
+24 times as large, _viz._,
+
+ 11,849,785,210,282,211,840.
+
+Now, as the surface of the whole globe only contains
+617,197,435,008,000 square yards, it would require a surface 18,620
+times as large as the earth to contain them.
+
+
+_The Enchanted Bottle._
+
+Fill a glass bottle with water to the beginning of the neck; leave
+the neck empty, and cork it. Suspend this bottle opposite a concave
+mirror, and beyond its focus, that it may appear reversed. Place
+yourself still further distant from the bottle; and instead of the
+water appearing, as it really is, at the bottom of the bottle, the
+bottom will be empty, and the water seen at the top.
+
+If the bottle be suspended with the neck downwards, it will be
+reflected in its natural position, and the water at the bottom,
+although in reality it is inverted, and fills the neck; leaving the
+bottom vacant. While the bottle is in this position, uncork it, and
+let the water run gradually out: it will appear, that while the real
+bottle is emptying, the reflected one is filling. Care must be taken
+that the bottle is not more than half or three parts full, and that no
+other liquid is used but water, as in either of these cases the
+illusion ceases.
+
+
+_The Solar Magic Lantern._
+
+Make a box, a foot high, eighteen inches wide, and about three inches
+deep. Two of the opposite sides of this box must be quite open, and in
+each of the other sides let there be a groove wide enough to admit a
+stiff paper or pasteboard. You fasten the box against a window, on
+which the sun's rays fall direct. The rest of the window should be
+closed up, that no light may enter.
+
+Next provide several sheets of stiff paper, blacked on one side. On
+these papers cut out such figures as your fancy may dictate; place
+them alternately in the grooves of the box, with their blacked sides
+towards you, and look at them through a large and clear glass prism;
+and if the light be strong, they will appear painted with the most
+lively colours. If you cut on one of these papers the form of a
+rainbow, about three-quarters of an inch wide, you will have a very
+good representation of the natural one.
+
+For greater convenience, the prism may be placed on a stand on the
+table, made to turn round on an axis.
+
+
+_The Artificial Rainbow._
+
+Opposite a window into which the sun shines direct suspend a glass
+globe, filled with clean water, by means of a string that runs over a
+pulley, so that the sun's rays may fall on it. Then drawing the globe
+gradually up, you will observe, when it comes to a certain height, and
+by placing yourself in a proper situation, a purple colour in the
+glass; and by drawing it up gradually higher, the other prismatic
+colours, blue, green, yellow, and red, will successively appear; after
+which, the colours will disappear, till the globe is raised to about
+fifty degrees, when they will again appear, but in an inverted order,
+the red appearing first, and the blue or violet last; on raising the
+globe a little higher, they will totally vanish.
+
+
+_The AEolipiles._
+
+The aeolipile is a small hollow globe of brass, or other metal, in
+which a slender neck or pipe is inserted. This ball, when made
+red-hot, is cast into a vessel of water, which will rush into its
+cavity, then almost void of air. The ball being then set on the fire,
+the water, by the rarefaction of the internal air, will be forced out
+in steam by fits, with great violence, and with strange noise.
+
+If to the necks of two or more of these balls, there be fitted those
+calls that are used by fowlers and hunters, and the balls placed on
+the fire, the steam rushing from them will make such a horrible noise,
+that it will astonish any person who is ignorant of the contrivance.
+
+
+_The Talking Busts._
+
+Procure two busts of plaster of Paris; place them on pedestals, on the
+opposite sides of the room. Let a thin tube, of an inch diameter, pass
+from the ear of one head through the pedestal, under the floor, and go
+up to the mouth of the other; taking care that the end of the tube
+that is next the ear of the one head, be considerably larger than that
+end which comes to the mouth of the other.
+
+Now, when a person speaks quite low into the ear of one bust, the
+sound is reverberated through the length of the tube, and will be
+distinctly heard by any one placing his ear to the mouth of the other.
+It is not necessary that the tube should come to the lips of the bust.
+If there be two tubes, one going to the ear, and the other to the
+mouth of each head, two persons may converse together, by whispers,
+without the knowledge of any person who may stand in the middle of the
+room.
+
+
+_The Inanimate Oracle._
+
+Place a bust on a pedestal in the corner of a room, and let there be
+two tubes, as in the preceding article, one to go from the mouth, and
+the other from the ear, through the pedestal and the floor to an under
+apartment; there may be also wires, that go from the under jaw and the
+eyes of the bust, by which they may be easily moved.
+
+A person being placed in the room underneath, and applying his ear to
+one of the tubes at a signal given, will hear any question asked, and
+can immediately reply, by applying his mouth to the tube which
+communicates below, at the same time moving the eyes by the wire, to
+accompany his speech.
+
+
+_The Solar Concerto._
+
+In a large case, similar to what is used for dials and spring clocks,
+the front of which, or at least the lower part, must be of glass,
+covered on the inside with gauze, place a barrel organ, which when
+wound up is prevented from playing by a catch that takes a toothed
+wheel at the end of the barrel. To one end of this catch join a wire,
+at the end of which is a flat circle of cork, of the same dimensions
+with the inside of a glass tube, in which it is to rise and fall. This
+tube must communicate with a reservoir that goes across the front part
+of the bottom of the case, which is to be filled with spirits, such as
+is used in thermometers.
+
+This case being placed in the sun, the spirits will be rarefied by the
+heat, and, rising in the tube, will lift up the catch or trigger, and
+set the organ in play; which will continue as long as it is kept in
+the sun; for the spirits cannot run out of the tube, that part of the
+catch to which the circle is fixed being prevented from rising beyond
+a certain point, by a check placed over it. Care must be taken to
+remove the machine out of the sun before the organ runs down, that its
+stopping may be evidently affected by the cold.
+
+In winter it will perform when placed before the fire.
+
+
+
+
+CURIOUS EXPERIMENTS WITH THE MAGIC LANTERN.
+
+
+The construction of this amusing optical machine is so well known,
+that to describe it would be superfluous; particularly as it can now
+be purchased at a very reasonable expense, at any of the opticians':
+but as many persons who have a taste for drawing might not be pleased
+with the designs to be had at the shops, or might wish to indulge
+their fancy in a variety of objects, which to purchase would become
+expensive, we here present our readers, in the first place, with the
+method of drawing them, which will be succeeded by a plain
+description of some very diverting experiments.
+
+
+_Of Painting the Glasses._
+
+You first draw on a paper, the size of the glass, the subject you mean
+to paint; fasten this at each end of the glass with paste, or any
+other cement, to prevent it from slipping. Then with some very black
+paint mixed with varnish, draw with a fine camels'-hair pencil, very
+lightly, the outlines sketched on the paper, which, of course, are
+reflected through the glass. Some persons affirm that those outlines
+can be more readily traced with japan writing ink, and a common pen
+with a fine nib; but this, even if it succeeds in making a delicate
+black outline, is sure to be effaced by damp or wet.
+
+It would improve the natural resemblance, if the outlines were drawn
+with a strong tint of each of the natural colours of the object; but
+in this respect you may please your own fancy. When the outlines are
+dry, colour and shade your figures; but observe, to temper your
+colours with strong white varnish. A pleasing effect will be produced,
+if you leave strong lights in some parts of the drapery, &c., without
+any colours. The best colours for this purpose are transparent ones;
+opaque or mineral colours will not do. The following are in most
+repute.
+
+ For Pink and crimson Lake or carmine.
+ Blue Prussian blue.
+ Green Calcined verdigris, or distilled ditto.
+ Yellow Gamboge.
+
+
+_To represent a Storm at Sea._
+
+Provide two strips of glass, whose frames are thin enough to admit
+both strips freely into the groove of the lantern. On one of these
+glasses paint the appearance of the sea from a smooth calm to a
+violent storm. Let these representations run gradually into each
+other, as in Fig. 9, and you will of course observe, that the more
+natural and picturesque the painting is, the more natural and pleasing
+will be the reflection.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 9.]
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 10.]
+
+On the other glass, Fig. 10, paint various vessels on the ocean,
+observing to let that end where the storm is, appear in a state of
+violent commotion, and the vessels as if raised on the waves in an
+unsettled position, with heavy clouds about them.
+
+You then pass the glasses slowly through the groove, and when you come
+to that part where the storm is supposed to begin, move them gently up
+and down, which will give the appearance of the sea and vessels being
+agitated; increase the motion till they come to the height of the
+storm. You will thus have a very natural representation of the sea and
+ships in a calm and storm; and as you gradually draw the glasses back,
+the tempest will subside, the sky appear clear, and the vessels glide
+gently over the waves.
+
+By the means of two or three glasses, you may also represent a battle
+on land, or a naval engagement, with a variety of other pleasing
+experiments.
+
+
+_To produce the appearance of a Spectre on a Pedestal in the middle of
+a Table._
+
+Enclose a small magic lantern in a box, Fig. 11, large enough to
+contain a small swing dressing-glass, which will reflect the light
+thrown on it by the lantern in such a way, that it will pass out at
+the aperture made at the top of the box; which aperture should be
+oval, and of a size adapted to the cone of light to pass through it.
+There should be a flap with hinges, to cover the opening, that the
+inside of the box may not be seen.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 11.]
+
+There must be holes in that part of the box which is over the lantern,
+to let the smoke out; and over this must be placed a chafing-dish of
+an oblong figure, large enough to hold several lighted coals. This
+chafing-dish, for the better carrying on the deception, may be
+enclosed in a painted tin box, about a foot high, with a hole at top,
+and should stand on four feet, to let the smoke from the lantern
+escape.
+
+There must also be a glass planned to rise up and down in the groove
+_a b_, and so managed by a cord and pulley, _c d e f_, that it may be
+raised up and let down by the cord coming through the outside of the
+box. On this glass, the spectre, (or any other figure you please,)
+must be painted in a contracted or equal form, as the figure will
+reflect a greater length than it is drawn.
+
+When you have lighted the lamp in the lantern, and placed the mirror
+in a proper direction, put the box on a table, and, setting the
+chafing-dish in it, throw some incense, in powder, on the coals. You
+then open the trap door and let down the glass in the groove slowly,
+and when you perceive the smoke diminish, draw up the glass, that the
+figure may disappear, and shut the trap door.
+
+This exhibition will afford a deal of wonder; but observe, that all
+the lights in the room must be extinguished; and the box should be
+placed on a high table, that the aperture through which the light
+comes out may not be seen.
+
+There are many other pleasing experiments which may be made with the
+magic lantern, but the limits of our work will not permit us to
+specify them, without excluding many other equally interesting
+subjects of a different nature.
+
+
+_The Artificial Landscape._
+
+Procure a box, as in Fig. 12, of about a foot long, eight inches wide,
+and six inches high, or any other dimensions you please, so they do
+not greatly vary from these proportions. At each of its opposite ends,
+on the inside of this box, place a piece of looking-glass that shall
+exactly fit: but at that end where the sight hole A is, scrape the
+quicksilver off the glass, through which the eye can view the objects.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 12.]
+
+Cover the box with gauze, over which place a piece of transparent
+glass, which is to be well fastened in. Let there be two grooves at
+each of the places C D E F, to receive two printed scenes, as follow:
+On two pieces of pasteboard, let there be skilfully painted, on both
+sides, any subject you think proper, as woods, bowers, gardens,
+houses, &c.; and on two other boards, the same subjects on one side
+only, and cut out all the white parts: observe also, that there ought
+to be in one of them some object relative to the subject, placed at A,
+that the mirror placed at B may not reflect the hole on the opposite
+side.
+
+The boards painted on both sides are to slide in the grooves C D E F,
+and those painted on one side are to be placed against the opposite
+mirrors A and B; then cover the box with its transparent top. This box
+should be placed in a strong light, to have a good effect.
+
+When it is viewed through the sight hole, it will present an unlimited
+prospect of rural scenery, gradually losing itself in obscurity; and
+be found well worth the pains bestowed on its construction.
+
+
+_To draw, easily and correctly, a Landscape, or any other Object,
+without being obliged to observe the Rules of Perspective, and without
+the Aid of the Camera Obscura._
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 13.]
+
+Procure a box of pasteboard, A B C D, Fig. 13, of about a foot and a
+half long, and made in the shape of a truncated pyramid, whose base, B
+D F G, is eight inches wide, and six inches high. Fix to the other end
+of it a tube of four or five inches long, and which you can draw out
+from the box more or less. Line the inside of the box with black
+paper, and place it on a leg or stand of wood, H, and on which it may
+be elevated or depressed by the hinge I.
+
+Take a small frame of wood, and divide it at every inch by lines of
+black silk drawn across it, forming forty-eight equal parts; divide
+these into still smaller equal parts, by lines of finer silk:[C] fix
+this frame at the end of B D, as the base of the pyramid.
+
+Provide a drawing-paper, divided into the same number of parts as in
+the frame, by lines, lightly drawn in pencil. It is not material of
+what size these divisions are; that will depend entirely on the size
+you propose to draw the objects by this instrument.
+
+Place this instrument opposite a landscape, or any other object that
+you want to draw, and fix the leg firmly on, or in the ground, that it
+may not shake; then turning it to the side you choose, raise or
+incline it, and put the tube further in or out, till you have gained
+an advantageous view of the object you intend to draw.
+
+Place your eye, E, by the instrument, which you have adjusted to the
+height of your eye, and, looking through the tube, carefully observe
+all that is contained in each division of the frame, and transpose it
+to the corresponding division in your paper; and if you have the least
+knowledge in painting or even drawing, you will make a very pleasing
+picture, and one in which all the objects will appear in the most
+exact proportion.
+
+By the same method you may draw all sorts of objects, as architecture,
+views, &c., and even human figures, if they remain some time in the
+same attitude, and are at a proper distance from the instrument.
+
+ [C] The different thicknesses of the silk serve to
+ distinguish more readily the corresponding divisions.
+
+
+_Illuminated Prospects._
+
+Provide yourself with some of those prints that are commonly used in
+optical machines, printed on very thin white paper; taking care to
+make choice of such as have the greatest effect from the manner in
+which the objects are placed in perspective. Place one of these on the
+borders of a frame, and paint it carefully with the most lively
+colours, making use of none that are terrestrial. Observe to retouch
+those parts several times where the engraving is strongest,[D] then
+cut off the upper part or sky, and fix that on another frame.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 14.]
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 15.]
+
+The prints being thus prepared, place them in a box, A B C D, Figs. 14
+and 15, the opening to which, E F G H, should be a little less than
+the print. Cover this opening with a glass, and paint all the space
+between that and the prints, which should be about two or three
+inches, black. The frame that contains the sky should be about an inch
+behind the other. In the back part of this box, which is behind the
+prints, and which may be about four inches deep, place four or five
+small candlesticks to hold wax lights, and cover that part entirely
+with tin, that it may be the more luminous.
+
+When the print is placed between the wax lights and the opening in the
+front of the box, and there is no other light in the room, the effect
+will be highly pleasing; especially if the lights are at a sufficient
+distance from each other, and not too strong, that they may not
+occasion any blots in the print. Those prints that represent the
+rising or setting of the sun will have a very picturesque appearance.
+Such as represent conflagrations have also a striking effect.
+
+There should be two grooves for the print next the glass, that you may
+insert a second subject before you draw away the first; and that the
+lights in the back of the box may not be discovered.
+
+You must not, thinking to make the print more transparent, cover it
+with varnish; for that will prevent the gradation of the colours from
+being visible. The frame should enter the side of the box by a groove,
+that a variety of subjects may be introduced.
+
+ [D] When you colour a print, place it before you, against a
+ piece of glass, in a position nearly erect, that it may be
+ enlightened by the sun. You may also colour both sides of the
+ print.
+
+
+
+
+EXPERIMENTS IN MAGNETISM.
+
+
+_The Magnetic Wand._
+
+Bore a hole three-tenths of an inch in diameter, through a round stick
+of wood; or get a hollow cane about eight inches long, and half an
+inch thick. Provide a small steel rod, and let it be very strongly
+impregnated with a good magnet: this rod is to be put in the hole you
+have bored through the wand, and closed at each end by two small ends
+of ivory that screw on, different in their shapes, that you may better
+distinguish the poles of the magnetic bar.
+
+When you present the north pole of this wand to the south[E] pole of a
+magnetic needle, suspended on a pivot, or to a light body swimming on
+the surface of the water, (in which you have placed a magnetic bar,)
+that body will approach the wand, and present that end which contains
+the south end of the bar: but if you present the north or south end of
+the wand to the north or south end of the needle, it will recede from
+it.
+
+ [E] For the more clearly explaining this, it is to be
+ observed, that the two ends of a magnet are called its poles.
+ When placed on a pivot, in just equilibrium, that end which
+ turns to the north is called the north pole, and the other
+ end the south pole.
+
+
+_The Mysterious Watch._
+
+You desire any person to lend you his watch, and ask him if it will go
+when laid on the table. He will, no doubt, say it will; in which case,
+you place it over the end of the magnet, and it will presently stop.
+You then mark the precise spot where you placed the watch, and, moving
+the point of the magnet, you give the watch to another person, and
+desire him to make the experiment; in which he not succeeding, you
+give it to a third (at the same time replacing the magnet) and he will
+immediately perform it.
+
+This experiment cannot be effected, unless you use a very strongly
+impregnated magnetic bar, (which may be purchased at the opticians',)
+and the balance of the watch must be of steel, which may be easily
+ascertained by previously opening it, and looking at the works.
+
+
+_The Magnetic Dial._
+
+Procure a circle of wood or ivory, about 5 or 6 inches diameter, which
+must turn quite free on a stand with a circular border; on the ivory
+or wood circle fix a pasteboard, on which you place, in proper
+divisions, the hours, as on a dial. There must be a small groove in
+the circular frame, to receive the pasteboard circle; and observe,
+that the dial must be made to turn so free, that it may go round
+without moving the circular border in which it is placed.
+
+Between the pasteboard circle and the bottom of the frame, place a
+small artificial magnet, that has a hole in its middle. On the outside
+of the frame, place a small pin, which serves to show when the
+magnetic needle is to stop. This needle must turn quite free on its
+pivot, and its two sides should be in exact equilibrium.
+
+Then provide a small bag, with five or six divisions, like a lady's
+work-bag, but smaller. In one of these divisions put small square
+pieces of pasteboard, on which are written the numbers from 1 to 12.
+In each of the other divisions put twelve or more similar pieces,
+observing that all the pieces in each division must be marked with the
+same number. The needle being placed upon its pivot, and turned
+quickly about, it will necessarily stop at that point where the north
+end of the magnetic bar is placed, and which you previously know, by
+the situation of the small pin in the circular border.
+
+You then present to any person that division of the bag which contains
+the several pieces on which is written the number opposite to the
+north end of the bar, and tell him to draw any one he pleases. Then
+placing the needle on the pivot, you turn it quickly about, and it
+must necessarily stop at that particular number.
+
+
+_The Magnetic Cards._
+
+Draw a pasteboard circle; you then provide yourself with two needles,
+similar to those used in the foregoing experiment, (which you must
+distinguish by some private mark,) with their opposite points touched
+with the magnet. When you place that needle whose pointed end is
+touched, on the pivot described in the centre of the circle, it will
+stop on one of the four pips, against which you have placed the pin
+in the frame; then take the needle off, and, placing the other, it
+will stop on the opposite point.
+
+Having matters thus arranged, desire a person to draw a card from a
+piquet pack, offering that card against which you have placed the pin
+of the dial, which you may easily do, by having a card a little longer
+than the rest. If he should not draw it the first time, as he probably
+may not, you must make some excuse for shuffling them again, such as
+letting the cards fall, as if by accident, or some other manoeuvre,
+until he fix on the card. You then tell him to keep it close, and not
+let it be seen. Then give him one of the two needles, and desire him
+to place it on the pivot, and turn it round, when it will stop at the
+colour of the card he chose; then taking that needle off, and
+exchanging it, unperceived, for the other, give it to a second person,
+telling him to do the same, and it will stop at the name of the
+identical card the first person chose.
+
+
+_The Magnetic Orrery._
+
+Construct a round box, Fig. 16, about eight inches diameter, and half
+an inch deep. On the bottom fix a circular pasteboard drawn like the
+figure. You are likewise to have another pasteboard, drawn exactly the
+same, which must turn freely in the box, by means of an axis placed on
+a pivot, one end of which is to be fixed in the centre of the circle.
+
+On each of the seven smaller circles on the pasteboard, which you have
+fixed at the bottom of the box, place a magnetic bar, two inches long,
+in the same direction with the diameters of those circles, and their
+poles, in the situations expressed in the figure.
+
+There must be an index like the hour hand of a dial, fixed on the axis
+of the central circle, by which the pasteboard circle in the box may
+be turned about; also a needle (forming in the figure the other hand)
+that will turn freely on the axis, without moving the circular
+pasteboard.
+
+In each of the places where the word _question_ is, write a different
+question; and in each of the seven circles where the planetary signs
+are, write two answers to each question; observing, that there must
+only be seven words in each question: for instance,
+
+In division No. 1, of the circle G, which stands opposite question
+No. 1, write the first word of the first answer. In the division No.
+2, of the next circle, write the second word; and so on to the last,
+which will be in the seventh division of the seventh circle.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 16.]
+
+In the eighth division of the first circle, write the first word of
+the second answer; in the ninth, the second word of the same answer;
+and so on to the fourteenth division of the seventh circle, which must
+contain the last word of that answer.
+
+The same must be done for all the seven questions, and to each of
+these must be assigned two answers, the words of which are to be
+dispersed through the seven circles.
+
+At the centre of each of these circles place a pivot, and have two
+sets of magnetic needles like the hands of a watch, the pointed end of
+one set being north, and the other south.
+
+Now, the index of the central circle being directed to any one of the
+questions, if you place one of the two magnetic needles on each of the
+seven lesser circles, they will fix themselves according to the
+directions of the bars on the corresponding circles at the bottom of
+the box, and consequently point to the seven words that compose the
+answer. If you place one of the other needles on each circle, it will
+point to the words that are diametrically opposite to those of the
+first answer, the north pole being in the place of the south pole of
+the other.
+
+You therefore present this orrery to any person, and desire him to
+choose one of the questions there written. You then set the index of
+the central circle to that question; and, putting one of the needles
+on each of the seven circles, you turn it about, and when they all
+settle, the seven words they point to compose the answer.
+
+The moveable needle, whose point in the figure stands at September, is
+to place against the names of the months; and when the party has fixed
+upon a question, you place that needle against the month in which he
+was born, which will make the ceremony appear a sort of magic
+divination. The planetary signs are merely intended to aid this
+deception, and give it the appearance of astrology.
+
+
+_The Magic Verse._
+
+The eight words which compose this Latin verse,
+
+ "_Tot sunt tibi dote, quot coeli sidera, virgo,_"[F]
+
+being privately placed in any one of the different combinations of
+which they are susceptible, and which are 40,320 in number, to tell
+the order in which they are placed.
+
+ [F] "Thy charms, O, Virgin! are as numerous as the stars of
+ heaven."
+
+Provide a box that shuts with hinges, and is eight inches long, three
+wide, and half an inch deep, Fig. 17. Have eight pieces of wood, about
+one-third of an inch thick, two inches long, and one and a half wide,
+which will therefore, when placed close together, exactly fill the
+box. In each of these pieces or tablets place a magnetic bar, with
+their poles, as is expressed in Fig. 18. The bars being covered over,
+write on each of the tablets, in the order they then stand, one of the
+words of the foregoing Latin verse.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 17.]
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 18.]
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 19.]
+
+On a very thin board of the same dimensions with the box, draw the
+eight circles, Fig. 19, A B C D E F G H, whose centres should be
+exactly over those of the eight tablets in the box, when the board is
+placed upon it. Divide each of those circles into eight parts, as in
+the figure, and in each of those divisions write one of the words of
+the Latin verse, and in the precise order expressed in the plate, so
+that when the board is placed over the box, the eight touched needles
+placed at the centre of the circles may be regulated by the poles of
+the bars in the box, and consequently the word that the needle points
+to in the circle will be the same with that inscribed on the tablet.
+Cover the board with a glass, to prevent the needles from rising off
+their pivots, as is done in the sea-compass.
+
+Over the board place four plates of glass, I L M N, Fig. 17, which
+will give the machine the figure of a truncated pyramid, of eight
+inches high. Cover it with a glass, or rather a board, in which are
+placed two lenses, O, of eight inches focus, and distant from each
+other about half an inch. Line the four plates of glass that compose
+the sides with very thin paper, that will admit the light, and at the
+same time prevent the company from seeing the circles on the board.
+
+These preparations being made, you give the box to any one, and tell
+him to place the tablets, on which the words are written privately, in
+what position he thinks proper, then to close the box, and, if he
+please, to wrap it up in paper, seal it, and give it to you. Then
+placing the board with the pyramid upon it, you immediately tell him
+the order in which the tablets are placed, by reading the words to
+which the needles on the circles point.
+
+
+
+
+INTERESTING EXPERIMENTS WITH THE AIR-PUMP.
+
+
+We shall not occupy the time of our readers by describing the form and
+nature of the air-pump; since those persons whose circumstances will
+enable them to have it, can purchase it properly made at an
+optician's, at less expense, and with far less trouble, than they can
+construct, or cause it to be constructed, themselves.
+
+
+_Bottles broken by Air._
+
+Take a square bottle of thin glass, and of any size. Apply it to the
+hole of the air-pump, and exhaust the air. The bottle will sustain the
+weight of the external air as long as it is able, but at length it
+will suddenly burst into very small particles, and with a loud
+explosion.
+
+An opposite effect will be produced, if the mouth of a bottle be
+sealed so close that no air can escape; then place it in the receiver,
+and exhaust the air from its surface. The air which is confined within
+the bottle, when the external air is drawn off, will act so powerfully
+as to break the bottle into pieces.
+
+
+_Glass broken by Air._
+
+Lay a square of glass on the top of an open receiver, and exhaust the
+air. The weight of the external air will press on the glass, and smash
+it to atoms.
+
+
+_The Hand fixed by Air._
+
+If a person hold his hand on an open receiver, and the air be
+exhausted, it will be fixed as if pressed by a weight of sixty pounds.
+
+
+
+_Water boiled by Air._
+
+Take water made so warm that you can just bear your hand in it, but
+that has not been boiled; put it under the receiver, and exhaust the
+air. Bubbles of air will soon be seen to rise, at first very small,
+but presently become larger, and will be at last so great, and rise
+with such rapidity, as to give the water the appearance of boiling.
+This will continue till the air is let into the receiver, when it will
+instantly cease.
+
+
+_Aerial Bubbles._
+
+Take a stone, or any heavy substance, and putting it in a large glass
+with water, place it in the receiver. The air being exhausted, the
+spring of that which is in the pores of the solid body, by expanding
+the particles, will make them rise on its surface in numberless
+globules, which resemble the pearly drops of dew on the tops of the
+grass. The effect ceases when the air is let into the receiver.
+
+
+_The floating Stone._
+
+To a piece of cork tie a small stone that will just sink it; and,
+putting it in a vessel of water, place it under the receiver. Then
+exhausting the receiver, the bubbles of air will expand from its
+pores, and, adhering to its surface, will render it, together with the
+stone, lighter than water, and consequently they will rise to the
+surface, and float.
+
+
+_Withered Fruit restored._
+
+Take a shrivelled apple, and, placing it under the receiver, exhaust
+the air. The apple will immediately be plumped up, and look as fresh
+as when first gathered: for this reason, that the pressure of the
+external air being taken off, the air in the apple extends it, so much
+indeed that it will sometimes burst. If the air be let into the
+receiver, the apple will be restored to its pristine shrivelled state.
+
+
+_Vegetable Air-Bubbles._
+
+Put a small branch of the tree with its leaves, or part of a small
+plant, in a vessel of water, and, placing the vessel in the receiver,
+exhaust the air.
+
+When the pressure of the external air is taken off, the spring of that
+contained in the air-vessels of the plant, by expanding the particles,
+will make them rise from the orifices of all the vessels for a long
+time together, and produce a most beautiful appearance.
+
+
+_The Mercurial Wand._
+
+Take a piece of stick, cut it even at each end with a penknife, and
+immerse it in a vessel of mercury. When the air is pumped out of the
+receiver, it will at the same time come out of the pores of the wood,
+through the mercury, as will be visible at each end of the stick. When
+the air is again let into the receiver, it falls on the surface of the
+mercury, and forces it into the pores of the wood, to possess the
+place of the air.
+
+When the rod is taken out, it will be found considerably heavier than
+before, and that it has changed its colour, being now all over of a
+bluish hue. If cut transversely, the quicksilver will be seen to
+glitter in every part of it.
+
+
+_The Magic Bell._
+
+Fix a small bell to the wire that goes through the top of the
+receiver. If you shake the wire, the bell will ring while the air is
+in the receiver; but when the air is drawn off, the sound will by
+degrees become faint, till at last not the least noise can be heard.
+As you let the air in again, the sound returns.
+
+
+_Feathers heavier than Lead._
+
+At one end of a fine balance, hang a piece of lead, and at the other
+as many feathers as will poise it; then place the balance in the
+receiver. As the air is exhausted, the feathers will appear to
+overweigh the lead, and when all the air is drawn off, the feathers
+will preponderate, and the lead ascend.
+
+
+_The self-moving Wheel._
+
+Take a circle of tin, about ten inches in diameter, or of any other
+size that will go into the receiver, and to its circumference fix a
+number of tin vanes, each about an inch square. Let this wheel be
+placed between two upright pieces on an axis, whose extremities are
+quite small, so that the wheel may turn in a vertical position with
+the least possible force. Place the wheel and axis in the receiver,
+and exhaust the air. Let there be a small pipe with a cock; one end of
+the pipe to be outside the top of the receiver, and the other to come
+directly over the vanes of the wheel.
+
+When the air is exhausted, turn the cock, and a current will rush
+against the vanes of the wheel, and set it in motion, which will
+increase, till the receiver is filled with air.
+
+
+_The Artificial Halo._
+
+Place a candle on one side of the receiver, and let the spectator
+place himself at a distance from the other side. Directly the air
+begins to be exhausted, the light of the candle will be refracted in
+circles of various colours.
+
+
+_The Mercurial Shower._
+
+Cement a piece of wood into the lower part of the neck of an open
+receiver, and pour mercury over it. After a few strokes of the pump,
+the pressure of the air on the mercury will force it through the pores
+of the wood in the form of a beautiful shower. If you take care that
+the receiver is clear and free from spots or dust, and it is dry
+weather, it will appear like a fiery shower, when exhibited in a dark
+room.
+
+
+_Magic Fountain._
+
+Take a tall glass tube, hermetically sealed both at top and bottom, by
+means of a brass cap screwed on to a stop-cock, and place it on the
+plate of the pump. When the air is exhausted, turn the cock, take the
+tube off the plate, and plunge it into a basin of mercury or water.
+Then the cock being again turned, the fluid, by the pressure of the
+air, will play upon the tube in the form of a beautiful fountain.
+
+
+_The Exploded Bladder._
+
+Take a glass pipe open at both ends, to one of which tie fast a wet
+bladder, and let it dry. Then place it on the plate of the pump. While
+the air presses the bladder equally on both sides, it will lie even
+and straight; but as soon as the air is exhausted, it will press
+inwards, and be quite concave on the upper side. In proportion as the
+air is exhausted, the bladder will become more stretched; it will soon
+yield to the incumbent pressure, and burst with a loud explosion. To
+make this experiment more easy, one part of the bladder should be
+scraped with a knife, and some of its external fibres taken off.
+
+
+_The Cemented Bladder._
+
+Tie the neck of the bladder to a stop-cock, which is to be screwed to
+the plate of the pump, and the air exhausted from the bladder; then
+turn the stop-cock, to prevent the re-entrance of the air, and unscrew
+the whole from the pump. The bladder will be transformed into two flat
+skins, so closely applied together, that the strongest man cannot
+raise them half an inch from each other; for an ordinary-sized
+bladder, of six inches across the widest part, will have one side
+pressed upon the other with a force equal to 396 pounds' weight.
+
+
+_Cork heavier than Lead._
+
+Let a large piece of cork be pendent from one end of a balance beam,
+and a small piece of lead from the other; the lead should rather
+preponderate. If this apparatus be placed under a receiver on the
+pump, you will find that when the air is exhausted, the lead, which
+seemed the heaviest body, will ascend, and the cork outweigh the lead.
+Restore the air, and the effect will cease. This phenomenon is only on
+account of the difference of the size in the two objects. The lead,
+which owes its heaviness to the operation of the air, yields to a
+lighter because a larger substance when deprived of its assistance.
+
+
+_The animated Bacchus._
+
+Construct a figure of Bacchus, seated on a cask; let his belly be
+formed by a bladder, and let a tube proceed from his mouth to the
+cask. Fill this tube with coloured water or wine, then place the whole
+under the receiver. Exhaust the air, and the liquor will be thrown up
+into his mouth. While he is drinking, his belly will expand.
+
+
+_The Artificial Balloon._
+
+Take a bladder containing only a small quantity of air, and a piece of
+lead to it, sufficient to sink it, if immersed in water. Put this
+apparatus into a jar of water, and place the whole under a receiver.
+Then exhaust the air, and the bladder will expand, become a balloon
+lighter than the fluid in which it floats, and ascend, carrying the
+weight with it.
+
+
+_Curious Experiments with a Viper._
+
+Many natural philosophers, in their eagerness to display the powers of
+science, have overlooked one of the first duties of life, humanity;
+and, with this view, have tortured and killed many harmless animals,
+to exemplify the amazing effects of the air-pump. We, however, will
+not stain the pages of this little work by recommending any such
+species of cruelty, which in many instances can merely gratify
+curiosity; but as our readers might like to read the effect on
+animals, we extract from the learned Boyle an account of his
+experiment with a viper.
+
+He took a newly-caught viper, and, shutting it up in a small receiver,
+extracted the air. At first, upon the air being drawn away, the viper
+began to swell; a short time after it gasped and opened its jaws; it
+then resumed its former lankness, and began to move up and down within
+the receiver, as if to seek for air. After a while, it foamed a
+little, leaving the foam sticking to the inside of the glass; soon
+after, the body and neck became prodigiously swelled, and a blister
+appeared on its back. Within an hour and a half from the time the
+receiver was exhausted, the distended viper moved, being yet alive,
+though its jaws remained quite stretched; its black tongue reached
+beyond the mouth, which had also become black in the inside: in this
+situation it continued for three hours; but on the air being
+re-admitted, the viper's mouth was presently closed, and soon after
+opened again; and these motions continued some time, as if there were
+still some remains of life.
+
+It is thus with animals of every kind; even minute microscopical
+insects cannot live without air.
+
+
+_Experiments with Sparrows._
+
+Count Morozzo placed successively several full-grown sparrows under a
+glass receiver, inverted over water. It was filled with atmospheric
+air, and afterwards with vital air. He found,
+
+ First.--That in _atmospheric_ air, HOURS MIN.
+ The first sparrow lived 3 0
+ The second sparrow lived 0 3
+ The third sparrow lived 0 1
+
+The water rose in the vessels eight lines during the life of the
+first; four during the life of the second; and the third produced no
+absorption.
+
+ Second.--In _vital_ air or _oxygen_, HOURS MIN.
+ The first sparrow lived 5 23
+ The second 2 10
+ The third 1 30
+ The fourth 1 10
+ The fifth 0 30
+ The sixth 0 47
+ The seventh 0 27
+ The eighth 0 30
+ The ninth 0 22
+ The tenth 0 21
+
+The above experiments elicit the following conclusions:--1. That an
+animal will live longer in vital than in atmospheric air.--2. That one
+animal can live in air, in which another has died.--3. That,
+independently of air, some respect must be had to the constitution of
+the animal; for the sixth lived 47 minutes, the fifth only thirty.--4.
+That there is either an absorption of air, or the production of a new
+kind of air, which is absorbed by the water as it rises.
+
+
+
+
+AMUSING EXPERIMENTS IN ELECTRICITY.
+
+
+_The Animated Feather._
+
+Electrify a smooth glass tube with a rubber, and hold a small feather
+at a short distance from it. The feather will instantly fly to the
+tube, and adhere to it for a short time; it will then fly off, and the
+tube can never be brought close to the feather till it has touched the
+side of the room, or some other body that communicates with the
+ground. If, therefore, you take care to keep the tube between the
+feather and the side of the room, you may drive it round to all parts
+of the room without touching it; and, what is very remarkable, the
+same side of the feather will be constantly opposite the tube.
+
+While the feather is flying before the smooth tube, it will be
+immediately attracted by an excited rough tube or a stick of wax, and
+fly continually from one tube to the other, till the electricity of
+both is discharged.
+
+
+_The Candle lighted by Electricity._
+
+Charge a small coated phial, whose knob is bent outwards so as to hang
+a little over the body of the phial; then wrap some loose cotton over
+the extremity of a long brass pin or wire, so as to stick moderately
+fast to its substance. Next roll this extremity of the pin, which is
+wrapped up in cotton, in some fine powdered resin; then apply the
+extremity of the pin or wire to the external coating of the charged
+phial, and bring, as quickly as possible, the other extremity, that is
+wrapped round with cotton, to the knob; the powdered resin takes fire,
+and communicates its flame to the cotton, and both together burn long
+enough to light a candle. Dipping the cotton in oil of turpentine will
+do as well, if you use a larger sized jar.
+
+
+_Candle Bombs._
+
+Procure some small glass bubbles, having a neck about an inch long,
+with very slender bores, by means of which a small quantity of water
+is to be introduced into them, and the orifice afterwards closed up.
+This stalk being put through the wick of a burning candle, the flame
+boils the water into a steam, and the glass is broken with a loud
+explosion.
+
+
+_The Artificial Spider._
+
+Cut a piece of burnt cork, about the size of a pea, into the shape of
+a spider; make its legs of linen thread, and put a grain or two of
+lead in it to give it more weight. Suspend it by a fine line of silk
+between an electrified arch and an excited stick of wax; and it will
+jump continually from one body to the other, moving its legs at the
+same time, as if animated, to the great surprise of the unconscious
+spectator.
+
+
+_The Miraculous Portrait._
+
+Get a large print (suppose of the king) with a frame and glass. Cut
+the print out at about two inches from the frame all round; then with
+thin paste fix the border that is left on the inside of the glass,
+pressing it smooth and close; fill up the vacancy, by covering the
+glass well with leaf-gold or thin tin-foil, so that it may lie close.
+Cover likewise the inner edge of the bottom part of the back of the
+frame with the same tin-foil, and make a communication between that
+and the tin-foil in the middle of the glass; then put in the board,
+and that side is finished. Next turn up the glass, and cover the
+fore-side with tin-foil, exactly over that on the back part; and when
+it is dry, paste over it the panel of the print that was cut out,
+observing to bring the corresponding parts of the border and panel
+together, so that the picture will appear as at first, only part of it
+behind the glass, and part before. Lastly, hold the print horizontally
+by the top, and place a little moveable gilt crown on the king's head.
+
+Now, if the tin-foil on both sides of the glass be moderately
+electrified, and another person take hold of the bottom of the frame
+with one hand, so that his fingers touch the tin-foil, and with the
+other hand attempt to take off the crown, he will receive a very smart
+blow, and fail in the attempt. The operator, who holds the frame by
+the upper end, where there is no tin-foil, feels nothing of the shock,
+and can touch the face of the king without danger, which he pretends
+is a test of his loyalty.
+
+
+_The Cup of Tantalus._
+
+You place a cup of any sort of metal on a stool of baked wood or a
+cake of wax. Fill it to the brim with any liquor; let it communicate
+with the branch by a small chain; and when it is moderately
+electrified, desire a person to taste the liquor, without touching the
+cup with his hands, and he will instantly receive a shock on his lips.
+The motion of the wheel being stopped, you taste the liquor yourself,
+and desire the rest of the company to do so; you then give your
+operator (who is concealed in an adjoining room) the signal, and he
+again charges the cup; you desire the same person to taste the liquor
+a second time, and he will receive a second shock.
+
+
+_Magical Explosion._
+
+Make up some gunpowder, in the form of a small cartridge, in each end
+of which put a blunt wire, so that the ends inside of the cartridge be
+about half an inch off each other; then join the chain that proceeds
+from one side of the electrifying battery, to the wire at the other
+end, the shock will instantly pass through the powder, and set it on
+fire.
+
+
+_Artificial Earthquake._
+
+In the middle of a large basin of water, lay a round wet board. On the
+board place any kind of building, made of pasteboard, of separate
+pieces, and not fastened together. Then, fixing a wire that
+communicates with the two chains of the electrifying battery, so that
+it may pass over the board and the surface of the water, upon making
+the explosion, the water will become agitated as in an earthquake, and
+the board, moving up and down, will overturn the structure, while the
+cause of the commotion is totally concealed.
+
+
+_The Magic Dance._
+
+From the middle of the brass arch suspend three small bells. The two
+outer bells hang by chains, and the middle one by a silk string, while
+a chain connects it with the floor. Two small knobs of brass, which
+serve as clappers, hang by silk strings, one between each two bells.
+Therefore, when the two outer bells communicating with the conductor
+are electrified, they will attract the clappers and be struck by them.
+The clappers being thus loaded with electricity, will be repelled, and
+fly to discharge themselves upon the middle bell, after which they
+will be again attracted by the outer bells; and thus, by striking the
+bells alternately, the ringing may be continued as long as the
+operator pleases.
+
+You next suspend a plate of metal from the same part of the arch to
+which the bells are connected; then, at the distance of a few inches
+from the arch, and exactly under it, place a metal stand _of the same
+size_. On the stand place several figures of men, animals, or what you
+please, cut in paper, and pretty sharply pointed at each extremity.
+When the plate that hangs from the arch is electrified, the figures
+will dance with astonishing rapidity, and the bells will keep ringing,
+to the no small entertainment of the spectators.
+
+
+_The Electrical Fountain._
+
+Suspend a vessel of water from the middle of the brass arch, and place
+in the vessel a small tube. The water will be one continued stream;
+and if the electrification be strong, a number of streams will issue,
+in form of a cone, the top of which will be at the extremity of the
+tube. This experiment may be stopped and renewed almost instantly, as
+if at the word of command.
+
+
+_The Electric Kite._
+
+Make a small cross of two light strips of cedar, the arms so long as
+to reach to the four corners of a large thin silk handkerchief, when
+extended; tie the corners of the handkerchief to the extremities of
+the cross; and you have the body of the kite, which being properly
+accommodated with a tail, loop, and string, will rise in the air like
+those made of paper; but this being silk, it is more adapted to bear
+the wet and wind of a thunder gust, without tearing. To the top of the
+upright stick of the cross is to be fixed a very sharp-pointed wire,
+rising a foot or more above the wood. To the end of the twine is to be
+tied a silk ribbon, and where the silk and twine join, a key may be
+fastened. This kite is to be raised when a thunder-storm appears to be
+coming on; and the person who holds the string must stand within a
+door or window, or under some cover, so that the silk ribbon may not
+be wet; and care must be taken that the twine do not touch the frame
+of the door or window. As soon as any of the thunder clouds come over
+the kite, the pointed wire will draw the electric fire from them, and
+the kite, with all the twine, will be electrified, while the loose
+filaments of the twine will stand out every way, and be attracted by
+an approaching finger. When the rain has wetted the kite and twine, so
+that it can conduct the electric fire freely, you will find it stream
+out plentifully from the key, on the approach of your knuckle. At this
+key an electric phial may be charged; and from electric fire thus
+obtained, spirits may be kindled, and all the other electric
+experiments performed which are usually done by the help of a rubbed
+glass or tube; and thereby the identity of the electric matter with
+that of lightning completely demonstrated.
+
+
+_The Magic Chase._
+
+On the top of a finely-pointed wire, rising perpendicularly from the
+conductor, let another wire, sharpened at each end, be made to move
+freely, as on a centre. If it be well balanced, and the points bent
+horizontally, in opposite directions, it will, when electrified, turn
+very swiftly round, by the re-action of the air against the current
+which flows from off the points. These points may be nearly concealed,
+and the figures of men and horses, with hounds, and a hare, stag, or
+fox, may be placed upon the wires, so as to turn round with them, when
+they appear as if in pursuit. The chase may be diversified, and a
+greater variety of figures upon them, by increasing the number of
+wires proceeding from the same centre.
+
+
+_The Unconscious Incendiary._
+
+Let a person stand upon a stool made of baked wood, or upon a cake of
+wax, and hold a chain which communicates with the branch. On turning
+the wheel he will become electrified; his whole body forming part of
+the prime conductor; and he will emit sparks whenever he is touched by
+a person standing on the floor.
+
+If the electrified person put his finger, or a rod of iron, into a
+dish containing warm spirits of wine, it will be immediately in a
+blaze; and if there be a wick or thread in the spirit, that
+communicates with a train of gunpowder, he may be made to blow up a
+magazine, or set a city on fire, with a piece of cold iron, and at the
+same time be ignorant of the mischief he is doing.
+
+
+_The Inconceivable Shock._
+
+Put in a person's hand a wire that is fixed on to the hook that comes
+from the chain, which communicates with one side of the battery, and
+in his other hand put a small wire with a hook at the end of it, which
+you direct him to fix on to a hook which comes from the other chain.
+On attempting to do this, he will instantly receive a shock from his
+body, without being able to guess the cause.
+
+Care should be taken that the shock be not too strong; and regard
+should be had to the constitution and disposition of the party, as a
+shock that would hardly affect one person, might be productive of
+very serious consequences to another.
+
+Much entertainment may be derived from concealing the chain that
+communicates with that which proceeds from the outside of the battery,
+under a carpet, and placing the wire that communicates with the chain
+from the inside, in such a manner that a person may put his hand on it
+without suspicion, at the same time that his feet are upon the other
+wire.
+
+The whole company may be made to partake of the shock, by joining
+hands, and forming a circle. The experiment may also be varied if they
+tread upon each other's toes, or lay their hands upon each other's
+heads. It might happen, by the latter method, that the whole company
+would be struck to the ground; but it will be productive of no danger,
+and very little inconvenience; on the contrary, it has happened that
+they have neither heard nor felt the shock.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+To exhibit the five following amusements in electricity, the room in
+which they are performed must be darkened.
+
+
+_The Miraculous Luminaries._
+
+You must previously prepare the following phosphorus: Calcine common
+oyster-shells, by burning them in the fire for half an hour; then
+reduce them to powder; of the clearest of which take three parts, and
+of flowers of sulphur one part; put the mixture into a crucible, about
+an inch and a half deep. Let it burn in a strong fire for rather
+better than an hour; and when it is cool, turn it out and break it in
+pieces; and, taking those pieces into a dark place, scrape off the
+parts that shine brightest, which, if good, will be a white powder.
+
+Then construct a circular board, of three or four feet diameter, on
+the centre of which draw in gum-water, or any adhesive liquid, a
+half-moon, of three or four inches diameter, and a number of stars
+round it, at different distances, and of various magnitudes. Strew the
+phosphorus over the figures, to the thickness of about a quarter of an
+inch, laying one coat over the other. Place this board behind a
+curtain; and when you draw the curtain up or back, discharge one
+electrifying jar or phial over each figure, at the distance of about
+an inch, and they will become illuminated, exhibiting a very striking
+resemblance of the moon and stars; and will continue to shine for
+about half an hour, their splendour becoming gradually more faint.
+
+
+_The Fiery Shower._
+
+On the plate put a number of any kind of seeds, grains of sand, or
+brass dust. The conductor being strongly electrified, those light
+particles will be attracted and repelled by the plate suspended from
+the conductor, with amazing rapidity, so as to exhibit a perfect fiery
+shower.
+
+Another way is by a sponge that has been soaked in water. When this
+sponge is first hung to the conductor, the water will drop from it
+very slowly; but when it is electrified, the drops will fall very
+fast, and appear like small globes of fire, illuminating the basin
+into which they fall.
+
+
+_The Illuminated Vacuum._
+
+Take a tall receiver that is very dry, and fix through the top of it,
+with cement, a blunt wire; then exhaust the receiver, and present the
+knob of the wire to the conductor, and every spark will pass through
+the vacuum in a broad stream of light, visible through the whole
+length of the receiver, let it be as tall as it will. This generally
+divides into a variety of beautiful rivulets, which are continually
+changing their course, uniting and dividing again in the most pleasing
+manner.
+
+If a jar be discharged through this vacuum, it presents the appearance
+of a very dense body of fire, darting directly through the centre of
+the vacuum, without touching the sides; whereas, when a single spark
+passes through, it generally goes more or less to the side, and a
+finger placed on the outside of the glass will draw it wherever a
+person pleases. If the vessel be grasped by both hands, every spark is
+felt like the pulsation of a large artery; and all the fire makes
+towards the hands. This pulsation is even felt at some distance from
+the receiver, and a light is seen between the hand and the glass.
+
+All this while, the pointed wire is supposed to be electrified
+positively; if it be electrified negatively, the appearance is
+astonishingly different; instead of streams of fire, nothing is seen
+but one uniform luminous appearance, like a white cloud, or the _milky
+way_ in a clear star-light night. It seldom reaches the whole length
+of the vessel, but generally appears only at the end of the wire, like
+a lucid ball.
+
+If a small phial be inserted in the neck of a small receiver, so that
+the external surface of the glass be exposed to the vacuum, it will
+produce a very beautiful appearance. The phial must be coated on the
+inside; and while it is charging, at every spark taken from the
+conductor into the inside, a flash of light is seen to dart at the
+same time from every part of the external surface of the phial, so as
+to quite fill the receiver. Upon making the discharge, the light is
+seen to run in a much closer body, the whole coming out at once.
+
+
+_The Illuminated Cylinder._
+
+Provide a glass cylinder, three feet long, and three inches diameter;
+near the bottom of it fix a brass plate, and have another brass plate,
+so contrived that you may let it down the cylinder, and bring it as
+near the first plate as you desire. Let this cylinder be exhausted and
+insulated, and when the upper part is electrified, the electric matter
+will pass from one plate to the other, when they are at the greatest
+distance from each other that the cylinder will admit. The brass plate
+at the bottom of the cylinder will also be as strongly electrified as
+if it were connected by a wire to the prime conductor.
+
+The electric matter, as it passes through this vacuum, presents a most
+brilliant spectacle, exhibiting sparkling flashes of fire the whole
+length of the tube, and of a bright silver hue, representing the most
+lively exhalations of the aurora borealis.
+
+
+_The Electric Aurora Borealis._
+
+Make a Torricellian vacuum[G] in a glass tube, about three feet long,
+and hermetically sealed.[H] Let one end of this tube be held in the
+hand, and the other applied to the conductor; and immediately the
+whole tube will be illuminated from one end; and when taken from the
+conductor will continue luminous, without interruption, for a
+considerable time, very often about a quarter of an hour. If, after
+this, it be drawn through the hand either way, the light will be
+uncommonly brilliant, and, without the least interruption, from one
+end to the other, even to its whole length. After this operation,
+which discharges it in a great measure, it will still flash at
+intervals, though it be held only at the extremity, and quite still;
+but if it be grasped by the other hand at the same time, in a
+different place, strong flashes of light will dart from one end to the
+other. This will continue for twenty-four hours, and often longer,
+without any fresh excitation. Small and long glass tubes, exhausted of
+air, and bent in many irregular crooks and angles, will, when properly
+electrified, exhibit a very beautiful representation of vivid flashes
+of lightning.
+
+ [G] A Torricellian vacuum is made by filling a tube with pure
+ mercury and then inverting it, in the same manner as in
+ making a barometer; for as the mercury runs out, all the
+ space above will be a true vacuum.
+
+ [H] A glass is hermetically sealed by holding the end of it
+ in the flame of a candle, till it begin to melt, and then
+ twisting it together with a pair of pincers.
+
+
+_The Electrical Orrery._
+
+By the motion of circulating points, we may in some measure imitate
+the revolutions of the heavenly bodies, forming what is called the
+_Electrical Orrery_. Let a single wire, with the extremities pointed
+and turned, be nicely balanced on a point; fix a small glass ball over
+its centre to represent the sun. At one extremity of the wire, let a
+small wire be soldered perpendicularly, and on this balance another
+small wire with its ends pointed and turned, and having a small pith
+ball in its centre, to represent the earth, and a smaller ball of the
+same kind at one of the angles, for the moon. Let the whole be
+supported upon a glass pillar, and be conducted by a chain proceeding
+from the prime conductor to the wire supporting the glass ball. Now,
+when the machine is put in motion, the wires will turn round, so that
+the ball representing the earth will move round the central ball, and
+the little ball at the angle of the smaller wire will at the same time
+revolve about the earth.
+
+
+_The Electrified Cotton._
+
+Take a small lock of cotton, extended in every direction as much as
+can conveniently be done, and by a linen thread about five or six
+inches long, or by a thread drawn out of the same cotton, tie it to
+the end of the prime conductor; then set the machine in motion, and
+the lock of cotton, on being electrified, will immediately swell, by
+repelling its filaments from one another, and will stretch itself
+towards the nearest conductor. In this situation let the cylinder be
+kept in motion, and present the end of your finger, or the knob of a
+wire, towards the lock of cotton, which will then immediately move
+towards the finger, and endeavour to touch it; but take with the
+other hand a pointed needle, and present its point towards the cotton,
+a little above the end of the finger, and the cotton will be observed
+immediately to shrink upwards, and move towards the prime conductor.
+Remove the needle, and the cotton will come again towards the finger.
+Present the needle, and the cotton will shrink again.
+
+
+_The Electric Sparks._
+
+When the prime conductor is situated in its proper place, and
+electrified by whirling the cylinder, if a metallic wire, with a ball
+at its extremity, or the knuckle or a finger be presented to the prime
+conductor, a spark will be seen to issue between them, which will be
+more vivid, and will be attended with a greater or less explosion,
+according as the ball is larger. The strongest and most vivid sparks
+are drawn from that end or side of the prime conductor which is
+farthest from the cylinder. The sparks have the same appearance
+whether they be taken from the positive or negative conductor; they
+sometimes appear like a long line of fire reaching from the prime
+conductor to the opposed body, and often (particularly when the spark
+is long, and different conducting substances in the line of its
+direction) it will have the appearance of being bent to sharp angles
+in different places, exactly resembling a flash of lightning.
+
+The figure of a spark varies with the superficial dimensions of the
+part from which it is taken. If it be drawn from a ball of two or
+three inches in diameter, it will have the appearance of a straight
+line; but if the ball from which it is drawn be much smaller, as half
+an inch in diameter, it will assume the zig-zag appearance above
+mentioned.
+
+
+_Dancing Balls._
+
+Take a common tumbler or glass jar, and having placed a brass ball in
+one of the holes of the prime conductor, set the machine in motion,
+and let the balls touch the inside of the tumbler; while the ball
+touches only one point, no more of the surface of the glass will be
+electrified, but by moving the tumblers about, so as to make the ball
+touch many points successively, all the points will be electrified, as
+will appear by turning down the tumbler over a number of pith or cork
+balls placed on a table. These balls will immediately begin to fly
+about.
+
+
+_The Leyden Phial._
+
+When a nail or piece of thick brass wire, &c., is put into a small
+apothecary's phial, and electrified, remarkable effects follow; but
+the phial must be very dry or warm. Rub it once beforehand with your
+finger, on which put some pounded chalk. If a little mercury, or a few
+drops of spirit of wine, be put into it, the experiment succeeds the
+better. As soon as this phial and nail are removed from the
+electrifying glass, or the prime conductor, to which it has been
+exposed, is taken away, it throws out a stream of flame so long, that
+with this burning-machine in your hand, you may take about sixty steps
+in walking about your room. When it is electrified strongly, you may
+take it into another room, and there fire spirits of wine with it. If,
+while it is electrifying, you put your finger, or a piece of gold
+which you hold in your hand, to the nail, you receive a shock which
+stuns your arms and shoulders.
+
+A tin tube, or a man placed upon electrics, is electrified much
+stronger by these means than in the common way. When you present this
+phial and nail it to a tin tube, fifteen feet long, nothing but
+experience can make a person believe how strongly it is electrified.
+Two thin glasses have been broken by the shock of it. It appears
+extraordinary, that when this phial and nail are in contact with their
+conducting or non-conducting matter, the strong shock does not follow.
+
+
+_The Self-moving Wheel._
+
+The self-moving wheel is made of a thin round plate of window-glass,
+seventeen inches in diameter, well gilt on both sides, to within two
+inches of the circumference. Two small hemispheres of wood are then
+fixed with cement, to the middle of the upper and under sides,
+centrally opposite, and in each of them a thick strong wire, eight or
+ten inches long, making together the axis of the wheel. It turns
+horizontally on a point at the lower end of its axis, which rests on a
+bit of brass, cemented within a glass salt-cellar. The upper end of
+its axis passes through a hole in a thin brass plate, cemented to a
+long and strong piece of glass, which keeps it six or eight inches
+distant from any non-electric, and has a small ball of wax or metal on
+its top.
+
+In a circle on the table which supports the wheel, are fixed twelve
+small pillars of glass, at about eleven inches distance, with a
+thimble on the top of each. On the edge of the wheel is a small
+leaden bullet, communicating by a wire with the upper surface of the
+wheel; and about six inches from it is another bullet, communicating,
+in like manner, with the under surface. When the wheel is to be
+charged by the upper surface, a communication must be made from the
+under surface with the table.
+
+When it is well charged it begins to move. The bullet nearest to a
+pillar moves towards the thimble on that pillar, and, passing by,
+electrifies it, and then pushes itself from it. The succeeding bullet,
+which communicates with the other surface of the glass, more strongly
+attracts that thimble, on account of its being electrified before by
+the other bullet; and thus the wheel increases its motion, till the
+resistance of the air regulates it. It will go half an hour, and make,
+one minute with another, twenty turns in a minute, which is six
+hundred turns in the whole, the bullet of the upper surface giving in
+each turn twelve sparks to the thimbles, which make seven thousand two
+hundred sparks, and the bullet of the under surface receiving as many
+from the thimble, these bullets moving in the time nearly two thousand
+five hundred feet. The thimbles should be well fixed, and in so exact
+a circle, that the bullets may pass within a very small distance of
+each of them.
+
+If instead of two bullets you put eight, four communicating with the
+upper surface, and four with the under surface, placed alternately,
+(which eight, at about six inches distance, complete the
+circumference,) the force and swiftness will be greatly increased, the
+wheel making fifty turns in a minute; but then it will not continue
+moving so long.
+
+
+_Resin ignited by Electricity._
+
+Wrap some cotton wool, containing as much powdered resin as it will
+hold, about one of the knobs of a discharging-rod. Then having charged
+a Leyden jar, apply the naked knob of the rod to the external coating,
+and the knob enveloped by the cotton to the ball of the wire. The act
+of discharging the jar will set fire to the resin.
+
+A piece of phosphorus or camphor wrapped in cotton wool, and used in
+the same way, will be much more easily inflamed.
+
+
+_Spirits ignited by Electricity._
+
+Hang a small ball with a stem to the prime conductor, so that the ball
+may project below the conductor. Then warm a little ardent spirit, by
+holding it a short time over a candle in a metallic spoon; hold the
+spoon about an inch below the ball, and set the machine in motion. A
+spark will soon issue from the ball and set fire to the spirits.
+
+This experiment may be varied different ways, and may be rendered very
+agreeable to a company of spectators. A person, for instance, standing
+upon an electric stool, and communicating with the prime conductor,
+may hold the spoon with the spirits in his hand, and another person,
+standing upon the floor, may set the spirits on fire, by bringing his
+finger within a small distance of it. Instead of his finger he may
+fire the spirits with a piece of ice, when the experiment will seem
+much more surprising. If the spoon be held by the person standing upon
+the floor, and the insulated person bring some conducting substance
+over the surface of the spirit, the experiment succeeds as well.
+
+
+_The Electric Balloon._
+
+Two balloons, made of the allantoides of a calf, are to be filled with
+hydrogen gas, of which each contains about two cubic feet. To each of
+these is to be suspended, by a silken thread about eight feet long,
+such a weight as is just sufficient to prevent it from rising higher
+in the air; they are connected, the one with the positive, the other
+with the negative conductor, by small wires about 30 feet in length;
+and being kept nearly 20 feet asunder, are placed as far from the
+machine as the length of the wires will admit. On being electrified,
+these balloons will rise up in the air as high as the wire will allow,
+attracting each other, and uniting as it were into one cloud, gently
+descending.
+
+
+_The Illuminated Water._
+
+Connect one end of a chain with the outside of a charged phial, and
+let the other end lie on the table. Place the end of another piece of
+chain at the distance of about a quarter of an inch from the former;
+and set a glass decanter of water on these separated ends. On making
+the discharge, the water will appear perfectly luminous.
+
+The electric spark may be rendered visible in water, in the following
+manner:--Take a glass tube of about half an inch in diameter, and six
+inches long; fill it with water, and to each extremity of the tube
+adapt a cork, which may confine the water; through each cork insert a
+blunt wire, so that the extremities of the wires within the tube may
+be very near one another; then, on connecting one of these wires with
+the coating of a small charged phial, and touching the other wire with
+the knob of it, the shock will pass through the wires, and cause a
+vivid spark to appear within their extremities within the tube. The
+charge in this experiment must be very weak, or there will be danger
+of bursting the tube.
+
+
+_The Electrified Ball._
+
+Place an ivory ball on the prime conductor of the machine, and take a
+strong spark, or send the charge of a Leyden phial through its centre,
+and the ball will appear perfectly luminous; but if the charge be not
+sent through the centre, it will pass over the surface of the ball and
+singe it. A spark made to pass through a ball of box-wood, not only
+illuminates the whole, but makes it appear of a beautiful crimson, or
+rather a fine scarlet colour.
+
+
+_Illuminated Phosphorus._
+
+Put some of Canton's phosphorus into a clear glass phial, and stop it
+with a glass stopper, or a cork and sealing-wax. If this wire be kept
+in a darkened room (which for this experiment must be very dark) it
+will give no light; but let two or three strong sparks be drawn from
+the prime conductor, when the phial is kept about two inches distant
+from the sparks, so that it may be exposed to that light, and this
+phial will receive the light and afterwards will appear illuminated
+for a considerable time.
+
+This powder may be stuck upon a board by means of the white of an egg,
+so as to represent figures of planets, letters, or any thing else, at
+the pleasure of the operator, and these figures may be illuminated in
+the dark, in the same manner as the above described phial.
+
+A beautiful method of expressing geometrical figures with the above
+powder, is to bend small glass tubes, of about the tenth part of an
+inch diameter, in the shape of the figure desired, and then to fill
+them with the phosphoric powder. These may be illuminated in the
+manner described; and they are not so subject to be spoiled, as the
+figures represented upon the board frequently are.
+
+
+_The Luminous Writing._
+
+Small pieces of tin-foil may be stuck on a flat piece of glass, so as
+to represent various fanciful figures. Upon the same principle is the
+word LIGHT produced, in luminous characters.
+
+It is formed by the small separations of the tin-foil pasted on a
+piece of glass fixed in a frame of baked wood. To use this, the frame
+must be held in the hand, and the ball presented to the conductor. The
+spark will then be exhibited in the intervals composing the word, from
+whence it passes to the hook, and thence to the ground by a chain. The
+brilliancy of this is equal to that of the spiral tubes.
+
+
+_The Electric Explosion._
+
+Take a card, a quire of paper, or the cover of a book; and keep it
+close to the outside coating of a charged jar: put one knob of the
+discharging-rod upon the card, quire of paper, &c., so that, between
+the knob and coating of the jar, the thickness of that card or quire
+of paper only is interposed; lastly, by bringing the other knob of the
+discharged rod near the knob of the jar, make the discharge, and the
+electric spark will pierce a hole (or perhaps several) quite through
+the card or quire of paper. This hole has a bur raised on each side,
+except the card, &c., be pressed hard between the discharging-rod and
+the jar. If this experiment be made with two cards instead of one,
+which, however, must be kept very little distant from one another,
+each of the cards, after the explosion, will be found pierced with one
+or more holes, and each hole will have burs on both surfaces of each
+card. The hole, or holes, are larger or smaller, according as the
+card, &c., is more damp or more dry. It is remarkable, that if the
+nostrils are presented to it, they will be affected with a sulphurous,
+or rather a phosphoric smell, just like that produced by an excited
+electric.
+
+If, instead of paper, a very thin plate of glass, resin, sealing-wax,
+or the like, be interposed between the knob of the discharging-rod and
+the outside coating of the jar, on making the discharge, this will be
+broken in several pieces.
+
+
+_Electrified Air._
+
+Fix two or three pointed needles into the prime conductor of an
+electrical machine, and set the glass in motion so as to keep the
+prime conductor electrified for several minutes. If now, an
+electometer be brought within the air that is contiguous to the prime
+conductor, it will exhibit signs of electricity, and this air will
+continue electrified for some time, even after the machine has been
+removed into another room. The air, in this case, is electrified
+positively; it maybe negatively electrified by fixing the needles in
+the negative conductor while insulated, and making a communication
+between the prime conductor and the table, by means of a chain or
+other conducting substance.
+
+The air of a room may be electrified in another way. Charge a large
+jar, and insulate it; then connect two or more sharp-pointed wires or
+needles, with the knob of the jar, and connect the outside coating of
+the jar with the table. If the jar be charged positively, the air of
+the room will soon become positively electrified likewise; but if the
+jar be charged negatively, the electricity communicated by it to the
+air will also become negative. A charged jar being held in one hand,
+and the flame of an insulated candle held in the other being brought
+near the knob of the jar, will also produce the same effect.
+
+
+_Another Electric Orrery._ (See page 92.)
+
+From the prime conductor of an electric machine suspend six concentric
+hoops of metal at different distances from each other, in such a
+manner as to represent in some measure the proportional distances of
+the planets. Under these, and at a distance of about half an inch,
+place a metallic plate, and upon this plate, within each of the hoops,
+a glass bubble blown very thin and light. On electrifying the hoops,
+the bubbles will be immediately attracted by them, and will continue
+to move round the hoops as long as the electrification continues. If
+the electricity be very strong, the bubbles will frequently be driven
+off, run hither and thither on the plate, making a variety of
+surprising motions round their axis; after which they will return to
+the hoop, and circulate as before; and if the room be darkened, they
+will all appear beautifully illuminated with electric light.
+
+
+_The Electric Ball._
+
+Provide a ball of cork about three-quarters of an inch in diameter,
+hollowed out in the internal part by cutting it in two hemispheres,
+scooping out the inside, and then joining them together with paste.
+Having attached this to a silk thread between three and four feet in
+length, suspend it in such a manner that it may just touch the knob of
+an electric jar, the outside of which communicates with the ground. On
+the first contact it will be repelled to a considerable distance, and
+after making several vibrations, will remain stationary; but if a
+candle be placed at some distance behind it, so that the ball may be
+between it and the bottle, the ball will instantly begin to move, and
+will turn round the knob of the jar, moving in a kind of ellipsis as
+long as there is any electricity in the bottle. This experiment is
+very striking, though the motions are far from being regular; but it
+is remarkable that they always affect the elliptical rather than the
+circular form.
+
+
+_To spin Sealing-wax into Threads by Electricity._
+
+Stick a small piece of sealing-wax on the end of a wire, and set fire
+to it. Then put an electrical machine in motion, and present the wax
+just blown out at the distance of some inches from the prime
+conductor. A number of extremely fine filaments will immediately dart
+from the sealing-wax to the conductor, on which they will be condensed
+into a kind of net-work resembling wool.
+
+If the wire with the sealing-wax be stuck into one of the holes of the
+conductor, and a piece of paper be presented at a moderate distance
+from the wax, just after it has been ignited, on setting the machine
+in motion, a net-work of wax will be formed on the paper. The same
+effect, but in a slighter degree, will be produced, if the paper be
+briskly rubbed with a piece of elastic gum, and the melting
+sealing-wax be held pretty near the paper immediately after rubbing.
+
+If the paper thus painted, as it were, with sealing-wax be gently
+warmed by holding the back of it to the fire, the wax will adhere to
+it, and the result of the experiment will thus be rendered permanent.
+
+
+_The Electrified Camphor._
+
+A beautiful experiment of the same nature is made with camphor. A
+spoon holding a piece of lighted camphor is made to communicate with
+an electrified body, as the prime conductor of a machine; while the
+conductor continues electrified by keeping the machine in motion, the
+camphor will throw out ramifications, and appear to shoot like a
+vegetable.
+
+
+
+
+AMUSEMENTS WITH CARDS.
+
+
+Many of the following recreations are performed by arithmetical
+calculations, and may therefore be considered as connected with
+science; but as it has been the aim of this work to unite amusement
+with instruction, some experiments on this subject are introduced, the
+performance of which depends on dexterity of hand. As this is only to
+be acquired by practice, and, after all, is merely a mechanical
+operation, the study of it will produce little useful knowledge,
+though it may afford much entertainment; but as it must be gratifying
+to know the method by which they are performed by those persons
+skilled in such manoeuvres, who publicly exhibit them to the
+astonishment of the spectator, they are presented to our readers, that
+when they recognize them at any of these exhibitions, their eyes may
+not be in danger of deceiving their judgment.
+
+
+_To tell the Number of Points on Three Cards, placed under Three
+different Parcels of Cards._
+
+You first premise that the ace counts for eleven; the court cards ten
+each; and the others according to the number of their pips. You then
+propose to any person in company to choose three cards, and to place
+over each as many as will make the number of the points of that card,
+fifteen; take the remaining cards, and, under the appearance of
+looking for a particular card, count how many there are, and by adding
+sixteen to that number, you will have the amount of the pips on the
+three cards. For example:
+
+Suppose a person choose a seven, a ten, and an ace; then over the
+seven he must place eight cards; over the ten, five cards; and over
+the ace, four cards. In this instance there will remain twelve cards;
+to which if you add sixteen it will make twenty-eight, which is the
+amount of the pips on the three cards.
+
+
+_The Ten Duplicates._
+
+Select any twenty cards; let any person shuffle them; lay them by
+pairs on the board, without looking at them. You next desire several
+persons, (as many persons as there are pairs on the table,) each to
+look at different pairs and remember what cards compose them. You then
+take up all the cards in the order they lay, and replace them with
+their faces uppermost on the table, according to the order of the
+letters in the following words:
+
+ M U T U S
+ 1 2 3 4 5
+ D E D I T
+ 6 7 8 9 10
+ N O M E N
+ 11 12 13 14 15
+ C O C I S
+ 16 17 18 19 20
+
+(These words convey no meaning.)--You will observe, that they contain
+ten letters repeated, or two of each sort. You therefore ask each
+person which row or rows the cards he looked at are in; if he say the
+first, you know they must be the second and fourth, there being two
+letters of a sort (two U's) in that row; if he say the second and
+fourth, they must be the ninth and nineteenth, (two I's,) and so of
+the rest. This amusement, which is very simple, and requires very
+little practice, will be found to excite, in those who are
+unacquainted with the key, the greatest astonishment.
+
+The readiest way is to have a fac-simile of the key drawn on a card,
+to which you refer.
+
+
+_To tell how many Cards a Person takes out of a Pack, and to specify
+each Card._
+
+To perform this, you must so dispose a PIQUET pack of cards, that you
+can easily remember the order in which they are placed. Suppose, for
+instance, they are placed according to the words in the following
+line,
+
+ _Seven Aces, Eight Kings, Nine Queens, and Ten Knaves;_
+
+and that every card be of a different suite, following each other in
+this order: spades, clubs, hearts, and diamonds. Then the eight first
+cards will be the seven of spades, ace of clubs, eight of hearts, king
+of diamonds, nine of spades, queen of clubs, ten of hearts, and knave
+of diamonds, and so of the rest.
+
+You show that the cards are placed promiscuously, and you offer them
+with their backs upward to any one, that he may draw what quantity he
+pleases; you then dexterously look at the card that precedes and that
+which follows those he has taken. When he has carefully counted the
+cards, which is not to be done in your presence, (and, in order to
+give you time for recollection, you tell him to do it twice over, that
+he may be certain,) you then take them from him, mix them with the
+pack, shuffle, and tell him to shuffle.
+
+During all this time you recollect, by the foregoing line, all the
+cards he took out; and as you lay them down, one by one, you name each
+card.
+
+Unless a person has a most excellent memory, he had better not attempt
+the performance of the above amusement, as the least forgetfulness
+will spoil the whole, and make the operator appear ridiculous.
+
+
+_A Hundred different Names being written on the Cards, to tell the
+particular Name any Person thought of._
+
+Write on ten cards a hundred different names, observing that the
+last name on each card begins with one of the letters in the word
+INDROMACUS, which letters, in the order they stand, answer the numbers
+1 to 10, thus:
+
+ I N D R O M A C U S
+ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
+
+On ten other cards write the same names, with this restriction, that
+the first name on every card must be taken from the first of the other
+cards, whose last name begins with I; the second name must be taken
+from that whose last name begins with N; and so of the rest. Then let
+any person choose a card out of the first ten, and after he has fixed
+on a name, give it to you again, when you carefully note the last
+name, by which you know the number of that card. You then take the
+other ten cards, and, after shuffling them, show them to the person,
+and ask if he sees the name he chose, and when he answers in the
+affirmative, you look to that name which is the same in number from
+the top with the number of the card he took from the other parcel, and
+that will be the name he fixed on.
+
+Instead of ten cards there may be twenty to each parcel, by adding
+duplicates to each card; which will make it appear more mysterious,
+and will not at all embarrass it, as you have only to remember the
+last name on each card. Instead of names you may write questions on
+one of the parcels, and answers on the other.
+
+
+_Several different Cards being fixed on by different Persons, to name
+that on which each Person fixed._
+
+There must be as many different cards shown to _each person_, as there
+are cards to choose; so that, if there are three persons, you must
+show three cards to each person, telling the first to retain _one_ in
+his memory. You then lay those three cards down, and show three others
+to the second person, and three others to the third. Next take up the
+first person's cards, and lay them down separately, one by one, with
+their faces upwards; place the second person's cards over the first,
+and the third over the second's, so that there will be one card in
+each parcel belonging to each person. You then ask each of them in
+which parcel his card is, and by the answer you immediately know which
+card it is; for the first person's will always be the first, the
+second person's the second, and the third person's the third in that
+parcel where each says his card is.
+
+This amusement may be performed with a single person, by letting him
+fix on three, four, or more cards. In this case you must show him as
+many parcels as he is to choose cards, and every parcel must consist
+of that number, out of which he is to fix on one; and you then proceed
+as before, he telling you the parcel that contains each of his cards.
+
+
+_To name the Rank of a Card that a Person has drawn from a Piquet
+Pack._
+
+The rank of a card means whether it be an ace, king, queen, &c. You
+therefore first fix a certain number to each card; thus you call the
+king four, the queen three, the knave two, the ace one, and the others
+according to the number of their pips.
+
+You then shuffle the cards, and let a person draw any one of them;
+then turning up the remaining cards, you add the number of the first
+to that of the second, the second to the third, and so on, till it
+amounts to ten, which you then reject, and begin again; or if it be
+more, reject the ten, and carry the remainder to the next card, and so
+on to the last; and to the last amount add four, and subtract that sum
+from ten, if it be less, or from twenty, if it be more than ten, and
+the remainder will be the number of the card that was drawn; as for
+example, if the remainder be two, the card drawn was a knave; if
+three, a queen, and so on.
+
+
+_To tell the Amount of the Numbers of any two Cards drawn from a
+common Pack._
+
+Each court card in this amusement counts for ten, and the other cards
+according to the number of their pips. Let the person who draws the
+cards add as many more cards to each of those he has drawn as will
+make each of their numbers twenty-five. Then take the remaining cards
+in your hand, and, seeming to search for some card among them, tell
+them over to yourself, and their number will be the amount of the two
+cards drawn.
+
+For example.--Suppose the person has drawn a ten and a seven, then he
+must add fifteen cards to the first, to make the number twenty-five,
+and eighteen to the last, for the same reason; now fifteen and
+eighteen make thirty-three, and the two cards themselves make
+thirty-five, which deducted from fifty-two, leave seventeen, which
+must be the number of the remaining cards, and also of the two cards
+drawn.
+
+You may perform this amusement without touching the cards, thus:
+
+Let the person who has drawn the two cards deduct the number of each
+of them from twenty-six, which is half the number of the pack, and
+after adding the remainders together, let him tell you the amount,
+which you privately deduct from fifty-two, the total number of all the
+cards, and the remainder will be the amount of the two cards.
+
+_Example._--Suppose the two cards to be as before, ten and seven; then
+the person deducting ten from twenty-six, there remain sixteen, and
+deducting seven from twenty-six, there remain nineteen; these two
+remainders added together make thirty-five, which you subtract from
+fifty-two; and there must remain seventeen for the amount of the two
+cards, as before.
+
+
+_To tell the Amount of the Numbers of any Three Cards that a Person
+shall draw from the Pack._
+
+After the person has drawn his three cards, draw one yourself and lay
+it aside, for it is necessary that the number of the remaining cards
+be divisible by three, which they will not be in a pack of fifty-two
+cards, if only three be drawn. The card you draw, you may call the
+confederate, and pretend it is by the aid of that card you discover
+the amount of the others. Then tell the party to add as many more to
+each of his cards as will make its number sixteen, which is the third
+part of the remaining forty-eight cards; therefore, suppose he has
+drawn a ten, a seven, and a six; then, to the first he must add six
+cards, to the second nine, and to the third ten, which together make
+twenty-five, and the four cards drawn being added to them make
+twenty-nine. You then take the remaining cards, and, telling them
+over, as in the last amusement, you find their number to be
+twenty-three, the amount of the three cards the person drew.
+
+This amusement may also be performed without touching the cards,
+thus:--When the party has drawn his three cards, and you have drawn
+one, let him deduct the number of each of the cards he has drawn from
+seventeen, which is one-third of the pack after you have drawn your
+card; and let him tell you the amount of the several remainders, to
+which you privately add one to the card you drew, and, deducting that
+amount from fifty-two, (the whole number of the cards,) the remainder
+will be the amount of the three cards drawn.
+
+_Example._--Suppose the three cards to be ten, seven, and six, as
+before; then, each of those numbers subtracted from seventeen, the
+remainders will be respectively, seven, ten, and eleven, which, added
+together, make twenty-eight, to which the single card you drew being
+reckoned as one, and added, makes twenty-nine; and that number
+deducted from fifty-two, leaves twenty-three, which is the amount of
+the three cards the party drew.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+The following amusements principally depend on dexterity of hand; and,
+as what is termed _making the pass_, will be necessary to be acquired,
+to enable the operator to perform many of them, we subjoin the
+following explanation of this term:
+
+_How to make the Pass._--Hold the pack of cards in your right hand, so
+that the palm of your hand may be under the cards: place the thumb of
+that hand on one side of the pack; the first, second, and third
+fingers on the other side, and your little finger between those cards
+that are to be brought to the top, and the rest of the pack. Then
+place your left hand over the cards in such a manner that the thumb
+may be at C, the fore-finger at A, and the other fingers at B, as in
+the following figure:
+
+ +----------------+ +----------------+
+ | _Bottom._ | | _Top._ |
+ | | | |
+ | 2 | | |
+ | | | |
+ | _Thumb._ | | |
+ | 3 | | |
+ | 4 | | |
+ | | | |
+ | | | |
+ |_Little Finger._| | |
+ +----------------+ +----------------+
+ C
+
+The hands and the two parts of the cards being thus disposed, you draw
+off the lower cards, confined by the little finger and the other parts
+of the right hand, and place them, with an imperceptible motion, on
+the top of the pack.
+
+But before you attempt any of the tricks that depend on _making the
+pass_, you must have great practice, and be able to perform it so
+dexterously and expeditiously, that the eye cannot detect the movement
+of the hand; or you may, instead of deceiving others, expose yourself.
+
+_The Long Card._--Another stratagem, connected with the performance of
+many of the following tricks, is what is termed the _Long Card_; that
+is, a card, either a trifle longer or wider than the other cards, not
+perceptible to the eye of the spectator, but easily to be
+distinguished by the touch of the operator.
+
+
+_The Divining Card._
+
+Provide a pack in which there is a long card; open it at that part
+where the long card is, and present the pack to a person in such a
+manner that he will naturally draw that card. You then tell him to put
+it into any part of the pack, and shuffle the cards. You take the
+pack, and offer the same card in like manner to a second or third
+person, taking care that they do not stand near enough to see the card
+each other draws.
+
+You then draw several cards yourself, among which is the long card,
+and ask each of the parties if his card be among those cards, and he
+will naturally say _yes_, as they have all drawn the same card. You
+then shuffle all the cards together, and, cutting them at the long
+card, you hold it before the first person, so that the others may not
+see it, and tell him that is his card. You then put it in the pack,
+shuffle it, cut it again at the same card, and hold it to the second
+person.
+
+You can perform this recreation without the long card, in the
+following manner:
+
+Let a person draw any card, and replace it in the pack. You then _make
+the pass_, (see p. 107,) and bring that card to the top of the pack,
+and shuffle them, without losing sight of that card. You then offer
+that card to a second person, that he may draw it, and put it in the
+middle of the pack. You _make the pass_, and shuffle the cards a
+second time in the same manner, and offer the card to a third person,
+and so again to a fourth or fifth.
+
+
+_The Four Confederate Cards._
+
+A person draws four cards from the pack, and you tell him to remember
+one of them. He then returns them to the pack, and you dexterously
+place two under and two on the top of the pack. Under the bottom ones
+you place four cards of any sort, and then, taking eight or ten from
+the bottom cards, you spread them on the table, and ask the person if
+the card he fixed on be among them. If he say _no_, you are sure it is
+one of the two cards on the top. You then pass those two cards to the
+bottom and, drawing off the lowest of them, you ask if that is not his
+card. If he again say _no_, you take up that card, and bid him draw
+his card from the bottom of the pack. If, on the contrary, he say his
+cards _are_ among those you _first_ drew from the bottom, you must
+dexterously take up the four cards you put under them, and, placing
+those on the top, let the other two be the bottom cards of the pack,
+which you are to draw in the manner before described.
+
+
+_The Numerical Cards._
+
+Let the long card be the sixteenth in the pack of piquet cards. Take
+ten or twelve cards from the top of the pack, and, spreading them on
+the table, desire a person to think on any one of them, and to observe
+the number it is from the first card. Make the pass at the long card,
+which will then be at the bottom. Then ask the party the number his
+card was at, and, counting to yourself from that number to sixteen,
+turn the cards up, one by one, from the bottom. Then stop at the
+seventeenth card, and ask the person if he has seen his card, when he
+will say _no_. You then ask him how many more cards you shall draw
+before his card appears; and when he has named the number, you draw
+the card aside with your finger, turn up the number of cards he
+proposed, and throw down the card he fixed on.
+
+
+_The Card found out by the Point of the Sword._
+
+When a card has been drawn, you place it under the long card, and by
+shuffling them dexterously, you bring it to the top of the pack. Then
+lay or throw the pack on the ground, observing where the top card
+lies. A handkerchief is then bound round your eyes, which ought to be
+done by a confederate, in such a way that you can see the ground. A
+sword is put into your hand, with which you touch several of the
+cards, as if in doubt, but never losing sight of the top card, in
+which at last you fix the point of the sword, and present it to the
+party who drew it.
+
+
+_The Card hit upon by the Guess._
+
+Spread part of the pack before a person, in such way that only one
+court card is visible; and so arrange it, that it shall appear the
+most prominent and striking card. You desire him to think on one; and
+observe if he fix his eye on the court card. When he tells you he has
+determined on one, shuffle the cards, and, turning them up one by one,
+when you come to the court card tell him that is the one.
+
+If he does not seem to fix his eye on the court card, you should not
+hazard the experiment; but frame an excuse for performing some other
+amusement; neither should it be attempted with those who are
+conversant with these sort of deceptions.
+
+
+_The Card changed by Word of Command._
+
+You must have two cards of the same sort in the pack, (say the king of
+spades.) Place one next the bottom card, (say seven of hearts,) and
+the other at top. Shuffle the cards without displacing those three,
+and show a person that the bottom card is the seven of hearts. This
+card you dexterously slip aside with your finger, which you have
+previously wetted, and, taking the king of spades from the bottom,
+which the person supposes to be the seven of hearts, lay it on the
+table, telling him to cover it with his hand.
+
+Shuffle the cards again, without displacing the first and last card,
+and, shifting the other king of spades from the top to the bottom,
+show it to another person. You then draw that privately away, and,
+taking the bottom card, which will then be the seven of hearts, you
+lay that on the table, and tell the second person (who believes it to
+be the king of spades) to cover it with his hand.
+
+You then command the cards to change places; and when the two parties
+take off their hands and turn up the cards, they will see, to their
+great astonishment, that your commands are obeyed.
+
+
+_The Three Magical Parties._
+
+Offer the long card to a person, that he may draw it, and replace it
+in any part of the pack he pleases. _Make the pass_, and bring that
+card to the top. Next divide the pack in three parcels, putting the
+long card in the middle heap. You then ask the person which of the
+three heaps his card shall be in. He will, probably, say the middle;
+in which case you immediately show it to him. But if he say either of
+the others, you take all the cards in your hand, placing the parcel he
+has named over the other two, and observing to put your little finger
+between that and the middle heap, at the top of which is the card he
+drew. You then ask at what number in that heap he will have his card
+appear. If, for example, he say the sixth, you tell down five cards
+from the top of the pack, and then, dexterously making the pass, you
+bring the long card to the top, and tell it down as the sixth.
+
+
+_The Magic Vase._
+
+Construct a vase of wood, or pasteboard, see Fig. 20. On the inside
+let there be five divisions; two of them, _c d_, to be large enough to
+admit a pack of cards each; and the other three, _e f g_, only large
+enough to contain a single card. Place this vase on a bracket, L,
+which is fastened to the partition M. Fix a silken thread at H, the
+other end of which passes down the division _d_, and, over the pulley
+I, runs along the bracket L, and goes out behind the partition M.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 20.]
+
+Take three cards from the piquet pack, and place one of them in each
+of the divisions _e f g_, making the silk thread or line go under each
+of them. In the division _c_ put the remainder of the pack.
+
+You then get another pack of cards, at the top of which are to be
+three cards, the same as those in the three small divisions: and,
+making the pass, bring them to the middle of the pack. Let them be
+drawn by three persons; let them shuffle all the cards; after which
+place the pack in the division _d_, and tell the parties that the
+cards they drew will rise at their command, separately, from the vase.
+
+A confederate behind the partition then gently drawing the line, the
+three cards will then gradually appear from the vase; then taking the
+cards from _c_, you show that those three are gone from the pack.
+
+The vase must be placed so high that the company cannot see the
+inside.
+
+
+_The Divining Perspective Glass._
+
+Procure a small perspective-glass, wide enough, where the object-glass
+is placed, to hold the following table:
+
+ +-------+--------+--------+
+ | 1,131 | 10,132 | 19,133 |
+ | 2,231 | 11,232 | 20,233 |
+ | 3,331 | 12,332 | 21,333 |
+ +-------+--------+--------+
+ | 4,121 | 13,122 | 22,123 |
+ | 5,221 | 14,222 | 23,223 |
+ | 6,321 | 15,322 | 24,323 |
+ +-------+--------+--------+
+ | 7,111 | 16,112 | 25,113 |
+ | 8,211 | 17,212 | 26,213 |
+ | 9,311 | 18,312 | 27,313 |
+ +-------+--------+--------+
+
+Take a pack of twenty-seven cards; give them to a person, bid him fix,
+on one, shuffle them, and return them to you. Arrange the twenty-seven
+cards in three parcels, by laying one down, alternately, on each
+parcel; but before you lay each card down, show it to the person,
+without seeing it yourself. When you have completed the three parcels,
+ask him at what number, from one to twenty-seven, he will have his
+card appear, and in which heap it then is. You then look at the heap
+through your glass; and if the first of the three numbers, which
+stands against the number it is to appear at, be one, put that heap at
+top; if the number be at two, put it in the middle; and if it be
+three, put it at the bottom. Next divide the cards into three heaps,
+in the same manner, a second and third time, and his card will be at
+the number he chose.
+
+_Example._--Suppose the person wishes his card to be the twentieth
+from the top; and the first time of making the heaps, he says it is in
+the third heap; you then look at the table in the perspective, and you
+see that the first figure is two; you, therefore, put that heap in the
+middle of the pack. The second and third times, you in like manner put
+the heap in which he says it is, at bottom; the number each time being
+three. Then looking at the pack with your glass, as if to discover
+which the card was, you lay the cards down, one by one, and the
+twentieth will be the card fixed on.
+
+
+_The Card in the Ring._
+
+Get a ring, made of any metal, in which is set a large transparent
+stone or piece of glass, to the bottom of which is fastened a small
+piece of black silk; under the silk is to be the figure of a small
+card; and the silk must be so constructed that it may be either drawn
+aside or spread, by turning the stone round.
+
+You then cause a person to draw the same sort of card as that at the
+bottom of the ring; and tell him to burn it in the candle. Now, the
+ring being so constructed that the silk conceals the card underneath
+it, you first show him the ring, that he may see it is not there, and
+tell him you will make it appear; then rubbing the ashes of the card
+on the ring, you manage to turn the stone or glass dexterously round,
+and exhibit to him the small card at the bottom.
+
+
+_The Card in the Mirror._
+
+Provide a mirror, either round or oval, the frame of which must be at
+least as wide as a card, and the glass must be wider than the distance
+between the frame, by at least the width of a card. The glass in the
+middle must be made to move in two grooves, and so much of the
+quicksilver must be scraped off, as is equal to the size of a common
+card. You then paste over the part where the quicksilver is rubbed
+off, a piece of pasteboard, on which is a cord, that must exactly fit
+the space, which must at first be placed behind the frame.
+
+Fix this mirror against a partition, through which two strings are to
+go, by which an assistant in an adjoining room can easily move the
+glass in the grooves, and make the card appear or disappear at
+pleasure. Or it may be done without an assistant, if a table be placed
+against the partition, and a string from the glass be made to pass
+through a leg of it, and communicate with a small trigger, which you
+may easily push down with your foot, and at the same time wiping the
+glass with your handkerchief, under the pretence that the card may
+appear more conspicuous; which will also serve most effectually to
+disguise the operation.
+
+Having every thing thus arranged, you contrive to make a person draw
+the same sort of card as that fixed to the mirror; if you do not
+succeed in this with a stranger, make some pretence for shuffling the
+cards again, and present the pack to a confederate, who, of course,
+will draw the card you wish, and who is to show it to two or three
+persons next to him, under the pretence that it might slip his memory.
+This card you place in the middle of the pack, then _make the pass_,
+and bring it to the bottom. Direct the person to look for his card in
+the mirror, which the confederate behind the partition is to draw
+slowly forward; or if you perform the operation yourself, press the
+trigger with your foot, and the card will appear as if placed between
+the glass and the quicksilver. While the glass is drawing forward, you
+slide off the card from the bottom of the pack, and convey it away.
+
+
+_The Card in the Opera Glass._
+
+Procure an opera-glass, two inches and a half long; the tube to be
+made of ivory, so thin that it may appear transparent. Place it in a
+magnifying glass, of such a power, and at such a distance, that a
+card, three-quarters of an inch long, may appear like a common-sized
+card. At the bottom of the tube lay a circle of black pasteboard, to
+which fasten a small card, with the pips, or figures, on both sides,
+and in such a manner, that by turning the table, either side of the
+glass may be visible.
+
+You then offer two cards to two persons, similar to the double card in
+the glass. You put them in the pack again, or convey them to your
+pocket; and after a few flourishing motions you tell the persons you
+have conveyed their cards into the glass; then you show each person
+his card in the glass, by turning it in the proper position.
+
+You may easily induce the parties to draw the two cards you wish, by
+placing them first on the top of the pack, and then, by making the
+pass, bringing them to the middle.
+
+When you can make the pass in a dexterous manner, it is preferable to
+the long card, which obliges the operator to change the pack
+frequently, as, if the same card is always drawn, it may excite
+suspicion.
+
+
+_To separate the two Colours of a Pack of Cards by one Cut._
+
+To perform this amusement, all the cards of one colour must be cut
+something narrower at one end than the other. You show the cards, and
+give them to any one, that he may shuffle them; then holding them
+between your hands, one hand being at each extremity, with one motion
+you separate the hearts and diamonds from the spades and clubs.
+
+
+_The Metamorphosed Cards._
+
+In the middle of a pack place a card that is something wider than the
+rest, which we will suppose to be the knave of spades, under which
+place the seven of diamonds, and under that the ten of clubs. On the
+top of the pack put cards similar to these, and others on which are
+painted different objects, _viz._:
+
+ First card A bird
+ Second A seven of diamonds
+ Third A flower
+ Fourth Another seven of diamonds
+ Fifth A bird
+ Sixth A ten of clubs
+ Seventh A flower
+ Eighth Another ten of clubs;
+
+then seven or eight indifferent cards, the knave of spades, which is
+the wide card, the seven of diamonds, the ten of clubs, and the rest
+any indifferent cards.
+
+Two persons are to draw the two cards that are under the wide card,
+which are the seven of diamonds and the ten of clubs. You take the
+pack in your left hand, and open it at the wide end, as you open a
+book, and tell the person who drew the seven of diamonds to place it
+in that opening. You then blow on the cards, and, without closing
+them, instantly bring the card which is at top, and on which a bird is
+painted, over that seven of diamonds. To do this dexterously, you must
+wet the middle finger of your left hand, with which you are to bring
+the card to the middle of the pack. You then bid the person look at
+his card, and when he has remarked the change, to place it where it
+was before. Then blow on the cards a second time, and, bringing the
+seven of diamonds, which is at the top of the pack, to the opening,
+you bid him look at his card again, when he will see it is that which
+he drew. You may do the same with all the other painted cards, either
+with the same person, or with him who drew the ten of clubs.
+
+The whole artifice consists in bringing the card at the top of the
+pack to the opening in the middle, by the wet finger, which requires
+no great practice. Observe, not to let the pack go out of your hands.
+
+
+_To discover the Card which is drawn, by the Throw of a Die._
+
+Prepare a pack of cards, in which there are only six sorts of cards.
+Dispose these cards in such manner that each of the six different
+cards shall follow each other, and let the last of each suite be a
+long card. The cards being thus disposed, it follows, that if you
+divide them into six parcels, by cutting at each of the long cards,
+those parcels will all consist of similar cards.
+
+Let a person draw a card from the pack, and let him replace it in the
+parcel from whence it was drawn, by dexterously offering that part.
+Cut the cards several times, so that a long card be always at bottom.
+Divide the cards in this manner into six heaps, and giving a die to
+the person who drew the card, tell him that the point he throws shall
+indicate the parcel in which is the card he drew; then take up the
+parcel and show him the card.
+
+
+_To tell the Number of the Cards by their Weight._
+
+Take a parcel of cards, suppose forty, among which insert two long
+cards; let the first be, for example, the fifteenth, and the other the
+twenty-sixth from the top. Seem to shuffle the cards, and then cutting
+them at the first long card, poise those you have cut off in your left
+hand, and say, "There should be here fifteen cards." Cut them again at
+the second long card, and say, "There are here only eleven cards."
+Then poising the remainder, you say, "Here are fourteen cards."
+
+
+_The Four Inseparable Kings._
+
+Take the four kings, and behind the last of them place two other
+cards, so that they may not be seen. Then spread open the four kings
+to the company, and put the six cards at the bottom of the pack. Draw
+one of the kings, and put it at the top of the pack. Draw one of the
+two cards at the bottom, and put it towards the middle. Draw the
+other, and put it at some distance from the last, and then show that
+there remains a king at bottom. Then let any one cut the cards, and as
+there remains three kings at bottom, they will then be altogether in
+the middle of the pack.
+
+
+_To change the Cards which several Persons have drawn from the Pack._
+
+On the top of the pack put any card you please--suppose the queen of
+clubs; make the pass, bring that card to the middle of the pack, and
+offer it to a person to draw. Then, by cutting the cards, bring the
+queen again to the middle of the pack. Make the pass a second time,
+bring it to the top, and shuffle the cards without displacing those on
+the top. Make the pass a third time, bring it to the middle of the
+pack and offer it to a second person to draw, who must be at a proper
+distance from the first person, that he may not perceive it is the
+same card. After the like manner let five persons draw the same card.
+
+Shuffle the pack without losing sight of the queen of clubs, and,
+laying down four other cards with the queen, ask each person if he see
+his card there? They will all reply, "Yes," as they all drew the queen
+of clubs. Place four of those cards on the pack, and, drawing the
+queen privately away, you approach the first person, and showing him
+that card, so that the others cannot see it, ask if that be his card;
+then patting it on the top of the pack, blow on it, or give it a
+stroke with your hand, and show it in the same manner to the second
+person, and so of the rest.
+
+
+_The Card discovered under the Handkerchief._
+
+Let a person draw any card from the rest, and put it in the middle of
+the pack; you make the pass at that place, and the card will
+consequently be at top; then placing the pack on the table, cover it
+with a handkerchief; and, putting your hand under it, take off the top
+card, and after seeming to search among the cards for some time, draw
+it out.
+
+This amusement may be performed by putting the cards in another
+person's pocket, after the pass is made. Several cards may also be
+drawn and placed together in the middle of the pack, and the pass then
+made.
+
+
+_The Convertible Aces._
+
+On the ace of spades fix, with soap, a heart, and on the ace of hearts
+a spade, in such a manner that they will easily slip off.
+
+Show these two aces to the company; then, taking the ace of spades,
+you desire a person to put his foot upon it, and as you place it on
+the ground, draw away the spade. In like manner you place the seeming
+ace of hearts under the foot of another person. You then command the
+two cards to change their places; and that they obey your command, the
+two persons, on taking up their cards, will have ocular demonstration.
+
+A deception similar to this is sometimes practised with one card,
+suppose the ace of spades, over which a heart is pasted lightly. After
+showing a person the card, you let him hold one end of it, and you
+hold the other, and while you amuse him with discourse, you slide off
+the heart. Then laying the card on the table, you bid him cover it
+with his hand; you then knock under the table, and command the heart
+to turn into the ace of spades.
+
+
+_To tell the Card that a Person has touched with his Finger._
+
+This amusement is to be performed by confederacy. You previously agree
+with your confederate on certain signs, by which he is to denote the
+suite, and the particular card of each suite; thus: if he touch the
+first button of his coat, it signifies an ace; if the second, a king,
+&c.; and then again, if he take out his handkerchief, it denotes the
+suite to be hearts; if he take snuff, diamonds, &c. These
+preliminaries being settled, you give the pack to a person who is near
+your confederate, and tell him to separate any one card from the rest,
+while you are absent, and draw his finger once over it. He is then to
+return you the pack, and while you are shuffling the cards, you
+carefully note the signals made by your confederate; then turning the
+cards over one by one, you directly fix on the card he touched.
+
+
+_The Card in the Pocket-book._
+
+A confederate is previously to know the card you have taken from the
+pack, and put into your pocket-book. You then present the pack to him,
+and desire him to fix on a card, (which we will suppose to be the
+queen of diamonds,) and place the pack on the table. You then ask him
+the name of the card, and when he says the queen of diamonds, you ask
+him if he be not mistaken, and if he be sure that the card is in the
+pack: when he replies in the affirmative, you say, "It might be there
+when you looked over the cards, but I believe it is now in my pocket;"
+then desire a third person to put his hand in your pocket, and take
+out your book, and when it is opened the card will appear.
+
+
+_The Card in the Egg._
+
+Take a card, the same as your long card, and, rolling it up very
+close, put it in an egg, by making a hole as small as possible, and
+which you are to fill up carefully with white wax. You then offer the
+long card to be drawn, and when it is replaced in the pack, you
+shuffle the cards several times, giving the egg to the person who drew
+the card, and while he is breaking it, you privately withdraw the long
+card, that it may appear, upon examining the cards, to have gone from
+the pack into the egg. This may be rendered more surprising by having
+several eggs, in each of which is placed a card of the same sort, and
+then giving the person the liberty to choose which egg he thinks fit.
+
+This deception may be still further diversified, by having, as most
+public performers have, a confederate, who is previously to know the
+egg in which the card is placed; for you may then break the other
+eggs, and show that the only one that contains a card is that in which
+you directed it to be.
+
+
+_The Card discovered by the Touch or Smell._
+
+You offer the long card, or any other that you know, and as the person
+who has drawn it holds it in his hand, you pretend to feel the pips or
+figure on the under side, by your fore-finger; or you sagaciously
+smell to it, and then pronounce what card it is.
+
+If it be the long card, you may give the pack to the person who drew
+it, and leave him at liberty either to replace it or not. Then taking
+the pack, you feel immediately whether it be there or not, and,
+shuffling the cards in a careless manner, without looking at them, you
+pronounce accordingly.
+
+
+_The Inverted Cards._
+
+Prepare a pack of cards, by cutting one end of them about one-tenth of
+an inch narrower than the other; then offer the pack to any one, that
+he may draw a card; place the pack on the table, and observe carefully
+if he turn the card while he is looking at it; if he do not, when you
+take the pack from the table, you offer the other end of it for him to
+insert that card; but if he turn the card, you then offer him the same
+end of the pack. You afterwards offer the cards to a second or third
+person, for them to draw or replace a card in the same manner. You
+then let any one shuffle the cards, and, taking them again into your
+own hand, as you turn them up one by one, you easily perceive by the
+touch which are those cards that have been inverted, and, laying the
+first of them down on the table, you ask the person if that card be
+his; and if he say _no_, you ask the same of the second person; and if
+he say _no_, you tell the third person it is his card; and so of the
+second or third cards. You shall lay the pack on the table after each
+person has drawn his card, and turn it dexterously in taking it up,
+when it is to be turned, that the experiment may not appear to depend
+on the cards being inverted.
+
+
+_The Transmuted Cards._
+
+In a common pack of cards let the ace of hearts and nine of spades be
+something larger than the rest. With the juice of lemon draw over the
+ace of hearts a spade, large enough to cover it entirely, and on each
+side draw four other spades.
+
+Present the pack to two persons, so adroitly, that one of them shall
+draw the ace of hearts, and the other the nine of spades, and tell him
+who draws the latter, to burn it on a chafing-dish. You then take the
+ashes of that card, put them into a small metal box, and give it to
+him that has the ace of hearts, that he may himself put that card into
+the box and fasten it. Then put the box for a short time on the
+chafing-dish, and let the person who put the card in it take it off,
+and take out the card, which he will see is changed into the nine of
+spades.
+
+
+_The Convertible Cards._
+
+To perform this amusement you must observe, that there are several
+letters which may be changed into others, without any appearance of
+the alteration, as the _a_ into _d_, the _c_ into _a_, _e_, _d_, _g_,
+_o_, or _q_; the _i_ into _b_, _d_, or _l_; the _l_ into _t_; the _o_
+into _a_, _d_, _g_, or _q_; the _v_ into _y_, &c.
+
+Take a parcel of cards, suppose twenty, and on one of them write with
+juice of lemon or onion, or vitriol and water, the word law, (these
+letters should not be joined;) and on the other, with the same ink,
+the words _old woman_; then holding them to the fire, they both become
+visible. Now, you will observe, that by altering the _a_ in the word
+_law_ into _d_, and adding _o_ before the _l_, and _oman_ after the
+_w_, it becomes _old woman_. Therefore you make those alterations with
+the invisible ink, and let it remain so. On the rest of the cards you
+write any words you think fit.
+
+Present the cards in such manner to two persons, that one of them
+shall draw the word _law_, and the other the words _old woman_. You
+then tell the person who drew the word _law_, that it shall disappear,
+and the words on the other card shall be written in its place; and,
+that you may not change the cards, desire each of the parties to write
+his name on his card. Then putting the cards together, and holding
+them before the fire, as if to dry the names just written, the word
+_law_ will presently change into _old woman_.
+
+
+_The Enchanted Palace._
+
+On the six-sided plane A B C D E F, Fig. 21, draw six semi-diameters;
+and on each of these place perpendicularly two plane mirrors, which
+must join exactly at the centre, and which, placed back to back, must
+be as thin as possible. Decorate the exterior boundary of this piece,
+(which is at the extremity of the angles of the hexagon,) with six
+columns, that at the same time serve to support the mirrors by grooves
+formed on their inner sides. Add to these columns their entablatures,
+and cover the edifice in whatever manner you please. In each one of
+these six triangular spaces, contained between two mirrors, place
+little figures of pasteboard, in relief, representing such subjects,
+as, when seen in an hexagonal form, will produce an agreeable effect.
+To these add small figures of enamel, and take particular care to
+conceal by some object that has no relation to the subject, the place
+where the mirrors join, which, as before observed, all meet in the
+common centre.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 21.]
+
+When you look into any one of the six openings of this palace, the
+objects there contained, being reflected six times, will seem entirely
+to fill up the whole of the building. This illusion will appear very
+remarkable, especially if the objects chosen are properly adapted to
+the effect which the mirrors are intended to produce.
+
+If you place between two of these mirrors part of a fortification, as
+a curtain, and two demi-bastions, you will see an entire citadel with
+six bastions; or if you place part of a ball-room, ornamented with
+chandeliers and figures, all these objects being here multiplied, will
+afford a very pleasing prospect.
+
+
+_Opaque Bodies seemingly Transparent._
+
+Within the case A B C D, place four mirrors O P Q R, Fig. 22, so
+disposed, that they may each make an angle of 45 degrees, that is,
+that they may be half-way inclined from the perpendicular, as in the
+figure. In each of the two extremities A B, make a circular overture;
+in one of which fix the tube G L, in the other the tube M F, and
+observe, that in each of these is to be inserted another tube, as H
+and I. [_Observe._ These four tubes must terminate in the substance of
+the case, and not enter the inside, that they may not hinder the
+effect of the mirrors. The four-fold reflection of the rays of light
+from the mirrors, darkens in some degree the brightness of the object;
+some light is also lost by the magnifying power of the perspective.
+If, therefore, instead of the object-glass at G, and concave eye-glass
+at F, plain glasses were substituted, the magnifying power of the
+perspective will be taken away, and the object appear brighter.]
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 22.]
+
+Furnish the first of these tubes with an object-glass at G, and a
+concave eye-glass at F. You are to observe, that in regulating the
+focus of these glasses with regard to the length of the tube, you are
+to suppose it equal to the line G, or visual pointed ray, which
+entering at the aperture G is reflected by the four mirrors, and goes
+out at the other aperture F, where the eye-glass is placed. Put any
+glass you please into the two ends of the moveable tubes H and L; and
+lastly, place the machine on stand E, moveable at the point S, that it
+may be elevated or lowered at pleasure.
+
+When the eye is placed at F, and you look through the tube, the rays
+of light that proceed from the object T, passing through the glass G,
+are successively reflected by the mirrors O P Q and R to the eye at F,
+and there point the object T in its proper situation, and these rays
+appear to proceed directly from that object.
+
+The two moveable tubes H and I, at the extremity of which a glass is
+placed, serve only to disguise the illusion, for they have no
+communication with the interior of the machine. This instrument being
+moveable on the stand E, may be directed to any object; and if
+furnished with proper glasses, will answer the purpose of common
+perspective.
+
+The two moveable tubes, H and I, being brought together, the machine
+is directed towards any object; and, desiring a person to look at the
+end F, you ask him if he sees that object distinctly. You then
+separate the two moveable tubes, and, leaving space between them
+sufficiently wide to place your hand or any other solid body, you tell
+him that the machine has the power of making objects visible through
+the most opaque body; and as a proof, you desire him to look at the
+same object, when to his great surprise he will see it as distinctly
+as if no solid body interposed.
+
+This experiment is the more extraordinary as it is very difficult
+to conceive how the effect is produced; the two arms of the
+case appearing to be made for the purpose of supporting the
+perspective-glass; and to whatever object it be directed, the effect
+is still the same.
+
+
+_The Deforming Mirrors._
+
+If a person look in a concave mirror placed perpendicularly to
+another, (that is, supposing one mirror to be laid on the floor, and
+the other attached to the ceiling,) his face will appear entirely
+deformed. If the mirror be a little inclined, so as to make an angle
+of 80 degrees, (that is, one-ninth part from the perpendicular,) he
+will then see all the parts of his face, except the nose and forehead.
+If it be inclined to 60 degrees; (that is, one-third part,) he will
+appear with three noses and six eyes: in short, the apparent deformity
+will vary at each degree of inclination, and when the glass comes to
+45 degrees, (that is, half-way down,) the face will vanish. If,
+instead of placing the two mirrors in this situation, they are so
+disposed that their junction may be vertical, then different
+inclinations will produce other effects, as the situation of the
+object relative is quite different.
+
+
+_The Magic Tube._
+
+Procure a small tube of glass, whose canal is extremely narrow, and
+open at both ends; let one end of it be plunged in water, and the
+water within the tube will rise to a considerable height above the
+external surface: or if two or more tubes be immersed in the same
+fluid, the one with a narrow canal, and the other wider, the water
+will ascend higher in the former than the latter.
+
+
+_The Magician's Mirror._
+
+Construct a box of wood, of a cubical shape, A B C D, Fig. 23, of
+about fifteen inches every way. Let it be fixed to the pedestal P, at
+the usual height of a man's head. In each side of this box let there
+be an opening, of an oval form, ten inches high, and seven wide. In
+this box place two mirrors, A D, with their backs against each other.
+Let them cross the box in a diagonal line, and in a vertical position.
+Decorate the openings in the side of this box with four oval frames
+and transparent glasses, and cover each with a curtain so contrived as
+all to draw up together.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 23.]
+
+Place four persons in front of the four sides, and at equal distances
+from the box, and then draw them up that they may see themselves in
+the mirrors, when each of them, instead of his own figure, will see
+that of the person next to him, but who will appear to him to be
+placed on the opposite side. Their confusion will be the greater, as
+it will be very difficult, if not impossible, for them to discover the
+mirrors concealed in the box. The reason of this phenomenon is
+evident; for though the rays of light may be turned aside by a mirror,
+yet they always _appear_ to proceed in right lines.
+
+
+_The Perspective Mirror._
+
+Provide a box, A B C D, Fig. 24, of about two feet long, 15 inches
+wide, and 12 inches high. At the end A C, place the concave mirror,
+the focus of whose parallel rays is 18 inches from the reflecting
+surface. At I L place a pasteboard, blacked, in which a hole is cut,
+sufficiently large to see on the mirror H the object placed at B E F
+D. Cover the top of the box, from A to I, close, that the mirror H may
+be entirely darkened. The other part, I B, must be covered with glass,
+under which is placed a gauze, or oiled paper, to prevent the inside
+from being seen. Make an aperture at G, near the top of the side E B,
+beneath which, on the inside, place in succession, paintings of
+vistas, landscapes, figures, &c., so that they may be in front of the
+mirror H. Let the box be placed that the objects may be strongly
+illuminated by the sun, or by wax-lights placed under the enclosed
+part of the box A I. By this simple construction, the objects placed
+at G D will be thrown into their natural perspective, and if the
+subjects be properly chosen and well executed, the appearance will be
+both wonderful and pleasing.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 24.]
+
+
+_Gunpowder Exploded by Reflection._
+
+Place two concave mirrors at about 12 or 15 feet distance from each
+other, and let the axis of each be in the same line. In the focus of
+one of them place a live coal, and in the focus of the other place
+some gunpowder. With a pair of double bellows, which make a continual
+blast, keep constantly blowing the coal, and notwithstanding the
+distance between them, the powder will presently take fire.
+
+
+_The Igniting Mirrors._
+
+The rays of a luminous body placed in the focus of concave mirror,
+being reflected in parallel lines, and a second mirror being placed
+diametrically opposite to the first, will set fire to a combustible
+body, by collecting those rays in the focus.
+
+
+_The Armed Apparition._
+
+If a person with a drawn sword place himself before a large concave
+mirror, but further from it than its focus, he will see an inverted
+image of himself in the air, between him and the mirror, of a less
+size than himself. If he steadily present the sword towards the centre
+of the mirror, an image of the sword will come out from it, point to
+point, as if to fence with him; and by his pushing the sword nearer,
+the image will appear to come nearer to him, and almost to touch his
+breast. If the mirror be turned 45 degrees, or one-eighth round, the
+reflected image will go out perpendicularly to the direction of the
+sword presented, and apparently come to another person placed in the
+direction of the motion of the image, who, if he be unacquainted with
+the experiment, and does not see the original sword, will be much
+surprised and alarmed.
+
+
+_The Phantom._
+
+You inform a person that at a certain hour, and in a certain place, he
+shall see the apparition of a deceased friend, (whose portrait you
+possess.) In order to produce this phantom, there must be a door which
+opens into an apartment to which there is a considerable descent.
+Under that door you are to place the portrait, which must be inverted
+and strongly illuminated, that it may be brightly reflected by the
+mirror, which must be large and well polished. Then having introduced
+the incredulous spectator at another door, and placed him in the
+proper point of view, you suddenly throw open the door, when to his
+great surprise he will view the apparition of his friend.
+
+
+_The Distorting Mirror._
+
+Opticians sometimes grind a glass mirror concave in one direction
+only, or longitudinally; it is in fact a concave portion of a
+cylinder, the breadth of which may be considered that of the mirror. A
+person looking at his face in this mirror, in the direction of its
+concavity, will see it curiously distorted in a very lengthened
+appearance; and by turning the cylindrical mirror a quarter round, his
+visage will appear distorted another way, by an apparent increase in
+width only. If in a very near situation before it, you put your finger
+on the right hand side of your nose, it will appear the same in the
+mirror; but if in a distant situation, somewhat beyond the centre of
+concavity, you again look at your face in the mirror, your finger will
+appear to be removed to the other side of your nose.
+
+
+_Water colder than Ice._
+
+Put a lump of ice into an equal quantity of water, heated to 176
+degrees, the result will be, that the fluid will be no hotter than
+water just beginning to freeze; but if a little sea salt be added to
+the water, and it be heated only to 166 or 170, a fluid will be
+produced _colder than the ice was at first_.
+
+
+_Exploding Salt._
+
+If a small quantity of powdered charcoal and hyper-oxymuriate of
+potash be rubbed together in a mortar, an explosion will be produced,
+and the charcoal inflamed. Three parts of this salt, and one of
+sulphur, rubbed together in a mortar, produce a violent detonation. If
+struck with a hammer on an anvil, there is an explosion like the
+report of a pistol.
+
+When concentrated sulphuric acid is poured upon this salt, there is a
+considerable explosion; it is thrown about to a great distance,
+sometimes with a red flame; and there is exhaled a brown vapour,
+accompanied with a strong odour.
+
+
+_Dioptrical Paradox._
+
+Construct a machine similar to that in Fig. 25. Its effect will be,
+that a print, or an ornamented drawing, with any object, such as an
+ace of diamonds, &c. in the centre F, will be seen as an ace of clubs
+when placed in the machine, and viewed through a single plane glass
+only, contained in the tube E. The glass in the tube F, which produces
+this surprising change, is somewhat on the principle of the common
+multiplying glass, as represented at G, which, by the number of its
+inclined surfaces, and from the refractive power of the rays
+proceeding from the objects placed before it shows it in a multiplied
+state. The only difference is, that the sides of this glass are flat,
+and diverge upwards from the base to a point in the axis of the glass
+like a cone; it has six sides, and each side, from its angular
+position to the eye, has the property of refracting from the border of
+the print F, such a portion of it (designedly placed there) as will
+make a part in the composition of the figure to be represented; for
+the hexagonal and conical figure of this glass prevents any part of
+the ace of diamonds being seen; consequently the ace of clubs being
+previously and mechanically drawn in the circle of refraction in six
+different parts of the border, at 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and artfully
+disguised in the ornamental border, by blending them with it, the
+glass in the tube at E will change the appearance of the ace of
+diamonds, F, into the ace of clubs, G. In the same manner many other
+prints undergo similar changes, according to the will of an ingenious
+draughtsman who may design them. The figure of the glass is shown at
+H.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 25.]
+
+
+_To show the Spots in the Sun's Disk by its Image in the Camera
+Obscura._
+
+Put the object-glass of a ten or twelve feet telescope into the
+scioptric ball, and turn it about till it be directly opposite the
+sun. Then place the pasteboard mentioned in page 16, in the focus of
+the lens, and you will see a clear bright image of the sun, about an
+inch diameter, in which the spots on the sun's surface will be exactly
+described.
+
+As this image is too bright to be seen with pleasure by the naked eye,
+you may view it through a lens whose focus is at six or eight inches
+distance, which, while it prevents the light from being offensive,
+will, by magnifying both the image and the spot, make them appear to
+greater advantage.
+
+
+_The Diagonal Opera Glass._
+
+By the diagonal position of a plane mirror, a curious opera-glass is
+constructed, by which any person may be viewed in a theatre or public
+company without knowing it. It consists only in placing a concave
+glass near the plane mirror, in the end of a short round tube, and a
+convex glass in a hole in the side of the tube, then holding the end
+of the tube with the glass to the eye, all objects next to the hole in
+the side will be reflected so as to appear in a direct line forward,
+or in a position at right angles to the person's situation who is
+looked at. Plane glasses, instead of a convex and concave, may be
+used; in this case the size of the object will not be increased, but
+it will appear brighter.
+
+
+_To observe an Eclipse of the Sun, without Injury to the Eye._
+
+Take a burning-glass, or spectacle-glass, that magnifies very much;
+hold it before a book or pasteboard, twice the distance of its focus,
+and you will see the round body of the sun, and the manner in which
+the moon passes between the glass and the sun, during the whole
+eclipse.
+
+
+_The Burnt Writing restored._
+
+Cover the outside of a small memorandum book with black paper, and in
+one of its inside covers make a flap, to open secretly, and observe
+there must be nothing over the flap but the black paper that covers
+the book.
+
+Mix soot with black or brown soap, with which rub the side of the
+black paper next the flap; then wipe it clean, that a white paper
+pressed against it will not receive any mark.
+
+Provide a black-lead pencil that will not mark without pressing hard
+on the paper. Have likewise a small box, about the size of a
+memorandum book, and that opens on both sides, but on one of them by a
+private method. Give a person a pencil and a slip of thin paper, on
+which he is to write what he thinks proper; you present him the
+memorandum book at the same time, that he may not write on the bare
+paper. You tell him to keep what he writes to himself, and direct him
+to burn it on the iron plate laid on a chafing-dish of coals, and give
+you the ashes. You then go into another room to fetch your magic box,
+before described, and take with you the memorandum book.
+
+Having previously placed a paper under the flap in the cover of the
+book, when he presses hard with the pencil, to write on his paper,
+every stroke, by means of the stuff rubbed on the black paper, will
+appear on that under the flap. You therefore take it out, and put it
+into one side of the box.
+
+You then return to the other room, and taking a slip of black paper,
+you put it into the other side of the box, strewing the ashes of the
+burnt paper over it. Then shaking the box for a few moments, and at
+the same time turning it dexterously over, you open the other side,
+and show the person the paper you first put in, the writing on which
+he will readily acknowledge to be his.
+
+If there be a press or cupboard that communicates with the next room,
+you need only put the book in the press, and your assistant will open
+it, and put the paper in the box, which you presently after take out,
+and perform the rest of the amusement as before.
+
+There may likewise be a flap on the other cover of the book; and you
+may rub the paper against that with red lead. In this case you give
+the person the choice of writing either with a black or red pencil;
+and present him the proper side of the book accordingly.
+
+
+_The Opaque Box made Transparent._
+
+Make a box three or four inches long, and two or three wide, and have
+a sort of perspective-glass, the bottom of which is the same size with
+the box, and slides out, that you may privately place a paper on it.
+The sides of this perspective are to be of glass, covered on the
+inside with fine paper.
+
+Let a person write on a slip of paper, putting your memorandum book
+under it, as in the last amusement; then give him the little box, and
+let him put what he has written into it. In the mean time you put the
+memorandum book into the press, where the perspective is already
+placed. Your assistant then takes the paper out of the book, and puts
+it at the bottom of the perspective; which you presently take out of
+the press, and direct the person to put the little box that contains
+the paper under it. You then look in at the top of the perspective,
+and feigning to see through the top of the box, you read what is
+written on the paper at the bottom of the perspective.
+
+With this perspective box you may perform another amusement, which is,
+by having in a bag twelve or more ivory counters, numbered, which you
+show to the company, that they may see all the numbers are different.
+You tell a person to draw any one of them, and keep it close in his
+hand. You then put the bag in the press, when your assistant examines
+the counters, and sees which is wanting, and puts another of the same
+number at the bottom of the perspective, which you then take out, and
+placing the person's hand close to it, look in at the top, and
+pretending to see through his hand, you name the number on the counter
+in it.
+
+
+_The Transposable Pieces._
+
+Take two guineas and two shillings, and grind part of them away, on
+one side only, so that they may be but half the common thickness; and
+observe, that they must be quite thin at the edge; then rivet a guinea
+and a shilling together. Lay one of these double pieces, with the
+shilling upwards, on the palm of your hand, at the bottom of your
+three first fingers, and lay the other piece with the guinea upwards
+in the like manner, in the other hand. Let the company take notice in
+which hand is the guinea, and in which is the shilling. Then as you
+shut your hands, you naturally turn the pieces over, and when you open
+them again, the shilling and the guinea will appear to have changed
+their places.
+
+
+_The Penetrative Guinea._
+
+Provide a large tin box, of the size of a large snuff-box, and in this
+place eight other boxes, which will go easily into each other, and let
+the least of them be of a size to hold a guinea. Each of these boxes
+should shut with a hinge, and to the least of them there must be a
+small lock, that is fastened with a spring, but cannot be opened
+without a key;--observe, that all these boxes must shut so freely,
+that they may be all closed at once. Place these boxes in each other,
+with their tops open, in the drawer of the table on which you make
+your experiments; or, if you please, in your pocket, in such a manner
+that they cannot be displaced.
+
+Then ask a person to lend you a new guinea, and desire him to mark it,
+that it may not be changed. You take this piece in one hand, and in
+the other you have another of the same appearance, and putting your
+hand into the drawer, you slip the piece that is marked into the least
+box, and shutting them all at once, you take them out; then showing
+the piece you have in your hand, and which the company suppose to be
+the same that was marked, you pretend to make it pass through the box,
+and dexterously convey it away.
+
+You then present the box, for the spectators do not yet know there are
+more than one, to any person in company, who, when he opens it, finds
+another, and another, till he comes to the last, but that he cannot
+open without the key, which you then give him, and retiring to a
+distant part of the room, you tell him to take out the guinea himself,
+and see if it be that which he marked.
+
+This amusement may be made more surprising, by putting the key into
+the snuff-box of one of the company, which you may do by asking him
+for a pinch of snuff, and at the same time conceal the key, which must
+be very small, among the snuff; and when the person, who is to open
+the box, asks for the key, you tell him that one of the company has it
+in his snuff-box. This part of the amusement may likewise be performed
+by means of a confederate.
+
+
+_To make Pictures of Birds with their Natural Feathers._
+
+First take thin board or panel, of deal or wainscot, well seasoned,
+that it may not shrink; then paste white paper smoothly on it, and
+let it dry; if the colour of the wood show through, paste a second
+paper over it. When the paper is dry, get ready any bird that you
+would represent, and draw the outline as exact as you can on the
+papered panel. You then paint the ground-work, stump of a tree, the
+bill and legs, their proper colour, with water-colours, leaving the
+body to be covered with its own natural feathers. In the space you
+have left for the body, you lay on very thick gum-water, letting each
+coat dry before you lay on another, and so continuing until the gum is
+as thick as a shilling. Then take the feathers off the bird; and, as
+you proceed, draw a camels'-hair pencil, dipped in gum-water, over the
+coat of gum that you have laid on the paper, that it may more readily
+adhere. As you strip the bird, you must fix the feathers in their
+proper places on the board, and you shave the shafts or stems of the
+larger feathers, that they may lie flat. The most ready way to perform
+the operation, is to provide yourself with a pair of steel pliars to
+take up and lay on the feathers with. You should prepare some small
+leaden weights to lay on the feathers, that they may more readily
+adhere to, and lie flat on, the gum. The part where the eye is must be
+supplied by a small piece of paper, coloured and shaped like one; or
+you may, probably, be able to get a glass bead that will answer the
+purpose better. In order that the feathers may lie smooth and regular,
+when the whole is perfectly dry, lay a book, or a flat board, with a
+weight on it.
+
+
+_The Art of Bronzing._
+
+Bronzing is that process by which figures of plaster-of-paris, wood,
+&c. are made to have the appearance of copper or brass. The method is
+as follows:
+
+Dissolve copper filings in aqua fortis. When the copper has
+impregnated the acid, pour off the solution, and put into it some
+pieces of iron, or iron filings. The effect of this will be to sink
+the powder to the bottom of the acid. Pour off the liquor, and wash
+the powder in successive quantities of fresh water. When the powder is
+dry, it is to be rubbed on the figure with a soft cloth, or piece of
+leather; but observe, that previously to the application of the bronze
+powder, a dark blackish sort of green is first to be laid on the
+figure: and if you wish the powder to adhere stronger, mix it with
+gum-water, lay it on like paint, with a camels'-hair brush, or
+previously trace the parts to be bronzed with gold size, and when
+nearly dry, rub the powder over it.
+
+
+_Method of taking the Impression of Butterflies on Paper._
+
+Clip the wings off the butterfly, lay them on clean, in the form of a
+butterfly when flying. Spread some thick clean gum-water on another
+piece of paper, press it on the wings, and it will take them up; lay a
+piece of white paper over it, and rub it gently with your finger, or
+the smooth handle of a knife. The bodies are to be drawn in the space
+which you leave between the wings.
+
+
+_To soften Horn._
+
+To one pound of wood-ashes, add two pounds of quick lime; put them
+into a quart of water. Let the whole boil till reduced to one-third.
+Then dip a feather in, and if, on drawing it out, the plume should
+come off, it is a proof that it is boiled enough; if not, let it boil
+a little longer. When it is settled, filter it off, and in the liquor
+thus strained put in shavings of horn. Let them soak for three days;
+and, first anointing your hands with oil, work the horn into a mass,
+and print or mould it into any shape you please.
+
+
+_To make Moulds of Horn._
+
+If you wish to take the impression of any coin, medal, &c., previously
+anoint it with oil; then lay the horn shavings over it in its softened
+state. When dry, the impression will be sunk into the horn; and this
+will serve as a mould to re-produce, either by plaster-of-paris, putty
+and glue, or isinglass and ground egg-shells, the exact resemblance of
+the coin or medal.
+
+
+_To cast Figures in Imitation of Ivory._
+
+Make isinglass and strong brandy into a paste, with powder of
+egg-shells, very finely ground. You may give it what colour you
+please; but cast it warm into your mould, which you previously oil
+over. Leave the figure in the mould till dry, and you will find, on
+taking it out, that it bears a very strong resemblance to ivory.
+
+
+_To extract the Silver out of a Ring that is thick gilded, so that the
+Gold may remain entire._
+
+Take a silver ring that is thick gilded. Make a little hole through
+the gold into the silver; then put the ring into aqua fortis, in a
+warm place: it will dissolve the silver, and the gold will remain
+whole.
+
+
+_To soften Iron or Steel._
+
+Either of the following simple methods will make iron or steel as soft
+as lead:
+
+1. Anoint it all over with tallow; temper it in a gentle charcoal
+fire, and let it cool of itself.
+
+2. Take a little clay, cover your iron with it, temper it in a
+charcoal fire.
+
+3. When the iron or steel is red-hot, strew hellebore on it.
+
+4. Quench the iron or steel in the juice or water of common beans.
+
+
+_To take a Plaster-of-Paris Cast from a Person's Face._
+
+The person must lie on his back, and his hair be tied behind. Into
+each nostril put a conical piece of paper, open at each end to allow
+of breathing. The face is to be lightly oiled over, and the plaster
+being properly prepared is to be poured over the face, (taking care
+that the eyes are shut,) till it is a quarter of an inch thick. In a
+few minutes the plaster may be removed. In this a mould is to be
+formed, from which a second cast is to be taken, that will furnish
+casts exactly like the original.
+
+
+_Curious Experiment with a Glass of Water._
+
+Saturate a certain quantity of water in a moderate heat, with three
+ounces of sugar; and when it will no longer receive that, there is
+still room in it for two ounces of salt of tartar, and after that for
+an ounce and a drachm of green vitriol, nearly six drachms of nitre,
+the same of sal-ammoniac, two drachms and a scruple of alum, and a
+drachm and half of borax.
+
+
+_To make Artificial Coruscations._
+
+There is a method of producing artificial coruscations, or sparkling
+fiery meteors, which will be visible, not only in the dark but at
+noon-day, and that from two liquors actually cold. The method is
+this:--Fifteen grains of solid phosphorus are to be melted in about a
+drachm of water: when this is cold, pour upon it two ounces of oil of
+vitriol; let these be shaken together in a large phial, and they will
+at first heat, and afterwards will throw up fiery balls in great
+number, which will adhere like so many stars to the sides of the
+glass, and continue burning a considerable time; after this, if a
+small quantity of oil of turpentine be poured in without shaking the
+phial, the mixture will of itself take fire, and burn very furiously.
+The vessels should be large and open at the top.
+
+
+_Another Method._
+
+Artificial coruscations may also be produced by means of oil of
+vitriol and iron, in the following manner:--Take a glass vessel
+capable of holding three quarts: put into this three ounces of oil of
+vitriol, and twelve ounces of water, then warming the mixture a
+little, throw in at several times two ounces, or more, of clear iron
+filings: upon this, an ebullition and white vapours will arise; then
+present a lighted candle to the mouth of the vessel, and the vapour
+will take fire, and afford a bright fulmination or flash; like
+lightning. Applying the candle in this manner several times, the
+effect will always be the same; and sometimes the fire will fill the
+whole body of the glass, and even circulate to the bottom of the
+liquor; at others, it will only reach a little down its neck. The
+great caution to be used in making this experiment, is the making the
+vapour of a proper heat; for if made too cold few vapours will arise;
+and, if made too hot, they will arise too fast, and will only take
+fire in the neck of the glass, without any remarkable coruscation.
+
+
+_To produce Fire from Cane._
+
+The Chinese rattans, which are used, when split, for making cane
+chairs, will, when dry, if struck against each other, give fire; and
+are used accordingly in some places, in lieu of flint and steel.
+
+
+_To make an Eolian Harp._
+
+This instrument may be made by almost any carpenter: it consists of a
+long narrow box of very thin deal, about five or six inches deep, with
+a circle in the middle of the upper side, of an inch and a half in
+diameter, in which are to be drilled small holes. On this side, seven,
+ten, or more strings, of very fine gut, are stretched over bridges at
+each end, like the bridges of a fiddle, and screwed up or relaxed with
+screw pins. The strings must be all tuned to one and the same note,
+and the instrument be placed in some current of air, where the wind
+can pass over its strings with freedom. A window, of which the width
+is exactly equal to the length of the harp, with the sash just raised
+to give the air admission, is a proper situation. When the air blows
+upon these strings, with different degrees of force, it will excite
+different tones of sounds; sometimes the blast brings out all the
+tones in full concert, and sometimes it sinks them to the softest
+murmurs.
+
+
+_To show the Pressure of the Atmosphere._
+
+Invert a tall glass or jar in a dish of water, and place a lighted
+taper under it: as the taper consumes the air in the jar its pressure
+becomes less on the water immediately under the jar; while the
+pressure of the atmosphere on the water _without_ the circle of the
+jar remaining the same, part of the water in the dish will be forced
+up into the jar, to supply the place of the air which the taper has
+consumed. Nothing but the pressure of the atmosphere could thus cause
+part of the water to rise within the jar, above its own level.
+
+
+_Subaqueous Exhalation._
+
+Pour a little clear water into a small glass tumbler, and put one or
+two small pieces of phosphoret of lime into it. In a short time,
+flashes of fire will dart from the surface of the water, and terminate
+in ringlets of smoke, which will ascend in regular succession.
+
+
+_Remarkable Properties in certain Plants._
+
+Plants, when forced from their natural position, are endowed with a
+power to restore themselves. A hop-plant, twisting round a stick,
+directs its course from south to west, as the sun does. Untwist it,
+and tie it in the opposite direction, it dies. Leave it loose in the
+wrong direction, it recovers its natural direction in a single night.
+Twist a branch of a tree so as to invert its leaves, and fix it in
+that position; if left in any degree loose, it untwists itself
+gradually, till the leaves be restored to their natural position. What
+better can an animal do for its welfare? A root of a tree meeting with
+a ditch in its progress, is laid open to the air; what follows? It
+alters its course like a rational being, dips into the ground,
+surrounds the ditch, rises on the opposite side of its wonted distance
+from the surface, and then proceeds in its original direction. Lay a
+wet sponge near a root exposed to the air; the root will direct its
+course to the sponge; change the place of the sponge, the root varies
+its direction. Thrust a pole into the ground at a moderate distance
+from a climbing plant; the plant directs its course to the pole, lays
+hold of it, and rises on its natural height. A honeysuckle proceeds in
+its course, till it be too long for supporting its weight, and then
+strengthens itself by shooting into a spiral. If it meet with another
+plant of the same kind, they coalesce for mutual support; the one
+screwing to the right, the other to the left. If a honeysuckle twig
+meet with a dead branch, it screws from the right to the left. The
+claspers of briony shoot into the spiral, and lay hold of whatever
+comes in their way, for support. If, after completing a spiral of
+three rounds, they meet with nothing, they try again, by altering
+their course.
+
+
+_Flowers curiously affected by the Sun and the Weather._
+
+The petals of many flowers expand in the sun, but contract all night,
+or on the approach of rain; after the seeds are fecundated the petals
+no longer contract. All the trefoil may serve as a barometer to the
+husbandman; they always contract their leaves on an impending storm.
+
+
+_Easy Method of obtaining Flowers of different Colours from the same
+Stem._
+
+Scoop out the pith from a small twig of elder, and having split it
+lengthwise, fill each of the parts with small seeds that produce
+flowers of different colours, but that blossom nearly at the same
+time. Surround them with earth; and then tying together the two bits
+of wood, plant the whole in a pot filled with earth, properly
+prepared.
+
+
+_A Luminous Bottle, which will show the Hour on a Watch in the Dark._
+
+Throw a bit of phosphorus, of the size of a pea, into a long glass
+phial, and pour boiling oil carefully over it, till the phial is
+one-third filled. The phial must be carefully corked, and when used
+should be unstopped, to admit the external air, and closed again. The
+empty space of the phial will then appear luminous, and give as much
+light as an ordinary lamp. Each time that the light disappears, on
+removing the stopper it will instantly re-appear. In cold weather the
+bottle should be warmed in the hands before the stopper is removed. A
+phial thus prepared may be used every night for six months.
+
+
+_To make Luminous Writing in the Dark._
+
+Fix a small piece of solid phosphorus in a quill, and write with it
+upon paper; if the paper be carried into a dark room, the writing will
+appear beautifully luminous.
+
+
+_The Sublimated Tree._
+
+Into a large glass jar inverted upon a flat brick tile, and containing
+near its top a branch of fresh rosemary, or any other such shrub,
+moistened with water, introduce a flat thick piece of heated iron, on
+which place some gum benzoin, in gross powder. The benzoin, in
+consequence of the heat, will be separated, and ascend in white fumes,
+which will at length condense, and form a most beautiful appearance
+upon the leaves of the vegetable.
+
+
+_Easy and curious Methods of foretelling Rainy or Fine Weather._
+
+If a line be made of good whipcord, that is well dried, and a plummet
+affixed to the end of it, and then hung against a wainscot, and a line
+drawn under it, exactly where the plummet reaches, in very moderate
+weather it will be found to rise above it before rain, and to sink
+below when the weather is likely to become fair. But the best
+instrument of all, is a good pair of scales, in one of which let there
+be a brass weight of a pound, and in the other a pound of salt, or of
+saltpetre, well dried; a stand being placed under the scale, so as to
+hinder it falling too low. When it is inclined to rain, the salt will
+swell, and sink the scale: when the weather is growing fair, the brass
+weight will regain its ascendancy.
+
+
+_Contrivance for a Watch Lamp, perfectly safe, which will show the
+Hour of the Night, without any trouble, to a person lying in Bed._
+
+It consists of a stand, with three claws, the pillar of which is made
+hollow, for the purpose of receiving a water candlestick of an inch
+diameter. On the top of the pillar, by means of two hinges and a bolt,
+is fixed on a small proportionate table, a box of six sides, lined
+with brass, tin, or any shining metal, nine inches deep, and six
+inches in diameter. In the centre of one of these sides is fixed a
+lens, double convex, of at least three inches and a half diameter. The
+centre of the side directly opposite to the lens is perforated so as
+to receive the dial-plate of the watch, the body of which is confined
+on the outside, by means of a hollow slide. When the box is lighted by
+a common watch-light, the figures are magnified nearly to the size of
+those of an ordinary clock.
+
+
+_Curious Experiment with a Tulip._
+
+The bulb of a tulip in every respect resembles buds, except in their
+being produced under ground, and include the leaves and flower in
+miniature, which are to be expanded in the ensuing spring. By
+cautiously cutting in the early spring, through the concentric coats
+of a tulip root, longitudinally from the top to the base, and taking
+them off successively, the whole flower of the next summer's tulip is
+beautifully seen by the naked eye, with its petals, pistal, and
+stamina.
+
+
+_The Travelling of Sound experimentally proved._
+
+There is probably no substance which is not in some measure a
+conductor of sound; but sound is much enfeebled by passing from one
+medium to another. If a man, stopping one of his ears with his finger,
+stop the other also by pressing it against the end of a long stick,
+and a watch be applied to the opposite end of the stick, or a piece of
+timber, be it ever so long, the beating of the watch will be
+distinctly heard; whereas, in the usual way, it can scarcely be heard
+at the distance of fifteen or eighteen feet. The same effect will take
+place if he stops both his ears with his hands, and rest his teeth,
+his temple, or the gristly part of one of his ears against the end of
+a stick. Instead of a watch, a gentle scratch may be made at one end
+of a pole or rod, and the person who keeps his ear in close contact
+with the other end of the pole, will hear it very plainly. Thus,
+persons who are dull of hearing, may, by applying their teeth to some
+part of a harpsichord, or other sounding body, hear the sound much
+better than otherwise.
+
+If a person tie a strip of flannel about a yard long, round a poker,
+then press with his thumbs and fingers the ends of the flannel into
+his ears, while he swings the poker against an iron fender, he will
+hear a sound very like that of a large church bell.
+
+
+_To produce Metallic Lead from the Powder._
+
+Take one ounce of red lead, and half a drachm of charcoal in powder,
+incorporate them well in a mortar, and then fill the bowl of a
+tobacco-pipe with the mixture. Submit it to an intense heat, in a
+common fire, and when melted, pour it out upon a slab, and the result
+will be metallic lead completely revived.
+
+
+_To diversify the Colours of Flowers._
+
+Fill a vessel of what size or shape you please, with good rich earth,
+which has been dried and sifted in the sun, then plant in the same a
+slip or branch of a plant bearing a white flower, (for such only can
+be tinged,) and use no other water to water it with, but such as is
+tinged with red, if you desire red flowers; with blue, if blue
+flowers, &c. With this coloured water, water the plant twice a day,
+morning and evening, and remove it into the house at night, so that it
+drink not of the morning or evening dew for three weeks. You will then
+experience, that it will produce flowers, not altogether tinctured
+with that colour wherewith you watered it, but partly with that, and
+partly with the natural.
+
+
+_How far Sound travels in a Minute._
+
+However it may be with regard to the theories of sound, experience has
+taught us, that it travels at about the rate of 1142 feet in a second,
+or nearly thirteen miles in a minute. The method of calculating its
+progress is easily made known: when a gun is discharged at a distance,
+we see the fire long before we hear the sound; if, then, we know the
+distance of the place, and know the time of the interval between our
+first seeing the fire, and then hearing the report, this will show us
+exactly the time the sound has been travelling to us. For instance, if
+the gun be discharged a mile off, the moment the flash is seen I take
+a watch and count the seconds till I hear the sound; the number of
+seconds is the time the sound has been travelling a mile.
+
+
+_Easy Method of making a Rain Gauge._
+
+A very simple rain gauge, and one which will answer all practical
+purposes, consists of a copper funnel the area of whose opening is
+exactly ten square inches: this funnel is fixed in a bottle, and the
+quantity of rain caught is ascertained by multiplying the weight in
+ounces by 173, which gives the depth in inches and parts of an inch.
+In fixing these gauges, care must be taken that the rain may have free
+access to them: hence the tops of buildings are usually the best
+places. When the quantities of rain collected in them at different
+places are compared, the instruments ought to be fixed at the same
+heights above the ground at both places, because at different heights
+the quantities are always different, even at the same place.
+
+
+_To make beautiful Transparent coloured Water._
+
+The following liquors, which are coloured, being mixed, produce
+colours very different from their own. The yellow tincture of
+saffron, and the red tincture of roses, when mixed, produce a green.
+Blue tincture of violets, and brown spirit of sulphur, produce a
+crimson. Red tincture of roses, and brown spirits of hartshorn, make a
+blue. Blue tincture of violets, and blue solution of copper, give a
+violet colour. Blue tincture of cyanus, and blue spirit of
+sal-ammoniac coloured, make green. Blue solution of Hungarian vitriol,
+and brown ley of potash, make yellow. Blue solution of Hungarian
+vitriol, and red tincture of roses, make black; and blue tincture of
+cyanus, and green solution of copper, produce red.
+
+
+_Curious Experiment on Rays of Light._
+
+That the rays of light flow in all directions from different bodies,
+without interrupting one another, is plain from the following
+experiment:--Make a little hole in a thin plate of metal, and set the
+plate upright on a table, facing a row of lighted candles standing
+near together; then place a sheet of paper or pasteboard at a little
+distance from the other side of the plate; and the rays of all the
+candles, flowing through the hole, will form as many specks of light
+on the paper as there are candles before the plate; each speck as
+distinct and large as if there were only one candle to cast one speck;
+which shows that the rays do not obstruct each other in their motions,
+although they all cross in the same hole.
+
+
+_The Power of Water._
+
+Let a strong small iron tube of twenty feet in height be inserted into
+the bung-hole of a cask, and the aperture round so strongly closed,
+that it shall be water-tight; pour water into the cask till it is
+full, through the pipe; also continue filling the pipe till the cask
+bursts, which will be when the water is within a foot of the top of
+the tube. In this experiment the water, on bursting the vessel, will
+fly about with considerable violence.
+
+
+_The Pressure of Water._
+
+The pressure of water may be known to every one who will only take the
+trouble to look at the cock of a water-butt when turned: if the tub or
+cistern be full, the water runs with much greater velocity through
+the cock, and a vessel will be filled from it in a shorter time than
+when it is only half-full, although the cock, in both cases, is
+equally replete with the fluid during the time the vessel is filling.
+From this also is understood, how a hole or leak, near the keel of a
+ship, admits the water much quicker, and with greater violence, than
+one of the same size near what the mariners call the water's edge.
+
+
+_Refraction of Light._
+
+In the middle of an empty basin put a piece of money, and then retire
+from it till the edge of the basin hides the piece from your sight:
+then keep your head steady, let another person fill the basin gently
+with water; as the water rises in the basin the money will come in
+view; and when of a sufficient height in the basin, the whole of the
+piece will be in sight.
+
+
+_Wonderful Nature of Lightning._
+
+If two persons, standing in a room, looking different ways, and a loud
+clap of thunder, accompanied with zigzag lightning, happen, they will
+both distinctly see the flash at the same time; not only the
+illumination, but the very form of the lightning itself, and every
+angle it makes in its course will be as distinctly perceptible, as
+though they had both looked directly at the cloud from whence it
+proceeded. If a person happened at that time to be looking on a book,
+or other object, which he held in his hand, he would distinctly see
+the form of the lightning between him and the object at which he
+looked. This property seems peculiar to lightning, as it does not
+apply to any other kind of fire whatever.
+
+
+_To show that the White of Eggs contains an Alkali._
+
+Add to a wine-glass half full of tincture of red cabbage a small
+quantity of the white of an egg, either in a liquid state or rendered
+concrete by boiling. The tincture will lose its blue colour and become
+changed to green, because the white of the egg contains soda.
+
+
+_Two Inodorous Bodies become very Pungent and Odorous by Mixture._
+
+When equal parts of muriate of ammonia and unslaked lime, both
+substances destitute of odour, are intimately blended together in a
+mortar, a very pungent gas (ammonia) becomes evolved.
+
+
+_Interesting Experiment for the Microscope._
+
+The embryo grain of wheat, at the time of blossoming, being carefully
+taken out of the husk, will be found to have a small downy tuft at its
+extremity, which, when viewed in a microscope, greatly resembles the
+branches of thorn, spreading archwise, in opposite directions. By
+expanding a few of the grains, and selecting the most perfect, a very
+pretty microscopic object will be obtained for preservation.
+
+
+_The Travelling of Light._
+
+Light travels at the rate of a hundred and fifty thousand miles in a
+single second; and it is seven minutes in passing from the sun to the
+earth, which is nearly a distance of seventy millions of miles. Such
+is the rapidity with which these rays dart themselves forward that a
+journey they thus perform in less than eight minutes, a ball from the
+mouth of a cannon would not complete in several weeks! But the
+minuteness of the particles of light are still several degrees beyond
+their velocity; and they are therefore harmless, because so very
+small. A ray of light is nothing more than a constant stream of minute
+parts, still flowing from the luminary, so inconceivably little, that
+a candle in a single second of time, has been said to diffuse several
+hundreds of millions more particles of light, than there could be
+grains in the whole earth, if it were entirely one heap of sand. The
+sun furnishes them, and the stars also, without appearing in the least
+to consume, by granting us the supply. Its light is diffused in a wide
+sphere, and seems inexhaustible.
+
+
+_Calculation of the Mass of Water contained in the Sea._
+
+If we would have an idea of the enormous quantity of water which the
+sea contains, let us suppose a common and general depth of the ocean;
+by computing it at only 200 fathoms, or the tenth part of a mile, we
+shall see that there is sufficient water to cover the whole globe to
+the height of 503 feet of water; and if we were to reduce this water
+into one mass, we should find that it forms a globe of more than sixty
+thousand miles diameter.
+
+
+_Different Degrees of Heat imbibed from the Sun's Rays by Cloths of
+different Colours._
+
+Walk but a quarter of an hour in your garden, when the sun shines,
+with a part of your dress white, and a part black; then apply your
+hand to them alternately, and you will find a very great difference in
+their warmth. The black will be quite hot to the touch, and the white
+still cool.
+
+Try to fire paper with a burning-glass; if it be white, you will not
+easily burn it; but if you bring the focus to a black spot, or upon
+letters, written or printed, the paper will immediately be on fire
+under the letters.
+
+Thus, fullers and dyers find black cloths, of equal thickness with
+white ones, and hung out equally wet, dry in the sun much sooner than
+the white, being more readily heated by the sun's rays. It is the same
+before a fire, the heat of which sooner penetrates black stockings
+than white ones, and so is apt sooner to burn a man's shins. Also beer
+much sooner warms in a black mug set before the fire than a white one,
+or in a bright silver tankard. Take a number of little square pieces
+of cloth from a tailor's pattern card, of various colours; say black,
+deep blue, lighter blue, green, purple, red, yellow, white, and other
+colours, or shades of colours; lay them all out upon the snow in a
+bright sun-shiny morning; in a few hours, the black being warmed most
+by the sun will be sunk so low as to be below the stroke of the sun's
+rays; the dark blue almost as low; the lighter blue not quite so much
+as the dark; the other colours less, as they are lighter; and the
+quite white remain on the surface of the snow, as it will not have
+entered it at all.
+
+
+_Alternate Illusion._
+
+With a convex lens of about an inch focus, look attentively at a
+silver seal, on which a cipher is engraved. It will at first appear
+cut in, as to the naked eye; but if you continue to observe it some
+time, without changing your situation, it will seem to be in relief,
+and the lights and shades will appear the same as they did before. If
+you regard it with the same attention still longer, it will again
+appear to be engraved: and so on alternately.
+
+If you look off the seal for a few moments, when you view it again,
+instead of seeing it, as at first, engraved, it will appear in relief.
+
+If, while you are turned towards the light, you suddenly incline the
+seal, while you continue to regard it, those parts that seemed to be
+engraved will immediately appear in relief: and if, when you are
+regarding these seemingly prominent parts, you turn yourself so that
+the light may fall on the right hand, you will see the shadows on the
+same side from whence the light comes, which will appear not a little
+extraordinary. In like manner the shadows will appear on the left, if
+the light fall on that side. If instead of a seal you look at a piece
+of money, these alterations will not be visible, in whatever situation
+you place yourself.
+
+
+_Alarum._
+
+Against the wall of a room, near the ceiling, fix a wheel of twelve or
+eighteen inches diameter; on the rim of which place a number of bells
+in tune, and, if you please, of different sizes. To the axis of this
+wheel there should be fixed a fly to regulate its motion; and round
+the circumference there must be wound a rope, to the end of which is
+hung a weight.
+
+Near to the wheel let a stand be fixed, on which is an upright piece
+that holds a balance or moveable lever, on one end of which rests the
+weight just mentioned; and to the other end must hang an inverted
+hollow cone, or funnel, the aperture of which is very small. This cone
+must be graduated on the inside, that the sand put in may answer to
+the number of hours it is to run. Against the upright piece, on the
+side next the cone, there must be fixed a check, to prevent it from
+descending. This stand, together with the wheel, may be enclosed in a
+case, and so contrived, as to be moved from one room to another with
+very little trouble.
+
+It is evident, from the construction of this machine, that when a
+certain quantity of the sand is run out, the weight will descend, and
+put the wheel in motion, which motion will continue till the weight
+comes to the ground. If the wheel be required to continue longer in
+motion, two or more pulleys may be added, over which the rope may run.
+
+
+_Musical Cascade._
+
+Where there is a natural cascade, near the lower stream, but not in
+it, let there be placed a large wheel, equal to the breadth of the
+cascade: the diameter of this wheel, for about a foot from each end,
+must be much less than that of the middle part; and all the water from
+the cascade must be made to fall on the ends. The water that falls on
+the wheel may pass through pipes, so that part of it may be made
+occasionally to pass over or fall short of the wheel, as you would
+have the time of the music quicker or slower. The remaining part of
+the wheel, which is to be kept free from the water, must consist of
+bars, on which are placed stops that strike against the bells: these
+stops must likewise be moveable. It is evident from the construction
+of this machine, that the water falling on the floats at the end of
+the wheel, will make the stops, which are adapted to different tunes,
+strike the notes of those tunes on the respective bells. Two or three
+sets of bells may here be placed on the same line, when the cascade is
+sufficiently wide.
+
+Where there is not a natural cascade, one may be artificially
+constructed, by raising part of the ground, wherever there is a
+descent of water; whether it be a stream that supplies a reservoir or
+fountain, or serves domestic uses; or if it be refuse water that has
+already served some other purpose.
+
+
+_Writing on Glass by the Rays of the Sun._
+
+Dissolve chalk in aqua fortis, to the consistence of milk, and add to
+that a strong solution of silver. Keep this liquor in a glass decanter
+well stopped. Then cut out from a paper the letters you would have
+appear, and paste the paper on the decanter, which you are to place in
+the sun, in such a manner that its rays may pass through the spaces
+cut out of the paper, and fall on the surface of the liquor. The part
+of the glass through which the rays pass will turn black, and that
+under the paper will remain white. You must observe not to move the
+bottle during the time of the operation.
+
+
+_To produce the Appearance of a Flower from its Ashes._
+
+Make a tin box, with a cover that takes off. Let this box be supported
+by a pedestal of the same metal, and on which there is a little door.
+In the front of this box is to be a glass.
+
+In a groove, at a small distance from this glass, place a double
+glass, made in the same manner as described in p. 13, (_Magic
+Picture._) Between the front and back glasses place a small upright
+tin tube, supported by a cross piece. Let there be also a small
+chafing-dish placed in the pedestal. The box is to be opened behind.
+You privately place a flower in the tin tube, but not so near the
+front glass as to be in the least degree visible, and presenting one
+that resembles it to any person, desire him to burn it on the coals in
+a chafing-dish.
+
+You then strew some powder over the coals, which may be supposed to
+aid the ashes in producing the flower; and put the chafing-dish in the
+pedestal under the box. As the heat by degrees melts the composition
+between the glasses, the flower will gradually appear, but when the
+chafing-dish is taken away, and the powder of the ashes is supposed to
+be removed, the flower soon disappears.
+
+You may present several flowers, and let the person choose any one of
+them. In this case, while he is burning the flower, you fetch the box
+from another apartment, and at the same time put in a corresponding
+flower, which will make the experiment still more surprising.
+
+
+_Imitative Fire-works._
+
+Take a paper that is blacked on both sides, or instead of black, the
+paper may be coloured on each side with a deep blue, which will be
+still better for such as are to be seen through transparent papers. It
+must be of a proper size for the figure you intend to exhibit. In this
+paper cut out with a penknife several spaces, and with a piercer make
+a number of holes, rather long than round, and at no regular distance
+from each other.
+
+To represent revolving pyramids and globes, the paper must be cut
+through with a penknife, and the space cut out between each spiral
+should be three or four times as wide as the spirals themselves. You
+must observe to cut them so that the pyramid or globe may appear to
+turn on its axis. The columns that are represented in pieces of
+architecture, or in jets of fire, must be cut in the same manner, if
+they are to be represented as turning on their axis.
+
+In like manner may be exhibited a great variety of ornaments, ciphers,
+and medallions, which, when properly coloured, cannot fail of
+producing the most pleasing effect. There should not be a very great
+diversity of colours, as they would not produce the most agreeable
+appearance.
+
+When these pieces are drawn on a large scale, the architecture or
+ornaments may be shaded; and, to represent different shades, pieces of
+coloured paper must be pasted over each other, which will produce an
+effect that would not be expected from transparent paintings. Five or
+six pieces of paper pasted over each other will be sufficient to
+represent the strongest shades.
+
+To give these pieces the different motions they require, you must
+first consider the nature of each piece; if, for example, you have cut
+out the figure of the sun, or of a star, you must construct a wire
+wheel of the same diameter with these pieces; over this wheel you
+paste a very thin paper, on which is drawn, with black ink, the spiral
+figure. The wheel thus prepared, is to be placed behind the sun or
+star, in such a manner that its axis may be exactly opposite the
+centre of either of these figures. This wheel may be turned by any
+method you think proper.
+
+Now, the wheel being placed directly behind the sun, for example, and
+very near to it, is to be turned regularly round, and strongly
+illuminated by candles placed behind it. The lines that form the
+spiral will then appear, through the spaces cut out from the sun, to
+proceed from its centre to its circumference, and will resemble sparks
+of fire that incessantly succeed each other. The same effect will be
+produced by the star or by any other figure where the fire is not to
+appear as proceeding from the circumference of the centre.
+
+These two pieces, as well as those that follow, may be of any size,
+provided you observe the proportion between the parts of the figure
+and the spiral, which must be wider in larger figures than in small.
+If the sun, for example, have from six to twelve inches diameter, the
+width of the strokes that form the spiral need not be more than
+one-twentieth part of an inch, and the spaces between them, that form
+transparent parts, about two-tenths of an inch. If the sun be two feet
+diameter, the strokes should be one-eighth of an inch, and the space
+between, one quarter of an inch; and if the figure be six feet
+diameter, the strokes should be one quarter of an inch and the spaces
+five-twelfths of an inch. These pieces have a pleasing effect, when
+represented of a small size, but the deception is more striking when
+they are of large dimensions.
+
+It will be proper to place those pieces, when of a small size, in a
+box quite closed on every side, that none of the light may be diffused
+in the chamber: for which purpose it will be convenient to have a tin
+door behind the box, to which the candlesticks may be soldered, and
+the candles more easily lighted.
+
+The several figures cut out should be placed in frames, that they may
+be put, alternately, in a groove in the forepart of the box; or there
+may be two grooves, that the second piece may be put in before the
+first is taken out.
+
+The wheel must be carefully concealed from the eye of the spectator.
+
+Where there is an opportunity of representing these artificial fires
+by a hole in the partition, they will doubtless have a much more
+striking effect, as the spectator cannot then conjecture by what means
+they are produced.
+
+It is easy to conceive that by extending this method, wheels may be
+constructed with three or four spirals, to which may be given
+different directions. It is manifest also that, on the same principle,
+a great variety of transparent figures may be contrived, and which may
+be all placed before the spiral lines.
+
+
+_To represent Cascades of Fire._
+
+In cutting out cascades, you must take care to preserve a natural
+inequality in the parts cut out; for if, to save time, you should make
+all the holes with the same pointed tool, the uniformity of the parts
+will not fail to produce a disagreeable effect. As these cascades are
+very pleasing when well executed, so they are highly disgusting when
+imperfect. These are the most difficult pieces to cut out.
+
+To produce the apparent motion of these cascades, instead of drawing a
+spiral, you must have a slip of strong paper, of such length as you
+judge convenient. In this paper there must be a greater number of
+holes near each other, and made with pointed tools of different
+dimensions.
+
+At each end of the paper, a part of the same size with the cascade
+must be left uncut; and towards those parts the holes must be made at
+a greater distance from each other.
+
+When the cascade that is cut out is placed before the scroll of paper
+just mentioned, and it is entirely wound upon the roller, the part of
+the paper that is then between being quite opaque, no part of the
+cascade will be visible; but as the winch is gently turned, and
+regularly round, the transparent part of the paper will give to the
+cascade the appearance of fire that descends in the same direction;
+and the illusion will be so strong, that the spectators will think
+they see a cascade of fire; especially if the figure be judiciously
+cut out.
+
+
+_The Oracular Mirror._
+
+Provide a round mirror of about three inches in diameter and whose
+frame is an inch wide. Line the under part of the frame, in which
+holes are to be cut, with very thin glass; behind this glass let a
+mirror of about two inches diameter be placed, which is to be
+moveable, so that by inclining the frame to either side, part of the
+mirror will be visible behind the glass on that side.
+
+Then take Spanish chalk, or cypress vitriol, of which you make a
+pencil, and with this you may write on a glass, and rub it off with a
+cloth, and by breathing on the glass, the writing will appear and
+disappear several times. With this pencil write on one side of the
+mirror, before it is put in the frame, the word _yes_, and on the
+other side, _no_; and wipe them off with a cloth.
+
+You propose to a person to ask any question of this mirror that can be
+answered by the words _yes_ or _no_. Then turning the glass to one
+side, and putting your mouth close to it, as if to repeat the question
+softly, you breathe on it, and the word yes or no will immediately
+appear. This mirror will serve for many other agreeable amusements.
+
+
+_The Hour of the Day or Night told by a suspended Shilling._
+
+However improbable the following experiment may appear, it has been
+proved by repeated trials:
+
+Sling a shilling or sixpence at the end of a piece of thread by means
+of a loop. Then resting your elbow on a table, hold the other end of
+the thread betwixt your fore-finger and thumb, observing to let it
+pass across the ball of the thumb, and thus suspend the shilling into
+an empty goblet. Observe, your hand must be perfectly steady; and if
+you find it difficult to keep it in an immoveable posture, it is
+useless to attempt the experiment. Premising, however, that the
+shilling is properly suspended, you will observe, that when it has
+recovered its equilibrium, it will for a moment be stationary: it will
+then of its own accord, and without the least agency from the person
+holding it, assume the action of a pendulum, vibrating from side to
+side of the glass, and, after a few seconds, will strike the hour
+nearest to the time of day; for instance, if the time be twenty-five
+minutes past six, it will strike six; if thirty-five minutes past six,
+it will strike seven; and so on of any other hour.
+
+It is necessary to observe, that the thread should lie over the pulse
+of the thumb, and this may in some measure account for the _vibration_
+of the shilling; but to what cause its striking the precise hour is to
+be traced, remains unexplained; for it is no less astonishing than
+true, that when it has struck the proper number, its vibration ceases,
+it acquires a kind of rotatory motion, and at last becomes stationary,
+as before.
+
+
+_Of Lightning, and the best Method of guarding against its mischievous
+Effects._
+
+Experiments made in electricity first gave philosophers a suspicion,
+that the matter of lightning was the same with the electric matter.
+Experiments afterwards made on lightning obtained from the clouds by
+pointed rods, received into bottles, and subjected to every trial,
+have since proved this suspicion to be perfectly well founded; and
+that, whatever properties we find in electricity, are also the
+properties of lightning.
+
+This matter of lightning, or of electricity, is an extreme subtle
+fluid, penetrating other bodies, and subsisting in them, equally
+diffused.
+
+When, by any operation of art or nature, there happens to be a greater
+proportion of this fluid in one body than in another, the body which
+has most will communicate to that which has least, till the proportion
+becomes equal, provided the distance between them be not too great;
+or, if it be too great, till there be proper conductors to convey it
+from one to the other.
+
+If the communication be through the air, without any conductor, a
+bright light is seen between the bodies, and a sound is heard. In
+small experiments, we call this light and sound the electric spark and
+snap; but in the great operations of nature, the light is what we call
+_lightning_, and the sound (produced at the same time, though
+generally arriving later at our ears than the light does in our eyes)
+is, with its echoes, called _thunder_.
+
+If the communication of this fluid be by a conductor, it may be
+without either light or sound, the subtle fluid passing in the
+substance of the conductor.
+
+If the conductor be good, and of sufficient bigness, the fluid passes
+through it without hurting it. If otherwise, it is damaged or
+destroyed.
+
+All metals, and water, are good conductors. Other bodies may become
+conductors by having some quantity of water in them, as wood and other
+materials used in building, but not having much water in them, are not
+good conductors, and therefore are often damaged in the operation.
+
+Glass, wax, silk, wool, hair, feathers, and even wood perfectly dry,
+are non-conductors: that is, they resist instead of facilitating the
+passage of this subtle fluid.
+
+When this fluid has an opportunity of passing through two conductors,
+one good and sufficient, as of metal, the other not so good, it passes
+in the best, and will follow in any direction.
+
+The distance at which a body charged with this fluid will discharge
+itself suddenly, striking through the air into another body that is
+not charged, or not so highly charged, is different according to the
+quantity of the fluid, the dimensions and form of the bodies
+themselves, and the state of the air between them. This distance,
+whatever it happens to be between any two bodies, is called their
+striking _distance_, as, till they come within that distance of each
+other, no stroke will be made.
+
+The clouds have often more of this fluid in proportion than the earth:
+in which case, as soon as they come near enough, (that is, within the
+striking distance,) or meet with a conductor, the fluid quits them and
+strikes into the earth. A cloud fully charged with this fluid, if so
+high as to be beyond the striking distance from the earth, passes
+quietly without making noise or giving light, unless it meet with
+other clouds that have less.
+
+Tall trees and lofty buildings, as the towers and spires of churches,
+become sometimes conductors between the clouds and the earth; but, not
+being good ones, that is, not conveying the fluid freely, they are
+often damaged.
+
+Buildings that have their roofs covered with lead, or other metal, and
+spouts of metal continued from the roof into the ground to carry off
+the water, are never hurt by lightning, as, whenever it falls on such
+a building, it passes in the metals and not in the walls.
+
+When other buildings happen to be within the striking distance from
+such clouds, the fluid passes in the walls, whether of wood, brick, or
+stone, quitting the wall only when it can find better conductors near
+them, as metal rods, bolts, and hinges of windows or doors, gilding on
+wainscot, or frames of pictures, the silvering on the backs of
+looking-glasses, the wires for bells, and the bodies of animals, so
+containing watery fluids. And in passing through the house it follows
+the direction of these conductors, taking as many in its way as can
+assist in its passage, whether in a straight or crooked line, leaping
+from one to the other, if not far distant from each other, only
+rending the wall in the spaces where these partial good conductors are
+too distant from each other.
+
+An iron rod being placed on the outside of a building, from the
+highest part continued down into the moist earth, in any direction,
+straight or crooked, following the form of the roof or other parts of
+the building, will receive the lightning at its upper end, attracting
+it so as to prevent its striking any other part; and, affording it a
+good conveyance into the earth, will prevent its damaging any part of
+the building.
+
+A small quantity of metal is found able to conduct a quantity of this
+fluid. A wire no higher than a goose-quill has been known to conduct
+(with safety to the building, as far as the wire was continued) a
+quantity of lightning that did prodigious damage both above and below
+it; and probably larger rods are not necessary, though it is common in
+America to make them of half an inch, some three-quarters, or an inch,
+diameter.
+
+The rod may be fastened to the wall, chimney, &c., with staples of
+iron. The lightning will not leave the rod (a good conductor) to pass
+into the wall (a bad conductor) through those staples. It would
+rather, if any were in the wall, pass out of it into the rod, to get
+more readily by that conductor into the earth.
+
+If the building be very large and extensive, two or more rods may be
+placed in different parts, for greater security.
+
+Small ragged parts of clouds, suspended in the air between the great
+body of clouds and the earth, (like leaf gold in electrical
+experiments,) often serve as partial conductors for the lightning,
+which proceeds from one of them to another, and by their help comes
+within the striking distance to the earth or a building. It therefore
+strikes, through those conductors, a building that would otherwise be
+out of the striking distance.
+
+Long sharp points communicating with the earth, and presented to such
+parts of clouds, drawing silently from them the fluid they are charged
+with, they are then attracted to the cloud, and may leave the distance
+so great as to be beyond the reach of striking.
+
+It is therefore that we elevate the upper end of the rod, six or eight
+feet above the highest part of the building, tapering it gradually to
+a fine sharp point, which is gilt, to prevent its rusting.
+
+Thus the pointed rod either presents a stroke from the cloud, or if a
+stroke be made, conducts it to the earth, with safety to the building.
+
+The lower end of the rod should enter the earth so deep as to come at
+the moist part, perhaps two or three feet; and if bent when under the
+surface, so as to go in a horizontal line six or eight feet from the
+wall, and then bent again downwards three or four feet, it will
+prevent damage to any of the stones of the foundation.
+
+A person apprehensive of danger from lightning, happening during the
+time of thunder to be in a house not so secured, will do well to avoid
+sitting near the chimney, near a looking-glass, or any gilt pictures
+or wainscot; the safest place is in the middle of the room, (so it be
+not under a metal lustre suspended by a chain,) sitting in one chair
+and laying the feet up in another. It is still safer to bring two or
+three mattresses or beds into the middle of the room, and, folding
+them up double, place the chair upon them; for they, not being so good
+conductors as the walls, the lightning will not choose an interrupted
+course through the air of the room and the bedding, when it can go
+through a continued better conductor, the wall. But where it can be
+had, a hammock or swinging-bed, suspended by silk cords equally
+distant from the walls on every side, and from the ceiling and floor
+above and below, affords the safest situation a person can have in any
+room whatever; and what, indeed, may be deemed quite free from danger
+of any stroke by lightning.
+
+
+_The Leech, a Prognosticator of the Weather._
+
+Confine a leech in a large phial, three parts filled with rain water,
+regularly changed twice a week, and placed on a window frame, fronting
+the north. In fair and frosty weather it lies motionless, and rolled
+up in a spiral form, at the bottom of the glass: but prior to rain or
+snow, it creeps up to the top, where if the rain will be heavy and of
+some continuance, it remains a considerable time; if trifling, it
+quickly descends. Should the rain or snow be accompanied with wind, it
+darts about its habitation with amazing celerity, and seldom ceases
+until it begins to blow hard. If a storm of thunder or lightning be
+approaching, it is exceedingly agitated, and expresses its feelings in
+violent convulsive starts, at the top of the glass. It is remarkable
+that however fine and serene the weather may be, and not the least
+indication to change, either from the sky, the barometer, or any other
+cause whatsoever, yet, if the animal ever shift its position, or move
+in a desultory manner, so certain will the coincident results occur,
+within thirty-six hours, frequently within twenty-four, and sometimes
+in twelve; though its motions chiefly depend on the fall and duration
+of the wet, and the strength of the wind.
+
+
+_The Awn of Barley an Hydrometer._
+
+The awn of barley is furnished with stiff points, which, like the
+teeth of a saw, are all turned towards the point of it; as this long
+awn lies upon the ground, it extends itself in the moist air of night,
+and pushes forward the barley-corn, which it adheres to in the day; it
+shortens as it dries; and, as these points prevent it from receding,
+it draws up its pointed end, and thus, creeping like a worm, will
+travel many feet from the parent stem. That very ingenious mechanic
+philosopher, Mr. Edgworth, once made on this principle a wooden
+automaton: its back consisted of soft fir-wood, about an inch square,
+and four feet long, made of pieces cut the cross-way in respect to the
+fibres of the wood, and glued together; it had two feet before, and
+two behind, which supported the back horizontally, but were placed
+with their extremities, which were armed with sharp points of iron,
+bending backwards. Hence, in moist weather, the back lengthened, and
+the two foremost feet were pushed forwards; in dry weather the hinder
+feet were drawn after, as the obliquity of the points of the feet
+prevented it from receding.
+
+
+_The Power of Water when reduced to Vapour by Heat._
+
+Whatever force water may have while its parts remain together, is
+nothing, if compared to the almost incredible power with which its
+parts are endued, when they are reduced to vapour by heat. Those
+steams which we see rising from the surface of boiling water, and
+which to us appear feeble, yet, if properly conducted, acquire immense
+force. In the same manner as gunpowder has but small effect, if
+suffered to expand at large, so the steam issuing from water is
+impotent, where it is permitted to evaporate into the air; but where
+confined in a narrow compass, as, for instance, where it rises in an
+iron tube shut up on every side, it there exerts all the wonders of
+its strength. _Muschenbrook_ has proved by experiment, that the force
+of gunpowder is feeble when compared to that of rising steam. A
+hundred and forty pounds of gunpowder blew up a weight of thirty
+thousand pounds: but, on the other hand, a hundred and forty pounds of
+water, converted by heat into steam, lifted a weight of seventy-seven
+thousand pounds; and would lift a much greater, if there were means of
+giving the steam more heat with safety; for the hotter the steam the
+greater is its force.
+
+
+_Artificial Memory._
+
+In travelling along a road, the sight of the more remarkable scenes we
+meet with, frequently puts us in mind of the subjects we were thinking
+or talking of when we last saw them. Such facts, which were perfectly
+familiar, even to the vulgar, might very naturally suggest the
+possibility of assisting the memory, by establishing a connexion
+between the ideas we wish to remember, and certain sensible objects,
+which have been found from experience to make a permanent impression
+on the mind. It was said, that a person contrived a method of
+committing to memory the sermons which he was accustomed to hear, by
+fixing his attention, during the different heads of the discourse, on
+different compartments of the roof of the church, in such a manner as,
+that when he afterwards saw the roof, or remembered the order in which
+its compartments were disposed, he recollected the method which the
+preacher had observed in treating his subject. This contrivance was
+perfectly analogous to the topical memory of the ancients; an art
+which, whatever be the opinion we entertain of its use, is certainly
+entitled, in a high degree, to the praise of ingenuity.
+
+Suppose you fix in your memory the different apartments in some very
+large building, and that you had accustomed yourself to think of these
+apartments always in the same invariable order. Suppose further, that,
+in preparing yourself for a public discourse, in which you had
+occasion to treat of a great variety of particulars, you were anxious
+to fix in your memory the order you proposed to observe in the
+communication of your ideas. It is evident, that by a proper division
+of your subject into heads, and by connecting each head with a
+particular apartment, (which you could easily do, by conceiving
+yourself to be sitting in the apartment while you were studying the
+part of your discourse you mean to connect with it,) the habitual
+order in which these apartments occurred to your thoughts, would
+present to you in the proper arrangement, and without any effort on
+your part, the ideas of which you were to treat. It is also obvious,
+that very little practice would enable you to avail yourself of this
+contrivance, without any embarrassment or distraction of your
+attention.
+
+
+_To procure Hydrogen Gas._
+
+Provide a phial with a cork stopper, through which is thrust a piece
+of tobacco-pipe. Into the phial put a few pieces of zinc, or small
+iron nails; on this pour a mixture, of equal parts of sulphuric acid
+(oil of vitriol) and water, previously mixed in a tea-cup, to prevent
+accidents. Replace the cork stopper, with a piece of tobacco-pipe in
+it; the hydrogen gas will then be liberated through the pipe into a
+small steam. Apply the flame of a candle or taper to this steam, and
+it will immediately take fire, and burn with a clear flame until all
+the hydrogen in the phial be exhausted. In this experiment the zinc or
+iron, by the action of the acid, becomes oxygenized, and is dissolved,
+thus taking the oxygen from the sulphuric acid and water; the hydrogen
+(the other constituent part of the water) is thereby liberated, and
+ascends.
+
+
+_To fill a Bladder with Hydrogen Gas._
+
+Apply a bladder, previously wetted and compressed, in order to squeeze
+out all the common air, to the piece of tobacco-pipe inserted in the
+cork stopper of the phial, (as described in the experiment above.) The
+bladder will thus be filled with hydrogen gas.
+
+
+_Exploding Gas Bubbles._
+
+Adapt the end of a common tobacco-pipe to a bladder filled with
+hydrogen gas, and dip the bowl of the pipe into soap-suds, prepared as
+if for blowing up soap bubbles; squeeze out small portions of gas from
+the bladder into the soap-suds, and the bubbles will ascend into the
+air with very great rapidity, until they are out of sight. If a
+lighted taper or candle be applied to the bubbles as they ascend from
+the bowl of the pipe, they will explode with a loud noise.
+
+
+_Another Method._
+
+Put a small quantity of phosphorus and some potash, dissolved in
+water, into a retort; apply the flame of a candle or lamp to the
+bottom of the retort, until the contents boil. The phosphuretted
+hydrogen gas will then rise, and may be collected in receivers. But
+it, instead of receiving the gas into a jar, you let it simply ascend
+into water, the bubbles of gas will then explode in succession, as
+they reach the surface of the water, and a beautiful white smoke will
+be formed, which rises slowly and majestically to the ceiling. If bits
+of phosphorus are kept some hours in hydrogen gas, phosphorized
+hydrogen gas is produced: and if bubbles of this gas are thrown up
+into the receiver of an air-pump, previously filled with oxygen gas, a
+brilliant bluish flame will immediately fill the jar.
+
+
+_Singular Impression on the visual Nerves by a Luminous Object._
+
+If, while sitting in a room, you look earnestly at the middle of a
+window, a little while, when the day is bright, and then shut your
+eyes, the figure of the window will still remain in your eye, and so
+distinct that you may count the panes. A remarkable circumstance
+attending this experiment is, that the impression of forms is better
+retained than that of colours; for, after the eyes are shut, when you
+first discern the image of the window, the panes appear dark, and the
+cross-bars of the sashes, with the window frames and walls, appear
+white and bright; but if you still add to the darkness of the eyes, by
+covering them with your hand, the reverse instantly takes place--the
+panes appear luminous, and the cross-bars dark; and by removing the
+hand, they are again reversed.
+
+
+_Curious Effects of Oil upon Water, and Water upon Oil._
+
+Fasten a piece of pack-thread round a tumbler, with strings of the
+same from each side, meeting above it in a knot at about a foot
+distance from the top of the tumbler. Then putting in as much water as
+will fill about one-third part of the tumbler, lift it up by the knot,
+and swing it to and fro in the air; the water will keep its place as
+steadily in the glass as if it were ice. But pour gently in upon the
+water about as much oil, and then again swing it in the air as before,
+the tranquillity before possessed by the water will be transferred to
+the surface of the oil, and the water under it will be violently
+agitated.
+
+
+_Another curious Experiment with Oil and Water._
+
+Drop a small quantity of oil into water agitated by the wind; it will
+immediately spread itself with surprising swiftness upon the surface,
+and the oil, though scarcely more than a tea-spoonful, will produce an
+instant calm over a space several yards square. It should be done on
+the windward side of the pond or river, and you will observe it extend
+to the size of nearly half an acre, making it appear as smooth as a
+looking-glass. One remarkable circumstance in this experiment is the
+sudden, wide, and forcible spreading of a drop of oil on the surface
+of the water; for if a drop of oil be put upon a highly polished
+marble table, or a looking-glass, laid horizontally, the drop remains
+in its place, spreading very little, but when dropped on water it
+spreads instantly many feet round, becoming so thin as to produce the
+prismatic colours for a considerable space, and beyond them so much
+thinner as to be invisible, except in its effect in smoothing the
+waves at a much greater distance. It seems as if a repulsion of its
+particles took place as soon as it touched the water, and so strong as
+to act on other bodies swimming on the surface, as straw, leaves,
+chips, &c., forcing them to recede every way from the drop, as from a
+centre, leaving a large clear space.
+
+
+_Remarkable Effects on the visual Nerves, by looking through
+differently-coloured Glasses._
+
+After looking through green spectacles, the white paper of a book
+will, on first taking them off, appear to have a blush of red; and
+after looking through red glasses, a greenish cast. This seems to
+intimate a relation between green and red, not yet explained.
+
+_Weather Table._
+
+ --------------------+---------------------+------------------------
+ NEW AND FULL MOON. | SUMMER. | WINTER.
+ --------------------+---------------------+------------------------
+ If the new or full | |
+ moon enters into | |
+ the first or last | |
+ quarter of the | |
+ hour of 12 at noon | Very rainy | Snow and rain.
+ | |
+ If between the | |
+ hours of | |
+ (P.M.) 2 and 4 | Changeable | Fair and mild.
+ 4 and 6 | Fair | Fair.
+ 6 and 8 | { Fair, if wind | { Fair and frosty, if
+ | { at N.W. | { wind at N. or N.E.
+ | { Rainy, if wind | { Rain or snow, if S.
+ | { at S. or S.W. | { or S.W.
+ 8 and 10 | Ditto | Ditto.
+ 10 | Fair | Fair and frosty.
+ (A.M.) 2 | Ditto | { Hard frost, unless
+ | | { wind S.S.W.
+ 2 and 4 | Cold, with frequent |
+ | showers |
+ 4 and 6 | Rain | Ditto, ditto.
+ 6 and 8 | Wind and Rain | Stormy weather.
+ 8 and 10 | Changeable | { Cold and rain, if
+ | | { wind N.; snow if E.
+ 10 and 12 | Frequent showers | Cold, with high wind.
+ --------------------+---------------------+-----------------------
+
+
+
+
+A COMPLETE
+
+SYSTEM OF PYROTECHNY;
+
+OR THE
+
+ART OF MAKING FIRE-WORKS.
+
+
+In the art of making fire-works, great attention must be paid to the
+well-mixing of the materials--without which all labour is thrown away;
+to the purity of the articles; and to the proper quantities of each.
+Sulphur, to be good, must be of a high colour, and crack and bounce
+when held in the hand. For small fire-works, such as may be bought in
+the flour will be found quite good enough, but for the larger kinds,
+the lump brimstone ground is preferable.
+
+_Benzoin_ is used in fire-works, more for its pleasant scent than any
+material use for the purposes of fire. It may be procured at the
+chemists, ready for use. The oil is also used in wet composition, for
+stars, &c.
+
+
+_Of Sulphur, or Brimstone._
+
+Sulphur is by nature the food of fire, and one of the principal
+ingredients in gunpowder, and in almost all compositions of
+fire-works; therefore, great care ought to be taken of its being good,
+and brought to the highest perfection. Now, to know when the sulphur
+is good, you are to observe that it be of a high yellow; and if, when
+held in one's hand, it crackles and bounces, it is a sign that it is
+fresh and good: but as the method of reducing brimstone to a powder is
+very troublesome, it is better to buy the flour ready made, which is
+done in large quantities, and in great perfection; but when a great
+quantity of fire-works is to be made, it is best to use the lump
+brimstone ground, in the same manner as gunpowder.
+
+
+_Of Saltpetre._
+
+Saltpetre being the principal ingredient in fire-works, and a volatile
+body by reason of its aqueous and aerial parts, is easily rarefied by
+fire; but not so soon when foul and gross, as when purified from its
+gross and earthy parts, which greatly retard its velocity; therefore,
+when any quantity of fire-works is intended to be made, it would be
+necessary first to examine the saltpetre; for if it be not well
+cleansed from all impurities, and of a good sort, your works will not
+have their proper effect.
+
+
+_To pulverize Saltpetre._
+
+Take a copper kettle, the bottom being spherical, and put into it
+fourteen pounds of refined saltpetre, with two quarts or five pints of
+clean water; then put the kettle on a slow fire, and when the
+saltpetre is dissolved, if any impurities arise, skim them off, and
+keep constantly stirring it with two large spatulas, till all the
+water exhales; and when done enough, it will appear like white sand,
+and as fine as flour; but if it should boil too fast, take the kettle
+off the fire, and set it on some wet sand, which will prevent the
+nitre from sticking to the kettle. When you have pulverized a quantity
+of saltpetre, be careful to keep it in a dry place.
+
+
+_To prepare Charcoal for Fire-works._
+
+Charcoal is a preservative, by which the saltpetre and brimstone are
+made into gunpowder, by preventing the sulphur from suffocating the
+strong and windy exhalation of the nitre. There are several sorts of
+wood made use of for this purpose; some prefer hazel, others willow,
+and others alder. The method of burning the wood is this: cut it in
+pieces of two or three feet long, then slit each piece in four parts;
+scale off the bark and hard knots, and dry them in the sun, or in an
+oven; then make in the earth a square hole, and line it with bricks,
+in which lay the wood crossing one another, and set it on fire; when
+thoroughly lighted, and in a flame, cover the whole with boards, and
+fling earth over them close, to prevent the air from getting in, yet
+so as not to fall among the charcoal; and when it has lain thus for
+twenty-four hours, take out the coals and lay them in a dry place for
+use. It is to be observed, that charcoal for fire-works must always be
+soft and well burnt, which may be bought ready done.
+
+
+_Of Gunpowder, &c._
+
+Gunpowder being a principal ingredient in fire-works, it will not be
+improper to give a short definition of its strange explosive force,
+and cause of action, which, according to Dr. Shaw's opinion of the
+chemical cause of the explosive force of gunpowder, is as
+follows:--"Each grain of gunpowder consisting of a certain proportion
+of sulphur, nitre, and coal, the coal presently taking fire, upon
+contact of the smallest spark; at which time both the sulphur and the
+nitre immediately melt, and by means of the coal interposed between
+them, burst into flame; which spreading from grain to grain,
+propagates the same effect almost instantaneously, whence the whole
+mass of powder comes to be fired; and as nitre contains a large
+proportion both of air and water, which are now violently rarefied by
+the heat, a kind of fiery explosive blast is thus produced, wherein
+the nitre seems, by its aqueous and aerial parts, to act as bellows to
+the other inflammable bodies (sulphur and coal) to blow them into a
+flame, and carry off their whole substance in smoke and vapour."
+
+
+_How to meal Gunpowder, Brimstone, and Charcoal._
+
+There have been many methods used to grind these ingredients to a
+powder for fire-works, such as large mortars and pestles made of
+ebony, and other hard woods; but none of these methods have proved so
+effectual and speedy as the last invention, that of the mealing table.
+This table is made of elm, with a rim round its edge four or five
+inches high; and at the narrow end is a slider which runs in a groove
+and forms part of the rim; so that when you have taken out of the
+table as much powder as you conveniently can, with a copper shovel,
+you may sweep all clean out at the slider. When you are going to meal
+a quantity of powder, observe not to put too much on the table at
+once; but when you have put in a good proportion, take a muller and
+rub it therewith till all the grains are broken; sift it in a lawn
+sieve, that has a receiver and top to it; and that which does not pass
+through the sieve, return again to the table and grind it more, till
+you have brought it all fine enough to go through the sieve. Brimstone
+and charcoal are ground in the same manner as gunpowder, only the
+muller must be made of ebony, for these ingredients being harder than
+powder, would stick in the grain of the elm and be very difficult to
+grind; and as the brimstone is apt to stick and clog to the table, it
+would be best to keep one for that purpose only, by which means you
+will always have your brimstone clean and well ground.
+
+
+_Spur Fire._
+
+This fire is the most beautiful of any composition yet known. As it
+requires great trouble to bring it to perfection, particular care must
+be paid to the following instructions. They are made generally in
+cases about six inches long, but not driven very hard.
+
+ CHARGE. lb. oz. CHARGE. lb. oz.
+ Saltpetre 4 0 } { Saltpetre 1 0
+ Sulphur 2 0 } or { Sulphur 0 8
+ Lamp-black 1 8 } { Lamp-black 4 quarts.
+
+This composition is very difficult to mix. The saltpetre and brimstone
+must be first sifted together, and then put into a marble mortar, and
+the lamp-black with them, which you work down by degrees with a wooden
+pestle, till all the ingredients appear of one colour, which will be
+something greyish, but very near black; then drive a little into a
+case for trial, and fire it in a dark place; and if the sparks, which
+are called stars or pinks, come out in clusters, and afterwards spread
+well without any other sparks, it is a sign of its being good,
+otherwise, not; for if any drossy sparks appear, and the stars not
+full, it is then not mixed enough; but if the pinks are very small,
+and soon break, it is a sign that you have rubbed it too much.
+
+This mixture, when rubbed too much, will be too fierce, and hardly
+show any stars; and, on the contrary, when not mixed enough, will be
+too weak, and throw out an obscure smoke, and lumps of dross, without
+any stars. The reason of this charge being called the spur fire is,
+because the sparks it yields have a great resemblance to the rowel of
+a spur, from whence it takes its name. As the beauty of this
+composition cannot be seen at so great a distance as brilliant fire,
+it has a better effect in a room than in the open air, and may be
+fired in a chamber without any danger; it is of so innocent a nature,
+that, although an improper phrase, it may be called a cold fire; and
+so extraordinary is the fire produced from this composition, that, if
+well made, the sparks will not burn a handkerchief when held in the
+midst of them; you may hold them in your hand while burning, with as
+much safety as a candle; and if you put your hand within a foot of the
+case, you will feel the sparks fall like drops of rain.
+
+
+_To make Touch Paper._
+
+Dissolve in some spirits of wine or vinegar, a little saltpetre; then
+take some purple or blue paper, wet it with the above liquor, and when
+dry it will be fit for use. When you paste this paper on any of your
+works, take care that the paste does not touch that part which is to
+burn.
+
+The method of using this paper is, by cutting it into slips, long
+enough to go once round the mouth of the serpent, cracker, &c. When
+you paste on these slips, leave a little, above the mouth of the case,
+not pasted; then prime the case with meal-powder (see p. 165) and
+twist the paper to a point.
+
+
+_Of such Ingredients as show themselves in Sparks, when rammed into
+choked Cases._
+
+The set colours of fire produced by sparks are divided into four
+sorts, viz., the black, white, grey, and red; the black charges are
+composed of two ingredients, which are meal-powder and charcoal; the
+white of three, viz., saltpetre, sulphur, and charcoal; the grey of
+four, viz., meal-powder, saltpetre, brimstone, and charcoal; and the
+red of three, viz., meal-powder, charcoal, and saw-dust.
+
+There are, besides these four regular or set charges, two others
+which are distinguished by the names of compound and brilliant
+charges; the compound charge being made of many ingredients, such as
+meal-powder, saltpetre, brimstone, charcoal, saw-dust, sea-coal,
+antimony, glass-dust, brass-dust, steel-filings, cast-iron, tanners'
+dust, &c., or any thing that will yield sparks; all which must be
+managed with discretion. The brilliant fires are composed of
+meal-powder, saltpetre, brimstone, and steel-dust; or with
+meal-powder, and steel-filings only.
+
+
+_Of the Method of mixing Compositions._
+
+The performance of the principal part of fire-works depends much on
+the compositions being well mixed; therefore, great care ought to be
+taken in this part of the work, particularly in the composition for
+sky-rockets. When you have four or five pounds of ingredients to mix,
+which is a sufficient quantity at a time, (for a larger proportion
+will not do so well,) first put the different ingredients together,
+then work them about with your hands, till you think they are pretty
+well incorporated: after which, put them into a lawn sieve with a
+receiver and top to it; and if, after it is sifted, any should remain
+that will not pass through the sieve, grind it again till fine enough;
+and if it be twice sifted it will not be amiss; but the compositions
+for wheels and common works are not so material, nor need be so fine.
+But in all fixed works, from which the fire is to play regular, the
+ingredients must be very fine, and great care taken in mixing them
+well together: and observe, that, in all compositions wherein are
+steel or iron filings, the hands must not touch; nor will any works
+which have iron or steel in their charge, keep long in damp weather,
+without being properly prepared, according to the following
+directions:--
+
+It may sometimes happen, that fire-works may be required to be kept a
+long time, or sent abroad; neither of which could be done with
+brilliant fires, if made with filings unprepared; for this reason,
+that the saltpetre being of a damp nature, it causes the iron to rust,
+the natural consequence of which is, that when the works are fired,
+there will appear but very few brilliant sparks, but instead of them a
+number of red and drossy sparks; and besides, the charge will be so
+much weakened, that if this should happen to wheels, the fire will not
+be strong enough to force them round; to prevent such accidents,
+prepare your filings after the following manner:--Melt in a glazed
+earthen pan some brimstone over a slow fire, and when melted, throw in
+some filings, which keep stirring about till they are covered with
+brimstone; this you must do while it is on the fire; then take it off,
+and stir it very quick till cold, when you must roll it on a board
+with a wooden roller, till you have broken it as fine as corn powder;
+after which, sift from it as much of the brimstone as you can. There
+is another method of preparing filings, so as to keep two or three
+months in winter; this may be done by rubbing them between the
+strongest sort of brown paper, which has been previously moistened
+with linseed oil.
+
+N.B. If the brimstone should take fire, you may put it out, by
+covering the pan close at top. It is not of much consequence what
+quantity of brimstone you use, provided there is enough to give each
+grain of iron a coat; but as much as will cover the bottom of a pan of
+about one foot diameter, will do for five or six pounds of filings.
+Cast-iron for gerbes will be preserved by the above method.
+
+
+_To make Crackers._
+
+Cut some stout cartridge-paper into pieces three inches and a half
+broad, and one foot long; one edge of each of these pieces fold down
+lengthwise about three-quarters of an inch broad; then fold the double
+edge down a quarter of an inch, and turn the single edge back half
+over the double fold; open it, and lay all along the channel, which is
+formed by the foldings of the paper, some meal-powder; then fold it
+over and over till all the paper is doubled up, rubbing it down every
+turn; this being done, bend it backwards and forwards, two inches and
+a half or thereabouts, at a time, as often as the paper will allow;
+hold all these folds flat and close, and with a small pinching cord,
+give one turn round the middle of the cracker, and pinch it close;
+bind it with packthread, as tight as you can; then in the place where
+it was pinched, prime one end, and cap it with touch-paper. When these
+crackers are fired, they will give a report at every turn of the
+paper; if you would have a great number of bounces, you must cut the
+paper longer, or join them after they are made; but if they are made
+very long before they are pinched, you must have a piece of wood with
+a groove in it, deep enough to let in half the cracker; this will hold
+it straight while it is pinching.
+
+
+_To make Squibs and Serpents._
+
+First make the cases, of about six inches in length, by rolling slips
+of stout cartridge-paper three times round a roller, and pasting the
+last fold; tying it near the bottom as tight as possible, and making
+it air-tight at the end, by sealing-wax. Then take of gunpowder half a
+pound, charcoal one ounce, brimstone one ounce, and steel-filings half
+an ounce, (or in like proportion,) grind them with a muller, or pound
+them in a mortar. Your cases being dry and ready, first put a
+thimble-full of your powder, and ram it hard down with a ruler; then
+fill the case to the top with the aforesaid mixture, ramming it hard
+down in the course of filling, two or three times; when this is done
+point with touch-paper, which should be pasted on that part which
+touches the case, otherwise it is liable to drop off.
+
+
+_Sky-Rockets._
+
+Rockets being of the fire-works most in use, we shall give them the
+preference in description. As the performance of rockets depends much
+upon their moulds, they should be made according to the following
+proportions:--Taking the diameter of the orifice, its height should be
+equal to six diameters and two-thirds: the choke, one diameter and
+one-third of this model, will serve for every rocket from 4 oz. to 6
+lb.--For instance:--suppose the diameter of a rocket of 1 lb. be 1-1/2
+inch, then its length being 6 diameters and two-thirds, the length of
+the case must be 10-1/3 inches, and the choke 2-1/4 inches. Your
+rammer must have a collar of brass, to prevent the wood from
+splitting.
+
+_Method of rolling Rocket Cases._--The cases must be made of the
+strongest cartridge-paper, and rolled dry. The case of a
+middling-sized rocket will take up paper of four or five sheets thick;
+having cut your papers to a proper size, and the last sheet with a
+slope at one end, fold down one end, and lay your former on the double
+edge, and when you have rolled on the paper within two or three turns,
+lay the next sheet on that part which is loose, and roll it all on.
+Then, in order to roll the case as hard as possible, place it on a
+table, and with a smooth board roll it for some time forwards on the
+table, till it becomes quite hard and firm. This must be done with
+every sheet. You have next to choke the case; for which purpose draw
+your former a little distance from the bottom, then, with a cord, once
+round the case, pull it rather easy at first, and harder, till you
+have closed the end. To make it easy, you may dip the ends of the
+inner sheets in water before rolling, then bind it with small twine.
+
+Having thus pinched and tied the case so as not to give way, put it
+into the mould without its foot, and with a mallet drive the former
+hard on the end-piece, which will force the neck close and smooth.
+This done, cut the case to its proper length, allowing from the neck
+to the edge of the mouth half a diameter, which is equal to the
+height of the nipple; then take out the former, and drive the case
+over the piercer with a long rammer, and the vent will be of a proper
+size.
+
+Having formed your cases, we will now proceed to the description of
+the ingredients necessary for the rocket.
+
+_Of mixing the Composition._--The performance of the principal part of
+fire-works depends much on the compositions being well mixed;
+therefore, great care must be taken in this part of the work,
+particularly for the composition for sky-rockets. When you have four
+or five pounds of ingredients to mix, which is a sufficient quantity
+at a time, (for a large proportion will not do so well,) first put the
+different ingredients together, then work them about with your hands,
+till you think they are pretty well incorporated; after which, put
+them into a lawn sieve with a receiver and top to it; and if, after it
+is sifted, any remains that will not pass through the sieve, grind it
+again till it is fine enough; and if it be twice sifted it will not be
+amiss; but the compositions for wheels and common works are not so
+material, nor need be so fine. But in all fixed works, from which the
+fire is to play regular, the ingredients must be very fine, and great
+care taken in mixing them well together; and observe, that in all
+compositions wherein are iron filings, the hand must not touch them;
+nor will any works which have iron or steel in their charge keep long
+in damp weather.
+
+_To drive or ram Rockets._--Rockets are filled hollow, otherwise they
+would not ascend, and there is not a part that requires greater
+attention than this stage of the process. One blow more or less with
+the mallet will spoil the ascent.
+
+The charge of rockets must always be driven above the piercer, and on
+it must be rammed a thin head of clay; through the middle of which
+bore a small hole to the composition, that when the charge is burnt to
+the top, it may communicate its fire through the hole to the stars in
+the head. To a rocket of four ounces, give to each ladle-full of
+charge 16 strokes; to a rocket of 1 lb., 28; to a 2-pounder, 36; to a
+4-pounder, 42; and to a 6-pounder, 56; but rockets of a larger sort
+cannot be driven well by hand, but must be rammed with a machine made
+in the same manner as those for driving piles.
+
+The method of ramming wheel cases, or any other sort in which the
+charge is driven solid, is the same as sky-rockets.
+
+When you load the heads of your rockets with stars, rains, serpents,
+crackers, scrolls, or any thing else, according to your fancy,
+remember always to put a ladle-full of meal-powder into each head,
+which will be enough to burst the head and disperse the stars, or
+whatever it contains.
+
+_Decorations for Sky-rockets._--Sky-rockets may be decorated according
+to fancy. Some are headed with stars of different sorts, such as
+tailed, brilliant, white, blue, and yellow stars, &c. Some with gold
+and silver rains; others with serpents, crackers, fire-scrolls, and
+marrons; and some with small rockets and other devices, as the maker
+pleases.
+
+LENGTH OF ROCKET-STICKS.
+
+For rockets of 6 lb. 0 oz. the stick must be 14 ft. 10 in. long
+ 4 0 12 10
+ 2 0 9 4
+ 1 0 8 2
+ 0 8 6 6
+ 0 4 5 3
+
+Having your sticks ready, cut on one of the flat sides at the top a
+groove the length of the rocket, and as broad as the stick will allow;
+then on the opposite flat side cut two notches, for the cord which
+ties on the rocket to lie in; one of these notches must be near the
+top of the stick, and the other facing the neck of the rocket; the
+distance between these notches may be easily known, for the top of the
+stick should always touch the head of the rocket. When your rockets
+and sticks are ready, lay the rockets in the grooves in the sticks,
+and tie them on. We will now proceed to the charge for sky-rockets.
+
+ROCKETS OF FOUR OUNCES.
+
+ lb. oz.
+ Meal-powder 1 4
+ Saltpetre 0 4
+ Charcoal 0 2
+
+ROCKETS OF EIGHT OUNCES.
+
+ lb. oz.
+ Meal-powder 1 0
+ Saltpetre 0 4
+ Brimstone 0 3
+ Charcoal 0 1-1/2
+
+ONE POUND.
+
+ lb. oz.
+ Meal-powder 2 0
+ Saltpetre 0 8
+ Brimstone 0 4
+ Charcoal 0 2
+ Steel-filings 0 1-1/2
+
+SKY-ROCKETS IN GENERAL.
+
+ lb. oz.
+ Saltpetre 4 0
+ Brimstone 1-1/2 0
+ Charcoal 1 12
+ Meal-powder 0 2
+
+LARGE SKY-ROCKETS.
+
+ lb. oz.
+ Saltpetre 4 0
+ Meal-powder 1 0
+ Brimstone 1 0
+
+ROCKETS OF A MIDDLING SIZE.
+
+ lb. oz.
+ Meal-powder 1 0
+ Charcoal 1 0
+ Saltpetre 3 0
+ Sulphur 2 0
+
+
+ROCKET STARS.
+
+WHITE STARS.
+
+ lb. oz.
+ Meal-powder 0 4
+ Saltpetre 0 12
+ Sulphur vivum 0 6
+ Oil of spike 0 2
+ Camphor 0 5
+
+BLUE STARS.
+
+ lb. oz.
+ Meal-powder 0 8
+ Saltpetre 0 4
+ Sulphur 0 2
+ Spirits of wine 0 2
+ Oil of Spike 0 2
+
+VARIEGATED STARS.
+
+ lb. oz.
+ Meal-powder 0 3-1/2
+ Saltpetre 0 4
+ Sulphur vivum 0 2
+ Camphor 0 2
+
+BRILLIANT STARS.
+
+ lb. oz.
+ Saltpetre 0 8-1/2
+ Sulphur 0 1-1/2
+ Meal-powder 0 0-3/4
+
+Worked up with spirits of wine only.
+
+COMMON STARS.
+
+ lb. oz.
+ Saltpetre 1 0
+ Brimstone 0 4
+ Antimony 0 4-3/4
+ Isinglass 0 0-1/2
+ Camphor 0 0-1/4
+ Spirits of wine 0 0-1/4
+
+TAILED STARS.
+
+ lb. oz.
+ Meal-powder 0 2
+ Brimstone 0 2
+ Saltpetre 0 2
+ Charcoal (coarsely ground) 0 0-3/4
+
+STARS OF A FINE COLOUR.
+
+ lb. oz.
+ Sulphur 0 1
+ Meal-powder 0 1
+ Saltpetre 0 1
+ Camphor 0 0-1/4
+ Oil of turpentine 0 0-1/4
+
+
+RAINS.
+
+GOLD RAIN FOR SKY-ROCKETS.
+
+ lb. oz.
+ Saltpetre 0 8
+ Brimstone 0 2
+ Glass-dust 0 1
+ Antimony 0 0-3/4
+ Brass-dust 0 0-1/4
+ Saw-dust 0 0-1/4
+
+SILVER RAIN.
+
+ lb. oz.
+ Saltpetre 0 8
+ Brimstone 0 2
+ Charcoal 0 4
+ Steel-dust 0 0-1/4
+
+_To fix one Rocket on the top of another._--When sky-rockets are fixed
+one on the top of another, they are called _towering rockets_, on
+account of their mounting so very high. Towering rockets are made
+after this manner: Fix on a pound rocket a head without a collar; then
+take a four-ounce rocket, which may be headed or bounced, and rub the
+mouth of it with meal-powder wetted with spirit of wine: this done,
+put it in the head of a large rocket with its mouth downwards; but
+before it is put in, stick a bit of quick-match in the hole of the
+clay of the pound rocket, which match should be long enough to go a
+little way up the bore of the small rocket, to fire it when the large
+rocket is burnt out. As the four-ounce rocket is too small to fill the
+head of the other, roll round it as much tow as will make it stand
+upright in the centre of the head: the rocket being thus fixed, paste
+a single paper round the opening of the top of the head of the large
+rocket. The large rocket must have only half a diameter of charge
+rammed above the piercer; for, if filled to the usual height, it
+would turn before the small one takes fire, and entirely destroy the
+intended effect: when one rocket is headed with another, there will be
+no occasion for any blowing powder; for the force with which it goes
+off will be sufficient to disengage it from the head of the first
+fired rocket. The sticks for these rockets must be a little longer
+than for those headed with stars, rains, &c.
+
+_Caduceous Rockets._--They are such as, in rising, form two spiral
+lines, by reason of their being placed obliquely, one opposite to the
+other; and their counterpoise in the centre, which causes them to rise
+in a vertical direction. Rockets for this purpose must have their ends
+choked close, without either head or bounce; for a weight at the top
+would be a great obstruction to their mounting. No caduceous rockets
+ascend so high as single, because of their serpentine motion, and
+likewise the resistance of air, which is much greater than two rockets
+of the same size would meet with if fired singly.
+
+The sticks for this purpose must have all their sides equal, and the
+sides should be equal to the breadth of a stick proper for a
+sky-rocket of the same weight as those you intend to use, and made to
+taper downwards as usual, long enough to balance them, one length of a
+rocket from the cross stick, which must be placed from the large stick
+six diameters of one of the rockets, and its length seven diameters;
+so that each rocket, when tied on, may form, with the large stick, an
+angle of 60 degrees. In tying on the rockets, place their heads on the
+opposite side of the cross stick; then carry a leader from the mouth
+of one into that of the other. When these rockets are to be fired,
+suspend them between two hooks, or nails, then burn the leader through
+the middle, and both will take fire at the same time. Rockets of 1 lb.
+are a good size for this use.
+
+_Honorary Rockets._--These are the same as sky-rockets, except that
+they carry no head nor report, but are closed at top, on which is
+fixed a cone; then on the case, close to the top of the stick, is tied
+on a two-ounce case, about five or six inches long, filled with a
+strong charge, and pinched close at both ends; then in the reverse
+side, at each end, bore a hole in the same manner as in tourbillons,
+to be presently described; from each hole carry a leader into the top
+of the rocket. When the rocket is fired, and arrived to its proper
+height, it will give fire to the case at top; which will cause both
+rocket and stick to spin very fast in their return, and represent a
+worm of fire descending to the ground.
+
+There is another method of placing the small case, which is by letting
+the stick rise a little above the top of the rocket, and tying the
+case to it, so as to rest on the rocket: these rockets have no cones.
+
+A third method by which they are managed is this: in the top of a
+rocket fix a piece of wood, in which drive a small iron spindle; then
+make a hole in the middle of the small case, through which is put the
+spindle; then fix on the top of it a nut, to keep the case from
+falling off; when this is done, the case will turn very fast, without
+the rocket: but this method does not answer so well as either of the
+former.
+
+_To make a Rocket form an Arch in rising._--Having some rockets made,
+headed according to fancy, and tied on their sticks, get some sheet
+tin, and cut it into round pieces about three or four inches diameter;
+then on the stick of each rocket, under the mouth of the case, fix one
+of these pieces of tin 16 inches from the rocket's neck, and support
+it by a wooden bracket, as strong as possible: the use of this is,
+that when the rocket is ascending, the fire may play with greater
+force on the tin, which will divide the tail in such a manner that it
+will form an arch as it mounts, and will have a very good effect when
+well managed; if there is a short piece of port fire, of a strong
+charge, tied to the end of the stick, it will make a great addition;
+but this must be lighted before the rocket is fired.
+
+_To make several Rockets rise together._--Take six, or any number of
+sky-rockets, of any size; then cut some strong packthread into pieces
+of three or four yards long, and tie each end of these pieces to a
+rocket in this manner:
+
+Having tied one end of the packthread round the body of one rocket,
+and the other end to another, take a second piece of packthread, and
+make one end of it fast to one of the rockets already tied, and the
+other end to a third rocket, so that all the rockets, except the two
+on the outside, will be fastened to the two pieces of packthread: the
+length of thread from one rocket to the other may be what the maker
+pleases; but the rockets must be all of a size, and their heads filled
+with the same weight of stars, rains, &c.
+
+Having thus done, fix in the mouth of each rocket a leader of the same
+length; and when about to fire them, hang them almost close; then tie
+the ends of the leaders together, and prime them; this prime being
+fired, all the rockets will mount at the same time, and divide as far
+as the strings will allow; and this division they keep, provided they
+are all rammed alike, and well made. They are sometimes called
+chained rockets.
+
+_To fix several Rockets to the same Stick._--Two, three, or six
+sky-rockets, fixed on one stick, and fired together, make a grand and
+beautiful appearance; for the tails of all will seem but as one of an
+immense size, and the breaking of so many heads at once will resemble
+the bursting of an air-balloon. The management of this device requires
+a skilful hand; but if the following instructions be well observed,
+even by those who have not made a great progress in this art, there
+will be no doubt of the rockets having the desired effect.
+
+Rockets for this purpose must be made with the greatest exactness, all
+rammed by the same hand, in the same mould, and filled with the same
+proportion of composition: and after they are filled and headed, must
+all be of the same weight. The stick must also be well made (and
+proportioned) to the following directions; first, supposing the
+rockets to be half-pounders, whose sticks are six feet six inches
+long, then if two, three, or six of these are to be fixed on one
+stick, let the length of it be nine feet nine inches; then cut the top
+of it into as many sides as there are rockets, and let the length of
+each side be equal to the length of one of the rockets without its
+head; and in each side cut a groove (as usual;) then from the grooves
+plane it round, down to the bottom, where its thickness must be equal
+to half the top of the round part. As their thickness cannot be
+exactly ascertained, we shall give a rule, which generally answers for
+any number of rockets above two; the rule is this: that the stick at
+top must be thick enough, when the grooves are cut, for all the
+rockets to lie, without pressing each other, though as near as
+possible.
+
+When only two rockets are to be fixed on one stick, let the length of
+the stick be the last given proportion, but shaped after the common
+method, and the breadth and thickness double the usual dimensions. The
+point of poise must be in the usual place (let the number of rockets
+be what it will;) if sticks made by the above directions should be too
+heavy, plane them thinner; and if too light, make them thicker; but
+always make them of the same length.
+
+When more than two rockets are tied on one stick, there will be some
+danger of their flying up without the stick, unless the following
+precaution is taken: For cases being placed on all sides, there can be
+no notches for the cord which ties on the rockets to lie in:
+therefore, instead of notches, drive a small nail in each side of the
+stick, between the necks of the cases, and let the cord, which goes
+round their necks, be brought close under the nails; by this means the
+rockets will be as secure as when tied on singly. The rockets being
+thus fixed, carry a quick-match, without a pipe, from the mouth of one
+rocket to the other; this match being lighted will give fire to all at
+once.
+
+Though the directions already given may be sufficient for these
+rockets, we shall here add an improvement on a very essential part of
+this device, which is, that of hanging the rockets to be fired; for
+before the following method was contrived, many attempts proved
+unsuccessful. Instead, therefore, of the old and common manner of
+hanging them on nails or hooks, make use of the following contrivance:
+Have a ring made of strong iron wire, large enough for the stick to go
+in as far as the mouths of the rockets; then have another ring
+supported by a small iron, at some distance from the post or stand to
+which it is fixed; then have another ring fit to receive and guide the
+small end of the stick. Rockets thus suspended will have nothing to
+obstruct their fire; but when they are hung on nails or hooks, in such
+a manner that some of their mouths or against or upon a rail, there
+can be no certainty of their rising in a vertical direction.
+
+_To fire Rockets without Sticks._--You must have a stand, of a block
+of wood, a foot diameter, and make the bottom flat, so that it may
+stand steady: in the centre of the top of this block draw a circle two
+inches and a half diameter, and divide the circumference of it into
+three equal parts; then take three pieces of thick iron wire, each
+about three feet long, and drive them into the block, one at each
+point made on the circle; when these wires are driven in deep enough
+to hold them fast and upright, so that the distance from one to the
+other is the same at top as at bottom, the stand is complete.
+
+The stand being thus made, prepare the rockets thus: Take some common
+sky-rockets of any size, and head them as you please; then get some
+balls of lead, and tie to each a small wire two or two feet and a half
+long, and the other end of each wire tie to the neck of a rocket.
+These balls answer the purpose of sticks, when made of a proper
+weight, which is about two-thirds the weight of the rocket; but when
+they are of a proper size, they will balance the rocket in the same
+manner as a stick, at the usual point of poise. To fire these, hand
+them one at a time, between the tops of the wires, letting their heads
+rest on the point of the wires, and the balls hang down between them:
+if the wires should be too wide for the rockets, press them together
+till they fit; and if too close, force them open; the wires for this
+purpose must be softened, so as not to have any spring, or they will
+not keep their position when pressed close or opened.
+
+_Scrolls for Rockets._--Cases for scrolls should be made four or five
+inches in length, and their interior diameters three-eighths of an
+inch: one end of these cases must be pinched quite close before
+beginning to fill; and when filled, close the other end; then in the
+opposite sides make a small hole at each end, to the composition, as
+in tourbillons, and prime them with wet meal-powder. You may put in
+the head of the rocket as many of these cases as it will contain:
+being fired, they turn very quick in the air, and form a scroll or
+spiral line. They are generally filled with a strong charge, as that
+of serpents or brilliant fire.
+
+_Stands for Rockets._--Care must be taken, in placing the rockets,
+when they are to be fired, to give them a vertical direction at their
+first setting out; which may be managed thus: Have two rails of wood,
+of any length, supported at each end by a perpendicular leg, so that
+the rails may be horizontal, and let the distance from one to the
+other be almost equal to the length of the sticks of the rockets
+intended to be fired; then in the front of the top rail drive square
+hooks at eight inches distance, with their points turned sidewise, so
+that when the rockets are hung on them, the points will be before the
+sticks, and keep them from falling or being blown off by the wind; in
+the front of the rail at bottom must be staples, driven
+perpendicularly under the hooks at top; through these staples put the
+small ends of the rocket-sticks. Rockets are fired by applying a
+lighted port-fire to their mouths.
+
+_Table-Rockets._--Table-rockets are designed merely to show the truth
+of driving, and the judgment of a fire-worker; they having no other
+effect, when fired, than spinning round in the same place where they
+began, till they are burnt out, and showing nothing more than a
+horizontal circle of fire.
+
+The method of making these rockets is thus:--Have a cone turned out of
+hard wood two inches and a half in diameter, and as much high; round
+the base of it drive a line; on this line fix four spokes, each two
+inches long, so as to stand one opposite the other; then fill four
+nine-inch one-pound cases with any strong composition, within two
+inches of the top: these cases are made like tourbillons, and must be
+rammed with the greatest exactness.
+
+The rockets being filled, fix their open ends on the short spokes;
+then in the side of each case bore a hole near the clay; all these
+holes, or vents, must be so made that the fire of each case may act
+the same way; from these vents carry leaders to the top of the cone,
+and tie them together. When the rockets are to be fired, set them on a
+smooth table, and light the leaders in the middle, and all the cases
+will fire together and spin on the point of the cone.
+
+These rockets may be made to rise like tourbillons, by making the
+cases shorter, and boring four holes in the under side of each at
+equal distances; this being done they are called _double tourbillons_.
+
+_Note._--All the vents in the under side of the cases must be lighted
+at once, and the sharp point of the cone cut off; at which place make
+it spherical.
+
+
+WHEELS.
+
+Wheel-cases are made to any length; which must always depend on the
+size of the wheel, but must not exceed the length of each angle.
+
+Charge for wheel-cases, from 2 oz. to 4 lb.
+
+ lb. oz.
+ Meal-powder 4 0
+ Saltpetre 1 0
+ Brimstone 0 8
+ Charcoal 0 4
+
+The filings in this composition may be varied by using a portion of
+sea-coal, glass-dust, saw-dust, &c., or a combination of the whole.
+
+SLOW FIRE FOR WHEELS.
+
+ lb. oz.
+ Saltpetre 0 4
+ Brimstone 0 2
+ Meal-powder 0 1-1/2
+
+or, 1 oz. of brimstone may be used with 1 oz. of antimony.
+
+DEAD FIRE FOR WHEELS.
+
+ oz. dr.
+ Saltpetre 4-1/4 0
+ Brimstone 0-1/4 0
+ Lapis-caliminaris 0 2
+ Antimony 0 2
+
+_Single Vertical Wheels._--There are different sorts of vertical
+wheels; some having their fells of a circular form, others of an
+hexagonal, octagonal, or decagonal form, or of any number of sides,
+according to the length of the cases you design for the wheel; the
+spokes being fixed in the nave, nail slips of tin, with their edges
+turned up so as to form grooves for the cases to lie in; form the end
+of one spoke to that of another; then tie the cases in the grooves
+head to tail, in the same manner as those on the horizontal
+water-wheel; so that the cases, successively taking fire from one
+another, will keep the wheel in an equal rotation. Two of these wheels
+are very often fired together, one on each side of a building, and
+both lighted at the same time, and all the cases filled alike, to make
+them keep time together; as they will, if made by the following
+directions: In all the cases of both wheels, except the first, on each
+wheel drive two or three ladlesful of slow fire, in any part of the
+case; but be careful to ram the same quantity in each case; and in the
+end of one of the cases, on each wheel, you may ram one ladleful of
+dead-fire composition, which must be very lightly driven; you may also
+make many changes of fire by this method.
+
+Let the hole in the nave of the wheel be lined with brass, and made to
+turn on a smooth iron spindle. On the end of this spindle let there be
+a nut, to screw off and on; when you have put the wheel on the
+spindle, screw on the nut, which will keep the wheel from flying off.
+Let the mouth of the first case be a little raised. Vertical wheels
+are made from ten inches to three feet diameter, and the size of the
+cases must differ accordingly; four-ounce cases will do for wheels of
+14 or 16 inches diameter, which is the proportion generally used. The
+best wood for wheels of all sorts is a light and dry beech.
+
+_Horizontal Wheels._--They are best when their fells are made
+circular; in the middle of the top of the nave must be a pintle,
+turned out of the same piece as the nave, two inches long, and equal
+in diameter to the bore of one of the cases of the wheel; there must
+be a hole bored up the centre of the nave, within half an inch of the
+top of the pintle. The wheel being made; nail at the end of each spoke
+(of which there should be six or eight) a piece of wood, with a groove
+cut in it to receive the case. Fix these pieces in such a manner that
+half the cases may incline upwards and half downwards, and that, when
+they are tied on, their heads and tails may come very nearly together:
+from the tail of one case to the mouth of the other carry a leader,
+which should be secured with pasted paper. Besides these pipes, it
+will be necessary to put a little meal-powder within the pasted
+paper, to blow off the pipe, that there may be no obstruction to the
+fire from the cases. By means of these pipes the cases will
+successively take fire, burning one upwards and the other downwards.
+On the pintle fix a case of the same sort as those on the wheel; this
+case must be fired by a leader from the mouth of the last case on the
+wheel, which case must play downwards: instead of a common case in the
+middle, you may put a case of Chinese fire, long enough to burn as
+long as two or three of the cases on the wheel.
+
+Horizontal wheels are often fired two at a time, and made to keep time
+like vertical wheels, only they are made without any slow or dead
+fire; 10 or 12 inches will be enough for the diameter of wheels with
+six spokes.
+
+_Spiral Wheels._--They are only double horizontal wheels, and made
+thus: the nave must be about six inches long, and rather thicker than
+the single sort; instead of the pintle at top, make a hole for the
+case to be fixed in, and two sets of spokes, one set near the top of
+the nave, and the other near the bottom. At the end of each spoke cut
+a groove wherein you tie the cases, there being no fell: the spokes
+should not be more than two inches and a half long from the naves, so
+that the wheel may not be more than eight or nine inches diameter; the
+cases are placed in such a manner, that those at top play down, and
+those at bottom play up; but let the third or fourth case play
+horizontally. The case in the middle may begin with any of the others;
+six spokes will be enough for each set, so that the wheel may consist
+of 12 cases, besides that on the top: the cases six inches each.
+
+_Plural Wheels._--Plural wheels are made to turn horizontally, and to
+consist of three sets of spokes, placed six at top, six at bottom, and
+four in the middle; which last must be a little shorter than the rest:
+let the diameter of the wheel be 10 inches: the cases must be tied on
+the ends of the spokes in grooves cut on purpose, or on pieces of wood
+nailed on the ends of the spokes, with grooves cut in them as usual:
+in clothing these wheels, make the upper set of cases play obliquely
+downwards, the bottom set obliquely upwards, and the middle set
+horizontally. In placing the leaders, they must be managed so that the
+cases may burn thus, viz., first up, then down, then horizontal, and
+so on with the rest. But another change may be made, by driving in the
+end of the eighth case two or three ladlesful of slow fire, to burn
+till the wheel has stopped its course; then let the other cases be
+fixed the contrary way, which will make the wheel run back again; for
+the case at top you may put a small gerbe; and let the cases on the
+spokes be short, and filled with a strong brilliant charge.
+
+_Illuminated Spiral Wheel._--First have a circular horizontal wheel
+made two feet diameter, with a hole quite through the nave; then take
+three thin pieces of deal, three feet long each, and three-fourths of
+an inch broad each: nail one end of each of these pieces to the fell
+of the wheel, at an equal distance from one another, and the other end
+nail to a block with a hole in its bottom, which must be perpendicular
+to that in the block of the wheel, but not so large. The wheel being
+thus made, have a loop planed down very thin and flat; then nail one
+end of it into the fell of the wheel, and wind it round the three
+sticks in a spiral line from the wheel to the block at top; on the top
+of this block fix a case of Chinese fire; on the wheel you may place
+any number of cases, which must incline downwards, and burn two at a
+time. If the wheel should consist of ten cases, you may let the
+illuminations and Chinese fire begin with the second cases. The
+spindle for this wheel must be a little longer than the cone, and made
+very smooth at top, on which the upper block is to turn, and the whole
+weight of the wheel to rest.
+
+_Double Spiral Wheels._--For these wheels, the block or nave must be
+as long as the height of the worms, or spiral lines, but must be made
+very thin, and as light as possible. In this block must be fixed
+several spokes, which must diminish in length, from the wheel to the
+top, so as not to exceed the surface of a cone of the same height. To
+the ends of these spokes nail the worms, which must cross each other
+several times: close these worms with illuminations, the same as those
+on the single wheels; but the horizontal wheel you may clothe as you
+like. At the top of the worm place a case of spur-fire, or an amber
+light.
+
+_Balloon Wheels._--They are made to turn horizontally: they must be
+made two feet diameter, without any spokes, and very strong, with any
+number of sides. On the top of a wheel range and fix in pots, three
+inches diameter and seven inches high each, as many of these as there
+are cases on the wheel: near the bottom of each pot make a small vent;
+into each of these vents carry a leader from the tail of each case;
+load some of the pots with stars, and some with serpents, crackers,
+&c. As the wheels turn, the pots will successively be fired, and throw
+into the air a great variety of fires.
+
+
+BALLOON CASES.
+
+You must have an oval former, turned of smooth wood; then paste a
+quantity of brown or cartridge-paper, and let it lie till the paste
+has soaked all through; this done, rub the former with soap or grease,
+to prevent the paper from sticking to it; then lay the paper on in
+small slips, till you have made it one-third of the thickness of the
+shell intended. Having thus done, set it to dry; and when dry, cut it
+round the middle, leaving about one inch not cut, which will make the
+halves join much better than if quite separated. When you have some
+ready to join, place the halves even together, and let that dry; then
+lay on paper all over as before, everywhere equal. When the shell is
+thoroughly dry, burn a vent at top with a square iron.
+
+Shells that are designed for stars only, may be made quite round, and
+the thinner they are at the opening the better; for if they are too
+strong, the stars are apt to break at the bursting of the shell.
+Balloons must always be made to go easy into the mortars.
+
+
+MORTARS.
+
+These mortars must be made of pasteboard, with a small copper chamber
+at bottom, in which the powder is to be placed, on which the balloon
+is to be put. In the centre of the bottom of this chamber make a small
+hole a little down the foot: the hole must be met by another of the
+same size as the foot. Then putting a quick-match, or touch-string, of
+touch-paper, into the hole, your mortar will be ready to be fired.
+
+_To load Air Balloons with Stars, Serpents, &c., &c._--When you fill
+your shells, you must first put in the serpents, rains, &c., or
+whatever they are composed of, then the blowing powder; but the shells
+must not be quite filled. All those things must be put in at the
+fuse-hole, but marrons being too large to go in at the fuse-hole, must
+be put in before the inside shall be joined. When the shells are
+loaded, glue and drive in the fuses very tight. The number and
+quantities of each article for the different shells are as follows:
+
+ BALLOONS ILLUMINATED.
+ oz.
+ Meal-powder 1
+ Corn-powder 0-1/2
+ Powder for the mortar 2
+
+1 oz. driven or rolled stars, or as many as will fill the shell.
+
+ BALLOONS OR SERPENTS.
+ oz.
+ Meal-powder 1
+ Corn-powder 1
+ Powder for the mortar 2-1/2
+
+
+_Aigrettes._
+
+Mortars to throw aigrettes are generally made of pasteboard, of the
+same thickness as balloon mortars, and two diameters and a half long
+in the inside from the top of the foot: the foot must be made of elm
+without a chamber, but flat at top, and in the same proportions as
+those for balloon mortars; these mortars must also be bound round with
+a cord: sometimes eight or nine of these mortars, of about three or
+four inches diameter, are bound all together, so as to appear but one;
+but when they are made for this purpose, the bottom of the foot must
+be of the same diameter as the mortars, and only half a diameter high.
+The mortars being bound well together, fix them on a heavy solid block
+of wood. To load these mortars, first put on the inside bottom of each
+a piece of paper, and on it spread one ounce and a half of meal and
+corn-powder mixed; then tie the serpents up in parcels with
+quick-match, and put them in the mortar with their mouths downwards;
+but take care the parcels do not fit too tight in the mortars, and
+that all the serpents have been well primed with powder wetted with
+spirit of wine. On the top of the serpents in each mortar lay some
+paper or tow; then carry a leader from one mortar to the other all
+round, and then from all the outside mortars into that in the middle:
+these leaders must be put between the cases and the sides of the
+mortar, down to the powder at bottom: in the centre of the middle
+mortar fix a fire-pump, or brilliant fountain, which must be open at
+bottom, and long enough to project out of the mouth of the mortar;
+then paste papers on the tops of all the mortars.
+
+Mortars thus prepared are called a _nest of serpents_. When these
+mortars are to be fired, light the fire-pump, which when consumed will
+communicate to all the mortars at once by means of the leaders. For
+mortars of 8, 9, or 10 inches diameter, the serpents should be made in
+one and two-ounce cases, six or seven inches long, and fired by a
+leader brought out of the mouth of the mortar, and turned down on the
+outside, and the end of it covered with paper, to prevent the sparks
+of the other works from setting it on fire. For a six-inch mortar, let
+the quantity of powder for firing be two ounces; for an eight-inch,
+two ounces and three-quarters; and for a ten-inch, three ounces and
+three-quarters. Care must be taken in these, as well as small mortars,
+not to put in the serpents too tight, for fear of bursting the
+mortars. These mortars may be loaded with stars, crackers, &c.
+
+If the mortars, when loaded, are sent to any distance, or liable to be
+much moved, the firing powder should be secured from getting amongst
+the serpents, which would endanger the mortars, as well as hurt their
+performance. To prevent this, load the mortars thus: First put in the
+firing powder, and spread it equally about; then cut a round piece of
+blue touch-paper, equal to the exterior diameter of the mortar, and
+draw on it a circle equal to the interior diameter of the mortar, and
+notch it all round as far as that circle: then paste that part which
+is notched, and put it down the mortar close to the powder, and stick
+the pasted edge to the mortar: this will keep the powder always smooth
+at bottom, so that it may be moved or carried anywhere without
+receiving damage. The large single mortars are called _pots des
+aigrettes_.
+
+
+FIRE-PUMPS, OR ROMAN CANDLES.
+
+Cases for fire-pumps are made like those for tourbillons; only they
+are pasted instead of being rolled dry. Having rolled and dried your
+cases fill them: first put in a little meal-powder and then a star, on
+which ram, lightly, a ladle or two of composition, then a little
+meal-powder, and on that a star; then again composition, and so on
+till you have filled the case. Stars for fire-pumps should not be
+round, but must be made either square, or flat and circular with a
+hole through the middle: the quantity of powder for throwing the stars
+must increase as you come near the top of the case; for, if much
+powder be put at the bottom, it will burst the case. The stars must
+differ in size in this manner: let the star which you put in first be
+a little less than the bore of the case; but let the next star be a
+little larger, and the third star a little larger than the second, and
+so on: let them increase in diameter till within two of the top of the
+case, which two must fit in tight. As the loading of fire-pumps is
+somewhat difficult, it will be necessary to make two or three trials
+before you depend on their performance. When you fill a number of
+pumps, take care not to put in each an equal quantity of charge
+between the stars, so that when they are fired they may not throw up
+too many stars together. Cases for fire-pumps should be made very
+strong, and rolled on 4 or 8-ounce formers, 10 or 12 inches long each.
+
+ CHARGE.
+ lb. oz. lb. oz.
+ Saltpetre 5 0 Saltpetre 5 0
+ Brimstone 1 0 Brimstone 2 0
+ Meal-powder 1-1/2 0 Meal-powder 1 8
+ Glass-dust 1 0 Glass-dust 1 8
+
+
+AN ARTIFICIAL EARTHQUAKE.
+
+Mix the following ingredients to a paste, with water; bury it in the
+ground, and in a few hours the earth will break open in several
+places:
+
+ lb. oz.
+ Sulphur 4 0
+ Steel-dust 4 0
+
+
+_Chinese Fountains._
+
+To make a Chinese fountain, you must have a perpendicular piece of
+wood, seven feet long, and two inches and a half square. Sixteen
+inches from the top, fix on the front a cross piece one inch thick,
+and two and a half broad, with the broad side upwards; below this, fix
+three more pieces of the same width and thickness, at sixteen inches
+from each other; let the bottom rail be five feet long, and the others
+of such a length as to allow the fire-pumps to stand in the middle of
+the intervals of each other. The pyramid being thus made, fix in the
+holes made in the bottom rail five fire-pumps, at equal distances; on
+the second rail, place four pumps; on the third, three; on the fourth,
+two; and on the top of the post, one; but place them all to incline a
+little forward, that, when they throw out the stars, they may not
+strike against the cross-rails. Having fixed your fire-pumps, clothe
+them with leaders, so that they may all be fired together.
+
+
+_The Dodecahedron,_
+
+So called because it nearly represents a twelve-sided figure, is made
+thus: First have a ball turned out of some hard wood, 14 inches
+diameter; divide its surface into 14 equal parts, from which bore
+holes one inch and a half diameter, perpendicular to the centre, so
+that they may all meet in the middle: then let there be turned in the
+inside of each hole a female screw; and to all the holes but one must
+be made a round spoke five feet long, with four inches of the screw at
+one end to fit the holes; then in the screw-end of all the spokes bore
+a hole five inches long, which must be bored slanting, so as to come
+out at one side, a little above the screw; from which cut a small
+groove along the spoke within six inches of the other end, where make
+another hole through to the other side of the spoke. In this end fix a
+spindle, on which put a small wheel of three or four sides, each side
+six or seven inches long; these sides must have grooves cut in them
+large enough to receive a two or four-ounce case. When these wheels
+are clothed, put them on the spindles, and at the end of each spindle
+put a nut, to keep the wheel from falling off. The wheels being thus
+fixed, carry a pipe from the mouth of the first case on each wheel,
+through the hole in the side of the spoke, and from thence along the
+groove, and through the other hole, so as to hang out at the screw-end
+about an inch. The spokes being all prepared in this manner, you must
+have a post, on which you intend to fire the work, with an iron screw
+in the top of it, to fit one of the holes in the ball: on the screw
+fix the ball; then in the top hole of the ball put a little
+meal-powder and some loose quick-match: then screw in all the spokes;
+and in one side of the ball bore a hole, in which put a leader, and
+secure it at the end, and the work will be ready to be fired. By the
+leader the powder and match in the centre is fired, which will light
+the match at the ends of the spokes all at once, whereby all the
+wheels will be lighted at once. There may be an addition to this
+piece, by fixing a small globe on each wheel, or one on the top wheel
+only. A grey charge will be proper for the wheel-cases.
+
+
+_Stars with Points._
+
+These stars are made of different sizes, according to the work for
+which they are intended; they are made with cases from one ounce to
+one pound, but in general with four-ounce cases, four or five inches
+long: the case must be rolled with paste, and twice as thick as that
+of a rocket of the same bore. Having rolled a case, pinch one end of
+it quite close; then drive in half a diameter of clay; and when the
+case is dry, fill it with composition two or three inches to the
+length of the cases with which it is to burn: at top of the charge
+drive some clay; as the ends of these cases are seldom pinched, they
+would be liable to take fire. Having filled a case, divide the
+circumference of it at the pinched end close to the clay, into five
+equal parts; then bore five holes with a gimblet about the size of the
+neck of a common four-ounce case, into the composition; from one hole
+to the other carry a quick-match, and secure it with paper: this paper
+must be put on in the manner of that on the end of wheel-cases, so
+that the hollow part, which projects from the end of the case, may
+serve to receive a leader from any other work, to give fire to the
+points of the stars. These stars may be made with any number of
+points.
+
+
+_Fixed Sun with a transparent Face._
+
+To make a sun of the best kind, there should be two rows of cases,
+which should show a double glory, and make the rays strong and full.
+The frame or sun-wheel must be made thus: have a circular flat nave
+made very strong, 12 inches diameter; to this fix six strong flat
+spokes; on the front of these fix a circular fell, five feet diameter;
+within which, fix another fell, the length of one of the sun-cases
+less in diameter; within this fix a third fell, whose diameter must be
+less than the second by the length of one case and one-third. The
+wheel being made, divide the fells into so many equal parts as there
+are to be cases, (which may be done from 24 to 44:) at each division
+fix a flat iron staple: these staples must be made to fit the cases,
+to hold them fast on the wheel; let the staples be so placed, that one
+row of cases may lie in the middle of the intervals of the other.
+
+In the centre of the block of the sun drive a spindle, on which put a
+small hexagonal wheel, whose cases must be filled with the same charge
+as the cases of the sun; two cases of this wheel must burn at a time,
+and begin with those on the fells. Having fixed on all the cases,
+carry pipes of communication from one to the other, and from one side
+of the sun to the wheel in the middle, and from thence to the other
+side of the sun. These leaders will hold the wheel steady while the
+sun is fixing up, and will also be a sure method of lighting both
+cases of the wheel together. A sun thus made is called a _brilliant
+sun_, because the wood-work is entirely covered with fire from the
+wheel in the middle, so that there appears nothing but sparks of
+brilliant fire; but if you would have a transparent face in the
+centre, you must have one made of pasteboard of any size. The method
+of making a face is, by cutting out the eyes, nose, and mouth, for the
+sparks of the wheel to appear through; but instead of this face, you
+may have one painted on oil paper, or Persian silk, strained tight on
+a hoop; which hoop must be supported by three or four pieces of wire
+at six inches distance from the wheel in the centre, so that the light
+of it may illuminate the face. By this method may be shown, in the
+front of the sun, VIVAT REGINA, cut in pasteboard, or Apollo, painted
+in silk; but, for a small collection, a sun with a single glory and a
+wheel in front will be most suitable. Half-pound cases, filled ten
+inches with composition, will be a good size for a sun of five feet
+diameter; but, if larger, the cases must be greater in proportion.
+
+
+DETONATING WORKS.
+
+WATERLOO CRACKERS.
+
+Take a slip of cartridge-paper, about three-quarters of an inch in
+width, paste and double it; let it remain till dry, and cut it into
+two equal parts in length, (No. 1 and 2,) according to the following
+pattern:
+
+ +-----------------+---+-------+--------+
+ | No. 1. Glass. | S | Glass.| No. 2. |
+ +-----------------+---+-------+--------+
+
+Take some of the glass composition, and lay it across the paper as in
+the pattern, and put about a quarter of a grain of fulminating silver
+in the place marked S, and while the glass composition is moist, put
+the paper marked No. 2, over the farthest row of glass. Over all,
+paste twice over the part that covers the silver a piece of paper; let
+it dry, and when you wish to explode it, take hold of the two ends and
+pull them sharply from each other, and it will produce a loud report.
+
+
+DETONATING GIRDLE.
+
+Procure a piece of girth from 12 to 18 inches in length. Double it,
+and fold it down about 1-1/2 inch, similar to the fold of a letter,
+and then turn back one end of the girth, and it will form two
+compartments. Then take some gum and dissolve it in water; boil it
+till it is quite melted, and very thick; add coarse powdered glass,
+sufficient to make it into a very thick paste; place two upright rows
+of the glass composition in the inside of one of the folds, about as
+wide as the thickness of a lath, and as high as a half-crown laid
+flat; and when they are dry, sew the first fold together on the edge,
+and then the second at the opposite end, so that one end may be open.
+Then, in the centre of the two rows, put about a grain of fulminating
+silver, and paste a piece of cotton or silk over it. Make a hole at
+each end of the girdle, and hang it to a hook in the door-post, and
+the other hook on the door, observing to place the silk part so that
+it may come against the edge of the door when opened, which will cause
+a report as loud as a small cannon. The fulminating silver may be
+purchased at any of the operating chemists.
+
+
+DETONATING BALLS.
+
+Procure some glass globes, between the size of a pea and a small
+marble, in which there must be a small hole; put into it half a grain
+of fulminating silver. Paste a piece of paper carefully over the ball
+to prevent the silver from escaping. When you wish to explode one put
+it on the ground, and tread hard upon it, and it will go off with a
+loud noise. These balls may be made productive of much amusement in
+company, by placing a chair lightly on them; for whoever sits down
+upon them will cause them to explode. These globes may be procured at
+the barometer-makers.
+
+
+THE DETONATING TAPE.
+
+Is made of binding, about three-eighths of an inch in width. Observe
+the same directions as given for the girdle; you may either explode it
+yourself, by taking hold of each end, and rolling the ends from each
+other sharply, or give one end to another, and pull together.
+
+
+DETONATING CARDS.
+
+Take a piece of card about three-fourths of an inch in breadth and 12
+in length; slit it at one end, and place in the opening a quarter of a
+grain of fulminating silver; close the edges down with a little paste,
+and when dry you may use it by lighting the end in a candle.
+
+Having given the method by which these loud reports are produced, we
+shall mention some other effects to be produced by the silver, capable
+of affording much amusement. For instance, by placing about a quarter
+of a grain of the silver in the midst of some tobacco in a pipe, or
+between the leaves of a cigar, and closing the end again, to prevent
+the powder from falling out; when lighted, it causes a loud explosion;
+for heat, as well as friction, will equally do.
+
+Or, take one-third of the grain of fulminating silver; fold it up in a
+small piece of paper, and wrap it up in another piece, and paste it
+round a pin. These pins stuck in the wick of a candle make a very loud
+noise.
+
+Fulminating silver may be also used in the following manner:--Put half
+a grain in a piece of glass-paper, and enclose it in a piece of foil;
+put it then at the bottom or side of a drawer, and on opening or
+shutting it, it will immediately go off.
+
+Put a quarter of a grain of fulminating silver into a piece of paper,
+and place in the snuffers when quite cold; when the candle is snuffed,
+it will go off.
+
+
+AQUATIC FIRE-WORKS.
+
+Works that sport in the water are much esteemed by most admirers of
+fire-works, particularly water-rockets; and as they seem of a very
+extraordinary nature to those who are unacquainted with this art, they
+merit a particular explanation.
+
+
+_Water-Rockets._
+
+They may be made from four ounces to two pounds. If larger, they are
+too heavy; so that it will be difficult to make them keep above water
+without a cork float, which must be tied to the neck of the case; but
+the rockets will not dive so well with as without floats.
+
+Cases for these are made in the same manner and proportion as
+sky-rockets, only a little thicker of paper. When you fill those which
+are driven solid, put in first one ladleful of slow fire, then two of
+the proper charge, and on that one or two ladles of sinking charge,
+then the proper charge, then the sinking charge again, and so on, till
+you have filled the case within three diameters; then drive on the
+composition one ladleful of clay; through which make a small hole to
+the charge; then fill the case, within half a diameter, with
+corn-powder, on which turn down two or three rounds of the case in the
+inside; then pinch and tie the end very tight; having filled the
+rockets, (according to the above directions,) dip their ends in melted
+resin or sealing-wax, or else secure them well with grease. When you
+fire those rockets, throw in six or eight at a time; but, if you would
+have them all sink, or swim, at the same time, you must fill them with
+an equal quantity of composition, and fire them together.
+
+
+_Pipes of Communication for Water._
+
+They may be used under water, but must be a little thicker in the
+paper than those for land. Having rolled a sufficient number of pipes,
+and kept them till dry, wash them over with drying oil, and set them
+to dry; but when you oil them, leave about an inch and a half at each
+end dry, for joints; as, if they were oiled all over, when you come to
+join them, the paste will not stick where the paper is greasy: after
+the leaders are joined, and the paste dry, oil the joints. These pipes
+will lie many hours under water, without receiving any damage.
+
+
+_Horizontal Water-Wheels._
+
+To make horizontal wheels for the water, first get a large wooden bowl
+without a handle; then have an eight-sided wheel, made of a flat board
+18 inches diameter, so that the length of each side may nearly be
+seven inches: in all the sides cut a groove for the cases to lie in.
+This wheel being made, nail it on the top of the bowl; then take four
+eight-ounce cases, filled with a proper charge, each about six inches
+in length. Now, to clothe the wheel with these cases, get some
+whitish-brown paper, and cut it into slips; being pasted all over on
+one side, take one of the cases, and roll one of the slips of paper
+about an inch and a half on its end, so that there will remain about
+two inches and a half of the paper hollow from the end of the case:
+tie this case on one of the sides of the wheel, near the corners of
+which must be holes bored, through which put the packthread to tie the
+cases: having tied on the first case at the neck and end, put a little
+meal-powder in the hollow paper; then paste a slip of paper on the end
+of another case, the head of which put into the hollow paper on the
+first, allowing a sufficient distance from the tail of one to the head
+of the other, for the pasted paper to bend without tearing: tie on the
+second case as you did the first, and so on with the rest, except the
+last, which must be closed at the end, unless it is to communicate to
+any thing on the top of the wheel, such as fire-pumps or brilliant
+fires, fixed in holes cut in the wheel, and fired by the last or
+second case, as the fancy directs: six, eight, or any number, may be
+placed on the top of the wheel, provided they are not too heavy for
+the bowl.
+
+Before trying on the cases, cut the upper part of all their ends,
+except the last, a little shelving, that the fire from one may play
+over the other, without being obstructed by the case. Wheel-cases have
+no clay driven in their ends, nor pinched, but are always left open,
+only the last, or those which are not to lead fire, which must be well
+secured.
+
+
+_Water-Mines._
+
+For water-mines you must have a bowl with a wheel on it, made in the
+same manner as the water-wheel; only in its middle there must be a
+hole, of the same diameter as that of the intended mine. These mines
+are tin pots, with strong bottoms, and a little more than two
+diameters in length: the mine must be fixed in the hole in the wheel,
+with its bottom resting on the bowl; then loaded with serpents,
+crackers, stars, small water-rockets, &c., in the same manner as pots
+of aigrettes; but in their centre fix a case of Chinese fire, or a
+small gerbe, which must be lighted at the beginning of the last case
+on the wheel. These wheels are to be clothed as usual.
+
+
+_Fire Globes for the Water._
+
+Bowls for water-globes must be very large, and the wheels on them of
+ten sides: on each side nail a piece of wood four inches long; and on
+the outside of each piece cut a groove, wide enough to receive about
+one-fourth of the thickness of a four-ounce case: these pieces of wood
+must be nailed in the middle of each face of the wheel, and fixed in
+an oblique direction, so that the fire from the cases may incline
+upwards: the wheel being thus prepared, tie in each groove a
+four-ounce case filled with a grey charge; then carry a leader from
+the tail of one case to the mouth of the other.
+
+Globes for these wheels are made of two in hoops, with their edges
+outwards, fixed one within the other, at right angles. The diameter of
+these hoops must be rather less than that of the wheel. Having made
+the globe, drive in the centre of the wheel an iron spindle which must
+stand perpendicular, and its length be four or six inches more than
+the diameter of the globe.
+
+The spindle serves for an axis, on which is fixed the globe, which
+must stand four or six inches from the wheel; round one side of each
+hoop must be soldered little bits of tin, two inches and a half
+distance from each other; which pieces must be two inches in length
+each, and only fastened at one end, the other ends being left loose,
+to turn round the small port-fires, and hold them on: these port-fires
+must be made of such a length as will last out the cases on the wheel.
+There need not be any port-fires at the bottom of the globe within
+four inches of the spindle, as they would have no effect but to burn
+the wheel: all the port-fires must be placed perpendicularly from the
+centre of the globe, with their mouths outwards, and must be clothed
+with leaders, so as all to take fire with the second case of the
+wheel; and the cases must burn two at a time, one opposite the other.
+When two cases of a wheel begin together, two will end together;
+therefore the two opposite end cases must have their ends pinched and
+secured from fire. The method of firing such wheels is, by carrying a
+leader from the mouth of one of the first cases to that of the other;
+and the leader being burnt through the middle, will give fire to both
+at the same time.
+
+
+_Odoriferous Water-Balloons._
+
+They are made in the same manner as air-balloons, but very thin of
+paper, and in diameter one inch and three-fourths, with a vent of half
+an inch diameter. The shells being made, and quite dry, fill them with
+any of the following compositions, which must be rammed in tight:
+these balloons must be fired at the vent, and put into a bowl of
+water. Odoriferous works are generally fired in rooms.
+
+_Composition I._ Saltpetre two ounces, flour of sulphur one ounce,
+camphor half an ounce, yellow amber half an ounce, charcoal-dust
+three-fourths of an ounce, salt of Benzoin half an ounce, all powdered
+very fine and well mixed.
+
+II. Saltpetre twelve ounces, meal-powder three ounces, frankincense
+one ounce, myrrh half an ounce, camphor half an ounce, charcoal three
+ounces, all moistened with the oil of spike.
+
+III. Saltpetre two ounces, sulphur half an ounce, antimony half an
+ounce, amber half an ounce, cedar raspings one-fourth of an ounce, all
+mixed with the oil of roses and a few drops of bergamot.
+
+IV. Saltpetre four ounces, sulphur one ounce, saw-dust of juniper half
+an ounce, saw-dust of cypress one ounce, camphor one-fourth of an
+ounce, myrrh two drachms, dried rosemary one-fourth of an ounce, all
+moistened a little with the oil of roses.
+
+N.B. Water-rockets may be made with any of the above compositions,
+with a little alteration, to make them weaker or stronger, according
+to the size of the cases.
+
+
+_A Sea-fight with small Ships and a Fire-ship._
+
+Having procured four or five small ships, of two or three feet in
+length, make a number of small reports, which are to serve for guns.
+Of these range as many as you please on each side of the upper decks;
+then at the head and stern of each ship fix a two-ounce case, eight
+inches long, filled with a slow port-fire composition; but take care
+to place it in such a manner that the fire may fall in the water, and
+not burn the rigging; in these cases bore holes at unequal distances
+from one another, but make as many in each case as half the number of
+reports, so that one case may fire the guns on one side, and the other
+those on the opposite. The method of firing the guns is, by carrying a
+leader from the holes in the cases to the reports on the decks; you
+must make these leaders very small, and be careful in calculating the
+burning of the slow fire in the regulating cases, that more than two
+guns be not fired at a time. When you would have a broadside given,
+let a leader be carried to a cracker placed on the outside of the
+ship; which cracker must be tied loose, or the reports will be too
+slow: in all the ships put artificial guns at the port-holes. Reports
+for these and similar occasions are made by filling small cartridges
+with grained powder, pinching them close at each end, and, when used,
+boring a hole in the side, to which is placed a match or leader for
+firing them.
+
+Having filled and bored holes in two port-fires, for regulating the
+guns in one ship, make all the rest exactly the same; then, when you
+begin the engagement, light one ship first, and set it a sailing, and
+so on with the rest, sending them out singly, which will make them
+fire regularly, at different times, without confusion; for the time
+between the firing of each gun will be equal to that of lighting the
+slow fires.
+
+The fire-ship may be of any size, and need not be very good, for it is
+always lost in the action. To prepare a ship for this purpose, make a
+port-fire equal in size with those in the other ships, and place it at
+the stern; in every port place a larger port-fire, filled with a very
+strong composition, and painted in imitation of a gun, and let them
+all be fired at once by a leader from the slow fire, within two or
+three diameters of its bottom; all along both sides, on the top of the
+upper deck, lay star-composition about half an inch thick and one
+broad, which must be wetted with thin size, then primed with
+meal-powder, and secured from fire by pasting paper over it; in the
+place where you lay this composition, drive some little tacks with
+flat heads, to hold it fast to the deck; this must be fired just after
+the sham guns, and when burning will show a flame all round the ship:
+at the head take up the decks, and put in a tin mortar loaded with
+crackers, which mortar must be fired by a pipe from the end of the
+slow fire: the firing of this mortar will sink the ship, and make a
+pretty conclusion. The regulating port-fire of this ship must be
+lighted at the same time with the first fighting ship.
+
+Having prepared all the ships for fighting, we shall next proceed with
+the management of them when on the water. At one end of the pond, just
+under the surface of the water, fit two running blocks, at what
+distance you choose the ships should fight; and at the other end of
+the pond, opposite to each of these blocks, under the water, fix a
+double block; then on the land, by each of the double blocks, place
+two small windlasses; round one of them turn one end of a small cord,
+and put the other end through one of the blocks; then carry it through
+the single one at the opposite end of the pond, and bring it back
+through the double block again, and round the other windlass: to this
+cord, near the double block, tie as many small strings as half the
+number of the ships, at any distance; but these strings must not be
+more than two feet long each: make fast the loose end of each to a
+ship, just under her bowsprit; for if tied to the keel, or too near
+the water, it will overset the ship. Half the ships being thus
+prepared, near the other double block fix two more windlasses, to
+which fasten a cord, and to it tie the other half of the ships as
+before: when you fire the ships, pull in the cord with one of the
+windlasses, to get all the ships together; and when you have set fire
+to the first, turn that windlass which draws them out, and so on with
+the rest, till they are all out in the middle of the pond; then, by
+turning the other windlass, you will draw them back again; by which
+method you may make them change sides, and tack about backwards and
+forwards at pleasure. For the fire-ship fix the blocks and windlasses
+between the others, so that when she sails out she will be between the
+other ships: you must not let this ship advance till the guns at her
+ports take fire.
+
+
+_To fire Sky-Rockets under Water._
+
+You must have stands made as usual, only the rails must be placed flat
+instead of edgewise, and have holes in them for the rocket-sticks to
+go through; for if they were hung upon hooks, the motion of the water
+would throw them off: the stands being made, if the pond be deep
+enough, sink them at the sides so deep, that, when the rockets are in,
+their heads may just appear above the surface of the water; to the
+mouth of each rocket fix a leader, which put through the hole with a
+stick; then a little above the water must be a board, supported by the
+stand, and placed along one side of the rockets; then the ends of the
+leaders are turned up through holes made in this board, exactly
+opposite the rockets. By this means you may fire them singly or all at
+once. Rockets may be fired by this method in the middle of a pond, by
+a Neptune, a swan, a water-wheel, or any thing else you choose.
+
+
+_Neptune in his Chariot._
+
+To represent Neptune in his chariot, you must have a Neptune (made of
+wood, or basket-work) as big as life, fixed on a float large enough to
+bear his weight; on which must be two horses' heads and necks, so as
+to seem swimming. For the wheels of the chariot, there must be two
+vertical wheels of black fire, and on Neptune's head a horizontal
+wheel of brilliant fire, with all its cases, to play upwards. When
+this wheel is made, cover it with paper or pasteboard, cut and painted
+like Neptune's coronet; then let the trident be made without prongs,
+but instead of them, fix three cases of a weak grey charge, and on
+each horse's head put an eight-ounce case of brilliant fire, and on
+the mouth of each fix a short case, of the same diameter, filled with
+the white flame composition enough to last out all the cases on the
+wheels: these short cases must be open at bottom, that they may light
+the brilliant fires; for the horses' eyes put small port-fires, and
+in each nostril put a small case half filled with grey charge, and the
+rest with port-fire composition.
+
+If Neptune is to give fire to any building on the water, at his first
+setting out, the wheels of the chariot, and that on his head, with the
+white flame on the horses' heads, and the port-fires in their eyes and
+nostrils, must all be lighted at once; then from the bottom of the
+white flames carry a leader to the trident. As Neptune is to advance
+by the help of a block and cord, you must manage it so as not to let
+him turn about, till the brilliant fires on the horses and the trident
+begin; for it is by the fire from the horses (which plays almost
+upright,) that the building, or work, is lighted, which must be thus
+prepared. From the mouth of the case which is to be first fired, hang
+some loose quick-match to receive the fire from the horses. When
+Neptune is only to be shown by himself, without setting fire to any
+other works, let the white flames on the horses be very short, and not
+to last longer than one case of each wheel, and let two cases of each
+wheel burn at a time.
+
+
+_Swans and Ducks in Water._
+
+If you would have swans or ducks discharge rockets into the water,
+they must be made hollow, and of paper, and filled with small
+water-rockets, with some blowing powder to throw them out; but if this
+is not done, they may be made of wood, which will last many times.
+Having made and painted some swans, fix them on floats; then in the
+places where their eyes should be, bore holes two inches deep,
+inclining downwards, and wide enough to receive a small port-fire; the
+port-fire cases for this purpose must be made of brass, two inches
+long, and filled with a slow bright charge. In the middle of one of
+these cases make a little hole; then put the port-fire in the eye-hole
+of the swan, leaving about half an inch to project out; and in the
+other eye put another port-fire, with a hole made in it: then in the
+neck of the swan, within two inches of one of the eyes, bore a hole
+slantwise, to meet that in the port-fire; in this hole put a leader,
+and carry it to a water-rocket, that must be fixed under the tail with
+its mouth upwards. On the top of the head place two one-ounce cases,
+four inches long each, driven with brilliant fire; one of these cases
+must incline forwards, and the other backwards: these must be lighted
+at the same time as the water-rocket; to do which, bore a hole
+between them in the top of the swan's head, down to the hole in the
+port-fire, to which carry a leader: if the swan is filled with
+rockets, they must be fired by a pipe from the end of the water-rocket
+under the tail. When you set the swan a swimming, light the two eyes.
+
+
+_Water Fire-Fountains._
+
+To make a fire-fountain for the water, first have a float made of
+wood, three feet diameter; then in the middle fix a round
+perpendicular post, four feet high, and two inches diameter; round
+this post fix three circular wheels made of thin wood, without any
+spokes. The largest of these wheels must be placed within two or three
+inches of the float, and must be nearly of the same diameter. The
+second wheel must be two feet two inches diameter, and fixed at two
+feet distance from the first. The third wheel must be one foot four
+inches diameter, and fixed within six inches of the top of the post:
+the wheels being fixed, take 18 four or eight-ounce cases of brilliant
+fire, and place them round the first wheel with their mouths outwards,
+and inclining downwards; on the second wheel place 13 cases of the
+same, and in the same manner as those on the first; on the third,
+place eight more of these cases, in the same manner as before, and on
+the top of the post fix a gerbe; then clothe all the cases with
+leaders, so that both they and the gerbe may take fire at the same
+time. Before firing this work, try it in the water, to see whether the
+float is properly made, so as to keep the fountain upright.
+
+
+THE END.
+
+
+
+
+MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
+
+IN VARIOUS DEPARTMENTS OF LITERATURE,
+
+ PUBLISHED BY LEA AND BLANCHARD.
+
+
+ACTON'S MODERN COOKERY, with cuts, 12mo, cloth.
+
+AMERICAN ORNITHOLOGY, by Prince Charles Bonaparte, in 4 vols. folio,
+half bound, colored plates.
+
+AMERICAN MILITARY LAW AND PRACTICE OF COURTS MARTIAL, by Lieut.
+O'Brien, U. S. A., 1 vol. 8vo, cloth or law sheep.
+
+ANSTED'S ANCIENT WORLD, OR PICTURESQUE SKETCHES OF CREATION, 1 vol.
+12mo, numerous cuts.
+
+ADDISON ON CONTRACTS, 1 large vol. 8vo, law sheep.
+
+ARNOTT'S ELEMENTS OF PHYSICS, 1 vol. 8vo, sheep, with many wood-cuts.
+
+BOZ'S COMPLETE WORKS, in 8 vols. 8vo, extra cloth, with numerous
+plates.
+
+ Same work, common edition, in paper, 9 parts, price $3 50.
+
+ Same work in 3 large vols., good paper, fancy cloth, price
+ $3 75.
+
+BENTHAMIANA: Extracts from Bentham, in 1 vol. 12mo.
+
+BROWNE'S RELIGIO MEDICI, 1 vol. 12mo, extra cloth.
+
+BOLMAR'S FRENCH SERIES, consisting of--
+
+ A Selection of One Hundred Perrin's Fables, with a Key to the
+ Pronunciation.
+
+ A Series of Colloquial Phrases.
+
+ The First Eight Books of Fenelon's Telemachus.
+
+ Key to the same.
+
+ A Treatise on all the French Verbs, Regular and Irregular.
+
+ The whole forming five small volumes, half bound to match.
+
+BUTLER'S ATLAS OF ANCIENT GEOGRAPHY, 8vo, half bound.
+
+BUTLER'S GEOGRAPHIA CLASSICA, 1 vol. 8vo.
+
+BIRD'S NATURAL PHILOSOPHY, 1 vol. with many cuts.
+
+BRIGHAM ON MENTAL CULTIVATION, &c., 12mo, cloth.
+
+BRIDGEWATER TREATISES. The whole complete in 7 vols. 8vo, various
+bindings: containing--
+
+ ROGET'S ANIMAL AND VEGETABLE PHYSIOLOGY, in 2 vols, with many
+ cuts.
+
+ KIRBY ON THE HISTORY, HABITS, AND INSTINCT OF ANIMALS, 1 vol.
+ with plates.
+
+ PROUT ON CHEMISTRY.
+
+ CHALMERS ON THE MORAL CONDITION OF MAN.
+
+ WHEWELL ON ASTRONOMY.
+
+ BELL ON THE HAND.
+
+ KIDD ON THE PHYSICAL CONDITION OF MAN.
+
+ BUCKLAND'S GEOLOGY, 2 vols. with numerous plates and maps.
+
+ Roget, Buckland, and Kirby are sold separate.
+
+BROUGHAM ON THE FRENCH REVOLUTION, 1 vol. paper.
+
+BOY'S TREASURY OF SPORTS AND PASTIMES, 1 vol. 18mo, crimson cloth, 400
+illustrations.
+
+BARNABY RUDGE, by "Boz," paper or cloth.
+
+BROWNING'S HISTORY OF THE HUGUENOTS, 1 vol. 8vo.
+
+BREWSTER'S TREATISE ON OPTICS, 1 vol. 12mo, cuts.
+
+BABBAGE'S "FRAGMENT," 1 vol. 8vo.
+
+CAMPBELL'S LIVES OF THE LORD CHANCELLORS, 7 vols. crown 8vo, extra
+cloth.
+
+CHIMES, by Dickens, plates, 18mo, fancy cloth.
+
+CHRISTMAS STORIES--The Chimes, Carol, Cricket on the Hearth, and
+Battle of Life, together with Pictures from Italy, by Dickens, 1 vol
+8vo, paper, price 37-1/2 cents.
+
+COMPLETE COOK, paper, price only 25 cents.
+
+COMPLETE CONFECTIONER, paper, 25 cents.
+
+COMPLETE FLORIST, paper, 25 cents.
+
+COMPLETE GARDENER, paper, 25 cents.
+
+CURIOSITY SHOP, by "Boz," paper or doth.
+
+CAESAR'S COMMENTARIES, 1 vol. 18mo, neat cloth; being vol. I. of
+Schmitz and Zumpf's Classical Series for Schools.
+
+CAMPBELL'S COMPLETE POETICAL WORKS, in 1 vol. crown 8vo, cloth gilt or
+white calf, plates.
+
+COOPER'S NAVAL HISTORY OF THE UNITED STATES, complete in 1 vol. 8vo,
+cloth, with plates and maps.
+
+COOPER'S NOVELS AND TALES, in 23 vols, sheep gilt, 12mo, or 47 vols.
+paper.
+
+COOPER'S SEA TALES, 6 vols. 12mo, cloth.
+
+COOPER'S LEATHER STOCKING TALES, 5 vols. 12mo, cloth.
+
+CARPENTER'S COMPARATIVE ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY, with numerous
+wood-cuts, (preparing).
+
+CARPENTER'S ANIMAL PHYSIOLOGY, with 300 wood-cuts, (preparing).
+
+CROLY'S HISTORY OF THE CHRISTIAN RELIGION, to be complete in 3 vols.,
+(at press).
+
+CLATER ON THE DISEASES OF HORSES, by Skinner, 1 vol. 12mo.
+
+CLATER'S CATTLE AND SHEEP DOCTOR, 1 vol. 12mo, cuts.
+
+CAMPBELL'S FREDERIC THE GREAT, 2 vols. 12mo, extra cloth.
+
+DON QUIXOTE, with numerous illustrations by Johannot; 2 vols., 8vo,
+cloth, or half morocco.
+
+DAVIDSON, MARGARET, Memoirs of and Poems, in 1 vol. 12mo, paper 50
+cents, or extra cloth.
+
+DAVIDSON, LUCRETIA, Poetical Remains, 1 vol. 12mo, paper 50 cents, or
+extra cloth.
+
+DAVIDSON, Mrs., Poetry and Life, in 1 vol. 12mo, paper 50 cents, or
+extra cloth.
+
+DANA ON CORALS, 1 vol. royal 4to, with Atlas of Plates, (at press).
+
+DOMBEY AND SON, by Dickens, 1 vol. 8vo, with 16 plates, price 50
+cents.
+
+ Same work, fine edition, 40 plates, extra cloth.
+
+DOG AND SPORTSMAN, by Skinner, plates, 1 vol. 12mo, cloth.
+
+DUNGLISON ON HUMAN HEALTH, 1 vol. 8vo, cloth or sheep.
+
+ENCYCLOPAEDIA OF GEOGRAPHY, in 3 octavo vols. many cuts and maps,
+various bindings.
+
+ENCYCLOPAEDIA AMERICANA, 14 vols. 8vo, various bindings. Vol. 14,
+bringing the work up to 1846, sold separate.
+
+EAST'S KING'S BENCH REPORTS, edited by G. M. Wharton, 16 vols. in 8,
+large 8vo, law sheep.
+
+EDUCATION OF MOTHERS, 1 vol. 12mo, cloth or paper.
+
+ENDLESS AMUSEMENT, neat 18mo, crimson cloth, with cuts.
+
+FIELDING'S SELECT WORKS, in 1 vol. 8vo, cloth, or 4 parts, paper.
+
+FRANCATELLI'S MODERN FRENCH COOK, in 1 vol. 8vo, with many cuts.
+
+FOWNES' RECENT WORK ON CHEMISTRY, second edition, by Bridges, 1 vol.
+12mo, many cuts, sheep or extra cloth.
+
+GRAHAME'S COLONIAL HISTORY OF THE UNITED STATES, 2 vols. 8vo, a new
+edition.
+
+GRAHAM'S ELEMENTS OF CHEMISTRY, 1 vol. large 8vo, many cuts, (new
+edition, in press).
+
+GIESELER'S ECCLESIASTICAL HISTORY, 3 vols. 8vo.
+
+GRIFFITHS' CHEMISTRY OF THE FOUR SEASONS, 1 vol. 12mo, many cuts.
+
+GRIFFITH'S MEDICAL BOTANY, 1 vol. large 8vo, extra cloth, nearly 400
+cuts.
+
+GROTE'S HISTORY OF GREECE, to form a neat 12mo series.
+
+HAWKER ON SHOOTING, Edited by Porter, with plates and cuts, 1 vol.
+8vo, beautiful extra cloth.
+
+HERSCHELL'S TREATISE ON ASTRONOMY, 1 vol. 12mo, cuts and plates.
+
+HALE'S ETHNOLOGY AND PHILOSOPHY OF THE U. S. EXPLORING EXPEDITION, 1
+vol. royal 4to, extra cloth.
+
+HEMANS' COMPLETE POETICAL WORKS, in 7 vols. 12mo.
+
+HEMANS' MEMOIRS, by her Sister, 1 vol. 12mo.
+
+HOLTHOUSE'S LAW DICTIONARY, by Penington, 1 vol. large 12mo, law
+sheep.
+
+HILLIARD ON REAL ESTATE, new and much Improved Edition, 2 large vols.
+8vo, law sheep.
+
+HILL ON TRUSTEES, by Troubat, 1 large vol. 8vo, law sheep.
+
+INGERSOLL'S HISTORY OF THE LATE WAR, 1 vol. 8vo.
+
+IRVING'S ROCKY MOUNTAINS, 2 vols. 12mo, cloth.
+
+JOHNSON'S DICTIONARY OF GARDENING, by Landreth, 1 vol. large royal
+12mo, 650 pages, many cuts.
+
+KNAPP'S TECHNOLOGY, OR CHEMISTRY APPLIED TO THE ARTS AND TO
+MANUFACTURES. Translated by Ronalds, Edited by Johnson. Vol. I.,
+with numerous illustrations.
+
+KEBLE'S CHRISTIAN YEAR, in 32mo, extra cloth. Illuminated title.
+
+KIRBY AND SPENCE'S ENTOMOLOGY, 1 large 8vo vol. with plates, plain or
+colored.
+
+LOVER'S IRISH STORIES, 1 vol. royal 12mo, with cuts, extra cloth.
+
+ Same work, paper, price 50 cents.
+
+LOVER'S RORY O'MORE, 1 vol. royal 12mo, with cuts, extra cloth.
+
+ Same work, paper, price 50 cents.
+
+ Same work, 8vo, price 25 cents.
+
+LOVER'S SONGS AND BALLADS, 12mo, paper, 25 cents.
+
+LIGHTS, SHADOWS, &c., of Whigs and Tories, 1 vol. 12mo.
+
+LANGUAGE OF FLOWERS, eighth edition, 1 vol. 18mo, colored plates,
+crimson cloth, gilt.
+
+LANDRETH'S RURAL REGISTER, for 1848, royal 12mo, many cuts, price 15
+cents. Copies for 1847 still on sale.
+
+LOVES OF THE POETS, by Mrs. Jamieson, 12mo.
+
+MARSTON, OR THE SOLDIER AND STATESMAN, by Croly, 8vo, sewed, 50 cents.
+
+MACKINTOSH'S DISSERTATION ON ETHICAL PHILOSOPHY, 1 vol. 8vo, cloth.
+
+MOORE'S HISTORY OF IRELAND, in 2 vols. 8vo, cloth. Second volume sold
+separate.
+
+MARTIN CHUZZLEWIT, by "Boz," cloth or paper.
+
+MULLER'S PHYSICS AND METEOROLOGY, 1 vol. large 8vo, 2 colored plates,
+and 550 wood-cuts.
+
+MILLWRIGHT'S AND MILLER'S GUIDE, by Oliver Evans, in 1 vol. 8vo,
+sheep, many plates.
+
+METCALF ON CALORIC, 1 vol. 8vo, (at press).
+
+MILL'S HISTORY OF THE CRUSADES, AND CHIVALRY, in one octavo volume.
+
+MILL'S SPORTSMAN'S LIBRARY, 1 vol. 12mo, extra cloth.
+
+NARRATIVE OF THE UNITED STATES' EXPLORING EXPEDITION, by Captain
+Charles Wilkes, U. S. N., in 6 vols. 4to, $60; or 6 vols. imperial
+8vo, $25, with very Numerous and Beautiful Illustrations, on wood,
+copper, and steel; or 5 vols. 8vo, $10, with over three hundred
+wood-cuts and maps.
+
+NIEBUHR'S HISTORY OF ROME, complete, 2 large vols. 8vo.
+
+NICHOLAS NICKLEBY, by "Boz," cloth or paper.
+
+OLIVER TWIST, by "Boz," cloth or paper.
+
+PICCIOLA,--The Prisoner of Fenestrella, illustrated edition, with
+cuts, royal 12mo, beautiful crimson cloth.
+
+ Same work, fancy paper, price 50 cents.
+
+PHILOSOPHY IN SPORT MADE SCIENCE IN EARNEST, 1 vol. 18mo, neat crimson
+cloth, with cuts.
+
+POPULAR VEGETABLE PHYSIOLOGY, by Carpenter, 1 vol. 12mo, many cuts.
+
+PICKWICK CLUB, by "Boz," cloth or paper.
+
+RUSH'S COURT OF LONDON, 1 vol. 8vo.
+
+RANKE'S HISTORY OF THE POPES OF ROME, 1 vol. 8vo, cloth.
+
+RANKE'S HISTORY OF THE REFORMATION IN GERMANY, to be complete in 1
+vol. 8vo.
+
+RANKE'S HISTORY OF THE OTTOMAN AND SPANISH EMPIRES, 8vo, price 50
+cents.
+
+ROGERS' POEMS, a splendid edition, Illustrated, imperial 8vo.
+
+ROGET'S OUTLINES OF PHYSIOLOGY, 1 vol. 8vo.
+
+ROSCOE'S LIVES OF THE KINGS OF ENGLAND, a 12mo Series to match Miss
+Strickland's Queens.
+
+STRICKLAND'S LIVES OF THE QUEENS OF ENGLAND, 12 vols. 12mo, cloth or
+paper. (This work is now complete.)
+
+ Same work, crown 8vo, extra cloth, two vols. in one; large
+ type, and fine paper, beautiful crimson cloth.
+
+SELECT WORKS OF TOBIAS SMOLLETT, cloth or paper.
+
+SIMPSON'S OVERLAND JOURNEY AROUND THE WORLD, crown 8vo, extra cloth.
+
+ Same work, 2 parts, paper, price $1 50.
+
+SIBORNE'S WATERLOO CAMPAIGN, with maps, 1 vol. large 8vo.
+
+SCHMITZ AND ZUMPT'S CLASSICAL SERIES FOR SCHOOLS, in neat 18mo
+volumes, in cloth.
+
+STABLE TALK AND TABLE TALK, FOR SPORTSMEN, 1 volume, 12mo.
+
+SPENCE ON THE JURISDICTION OF THE COURT OF CHANCERY, vol. I., large
+8vo, law sheep.
+
+ Vol. II., embracing the Practice, (nearly ready).
+
+SMALL BOOKS ON GREAT SUBJECTS; a neat 18mo series, price 25 cents
+each:--
+
+ No. 1. "PHILOSOPHICAL THEORIES AND PHILOSOPHICAL EXPERIENCE."
+
+ No. 2. "ON THE CONNECTION BETWEEN PHYSIOLOGY AND INTELLECTUAL
+ SCIENCE."
+
+ No. 3. "ON MAN'S POWER OVER HIMSELF TO PREVENT OR CONTROL
+ INSANITY."
+
+ No. 4. "AN INTRODUCTION TO PRACTICAL ORGANIC CHEMISTRY."
+
+ No. 5. "A BRIEF VIEW OF GREEK PHILOSOPHY UP TO THE AGE OF
+ PERICLES."
+
+ No. 6. "A BRIEF VIEW OF GREEK PHILOSOPHY FROM THE AGE OF
+ SOCRATES TO THE COMING OF CHRIST."
+
+ No. 7. "CHRISTIAN DOCTRINE AND PRACTICE IN THE SECOND CENTURY."
+
+ No. 8. "AN EXPOSITION OF VULGAR AND COMMON ERRORS, ADAPTED TO
+ THE YEAR OF GRACE 1845."
+
+ No. 9. "AN INTRODUCTION TO VEGETABLE PHYSIOLOGY, WITH
+ REFERENCES TO THE WORKS OF DE CANDOLLE, LINDLEY, &c."
+
+ No. 10. "ON THE PRINCIPLES OF CRIMINAL LAW."
+
+ No. 11. "CHRISTIAN SECTS IN THE NINETEENTH CENTURY."
+
+ No. 12. "PRINCIPLES OF GRAMMAR," &c.
+
+ Or the whole done up in three volumes, extra cloth.
+
+TAYLOR'S MEDICAL JURISPRUDENCE, Edited with respect to American
+Practice, by Griffith, 1 vol. 8vo.
+
+TAYLOR'S TOXICOLOGY, by Griffith, 1 vol. 8vo, (nearly ready).
+
+TRAILL'S OUTLINES OF MEDICAL JURISPRUDENCE, 1 small vol. 8vo, cloth.
+
+TRIMMER'S GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY, 1 vol. 8vo, cloth, many cuts.
+
+THOMSON'S DOMESTIC MANAGEMENT OF THE SICK ROOM, 1 vol. 12mo, extra
+cloth.
+
+TOKEAH, by Sealsfield, price 25 cents.
+
+VIRGILII CARMINA, 1 neat 18mo vol., extra cloth, being vol. II. of
+Schmitz and Zumpt's Classical Series.
+
+WALPOLE'S LETTERS, in 4 large vols. 8vo, extra cloth.
+
+WALPOLE'S NEW LETTERS TO SIR HORACE MANN, 2 vols. 8vo.
+
+WALPOLE'S MEMOIRS OF GEORGE THE THIRD, 2 vols. 8vo.
+
+WHITE'S UNIVERSAL HISTORY, a new and Improved work for Schools,
+Colleges, &c., with Questions by Professor Hart, in 1 vol. large 12mo,
+extra cloth, or half bound.
+
+WEISBACH'S PRINCIPLES OF THE MECHANICS OF MACHINERY AND ENGINEERING,
+vol. I, with five hundred cuts.
+
+WILLIAM THE CONQUEROR, Life of, by Roscoe, 1 vol. 12mo, extra cloth or
+fancy paper.
+
+WHEATON'S INTERNATIONAL LAW, 1 vol. large 8vo, law sheep, or extra
+cloth, third edition, much improved.
+
+WRAXALL'S POSTHUMOUS MEMOIRS, 1 vol. 8vo, extra cloth.
+
+WRAXALL'S HISTORICAL MEMOIRS, 1 vol. 8vo, do. do.
+
+YOUATT ON THE HORSE, &c., by Skinner, 1 vol. 8vo, many cuts.
+
+YOUATT ON THE DOG, with plates, 1 vol. crown 8vo, beautiful crimson
+cloth.
+
+YOUATT ON THE PIG, 1 vol. 12mo, extra cloth, with cuts.
+
+ Same work in paper, price 50 cents.
+
+ Together with numerous works in all departments of Medical
+ Science, Catalogues of which can be had on application.
+
+
+
+
+ * * * * *
+
+THE AMERICAN ENCYCLOPAEDIA.
+
+BROUGHT UP TO 1847.
+
+ THE ENCYCLOPAEDIA AMERICANA:
+
+ A POPULAR DICTIONARY
+ OF ARTS, SCIENCES, LITERATURE, HISTORY, POLITICS, AND BIOGRAPHY,
+
+ IN FOURTEEN LARGE OCTAVO VOLUMES OF OVER SIX HUNDRED DOUBLE
+ COLUMNED PAGES EACH.
+
+ For sale very low, in various styles of binding.
+
+ Some years having elapsed since the original thirteen volumes
+ of the ENCYCLOPAEDIA AMERICANA were published, to bring it up
+ to the present day, with the history of that period, at the
+ request of numerous subscribers, the publishers have just
+ issued a
+
+ SUPPLEMENTARY VOLUME (THE FOURTEENTH),
+ BRINGING THE WORK UP TO THE YEAR 1847.
+
+ EDITED BY HENRY VETHAKE, LL.D.
+
+ Vice-Provost and Professor of Mathematics in the University
+ of Pennsylvania, Author of "A Treatise on Political Economy."
+
+ In one large octavo volume of over 650 double columned pages.
+
+ The numerous subscribers who have been waiting the completion
+ of this volume can now perfect their sets, and all who want
+
+ A REGISTER OF THE EVENTS OF THE LAST FIFTEEN YEARS, FOR THE
+ WHOLE WORLD,
+
+ can obtain this volume separately: price Two Dollars uncut in
+ cloth, or Two Dollars and Fifty cents in leather, to match
+ the styles in which the publishers have been selling sets.
+
+ Subscribers in the large cities can be supplied on
+ application at any of the principal bookstores; and persons
+ residing in the country can have their sets matched by
+ sending a volume in charge of friends visiting the city.
+
+"This volume is worth owning by itself, as a most convenient and
+reliable compend of recent History, Biography, Statistics, &c., &c.
+The entire work forms the cheapest and probably now the most desirable
+Encyclopaedia published for popular use."--_New York Tribune._
+
+"The Conversations Lexicon (Encyclopaedia Americana) has become a
+household book in all the intelligent families in America, and is
+undoubtedly the best depository of biographical, historical,
+geographical, and political information of that kind which
+discriminating readers require."--_Silliman's Journal._
+
+"This volume of the Encyclopaedia is a Westminster Abbey of American
+reputation. What names are on the roll since 1833!"--_N. Y. Literary
+World._
+
+"The work to which this volume forms a supplement, is one of the most
+important contributions that has ever been made to the literature of
+our country. Besides condensing into a comparatively narrow compass,
+the substance of larger works of the same kind which had preceded it,
+it contains a vast amount of information that is not elsewhere to be
+found, and is distinguished, not less for its admirable arrangement,
+than for the variety of subjects of which it treats. The present
+volume, which is edited by one of the most distinguished scholars of
+our country, is worthy to follow in the train of those which have
+preceded it. It is a remarkably felicitous condensation of the more
+recent improvements in science and the arts, besides forming a very
+important addition to the department of Biography, the general
+progress of society, &c., &c."--_Albany Argus._
+
+ * * * * *
+
+CAMPBELL'S LORD CHANCELLORS.
+
+NOW COMPLETE.
+
+ LIVES OF THE LORD CHANCELLORS AND KEEPERS OF THE GREAT SEAL
+ OF ENGLAND.
+
+ FROM THE EARLIEST TIMES TO THE REIGN OF KING GEORGE IV.,
+
+ BY JOHN LORD CAMPBELL, A.M., F.R.S.E.
+
+ Now complete in seven handsome crown octavo volumes.
+
+ _Bringing the work to the death of Lord Eldon, 1838._
+
+"The volumes teem with exciting incidents, abound in portraits,
+sketches, and anecdotes, and are at once interesting and instructive.
+The work is not only historical and biographical, but it is
+anecdotical and philosophical. Many of the chapters embody thrilling
+incidents, while as a whole, the publication may be regarded as of a
+high intellectual order."--_Inquirer._
+
+ * * * * *
+
+MURRAY'S ENCYCLOPAEDIA OF GEOGRAPHY.
+
+ THE ENCYCLOPAEDIA OF GEOGRAPHY,
+
+ COMPRISING
+
+ A COMPLETE DESCRIPTION OF THE EARTH, PHYSICAL, STATISTICAL,
+ CIVIL, AND POLITICAL.
+
+ EXHIBITING
+
+ ITS RELATION TO THE HEAVENLY BODIES, ITS PHYSICAL STRUCTURE,
+ THE NATURAL HISTORY OF EACH COUNTRY, AND THE INDUSTRY,
+ COMMERCE, POLITICAL INSTITUTIONS, AND CIVIL AND SOCIAL STATE
+ OF ALL NATIONS.
+
+ BY HUGH MURRAY, F.R.S.E., &c.
+
+ Assisted in Botany by Professor HOOKER--Zoology, &c., by W.
+ W. SWAINSON--Astronomy &c., by Professor WALLACE--Geology,
+ &c., by Professor JAMESON.
+
+ REVISED, WITH ADDITIONS,
+
+ BY THOMAS G. BRADFORD.
+
+ THE WHOLE BROUGHT UP, BY A SUPPLEMENT, TO 1843.
+
+ _In three large octavo volumes,_
+
+ VARIOUS STYLES OF BINDING.
+
+This great work, furnished at a remarkably cheap rate, contains
+about NINETEEN HUNDRED LARGE IMPERIAL PAGES, and is illustrated by
+EIGHTY-TWO SMALL MAPS, and a colored MAP OF THE UNITED STATES, after
+Tanner's, together with about ELEVEN HUNDRED WOOD-CUTS, executed in
+the best style.
+
+
+
+
+ * * * * *
+
+SCHOOL BOOKS.
+
+
+BIRD'S NATURAL PHILOSOPHY.
+
+NOW READY.
+
+ ELEMENTS OF NATURAL PHILOSOPHY,
+
+ BEING AN EXPERIMENTAL INTRODUCTION TO THE PHYSICAL SCIENCES.
+
+ ILLUSTRATED WITH OVER THREE HUNDRED WOOD-CUTS.
+
+ BY GOLDING BIRD, M.D.,
+
+ Assistant Physician to Guy's Hospital.
+
+ FROM THE THIRD LONDON EDITION.
+
+ In one neat volume.
+
+"By the appearance of Dr. Bird's work, the student has now all that he
+can desire in one neat, concise, and well-digested volume. The
+elements of natural philosophy are explained in very simple language,
+and illustrated by numerous wood-cuts."--_Medical Gazette._
+
+"A volume of useful and beautiful instruction for the
+young."--_Literary Gazette._
+
+"We should like to know that Dr. Bird's book was associated with every
+boys' and girls' school throughout the kingdom."--_Medical Gazette._
+
+"This work marks an advance which has long been wanting in our system
+of instruction. Mr. Bird has succeeded in producing an elementary work
+of great merit."--_Athenaeum._
+
+ * * * * *
+
+HERSCHELL'S ASTRONOMY.
+
+ A TREATISE ON ASTRONOMY,
+ BY SIR JOHN F. W. HERSCHELL, F. R. S., &c.
+
+ WITH NUMEROUS PLATES AND WOOD-CUTS.
+
+ A NEW EDITION, WITH A PREFACE AND A SERIES OF QUESTIONS,
+ BY S. C. WALKER.
+
+ In one volume, 12mo.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+BREWSTER'S OPTICS.
+
+ ELEMENTS OF OPTICS,
+ BY SIR DAVID BREWSTER.
+
+ WITH NOTES AND ADDITIONS, BY A. D. BACHE, LL.D.
+ Superintendent of the Coast Survey, &c.
+
+ In one volume, 12mo., with numerous wood-cuts.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+MULLER'S PHYSICS AND METEOROLOGY.
+
+NOW READY.
+
+ PRINCIPLES OF PHYSICS AND METEOROLOGY,
+
+ BY J. MULLER,
+
+ Professor of Physics at the University of Freiburg.
+
+ ILLUSTRATED WITH NEARLY FIVE HUNDRED AND FIFTY ENGRAVINGS ON
+ WOOD, AND TWO COLORED PLATES.
+
+ In one octavo volume.
+
+ TRANSLATOR'S PREFACE.
+
+ In laying the following pages before the public, it seems
+ necessary to state that the design of them is to render more
+ easily accessible a greater portion of the general principles
+ of Physics and Meteorology than is usually to be obtained,
+ without the sacrifice of a greater amount of time and labour
+ than most persons can afford, or are willing to make. The
+ subjects of which this volume treats are very numerous--more
+ numerous, in fact, than at first sight it would seem possible
+ to embrace in so small a compass. The Author has, however, by
+ a system of the most judicious selection and condensation,
+ been enabled to introduce all the most important facts and
+ theories relating to Statics, Hydrostatics, Dynamics,
+ Hydrodynamics, Pneumatics, the Laws of the Motions of Waves
+ in general, Sound, the Theory of Musical Notes, the Voice and
+ Hearing, Geometrical and Physical Optics, Magnetism,
+ Electricity and Galvanism, in all their subdivisions, Heat
+ and Meteorology, within the space of an ordinary middle-sized
+ volume. Of the manner in which the translator has executed
+ his task, it behoves him to say nothing; he has attempted
+ nothing more than a plain, and nearly literal version of the
+ original. He cannot, however, conclude this brief
+ introductory note without directing the attention of his
+ Readers to the splendid manner in which the Publishers have
+ illustrated this volume.
+
+ _August, 1847._
+
+"The Physics of Muller is a work, superb, complete, unique: the
+greatest want known to English Science could not have been better
+supplied. The work is of surpassing interest. The value of this
+contribution to the scientific records of this country may be duly
+estimated by the fact, that the cost of the original drawings and
+engravings alone has exceeded the sum of 2000L."--_Lancet_, March,
+1847.
+
+"The plan adopted by Muller is simple; it reminds us of the excellent
+and popular treatise published many years since by Dr. Arnott, but it
+takes a much wider range of subjects. Like it, all the necessary
+explanations are given in clear and concise language, without more
+than an occasional reference to mathematics; and the treatise is most
+abundantly illustrated with well-executed wood engravings.
+
+"The author has actually contrived to comprise in about five hundred
+pages, including the space occupied by illustrations, Mechanics, the
+Laws of Motion, Acoustics, Light, Magnetism, Electricity, Galvanism,
+Electro-Magnetism, Heat, and Meteorology.
+
+"Medical practitioners and students, even if they have the means to
+procure, have certainly not the time to study an elaborate treatise in
+every branch of science: and the question therefore is, simply,
+whether they are to remain wholly ignorant of such subjects, or to
+make a profitable use of the labours of those who have the happy art
+of saying or suggesting much in a small space.
+
+"From our examination of this volume, we do not hesitate to recommend
+it to our readers as a useful book on a most interesting branch of
+science. We may remark, that the translation is so well executed, that
+we think the translator is doing himself injustice by concealing his
+name."--_London Medical Gazette_, August, 1847.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+GRAHAM'S CHEMISTRY.
+
+NEARLY READY.
+
+ ELEMENTS OF CHEMISTRY,
+ INCLUDING
+ THE APPLICATIONS OF THE SCIENCE IN THE ARTS.
+
+ BY T. GRAHAM, F. R. S., &c.
+
+ SECOND AMERICAN, FROM THE SECOND LONDON EDITION.
+ EDITED AND REVISED BY ROBERT BRIDGES, M.D.,
+
+ Professor of Chemistry in the Franklin Medical College,
+ Philadelphia.
+
+ In one large octavo volume, with numerous wood-engravings.
+
+This edition will be found enlarged and improved, so as to be fully brought
+up to a level with the science of the day.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+ARNOTT'S PHYSICS.
+
+ ELEMENTS OF PHYSICS; OR, NATURAL PHILOSOPHY,
+ GENERAL AND MEDICAL.
+
+ WRITTEN FOR UNIVERSAL USE, IN PLAIN, OR NON-TECHNICAL
+ LANGUAGE.
+
+ BY NIELL ARNOTT, M.D.
+ A NEW EDITION, BY ISAAC HAYS, M.D.
+
+ Complete in one octavo volume, with nearly two hundred
+ wood-cuts.
+
+This standard work has been long and favourably known as one of the
+best popular expositions of the interesting science it treats of. It
+is extensively used in many of the first seminaries.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+ELEMENTARY CHEMISTRY, THEORETICAL AND PRACTICAL,
+
+ BY GEORGE FOWNES, Ph.D.,
+ Chemical Lecturer in the Middlesex Hospital Medical School,
+ &c., &c.
+
+ WITH NUMEROUS ILLUSTRATIONS.
+
+ EDITED, WITH ADDITIONS,
+ BY ROBERT BRIDGES, M.D.,
+ Professor of General and Pharmaceutical Chemistry in the
+ Philadelphia College of Pharmacy, &c., &c.
+
+ SECOND AMERICAN EDITION.
+
+ In one large duodecimo volume, sheep, or extra cloth, with
+ nearly two hundred wood-cuts.
+
+The character of this work is such as to recommend it to all colleges
+and academies in want of a text-book. It is fully brought up to the
+day, containing all the late views and discoveries that have so
+entirely changed the face of the science, and it is completely
+illustrated with very numerous wood engravings, explanatory of all
+the different processes and forms of apparatus. Though strictly
+scientific, it is written with great clearness and simplicity of
+style, rendering it easy to be comprehended by those who are
+commencing the study.
+
+It may be had well bound in leather, or neatly done up in strong
+cloth. Its low price places it within the reach of all.
+
+ _Extract of a letter from Professor Millington, of William
+ and Mary College, Va._
+
+ "I have perused the book with much pleasure, and find it a
+ most admirable work; and, to my mind, such a one as is just
+ now much needed in schools and colleges. * * * All the books
+ I have met with on chemistry are either too puerile or too
+ erudite, and I confess Dr. Fownes' book seems to be the
+ happiest medium I have seen, and admirably suited to fill up
+ the hiatus."
+
+Though this work has been so recently published, it has already been
+adopted as a text-book by a large number of the higher schools and
+colleges throughout the country, and many of the Medical Institutions.
+As a work for the upper classes in academies and the junior students
+of colleges, there has been but one opinion expressed concerning it,
+and it may now be considered as THE TEXT-BOOK for the Chemical
+Student.
+
+
+
+
+ * * * * *
+
+POPULAR SCIENCE.
+
+
+KIRBY AND SPENCE'S ENTOMOLOGY, FOR POPULAR USE.
+
+ AN INTRODUCTION TO ENTOMOLOGY,
+
+ OR, ELEMENTS OF THE NATURAL HISTORY OF INSECTS; COMPRISING
+ AN ACCOUNT OF NOXIOUS AND USEFUL INSECTS, OF THEIR
+ METAMORPHOSES, FOOD, STRATAGEMS, HABITATIONS, SOCIETIES,
+ MOTIONS, NOISES, HYBERNATION, INSTINCT, &c., &c.
+
+ With Plates, Plain or Colored.
+
+ BY W. KIRBY, M.A., F.R.S., AND W. SPENCE, ESQ., F.R.S.
+
+ FROM THE SIXTH LONDON EDITION, WHICH WAS CORRECTED AND MUCH
+ ENLARGED.
+
+ In one large octavo volume, extra cloth.
+
+"We have been greatly interested in running over the pages of this
+treatise. There is scarcely, in the wide range of natural science, a
+more interesting or instructive study than that of insects, or one
+that is calculated to excite more curiosity or wonder.
+
+"The popular form of letters is adopted by the authors in imparting a
+knowledge of the subject, which renders the work peculiarly fitted for
+our district school libraries, which are open to all ages and
+classes."--_Hunt's Merchants' Magazine._
+
+ * * * * *
+
+JOHNSON AND LANDRETH ON FRUIT, KITCHEN, AND FLOWER GARDENING.
+
+ A DICTIONARY OF MODERN GARDENING,
+
+ BY GEORGE WILLIAM JOHNSON, ESQ.
+ Author of the "Principles of Practical Gardening," "The
+ Gardener's Almanac," &c.
+
+ WITH ONE HUNDRED AND EIGHTY WOOD-CUTS.
+
+ EDITED, WITH NUMEROUS ADDITIONS, BY DAVID LANDRETH, OF
+ PHILADELPHIA.
+
+ In one large royal duodecimo volume, extra cloth, of nearly
+ Six Hundred and Fifty double columned Pages.
+
+This edition has been greatly altered from the original. Many articles
+of little interest to Americans have been curtailed or wholly omitted,
+and much new matter, with numerous illustrations, added, especially
+with respect to the varieties of fruit which experience has shown to
+be peculiarly adapted to our climate. Still, the editor admits that he
+has only followed in the path so admirably marked out by Mr. Johnson,
+to whom the chief merit of the work belongs. It has been an object
+with the editor and publishers to increase its popular character,
+thereby adapting it to the larger class of horticultural readers in
+this country, and they trust it will prove what they have desired it
+to be, an Encyclopaedia of Gardening, if not of Rural Affairs, so
+condensed and at such a price as to be within reach of nearly all whom
+those subjects interest.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+GRAHAME'S COLONIAL HISTORY.
+
+ HISTORY OF THE UNITED STATES.
+
+ FROM THE PLANTATION OF THE BRITISH COLONIES TILL THEIR
+ ASSUMPTION OF INDEPENDENCE.
+
+ SECOND AMERICAN EDITION, ENLARGED AND AMENDED, WITH A MEMOIR
+ BY PRESIDENT QUINCY.
+
+ IN TWO LARGE OCTAVO VOLUMES, EXTRA CLOTH, WITH A PORTRAIT.
+
+This work having assumed the position of a standard history of this
+country, the publishers have been induced to issue an edition in
+smaller size and at a less cost, that its circulation may be
+commensurate with its merits. It is now considered as the most
+impartial and trustworthy history that has yet appeared.
+
+A few copies of the edition in four volumes, on extra fine thick
+paper, price eight dollars, may still be had by gentlemen desirous
+of procuring a beautiful work for their libraries.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+ANSTED'S ANCIENT WORLD.
+
+JUST ISSUED.
+
+ THE ANCIENT WORLD, OR, PICTURESQUE SKETCHES OF CREATION,
+
+ BY D. T. ANSTED, M. A., F.R.S, F.G.S., &c.
+
+ PROFESSOR OF GEOLOGY, IN KING'S COLLEGE, LONDON.
+
+ In one very neat volume, fine extra cloth, with about One
+ Hundred and Fifty Illustrations.
+
+The object of this work is to present to the general reader the chief
+results of Geological investigation in a simple and comprehensive
+manner. The author has avoided all minute details of geological
+formations and particular observations, and has endeavoured as far as
+possible to present striking views of the wonderful results of the
+science, divested of its mere technicalities. The work is printed in a
+handsome manner, with numerous illustrations, and forms a neat volume
+for the centre table.
+
+"As a resume of what is at present known on the subject of fossil
+remains, it is worthy to be a companion to the author's 'Descriptive
+Geology,' a work of which we have spoken in the highest terms. This
+volume is illustrated in the style of all Van Voorst's Natural History
+works, and that is sufficient recommendation. Our extracts will convey
+a notion of the style of the work, which is, like all that Professor
+Ansted has written, clear and pointed.--_Athenaeum._
+
+ * * * * *
+
+CHEMISTRY OF THE FOUR SEASONS,
+
+SPRING, SUMMER, AUTUMN, AND WINTER.
+
+ AN ESSAY, PRINCIPALLY CONCERNING NATURAL PHENOMENA, ADMITTING
+ OF INTERPRETATION BY CHEMICAL SCIENCE, AND ILLUSTRATING
+ PASSAGES OF SCRIPTURE.
+
+ BY THOMAS GRIFFITHS,
+
+ Professor of Chemistry in the Medical College of St.
+ Bartholomew's Hospital, &c.
+
+ In one large royal 12mo. volume, with many Wood-Cuts, extra
+ cloth.
+
+"Chemistry is assuredly one of the most useful and interesting of the
+natural sciences. Chemical changes meet us at every step, and during
+every season, the winds and the rain, the heat and the frosts, each
+have their peculiar and appropriate phenomena. And those who have
+hitherto remained insensible to these changes and unmoved amid such
+remarkable, and often startling results, will lose their apathy upon
+reading the Chemistry of the 'Four Seasons,' and be prepared to enjoy
+the highest intellectual pleasures. Conceived in a happy spirit, and
+written with taste and elegance, the essay of Mr. Griffiths cannot
+fail to receive the admiration of cultivated minds; and those who have
+looked less carefully into nature's beauties, will find themselves led
+on step by step, until they realize a new intellectual being. Such
+works, we believe, exert a happy influence over society, and hence we
+hope that the present one may be extensively read."--_The Western
+Lancet._
+
+ * * * * *
+
+PHILOSOPHY IN SPORT, MADE SCIENCE IN EARNEST;
+
+ BEING AN ATTEMPT TO ILLUSTRATE THE FIRST PRINCIPLES OF
+ NATURAL PHILOSOPHY, BY THE AID OF THE POPULAR TOYS AND SPORTS
+ OF YOUTH.
+
+ FROM THE SIXTH AND GREATLY IMPROVED LONDON EDITION.
+
+ In one very neat royal 18mo. volume, with nearly one hundred
+ illustrations on wood. Fine extra crimson cloth.
+
+"Messrs. Lea & Blanchard have issued, in a beautiful manner, a
+handsome book, called 'Philosophy in Sport, made Science in Earnest.'
+This is an admirable attempt to illustrate the first principles of
+Natural Philosophy, by the aid of the popular toys and sports of
+youth. Useful information is conveyed in an easy, graceful, yet
+dignified manner, and rendered easy to the simplest understanding. The
+book is an admirable one, and must meet with universal favour."--_N.
+Y. Evening Mirror._
+
+ * * * * *
+
+ENDLESS AMUSEMENT.
+
+JUST ISSUED.
+
+ ENDLESS AMUSEMENT,
+
+ A COLLECTION OF
+ NEARLY FOUR HUNDRED ENTERTAINING EXPERIMENTS IN
+ VARIOUS BRANCHES OF SCIENCE,
+
+ INCLUDING
+
+ ACOUSTICS, ARITHMETIC, CHEMISTRY, ELECTRICITY, HYDRAULICS,
+ HYDROSTATICS, MAGNETISM, MECHANICS, OPTICS, WONDERS OF THE
+ AIR PUMP, ALL THE POPULAR TRICKS AND CHANGES OF THE CARDS,
+ &c., &c.
+
+ TO WHICH IS ADDED,
+
+ A COMPLETE SYSTEM OF PYROTECHNY,
+ OR THE ART OF MAKING FIRE-WORKS:
+
+ THE WHOLE SO CLEARLY EXPLAINED AS TO BE WITHIN REACH OF THE
+ MOST LIMITED CAPACITY.
+
+ WITH ILLUSTRATIONS.
+ FROM THE SEVENTH LONDON EDITION.
+
+ In one neat royal 18mo. volume, fine extra crimson cloth.
+
+"It contains everything that can please the grave or the gay. It is
+'endless amusement,' and the publishers might have added, instruction.
+What a help to a dull gathering, or what an able adjunct to a
+children's party! It may be introduced to the scientific or to the
+family circle, and to each it will give instruction and pleasure. It
+is filled with illustrations. We shall give extracts from it
+occasionally."--_Lady's Book._
+
+
+
+
+ * * * * *
+
+SOMERVILLE'S PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY.
+
+ PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY.
+
+ BY MARY SOMERVILLE.
+ AUTHOR OF "CONNECTION OF THE PHYSICAL SCIENCES," ETC.
+
+ _In one neat royal 12mo. volume, extra cloth._
+
+ CONTENTS.--Geology--Form of the Great Continent--Highlands
+ of the Great Continent--Mountain Systems of the Great
+ Continent--Africa--American Continent--Low Lands of South
+ America--Central America--North America--Greenland--Australia--The
+ Ocean--Springs--European Rivers--African Rivers--Asiatic
+ Rivers--River Systems of North America--Rivers of South
+ America--Lakes--The Atmosphere--Vegetation--Vegetation
+ of the Great Continent--Flora of Tropical Asia--African
+ Flora--Australian Flora--American Vegetation--Distribution
+ of Insects--Distribution of Fishes--Distribution of
+ Reptiles--Distribution of Birds--Distribution of
+ Mammalia--Distribution, Conditions and Future Prospects
+ of the Human Race.
+
+While reading this work we could not help thinking how interesting, as
+well as useful, geography as a branch of education might be made in
+our schools. In many of them, however, this is not accomplished. It is
+to be hoped that this defect will be remedied; and that in all our
+educational institutions Geography will soon be taught in the proper
+way. Mrs. Somerville's work may, in this respect, be pointed to as a
+model.--_Tait's Edinburgh Magazine_, September, 1848.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+READINGS FOR THE YOUNG.
+
+ FROM THE WORKS OF SIR WALTER SCOTT.
+
+ _In two very handsome 18mo. volumes, with beautiful plates,
+ done up in crimson extra cloth._
+
+Messrs. Lea & Blanchard deserve the thanks of all the little people in
+the land for these delightful volumes, which are as agreeable to read as
+they are attractive in appearance.--_N. Y. Literary World._
+
+ * * * * *
+
+TALES AND STORIES FROM HISTORY.
+
+ BY AGNES STRICKLAND,
+ AUTHOR OF "LIVES OF THE QUEENS OF ENGLAND," ETC.
+
+ _In one handsome royal 18mo. volume, crimson extra cloth,
+ with illustrations._
+
+In these pretty tales from the legendary and authentic history of
+England and Continental Europe, Miss Strickland has hit a happy mean
+in presenting to the mind of youth, fact in its most fascinating, and
+fiction in its least objectionable garb. It is a little work which
+will be dog's eared, and pored over with absorbing interest by the
+school-boy.--_Balt. Patriot._
+
+ * * * * *
+
+The above works will be found admirable reading books for
+schools.--Lea & Blanchard also publish the following, which are
+suitable to advanced classes.
+
+ A POPULAR TREATISE ON VEGETABLE PHYSIOLOGY. By W. B.
+ Carpenter, M. D. In one royal 12mo. volume, with wood-cuts.
+
+ THE ANCIENT WORLD; OR, PICTURESQUE SKETCHES OF CREATION. By
+ D. T. Ansted, M. A., F. R. S., F. G. S. In one royal 12mo.
+ volume, with 150 wood-cuts.
+
+ THE CHEMISTRY OF THE FOUR SEASONS, SPRING, SUMMER, AUTUMN AND
+ WINTER; an Essay principally concerning Natural Phenomena
+ admitting of interpretation by Chemical Science, and
+ illustrating passages of Scripture. By Thomas Griffiths. In
+ one large royal 12mo. volume, with 60 wood-cuts.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+BOY'S TREASURY OF SPORTS.
+
+THE BOY'S TREASURY OF SPORTS, PASTIMES AND RECREATIONS.
+
+ WITH FOUR HUNDRED ILLUSTRATIONS.
+ BY SAMUEL WILLIAMS.
+
+ IS NOW READY.
+
+ In one very neat volume, bound in extra crimson cloth;
+ handsomely printed and illustrated with engravings in the
+ first style of art, and containing about six hundred and
+ fifty articles. A present for all seasons.
+
+PREFACE.
+
+This Illustrated Manual of "Sports, Pastimes, and Recreations," has
+been prepared with especial regard to the Health, Exercise, and
+Rational Enjoyment of the young readers to whom it is addressed.
+
+Every variety of commendable Recreation will be found in the following
+pages. First, you have the little Toys of the Nursery; the Tops and
+Marbles of the Play-ground; and the Balls of the Play-room, or the
+smooth Lawn.
+
+Then, you have a number of Pastimes that serve to gladden the
+fireside; to light up many faces right joyfully, and make the parlour
+re-echo with mirth.
+
+Next, come the Exercising Sports of the Field, the Green, and the
+Play-ground; followed by the noble and truly English game of Cricket.
+
+Gymnastics are next admitted; then, the delightful recreation of
+Swimming; and the healthful sport of Skating.
+
+Archery, once the pride of England, is then detailed; and very
+properly followed by Instructions in the graceful accomplishment of
+Fencing, and the manly and enlivening exercise of Riding.
+
+Angling, the pastime of childhood, boyhood, manhood, and old age, is
+next described; and by attention to the instructions here laid down,
+the lad with a stick and a string may soon become an expert Angler.
+
+Keeping Animals is a favourite pursuit of boyhood. Accordingly, we
+have described how to rear the Rabbit, the Squirrel, the Dormouse, the
+Guinea Pig, the Pigeon, and the Silkworm. A long chapter is adapted to
+the rearing of Song Birds; the several varieties of which, and their
+respective cages, are next described. And here we may hint, that
+kindness to Animals invariably denotes an excellent disposition: for,
+to pet a little creature one hour, and to treat it harshly the next,
+marks a capricious if not a cruel temper. Humanity is a jewel, which
+every boy should be proud to wear in his breast.
+
+We now approach the more sedate amusements--as Draughts and Chess: two
+of the noblest exercises of the ingenuity of the human mind. Dominoes
+and Bagatelle follow. With a knowledge of these four games, who would
+pass a dull hour in the dreariest day of winter; or who would sit idly
+by the fire?
+
+Amusements in Arithmetic, harmless Legerdemain, or sleight-of-hand,
+and Tricks with Cards, will delight many a family circle, when the
+business of the day is over, and the book is laid aside.
+
+Although the present volume is a book of amusements, Science has not
+been excluded from its pages. And why should it be? when Science is as
+entertaining as a fairy tale. The changes we read of in little
+nursery-books are not more amusing than the changes in Chemistry,
+Optics, Electricity, Magnetism, &c. By understanding these, you may
+almost become a little Magician.
+
+Toy Balloons and Paper Fireworks, (or Fireworks _without_ Fire,) come
+next. Then follow Instructions for Modelling in Card-Board; so that
+you may build for yourself a palace or a carriage, and, in short, make
+for yourself a little paper world.
+
+Puzzles and Paradoxes, Enigmas and Riddles, and Talking with the
+Fingers, next make up plenty of exercise for "Guess," and "Guess
+again." And as you have the "Keys" in your own hand, you may keep your
+friends in suspense, and make yourself as mysterious as the Sphynx.
+
+A chapter of Miscellanies--useful and amusing secrets--winds up the
+volume.
+
+The "Treasury" contains upwards of four hundred Engravings; so that it
+is not only a collection of "secrets worth knowing," but it is a book
+of pictures, as full of prints as a Christmas pudding is of plums.
+
+It may be as well to mention that the "Treasury" holds many new games
+that have never before been printed in a book of this kind. The old
+games have been described afresh. Thus it is, altogether, a new book.
+
+And now we take leave, wishing you many hours, and days, and weeks of
+enjoyment over these pages; and we hope that you may be as happy as
+this book is brimful of amusement.
+
+
+
+
+TRANSCRIBER'S NOTES
+
+
+1. Passages in italics are surrounded by _underscores_.
+
+2. Images have been moved from the middle of a paragraph to the
+closest paragraph break.
+
+3. The words coeli, manoeuvre and manoeuvres uses an "oe" ligature
+in the original.
+
+4. The fractional numbers are represented by a hyphen and a forward
+slash. For example, 3-1/2 represents three and a half.
+
+5. The following misprints have been corrected:
+ "umlimited" corrected to "unlimited" (page 67)
+ "immerged" corrected to "immersed" (page 124)
+ "shil ing" corrected to "shilling" (page 133)
+ "where-ever" corrected to "wherever" (page 148)
+ "sttll" corrected to "still" (page 149)
+ "mattrasses" corrected to "mattresses" (page 156)
+
+6. Other than the corrections listed above, printer's inconsistencies
+in spelling, punctuation, and hyphenation, have been retained.
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Endless Amusement, by Unknown
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK ENDLESS AMUSEMENT ***
+
+***** This file should be named 32492.txt or 32492.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+ http://www.gutenberg.org/3/2/4/9/32492/
+
+Produced by Chris Curnow and the Online Distributed
+Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This file was
+produced from images generously made available by The
+Internet Archive)
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+http://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
+paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works. See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+ the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+ you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is
+ owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+ has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+ Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments
+ must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+ prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+ returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+ sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+ address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+ the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+ you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+ does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+ License. You must require such a user to return or
+ destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+ and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+ Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+ money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+ electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+ of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+ distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at http://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+ Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+ Chief Executive and Director
+ gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit http://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+ http://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
diff --git a/32492.zip b/32492.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bb6ca94
--- /dev/null
+++ b/32492.zip
Binary files differ
diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6312041
--- /dev/null
+++ b/LICENSE.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements,
+metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be
+in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES.
+
+Procedures for determining public domain status are described in
+the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org.
+
+No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in
+jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize
+this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright
+status under the laws that apply to them.
diff --git a/README.md b/README.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6cccb96
--- /dev/null
+++ b/README.md
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for
+eBook #32492 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/32492)
generated by cgit v1.2.3 (git 2.25.1) at 2026-02-14 21:41:52 +0000